Art Book News Annual, volume 4: 2008

ART BOOK NEWS ANNUAL

VOLUME 4: 2008

Book News Inc. 5739 NE Sumner Street Portland, OR 97218

Selections from Reference & Research Book News and SciTech Book News

Art Book News Annual is for artists, architects, designers, photographers, art historians, educators, museum professionals—and librarians in these fields. Like its parent publications, Art Book News Annual presents books from several hundred publishers, arranged by subject, with thoughtfully prepared annotations.

Please note that entries appear as they were originally published in the previous year's two Book News quarterlies; readers need to verify current price & availability by contacting publishers or book vendors. This outline of the Library of Congress subject classification system is a guide to contents. A B C D-F G H J K L M N

NA

General Works (includes museum studies) Philosophy. Religion. Psychology. (includes aesthetics) Archaeology History (by country; includes arts & culture) Geography. Anthropology Social Sciences (includes media & gender studies) Political Science Law Education Music Visual Arts Exhibitions History of art Technique, composition, style Art criticism Portraits Conservation Economics of art Art & the state. Public art Architecture

NB NC ND NE NK NX

Sculpture Drawing. Design. Illustration. Painting Print Media Decorative & applied arts Arts in general (works dealing with two or more fine arts media) P Language & Literature (includes film) Q Science R Medicine S Agriculture T Technology (includes digital design) TH Architectural engineering TR Photography TT Crafts TS Manufactures (metalworking, jewelry, textiles) U-V Military & naval science Z Bibliography

Entries include the following data: Library of Congress classification, LCCN, ISBN, title, author (often "Title main entry" to indicate collective authorship), series, publisher, copyright date, pagination, price, and (pa) for paperback binding (otherwise assume hardbound). Reviews note lack of subject index or bibliography (assume present if not noted). Size is indicated if over 11 inches tall.

Published since 1976 and 1986, SciTech Book News and Reference & Research Book News annotate high-level books for librarians, academics, and professionals in the sciences, social sciences, & humanities. The two quarterlies appear in print, and their contents are licensed to Bowker's Books in Print with Reviews, Baker & Taylor's Title Source, ProQuest, EBSCO, Syndetics Solutions, Powells.com, Thomson/Gale, and BookNews Online. Art Book News Annual is published each year in February. Publisher: Fred Gullette Editors: Jean Brodahl, Jane Erskine, and Shannon Hendrickson

Book News, Inc. 5739 NE Sumner Street Portland, OR 97218 (503) 281-9230 [email protected] Copyright 2008 Book News, Inc.

visit www.booknews.com

MUSEUM STUDIES See also pages 30 & 41 for more on museums, galleries, & exhibitions

Welcome to the fourth issue of Art Book News Annual, a bibliography of scholarly books for artists, architects, designers, photographers, art historians, archaeologists, educators, museum professionals, librarians, and booksellers.

AC1

978-1-84217-235-3

Beyond pilgrim souvenirs and secular badges; essays in honour of Brian Spencer. Title main entry. Ed. by Sarah Blick. Oxbow Books, ©2007 200 p. $80.00 A former Keeper of the Museum of London, Spencer (1928-2003) virtually created the study of medieval pilgrim souvenirs and secular badges. Here colleagues and other scholars influenced by his work present 13 essays on his life and on topics that he either began to address or might have addressed had he lived longer. They include pilgrims’ badge and ampullai possibly from the Chartreuse, prescriptions and surviving amulets from late medieval England, and the iconography of late medieval bicaudal and other felines. No index is provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Here you’ll find listings of 1,207 books (from 365 publishers), arranged by subject, with thoughtfully prepared annotations. Entries appear as they were originally published in the eight 2007 issues of Reference & Research Book News and SciTech Book News. Please don’t rely on the price information you see here. You’ll need to contact publishers or book vendors to learn current price and availability. Some hints for navigating Art Book News Annual:

AM7

2006-102098

978-0-7591-0976-6

In principle, in practice; museums as learning institutions.

Arrangement is by subject, according to the Library of Congress classification system.

Title main entry. Ed. by John H. Falk et al. (Learning innovations) AltaMira Press, ©2007 315 p. $80.00 Falk et al. (Institute for Learning Innovation, Annapolis) bring together 17 essays that describe how museums are learning institutions. The volume is part of the National Science Foundation’s initiative In Principle, In Practice: A Learning Innovation Initiative on Museum Learning. It aims to collect knowledge about learning in museums, examine where it leads in terms of practice and community, and consider what still needs to be learned to face the challenges of the future. Essays cover how people learn in museums, including discussion of families and school groups and the role of exhibitions, and how to engage audiences through customized and personal experiences. The issue of institutional authority, the importance of socially relevant goals, and issues relating to controversial topics are explored, as are how to foster a learning-centered culture, and how to make changes. Contributors are consultants, researchers and scholars, or are associated with museums in the US, UK, and Australia.

You can browse the whole issue, or see the guide on the inside front cover. To go straight to “Art,” begin at page 41. Some titles cross several subject areas. We’ve listed them only once, but our “See also” notes will guide you. Each listing begins with an alpha-numeric Library of Congress subject code, and the listings progress from A to Z. For example, the first listing is AC1; the last entry, on page 126, is Z1033.

AM7

2007-003783

978-0-7591-0970-4

The manual of museum learning. Title main entry. Ed. by Barry Lord. AltaMira Press, ©2007 301 p. $100.00 Savvy curators and museum staff have come to understand that the focus of the museum is not as much what is going on in the cases as who is watching what is going on in the cases. This collection of 12 articles examines the why, who and how of museums, explaining the rationale for interactive learning environments, describing the basics of museumbased learning, maximizing the potential of museum learning, making museums whole-family experiences, and creating bonds with formal learning institutions and the community at large. Articles on how to develop resources for museum learning emphasize the role of museum educators in organizing and budgeting, space and media planning, evaluating, marketing, and sustaining participation. The case studies and examples are inspiring.

Please contact us if you are a bookseller or an editor interested in using our content, or if you are a publisher interested in having books reviewed by Book News. We’d be delighted to hear comments and questions from readers. Call, e-mail, or visit our website. www.booknews.com [email protected] (503) 281-9230

–1–

Art Book News Annual 2008

AM7

2006-000102

0-7546-4560-6

The responsive museum; working with audiences in the twenty-first century. Title main entry. Ed. by Caroline Lang et al. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 276 p. $99.95 Sending patrons through static displays when they have just come in from the world of video games may already be a lost cause. In this collection of articles designed to help administrators and curators think of museums as learning spaces responsive to their audiences, contributors work from experience to describe understanding and developing audiences at the theoretical, policy and practical levels. Topics include influences on museum practice, government policy, the public access debate, prioritizing audience groups, building capacity for sustainable audience development through networks and partnerships, developing web resources, evaluation, funding, applied research, audience advocacy, creating environments for learning, museum professions, and a hint of where museums will go from here. Topics include responses on such issues as developing the inclusive model, digital technologies, and taking collective responsibility for making museums accessible. AM11

2007-004412

978-1-59874-168-1

Creating great visitor experiences; a guide for museums, parks, zoos, gardens & libraries. Weaver, Stephanie. (An experienceology guide) Left Coast Press, ©2007 207 p. $65.00 Weaver has worked in visitor-consulting for the San Diego Zoo and the Chicago Children’s Museum, among other institutions. Here she offers advice on creating visitor experiences for museums, parks, zoos, gardens, and libraries that set them apart from competition and encourage return and good recommendations. In addition to practical advice, the author incorporates case studies and theory, including the four realms of experiences: educational, entertainment, esthetic, and escapist. Readers will find insights on determining what visitors want, motivating staff, and breaking down the visitor experience by components, among other topics. AM121

2006-038334

978-0-7591-0968-1

The manual of strategic planning for museums. Lord, Gail Dexter and Kate Markert. AltaMira Press, ©2007 153 p. $70.00 This guide covers strategic planning for museums, with discussion of why they need strategic plans, the roles and responsibilities of those involved, and an outline of a ten-step process. Further explained are methods for use by the museum board and staff leadership, cultivating strategic thinking, aspects of the strategic planning retreat, writing the plan, implementation, and evaluation. The last chapter focuses on troubleshooting. The book is aimed at management, staff, trustees, volunteers, and donors; government and foundation staff, professional colleagues and service providers, and community and institutional partners; and teachers and students. Case studies are included by contributors from specific museums in the US and Europe. Lord is affiliated with a cultural planning firm and Markert is associated with the Walters Art Museum in Baltimore. AM121

2007-010448

978-1-933253-04-6

Secrets of institutional planning. Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth E. Merritt and Victoria Garvin. Am. Assoc. of Museums, ©2007 118 p. $35.00 (pa) The editors (the director of the Department of Museum Advancement and Excellence and the former assistant director of professional education at the American Association of Museums) present ten pieces that give advice on best practices in institutional planning. In addition to presenting a window into institutional planning at their own institution, they present insider perspectives from the Shady Side Rural Heritage Society, the National Portrait Gallery, Longwood Gardens, and the New York Botanical Garden. They also present papers that discuss funding and finances.

Art Book News Annual 2008

AM122

2006-028807

978-1-933253-07-7

2006 museum financial information. Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth E. Merritt. Am. Assoc. of Museums, ©2006 199 p. $55.00 (pa) This reference presents up-to-date statistics on a wide range of institutional activities, including attendance, operating and non- operating income and expenses, earned income sources, and costs of collections care. New features in this latest edition include financial trend analysis from 2000-2005 and commentary on how to develop a successful financial strategy for a museum. The new worksheet feature allows administrators to compare a museum’s financial performance to the field-wide averages and to gain insight into areas of operation that may need improvement. AM133

2007-010294

00253

Collection conundrums; solving collections management mysteries. Buck, Rebecca A. and Jean Allman Gilmore. Am. Assoc. of Museums, ©2007 150 p. $55.00 (pa) This resource for museum professionals offers clear guidance on solving a number of problems that typically arise in collections planning and management. Some of the “conundrums” addressed include unsolicited doorstep donations, loaned items whose owners cannot be readily located, and restricted gifts. Sample agreements and other reproducible forms are provided in the appendix. Buck and Gilmore are also the authors of The New Museum Registration Methods. AM151

2006-026269

978-1-4051-3076-9

Exhibition experiments. Title main entry. Ed. by Sharon Macdonald and Paul Basu. (New interventions in art history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 254 p. $84.95 Macdonald (social anthropology, U. of Manchester, UK) and Basu (anthropology, U. of Sussex, UK) compile 10 essays by art historians, anthropologists, curators, and artists from Europe and the US, who put forth the idea that contemporary exhibitions do more than disseminate knowledge, but are also experimental practices in “meaning-making” and means of generating knowledge and experience. Some of the essays were based on those presented at a panel entitled “Exhibition Experiments: Technologies and Cultures of Display” at the Anthropology and Science conference of the Association of Social Anthropologists held in Manchester in 2003. Subjects discussed in the essays relate to museums and contemporary museum design, exhibition as film, specific projects in places such as Chicago and Portugal, social documentary, and reflexivity. AS222

2006-012666

978-0-87413-937-2

Between the real and the ideal; the Accademia degli Arcadi and its garden in eighteenth-century Rome. Dixon, Susan M. Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 156 p. $55.00 Although the members of the Accademia degli Arcadi largely supported restraint, elegance and Enlightenment ideals, they were also well aware of their proximity to the court and the papal curia and the tensions those views, particularly the participation of women, would create. Therefore the Arcadians expressed themselves in a less-direct way, in their meeting gardens, as well as more directly in theater. Dixon (art history, U. of Tulsa) describes how Arcadian developments of space and the physical world expressed their views, how their friends and enemies perceived those views as expressed in their garden and landscape, and how the Arcadians came to be regarded as social reformers. As the gardens are currently under renovation this is particularly timely. Distributed by Associated University Presses.

–2–

AS911

PHILOSOPHY

1-57387-251-2

Annual register of grant support; a directory of funding sources; 2007, 40th ed.

B59

Title main entry. Information Today, Inc., ©2006 1402 p. $249.00 The fourth edition of this valuable reference includes details of 3,459 grant support programs of government agencies, public and private foundations, corporations, community trusts, unions, educational and professional associations and special interest organizations. It covers a broad spectrum of interests from academic and scientific research, project development, travel and exchange programs, and publication support to equipment and construction grants, in-service training and competitive awards and prizes. Support programs are divided into 11 major fields, which are subdivided into more specific fields. Four indices—subject, organization and program, geographic, and personnel—facilitate the user’s search. Individual entries include contact information, areas of interest, names and types of programs, eligibility, financial data, and statistics on applicants and awards. The volume begins with an introduction to program planning and proposal writing (complete with a sample budget) and a listing of foundations offering new grant programs in 2007.

2006-004801

Title main entry. Ed. by William Irwin and Jorge J. E. Gracia. Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 297 p. $28.95 (pa) While few philosophers would today admit to sharing Plato’s views of the corrupting influence of poets, one can perhaps hear an echo of Plato’s hostility in philosophy’s neglect of popular culture. Suggesting that this stance is misguided, Irwin (philosophy, King’s College) and Gracia (philosophy, State U. of New York at Buffalo) urge that philosophy engage with popular culture because it may spur greater interest in philosophy and because it can help philosophy stay engaged with the agora (or the mall). The first six of the twelve papers they present address theoretical issues concerning the philosophical study of popular culture, including the use of allusion in art, the basis of audience ties to popular fiction characters, the nature of aesthetic communities, and the transactional value of entertainment. The other six papers use the interpretation of television shows, films, children’s stories, comic books, and pop songs to raise economic, aesthetic, ethical, and political issues. B824

1-55238-172-2

Mind technologies; humanities computing and the Canadian academic community. Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond Siemens and David Moorman. (Media studies) Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 317 p. $44.95 (pa) The “mind technologies” Siemens (humanities computing, U. of Victoria, Canada) and Moorman (a senior policy advisor with the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council, Canada) reference in the title to this collection of 18 papers is a term that refers to the “computer-assisted tools, methodologies, and structures that capture the ways in which those in the arts and humanities carry out the practices associated with their disciplines.” Presented in the belief that the Canadian academic community has made an internationally significant contribution to this realm, the collection contains case studies of innovative projects and activities that have resulted, including contributions to areas of archival representation and communication of results; technologies associated with critical inquiry and analysis; and activities of knowledge transfer, training, education, and support. Distributed in the US by Michigan State U. Press. AZ182

2006-280485

978-0-8020-9037-9

E-crit; digital media, critical theory, and the humanities. O’Gorman, Marcel. U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 141 p. $50.00 O’Gorman (English, U. of Detroit Mercy) explores how the university environment, founded on the logic of print culture, might be transformed to suit a digital culture at a time when digital media is influencing every aspect of our lives. The text examines the philosophy behind the U. of Detroit Mercy’s Electronic Critique (E- Crit) Program—an interdisciplinary program combining English, communications, computer information systems, and art—and how digital media can be incorporated into academic discourse, scholarly practices, pedagogy, and institutional structures at any university. For scholars and practitioners concerned with the practice, and future, of the humanities in higher education. AZ182

2006-022458

978-90-420-2180-8

Interpretation and transformation; explorations in art and the self.

HISTORY OF SCHOLARSHIP & LEARNING, THE HUMANITIES AZ105

978-0-7425-5175-6

Philosophy and the interpretation of popular culture.

978-0-8204-8857-7

The figure of the road; deconstructive studies in humanities disciplines. Morris, Christopher D. Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 276 p. $74.95 Morris (English, Norwich U., Vermont) packs literature, religion, philosophy, visual art and popular culture on this road trip to where artists and writers anticipate the aporia or “pathless place.” Given the aporia is a world understood as wholly figural, he analyzes the path of American literature to that not-so-distant place, the linear tropes leading to it by de Man and Derrida, the implications for theology both within the Christian Acts of the Apostles and the Four Roads of Taoism, the reflexivity of the road film and its influence on the intellect and soul, the myriad paths of popular culture that are in fact only one, whether they be painted as televised baseball, the graphic novel or the video game, the figural road as university in Christo and Jeanne-Claude’s The Gates, and in a nimble conclusion, the ultimate fate of curriculum and ethics.

–3–

Krausz, Michael. (Value inquiry book series; v.187) Editions Rodopi, ©2006 154 p. $46.00 (pa) Krausz (philosophy, Bryn Mawr College) considers the concepts of interpretation and transformation in the visual arts, in connection with the emotions and the self. His discussion includes three features of interpretive activity: reference to something separate from itself, judgments about objects, and elucidation; and he examines works such as Da Vinci’s Last Supper, Van Gogh’s The Potato Eaters, Christo and JeanClaude’s Gates, Rembrandt’s Self-Portraits, and others, in light of these features. Some of the information in chapters has been previously published elsewhere. B831

2006-037592

978-0-8248-3177-6

Chinese modernity and global biopolitics; studies in literature and visual culture. Lu, Sheldon H. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 264 p. $22.00 (pa) Lu (comparative literature, U. of California, Davis) takes an interesting interdisciplinary approach to the study of Chinese modernity, starting from the traditions of the late nineteenth century up to today. As he advances in time he also advances in technology, starting with art and literature and working through photography, film and computer media. He notes that as time progressed male and female bodies and their pleasures became open topics, and the physical self became not only an object of perusal but also more intensely subjective. He duly considers the socialist lifestyle and its influence upon the spirit and sense of literature and the arts, and examines Chinese urban and artistic space in terms of the social and political demands of China’s governance. He also comments upon how globalization and the rising Chinese economy have brought art into commercial and popular culture. B2430

2006-017387

978-0-8166-4516-9

Lacan’s medievalism. Labbie, Erin Felicia. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 264 p. $25.00 (pa) Labbie (English, Bowling Green State U.) argues that French psychoanalyst Jacques Lacan (1901-81) can be considered a medievalist because he cites courtly love poetics as a means of developing and articulating his theory of desire, and because his methodologies follow those established by the medieval scholastic scholars who sought to determine the potential for the human subject to know and to represent real universal categories. B2430

2005-010232

978-0-8204-7862-3

Lyotard, Beckett, Duras, and the postmodern sublime. Slade, Andrew. (Currents in comparative romance languages and literatures; v.146) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 136 p. $58.95 Looking closely at the work of the three writers, Slade (philosophy, U. of Dayton, Ohio) argues that the contemporary thought of the sublime attends to the demands of the historical situation in its ethical, political, and artistic dimensions. The aesthetic of the sublime in art and literature best informs the understanding of 20th-century art in general, he says, and this category becomes the privileged mode in the attempt to bear witness to the truth of the historical situation in the mostly highly developed countries of the world.

Art Book News Annual 2008

B2758

978-0-826-48778-0

BF531

The aesthetic in Kant, a critique. (reprint, 2004) Kirwan, James. (Continuum studies in philosophy) Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 200 p. $39.95 (pa) Kant’s Critique of the Power of Judgment is both seminal in the study of aesthetics and problematic in its assertions about taste and desire. Kirwan (Anglo-American studies, Kobe U.) re-examines Kant’s text to find new solutions, working from recent research on the Critique and its contexts. He finds new relationships between the subjective and the universal in taste, the nature and the dependency of the sublime to the observer, and the issue of the “true” and “false” sublime, and the relationship of free or dependent beauty to what Kant called “fantastic desire.” This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book. B2949

2006-026883

0-8101-2362-2

Hegel and the arts. Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Houlgate. (Topics in historical philosophy) Northwestern U. Press, ©2007 352 p. $29.95 (pa) Hegel’s ideas on aesthetics raised dialogue from the moment of their first publication, and this collection of articles covers a wide range of the topics still under discussion, including the conceptual basis of Hegel’s organization of his aesthetics and the application of that through to architecture, painting, music and tragedy. Not all of the contributors here are disciples of Hegel, so the mix is lively as are the articles, which cover the symbolic and the classical in Romantic art, Hegel’s approach to architecture and the beauty of sculpture, the eccentricity inherent in painting, music, theories of tragedy, the end and the future of art, post-Hegelian reflections on the end of art and nature, abstract art, religion and the modernity of Hegel’s approach to art, the resulting “religion” of art, and the testy relationship between Hegel and the Romantics. B3376

2006-033278

978-0-7391-1562-6

Mysticism and architecture; Wittgenstein and the meanings of the Palais Stonborough. Paden, Roger. (Toposophia) Lexington Books, ©2007 209 p. $26.95 (pa) Paden (philosophy, George Mason U.) was innocently writing about the history of utopianism in political philosophy and urban planning, when he ran across a reference to a house that philosopher Ludwig Wittgenstein (1889-1951) designed and built for his sister in Vienna between 1926 and 1928. Like others before him, he finds connections between the house and his philosophy, but takes a new approach by focusing on the philosopher’s substance rather than his style of writing. He hopes to get back to that utopianism matter now.

PSYCHOLOGY, COGNITION, CREATIVITY, COLOR PERCEPTION BF109

2006-033015

978-0-393-32955-1

How to read Lacan. (reprint, 2006) Zizek, Slavoj. (How to read) W.W. Norton, ©2007 132 p. $11.95 (pa) In this American reprint of Zizek’s (humanities, Birkbeck College) 2006 text, the author examines a selection of extracts from Lacan’s written works, analyzing them in detail to reveal their central ideas. For Lacan, psychoanalysis is a procedure of reading, and each chapter reads a passage from Lacan as a tool to interpret another text from philosophy, art, or popular ideology. BF241

2005-019299

978-0-19-517691-9

In the mind’s eye; Julian Hochberg on the perception of pictures, films, and the world. Hochberg, Julian. Ed. by Mary A. Peterson et al. Oxford U. Press, ©2007 634 p. $75.00 This volume broadens the audience for the seminal work of Hochberg (retired from Columbia U.) in the still not fully-focused field of visual perception. Peterson (U. of Arizona) and fellow cognitive scientists at the U. of New South Wales and the State U. of New York School of Optometry introduce 20 of Hochberg’s previously published papers over the past 50 years and commentaries on them. With his ingenious experiments and simplicity principle serving as springboards, discussion focuses on perception as a constructive process: e.g., the role of schematic (mental structure) maps, perceptual organization, and the nature of movies in the mind’s eye.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-032704

978-0-307-33788-7

Emotional wellness; transforming fear, anger, and jealousy into creative energy. Title main entry. Ed. by Osho. Harmony Books, ©2007 293 p. $22.00 Osho (1931-90), the well known teacher of self-directed individual spirituality, explains the nature of emotions, how to reclaim inner harmony, and watchfulness as the key to transformation. Suggested meditations and exercises are included. The material has been compiled from various discourses to live audiences. There is no index. BF1591

1-905125-08-9

Through a glass darkly; magic, dreams & prophecy in ancient Egypt. Title main entry. Ed. by Kasia Szpakowska. Classical Press of Wales, ©2006 274 p. $90.00 Egyptologists gathered in September 2003 at Baskerville Hall in Wales to share information on current investigations into phenomena related to magic, dreams, and prophecy in Ancient Egypt. Their topics include corn-mummies as amulets of life, Egyptian dream exegesis from a comparative perspective, a black cat from the right and a scarab on your head, and the power of knots and knotting in Ancient Egypt. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

AESTHETICS BH19

2006-034893

978-0-8204-8810-3

Beauty and the abject; interdisciplinary perspectives. Title main entry. Ed. by Leslie Boldt-Irons et al. (Studies on themes and motifs in literature; v.88) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 295 p. $76.95 Attesting to the importance of concepts of the beautiful and the repulsive in life and art, these 18 essays consider the binary opposition beauty/the abject from multiple theoretical perspectives, through a variety of media, and across several temporal frames. The contributors examine the meanings and depictions of beauty and the abject in painting, photography, film, literature, cultural studies, architecture and linguistics, in the images of Renaissance portraiture and James Bond films. The editors are all from Brock University in Ontario, Canada. BH39

978-90-420-2222-5

Aesthetics. Sesemann, Vasily. Ed. by Leonidas Donskis. Trans. by Mykolas Drunga. (On the boundary of two worlds; identity, freedom, and moral imagination in the Baltics; 8) Editions Rodopi, ©2007 279 p. $81.00 (pa) Though written many years earlier, Lithuanian philosopher Sesemann’s (1884-1963) introduction to aesthetics was published only in 1970, in Lithuanian. Donskis offers an introduction that puts it in the context of Lithuanian and Eastern European philosophy, and explains his methods of analysis. Among the topics are the beauty of time, the problem of artistic creativity, a historical survey of aesthetic theories, and the classification of types of art. Only names are indexed. BH39

2007-013079

978-1-4331-0069-7

The aesthetic hermeneutics of Hans-Georg Gadamer and Hans urs von Balthasar. Bourgeois, Jason Paul. (American university studies series; VII, Theology and religion; v.268) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 144 p. $59.95 Gadamer (1900-2002) and Balthasar (1905-1988) are rarely seen together within the field of Roman Catholic theology, but Bourgeois (theology, Quincy U., Illinois) seeks deep structural affinities in the aesthetics and hermeneutics in both, as expressed through shared metaphysical and anthropological assumptions about the dialogical nature of truth and interpretation. There is no index. BH39

2006-937940

978-0-7618-3678-0

Aesthetic life; the past and present of artistic cultures. Redner, Harry. Univ. Press of America, ©2007 496 p. $49.95 (pa) Responding to the imbalance in the arts between the inherited wealth of the past and the impoverishment of the present, Redner explores features of past societies that favored the creation of art and how they are missing today. He covers general aesthetics or art theory, the history of art or artistic cultures, and a critique of judgment or criticism of criticism.

–4–

BH39

2006-028408

978-0-8047-5488-0

BH202

The aesthetic paths of philosophy; presentation in Kant, Heidegger, Lacoue-Labarthe, and Nancy. Ross, Alison. (Cultural memory in the present) Stanford U. Press, ©2007 236 p. $24.95 (pa) Ross (critical theory, Monash U.) finds the paths of these worthies cross to some extent in the a case of aesthetics, particularly in the case of Heidegger, Lacoue-Labarthe, and Nancy on the notion of presentation. She starts by describing those individual and collective paths, their origins and their contexts, then analyzes the formulation of the problem of presentation in Kant’s doctrine of taste, the pragmatic anthropology in Kant’s project of aesthetic representation in the third Critiques, Heidegger’s reading of Kant and historicism of relations of presentation, technology and art as relations of presentation in Heidegger, LacoueBabarthe’s figuring of the political end and Nancy’s touch of the limits of presentation. The result is well-paced, subtle and yet often surprising. BH39

2006-006598

978-0-8047-4424-9

The end of art; readings in a rumor after Hegel. Geulen, Eva. Trans. by James McFarland. Stanford U. Press, ©2006 206 p. $19.95 (pa) Geulen (German, U. of Bonn) examines the notions of Hegel, Nietzsche, Benjamin, Adorno, Heidegger, Holderlin and others on the fate of the arts in modernity and postmodernity, constantly asking why there is a compulsion to say art is at an end. She plays the thoughts of each against each other, seeking out their motivations and collective obligations to declare that all the great work of art may have been done, analyzing the turning points and revelations they found in their own work and that of their predecessors and contemporaries. Particularly interesting is the chapter on Heidegger and myth and the epilogue that comments on what Geulen calls “the mysterious yearning for the chasm.” BH39

2006-043022

0-89503-306-2

Title main entry. Ed. by Colin Martindale et al. (Foundations and frontiers in aesthetics) Baywood Publishing Co., ©2007 247 p. $49.95 The underlying notion is that because aesthetics, art, and creativity are present in all human societies, they must have some biological and evolutionary function. The topics include an evolutionary model of artistic and musical creativity, cognitive poetics and poetry recital, the information approach to human sciences, a neural-network theory of beauty, and whether artistic creativity and affective disorders are connected. The editors are from psychology and arts, so perhaps the individual contributors are as well. 2006-026856

0-8264-8796-3

Virilio, Paul. Trans. by Julie Rose. (Continuum impacts) Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 61 p. $16.95 (pa) This text was first published in France under the title La procédure silence (2000, Editions Galilee). The current publication is a reprint of the English version, with translation and a preface provided by Julie Rose, which was published in 2003 by Continuum. In the text, Virilio (director, École Spéciale d’Architecture, Paris) presents two essays on the development of art and science during the 20th century, which further develop his earlier theory on the “aesthetics of disappearance.” Virilio reevaluates 20th-century theories of modern art and duration, the spoken word and the right to stay silent in an era that is increasingly shaped by the shrill sonority of contemporary art. BH301

2007-416618

978-90-420-2125-9

Neo-avant-garde. Title main entry. Ed. by David Hopkins. (Avant garde critical studies; 20) Editions Rodopi, ©2006 454 p. $132.00 Perhaps through attrition, perhaps through sheer tenacity, the avantgarde of the 1950s, 1960s and 1970s is deemed ripe for a re-reading. Fortunately these 20 articles take an interdisciplinary approach and has the advantage of enough time passing to insert a modicum of distance, although certainly not reverence. Topics include the fine arts, with contributions on Duchamp and Morris and their takes on death and irony, work across art forms, such as neo-dada performance art and concrete poetry as well as film, work at the periphery, such as that in Brazil’s selfstyled position as vanguard of the 1950s, the attempt to produce avantgarde radio, the trouble with gender and the avant-garde, the new political situationalist avant-garde, and theoretical reflections ranging from nature and ecology to the uses of structure and repetition.

RELIGION, MYTHOLOGY, RELIGIOUS ART

Evolutionary and neurocognitive approaches to aesthetics, creativity, and the arts.

BH39

2006-618809

Art and fear. (reprint, 2003)

978-0-7546-5707-1

BL325

978-0-8020-9013-3

Virginity revisited; configurtions of the unpossessed body. Title main entry. Ed. by Bonnie MacLachlan and Judith Fletcher. (Phoenix supplementary; v.44; Studies in gender; v.1) U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 204 p. $55.00 Art historians and other scholars of the humanities from Canada, Britain, and the US explore the concept and representation of virginity from classical times to the work of Margaret Atwood. Their topics include the invention of virginity on Olympus, the chastity of women and the safety of the Roman state, images of the crucified virgin saint in Medieval art, and play and empowerment in Walter of Wimborne’s Marie Carmina.

Reflections on aesthetic judgment and other essays.

BL503

Tilghman, Benjamin. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 176 p. $99.95 Tilghman (Kansas State U.) finds himself to be consistently anti-theoretical but nonetheless Wittgensteinian. To prove it here he keeps firmly in mind Wittgenstein’s remark that ontology is best understood as grammar as he looks behind theories to get a clearer view of essential problems and their solutions. He seeks to emphasize the importance of the representation of the human in art and our human response to art, with the idea that reflection upon life and the importance of art within in is the best way to think seriously about both. Along the way he reflects upon the nature of the literary work of art, aesthetic descriptions and “secondary senses,” the ontology of literature, understanding people and understanding art, aesthetic theory, the importance of nonsense, Le Brun, understanding of culture through its architecture and painting, language and painting, literature and morality, and a conceptual dimension of art history.

The end that does; art, science and millennial accomplishment. Title main entry. Ed. by Cathy Gutierrez and Hillel Schwartz. (Millennialism and society) Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2006 308 p. $26.95 (pa) Generated by the Center for Millennial Studies at Boston U., this last in a set of three volumes examines influential millennialist movements and texts. Gutierrez (religion, Sweet Briar College, Virginia) and Schwartz (cultural historian/visiting scholar, U. of California, San Diego) introduce 19 offerings that include poems and studies of historical and contemporary end-time views. The eclectic topics discussed include Christian apocalyptic fiction, Spiritualism, Y2K, and Seattle’s Space Needle in a doomsday scenario. The glossary defines utopic and dystopic terms. Distributed in North America by David Brown Book Co.

BH85

Religious tourism and pilgrimage festivals management; an international perspective.

2007-007389

978-1-4051-7355-1

Global theories of the arts and aesthetics. Title main entry. Ed. by Susan L. Feagin. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 146 p. $39.95 (pa) Twelve essays make up this collection, which focuses on the theories and practices of arts around the world, with specific attention to those that have been ignored or marginalized by analytics or Anglo-American aesthetics and philosophy of art. It also aims to extend ideas about aesthetics and art. Some of the topics: Chinese visual artists and their use of contemporary forms of Western art, musical traditions in Vietnam, theories of Islamic art, the function of the gamelan in central Java, Japanese architecture, and Balinese aesthetics. Contributors are scholars of philosophy, art, aesthetics, and criticism, and are based around the world. There is no index.

–5–

BL619

2005-015985

2006-032416

1-904768-90-3

978-1-84593-225-1

Title main entry. Ed. by Razaq Raj and Nigel D. Morpeth. CABI Publishing, ©2007 227 p. $110.00 In case studies, researchers in tourism from Europe, China, Australia, and Canada present personal, theoretical, and empirical insights into pilgrimage, religion, and tourism. They explore increasing linkages and interconnections between shared sacred and secular spaces; religious and pilgrimage activity related to ancient, sacred, and emerging tourist destinations; and new forms of pilgrimage, faith systems, and quasi-religious activities. Distributed in the US by Oxford University Press.

Art Book News Annual 2008

BL790

2006-025008

978-1-4051-2054-8

BL1105

978-0-7007-1267-0

A companion to Greek religion.

Encyclopedia of Hinduism.

Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Ogden. (Blackwell companions to the ancient world. Ancient history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 497 p. $149.95 Historians, religious scholars, and archaeologists discuss various aspects of Greek religion during the archaic, classical, and Hellenistic periods, about 776-30 BC. They do not consider myth extensively, another volume in the series being devoted to that, but do encounter it often while examining other topics. Among those topics are the gods and the dead; local religious systems; mysteries and magic; and intersections of Greek religion with literature, philosophy, and art.

Title main entry. Ed. by Denise Cush et al. Routledge, ©2008 1086 p. $225.00 Composed of some 900 entries ranging in length ranging from 150 to 5000 words, this encyclopedia is intended to provide an undergraduate audience with an understanding of the depth of scholarship that encompasses recent debates and discoveries alongside standard material on popular and vernacular dimensions of Hindu religious practice in India and around the world. The editors (all of Bath Spa U., UK) provide a thematic list of entries at the beginning of the volume, the headings of which may give the reader a sense of the encyclopedia’s scope and contents: cast and lifestyles, central concepts, contemporary media, cosmology, deities, diaspora, ethics and contemporary issues, inter-faith and inter-religious dialogue, major movements and figures, modern and contemporary period, myth and mythical characters, philosophy and theology, politics and nationalism, sacred geography, sacred texts and languages, scholars and writers, traditional arts and sciences, women and gender, and worship and practice.

BL795

2006-049930

978-90-04-15242-7

Phrygian rock-cut shrines; structure, function, and cult practice. Berndt-Ersöz, Susanne. (Culture and history of the ancient Near East; v.25) BRILL, ©2006 410 p. $236.00 Berndt-Ersöz explores Phrygian cult and cult practices through a detailed analysis of rock-cut monuments in their preserved context in central Anatolia, and in combination with other Phrygian religious material groups. She draws on already published and recorded material, partly at least to indicate where and how further surveys and excavations should be undertaken to clarify issues she raises. An underlying question is the role of the Phrygians in the formative stage of the Iron Age and subsequent centuries. The study is updated from her 2003 Ph.D. dissertation in classical archaeology and ancient history at the University of Stockholm. BL803

2006-025010

978-1-4051-2943-5

A companion to Roman religion. Title main entry. Ed. by Jörg Rüpke. (Blackwell companions to the ancient world) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 542 p. $174.95 These 31 articles focus on how humans behaved within the political, cultural, social and economic contexts of Roman religion, with contributors covering the importance of what the Romans believed, early religions and their urban cohorts, religion and the integration of policy and the empire, and a host of media (the epic tradition, coins, reliefs, inscriptions, home religion), symbols and practices (sites, games, processionals, prayers, hymns, music, dance, sacrifice), and related religious identities (Roman diaspora Judaism, religious individualism and intellectual choices, institutional religious options such as Mithrasism and “Romanness”). The collection closes with observations from the outside, including exported Roman religion, the Roman East and Roman religion under the purview of Tertullian. BL910

978-1-85285-533-8

BL1214

2006-017086

978-0-7391-2510-6

Bhakti and philosophy. (reprint, 2006) Singh, R. Raj. Lexington Books, ©2007 113 p. $24.95 (pa) Singh (philosophy, Brock U.) locates bhakti within a variety of faith and thought systems of India, including Vedanta and Buddhism, with special emphasis on such texts as the Vedas, the Upanishads, the Bhagavadgita, the Bhakti Sutras and the Buddhist Sutras, focusing on the relation of bhakti as expressed in them with secular philosophy. He covers bhakti as a perennial concept within faith and secular philosophy, its role in early Buddhist thought, its relation to philosophy in the Bhagavadgita, its relation to love in the Narada Bhakti Sutra and in the philosophies of art. This is a paperback reprint of the original 2006 edition. BL1243

978-90-04-15843-6

Temple consecration rituals in ancient India. Slaczka, Anna A. (Brill’s indological library; v.26) BRILL, ©2007 412 p. $134.00 Revising her 2006 doctoral dissertation for Leiden University, the Netherlands, Slaczka examines three important construction ritual of the Hindu tradition: laying the first stones, placing the consecrated deposit, and placing the crowning bricks. She draws heavily on the rich accounts in many Sanskrit texts on architecture and religion that date from the seventh to the sixteenth centuries. Chief among them is the Kasyapasilpa, a South Indian treatise on art and architecture and ritual written about the 11th-12th centuries. BL2080

978-0-295-98718-7

For gods, ghosts and ancestors; the Chinese tradition of paper offerings.

The Druids. Hutton, Ronald. Hambledon & London Press, ©2007 240 p. $29.95 In contrast to the usual academic approach treating Druids only in the context of ancient history, Hutton (history, U. of Bristol, England) analyzes how this mysterious pagan group associated with Stonehenge was viewed in eras from the Roman to the present. In an account intended to be accessible to nonspecialists, he traces the motives behind several countries’ appropriation of Druid ancestry. The only thing remotely “racy” about the book, as the publisher promotes it, is a movie still from The Viking Queen. Distributed in North America by Palgrave Macmillan.

Scott, Janet Lee. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 311 p. $30.00 Scott (East Asian research, Harvard U.) has been conducting field research on the venerable tradition of ritual paper offerings for many years in Hong Kong. Noting that the 1997 transition to mainland control has actually strengthened appreciation of traditional Chinese culture, she examines offerings’ mediating role in worship and identity, their diverse forms, construction, and the relationship between shopkeeper and customer. The book includes color photographs and a glossary of Chinese characters.

BL1105

BM488

2006-044419

978-0-8160-5458-9

Encyclopedia of Hinduism. Jones, Constance A. and James D. Ryan. (Encyclopedia of world religions) Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 552 p. $75.00 This 600-entry reference covers the major tenets, practices and people of the Hindu religion, back into prehistory. Along with such fundamental elements as meditation, gods and goddesses, worship, funeral rites and texts such as the Bhagavad Gita, this covers more complex theological issues such as the development of Jainism and Sikhism and the social and political impact of the caste system. Jones and Ryan, both of the California Institute of Integral Studies, include everything from biographies of theologians and Hindu poets to descriptions of rituals and festivals, historical events, and relations between Hinduism and other faiths. This is accessible to the curious amongst high school students, undergraduate and graduate students, and general readers.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-049242

978-90-04-14030-1

Le Rouleau de cuivre de la grotte 3 de Qumran (3Q15); expertise—restauration—epigraphie; 2v. Brizemeure, Daniel et al. Ed. by Jean-Michel Poffet et al. (Studies on the Texts of the Desert of Judah; 55) BRILL, ©2006 652 p. $254.00 The Copper Scroll found in two pieces in the caves at Qumran in 1952 was chopped into 23 pieces shortly afterwards to facilitate its reading. In addition to this disgrace, the copper began to degrade. The conservation of the pieces, their documentation, and transformation into facsimile is documented in these two volumes. Publication in a lavish full-scale format (11.25x14.75″) allows for color reproductions of each piece after conservation, as well as a wealth of other images, including full-scale plates of X-rays taken before and drawings made after their conservation. Detailed scholarly material is included related to the Scroll, its study, contents, and conservation. A translation of the Scroll into French and English, with the original Hebrew is also included. Other than the translation of the Scroll text and an English version of the introduction, the volumes are in French.

–6–

BM729

2006-038220

978-0-8047-5321-0

BS191

2004-115579

0-8146-9050-5

The shape of revelation, aesthetics and modern Jewish thought.

Illuminating the word; the making of the Saint John’s Bible.

Braiterman, Zachary. (Stanford studies in Jewish history and culture) Stanford U. Press, ©2007 300 p. $55.00 Braiterman (religion, Syracuse U.) explores the figure of revelation as an overlap between aesthetics-art and religion, by setting the Jewish philosophy of Martin Buber and Franz Rosenzweig against its immediate visual environment in early German modernism, especially German expressionism, as seen in Kandinsky, Klee, and Franz Marc. The relationship, he explains, is not based on common theological or aesthetic contents, but on intersecting discourses of form-creation, sheer presence, lyric pathos, rhythmic repetition, open spatial dynamism, and erotic pulse. Some of the material has been published separately.

Calderhead, Christopher. The Liturgical Press, ©2005 216 p. $39.95 Calderhead, a contributor & scholar, provides a detailed description of the background, decision-making, and production of the St. John’s Bible— a monumental project using ancient calligraphic techniques to create a complete contemporary Bible rendered into English from the New Revised Standard Version. It’s almost surely the greatest mss. since Gutenberg. Fine photos show artists and monks at work, scribing with egg yoke, gold, silver & pigments as well as such details as sharpening a quill. The calligraphy was done on vellum in a lively edged-pen hand faintly related to italic. A reduced facsimile 9.75x15″ is being prepared as the original parts are finished; two volumes are now available at under $70 each (their titles begin with The Saint John’s Bible.... St. John’s in Collegeville, Minnesota is a modern university founded by Benedictine monks and is the home also of the Hill Monastic Manuscript Library.

BP163

2006-031060

0-275-98732-9

Voices of Islam; 5v. Title main entry. Ed. by Vincent J. Cornell. (Praeger perspectives) Praeger, ©2007 1249 p. $450.00 Insisting that a monolithic view of Islam is both wrong and dangerous and also believing that the full lived experience of being Muslim can only adequately be described by those who can bear witness to their own traditions from within, Cornell (Middle East and Islamic studies, Emory U., US), Henry-Blakemore (co-founder and trustee, Islamic Texts Society of Cambridge, UK), and Safi (Islamic studies, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, US) present a five-volume work that is intended to provide nonMuslim general audiences at the senior high school and university undergraduate levels with as wide a depiction of Islamic doctrines, practices, and worldviews as possible. Some 50 articles by scholars that are also practicing Muslims representing a diverse range of places, traditions, cultures, and beliefs are presented in volumes that individually address the grand traditions and beliefs of the religion; the spiritual experience of Islam; everyday experiences of family, home, and society; Islamic cultures’ art, aesthetics, and science; and Muslim progressives, modernists, and other reformers. BQ128

978-0-415-31414-5

Encyclopedia of Buddhism. Title main entry. Ed. by Damien Keown and Charles S. Prebish. Routledge, ©2007 923 p. $225.00 Buddhism is such a broad field that before now, no single-volume reference aimed for comprehensiveness. This thoughtfully prepared work fills that gap, addressing in scholarly, yet accessible fashion, Buddhism’s history, traditions and schools, significant people, canons and text, concepts and ideas, rituals and customs, sacred places, and diaspora. Of the 340 alphabetically arranged, signed entries, some, on major topics, run as long as 5,000 words; a smaller portion are about 500 words, and most are somewhere in between. Entries are cross-referenced and an initial list of entries by major topic will help readers navigate. Editors Keown (Goldsmiths College, U. of London) and Prebish (Pennsylvania State U.) have coordinated the efforts and contributions of 23 scholars in various fields of Buddhist studies. No entry-specific references are supplied, but the general bibliography is arranged topically. A chronology, a pronunciation guide, and a guide to Buddhist scriptures are provided. BR115

978-2-503-52295-1

BS191

2004025099

0-8146-9051-3

The Saint John’s Bible; v.2: Gospels and Acts. Bible. English. New Revised Standard. Handwritten and illuminated by Donald Jackson. (series: title) The Liturgical Press, ©2005 158 p. $64.95 This is one of seven volumes representing a monumental project using ancient calligraphic techniques to create a complete contemporary Bible rendered into English from the New Revised Standard Version. Almost surely the greatest mss. since Gutenberg. Artists scribed with egg yoke, gold, silver & pigments. The calligraphy was done on vellum in a lively edged-pen hand faintly related to italic. This reduced facsimile, 9.75x15″ is being prepared as the original parts are finished; two volumes are now available. Printed on paper that hints at vellum, the work is a fine example of bookmaking—a craft that is too rarely manifest today. Aside from its obvious interest for religious collections, the work will embellish any graphic arts collection. St. John’s in Collegeville, Minnesota is a modern university, founded by Benedictine monks, and is the home also of the Hill Monastic Manuscript Library. BS191

2004025099

978-0-8146-9052-9

The Saint John’s Bible; v.1: Pentateuch. Bible. English. New Revised Standard. Handwritten and illuminated by Donald Jackson. (series: title) The Liturgical Press, ©2006 158 p. $69.95 This is one of seven volumes representing a monumental project using ancient calligraphic techniques to create a complete contemporary Bible rendered into English from the New Revised Standard Version. Almost surely the greatest mss. since Gutenberg. Artists scribed with egg yoke, gold, silver & pigments. The calligraphy was done on vellum in a lively edged-pen hand faintly related to italic. This reduced facsimile, 9.75x15″ is being prepared as the original parts are finished; two volumes are now available. Printed on paper that hints at vellum, the work is a fine example of bookmaking—a craft that is too rarely manifest today. Aside from its obvious interest for religious collections, the work will embellish any graphic arts collection. St. John’s in Collegeville, Minnesota is a modern university, founded by Benedictine monks, and is the home also of the Hill Monastic Manuscript Library.

Creations; medieval rituals, the arts, and the concept of creation.

BS440

Title main entry. Ed. by Sven Rune Havsteen et al. (Ritus et artes; v.2) Brepols Publishers, ©2007 269 p. $81.00 To trace part of the transformation of the concept of creation from biblical to modern times, scholars of music, literature, the visual arts, and theology focus on medieval liturgical practice, artistic production in the modern era, and the interconnections between the two. Their topics include creation and recreation in Irish bardic poetry, the new manner of composing in the years around 1800, and vignettes of Kabbalistic and deconstructive thought. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

Lang, J. Stephen. Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 426 p. $19.99 Having written about biblical themes in some of his many previous books, Florida-based author Lang here explains the people, places, events, and phrases of the Bible that find their way into popular culture. He presents them alphabetically within sections of people, places, and things; and words and phrases. There is no index or cross-referencing.

2006-034946

978-1-58297-460-6

Everyday biblical literacy; the essential guide to biblical allusions in art, literature, and life.

BS445

2006-020112

978-0-934686-03-7

In the beginning; bibles before the year 1000.

We're always delighted to hear from our readers. Contact us at (503) 2819230 or [email protected].

Title main entry. Ed. by Michelle P. Brown. Smithsonian Books, ©2006 360 p. $40.00 (pa) This oversized catalog (10.5x9.5″) was published to accompany an exhibition held at the Freer Gallery of Art and the Arthur M. Sackler Gallery in Washington DC in collaboration with the Bodleian Library, U. of Oxford, the UK. It presents essays by scholars of medieval manuscripts on the making of early bibles, their transformation as they traveled from the east to west, the bible as a type of icon, and the history of early Christianity in the eastern Mediterranean. These themes are continued in the presentation of the plates and entries of the exhibition itself.

–7–

Art Book News Annual 2008

BS538

2005-034703

978-1-4051-0136-3

BX2333

2006-016886

978-1-57003-630-9

The Blackwell companion to the Bible and culture.

Saints and their cults in the Atlantic world.

Title main entry. Ed. by John F. A. Sawyer. (Blackwell companions to religion) Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 555 p. $149.95 Offering readers a one-volume reference source about 21st- century approaches to the Bible, this volume explores the ways the Bible has affected all the major social contexts where it has been influential: ancient, medieval and modern. The 30 articles are written by distinguished specialists and are organized into sections on revealing the past, the nomadic text, the Bible and the senses, and reading in practice. The articles emphasize the multi- faceted nature of the Bible and its impact on the world and help to bridge the gap between specialist biblical studies and other disciplines, such as literature, art, music, history, theology, politics and psychology.

Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret Cormack. (The Carolina lowcountry and the Atlantic world) U. of South Carolina Press, ©2007 280 p. $49.95 Historians and scholars of religion from the US and Europe explore changing images of specific saints and the societies that created those images to suit varying psychic and social needs; and the nature of the relationship between holy persons, holy objects, and holy places. Among their topics are St. Benedict the Moor from Sicily to the New World, the search for an American Marian cult in New Orleans, and the influence of pilgrimage on artistic traditions in Medieval Ireland.

BX290

Title main entry. Ed. by Alison I. Beach. (Medieval church studies; 13) Brepols Publishers, ©2007 347 p. $81.00 Derived from papers delivered during a 2002 conference held at the monastery of Admont in Steiermark, Austria, this volume presents ten scholarly papers on manuscripts, monks, nuns, and theology during a period of great change and rich philosophical thought. Among the paper topics are an overview by senior scholar Rodney Thomson (emeritus, history and classics, U. of Tasmania), the function of the illustrations in Admont manuscripts, scholasticism at Admont, and the reception of Bernard of Clairvaux’s writings on the Song of Songs in 12th-century Austria. Three essays are devoted to aspects of women’s art and writing at Admont. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

2006-287476

978-0-521-81113-2

Eastern Christianity. Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Angold. (The Cambridge history of Christianity; v.5) Cambridge U. Pr., ©2006 722 p. $180.00 The 24 chapters of this work present thoughtful discussion of the history, culture, and theology of the Byzantine, Russian, Armenian, Ethiopian, Coptic, and Syrian Christian churches, among others. Rather than following a strictly chronological framework, the articles are thematic, with treatment of such topics as art, liturgy, contact with the West, specific theological movements, and issues associated with being a minority religion. The final three articles are on contemporary issues, addressing the impact on Russian Orthodox religion of emigration, communism’s impact, and modern spirituality in the Orthodox church. With articles by noted scholars on issues, trends, and the history of the various lines of Eastern Christianity from earliest times through the present, this will be a useful reference to a wide range of readers, from the interested public and students to the scholar. Angold is emeritus, Byzantine history, U. of Edinburgh, Scotland. BX880

2006-019316

978-1-4051-1224-6

The Blackwell companion to Catholicism. Title main entry. Ed. by James J. Buckley et al. (Blackwell companions to religion) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 523 p. $149.95 Why do some theologians relate Romantic understanding of religion to subjectivity or even cultural relativism? How was the Black Death perhaps offset by technological innovations that led to considerations of faith? Do not expect pat answers in this collection of 33 articles; each contains its own surprises and alternate insights. Contributors cover history, cultures, doctrines and practices in such topics as the worlds of the Old and New Testaments, the early Church, the middle ages, the Reformation, modernity and post-modernity, cultures from the Holy Land to India, Africa, Europe, Great Britain and Ireland, Latin America, North America, Asia and Oceania, the practice of Catholic theology and the development of doctrine, God, creation and anthropology, Jesus Christ, Mary, the concept of “church,” the liturgy and sacraments, moral theology, the end times, spirituality, institutions, the Holy See, ecumenism, inter-religious dialog, art and literature, science and technology, and justice and peace. BX1973

978-0-85989-566-8

The art of the book; its place in medieval worship. (reprint, 1998) Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret M. Manion and Barnard J. Muir. University of Exeter Press, ©2006 337 p. $110.00 Scholars based in Melbourne whose research focuses on medieval books designed for use in public or private Christian worship, examine specific French, Italian, and Netherlandish books from the 14th to the early 16th centuries. Most of the contributors are art historians, so illustrations and decoration receive considerable attention. Eight color plates are included, along with many black-and-white reproductions. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

BX2640

978-2-503-51528-1

Manuscripts and monastic culture; reform and renewal in twelfth-century Germany.

BX4656

2007-003842

978-0-8109-9402-7

Patron saints; a feast of holy cards. Calamari, Barbara and Sandra Di Pasqua. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 159 p. $24.95 This collection of holy cards, which Roman Catholics use to inspire prayer (or even just to collect and trade) includes beauties from the Victorian age along with more modern renditions. Here we find patron saints for both brides and abandoned people, grandfathers, amputees, Algerians and Italians, those with AIDS and those who care for them, the blind, the lame, and those with cows. The photography is superb and the captions are sincere, giving Catholics and non-Catholics alike a comfortable idea that perhaps they will not face strife, skating or working as an obstetrician alone. BX4700

2007-013001

978-0-87580-375-3

Imperial saint; the cult of St. Catherine and the dawn of female rule in Russia. Marker, Gary. Northern Illinois U. Press, ©2007 307 p. $42.00 Drawing on the scholarship of gender and politics in late medieval/ early modern Europe and archival evidence, Marker (history, State U. of New York at Stony Brook) argues that the stage was set for Catherine I becoming Russia’s first officially crowned female ruler by veneration of the “masculine” qualities of St. Catherine. In making this overlooked connection, he discusses why this particular saint became linked to the legitimacy of female rule in Russia, and profiles previous female rulers and Catherine II (the Great). Illustrations include Orthodox iconic images of St. Catherine and scenes from the life of Catherine I. BX4700

2006-049192

978-90-04-15503-9

Parables; Bernard of Clairvaux’s mapping of spiritual topography. Brunn, Mette B. (Brill’s studies in intellectual history; v.148) BRILL, ©2007 344 p. $129.00 Though he traveled much, Cistercian monk Bernard (1090-1153) never visited the Holy Land, so he was free to envision Jerusalem as he thought fit. Bruun (Centre for the Study of the Cultural Heritage of Medieval Rituals, U. of Copenhagen) explains how his topography of the city was composed of a range of theologico-literary topoi and included such features as the Garden of Eden, Babylon, and the wilderness.

–8–

HISTORY, ARCHAEOLOGY, ARCHIVES

CB430

The history section begins with CIVILIZATION sorted by period, then proceeds to auxiliary fields (e.g. ARCHIVES, NUMISMATICS, BIOGRAPHY), then to GENERAL HISTORY, and to individual countries. ARCHAEOLOGY is interspersed.

Title main entry. Ed. by Alan McKee. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 231 p. $59.95 Scholars and other pop culture analysts explore such consumer icons as superheroes in comics, shoes, crime fiction, “post-gay” websites, and a villain in the Xena: Warrior Princess TV show that they highly rate. The most unusual of the 13 essays treats why a 1943 propaganda film about a massacred village can be considered beautiful. McKee (creative industries, Queensland U. of Technology) situates these attractions in the context of critical debates over high vs. mass culture aesthetics. The few b&w photos include self-styled pop princess Kylie Minogue, and the beautifully styled Ducati 916 motorbike.

CIVILIZATION CB245

2006-036398

978-0-393-06116-1

Cultural amnesia; necessary memories from history and the arts.

CB430

James, Clive. W.W. Norton, ©2007 876 p. $35.00 On one hand, this work by British cultural and literary critic James can be seen as a simply an encyclopedic survey of figures important to the philosophy, history, politics, and arts of the 20th century (together with a small handful of non-20th century figures, such as the Roman historian Tacitus). It offers 116 separate profiles in which James offers his thoughts on such disparate individuals as Louis Armstrong, Jorge Luis Borges, Albert Camus, Dick Cavett, Charlie Chaplin, Miles Davis, Alfred Einsteni, W. C. Fields, Gustave Flaubert, Sigmund Freud, Edward Gibbon, Terry Gilliam, Adolf Hitler, Norman Mailer, Thomas Mann, Mao Zedong, Octavio Paz, Beatrix Potter, Rainier Maria Rilke, Edward Said, Jean-Paul Sartre, Margaret Thatcher, Leon Trotsky, and Ludwig Wittgenstein. Despite this seeming eclecticism, James has a unitary purpose, which is to defend the values of reason and liberal democracy against “ideologists” and authoritarianism. CB353

2007-001362

978-0-7864-2922-6

Mass market medieval; essays on the Middle Ages in popular culture. Title main entry. Ed. by David W. Marshall. McFarland & Co., ©2007 205 p. $35.00 (pa) Scholars of literature, history, media, archaeology, and other fields survey how modern popular culture devours its medieval heritage. Among their examples are the Vikings in hard rock and heavy metal, idealized images of Wales in the fiction of Edith Pargeter/Ellis Peters, the appropriation of King Arthur and the cultural value of tourist sites, The Blackadder, and autopoietic systems and secondary worlds in Dungeons & Dragons. CB361

2005-037430

2006-001715

978-1-4051-3190-2

Beautiful things in popular culture.

2007-922932

978-1-4129-1013-2

Consumer culture and postmodernism, 2d ed. Featherstone, Mike. (Theory, culture & society) Sage Publications, ©2007 203 p. $125.00 Featherstone (Nottingham Trent U., UK) subjects the concepts of consumer culture and postmodernism to critical analysis. He explores definitions and articulations of consumer culture and considers how much it may represent the arrival of a postmodern world. He also reviews contemporary social theories of consumption and postmodernism and assesses them against the reality of today’s consumer culture.

ARCHAEOLOGY CC70

2006-034639

978-1-4051-1887-3

Dictionary of artifacts. Kipfer, Barbara Ann. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 345 p. $124.95 Concise b&w drawings and some photos are included throughout this superb reference, which contains over 2000 definitions of the terms used to name artifacts in the field of archaeology. Terms were selected that concern the analysis, examination, and identification of artifacts, their care, handling, preservation, decoration, description, production, technology, and specific types. Architectural terminology and specific sites and objects are not included. Definitions are also provided for major time periods. Kipfer is an archaeologist and lexicographer with two other archaeology compendia to her name (Encyclopedic dictionary of archaeology and The archaeologist’s fieldwork companion). CC72

2006-035673

978-1-59874-224-4

Archaeology and women; ancient and modern issues.

0-7546-4102-3

Title main entry. Ed. by R.J.W. Evans and Alexander Marr. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 265 p. $99.95 European and American scholars of history and literature explore how the two emotions were expressed during the early modern period. Their topics include the metaphorical collecting of curiosities in France and Germany, the jocund cabinet and the melancholy museum in 17thcentury English literature, and wonder-working and the culture of automata.

Title main entry. Ed. by Sue Hamilton et al. (Publications of the Institute of Archaeology, University College London) Left Coast Press, ©2007 415 p. $34.95 (pa) The three editors (women from the Institute of Archaeology, University College London) present 17 essays dealing with issues of modern female archaeologists as well as archaeological discourse on women in antiquity. Topics include whether gender archaeology and archaeology of women should both be studied, the women excavators of El-Wad Cave in Palestine, women and the emergence of urban society in Mesopotamia, and what asexual figurines in the Neolithic period in the Aegean represented in comparison to those with a distinguishable gender.

CB361

CC72

Curiosity and wonder from the Renaissance to the Enlightenment.

2007-272591

978-0-8020-9415-5

2005-037148

978-1-55786-657-8

Archaeological semiotics.

The Renaissance in historical thought; five centuries of interpretation. (reprint, 1948) Ferguson, Wallace K. (Renaissance Society of America reprint texts; 16) U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 429 p. $27.50 (pa) The late Canadian historian Ferguson (b. 1902) explores the historical interpretation of The Renaissance from the early humanist tradition in Italy to the debates of the early 20th century between Medievalists and Modernists each claiming the period as part of their legitimate turf. First published in 1948 by Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

–9–

Preucel, Robert W. (Social archaeology) Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 332 p. $74.95 Anthropology is a semiotic enterprise, declares Preucel (anthropology, U. of Pennsylvania), but then so is every other academic discipline that must attend to the linkages between theories, data, and social practices in the pursuit of meaning. Exploring the interpretive aspects of the profession, he looks at contributions by Ferdinand de Saussure and Charles Sanders Peirce, post-structuralism and post-processual archaeology, Brook Farm and the architecture of Utopia, and other topics.

Art Book News Annual 2008

CC72

2007-013539

978-0-7591-1114-1

CC76

978-1-84217-233-9

Identity and subsistence; gender strategies for archaeology.

Who owns objects?; the ethics and politics of collecting cultural artefacts; proceedings.

Title main entry. Ed. by Sarah Milledge Nelson. (Gender and archaeology series) AltaMira Press, ©2007 269 p. $70.00 This collection of articles describes how, according to the physical evidence of the past, the concept of gender has worked alongside race, class, the formation of the self, and the development of individuals and therefore societies. Contributors cover the influence perceptions of gender have on the development of the person, the role of sexuality in archeology, the changing definition of “masculinity” and its influence in archeology, the evidence for nonbinary genders in Native North American societies, gender and human evolution, archeological methods and perspectives that illuminate gender dynamics in hunter-gatherer societies and in early farming societies, and the search for the truth about how women have really fared within pastoralism.

St Cross—All Souls Seminar Series and Workshop (1st: 2004: Oxford, UK) Ed. by Eleanor Robson et al. Oxbow Books, ©2006 134 p. $48.00 (pa) As an informed stroll through any western museum will attest, archeology has become inextricably bound with ethics and considerations of cultural sovereignty. Drawn from a seminar series held from October to December 2004, and motivated in part by the looting of cultural objects in recent military conflicts, these nine essays reflect the long and strong debate amongst archeologists, museums, and the legal antiquities trade. Their contributors describe the case for an open public debate on cultural artifacts, changes in collecting over the past 50 years, accessibility to the public and to scholars, new legal and voluntary codes, views from the antiquities and coin trades, the debate on cultural property, recent UK regulations against illicit trade in cultural objects, and lessons on repatriation learned from the Glasgow experience. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.

CC72

2007-000567

978-0-7591-1081-6

Women in antiquity; theoretical approaches to gender and archaeology.

CC77

Title main entry. Ed. by Sarah Milledge Nelson. (Gender and archaeology series) AltaMira Press, ©2007 311 p. $70.00 In a text derived from Part I of the Handbook of Gender in Archeology (2006) which she edited, Nelson (archeology, U. of Denver) introduces nine feminist perspectives on archeology. Interpreting gender in the past (some cultures recognized more than two) means focusing on interactions and change as well as women. US and UK female contributors’ theoretical critiques, case studies, and suggestions for future research treat central themes in gender roles and identities: e.g., historical texts, household material culture, gendering of landscapes, and mortuary analysis (i.e., inferring a person’s status from grave contents). Responses to male biases in the field include reinterpreting the meaning of objects and women’s roles in ethnographic contexts.

Title main entry. Ed. by Steven N. Archer and Kevin M. Bartoy. Springer, ©2006 235 p. $99.00 Probably a shower, of course, but anthropologists and related scientists look at what else is necessary between digging up artifacts from historical periods and presenting findings to a conference. They do not champion some interpretive methodologies over others, but evaluate and critique methods they use themselves or have seen others use, with a goal of improving their internal consistency or their connection with larger theoretical and methodological contexts. The 12 essays are from a 2004 conference in St. Louis, Missouri.

CC75

2006-017435

2006925172

9780387342184

Between dirt and discussion; methods, methodology, and interpretation in historical archaeology.

CC77

0-7156-3438-0

Rethinking wetland archaeology.

978-0-8165-2517-1

Title main entry. Ed. by James M. Skibo et al. U. of Arizona Press, ©2007 309 p. $55.00 The 11 essays presented here by Skibo (anthropology, Illinois State U.), Graves (anthropology, U. of New Mexico), and Stark (anthropology, U. of Hawai’i at M noa) build upon the foundations of William Longacre’s New Anthropology, which blended the scientific method and anthropology. The contributions are concerned with extending and refining Longacre’s ideas and focus on six major themes: the intellectual history of archaeology and anthropology, the archaeological method, analogical inference, ethnoarchaeology, cultural evolution, and the reconstruction of ancient society.

Van de Noort, Robert and Aidan O’Sullivan. Duckworth, ©2006 167 p. $22.00 (pa) The relevance and practicality of wetland archaeology has come under criticism from many voices in mainstream archaeology, say the authors, both UK-based wetland archaeologists. In this book, they suggest an agenda for redirecting the discipline in order to integrate it into broader geographical, cultural, and theoretical frameworks. They describe important discoveries and figures, illustrate wetlands’ contributions in the study of landscapes, and assess deficient theories including those favoring “dryland” populations while overlooking the possibility of communities that lived and worked in bogs and marshes. Finally, a discussion of politics and practice in wetlands archaeology portray the challenges to establishing the discipline’s credibility and how its practitioners may do so. Distributed by International Publishers Marketing.

CC76

CC79

Archaeological anthropology; perspectives on method and theory.

2005-031879

978-1-4051-1885-9

The archaeologist’s fieldwork companion. Kipfer, Barbara Ann. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 467 p. $74.95 Kipfer, a lexicographer and author, provides a guide to information and materials needed when doing archeological fieldwork, compiled in one volume that can be carried while in the field. Aimed at students, amateurs, and professionals, the book covers classification and typology; sample forms and records; lists and checklists; mapping, drawing, and photographing settings and artifacts; measurements and conversion, including charts and using equipment; and planning and designing projects. Resources are listed in the final chapter, including organizations and journals, ethical guidelines, legislation, and government information. Chapters cover topics in alphabetical order; no index is supplied. CC76

1-931909-16-4

Archaeological fieldwork opportunities bulletin, 27th ed., 2007.

1-931707-96-0

Gürsan-Salzmann, Ayse. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2007 102 p. $29.95 In the early 1930s, the young German archaeologist Erich Schmidt led an archaeological expedition to Persia (Iran) investigating the Bronze Age site of Tepe Hissar, Persepolis, the Sasainan Palace of the 3rd-7th centuries AD, and other sites on behalf of the U. of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology. Schmidt documented the trip by taking thousands of photographs that illustrated both the expeditions travels and their archaeological findings. In this work, GürsmanSalzmann (a research associate at the same museum) has assembled approximately sixty of these photographs and supplemented them with a narrative description of the expedition’s travels and importance. The CD-ROM contains some dozens more images which do not appear in the pages of the text.

Title main entry. Archaeological Inst.of America, ©2007 244 p. $19.95 (pa) For students, volunteer fieldworkers, and archaeological tourists who want to take part in field work, the annual guide lists 224 opportunities from around the world, and ranging in investigation from the early 20th century back to the earliest human prehistory. Besides information about the project itself and how to apply, suggestions are also provided about travel, resources, excavation guidelines, the Institutes’s Code of Ethics and Professional Standards, and local and international archaeological societies in North America and Britain. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-100677

Exploring Iran; the photography of Erich F. Schmidt, 1930-1940. (CD-ROM included)

–10–

Please verify price and availability by contacting publishers or book vendors.

CC79

978-1-84217-222-3

Parts and wholes; fragmentation in prehistoric context. Chapman, John and Bisserka Gaydarska. Oxbow Books, ©2007 233 p. $60.00 (pa) Chapman, Gaydarska (both archeology, Durham U.) and their collaborators integrate archeology, anthropology and material culture to study the premise that many objects in the past were deliberately broken and then re-used thereafter. The authors carefully define their novel ideas, including the notion that fragmentation could be a desired outcome of the user, to how fragments affect categorization and theories of enchainment. They show what can be determined about whole objects given the issue of fragmentation, then describe evidence in Hamangia figurines, failures in re-fitting studies and biographical approaches to artifacts. They also describe the directions of further research and provide a comprehensive bibliography, very informative illustrations and a set of color plates. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. CC97

2006-927791

978-0-387-35260-2

Digging it up down under; a practical guide to doing archaeology in Australia. Smith, Claire and Heather Burke. (World Archaeological Congress cultural heritage manual series) Springer, ©2007 325 p. $149.00 The series that begins here will provide graduate and undergraduate students and neophyte professionals with hands-on manuals for conducting archaeological work in various parts of the world. Smith and Burke (both: archaeology, Flinders U., Adelaide) do not find it necessary to point out that the oldest layers are not on top down there, in case there might have been any confusion. They do identify the legal and non-legal essentials for working in Australia; the range and types of archaeological employment available; and key sources of information about research repositories, funding sources, and government and other specialist agencies. CC100

2006-103177

978-1-85109-186-1

Milestones in archaeology; a chronological encyclopedia. Murray, Tim. ABC-CLIO, ©2007 639 p. $95.00 In this extension of his five-volume Encyclopedia of Archeology (1999-2001, ABC-CLIO), Murray (archeology, La Trobe U., Melbourne, Australia) introduces a new approach to the upsurge in the historiography of archeology and the field’s relationships with contemporary anthropology and history. Representing “a middle ground between a straightforward work of reference...and an extended narrative of the history of archeology,” this work seeks to communicate with both specialists and nonspecialists. Interpretive entries surveying the field follow a chronology of archaeological milestones before 1800 and by century since then. Cross-referenced entries include further reading, several maps and b&w illustrations. CC101

2007-000748

978-1-84553-268-0

Crossing Jordan; North American contributions to the archaeology of Jordan. Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas E. Levy et al. Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2007 495 p. $45.00 (pa) Established in 1968, the American Center of Oriental Research has worked together with the Department of Antiquities of Jordan to support North American archaeologists working in Jordan. Together with the American Schools of Oriental Research, it organized the Tenth International Conference on the History and Archaeology of Jordan, which aimed to highlight the contributions of North American scholars to the archaeology of Jordan. Editors Levy (anthropology and Judaic studies, U. of California at San Diego, US), Daviau (Near Eastern archaeology, Wilfrid Laurier U., Canada), Younker (Old Testament and biblical archaeology, Andrews University, US) and Shaer (Department of Antiquities of Jordan) present 54 papers from the conference. Following discussions placing Jordan within the wider theoretical developments of the field and providing an overview of the history of North American archaeological research in Jordan, seven papers discuss methodological contributions, including the use of geographic information systems, high precision radiocarbon dating, geoarchaeology, paleoecology, and conservation and preservation initiatives. These are followed by nine deep-time studies together with presentation of research on the prehistoric era, the Bronze Age, early states and the Iron Age, the Hellenistic and Roman periods, Nabatean civilization and its Jordanian heartland, the Byzantine period, and Islamic civilization in Jordan. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–11–

CC165

978-0-9741873-3-4

In the field; the archaeological expeditions of the Kelsey Museum. Talalay, Lauren E. and Susan E. Alcock. Kelsey Museum of Archaeology, ©2006 103 p. $19.50 (pa) The Kelsey Museum of Archaeology was founded by its namesake, Frances W. Kelsey, at the University of Michigan in the 1920s. In this book, all 20 of the museum’s expeditions to date are featured chronologically. B&w and color photographs are accompanied by text explaining the sites and the significance and context of the team’s finds. Most of the sites lie along the Mediterranean— Carthage, Cyrene and Apollonia in Lybia, Paesteum in Italy, Pylos in Greece, and Kedesh and Sepphora in Israel are among them. Inland sites include Seleucia-on-the-Tigris in Iraq, Antioch of Pisidia in Turkey, the Monastery of St. Catherine at Mount Sinai, and the museum’s current dig at Vorotan, Armenia. This book is distributed by David Brown Book Co. It measures 10x10″. CC165

2006-284643

1-55111-505-0

Introducing archaeology. Muckle, Robert J. Broadview Press, ©2006 257 p. $39.95 (pa) Muckle (archaeology, Capilano College, Vancouver, BC) offers a concise and economical text for introductory archaeology courses as they are taught in most colleges and universities in North America: with a focus on methods. The development of the book has been guided by recent principles of curriculum reform set form by the Society for American Archaeology. In addition, it aims to situate archaeology in the contemporary world much more than similar textbooks, including contextualizing the field in academia, industry, global social movements, politics, and popular culture; places greater emphasis on heritage resources management; and openly identifies disagreements, ambiguities, and gray areas within the discipline. CC165

978-0-86159-163-3

The Ringlemere cup; precious cups and the beginning of the Channel Bronze age. Title main entry. Ed. by Stuart Needham et al. (Research publication; no.163) The British Museum Press, ©2006 116 p. $46.00 (pa) In early 2001, a metal-detectorist found an Early Bronze Age gold cup at Ringlemere Farm in east Kent. Soon archaeologists were scratching around the area to see if they could find some evidence of how it came to be there. To their surprise, they discovered a circular monument over 50 meters in diameter, originally a Late Neolithic henge, and then other monuments nearby. Here archaeologists describe the excavations and findings so far, the cup itself, and similar cups found throughout northwestern Europe. No index is provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. CC165

978-1-84217-154-7

Wetland archaeology & environments; regional issues, global perspectives. Title main entry. Ed. by Malcolm Lillie and Stephen Ellis. Oxbow Books, ©2007 298 p. $40.00 (pa) This study, which follows the completion of the Humber Wetlands Project based at the U. of Hull, contains 23 chapters from contributors from around the world who outline the state of wetland cultural and palaeoenvironmental knowledge, methodological approaches, and theoretical aspects in the field. Lillie (geography, U. of Hull) and Ellis (U. of Hull Wetlands Archaeology Research Centre) bring together papers that discuss the resource wetlands provide and ways archaeologists excavate and interpret them, covering a variety of site types, methods, and geographical areas in Russia, Sweden, England, and Indonesia. The final section considers wetland landscapes as organic environments important to human-landscape interactions. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. CC175

2006-101549

978-0-7591-1060-1

Archaeology as a tool of civic engagement. Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara J. Little and Paul A. Shackel. AltaMira Press, ©2007 286 p. $29.95 (pa) Archaeologists from the US and Canada encourage their colleagues to think about effective ways to participate in movements to build community and create social capital and active citizen engagement in community and civic life. Their topics include reasserting native narratives from a Powhatan place of power, archeology and community after the Loma Prieta earthquake in California, and race on the Illinois frontier.

Art Book News Annual 2008

CC175

2007-001955

978-1-59874-179-7

CJ1375

2006-021666

0-89757-074-X

Archaeology is a brand!; the meaning of archaeology in contemporary popular culture.

The coins and the Hellenistic, Roman, and Byzantine economy of Palestine.

Holtorf, Cornelius. Left Coast Press, ©2007 183 p. $24.95 (pa) Holtorf (archaeology, U. of Lund) is objective in his examinations of how the trendiness of archaeology gets in its own way in the media. He examines television shows from Germany, Sweden and Great Britain (with a sideswipe at the newspapers), common perceptions such as “archaeologists dig up things” and the pleasure amateurs take in the discipline, the role of the archaeologist in the mass media (adventurer, detective, maker of profiound revelations, and caregiver of ancient sites and finds, the archaeologist’s clothes, strategies of engagement with the public (education, public relations and democratic), and the benefits of reconsidering public-view archaeology.

Evans, Jane DeRose. (The joint expedition to Caesarea Maritima excavation reports; v.6) Am.Schools / Oriental Research, ©2006 240 p. $84.95 In summer of 1971, the project began archaeological excavations in the sand dunes that covered Caesarea, the former port and capital of Palestine, and continued steadily for 12 summers with further intermittent efforts until 1995. Evans (art history, Temple U.) examines coins found there that illuminate the history of the city and environs from the fourth century BCE to the seventh CE. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

ARCHIVES

CT120

CD981

2007-007790

1-931666-25-3

Wilsted, Thomas P. Society of American Archivists, ©2007 193 p. $49.00 (pa) Wilsted (U. of Connecticut) has been involved in planning archival facilities, and has taught and consulted in the field. After a brief history of archives, he discusses the building site, structure, the building program and process, creating the optimum environment, renovating a building for archival use, purchasing equipment, moving in, and managing on a daily basis.

NUMISMATICS See also p. 37 (History of Money) 2006-018073

978-0-415-33831-8

New makers of modern culture; 2v.

Planning new and remodeled archival facilities.

CJ335

BIOGRAPHY

978-0-89722-298-3

Title main entry. Ed. by Justin Wintle. Routledge, ©2007 1759 p. $395.00 The goal of each entry in this fascinating reference is to convey the impact the writer, photographer, thinker, or other creative person had on culture—as the editor puts it, the way their work influenced “how we see ourselves”. There are 957 entries in this two-volume work, which comprises an expanded and completely revised edition that combines the 1981 Makers of modern culture and the 1982 Makers of nineteenth-century culture. (Both were also edited by Wintle and published by Routledge.) The entries are written at a level that will be of use to the general reader as well as the college student. Each entry contains cross-referenced names and terms in bold-face in the text, and concludes with a brief annotated bibliography. The chronological parameters are 1850 to the present, with attention to those whose work substantially influenced their times and subsequent eras. Though a few especially influential politicians are included (Lech Walesa, for example), the selection is mainly limited to those who worked in the arts, philosophy, literature, psychology, sociology, science, technology, and industry.

Agoranomia; studies in money and exchange presented to John H. Kroll. Title main entry. Ed. by Peter G. van Alfen. American Numismatic Society, ©2006 273 p. $125.00 Friends, students, and colleagues mark the retirement of classicist Kroll from the University of Texas-Austin with 12 essays, two in French, on coins and their use in commerce in ancient Greece. The topics include small change and the beginning of coinage at Abdera, Athens and bronze coinage, the pseudo-Rhodian drachms of Mylasa revisited, and cooperative coinage. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. CJ545

2006-031200

978-1-891771-41-5

Alexander’s coins and Alexander’s image. Arnold-Biucchi, Carmen. Harvard Univ. Art Museums, ©2006 834 p. $20.00 (pa) The book originated as a companion to an exhibition at the Museum and an associated undergraduate course, but remains a useful catalogue to the Museum’s collection of coins of Philip II, Alexander the Great, their antecedents in Macedonia, and their successors in the Hellenistic world. Arnold-Biucchi, curator of the Museum’s numismatic collection, also provides an introduction to the role of numismatics in reconstructing ancient Greek history and culture. There is no index. CJ814

978-0-7141-1813-0

Roman provincial coinage; v.7.1: De Gordien I er á Gordien III (238-244 aprés J.-C.). Part 1: Province d’Asie.

Butcher, Marguerite Spoerri. The British Museum Press, ©2006 395 p. $240.00 Several thousand bronze coins are documented from the Roman province of Asia in AD 238-244. Most were minted in the name of the emperor Gordian II (238-244) and his wife Tranquillina, but some for Gordian I and II, Pupienus, and Balbinus. They were minted by over 70 cities in the province, and are analyzed by die. The arrangement is by Roman conventus. The coins are from the same principal collections used throughout the series. Co-published by Bibliothéque nationale de France; the text is in French. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HISTORY (continued) D53

2007-297830

978-0-8020-9207-6

Momigliano and antiquarianism; foundations of the modern cultural sciences. Title main entry. Ed. by Peter N. Miller. (UCLA Center/Clark series) U. of Toronto Press, ©2007 399 p. $75.00 Scholars of history and other humanities explore history’s debt to antiquarianism described both explicitly and implicitly by 20th-century historian and historiographer Arnaldo Momigliano. Among their topics are his method and the Warburg Institute, historia literaria and cultural history from Mylaeus to Eichorn, the history of religions, and Momigliano and Gershom Scholem on Jewish history and tradition. The 12 essays are from a conference in Los Angeles at an undisclosed date. D113

2007-277193

978-1-55111-695-2

Reading the Middle Ages; sources from Europe, Byzantium, and the Islamic world; v.1: From c.300 to c.1150. Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara H. Rosenwein. Broadview Press, ©2007 354 p. $52.95 (pa) Sinbad the Sailor traveled to many far corners of the world, but until now perhaps had never reached an anthology of readings for an undergraduate medieval history course. His tale is one of the Islamic and Byzantine texts that Rosenwein (history, Loyola U., Chicago) has incorporated alongside traditional Western European literature in her twovolume anthology. Though usable with any history text, it is formatted to accompany A Short History of the Middle Ages volume one, the chapters having the same titles and chronological scope. Among the texts are records of sales, poems, histories, and of course fanciful tales.

–12–

D113

2007-360423

1-55111-693-6

D299

2006-007335

0-684-31359-6

Reading the Middle Ages; sources from Europe, Byzantium, and the Islamic world.

Europe 1789 to 1914; encyclopedia of the age of industry and empire; 5v.

Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara H. Rosenwein. Broadview Press, ©2006 594 p. $52.95 (pa) Rosenwein (history, Loyola U. Chicago) has collected a very lively set of Western, Byzantine and Islamic documents and readings from the later Roman world to the beginning of the sixteenth century. She includes commentary and contexts for each, covering such topics as imperial politics, orthodoxy, thought, the emergence of sibling cultures and the creating of new identities, political reorganizations, the expansion of the concept of “Europe,” the Crusades, the Norman conquest of England, the institutionalization of aspiration, catastrophe, creativity and the New World.

Title main entry. Ed. by John Merriman and Jay Winter. (Scribner library of modern Europe) Thomson Gale, ©2006 2,500 p. $595.00 Written by academic specialists at universities in Europe, Australia, and North America, the entries of this reference are authoritative but also accessible to the undergraduate student and general reader. There are entries for countries, cities, and people, as well as different styles of art and architecture, events, inventions, and political parties. An approach that emphasizes society and daily life is present, and entries are included describing classes and class systems. As is common in encyclopedias, the majority of the entries are biographical, with many entries devoted to composers, artists, and writers, as well as the more expected political figures and leaders. The volumes are well-illustrated with b&w images and groups of color plates devoted to different themes. Each entry concludes with a bibliography. Maps are provided at the beginning of all five volumes. Volume five contains a comprehensive bibliography. Forming a comprehensive reference when combined with its companion set, Europe since 1914; encyclopedia of the age of war and reconstruction, the substance and quality of the entries is consistently high throughout all 10 volumes.

D121

978-2-503-51526-7

People and space in the middle ages; 300-1300. Title main entry. Ed. by Wendy Davies et al. (Studies in the early middle ages; v.15) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 366 p. $123.00 The concern here is not with outer space, which had yet to be invented, nor with the inner space of conscience and faith, but with middle space, where people live: the landscape. Historians specializing in the early and central Middle Ages discuss how human communities used land, and how the communities were shaped in turn by the landed resources available. Their topics include the curious landscape of Reykjahverfi in northeastern Iceland, mapping the land units of late Anglo-Saxon and Norman England, and memory and space in Medieval monasteries. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. D172

978-99932-7-091-1

Coinage of the crusaders and the world of Islam. Title main entry. Ed. by Emmanuel Azzopardi. Midsea Books Ltd, ©2007 303 p. $156.00 Collector Azzopardi, who specializes in the coins of Malta, the Middle Ages, and the Crusades, here provides a survey of crusader, Islamic, and related coins, most of them produced between the 11th-17th centuries. Short historical essays precede the coins in each of the categories described, which include different states, reigns, or events. Published in an oversized format (8.75x12″), the volume contains images of all the coins of this impressive collection with short descriptive entries. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. D228

2004-028878

1-58765-214-5

The Renaissance and early modern era; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by Christina J. Moose. (Great events from history) Salem Press, ©2005 1014 p. $191.00 Part of an ongoing revision of the earlier 12-volume set, this two-volume work incorporates 88 essays from the Chronology of European History: 15,000 B.C. to 1997, Great Events from History: North American Series, rev. ed., and Great Events from History: Modern European Series, as well as some 242 new entries. The material is aimed at providing high school and undergraduate audiences with worldwide coverage of milestones of geopolitics as well as key social and scientific developments. Topic areas include agriculture, art, astronomy, biology, colonization, communications, cultural and intellectual history, diplomacy and international relations, health and medicine, historiography, inventions, legal history, trade and commerce, and wars, uprisings, and civil unrest, among others. The chronologically arranged entries average 1,600 words and include the name and date (or date range) of the event, the locale, the category (e.g., “architecture” or “wars, uprisings, and civil unrest”), names and birth/death dates of key figures, and a summary which concludes with a note about the significance of the event and suggestions for further reading. Also included are maps, a keyword list of contents, a time line, a glossary, and a list of electronic resources (in addition to a bibliography of sources in print).

D424

2006-014427

Title main entry. Ed. by John Merriman and Jay Winter. (Scribner library of modern Europe) Thomson Gale, ©2006 3135 p. $595.00 Encompassing the era from 1914 to the present, the entries of this 5volume reference provide an often sobering insight into the many cataclysmic events of Europe’s recent past. Because their experience bears close ties to more western Europe, both Russia and Turkey are included. The two world wars, their participants, victims, and long-term and farranching impacts are a predominent theme. Many entries are biographies—of writers, artists, filmmakers, political figures, and thinkers. Entries are included for individual countries and for some major cities, particularly where their history during this era was of widespread importance. Other categories include economic history, concepts and ideas, daily life, law, and philosophy. A thematic list of contents and a very substantial comprehensive index are included in volume five. Both editors are at Yale U.; the contributors are academics and independent scholars in North America and Europe. The volumes are well illustrated with b&w images and a group of full-page maps is found at the beginning of each volume. “This is a companion set to the 5-volume Europe 1789 to 1914; Encyclopedia of the Age of Industry and Empire.”

GREAT BRITAIN DA142

978-1-84217-215-5

Beyond Stonehenge; essays on the Bronze Age in honour of Colin Burgess. Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Burgess et al. Oxbow Books, ©2007 427+ p. $180.00 In honor of Colin Burgess’ birthday and contributions to understanding “The Age of Stonehenge” (the title of his seminal series), colleagues and members of the Bronze Age Studies Group which he founded present the latest thinking on this period in England and elsewhere. Christopher Burgess (county archeologist, Northumberland, UK; a relation to the honoree?) introduces 37 chapters (seven in untranslated French) treating theoretical debates over culture contact and change and prehistoric artefacts (e.g., rock art, masonry towers, jewelry). Lastly, contributors present personal perspectives on Burgess’ influence through his classes at Newcastle U. The volume includes a Burgess bibliography, maps and illustrations (16 pages of color plates), but not an index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DA142

Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.

0-684-31365-0

Europe since 1914; encyclopedia of the age of war and reconstruction; 5v.

978-1-905624-08-9

The Stonehenge companion. McClintock, James. English Heritage, ©2006 157 p. $24.00 McClinton assembles views about the famous megalithic monument on Salisbury Plain since its first mention in writing a thousand years ago. He concludes that, whatever its builders had in mind, it serves as a mirror reflecting the prejudices and practices of each passing age. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–13–

Art Book News Annual 2008

HISTORY (continued)

DA670

DA142

1-85074-967-1

Stonehenge; the eternal mystery in pictures. Title main entry. English Heritage, ©2006 — p. $19.95 Located in Wiltshire, England, Stonehenge is one of the most famous prehistoric sites in the world. This volume presents high-quality color photographs of the site taken at all times of day and night and in all seasons of the year. Each image is accompanied by a diagram indicating the position from which the photo was taken. Other than photo captions, a brief introduction is the only text. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. Oversize: 10.5x8″. DA145

2006-035674

Gardner, Andrew. (Publications of the Institute of Archaeology, University College London) Left Coast Press, ©2007 311 p. $34.95 (pa) Identity in Roman Britain was not simple and it was not set in stone. One notable example was that of the Roman soldier during the decline of the Empire in the fourth and fifth centuries. As lines of authority collapsed and he became less and less relevant, the Roman solider had a number of available options, including withdrawing, defecting to another armed force, or going native. Gardner (archaeology of the Roman Empire, University College, London) makes good use of the theories of Giddens and others to examine how people create and maintain their identities in terms of nationality, gender, class and ethnicity. He then compares these theories to practice as expressed by portable and architectural material culture and texts. The result is quite different than we expected about the fates of these complex identities and serves as a model for more comparisons of identity with artifacts. 978-1-904675-19-8

Hadrian’s wall and its people. Osborn, Geraint. (Greece and Rome Live) Bristol Phoenix Press, ©2006 132 p. $24.95 (pa) A British social historian specializing in Antiquity, Osborn discusses soldiers, farmers, merchants, and other ordinary people who lived in and close to the forts of the Roman wall across what is now northern England. He also describes the methods that historians and archaeologists use to come to conclusions. His account can be used as a companion for travelers or a textbook in a non-specialist course on Roman Britain. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DA501

2006-101428

978-0-7734-5547-4

A life of Frederick, Prince of Wales, 1707-1751; a connoisseur of the arts. Vivian, Frances. Ed. by Roger White. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 497 p. $139.95 The late art historian Vivian was undoubtedly motivated to research the life of Frederick, Prince of Wales, because of his reputation as a patron of the arts who sponsored artists who had immigrated to England, including Amigoni and Jean Baptiste Vanloo, and such important figures of English Rococo as John Wootton, Philip Mercier, and Joseph Goupy, but her biography of the son of King George the II and father of King George III also explores other aspects of his life, including his contentious relationship with his parents, his political activities, and his personal relationships. DA660

978-1-904350-75-0

Baker, John T. (Studies in regional and local history; v.4) U. of Hertfordshire Press, ©2006 303 p. $35.95 (pa) Baker here revises and augments his 2001 Ph.D. dissertation for the University of Birmingham on the transition from the Romano-British to Anglo-Saxon culture in the region. That transition, always controversial, has become more so in the past few decades as archaeological findings call into further question documents that many scholars had long considered pure fantasy anyway. He looks at the evidence of archaeology and place names to illuminate just how the shift happened. DA670

978-1-84217-207-0

Jackson, Reg. Oxbow Books, ©2006 203 p. $60.00 With help from colleagues, Jackson reports on excavations between 1989 and 1995 of the Benedictine priory of St. James, which was established just outside the medieval city of Bristol about 1129. They also include information from observing landscaping of parish burial grounds in 1997. The buildings, the burials, and the artefacts found are described and often illustrated with photographs or drawings. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DA677

Saunders, Andrew. (The Society for Medieval Archaeology; monograph 24) Maney Publishing, ©2006 490 p. $81.00 (pa) Saunders directed the intermittent excavations at the castle from 1961 to 1983, which yielded valuable information about the medieval castle and its environs, and contributed insights to castle studies in Europe generally. Many of the findings have been made available previously—in the on-site museum and editions of the English Heritage guidebook, for example—but here they are all brought together for the first time. Others members of the team also contribute chapters or sections. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

1-901992-50-0

The royal palace, abbey and town of Westminster on Thorney Island; archaeological excavations (1991-1998) for the London Underground Limited Jubilee Line extension project. Thomas, Christopher et al. (MoLAS monograph; 22) Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2006 224 p. $60.00 (pa) Thomas, Robert Cowie, and Jane Sidell describe and discuss the excavations during the 1990s in advance of the subway extension, and integrate the findings with those of both archaeological and antiquarian efforts during the 18th, 19th, and 20th century to present a unified account of what science now thinks has been going on there since Mesolithic and Neolithic times. The juicy bits about the royal family are in a different volume, which is not cheap! Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. DA687

1-901992-60-8

The medieval postern gate by the tower of London. Whipp, David. Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2006 73 p. $16.00 (pa) This study details the excavation and aspects of the medieval postern gate found at the junction of Tower Hill’s defensive wall and the moat of the Tower of London, constructed between 1297 and 1308 and found in 1979. The excavation was done by the former Inner London Archaeological Unit. First summarized is the current knowledge about medieval gates and posterns, as well as the circumstances of the excavation and a description of the report structure. What follows is a narrative of the archaeological and documentary evidence for the development of the gateway, and questions of whether the gate was administered by the city rather than a nearby castle, whether there was an earlier gate, the appearance of the gateway, and the character of the Tower Hill area, its pottery and ivory and bone working. Summaries in German and French are provided. The publication is a joint venture between English Heritage and the Museum of London Archaeology Service to publish backlog sites identified in the London post-excavation review. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DA687

Excavations at Launceston Castle, Cornwall.

Art Book News Annual 2008

1-902806-53-0

Excavations at St. James’s Priory, Bristol.

978-1-59874-227-5

An archaeology of identity; soldiers and society in late Roman Britain.

DA146

2007-386220

Cultural transition in the Chilterns and Essex region, 350 AD to 650 AD.

0-904220-36-2

The Tower of London new armouries project. Keevill, Graham and Steve Kelly. (Oxford archaeology occasional paper; no.12) Oxford Archaeology, ©2006 80 p. $15.00 (pa) During the period 1997-2000, Oxford Archaeology carried out a series of archaeological investigations at the Tower of London. This report summarizes what was found there, including traces of Roman deposits, the remains of medieval buildings, and features constructed within the royal garden. The excellently preserved remains of Dugal Campbell’s 18thcentury Irish Barracks are also described. The volume is thoroughly illustrated with photographs and diagrams (many in color). Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Company.

–14–

DA690

2006-445309

978-1-84217-065-6

The archaeology of the upper city and adjacent suburbs.

DA690

978-1-901992-65-6

Winchester Palace; excavations at the Southwark residence of the bishops of Winchester.

Steane, Kate. (Lincoln archaeological studies; no.3) Oxbow Books, ©2006 311 p. $65.00 Steane and others from the city of Lincoln Archaeology Unit staff describe excavations of the Upper City at Lincoln in England and adjacent suburbs from the period of 1972 to 1987. Data on artefactual and environmental finds is integrated into the presentation of the stratigraphic sequence, which is organized by Land Use Blocks and Context Groups. The first chapter gives background on the project and procedures used, followed by descriptions of each site, which include those in and around Lincoln Cathedral, St. Paul in the Bail, Mint Wall, and West Bight. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.

Seeley, Derek et al. (MoLAS monographs; 31) Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2006 157 p. $32.00 (pa) This volume describes the site and building sequence of the bishop of Winchester’s palace (now in Southwark) from the earliest finds through the initial building in the 12th century, rebuilding in the 13th century, and continuing additions and changes into the 17th century. The analysis is based on excavations carried out in the 1980s together with study of the historical record. The volume is oversized (8.25x11.75″) and well illustrated with drawings, plans, diagrams, photos, and historical views. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

DA690

DA930

978-0-946722-20-4

The churchyard. Mays, S. et al. (WHARRAM; a study of settlement on the Yorkshire Wolds; 11, Archaeological publications; 13) York U. Archaeological Publications, ©2007 470 p. $57.50 They are the primary sources of information about many aspects of past life, and often they are the only sources. Along with bones are artifacts with which people were buried, the receptacles in which they were buried and the means of covering the graves. The Wharram Perry church and churchyard have yielded their secrets to archeologists for a couple of decades now, and this magnificent description of the over 900 medieval bodies and other evidence gives the workers as well as their findings their due. This Yorkshire site had burials from about 950 to 1906, and this report reflects the long time the church was active, describing the churchyard and the land, the excavations, the human remains, the burials, the pottery, the small objects of various materials, including coins and glass, and environmental evidence. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DA690

978-0-904220-40-7

From studium to station; Rewley Abbey and Rewley Road Station, Oxford. Munby, Julian et al. (Occasional paper; no.16) Oxford Archaeology, ©2007 105 p. $15.00 (pa) The Cistercian house of Rewley, on the western outskirts of medieval Oxford, England, was founded in 1280 as a chantry and later became an abbey and a studium. By the mid 19th century a railway station, remarkable in that it was built as a twin sister to the Crystal Palace of London, occupied the same site. This volume reports on the past forty years of excavation, building survey, and documentary research on the site, the bulk carried out by Oxford Archaeology. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DA690

978-0-9554519-0-4

Landscape evolution in the Middle Thames Valley; Heathrow terminal 5 excavations v.1: Perry Oaks. (CDROM included) Framework Archaeology. (John Lewis et al.) (Framework archaeology monograph; no.1) Oxford Archaeology, ©2006 250 p. $30.00 This is the first volume describing the findings of archaeological work in West London’s Middle Thames valley, at the site dubbed “Terminal 5,” because it is beneath that wing of the London/Heathrow Airport. Discussing discoveries made between 1996 and 2000, project manager John Lewis and collaborators survey and interpret the physical evidence of human inhabitation of the area, dating as early as the seventh millennium BC, and its evolution through the ages. Notable periods include the appearance of settlements in 1700 BC, agricultural activity during the Bronze Age, and the dominating landscape of the Roman period. This book is distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DA690

1-84217-213-1

Summoning St Michael; early romanesque towers in Lincolnshire. Stocker, David and Paul Everson. Oxbow Books, ©2006 316 p. $120.00 Between 1984 and 1992, Stocker and Everson undertook fieldwork for the Lincolnshire volume of the series Corpus of Anglo-Saxon Stone Sculpture, and picked up enough extraneous material for a volume on the towers of the many 11th-century churches there. The core of the volume is an inventory with details of construction, photographs, plans, and maps. They also describe and define the Lincolnshire Tower group as a whole, and discuss such aspects as date and style, landscape, the social and economic context, and symbols of the psychopomp as a possible motivation for building the towers. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–15–

1-904890-12-1

Medieval pottery from Wood Quay, Dublin; the 1974-6 waterfront excavations. McCutcheon, Clare. Royal Irish Academy, ©2006 213 p. $40.00 Over 200,000 shards of pottery were recovered from the excavation, some 10,000 of them from late medieval and post-medieval times. Archaeologist McCutcheon illustrates—mostly in drawings with some photographs—and describes a representative selection of these. She also discusses the purpose and methodology of the study, and the historical background to the pottery. Patrick F. Wallace, who directed the project, contributes an introduction. There is no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS. DA995

2007-386794

978-1-905483-11-2

Dublin, 1660-1860; the shaping of a city. (reprint, 1952) Craig, Maurice. Liberties Press, ©2006 384 p. $25.95 (pa) Architectural historian Craig makes sure readers understand the flavor of the buildings along with their features and purposes, getting to the reasons they were there. He also describes well the people in the buildings and the reasons they got together, focusing on Ormonde, Swift and Grattan as points of reference. As he describes the development of Dublin’s streets and neighborhoods he also describes the effects of English occupation, the development of the Irish intellectual community and their houses, the roles of charity and entertainment in building, the impact of the university and its props, including printers, libraries and other academic architecture. The result is an insider’s view of Dublin, part of which no longer breathes.

FRANCE, GERMANY DC33

2006-017935

0-313-32892-7

Culture and customs of France. Haine, W. Scott. (Culture and customs of Europe) Greenwood Press, ©2006 315 p. $49.95 For general readers, Haine (European history, Holy Names U.) describes aspects of the culture and customs of France within a historical context, including the land, people, and history; religion and thought; gender, marriage, family, and education; and leisure activities. Other topics covered encompass food and fashion, literature, media, cinema, performing arts, and art, architecture, and housing. A few b&w photos are included. DC159

2006-024439

978-0-7391-1861-0

From royal to national; the Louvre Museum and the Bibliothéque nationale. Oliver, Bette W. Lexington Books, ©2007 107 p. $18.95 (pa) Oliver (eighteenth-century French history, U. of Texas, Austin) discusses the transition of the Louvre Museum and the Bibliothéque Nationale (formed from royal and monastery libraries) from royal to national institutions. Describing the endeavor and its challenges beginning with the French Revolution through The Terror and to the end of the Napoleonic wars (1789-1815), chapters detail the destruction by decree of works of art popular under the Old Regime, the confiscations of foreign collections during Napoleon’s conquest, and the architectural and cultural evolution of the Paris landmarks.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HISTORY (continued) DD204

DE60 2006-051810

0-7734-5523-X

Nationalism versus cosmopolitanism in German thought and culture, 1789-1914; essays on the emergence of Europe. Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Anne Perkins and Martin Liebscher. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 308 p. $119.95 The anthology was inspired by a symposium held in conjunction with the March 2001 exhibit Spirit of an Age at the National Gallery in London. Looking at such cultural productions as poetry, music, and architecture, scholars examine the contrast between and surprising overlap between calls for a German nation state and a vibrant Europe during the long 19th century. Quotations are in German with English translation. DD239

2006-019413

1-85109-733-3

Pop culture Germany!; media, arts, and lifestyle. Fraser, Catherine C. and Dierk O. Hoffmann. (Popular culture in the contemporary world) ABC-CLIO, ©2006 405 p. $85.00 For students, travelers, and general readers, this volume introduces modern German culture, including lifestyle, art, entertainment, television, music, and film. Not only focusing on pop culture, Fraser (German, Indiana U., Bloomington) and Hoffmann (German studies, Colgate U.) discuss the ambivalent attitude Germans have toward their country and past; idiosyncrasies in language, gestures, stereotypes, symbols, and sexuality; political, legal, and social structures; and social aspects such as lifestyle, fashion, youth culture, gender equality, multiculturalism, and food. Leisure activities are described, followed by media, performing arts, visual arts and architecture, and production and consumption information. Coverage spans the postwar years, time of rebellion, and the present post- unification era, but is supplemented by information on history. The authors include impressions and attitudes from magazines, papers, and individuals, as well as facts, which are related through alphabetical listings of terms in the “From A to Z” sections at the end of each chapter.

CLASSICAL HISTORY DE1

978-1-902937-38-0

Mediterranean prehistoric heritage; training, education and management. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. Ed. by Ian Hodder and Louise Doughty. McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2007 152 p. $70.00 (pa) A team of archaeologists, architects, and heritage professionals from universities, government agencies, and non-government organizations in Mediterranean countries and Britain initiated a project in 2001 to identify effective ways to manage, present, and interpret prehistoric sites, and here present their findings. Some focus on one of the five sites chosen as examples, but most consider general topics such as protection and conservation, community involvement, and management plans. The disk contains management plans for the sites. There is no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DE59

2005-032073

1-84553-192-2

Debating orientalization; multidisciplinary approaches to change in the ancient Mediterranean. Title main entry. Ed. by Corinna Riva and Nicholas C. Vella. (Monographs in Mediterranean archaeology; 10) Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2006 170 p. $95.00 Orientalism has variously been considered a cultural phenomenon, revolution, movement, or outdated concept of an exotic “Other.” In a volume derived from a multidisciplinary forum on the subject held in 2002 at St. John’s College, Oxford—while the editors were researching cultural exchange in Etruria and Sardinia, Riva (Mediterranean archeology, U. College London) and Vella (classics and archeology, U. of Malta) introduce this issue and related debates. Ten papers attempt to clarify “Orientilizing” by treating topics including approaches to constructing historical periods, methodologies, and the diversity and power relations of hybrid cultures influenced by Oriental ideas and material culture. Illustrations include study site maps and artifacts. Distributed in North America by David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

87-88415-38-4

Illerup Adal; vs.11/12: Die Schwerter; 2v. [Swords] Biborski, Marcin and Jørgen Ilkjær. (Jutland Archaeological Society publications XXV: 11/12, 2006) Aarhus University Press, ©2006 826 p. $93.00 The swords and sheaths of the Illerup find are analyzed and catalogued in this beautifully executed 2-volume publication (oversize, 8.5x12″). Each piece is discussed in careful detail in volume 1, which also contains essays about swords in the post-Roman era, among other topics. Superb drawings and photographs accompany the highly detailed catalog entries of volume 2. The volumes are in German (only). There is an extensive bibliography, but no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DE61

978-1-84217-263-6

Journal of Roman pottery studies; v.13: A mortarium bibliography for Roman Britain. Hartley, Katharine F. and Roberta Tomber. Oxbow Books, ©2006 139 p. $48.00 (pa) This project, which was initiated by English Heritage in response to the Fulford report on The current state of Romano-British pottery studies, is a comprehensive bibliography bringing together the literature on moratoria from the last 30 years, presented by region and with an introductory summary for each. Important earlier monographs and sources are included. Emphasis is on published material; scientific analysis is restricted to that only on moratoria, and information from archival material held by individuals and organizations is selectively included. An abbreviated version is available online. Sources for the text are bibliographies by Hartley and Peter Cheer, and a computerized version of the annual Journal of Roman Pottery Studies bibliography. Local journals from 1970 to 2001 were also searched. A place name index and alphabetical listing are provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DE86

2006-032271

978-0-631-23418-0

Classical archaeology. Title main entry. Ed. by Susan E. Alcock and Robin Osborne. (Blackwell studies in global archaeology; 10) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 447 p. $74.95 This work is intended by editors Alcock (director, Institute for Archeology and the Ancient World, Brown U., US) and Osborn (ancient history, U. of Cambridge, UK) to serve as an introduction to the material archaeology of the “Classical World;” the world of the Greeks and the Romans between the eighth century BC and the fourth century AD. Following an overview of the field’s scope and range and an introduction to its standard methodological tools and modes of analysis, chapters introduce current understandings of classical rural, urban, and household archaeology. Remaining chapters summarize archaeological knowledge of civic religion, commemorative statuary as an expression of political self-presentation, the projection of community identities, and processes and impacts of cultural interchange. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DE86

978-1-84217-183-7

Common ground; archaeology, art, science, and humanities; proceedings. International Congress of Classical Archaeology (16th: 2003: Boston, MA) Ed. Carol C. Mattusch et al. Oxbow Books, ©2006 630 p. $150.00 Mattusch (George Mason U.), Donohue (Bryn Mawr College), and Brauer (Harvard U. Art Museums) present the proceedings of the August 2003 International Conference of Classical Archaeology, which began with a keynote address calling for a “unifying vision” in studies of archaeology, literature, epigraphy, geography, prehistory and history, art, and technology. The archaeologists, art historians, conservation scientists, and others responsible for the 140 papers, 21 posters, eight colloquia, and two roundtable sessions were apparently tasked with advancing such a goal in sessions discussing the history of archaeology, recycling in antiquity, magic and religious practices, cultural interactions in the classical world, museums and collecting in the past, numismatics and epigraphy, Dionysiac imagery, ancient technology through modern lenses, boundaries and the classical “periphery,” conservation and restoration, methods and meanings in funerary practices, Roman social history and archaeology, elements of archaeology in the ancient world, recording the past, iconography in sculpture, landscapes, iconography of myth, and children in ancient Greece. New discoveries from sites around the world were also reported in a number of other sessions. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–16–

DF27

978-1-84217-249-0

Travel, geography and culture in ancient Greece, Egypt and the Near East.

978-87-7934-238-5

Surveying the Greek chora; Black Sea region in a comparative perspective. Title main entry. Ed. by Pia Guldager Bilde and Vladimir F. Stolba. (Black Sea studies; v.4) Aarhus University Press, ©2006 346 p. $46.95 Archaeologists and classicists draw evidence from landscape archaeology to explore the relationship between Greek cities and their territory, and between Greek settlers and the indigene environment in the Black Sea region from the seventh to the fourth centuries AD. Among their topics are community in the hinterlands of a Black Sea port, the chora of Kerkinitis, and ancient roads and land divisions in the chorai of the European Bosporos and Chersonesos. The 15 papers, one in German, were presented at an August-September 2003 conference in Sønderborg, Denmark. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DF212

978-1-931909-15-0

The archaeology of Heinrich Schliemann; an annotated bibliographic handlist, 2d ed. Runnels, Curtis. Archaeological Inst.of America, ©2007 81 p. $19.95 (pa) Runnels (archaeology, Boston U.) presents an annotated list of published works on the prehistoric archaeology of the Aegean world, written by archaeologist Heinrich Schliemann. His aim is to bring together a list of these publications in one volume—in English—to contribute to the larger understanding of his contribution to archaeology. Books and journal articles are emphasized; newspaper and magazine articles are omitted, as are the writings of Sophia Schliemann. Sources are listed chronologically. The book is meant for Aegean prehistorians, those writing the history of archaeology, librarians, and students. In lieu of an index, a short title list is provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DF214

2006-016525

2005-013103

978-0-631-23014-4

A companion to the classical Greek world.

Title main entry. Ed. by Colin Adams and Jim Roy. Oxbow Books, ©2007 205 p. $80.00 In 12 papers from an April 2002 seminar in Nottingham, historians and archaeologists demonstrate how people saw the world before the tourist industry was there to serve their every whim. Their topics include Egyptians abroad in the Late Period, traveling by land in ancient Greece, the function and interpretation of travel in the Greek novels, and landscapes and identity in the mosaics of Antioch. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DF78

DF214

978-1-58765-281-3

Ancient Greece; 3v. Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas J. Sienkewicz. (Magill’s choice) Salem Press, ©2007 1028 p. $207.00 Sienkewicz (Monmouth College) presents 315 topical articles, ranging in length from one to eight pages, exploring Greek history and culture from the earliest archaeological evidence to the Battle of Actium in 31 B.C.E., which marked the merging of the Greek and Roman civilizations. Presented over the course of three volumes, the entries discuss art and architecture, daily life and customs, death and burial, education and training, government and law, language and literature, medicine and health, navigation and transportation, the performing arts, religion and ritual, science, settlements and social structure, sports and entertainment, technology, trade and commerce, war and weapons, and women’s lives. Also included are numerous biographical entries on political and military leaders, as well as important thinkers and literary figures. A small collection of maps and a key to pronunciation is included at the start of each volume. Included at the end of the third volume are category, personages, and subject indexes.

–17–

Title main entry. Ed. by Konrad H. Kinzl. (Blackwell companions to the ancient world) Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 606 p. $129.95 Kinzl (ancient history, Trent U., emeritus) has gathered into a single volume material usually scattered throughout a variety of publications. The essays, which are written by international scholars, address topics not usually found in discussions of this period in Greek history such as government, the environment, art, philosophy, rhetoric, religion and society. The volume includes a concise narrative overview of the period from the aftermath of the Persian Wars in 478 BC to the death of Alexander the Great in 323 BC. It is fully illustrated and contains several maps, as well as a thorough treatment of both written and material sources. DF220

2006-027437

1-931534-16-0

Aegean bronze age rhyta. Koehl, Robert B. (Prehistory monographs; 19) Inst. /Aegean Prehistory Press, ©2006 484 p. $120.00 Rhyta (singular rhyton) are horn-shaped vessels with two holes in them, usually at opposite ends, widely known from Classical times. Koehl examines examples from much earlier in region of the Aegean Sea. In addition to presenting a catalogue of known examples, he discusses their typology, history, and development; mechanical functions; and uses. Published by the Institute for Aegean Prehistory Academic Press, and distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. DF220

2006-033014

978-0-89236-867-9

The Mycenaeans. Schofield, Louise. Getty Publications, ©2007 208 p. $29.95 (pa) Archaeologist Schofield, formerly a curator at the British Museum, charts the story of the Greek civilization that flourished during the Late Bronze Age, about 1600-1100 BC from its origins to eventual fall. Among the events are the founding of Troy, the adoption of the Minoan palace system from Crete, the circle of graves, the Trojan War, and the epics and legends the Mycenaeans have inspired over the subsequent millennia. She writes for general readers, but cites more detailed and technical sources. Many photographs, about half in color, are included. DF221

2006-045296

1-931909-14-8

Pottery and society; the impact of recent studies in Minoan pottery; gold medal colloquium in honor of Philip P. Betancourt; proceedings. Archaeological Institute of America. General Meeting (104th: 2003: New Orleans, LA) Ed. by Malcolm H. Wiener et al. Archaeological Inst.of America, ©2006 157 p. $45.00 Five papers explore what pottery can reveal about society on the island of Crete during the Minoan period. Archaeologists discuss such topics as pottery making and social reproduction in the Bronze Age Mesara, traditions and trends in the production and consumption of storage containers in proto-palatial and neo-palatial Crete, and whether southeastern Anatolian pottery from Late Minoan Crete is evidence for direct contact between Arzawa and Keftiu. There is no index. DF261

978-0-87661-535-5

The Greek tile works at Corinth; the site and the finds. Merker, Gloria S. (Hesperia supplement; 35) Am.School of Classical Studies at Athens, ©2006185 p. $55.00 (pa) This volume describes the Tile Works at Corinth, first excavated in 1939, including discussions of work areas in the factory, a chronology of the site deposits, and an inventory of objects manufactured in each of the kilns. Merker discusses the finds and the main features of the site, and establishes when the kilns were in operation and the products manufactured in them, with b&w photos and an individual description of each. Imports, mainly Attic, are detailed in the final chapter. The book does not include a technical study of the structure and operation of the kilns. A descriptive catalogue with photographs of the architectural terracottas, prepared by Charles K. Williams II during the 1980s, is presented in an appendix. Books from the American School of Classical Studies at Athens are distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HISTORY (continued)

DF901

DF261

0-904887-51-0

Lefkandi IV; the Bronze Age, the late Helladic IIIC settlement at Xeropolis. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. Ed. by D. Evely. (Supplementary; v.39) British School at Athens, ©2006 435 p. $196.00 This volume presents an impressive report of the well- known Xeropolis site, excavated in 1964-1970. The authors include Mervyn Popham (d.2000), who was particularly involved in the excavations and their publication. Published in an oversize format (8.5x12″), the volume contains two fold-out drawings of the site and many drawings and plates. The chapters describe in detail the site and its excavation, the pottery, the terracotta figures, and the small miscellaneous finds. A concluding chapter, by Susan Sheratt, summarizes the chief conclusions to be drawn from the excavation finds and the importance of the site in a larger archaeological context. In addition, a CD-ROM contains appendices on the human burials, the shells, statistics and tables on the pottery, and concordances. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DF287

2006-040782

0-87661-233-8

Hellenistic pottery; the plain wares. Rotroff, Susan I. (The Athenian Agora; v.33) Am.School of Classical Studies at Athens, ©2006626 p. $150.00 This impressive volume presents three decades of research by its author, containing a survey of the chief types of plain, unglossed pottery produced at the Athenian Agora during the Hellenistic period (through the 1st century, BCE). Published in an oversize format (9x12.25″), the volume contains 98 pages of figures (mainly profiles of the wares) and 90 b&w plates of photos. The survey follows a general overview and is organized by vessel type, subdivided by shape, with descriptions, analysis of material, measurements, and drawings. The introductions to each vessel type provides an overview of their occurrence. Following the survey is a catalogue and a section of deposit summaries, describing every deposit from which pottery in this work came. Concordances are included of Agora excavations inventory numbers, coins, Knidian type numbers, and Murr and Agora sample numbers. Deposit and Greek indexes are provided. This will be an invaluable resource to the specialist. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DF759

1-905739-02-8

World enough, and time; the travel chronicles of Mrs. J. Theodore Bent; v.1: Greece and the Levantine Littoral. Bent, Mabel. Archaeopress, ©2006 366 p. $49.95 (pa) The Anglo-Irish woman of means and her English archaeological adventurer husband spent 20 years traveling the world together. He wrote scholarly books that were published. She kept detailed journals, which found their way to the Hellenic Society in London after she died in 1929 and remained there until now. This first volume presents Mabel Brent’s chronicles of their travels and archaeological and ethnographic findings around the Aegean Sea from 1883-98. The other two volumes will cover Arabia and the Near East, and Egypt and Africa. Editors Gerland Brisch and Brenda Stones provide explanatory footnotes, biographical sketches that double as an index of people, and an index of places. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DF901

2006-048747

978-0-87661-406-8

Castles of the Morea, rev.ed. Andrews, Kevin. (Gennadeion monographs; 4) Am.School of Classical Studies at Athens, ©2006314 p. $75.00 Long out of print, this extraordinary work was first published in 1953, five years after the author graduated from Harvard and received a traveling fellowship from the American School of Classical Studies at Athens. Douglas Gordon undertook to visit, photograph, and describe the medieval fortresses in the Peloponnese at a time when studying Greece meant studying the ancients, and at a time (the end of the Greek Civil War) when such travel was difficult. Also remarkable is his evocative use of language, conveying his passion for the subject. This reprint makes the work available again with a new foreword by Glenn R. Bugh (history, Virginia Polytechnic Institute) setting Andrews’ work in context and offering some new scholarship. The Grimani maps—a collection of 17thcentury fortification plans that inspired Andrews—are reproduced in color rather than b&w as in the original. The volume is oversize, measuring 9.25x12.25″. Books from the American School of Classical Studies at Athens are distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-84217-206-3

Making a landscape sacred; outlying churches and icon stands in Sphakia, southwestern Crete. Nixon, Lucia. Oxbow Books, ©2006 180 p. $48.00 (pa) The Sphakia Survey is an archaeological investigation of how humans have interacted with the landscape of a particular area in southwestern Crete from their earliest arrival ca. 3000 B.C.E. until the end of the Turkish period in ca. 1900 C.E. In this text, the Survey’s co-director presents the results of a detailed study she made of two types of religious structures in the area: outlying churches and icon stands. Employing a phenomenological approach, she analyzes the rationale for the positioning of these structures and considers their symbolic function. Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Company.

ANCIENT ROME, ITALY DG66

2006-008624

978-0-299-22010-5

Imperium and cosmos; Augustus and the northern Campus Martius. Rehak, Paul. (Wisconsin studies in classics) U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 222+ p. $60.00 The sundial is positioned perfectly to align the spoke with the earthly god that Augustus was supposed to become. The very site of his cremation was designed for someone not quite mortal. Rehak (late classics, U. of Kansas) finds the places defined by the earthly death of Caesar belied his modest protests he was first amongst equals; in fact, by his own design or those whose agenda included deification for themselves, the site of the northern Campus Martius was a commentary on the right of the Caesar to be declared a god even before earthly death, if he so chose. Rehak is careful to ground his assertions firmly in previous scholarship, and takes a multidisciplinary approach to show how the positioning of monuments and spaces was in fact a complex form of the language of empire. The bibliography is particularly comprehensive. DG70

2006-050451

978-0-312-35585-2

Pompeii; the living city. Butterworth, Alex and Ray Laurence. St. Martin’s Press, ©2006 354 p. $27.95 Drawing on recent archaeological and historical research, Butterworth, a writer and dramatist, and Laurence, a research fellow at the U. of Birmingham Institute of Archaeology and Antiquity, offer a vivid portrait of Pompeii during the 25 years leading up to the eruption that destroyed it. They focus on key individuals from each stratum of Pompeian society to create a compelling narrative that reanimates the sights and sounds of the living city. DG78

2007-004398

978-0-8109-9339-6

Roman life; 100 B.C. to A.D. 200. (CD-ROM included) Clarke, John R. Photography by Michael Larvey. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 175 p. $35.00 Clarke (history of art, U. of Texas at Austin) illustrates his discussion of the lives of Roman soldiers, senators, commoners, freedpersons, merchants, and slaves between 100 B.C. and 200 A.D. with 144 photographs (many previously unpublished), diagrams, and digital renderings from Rome, Pompeii, and Ostia. Nine chapters include religious life, work, life in the military, taverns and public latrines, baths, dinner parties, entertainment, portraiture, and death and fame in ancient Roman society. The accompanying CD-ROM contains an interactive tour through Pompeii’s well-preserved House of the Vettii. DG223

978-1-84217-208-7

Deliciae fictiles III; architectural terracottas in ancient Italy; new discoveries and interpretations; proceedings. Conference Deliciae filictiles (3rd: 2002: Rome, Italy) Ed. by Ingrid Edlund-Berry et al. Oxbow Books, ©2006 508 p. $70.00 Specialists in architectural terracottas from Italy and elsewhere consider roofing systems and decorations on them made from the material throughout ancient Italy. After reviewing recent research generally, the 44 papers, 10 in English and most of rest in Italian, cover Etruria; Umbria and Abruzzo; The Faliscans, Rome, and Latium; Campania and Magna Graecia; and Sicily. They are not indexed Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.

–18–

DG235

2005-021926

978-1-4051-0217-9

DG272

978-1-84217-163-9

A companion to the Roman Republic.

Roman finds; context and theory; proceedings.

Title main entry. Ed. by Nathan Rosenstein and Robert Morstein-Marx. (Blackwell companions to the ancient world. Ancient history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 737 p. $149.95 Put together by Rosenstein (history, Ohio State U.) and Morstein-Marx (classics, U. of California at Santa Barbara), the goal of this work is to present some of the most important themes of and debates about the rise and fall of the Roman Republic in a manner that takes into account the most recent research in the literature. Following chapters that discuss the raw material of the historiography of Rome (the historical scholarship from the early 20th century to the present, literary and epigraphic evidence, the archaeology of the Roman city, and the physical geography and environment of Italy), the chronological framework is presented in chapters that narrate military and political developments from the origins of Rome to the death of Julius Caesar. Beginning with the tenth chapter and continuing to the 25th, the material turns broadly thematic, with sections addressing civic structures of church, law, constitution, and military; social issues of demography, social structure, and gender; issues of political culture, including aristocratic values, popular power, patronage, rhetoric and public life; and questions of Roman identity, including history and collective memory, art and architecture, literature, and the relationships between the Roman and the Other. The final four chapters introduce areas of continuing historical controversy such as imperial expansion under the Republic, agrarian change and the economy, the relationship between Rome and Italy, and the transformation from Republic to Empire.

Conference on Roman Finds, Context and Theory (2004: Durham, UK) Ed. by Richard Hingley and Steven Willis. Oxbow Books, ©2007 243 p. $76.00 (pa) The contributing archaeologists are not concerned here with changing technologies or approaches to excavations, but with changes in the historical and cultural understanding of the Roman Empire and in the theoretical basis of interpreting finds. One goal is to promote their profession as a source of insight that can be used in related fields. The focus in on the western European provinces, especially Britain. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

DG235

978-87-7934-174-6

Rome and the Black Sea region; domination, Romanisation, resistance.

0-7156-3567-0

Gerasa and the Decapolis; a “virtual island” in northwest Jordan. Kennedy, David. (Duckworth debates in archaeology) Duckworth, ©2006 216 p. $22.00 (pa) Kennedy (Roman archaeology and history, U. of Western Australia) examines a group of micro-regions in northwest Jordan from the sudden entry of Hellenic culture in the fourth century BC, through several centuries of Roman rule, and into the Umayyad civilization centered nearby at Damascus. Like much of the Middle East, he says, this region enjoyed a long period of growth and dramatic spread of settlement that was not matched until the middle 20th century. He discusses the land, the people, settlements, government, writing, and everyday life. Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing. DG272

978-1-84217-264-3

Theoretical Roman Archaeology Conference; proceedings. International Theoretical Roman Archaeology Conference (16th: 2006: University of Cambridge, UK) Ed. by Ben Croxford et al. Oxbow Books, ©2007 191 p. $56.00 (pa) Organizers of the Theoretical Roman Archeology Conference (TRAC) held in March 2006 introduce 13 papers representing a cross-section of the themes discussed. Traversing the Roman Empire from Britain to North Africa, authors consider topics including the types and social roles of metal smiths in Egypt, public and domestic architecture, trends in dietary consumption, the Romanizing of the Saturn cult in North Africa, and various aspects of burials. The volume includes basic excavation and distribution site maps and data, but lacks information on contributors’ professional affiliations and an index. Distributed by The David Brown Book Company. DG272

Title main entry. Ed. by Tønnes Bekker-Nielsen. (Black Sea studies; v.5) Aarhus University Press, ©2006 183 p. $37.00 In nine papers from an international conference held in Esbjerg, Denmark in January 2005, historians and archaeologists discuss interaction between imperial Romans and the indigenous population. Among their topics are Momnon of Herakleia on Rome and the Romans, the role and status of the indigenous population in Bithynia, and cultural contact and change. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DG272

DG272

978-1-84217-248-3

Romanitas; essays on Roman archaeology in honour of Sheppard Frere on the occasion of his ninetieth birthday.

978-1-84217-219-3

Theoretical Roman archaeology conference (TRAC 2005); proceedings. International Theoretical Roman Archaeology Conference (15th: 2005: University of Birmingham, UK) Ed. by Ben Croxford et al. Oxbow Books, ©2006 137 p. $48.00 (pa) Three of the 11 papers were commissioned to mark the 15th year of the Conference by taking stock of it to date and projecting its course in the future; the 10th anniversary was similarly commemorated. Other topics include modeling Roman demography and urban dependency in central Italy, the Romanization of the countryside in western Gaul, and wild and domestic animals in the Roman sacrificial ritual. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. DG442

978-0-8020-9458-2

Italian cultural lineages. White, Jonathan. (Toronto Italian studies) U. of Toronto Press, ©2007 330 p. $75.00 (pa) White (literature, U. of Essex, UK) considers Italian culture and identity by tracing Italian life and art through themes: viewing, fantasy, passion, former royal capitals, justice, reputation, and lifestyles. He examines the “lineages” of each, using ideas from Benedetto Croce, Aijaz Ahmad, and Antonio Gramsci, and suggests that traditions, mentalities, problems, and solutions of the country can be traced. Examples he uses are from the eighteenth to twentieth centuries, and relate to literature, media, opera, and even the Las Vegas strip.

CENTRAL ASIA, SCANDINAVIA

Title main entry. Ed. by R.J.A. Wilson. Oxbow Books, ©2006 242 p. $60.00 Frere (archeology of the Roman empire emeritus, Oxford U.) has justly earned the appreciation of generations of colleagues and pupils, nine of whom offer very accessible and well-illustrated accounts here, including charming introductions that explain how they came to know and admire Frere as a mentor and friend. They cover the relationship between urban defenses and civic status in early Roman Britain, the evidence determining whether London was ever a colonia, the civic and military significance of contributions toward Hadrian’s Wall, weapons and the garrison at Newstead, elements of military fortifications of Roman Britain, samian cups and their uses, the account of an anonymous traveler on the Antonine Wall in 1697, two centuries of conservation and archeology of Hadrian’s Wall and later Roman African red slip ware from the frontier region in a province of Upper Egypt. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.

–19–

DK859

2006-029553

978-0-313-33656-0

Culture and customs of the Central Asian republics. Abazov, Rafis. (Culture and customs of Asia) Greenwood Press, ©2007 286 p. $49.95 Abazov (international and public affairs, Columbia U.) provides an introduction for students and general readers to the culture and customs of Central Asian republics: Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan. Coverage encompasses the land, people, language, history, and economy; thought and religion; folklore and literature, with attention to key individuals; media and cinema; performing and visual arts; architecture; gender, courtship, and marriage; and festivals and leisure activities. Elite life, ideology, and details of political structure and struggle are not discussed in favor of the life of common people. B&w photos are incorporated.

Art Book News Annual 2008

DL31

978-90-04-15893-1

DR724

West over sea; studies in Scandinavian sea-borne expansion and settlement before 1300: a Festschrift in honor of Dr. Barbara E. Crawford. Title main entry. Ed. by Beverley Ballin Smith et al. (The northern world; v.31) BRILL, ©2007 581 p. $189.00 Crawford is honored in this volume with 30 essays by former students and colleagues on topics concerning early Scandinavian travel and settlement. History, culture, religion, archaeology, and place names and language are the broad themes, with a common focus on material culture. Individual topics including sculpture from the Faroe Islands, Scandinavian naming systems in the Hebrides, the Church of St. Clement in Oslo, and the Celtic sea route of the Vikings. The resulting tribute provides a fitting 20-year update to Crawford’s Scandinavian Scotland (1988, Leicester U. Press), which set the standard for the field. A group of plates present b&w photos of the works, sites, and monuments discussed. DL576

978-87-7934-259-0

Kaupang in Skiringssal. Title main entry. Ed. by Dagfinn Skre. (Kaupang excavation project publication series; v.1: Norske oldfunn, 22) Aarhus University Press, ©2007 502 p. $70.00 This is the first of an anticipated six volumes, all devoted to documenting and analysing the extensive and longstanding excavations of the Viking trading site. Published in an oversized format (8.5x12″), the volume is filled with painstaking plans and drawings, as well as tables, maps, and photographs. The first 15 chapters are grouped into three main sections; background, excavations and surveys from 1998-2003, and scientific analyses. Other topics are the site of Skiringssal, including its cemetery, the 12th-century poem Ynglingatal, and towns and markets in southwest Scandinavia in 800-950. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

THE MIDDLE EAST, ASIA, THE ISLAMIC WORLD DR98

978-1-84217-182-0

Nicopolis ad Istrum; a late Roman and early Byzantine city: the finds and the biological remains. Poulter, A.G. (Reports of the Research Committee of the Society of Antiquaries of London; no.67) Oxbow Books, ©2007 320 p. $100.00 This third volume completes the description of the excavation carried out by the British team on the site of the Roman city in northern Bulgaria. The findings are not only relevant to the site itself, but also serve as a model and example for the Balkans as a whole, where very little research of this kind and a this scale has been undertaken for the late Roman and early Byzantine period. Among the finds described are metalwork, ceramic objects, sculpture and architectural decoration, large mammal and reptile bones, bird bones, human skeletal remains, and metallurgical debris. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DR211

978-0-85668-812-6

Akhmim in the Old Kingdom; part 2: The pottery, decoration techniques and colour conventions. Hope, Colin A. and Ann McFarlane. (The Australian Centre for Egyptology Reports; 7) Australian Center for Egyptology, ©2006 264 p. $110.00 (pa) The first volume, on chronology and administration, was published in 1992. Here begins a series of studies on art, architecture, and other aspects of the cemetery in Upper Egypt that was surveyed, excavated, and recorded by Macquarie University between 1979 and 1992. Hope (archaeology and ancient history, Monash U.) details the pottery, and McFarlane (Egyptology, Macquarie U.) the decoration techniques and color conventions. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DR701

978-1-84217-234-6

Roman Butrint; an assessment. Title main entry. Ed. by Inge Lyse Hansen and Richard Hodges. Oxbow Books, ©2007 214 p. $60.00 Archaeologists offer a fresh look at the Greek port, on the Adriatic Sea opposite the island of Corfu and at the mouth of a large lagoon, during the Roman period. They consider artistic and historical evidence such as a dedication to Minerva Augusta and the monumental togate statue. They also report and interpret findings from a new round of excavations conducted 2000-2004 at Butrint and the Vrina Plain, among them the geoarchaeology, and proposals for the function and context of two Roman monuments. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-934565

978-1-59711-034-1

Istanbul; city of a hundred names. Webb, Alex. Aperture Foundation Corp., ©2007 135 p. $50.00 Award-winning photojournalist Webb presents his vision of the Turkish city of Istanbul in the form of some 200 full-color photographs. His photographic work in the city has been governed in no small part by his sense of Istanbul as a border city between Asia and Europe, between Islam and secularism, and between ancient and modern. Turkish novelist and Nobel Laureate Pamuk contributes an essay on the culture of Istanbul and hüzün (or melancholy). Distributed in the US by Distributed Art Publishers. DR1645

978-0-86356-959-3

Dubrovnik; a history. (reprint, 2003) Harris, Robin. Saqi Books, ©2006 503 p. $24.95 (pa) The ancient and vibrant city of Dubrovnik, its history, people, architecture, culture, and conflicts are described in a fascinating text by Harris, a British historian. Throughout, he details the trade, artistic, and political relations with the city’s neighbors. Several sets of color plates present charters and works of art and architecture. This is the paperback reprint of a hardback edition published by Saqi in 2003. Distributed in the US by Consortium. DS36

2007-007207

1-4262-0092-7

Lost history; the enduring legacy of Muslim scientists, thinkers, and artists. Morgan, Michael Hamilton. Natl. Geographic Society, ©2007 301 p. $26.00 Writing for a general audience, the author gives an anecdotal, and often dramatized, history of scientific, philosophic, and artistic accomplishments of Islamic civilization and their influence on Western civilization. Rather than focus solely on the “Arab Golden Age” that also includes Persia and Spain for the years 632 to 1258, the text focuses on many “golden ages” of Islamic civilization, including Central Asia, Ottoman Turkey, and Mughal India, up to the 18th century. The purpose of the work is to provide a general introduction and therefore while the author is aware of some of the more esoteric historical debates concerning Islamic intellectual history he does not endeavor to address them in any sustained fashion. DS51

2007-367457

1-876832-05-3

The heritage of Eastern Turkey; from earliest settlements to Islam. Sagona, Antonio. Macmillan Publishers Australia, ©2006 240 p. $72.37 Intended as an introduction to the general reader and armchair traveler, this very attractive volume contains a wealth of information, illustrated with excellent color photos, in an oversized format (8.25x12″). Sagona, an archaeologist at the U. of Melbourne, Australia, provides a succinct account of the geography, peoples, history, religions, and culture of a region that was central to the emergence of civilization under the Sumerians and actively productive as part of the Silk Road throughout its history (which he covers through the Ottomans). Special attention is given to houses, castles, churches, mosques, and other notable works of architecture. Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Company. DS54

978-87-7288-836-1

Panayia Ematousa; a rural site in south-eastern Cyprus; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by L. Wriedt Sørensen and K. Winther Jacobsen. (Monographs of the Danish Institute at Athens; v.6) Aarhus University Press, ©2006 436 p. $70.00 The result of excavations by the U. of Copenhagen (Denmark) Institute of Archaeology and Ethnology in the 1990s, this 2v. work offers a valuable addition to the relatively new field of rural archaeology, with chapters on sculpture and tombs extending into the realm of art history. The site dates from Hellenistic and Roman times. Chapters detail the ground stone industry and architecture there, with separate chapters devoted to the survey and discussion of Iron Age pottery, ceramic fine wares, cooking wares, utility amphorae, lamps, terracotta figurines, glass, coins, and roof tiles. Heavily illustrated with drawings and photos, including some color photos. Not indexed. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–20–

DS66

978-87-7602-073-6

DS99

978-2-503-52291-3

Hama; fouilles et recherches, 1931-1938; I 2: Bronze Age graves in Hama and its neighbourhood.

Tell ‘Acharneh 1998-2004; preliminary reports on excavation campaigns and study season.

Riis, P.J. and Marie-Louise Buhl. (Monographs of the National Museum XIV) Aarhus University Press, ©2007 115 p. $40.00 (pa) This oversized volume (10x13.25″) presents in full the excavation report made in the 1930s but never published. The account includes drawings and b&w photos of the site and its finds. The text includes detailed descriptions of the placement of the graves and of the finds. A separate section of plates presents the photos and drawings of the ceramics. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Title main entry. Ed. by Michel Fortin. (Subartu; v.18) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 257 p. $89.00 (pa) Archaeologists report preliminary findings from ongoing excavations at a site in Syria with material from periods ranging from Sargon II of Assyria to medieval and later. The introductory matter and the yearly reports 1998-2002 are in French. Other topics include the Kingdom of Hamath, typological and technical aspects of pottery, and coins. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DS99

DS69

978-1-84217-272-8

Euphrates River Valley settlement; the Carchemish sector in the third millennium BC. Title main entry. Ed. by Edgar Peltenburg. Oxbow Books, ©2007 285 p. $120.00 It was densely populated in its time, about 5,000 years ago, but it is archeologically inaccessible. Carchemish was one of the great capital cities of the ancient Near East, but most of our information about it comes from rescue excavations (conducted upon the building of new dams) which revealed ceremonial monuments, mortuary evidence, fortified settlements and temples as well as material in Carchemish hinterlands, pastoral nomads, ranked societies and state formation. The 18 papers here include overviews of regional dimensions, including evidence of geopolitics and social-cultural identity, settlements of the middle Euphrates and Sajur River basins, including evidence from mounds about Bronze age life and on rulers from terraces, and material culture in its broader context, including the evidence from metal artifacts, sealing practices, ceramics, luxury wares and the place of fruit stands in Bronze Age cultural life. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DS69

2006-038464

978-0-87081-867-7

Return to Babylon; travelers, archaeologists, and monuments in Mesopotamia, rev. ed. Fagan, Brian M. U. Press of Colorado, ©2007 386 p. $19.95 (pa) Recent archaeological catastrophes in Iraq inspired Fagan to update and re-issue his 1979 history of archaeological exploration in Mesopotamia, which had long been out of print. He was pleased to discover that his original narrative framework still worked, so he could plug in new information where appropriate. A final chapter documents the ongoing destruction of national and world treasures. DS94

978-0-7156-3570-4

Early Islamic Syria; an archaeological assessment. Walmsley, Alan. (Duckworth debates in archaeology) Duckworth, ©2007 176 p. $22.00 (pa) Walmsley (Islamic archaeology and art, Carsten Niebuhr Institute, U. of Copenhagen, Denmark) summarizes the current issues and knowledge of the early Islamic era of Syria-Palestine (defined as the current areas of Syria, Lebanon, Jordan, Israel, the Palestinian territories, and a small part of southern Turkey). He takes a two-pronged approach to the subject, presenting a chronological examination of socio- economic conditions in the first 50 years before the Islamic expansion and an issuebased treatment of such questions as material culture and settlement profiles. DS99

978-2-503-52289-0

Alltag und Gesellschaft zur Spätbronzezeit; eine Fallstudie aus Tall Bazi (Syrien). Otto, Adelheid. (Subartu; 19) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 332 p. $121.00 (pa) First presented in longer form as her Habilitationsschrift (in 2004, from the Ludwig-Maximilians U. in Munich, Germany), Otto’s study describes at length the typical house of this unusually well- preserved Late Bronze Age settlement, located in Syria. She then extrapolates from the copious finds and 50 excavated houses to describe the main elements of daily life. The volume, which is oversized (8.25x11.75″), is in German with an English and an Arabic summary. There is an extensive bibliography, but no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–21–

978-2-503-51812-1

Tell Beydar; the 2000-2002 seasons of excavations, the 2003-2004 seasons of architectural restoration, a preliminary report. Title main entry. Ed. by Marc Lebeau and Antoine Suleiman. (Subartu; 15) Brepols Publishers, ©2007 309 p. $124.00 (pa) The third volume about the Euro-Syrian archaeological project at the ancient city of Nabada reports on the 2000-02 excavations and the 200304 architectural restoration. About a third of the text, including the introduction, are in French. The monochrome photographs are of particularly high quality. There is no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DS110

2005-045576

90-04-12626-0

Excavations at Sepphoris; v.1. Strange, James F. et al. (The Brill reference library of Judaism; v.22) BRILL, ©2006 170 p. $188.00 Strange (religious studies, U. of South Florida), Lonhstaff (emeritus, religious studies, Colby College), and Groh (humanities and archaeology, Illinois Wesleyan U.) present the first volume of a multi-volume work reporting on archaeological investigations into the ancient Galilean city of Sepphoris. It first reviews the ancient literary sources about Sepphoris and the progress of the investigations in the 1980s. It then describes the findings regarding the tower (or citadel) and the villa (thought to be a church or basilica in the 1930s). It also incorporates details of coins, pottery, and other small finds. DS110

2006-022613

0-89757-072-3

Tel Tanninim; excavations at Krokodeilon Polis, 19961999. Stieglitz, R. Robert. (American schools of oriental research archeological reports; v.10) Am.Schools / Oriental Research, ©2006 255 p. $84.95 Tel Tanninim, Crocodiles Mound, is the modern Hebrew name for the Arabic site Tell el-Melat, Mortar Mound, on the east coast of the Mediterranean about 4.25 kilometers north of Caesarea. Stieglitz and colleagues describe the geography and hydrography of the site; the four-year excavation project they conducted; and finds dating to the Iron Age, Byzantine, and later periods. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co. DS111

0-86159-161-5

A researcher’s guide to the Lachish collection in the British Museum. Magrill, Pamela. (BMP Research Paper; 161) The British Museum Press, ©2006 201 p. $46.00 (pa) In 1980, the British Museum acquired from the University of London a collection of over 17,000 objects and documents from the British excavation at Lachish, southwest of Jerusalem, during the 1930s. Magrill, curator of the collection, spent the 1990s sorting, researching, and cataloging the artifacts into the Museum’s database. When she finished in 2000, she realized that she could now compile a handlist of the entire collection for the benefit of researchers. And so she has. She covers the cemeteries, the fosse temple and related contexts, the tell and fortifications, the sections, and surface and unprovenanced artifacts. A battery of indexes facilitates entry. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HISTORY (continued)

DS408

2006310842

978-1-84560-017-4

India then and now.

DS117

978-1-905299-28-7

Ghassan resurrected. Zahran, Yasmine. Stacey International, ©2006 180 p. $37.00 A Palestinian-born archaeologist trained in the US and France, Zahran here completes her quartet on pre-Islamic Arabs by looking at the kingdom of Ghassan, the last Arab supremacy before Islam. During the sixth century, she explains, the kingdom was a strong ally of Rome, holding the Persians at bay, thus allowing the Empire to slaughter barbarians out west. It was through Ghassan that Arabs learned about the European world, and its federation of tribes was the first step to Arab unity. Though six historical figures narrate, she says this is not fictionalized history, but based on ancient and modern sources, inscriptions, archaeological finds, and oral traditions. (She also writes fiction, so there might be some confusion.) Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Co. DS156

978-975-8293-80-3

Amorium; a Byzantine city in Anatolia. Lightfoot, Chris and Mücahide Lightfoot. (Homer archaeological guides; 5) Homer Kitabevi, ©2007 180 p. $36.00 (pa) The tombs remain, of course, but so do pieces of the coffee cups, paving stones of churches, even some of the dwellings. Amorium prospered from Roman times through the Byzantine era. It was subsumed in the invasion of the Ottoman Turks and in essence disappeared from the Western world. Much was thought lost to modernity until it was rediscovered in 1836 and excavated beginning in the late 1980s. This unique treatment of what has become a very important archeological find takes readers on a sort of travel guide, with the term “travel” expanded to include not only space but time. With fold-out maps, color illustrations and accessible text this gives the history of Amorium, the fruits of its archeological sites and excavations, an analysis of the Amorian dynasty, and a very good bibliography. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DS156

978-1-902937-27-4

Excavating Catalhöyük; South, North and KOPAL area reports from the 1995-99 seasons. (CD-ROM included)

Mukerjee, Rudrangshu and Vir Sanghvi. Mercury Books, ©2006 274 p. $60.00 The “now” side of this oversized photo essay (12.25x12.25″) contains color photos of contemporary sites and scenes through many regions of India, including famous cities, events, and regional costumes. Flipped over, the “then” side of the book contains 19th- century photographs of India, including some fold-out panoramas of cities, sites, or festivals. The content of the captions is designed to promote the wonder of India rather than provide critical or historic information. Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing. DS451

978-90-04-15451-3

On the cusp of an era; art in the pre-Kusana world. Title main entry. Ed. by Doris Meth Srinivasan. BRILL, ©2007 402 p. $228.00 No book has been produced before on pre-Kusana art, and Srinivasan (State U. of New York-Stony Brook) attributes that to the fact that no fulllength study has been done of Kusana art—as opposed to art done during the Kusana period—that pre-Kusana art would have preceded. Contributors identified only by name take the plunge anyway, discussing general features and specific examples of art in South Asia about the beginning of the Christian era. Their topics include Saka and Kusana migrations in historical contexts, an Indo-Greek urban center in Gandhara, coinage from Iran to Gandhara, and multi-cultural systems in ancient India. DS625

2006-022942

978-0-313-33339-2

Culture and customs of Indonesia. Forshee, Jill. (Culture and customs of Asia) Greenwood Press, ©2006 237 p. $49.95 For students and general readers, Forshee (cultural anthropology, U. of California, Berkeley) describes the culture and customs of Indonesia, with specific emphasis on common people. Background is given on the land, people, and the country’s history; religion; past and modern literature and art; architecture and housing; cuisine and dress; gender, courtship, and marriage traditions; festivals and leisure activities; music, dance, and theater; and social customs and lifestyle. Attention is given to all the islands, not just Bali and Java.

Members of the Catalhöyük Teams. Ed. by Ian Hodder. (Catalhöyük research project; v.3: BIAA monograph no.37) McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2007 588 p. $138.00 Jointly published by the British Institute at Ankara and the McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, this is the third in a projected six volumes of reports documenting the excavations carried out by 130 archaeologists in several teams at the site from 1995-1999. Published in an oversized format (8.75x11.25″), the essays document the excavations in the South and North areas of the East Mound and the KOPAL (Konya Basin Palaeoenvironments Project) and are well illustrated with photos, drawings, tables, and plans. Two introductory chapters introduce the site and present a full summary of the excavation results (by Hodder, who is in the department of cultural and social anthropology at Stanford U., California). The CD-ROM contains videos of the site and its features. There is a list of references, but no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

DS632

DS289

Title main entry. Ed. by Marcia Reed and Paola Dematté. Getty Publications, ©2007 235 p. $45.00 Published in conjunction with an exhibition held at the Getty Research Institute in 2007-2008, this oversized catalog (8.75x11.25″) is filled with color and b&w plates of prints, paintings, and other objects produced in China and Europe that demonstrate the notions each culture had of the other. Several essays (three by Dematté) describe salient questions, including reception of Christianity, Chinese and European science, and European views of Chinese culture and history. Lengthy catalog entries accompany full-page plates of 37 works. Dematté teaches the history of Chinese art at the Rhode Island School of Design; Reed is with the Getty Research Institute.

2006-049041

978-90-04-15083-6

Beyond the legacy of Genghis Khan. Title main entry. Ed. by Linda Komaroff. (Islamic history and civilization. Studies and texts; v.64) BRILL, ©2006 652 p. $129.00 Taken from a symposium in June 2003, these 23 papers analyze the impact of the cultural, social, religious and political changes wrought by Genghis Khan’s invasion of western and eastern Asia in the early thirteenth century. Topics on culture and commerce in the Mongol world empire include cultural transmissions, diplomatic gifts, luxury goods, maritime trade, and political culture; those on the lifestyles at the courts of the ruling elite include interpretations of excavations, traditions, and survival; those on the art of the book describe the workings of a scriptorium, the intellectual implications of frontispieces, and legacies; those ion th arts and artistic interchange include paper, pottery, poetry and motifs; and those on religion examine patronage of astrologers, Islamic conversion, religious diversity and the Mongol legacy of dynastic legitimacy. The color and monochrome plates are well-chosen.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-008332

978-0-8248-3072-4

Art as politics; re-crafting identities, tourism, and power in Tana Toraja, Indonesia. Adams, Kathleen M. (Southeast Asia; politics, meaning, and memory) U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 286 p. $25.00 (pa) Adams (anthropology, Loyola U., Chicago) was intrigued by the death cults of the Sa’dan Toraja people, a Christian enclave in the mountains of South Sulawesi, Indonesia, a predominantly Muslin nation. She soon discovered that a lot of other people were too, and the place was already crawling with Western anthropologists and tourists. So she decided to study the impact of Christian conversion, modernization, and tourism on their art, religion, politics, and other cultural traits. DS721

2006-052861

978-0-89236-869-3

China on paper; European and Chinese works from the late sixteenth to the early nineteenth century.

–22–

DS727

2007-009706

978-1-85109-582-7

DS793

2005-024390

978-0-295-98543-5

Pop culture China!; media, arts, and lifestyle.

The art of ethnography; a Chinese “Miao album”.

Latham, Kevin. (Popular culture in the contemporary world) ABC-CLIO, ©2007 384 p. $85.00 For students, travelers, and other readers, this volume introduces the different aspects of Chinese popular culture, with a focus on trends that have occurred mostly since the 1970s. Latham (anthropology and sociology, U. of London, UK) provides historical and cultural background and discusses contemporary practices in mass media, television, radio, newspapers, magazines, film, the internet and telecommunications, leisure time, sports and martial arts, theatre, and popular music. These chapters are preceded by discussion of Chinese history, its political territories, and language.

Title main entry. Trans. by David Deal and Laura Hostetler. (Studies on ethnic groups in China) U. of Washington Press, ©2006 178 p. $40.00 During the 18th century, Qing China (1636-1911) was expanding south into areas where non-Chinese people lived, and books with pictures and descriptions of these exotic people, Miao albums, were compiled probably by minor officials in the administration the territories. Historians Deal (1939-2001) (Whitman College) and Hostetler (U. of Illinois-Chicago) reproduce and translate one such album, anonymous and untitled as most are, from sometime after 1797. It identifies 82 different ethnic groups residing in Guizhou, with a hand-painted illustration, textual description, and poem devoted to each.

DS727

2007-320492

978-962-209-797-1 DS796

Reading Chinese transnationalisms; society, literature, film. Title main entry. Ed. by Maria N. Ng and Philip Holden. Hong Kong University Pr., ©2006 238 p. $24.95 (pa) Exploring the imaginary communities of modernity and the emancipation of leaving one’s country behind, the contributors of these 12 essays go beyond postcolonialism and consider some of the concepts of Athwa Ong about history and lived cultural experience. Their topics include transnationalism in Hokkien-Philippines families from 1949 to 1975, diasporic agency as expressed in the Chinese Canadian restaurant menu, displacement in trans-East Asian literature, cultural and culinary ambivalence in the works of Sara Chin, Evelina Galang and Yoko Tawada, intertextuality and cultural dialog in Tripmaster Monkey, clarification of overseas Chinese literature, selling a hybridized culture on film, reading sexuality into Ang Lee’s The Wedding Banquet and Chay Yew’s Porcelin January Lim, the cinema of Tsai Ming-lang as a modernist genealogy, and the uses of the everyday as a form of sentimental return. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. DS753

2006-024694

978-0-8248-3149-3

Empire of great brightness; visual and material cultures of Ming China, 1368-1644. Clunas, Craig. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 288 p. $59.00 Clunas (Chinese and East Asian Art, SOAS, London) finds that along with the exquisite material culture of the Ming period came a golden age of drama and literature that took full advantage of the thriving printing industry. China of the Ming dynasty appeared to have it all, including intelligence and good looks, but it tended to be shallow and modish, was ruled by an unworthy elite, and had begun to discern the contempt with which it was beheld by the West. Clunas examines the underside of this complex culture, including differences in interpretation of human agency, differing cultures for direction and movement, cultures of text and orality, intellectual life, pleasure and play, excess, the underlying culture of violence, aging and death, and the influence of the remnant culture of the Ming. DS786

978-90-04-15520-6

Discoveries in western Tibet and the western Himalayas; essays on history, literature, archaeology and art; proceedings. Seminar of the International Association for Tibetan Studies (PIATS 2003) (2003, Oxford, the UK) Ed. by Amy Heller and Giacomella Orofino. (Brill’s Tibetan studies library; v.10/8) BRILL, ©2007 240 p. $93.00 Mnga’ris skor gsum and adjacent regions were integrated into the zone of the Tibetan empire since the seventh century, but their geography led over time to distinct patterns of trade and cross-influence with the polities of central Asia, Nepal, and India. The panel was called in order to encourage an interdisciplinary approach to the study of these regions. Not only did the topics include political history, religious and secular art, architecture, and literature produced in or for western Tibet and the western Himalayas, but the temporal range considered turned out to stretch from the Zhang zhung period to the late 20th century. No index is provided.

–23–

2007-010395

978-0-8248-3081-6

Mediasphere Shanghai; the aesthetics of cultural production. Des Forges, Alexander. (Studies of the Weatherhead East Asian Institute) U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 278 p. $55.00 According to Des Forges (Chinese, U. of Massachusetts), there are four narrative tropes that constitute the conceptual foundation on which the social reality of the Chinese city of Shanghai is built: “(1) simultaneity; different things happening at the same time; (2) interruption: breaks in continuity; (3) mediation; a position between two sides that defines those sides as internally coherent and mutually exclusive entities; and (4) excess: the drive to expand without limit and consume without end.” He examines the literary and visual dimensions of these narrative tropes as they developed in the genre of installment fiction set in Shanghai from the 1890s to the 1930s, arguing that they supply the imagery that defines the city and, more importantly, the very forms through with the city could be experienced as a business and entertainment center. DS855

2006-035363

978-0-8248-3035-9

Himiko and Japan’s elusive chiefdom of Yamatai; archaeology, history, and mythology. Kidder, J. Edward. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 401 p. $60.00 Japanese history alludes to a polity traditionally called Yamatai, ruled by a woman known today as Himiko, who ruled her own people and those of about 30 other chiefdoms through magic, and became known to the Chinese in 238 when she initiated emmissarial exchanges with the Wei court. Kidder (emeritus Japanese, International Christian U., Tokyo) explores the mystery of the kingdom and its ruler, drawing on extensive archaeological work that has been conducted since World War II. DS856

2006-024714

978-0-8248-3013-7

Heian Japan, centers and peripheries. Title main entry. Ed. by Mikael Adolphson et al. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 450 p. $50.00 Mostly American scholars of Japanese history and culture offer new approaches to and interpretations of the first three centuries of the Heian period, 794-1086, focusing on the real or imagined configurations of centers and peripheries along a number of dimensions, including politics, literature and the arts, religion, domestic life, and the Asian world. The 15 essays are from a June 2002 conference at Harvard University.

AFRICA (includes ANCIENT EGYPT), OCEANIA DT56

2006-011522

1-56656-654-1

A traveller’s history of Egypt. Adés, Harry. (Traveller’s histories) Interlink Publishing Group, ©2007 452 p. $14.95 (pa) Aimed at students and tourists visiting Egypt, this volume offers a concise summary of the sweep of Egyptian history from the first evidence of human habitation to contemporary times. The chronological rise and fall of kingdoms and governments constitutes most of the discussion, but some explorations of arts, literature, and the lives of ordinary Egyptians are interspersed throughout. Also included are appendixes listing pharaohs and heads of governments, as well as a chronology.

Art Book News Annual 2008

DT57

83-918250-3-5

DT61

Deir El-Behari in the Hellenistic and Roman periods; a study of an Egyptian temple based on Greek sources. Lajtar, Adam. (The journal of juristic papyrology; supplement 4) Warsaw U., ©2006 462 p. $119.00 From 1988 to 1990, and again in 1995 and 2002, Lajtar (archaeology, Warsaw U.-Cairo) documented reliefs and hieroglyphic inscriptions on the walls of the temple of Queen Hatshepsut at Deir el-Bahari, but he also discovered nearly 100 Greek inscriptions that had not been reported earlier, and made observations and corrections to many more that had been reported. Here he presents his findings on cult activities there during Ptolemaic and Roman times, and catalogs the sources of the Greek inscriptions. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. DT57

978-0-9740025-4-5

The mortuary temple of Senwosret III at Abydos. Wegner, Josef. (Publications of the Pennsylvania-Yale-Institute of Fine Arts/NYU Expedition to Egypt; no.8) Peabody Museum (Yale), ©2007 454 p. $170.00 Containing several fold-out drawings, and many b&w plates of finds, decorative elements, and satellite images of the site, this impressive, oversized volume (10.75x13.5″) presents a thorough account of five seasons of excavation carried out by Wegner (U. of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology) at the mortuary temple as part of the joint Pennsylvania-Yale-Institute of Fine Arts/NYU Expedition to Abydos. The various buildings of the mortuary complex are described, including the central water channel system. Subsequent chapters describe the cult building and its forecourt, with detailed chapters on the statuary and other decoration, and the ceramic deposits. The sealing corpus receive lengthy treatment, including discussion of the administration to be deduced from the seals. Indexes of Egyptian personal names and Egyptian words, phrases, and titles as well as a general index are provided. Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Co. DT60

978-0-85698-169-2

More usefully employed; Amelia B. Edwards, writer, traveller and campaigner for ancient Egypt. Moon, Brenda. (Occasional publication; 15) Egypt Exploration Society, ©2006 319 p. $70.00 Moon seeks to presents a fuller biography of novelist and founder of the Egypt Exploration Society Edwards (1831-92) than previous writers by drawing on a wider range of sources. She was virtually forgotten outside the field of Egyptology until the surge in women’s studies towards the end of the 20th century, she says, but the wealth of information about her in archive collections and in her unpublished writing has still not been adequately mined. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. DT61

978-1-84217-229-2

Current research in Egyptology; proceedings.

978-1-84217-262-9

Current research in Egyptology; proceedings. Annual Current Research in Egyptology (7th: 2006: Institute of Archaeology) Ed. by Maria Cannata. Oxbow Books, ©2007 176 p. $48.00 (pa) This volume contains 13 papers from postgraduate students presenting at the Sixth Annual Current Research in Egyptology Symposium, held at the UK’s U. of Cambridge in January 2005. Among the topics examined in the multidisciplinary papers are children and the dead in New Kingdom Egypt, Egyptian artifacts from Central and South Asia, royal women’s tombs in the Valley of the Queens, the material significance of predynastic and early dynastic palettes, and Egyptian royal women and diplomatic activity during the New Kingdom. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Annual Current Research in Egyptology (6th: 2005: Institute of Archaeology) Ed. by Rachel Mairs and Alice Stevenson. Oxbow Books, ©2007 173 p. $48.00 (pa) This volume contains 13 papers from postgraduate students presenting at the Seventh Annual Current Research in Egyptology Symposium, held at the UK’s U. of Oxford in April 2006. The proceedings are multidisciplinary in nature and include such topics as the significance of manifestations of the dead as evidenced in texts from the Old Kingdom to the Coptic period, radiocarbon dating of ancient Egyptian mummies and their associated artifacts, the archival history of Coptic documents from Jeme Held in the British Library, cattle petroglyphs in the eastern desert of Egypt, new findings of Meroitic pottery from Sudan, the locational significance of scatological references in the Coffin Texts, and the localization of the Shasu-land of Rameses II’s rhetorical texts. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. DT61

1-84217-220-4

Current research in Egyptology; proceedings. Annual Current Research in Egyptology (5th: 2004: Durham, UK) Ed. by Rachael J. Dann. Oxbow Books, ©2006 157 p. $48.00 (pa) Postgraduate students from around the world report on recent research in the field of Egyptology. Many of the 13 papers explore various aspects of the Egyptian language and ancient Egyptian literature. Others address such topics as the ritual meaning of the materials used to construct Tut’Ankhamun’s body armor, and the potential of using stable isotope analysis to investigate dietary patterns in pre- dynastic Egypt. The volume is not indexed. Editor Dann teaches archaeology at the U. of Durham. Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Company. DT62

978-1-906137-00-7

Mere scraps of rough wood?; 17th-18th dynasty stick shabtis in the Petrie Museum and other collections. Whelan, Paul. (Golden House publications Egyptology; 6) Golden House Publications, ©2007 151 p. $50.00 (pa) Ancient Egyptian shabtis are small figures ranging from fine art to mere lumps of various materials that served various purposes in tombs for nearly two thousand years and survive in many numbers. Whelan studies a group of wooden shabtis characteristic of the 17th and 18th dynasties. He begins with those in the collection of Flinders Petrie, who made the remark about mere scraps of rough wood, and expands to consider nearly two hundred. There is no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DT62

978-0-86159-164-0

The Sphinx revealed; a forgotten record of pioneering excavations. Usick, Patricia and Deborah Manley. (BMP Research Paper; 164) The British Museum Press, ©2007 76 p. $50.00 (pa) The books were never lost, of course—this is the British Museum, after all—and had been duly cataloged when acquired. But while the library and archives at the Department of Ancient Egypt and Sudan were being moved, people noticed these two volumes and realized that one else had noticed them for a long time. They were the text and atlas of Henry Salt’s (1780-1827) Memoir on Pyramids and Sphinx; he was the British Consul General in Egypt from 1816 until he died. The text, reprinted here, describes the discoveries by Genoese mercantile captain Giovanni Caviglia (1770-1845) in 1817, including the survey and excavation of the surrounding necropolis. All the extant drawings are also reproduced. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DT63

2007-004713

978-0-87586-521-8

Building the Great Pyramid in a year; an engineer’s report.

Please verify price and availability by contacting publishers or book vendors.

Art Book News Annual 2008

Fonte, Gerard C. A. Algora Publishing, ©2007 205 p. $22.95 (pa) Fonte is a practicing engineer with a private firm and has some 30 years of varied hands-on experience ranging from commercial products to military designs. He offers a forensic-engineering exploration of the construction of the Egyptian pyramids. Through a close examination of the clues and relics left behind, and working under the assumption that the Egyptians were intelligent and creative, Fonte concludes that the Great Pyramid at Giza could have been constructed in four to six years by 4,000 workers—far less time than the estimate of 25,000 workers laboring over 20 years favored by most archaeologists. Illustrated with b&w photographs and diagrams, the text is academic but accessible to the general reader.

–24–

DT63

2007-016146

978-0-313-32580-9

The pyramids. Hellum, Jennifer. (Greenwood guides to historic events of the ancient world) Greenwood Press, ©2007 148 p. $45.00 After providing historical context for the building of the still- admired pyramids, Hellum (U. of Auckland, New Zealand), who has excavated in various parts of Egypt, discusses their key role in ancient Egyptian religion and how they were built and decorated. Though she mentions the Egyptian system of forced labor, she does not mention Hebrew slaves as being among the labor pool. The volume includes a timeline of Egyptian dynasties and kings, a map of the Old Kingdom, pyramid profiles, a glossary, lightly annotated bibliography, and illustrations. DT73

978-80-7308-154-6

DT73

2006-941012

978-1-885923-46-2

Sacred space and sacred function in ancient Thebes; proceedings. Theban workshop. Ed. by Peter F. Dorman and Betsy M. Bryan. (Studies in ancient oriental civilization; v.61) The Oriental Institute, ©2007 192 p. $35.00 (pa) The September 2003 workshop in London was the first in the series to be held outside the US and the first to have its proceedings published, though papers from earlier ones have been published separately. Scholars from Europe, the US, and Australia present 11 studies on such topics as archaeological and textual evidence for the function of the Botanical Garden of Karnak in the initiation ritual, and Christian use of pharaonic space in western Thebes. No index is provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Abusir X; The pyramid complex of Raneferef at Abusir; the papyrus archive.

DT73

Posener-Kriéger, Paule et al. (Excavations of the Czech Institute of Egyptology) Czech Institute of Egyptology, ©2006 465 p. $220.00 Abusir is the location of the discovery of the earliest papyri relating to the royal mortuary cult in a pyramid complex. This work compiles b&w photos of papyri fragments from the mortuary temple of ancient Egyptian King Raneferef, with facing pages of b&w line drawings of hieroglyphic transcriptions, from the archives of the Czech Institute of Egyptology, Charles University, Prague. A paleography of the papyrus archives is included, along with a glossary of ancient Egyptian titles and personal names. The fragments were originally cataloged by Paule Posener-Kriéger, and are translated here by Miroslav Verner and Hana Vymazalová. The book is distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Kanawati, Naguib. (The Australian Centre for Egyptology; report 24) Aris & Philips, ©2006 78+ p. $130.00 (pa) The tomb was excavated during the middle 1990s by the Australian Centre and the Egyptian Supreme Council of Antiquities. Kanawati discusses the tomb’s owner and dependents, date, architectural features, burial apartments, and scenes and inscriptions. Colleagues contribute chapters on color conventions in reconstructing the scenes and on the excavation and finds themselves. Following the numbered 78 pages are about as many more with color and monochrome plates, some on folding-out pages. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

DT73

80-7308-130-X

Abusir XIV; faience inlays from the funerary temple of King Raneferef, Raneferef’s substitute decoration programme. (CD-ROM included) Landgráfová, Renata. (Excavations of the Czech Institute of Egyptology) Czech Institute of Egyptology, ©2006 120 p. $70.00 (pa) Langráfová presents as complete as possible a catalogue of faience inlays and tablets of Egyptian Blue discovered in the king’s fifth-dynasty funerary temple at the royal pyramid cemetery of Abusir. Though every known piece is described, she limits the illustrations, especially the many that are very difficult to tell apart from photographs or line drawings. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DT73

80-7308-114-8

Abusir XV; stone vessels from the mortuary complex of Raneferef at Abusir. (CD-ROM included)

DT83

978-0-9549627-4-6

Geoarchaeology; underwater archaeology in the canopic region in Egypt. Stanley, Jean-Daniel. (Oxford Centre for Maritime Archaeology; monograph 2) Oxford U.School of Archaeology, ©2007 128 p. $100.00 Of interest to geologists as well as archaeologists, the five chapters of this volume describe exploration and analysis of the region now known as Aboukir Bay in Egypt. Originally situated high above the mouth of the Nile, the area was the site of a major trading harbor and settlements until a cataclysmic event submerged it in the mid-8th century CE. Published in an oversized format (8.5x12″), the analysis describes the geologic and archaeologic record. A chapter is included on vibracore analysis. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

–25–

2006-049915

978-90-04-11385-5

Ancient Egyptian chronology. Title main entry. Ed. by Erik Hornung et al. (Handbook of Oriental studies; section 1, The Near and Middle East; v.83) BRILL, ©2006 517 p. $215.00 There are exceptions, of course, for certain theories of history and certain individual historians, but in general, knowing when something happened is an important starting point for investigating what actually happened, why it happened, its consequences, and other matters of concern to historians. It turns out that the chronology of ancient Egypt is not as consensual as some might like, and scholars here—named but not otherwise identified—grapple with some problems and solution involved with creating such a consensus. They look at Egyptian chronological tradition and method of dating, relative chronology such as dynasties, and absolute chronology such as dendrology and the heliacal rising of Sirius. A conclusion is followed by chronological table for the dynastic period, 2900-323 BC. DT87

Vlcková, Petra. (Excavations of the Czech Institute of Egyptology) Czech Institute of Egyptology, ©2006 152 p. $70.00 (pa) One of the important features of the Old Kingdom mortuary complex of Reneferef at Abusir, says Vlcková, is that the artifacts are found within their archaeological context. He catalogs all the stone vessels uncovered by excavation at the site, on the accompanying disk, and draws some help from colleagues to discuss such aspects as classification and the material characteristics of the assemblage. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. DT73

0-85668-810-X

The Teti Cemetery at Saqqara; v.8: The tomb of Inumin.

2006-032115

1-931707-90-1

Akhenaten and Tutankhamun; revolution and restoration. Silverman, David P. et al. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2006 196 p. $24.95 This beautifully illustrated volume presents an accessible account and new interpretation of the radical religious ideas and policies of the Egyptian ruler Akhenaten, their rituals, artistic motifs, and festivals, and the return to tradition instituted by his son and successor, Tutankhamun. Archaeological research and evidence found in sculpture and other art are cited throughout. The text is accompanied by color plates, many of art works at the U. of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology (with which all three authors, Silverman, Josef W. Wegner, and Jennifer Houser Wegner, are affiliated: they are also part of the department of Near Eastern languages and civilization at the U. of Pennsylvania). Many photos of the site of Amarna, maps, plans, and reconstruction drawings are included. DT87

2006-284502

1-59102-401-3

Who killed King Tut?; using modern forensics to solve a 3,300-year-old mystery; with new data on the Egyptian CT Scan. King, Michael R. and Gregory M. Cooper. Prometheus Books, ©2006 287 p. $19.00 (pa) King is with the Utah Dept. of Public Safety and Homeland Security; Cooper is with the U.S. Dept. of Homeland Security. They teach criminal profiling nationally and abroad and are the co-authors of Analyzing Criminal Behavior II. In their latest collaboration, they apply contemporary crime-solving techniques in a forensic inquiry into the death of King Tut, concluding that he most likely was murdered. Illustrated with b&w and color photographs, the text will appeal to general readers interested in mysteries, true crime, and history.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HISTORY (continued)

DT1302

DT154

0-7103-1160-5

The Kenana handbook of Sudan. Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Gwynvay Hopkins. Kegan Paul International, ©2007 884 p. $49.95 Sponsored by the Kenana Sugar Company, Sudan’s industrial powerhouse, this informational handbook is presented with the stated intention of incorporating all significant aspects of contemporaneous and historical Sudan. Copiously illustrated, it’s 55 chapters first provide overviews of prehistory and archaeology; discuss cultural, political, and economic history; introduce the history of pilgrims and traders; review environmental conditions and Sudan’s flora and fauna; describe tourism opportunities and cultural experiences; and explore Sudan’s arts and literature. Just under half of the contributions are dedicated to discussion of the economy, industry, and doing business in Sudan and discuss investment opportunities, different economic sectors, economic policy, and related topics. Also included are essays on current Sudanese politics, the Sudan Interim National Constitution, and the Sudan Comprehensive Peace Agreement and “fact files” on Sudan’s current leaders and useful words and phrases. Overall, the work appears to be intended mainly to present a positive view of the country to potential visitors and investors. DT380

2006-017549

978-0-87480-884-1

Living with pottery; ethnoarchaeology among the Gamo of southwest Ethiopia. Arthur, John W. (Foundations of archaeological inquiry) U. of Utah Press, ©2006 154 p. $25.00 (pa) Arthur (anthropology, U. of South Florida) looks to one of the few regions of the world that still relies entirely upon home-made pottery to store and prepare household goods such as coffee, grain, and water, in preference to the otherwise ubiquitous plastic. His fieldwork, reported here, includes a study of the Gamo, the means of their procurement and production of low-fire pottery, distribution of the pottery depending on location and class, primary uses of pottery and its useful life, mending and reuse, and methods of discard. His conclusions about Gamo pottery have significant implications for related studies in ethnoarcheology and archeology. DT450

2007-004341

978-0-313-33177-0

Culture and customs of Rwanda. Adekunle, Julius. (Culture and customs of Africa) Greenwood Press, ©2007 164 p. $49.95 Bridewealth, a kind of reverse dowry, serves not only to solemnize and stabilize a marriage but to unite families and clans. Newspaper sales were once low because Rwandans preferred to read in groups. Adekunle (history and anthropology, Monmouth U.) gives readers thousands of fascinating facts without glossing over the tragedies of the recent past. He focuses on the daily lives of the average Rwandans, those who prepare meals, work farms and desk jobs, and take their children to school. He gives a basic history, then describes Rwandan religious beliefs and world view, literature and media, art and architecture, cuisine and traditional dress, gender roles, marriage, family life, social customs, music and dance. He also provides the Rwandan National Anthem and its English translation, a glossary, and a well-chosen bibliography. DT546

2006-017936

978-0-313-33203-6

Culture and customs of the Central African Republic. Woodfork, Jacqueline. (Culture and customs of Africa) Greenwood Press, ©2006 191 p. $49.95 Woodfork (history, Whitman College) provides an introductory overview of the Central African Republic, one of the least know countries in African, both to other Africans and people of different continents. Coverage includes an historical overview and information on geography, economics and politics, followed by individual chapters exploring various aspects of Centrafrican culture and customs: religion and worldview; literature and the media; art, architecture, and living patterns; cuisine and traditional dress; gender roles, marriage, and family; social customs and lifestyle; and music and dance. The text also includes a chronology, glossary, and selected bibliography. Academic but accessible to the general reader.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-028864

0-313-33147-2

Culture and customs of Angola. Oyebade, Adebayo O. (Culture and customs of Africa) Greenwood Press, ©2007 180 p. $49.95 Aimed at students and general readers, this volume provides a basic understanding of the culture and customs of Angola. In the introduction, Oyebade (history, Tennessee State U.) briefly recounts Angola’s history and supplies information on the country’s geography, economy, and politics. Subsequent chapters focus on areas such as religion, literature, architecture, leisure activities, gender roles, and music. Supplemental materials include a chronology, glossary, and suggestions for further reading. DT1959

978-1-86914-121-9

Mpumalanga; history and heritage. Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Delius. U. of KwaZulu-Natal Press, ©2007 522 p. $84.95 Delius (history, U. of the Witwatersrand, South Africa) brings together 11 chapters in a study of the history of Mpulmalanga, South Africa, aiming to bring the history of the province more interest and understanding and stimulate debates about history, heritage, and identity. Accompanied by color and b&w photos of the region, the chapters, which focus on themes that have received little attention, consider geology, archaeology, rock art, traditions of early settlement, frontier conflicts, the role of blacks in the South African War, conservation, economic development, land struggles, politics, and industrial development in the twentieth century. Contributors are history, archaeology, economic history, and geology and mineralogy researchers from South Africa. Distributed in the US by ISBS. DT2405

978-0-7969-2179-6

Imagining the city; memories and cultures in Cape Town. Title main entry. Ed. by Sean Field et al. Human Sciences Res. Council, ©2007 240 p. $27.95 (pa) For the editors (all affiliated with the Centre for Popular Memory, U. of Cape Town, South Africa), Cape Town, South Africa is “an ambiguously African City” that still struggles with overcoming the legacy of 300 years of colonialism, slavery, segregation, and apartheid social engineering. They present 11 chapters that examine the politics of memory as concerns this legacy in Cape Town. Opening chapters examine how trauma and pain are manifested in memory and include discussions of the oral history of the African township of Langa, the forced removals of the apartheid era, post-apartheid urban violence, and identity construction among Nigerian immigrants in Cape Town. The focus of the remaining six chapters are on resilient cultures and they discuss oral histories of Muslim cooking, the cultural milieu of Cape jazz musicians, contemporary “nation conscious” hip hop, rugby as social ritual, and contemporary visual arts practices. Books from Human Sciences Research Council, based in South Africa, are distributed in the US by Independent Publishers Group. DU107

978-0-642-27620-9

National treasures from Australia’s great libraries. Title main entry. National Library of Australia, ©2005 162 p. $39.95 (pa) Featuring a wealth of objects, only some of them books, this volume provides the reader with a hint of the rich history and culture of Australia as these are preserved in the collections of its libraries. Printed in an oversized format (9.5x12″), the letters, log books, books, maps, death masks, armor, photos, and other objects are depicted in full-page color plates along with related materials and accompanied by an essay on the facing page. Distributed by Antipodes Books & Beyond. DU125

2006-021200

978-0-8166-4922-8

Shimmering screens; making media in an aboriginal community. Deger, Jennifer. (Visible evidence; v.19) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 267 p. $22.50 (pa) In this ethnography, Deger (anthropology, Macquarie U., Australia) investigates how the aboriginal Yolngu people of the tropical north of Australia engage with modern media technology, particularly focusing on how the Yolngu have deployed video production to their own purposes. Although building on anthropological theorizations of mimesis found in the writings of Walter Benjamin and Michael Taussig, she differs from those earlier authors in seeing Yolngu video mimesis as a modality for “revelation,” as opposed to “representation.” Yolngu mimeses “is about a bringing forth, a connecting and making visible the immanent underlying Ancestral relations” of the Yolngu.

–26–

NORTH AMERICAN INDIAN ART, ARCHAEOLOGY, U.S. HISTORY

E78

E61

Tisdale, Shelby J. Photography by Addison Doty. Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2006 215 p. $50.00 In her later years, oil heiress, fashion icon and art patron Millicent Rogers promoted and collected Indian and Hispano arts and crafts. Her collection of Navajo and Zuni silver and turquoise, Hopi silver work, and Pueblo stone and shell jewelry provided the foundation for the Millicent Rogers Museum in Taos, which has reproduced in this volume some of its finest pieces. Tisdale, former director of the Rogers Museum and current director of the Museum of Indian Arts and Culture/Laboratory of Anthropology, includes a biography of Rogers and the historical and social background of the pieces in the collection.

2006-027684

978-0-8061-3805-3

Gordon R. Willey and American archaeology; contemporary perspectives. Society for American Archaeology. Meeting (2003: Milwaukee, WI) Ed. by Jeremy A. Sabloff and William L. Fash. U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2007 252 p. $34.95 American archaeologist Gordon Randolph Willey (1913-2002) is perhaps best known for his pioneering work Prehistoric Settlement Patterns in the Viru Valley, Peru (1953), but he made numerous other contributions to his field while conducting expeditions through South and Central America and in the southeastern United States. In this volume, Sabloff (anthropology, U. of Pennsylvania) and Fash (Central American and Mexican archaeology and ethnology, Harvard U.) present 10 essays that both assess Willey’s influence on archaeology and explore enduring concerns that animated his career. These latter include great art styles and the rise of complex societies, the causes of the collapse of Mayan civilization, and the ideological underpinnings of the mythico-historical figure of Quetzalcoatl. E77

2007-011970

978-1-85109-817-0

Encyclopedia of American Indian history; 4v. Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce E. Johansen and Barry M. Pritzker. ABC-CLIO, ©2007 1422 p. $395.00 The editors of this 4-volume encyclopedia address the often profoundly tragic history of Native Americans with a careful focus on the viewpoint of Native Americans and attention to the issues that concern them today. Rather than organizing the material into A-Z entries, the material is grouped into six initial chronological essays, followed by groups of essays (arranged alphabetically) and organized by themes. The themes are issues, events, culture, governments, and people and groups. A sampling of individual topics includes Bering Strait Theory, education, genocide, Spanish influence, and the Red Power movement. The final volume contains descriptions of the culture, traditions, and history of the individual Indian nations, grouped into major geographical region. A section of primary source documents concludes the essays and a substantial list of resources is provided. This is a thoughtfully prepared resource that will compel students to read beyond their initial topic of interest. Johansen is at the U. of Nebraska, Omaha; Pritzker is at Skidmore College. E78

2006-013866

978-0-295-98636-4

2005-029390

978-0-89013-482-5

Fine Indian jewelry of the Southwest; the Millicent Rogers Museum collection.

E78

2006-023848

978-0-87417-696-4

Great Basin rock art; archaeological perspectives. Title main entry. Ed. by Angus R. Quinlan. U. of Nevada Press, ©2007 184 p. $39.95 Quinlan (archaeology of religion, U. of Southampton, England) presents ten essays examining Great Basin petroglyphs from archaeological and contemporary Native American cultural perspectives. Contributors explore ethnographic interpretations of rock art and discuss the past and present social contexts of a number of sites in Nevada and Southeastern Oregon—relating them to settlement and dating, religion and ritual, and a modern push for more gender-inclusive analysis, among other topics. E78

2006-935845

978-0-9789251-0-9

Homeland; an archaeologist’s view of Yellowstone country’s past. Lahren, Larry. Cayuse Press, ©2006 239 p. $39.95 (pa) Vignettes by an archaeologist who has spent his life and career near Livingston, Montana, bring readers into the archaeology, geology, and history of the Greater Yellowstone ecosystem. His essays integrate rites of passage in his own life with science, conjecture, and data on the various Native American tribes that lived in the area over the course of 11,000 years. He offers an overview of archaeological methods and of the evolution of the field of archaeology itself. The book’s 11x8.5″ format displays b&w contemporary and historical photos and illustrations. Lahren has a doctorate degree in North American archaeology and established Montana’s first contract archaeology firm.

Art of the Northwest coast.

E78

Jonaitis, Aldona. U. of Washington Press, ©2006 322 p. $26.95 (pa) This comprehensive, generously illustrated survey of the Native arts of the Pacific Northwest Coast spans the region from Puget Sound to Alaska and proceeds from prehistoric times to the present. Jonaitis incorporates into the region’s social history the observations of anthropologists, art historians and Native peoples to reveal how a complex web of factors informed varied responses to the changes and challenges brought about by contact with Europeans. Jonaitis is director of the University of Alaska Museum of the North and professor of anthropology at the University of Alaska Fairbanks.

Looting Spiro Mounds; an American King Tut’s tomb.

E78

2006-034418

978-0-7591-0872-1

California prehistory; colonization, culture, and complexity.

–27–

978-0-8061-3813-8

La Vere, David. U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2007 255 p. $24.95 (pa) Vere (history, U. of North Carolina, Wilmington) recounts the looting of the Spiro Mounds in eastern Oklahoma in 1935, which contained a large amount of pre-Columbian art. He describes the founding and settlement of the area from 800 A.D., the culture and life of the people, and the decline of the chiefdom by 1450 A.D. These chapters are interwoven with the story of how the Pocola Mining Company found the Mounds in the 1930s and looted the objects, the fight with them by U. of Oklahoma’s anthropologist Forrest Clements over who had property rights, Works Progress Administration excavation, and past and present theories about Spiro and its people. E98

Title main entry. Ed. by Terry L. Jones and Kathryn A. Klar. AltaMira Press, ©2007 394 p. $99.95 Jones (anthropology, California Polytechnic State University-San Luis Obispo) and Klar (Celtic studies, linguistics, University of CaliforniaBerkeley) gather contributors to examine California’s prehistory and archaeology. The book’s 20 chapters cover 10 geographic areas and eight specialized topics, including terrestrial and marine paleoenvironments, linguistics prehistory, trade, rock art, and colonization. While most of the material originated at a 2004 symposium, there are additional chapters on coastal paleoenvironments, Paleo-Indian technologies, and DNA. B&w photos, maps, and line drawings are included. The book will be of interest to scholars of California prehistory and archaeology.

2006-050078

978-0-9622777-3-3

About face; self-portraits by Native American, First Nations, and Inuit artists. Pearlstone, Zena et al. Wheelwright Museum, ©2006 185 p. $45.00 (pa) Pearlstone (California State U.) and six fellow art historians and critics present this collection of 20th-century self portraits by 48 Native American, First Nation, or Inuit artist. The self-representations range from realistic to metaphoric, and take shape in pottery, sculpture, drawing, painting, and digital and film photography. The five accompanying essays explore the history of self-portraiture in the West beginning with the Renaissance; discuss the evolution of Native American self portraits from early representations of communal identity to increased emphasis on the individual; and interpret the diverse personal, cultural, spiritual, and political themes present in the art. This book was created for a 2005-2006 exhibition at the Wheelwright Museum of the American Indian in New Mexico. Oversize: 9x12″.

Art Book News Annual 2008

E98

2006-297066

978-1-58008-767-4

E99

The desert Southwest; four thousand years of life and art. Hayes, Allan and Carol Hayes. Photographs by John Blom. Ten Speed Press, ©2006 200 p. $24.95 (pa) Writing from a layperson’s point of view, the authors present a history of Southwest art, artifacts, and events, with photos of objects from the Museums of the Arizona Historical Society, as well as areas. They draw from their experiences as collectors, which stimulated their research on the subject. Beginning with prehistory, they explore the area of southwest California, Arizona, and New Mexico, and describe artifacts of the Spanish, Anglos, and American Indians. Allan Hayes is a writer and art director, and Carol Hayes is an antiques and Indian art dealer. They are joined by Blom, who is a photographer. E98

2006-049750

978-0-06-115369-3

Identity by design; tradition, change, and celebration in Native women’s dresses. Title main entry. Ed. by Emil Her Many Horses. Collins, ©2007 160 p. $24.95 Showcasing the world-renowned collection of Native American dresses held by the Smithsonian’s National Museum of the American Indian, this volume presents an array of Native women’s clothing from the Plains, Plateau and Great Basin regions of the US and Canada from the 1830s to the present. In addition to color plates of the clothing, essays by editor Her Many Horses (NMAI curator) and by Colleen Cutschall and Janet Catherine Berlo offer a detailed description of the artistry and significance of the garments.

2007-001244

978-0-8156-3139-2

Archaeology of the Iroquois; selected readings and research sources. Title main entry. Ed. by Jordan E. Kerber. (The Iroquois and their neighbors) Syracuse U. Pr., ©2007 557 p. $45.00 (pa) Kerber (anthropology, Native American studies, and archaeological collections, Colgate U.) compiles 24 recent articles on Iroquoian archaeology, written mostly from the 1990s on and drawn from regional and international journals, edited volumes, and conference proceedings. The book is meant to be used in college and graduate courses in archaeology and Native American studies. Coverage encompasses origins of the Iroquois and the Iroquois Confederacy; Precolumbian dynamics, subsistence, settlement patterns, sociopolitical organization, and demography; Postcolumbian dynamics; material culture studies; and contemporary Iroquois perspectives, repatriation, and collaborative archaeology. The final section consists of an extensive bibliography of sources on archaeological sites and research in both Canada and the US. Article authors are researchers, curators, anthropologists, archaeologists, and others from the US and Canada, in addition to members of the Seneca Nation and Tuscarora Nation. E99

2006-014322

978-0-8173-5365-0

Archaeology of the Lower Muskogee Creek Indians, 17151836.

Title main entry. Ed. by Lucy Fowler Williams et al. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2005 203 p. $49.95 This catalog’s essays grapple with the conflict between the original context, symbolism, use, and sacred meaning of the 78 objects discussed and their present location within a museum. Written by Native Americans, the essays that accompany the objects—each appears in a fullpage color plate in oversized format (9.25x12.25″)—vary from poems to thoughtful essays of the object’s origins, use, and manufacture. An initial essay describes the history of the collection.

Foster, Thomas. U. of Alabama Press, ©2007 292 p. $35.95 (pa) They were a diverse people who populated parts of the southern US and influences development substantially, particularly during the historic period (1540-1836). Their location came from migrations throughout the historic and prehistoric periods but their towns were stable, sometimes for hundreds of years. They lived in clans, and those clans extended across towns across a wide area. The Muskogee Indians (in this particular case also called the “Creek”) have therefore had significant influence in the development of the southeastern US. From his research on the nation and its artifacts as well as oral histories and other sources of information, Foster (anthropology, Northern Kentucky U.) believes we can better understand the Muskogee nation if we study it across territory rather than time, comparing town to town rather than segments of time. He uses as support environmental evidence and clues from pottery, architecture, and with contributors, botanical and animal remains.

E99

E99

E98

2005000385

1-931707-80-4

Native American voices on identity, art, and culture; objects of everlasting esteem.

2005-018805

978-1-889963-80-8

Alaska Eskimo footwear.

2006-017758

978-0-8173-5421-3

Archaeology of the Moundville chiefdom. (reprint, 1998)

Oakes, Jill and Rick Riewe. U. of Alaska Press, ©2007 162 p. $54.95 The first chapter of this rich study provides a short history of the Alaska Eskimo peoples and their environment. Subsequent chapters describe tools and skin preparation and the boots, parkas, and other wear created from a variety of materials, including seal skin and bird skin. Throughout, the use and variety of the manufacture and type of garment and footwear are described in detail, making this a rich resource of Eskimo people, history, and culture. The volume, which is oversized (8.75x11.25″), is heavily illustrated with color photos of seamstresses at work, examples of footwear and other garments, and historic photos. A husband and wife team, both teach at the U. of Manitoba; Oakes in the department of environment and geography, Riewe in zoology.

Title main entry. Ed. by Vernon J. Knight, Jr. and Vincas P. Steponaitis. U. of Alabama Press, ©2007 203 p. $32.95 (pa) They lived near the Black Warrior River from about 1020 to about 1650, and in their prime they numbered about a thousand. They created homes, enterprises and what appeared to be a thriving culture in mounds surrounding a central plaza. Now their town is one of the largest and best-preserved Mississippian sites in the US and also one of the most intensely studied. These nine essays come from a 1993 symposium, and a new preface to this edition by the editors describes the latest discoveries and theories. The researchers describe the town’s quick decline from a market center to a ceremonial site, population trends from habitations and burials, domestic life and health, human subsistence as indicated by stable-isotope data, and relations with outlying sites.

E99

E99

2007-005071

978-0-87480-846-9

The architecture of Chaco Canyon, New Mexico. Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen H. Lekson. U. of Utah Press, ©2007 263 p. $55.00 Lekson (anthropology, Museum of Natural History, U. of Colorado, Boulder) assembles eight essays on the architecture of the ruins at Chaco Canyon. Most of the essays are based on papers given at a conference held in September and October of 2000 at the U. of New Mexico and at Chaco Canyon, part of a larger project called the “Chaco Synthesis,” which hosted small conferences synthesizing Chaco Project fieldwork. They focus on the “great houses,” which were built from 850 to 1150. Specific questions concern what Chaco looked like during this era, not comprehensively but in terms of current approaches to studying the great houses, descriptions of the two major architectural forms (great houses and great kivas), and readings of the canyon and its architecture. Participants are both experienced scholars on the subject, including those from the Chaco Project and the Navajo Nation’s Chaco Protection Sites Program, and those providing new insight on the subject. Diagrams and b&w photos are included.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-366134

978-1-55365-189-5

Arctic spirit; Inuit art from the Albrecht Collection at the Heard Museum. Hessel, Ingo. Douglas & McIntyre, ©2006 240 p. $55.00 A selection of the Inuit art collection of E. Daniel and Martha L. Albrecht, based in the Heard Museum in Phoenix, is the subject of this handsome oversized (9.75x11.25″) catalog, which was published to accompany a traveling exhibition. Expanding beyond description, the entries that accompany each work of art contain lengthy commentary by the work’s artist, making this an unusually rich resource for the contemporary art and people of Canada’s Arctic. An introductory section discusses the larger context of Inuit art and includes prehistoric examples, also from the Albrecht Collection. The volume is illustrated with copious color plates of the best quality. Distributed in the US by PGW/Perseus.

–28–

E99

2006-018988

978-0-8203-2767-9

Art of the Cherokee; prehistory to the present. Power, Susan C. U. of Georgia Press, ©2007 295 p. $24.95 (pa) Power (emerita, Marshall U., Huntington, West Virginia) has produced an impressive history, chronicling the artistic production in all media of Cherokee artists from the earliest examples to contemporary artists. Organized chronologically and by media, Power describes in careful detail the development of artistic styles, objects’ use, the impact and influence of European settlers, and media and techniques. The history of the Cherokee people is a central theme. The volume is slightly oversized (8.5x11″) and beautifully illustrated with color plates of works and historic photos. E99

2006-023554

978-0-8165-2489-1

Athapaskan migrations; the archaeology of Eagle Lake, British Columbia.

E99

978-0-7748-1323-5

Be of good mind; essays on the Coast Salish. Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce Granville Miller. U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 323 p. $85.00 The Coast Salish, who ranged from western Washington state to British Columbia, were once thought to be a mere subsidiary of the more southerly Coast nation. Recent research shows, however, that the Coast Salish have a distinct culture and approach to faith and language, and these ten articles detail some of that research, covering what we now know about Coast Salish history and identity, religious tenets such as the honoring of ancestors, the narrative complexity of such scholars as Fred Ewans, language revival programs of the Nooksack tribe ad the Stolo Nation, conceptions of warfare and pacifism, and the role of ethnography in the interpretation of archeology related to the Coast Salish. Students and scholars will want to check out the paper on indigenous ethnology. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. E99

2006-024602

978-0-8061-3804-6

Blackfoot war art; pictographs of the reservation period, 1880-2000. Dempsey, L. James. U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2007 461 p. $45.00 Dempsey (native studies, U. of Alberta, Canada and member of the Blood Tribe of the Blackfoot Indians) surveys the representations of war in Blackfoot pictography from 1810 until 2000. Accompanying text interpreting the art, its evolution, and its significance, 160 images depict painted robes; war teepee covers, liners, and doors; and painted panels. Many works both pictured and not are discussed individually, with details of historical context and the conditions of their emergence into the catalogue of Blackfoot warrior art. E99

2006-101558

978-0-7591-0829-5

Chiefdoms and other archaeological delusions. Pauketat, Timothy R. (Issues in eastern Woodlands archaeology) AltaMira Press, ©2007 257 p. $29.95 (pa) Chiefdoms are one of the many core concepts developed by anthropologists that archaeologists have swallowed whole even when they have physical evidence to the contrary, claims Pauketat (anthropology, U. of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign). He shows how it has wreaked havoc with the study of Mississippian cultures in the Midwestern US. He also looks at community and control in the Southwest US, Mexico, and Mesopotamia.

–29–

2005-034286

978-0-89013-483-2

Classic Hopi and Zuni kachina figures. Portago, Andrea. Ed.by Barton Wright. Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2006 173 p. $55.00 Kachina carvings, called Katsintithu by the Hopi people, were originally given to the young to aid in religious instruction. Presented in this volume are 85 rare, classic-era (1880s-1940s) Hopi and Zuni carved dolls from private and public collections and 30 landscape photographs that give context to the kachinas. Wright, the author of many articles and books about Puebloan culture and Hopi kachinas, supplements Portago’s photographs with an essay about the systems and perceptions by which the Pueblo people negotiated their world. E99

E99

978-0-8173-1544-3

Griffin-Pierce, Trudy. (Contemporary American Indian studies) U. of Alabama Press, ©2006 185 p. $39.95 Following the federal government’s abolition of the Chiricahua Apache reservation, the Chiricahuas were declared “prisoners of war” and were forced into exile and imprisonment beginning in 1886 for some three decades. This volume is an ethnographic and historical study of how the Chiricahuas maintained and adapted their cultural identity during the years torn away from their homes. Major topics addressed include resistance to the institutionalized schooling forced on Chiricahua children, the cultural symbolism of the animal hide paintings of Naiche (the son of Cochise), and the maintenance and meaning of the Chiricahua Apache Girl’s Puberty Ceremony. E99

Matson, R. G. U. of Arizona Press, ©2007 182 p. $65.00 Reporting on archaeological research undertaken in the region of Eagle Lake in the west -central Interior Plateau of British Columbia, Canada, the central issues that concern Matson (emeritus, anthropology, U. of British Columbia, Canada) and Magne (manager of cultural resource services for Parks Canada and professor at U. of Calgary, Canada) are the recognition and dating of Athapaskan material culture and its implications for the arrival of the Chilcotin peoples and larger Athapaskan migrations. The methodologies employed in the investigation include ethnic group identification, settlement pattern analysis, lithic technological analysis, and dendochronology.

2006-013114

Chiricahua Apache enduring power; Naiche’s puberty ceremony paintings.

2007-009849

978-0-295-98727-9

A Kiowa’s odyssey; a sketchbook from Fort Marion. Title main entry. Ed. by Phillip Earenfight. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 230 p. $40.00 (pa) This volume presents a sketchbook of drawings created in 1877 by Etahdleuh Doanmoe illustrating the experiences of 72 Southern Plains Indians captured by the US Army in Oklahoma Territory in 1875. Doanmoe was one of those captured. The Indians, led by Lieutenant Richard Henry Pratt, were exiled to Fort Marion, Florida, and forced to adopt Western practices. The drawings show their capture, trek, and years at Fort Marion, with captions by Pratt. It is presented in facsimile form, reconstructed from sources at The Trout Gallery at Dickinson College in Pennsylvania and the Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript Library at Yale U., and supplemented with essays on the history of the events, Etahdleuh Doanmoe, the book’s reconstruction, and analysis of the drawings in terms of the Kiowa artistic tradition and other Fort Marion sketchbooks and drawings. Photos and other primary sources are included. Earenfight (art history, Dickinson College) is the director of The Trout Gallery. Other contributors are professors of art history and history, in addition to the curator of the Beinecke collection. The volume accompanies a traveling exhibition of the sketchbook. E99

2006-013499

978-0-8165-2481-5

Mimbres society. Title main entry. Ed. by Valli S. Powell-Martí and Patricia A. Gilman. U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 213 p. $50.00 Drawing on architecture and pottery, US and Canadian archaeologists explore the organizational complexity of the Mimbres people before, during, and after the Classic period, AD 1000-1130, in the southwestern US. They use architectural data to provide insight into family, household, communal, and community structure and also to complement analysis of the composition and design of the painted pottery that the Mimbres are best known for. E99

2005-052956

978-0-8061-3893-0

A Northern Cheyenne album. (reprint, 2006) Marquis, Thomas Bailey. Ed. by Margot Liberty. U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2007 286 p. $29.95 (pa) The 142 b&w photographs collected here were taken in the 1920s and 30s by physician and photographer Thomas Marquis, who spent more than a decade on the Northern Cheyenne reservation in Lame Deer, Montana. Anthropologist Liberty who taught on the reservation in the 1950s, offers scholarly captions to the photos depicting early reservation life for this formerly nomadic tribe. Alongside her text, commentary from former tribal president John Woodenlegs and other tribal elders give stories to the subjects, many of whom were personal friends, and offer rare insight into dwindling Northern Cheyenne historical tradition. Oversize: 9x9″. This is a paperback reprint of the 2006 cloth edition.

Art Book News Annual 2008

E99

2006-016065

978-0-8173-5366-7

E99

Plaquemine archaeology.

2006-022527

0-295-98652-2

Weaving is life; Navajo weavings from the Edwin L. & Ruth E. Kennedy Southwest Native American Collection.

Title main entry. Ed. by Mark A. Rees and Patrick C. Livingood. U. of Alabama Press, ©2007 266 p. $34.95 (pa) Named for the small Louisiana town along the Mississippi River, Plaquemine is the designation for the material remains and sites of preColumbian and proto-historic Native American societies extending from the Mississippi delta on the Gulf coast to just south of the Arkansas River. In this volume, Rees (anthropology, U. of Louisiana) and Livingood (anthropology, U. of Oklahoma) present nine papers describing recent research on Plaquemine material culture. Topics addressed include antecedents of Plaquemine mound construction, use of computer-assisted petrographic analysis to investigate Plaquemine ceramic recipes, site excavations in the Natchez Bluffs of Mississippi, and Plaquemine culture in the northerly borderlands.

Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer McLerran. U. of Washington Press, ©2006 79 p. $19.95 (pa) This book was born out of a 2005 exhibition at Ohio University’s Kennedy Museum of Art displaying Navajo weavings from as many as four generations of artists from four families. Five essays discuss tradition and ethnography, market and community, and principles of art as they apply to contemporary Navajo weaving, also offering perspectives from weavers and educators. Color images are included among the essays, and the second part of the book comprises 19 plates accompanied by artist quotations.

E99

Yuungnaqpiallerput; the way we genuinely live; masterworks of Yup’ik science and survival.

2006-032979

978-0-295-98694-4

Recording their story; James Teit and the Tahltan. Thompson, Judy. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 205 p. $50.00 Early in the 20th century, Canadian ethnographer James Teit made field trips to northern British Columbia to work among the Tahltan people on behalf of the Anthropology Division of the Geological Survey of Canada. There, he assembled a large, well-documented collection of artifacts, photographs, song recordings, mythological tales, and ethnographic information related to the Tahltan, which now resides in the collection of the Anthropology Division’s institutional descendent, the Canadian Museum of Civilization. This volume by Thompson (Curator of Western Subarctic Ethnology, Canadian Museum of Civilization) describes Teit’s work among the Tahltans. It also includes some 120 relatively large black and white and color photographs documenting Teit’s trips and the materials residing in the collection. Appendixes provide full listings of items in the collection. Published by University of Washington Press and Canadian Museum of Civilization. E99

2006-021921

978-0-89013-495-5

Secrets of Casas Grandes; Precolumbian art & archaeology of Northern Mexico. Title main entry. Ed. by Melissa S. Powell. Photography by Blair Clark. Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2006 135 p. $29.95 (pa) During the 13th and 14th centuries, the people of Casas Grandes in northern Chihuahua and southern Arizona and New Mexico, played a major role in trade and cultural contacts between the southwestern US and the major civilizations of Mesoamerica. The exhibit at the Museum for which this volume is a companion focused on the ceramic creations and what they reveal about the people who made them. The first chapter also discusses and illustrates the magnificent city now known as Paquimé. E99

2006-025947

978-0-89013-496-2

Shared images; the innovative jewelry of Yazzie Johnson & Gail Bird. Pardue, Diana F. Photography by Craig Smith. Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2007 187 p. $45.00 Pardue (curator of collections at the Heard Museum of native American crafts, Phoenix) showcases the work of Santa Fe-based jewelers Yazzie Johnson and Gail Bird, who have distinguished themselves through use of nontraditional stones in native Southwest-inspired, wearable jewelry. Photographs displaying 113 examples of the pair’s elegant geometric designs are accompanied by information on their lives and the evolution of their work. E99

2007-020369

978-0-295-98738-5

Tsimshian treasures; the remarkable journey of the Dundas collecton. Title main entry. Ed. by Donald Ellis et al. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 14345 p. $45.00 Anglican missionary Dundas collected a trove of Native American art from the Pacific Northwest coast of what is now British Columbia in the 1860s and took it back to England. By the determination of a few alert individuals, the collection was purchased and returned to Canada in 2006. This oversized volume (10x12″) showcases the exhibition held to celebrate its return, with essays on the history of the collection, the works it contains, the attitudes towards art of the two cultures (the Europeans and the Native Americans), and descriptive catalog entries. Not indexed.

Art Book News Annual 2008

E99

2006-023547

978-0-295-98669-2

Fienup-Riordan, Ann. Trans. by Alice Rearden et al. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 360 p. $45.00 (pa) The rich artistic and technological legacy of the Yup’ik of Southwest Alaska is chronicled in this substantial volume, which contains lengthy essays discussing the creation and use of the objects of daily life, including the capture and preparation of natural materials. Other essays describe the livelihoods on which the Yup’ik traditionally depended, including fishing, trapping, and hunting. The text, assembled by author Fienup-Riordan, is made of a wealth of transcriptions by Yup’ik elders explaining the various objects, how they’re made, their uses, and anecdotes from their lives. Oversized (9x12″), the book is filled with historic photos and color photos of the objects described. Published in association with the Anchorage Museum Association and Calista Elders Council. E159

2006-102096

978-0-7591-1086-1

New solutions for house museums; ensuring the long-term preservation of America’s historic houses. Harris, Donna Ann. (American Association for State and Local History book series) AltaMira Press, ©2007 260 p. $75.00 For board and staff members of nonprofit-owned historic house museums that are struggling with insufficient funds or people power to sustain their site at the level that the historical building needs and deserves, Harris, a consultant in historic preservation, outlines eight different techniques being used by nonprofit and government owners to sustain their sites for generations to come. Some of the choices are not pretty, she warns, the most common being to return the house to private ownership with conservation restrictions. E172

2006-100277

978-0-7591-1049-6

Defining memory; local museums and the construction of history in America’s changing communities. Title main entry. Ed. by Amy K. Levin. (American Association for State and Local History book series) AltaMira Press, ©2007 289 p. $75.00 Levin (women’s studies and English, Northern Illinois U.) presents 15 essays that explore the role of small local museums in the construction of American historical identity. Most of the contributions examine individual museums as a means of exploring such issues as shifting narratives of early American history, how museums may change their representations in response to changing societal norms and political realities, the influence of popular culture on “historical” exhibits, museum responses to technological change, and how modern and postmodern ways of knowing can be reflected in museum exhibits. Among the institutions discussed are Colonial Williamsburg, the House of the Seven Gables, Louisiana’s Old State Capitol Museum, the John Dillinger Museum, the Daughters of Utah Pioneers Museums, the Army Medical Museum, and New York City’s Freakatorium. A handful of the contributions discuss broad issues common to many local museums, including the educational nature of museums and business aspects of their operation.

–30–

U.S. LOCAL HISTORY, LATIN AMERICA, CANADA

F1408

F106

Title main entry. Ed. by Samuel Brunk and Ben Fallaw. U. of Texas Press, ©2006 318 p. $22.95 (pa) Historians, an art historian, and an anthropologist, all specializing in Latin America, look at examples of heroes in Latin American history and at the same time consider the social and cultural as well as political conditions that raised them to such a position. Among the heroes are Simón Bolívar, Santa Anna, Emiliano Zapata, Augusto Sandino, Frida Kahlo, and Evita Perón.

2006-004628

2006-012990

978-0-292-71481-6

Heroes and hero cults in Latin America.

978-0-8139-2585-1

E40 degrees; an interpretive atlas. Williams, Jack. U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 248 p. $30.00 (pa) Through a series of essays, Williams (landscape architecture, Auburn U.) explores the small towns that lie within the mountains and river valleys in the great cordillera of the Appalachian Mountains, which runs east 40 degrees from Alabama through 15 states to the coast of Maine. The area offers multiple layers of history and geography that make such a comparative study of places both richer and more informative by allowing the reader to see the tenuous web of connections between people and the natural processes that shape the earth. The text is illustrated throughout with b&w and color archival and recent photographs, maps, and architectural diagrams. Academic but accessible to the general reader. (For those who need this info, Library of Congress catalogs the book title as East 40 degrees.) Oversize: 9x10.5″

F1435

2007-010638

1-931707-98-7

Additions and alterations; a commentary on the architecture of the north acropolis, Tikal, Guatemala. (CDROM included)

Roethke, Liegh. Afton Historical Society Press, ©2007 128 p. $24.00 Roethke, an art historian, has compiled a vivid portrait of the lives, struggles, culture, and history of Minnesota’s large Latino population. Complemented by many historic photographs, the text chronicles the arrival of immigrants and migrant workers in the 19th century, their work, neighborhoods, and social lives, continuing the narrative into the present. The book is designed for young readers (6th and 7th grade), and includes a selection of activities coded to each chapter. Printed in a horizontal format: 10.25x9.25″.

Loten, H. Stanley. (University Museum monograph; 128, Tikal report; no.34, pt.A) U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2007 92 p. $59.95 The North Acropolis of Tikal is both massive and complex. There are reasons for this, and among the most prominent is the fact that the Mayans who built the Acropolis modified its architecture substantially in the 930 years or so they used it. Loton (architecture emeritus, Carelton U.) reports on the substantial changes the Mayans wrought on the flattopped hill they created as their society grew and changed in Guatemala. He steps through each of the platform features and the dozens of modifications from various eras, placing the platform in the contexts of its place, time and people. He describes the three-dimensional reconstruction of the site, offers over 100 color photographs on the CD-ROM, and reproduces 55 detailed line drawings as he places the changes to the acropolis and platform in proper order, linking the changes to the changes in Mayan society.

F787

F1435

F615

2006020371

978-1-890434-73-1

Latino Minnesota.

2006-033263

978-0-8109-9315-0

Border film project; photos by migrants & minutemen on the U.S.-Mexico border. Adler, Rudy et al. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 — p. $22.95 The editors of this book distributed digital cameras and return envelopes to 600 people—a combination of Mexicans migrating to the U.S. and the American volunteer border watchmen known as Minutemen—and received, at the time of publishing, 35 of them back. Their selected contents are published here, a color documentation of the identical landscapes on the U.S. and Mexico sides of the border and the distinct perspectives of each population. Often, the photographs of minutemen and of migrants are displayed side by side, and are accompanied by quotations from representatives of each group. Photographer names, ages, and locations are listed, many of them anonymous. F787

2006-046311

978-0-88150-682-2

Desert light; a photographer’s journey through America’s desert Southwest. Annerino, John. Countryman Press, ©2006 128 p. $29.95 Annerino presents a collection of his photographs of the stark landscape of both sides of the US/Mexico border that has been called America’s Outback. The color photos are of the Chihuahuan, Sonoran Mojave, and Painted Deserts, and are accompanied by brief descriptions of his journey in each region. Annerino is a photographer and author of books on the Grand Canyon and other topics. Distribution is by W.W. Norton. F893

2006-036519

978-0-295-98696-8

Archaeology in Washington. Kirk, Ruth and Richard D. Daugherty. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 158 p. $26.95 (pa) In a book dedicated: “to the people of Washington’s past... knowledge of their lives enriches us all,” Kirk (an author-photographer of several books on the state) and Daugherty (emeritus, anthropology, Washington State U.) introduce general readers to archeological sites and artefacts found in the Columbia Basin and other regions of the state. Noting that local tribes now often collaborate on projects, they locate and describe current and historical excavations on a site map and in color photographs.

–31–

2005-482050

1-85759-386-3

Lords of creation; the origins of sacred Maya kingship. Fields, Virginia M. and Dorie Reents-Budet. Scala Books, ©2006 287 p. $60.00 Published in conjunction with an exhibition that opened at the Los Angeles County Museum of Art in September 2005, the catalogue uses art works to trace the development of the dominant cosmology of Mesoamerica from the Olmecs through the Maya Early Classic period. Most of the 152 figures are color photographs. Distributed outside the Museum by Antique Collectors’ Club. F1435

2005-028881

978-0-7591-0874-5

Palenque; recent investigations at the classic Maya center. Title main entry. Ed. by Damien B. Marken. AltaMira Press, ©2007 335 p. $90.00 Too detailed to serve as an introduction to the archaeology of Palenque, the Maya site in the Mexican state of Chiapas, this collection instead aims to collect as much new information as possible on five recent archaeological projects conducted in and around Palenque over the past ten years. The 14 contributions presented by Marken (a doctoral candidate in anthropology at Southern Methodist U.) include chronological overviews of ceramic developments and architectural construction, analysis of settlement forms and water management, reports on recent excavations of residential compounds and temples, interpretations of evidence on dynastic succession and ritual purification, and discussion of restoration considerations. F1435

2006-035382

978-1-931707-91-6

Settlement archaeology at Quiriguá, Guatemala. (CD-ROM included) Ashmore, Wendy. (Quiriguá reports; v. 4/University Museum monograph; 126) U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2007 362 p. $100.00 Ashmore (anthropology, U. of California-Riverside) reports results of fieldwork conducted 1975-79 and interpreted up to 2004, resisting the temptation to incorporate findings and insights that have appeared since then. In addition to documenting the data from the Classic Maya site of Quiriguá, she explains what the data reveals about such matters as demography, land use, craft production, factions, civic planning, and social memory. The CD-ROM contains a 200-page pdf with numerous additional plates and figures.

Art Book News Annual 2008

F1619

2007-359013

G105

976-640-149-7

The earliest inhabitants; the dynamics of the Jamaican Taíno. Title main entry. Ed. by Lesley-Gail Atkinson. U. of the West Indies Press, ©2006 215 p. $35.00 (pa) Archaeologists, anthropologists, geologists, educators, artists, and other contributors offer insights from Jamaica into the lives and activities of the people who inhabited much of the Caribbean when Columbus wandered it. They seem to have had no general name for themselves, and Taíno and Arawak are among the names given them in modern times. No index is provided. F3429

2006-036010

2007-012670

978-0-7864-2941-7

The pronunciation of placenames; a worldwide dictionary.

978-1-931745-34-5

Room, Adrian. McFarland & Co., ©2007 229 p. $39.95 (pa) British toponymist and onomastician Room seems to have noticed that for the past few decades, atlas gazetteers have assumed that readers would never have occasion to say the name of a place out loud. He explains how to pronounce over 12,000 place names around the world using a simplified transcription system rather than the very precise but pretty obscure systems used by professionals. In an appendix, he explains how the people who live there actually say it, if it differs significantly from the English.

Kasapata and the archaic period of the Cuzco Valley.

G140

Title main entry. Ed. by Brian S. Bauer. (Monograph; 57) Cotsen Institute / Archaeology, ©2007 142 p. $40.00 (pa) The Cuzco Valley in Peru is known as the heartland of the Incas and host, however exacting, to the people before them from about 9000 to 2200 BCE. This collection of articles describes findings of recent surveys and excavations that show those early people were not a few farmers in scattered villages as previously thought but a significant population with a complex culture. Focusing on the excavation site at Kaspata, contributors describe the research, the lithic assemblage, human skeletal materials, faunal remains, the sources of archaic obsidian materials, and the overall impression of the archaic period in the valley. The illustrations and photographs are particularly good and an appendix includes radiocarbon dates from the excavation site.

Between the wind and the water; World Heritage Orkney. Wickham-Jones, Caroline. Windgather Press, ©2006 178 p. $35.00 (pa) An archaeologist specializing in the early settlement of Scotland, Wickham-Jones now lives on Orkney, which she has studied for three decades. She describes and discusses four great monuments on the island, and places them in the context of the people who built them and lived among them. She includes Mesolithic and early Neolithic times, Skara Brae, Maeshowe burials, the Ring of Brodgar, the Bronze and Iron Ages, the coming and going of peoples into the 20th century, and the arrival of antiquarians and archaeologists.Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.

F3430

G525

2007-003445

978-1-931745-38-3

Moche fineline painting from San José de Moro. McClelland, Donna et al. Cotsen Institute / Archaeology, ©2007 199 p. $49.95 (pa) The three authors (all with the Cotsen Institute of Archaeology at UCLA) present this volume as a supplement to their 1999 publication, Moche Fineline Painting. Here they focus on a single site, San José de Moro, where an abundance of the distinct Fineline painted ceramics from the last phase of the Moche civilization in Peru has been excavated in recent years. About 225 photographs and illustrations of the pottery accompany text placing it in context, interpreting its distinguishing characteristics as a deliberate “substyle” of other Moche ceramics that denotes specific ethnic identity, and discussing the now 18 individual artists known to archaeologists. FC3206

1-55238-204-4

One West, two myths II; essays on comparison. Title main entry. Ed. by Carol Higham and Robert Thacker. Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 232 p. $34.99 (pa) “The 49th parallel ran directly through my childhood, dividing me in two.” (Wolf Willow, 1962) Wallace Stegner’s statement is the springboard used by Higham (Davidson College; U. of North Carolina-Charlotte) and Thacker (Canadian studies and English, St. Lawrence U., Canton, New York) to introduce nine essays on the comparative history of the American and Canadian West. Authors discuss the regions’ historical and mythic western spaces as viewed through Aboriginal and settlers’ lenses, literature, and art. Based on a special issue of The American Review of Canadian Studies, this volume includes questions to ponder, an overview of concepts of Canadian historiography (e.g., frontierism), and a bibliographic essay. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press.

GEOGRAPHY, ANTHROPOLOGY, MANNERS & CUSTOMS (includes COSTUME & FASHION) G76

2006-028194

978-0-8165-2554-6

Millennial landscape change in Jordan; geoarchaeology and cultural ecology.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-905119-06-6

87-85180-34-3

The Renaissance shipwrecks from Christianshavn; an archaeological and architectural study of large carvel vessels in Danish waters, 1580-1640. Lemée, Christian P.P. (Ships and boats of the North; v.6) Viking Ship Museum Roskilde, ©2006 371 p. $100.00 This major study details the archaeological excavation of eight Renaissance boats discovered scuttled and buried at the Christianshavn harbor in Copenhagen, Denmark in 1996. The author, who was with the National Museum of Denmark’s Centre for Maritime Archaeology in Roskilde at the time, worked closely with the excavation and ultimately wrote a PhD thesis on the boats, which is the basis for this text. The volume presents the history of the harbor; shipbuilding in Holland, England, Scotland, and Denmark in the 16th and 17th centuries (where the ships were built); and painstaking discussion of each ship, accompanied by superb drawings and copious photos. A glossary is provided which supplies translations of each term into Danish, French, Dutch, and German. A summary of the text is also provided in each of these languages. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. G608

2006-033319

978-0-295-98680-7

Arctic spectacles; the frozen North in visual culture, 18181875. Potter, Russell A. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 258 p. $35.00 (pa) Whether they were gentlemen of science or proletarians who had to go to pubs to hear novels read to them, Victorians loved the exotic arctic and yet dreaded it as a place of death. Here Potter (English, Rhode Island College) closely analyzes the range of this peculiarly Victorian fascination, covering the complete range of literary and visual efforts, including Ross’s accounts of the fictitious Münchausen and serious treatments of actual voyages, works that focused on sensational death above all, and the relatively few works that captured the real beauty of the arctic apart from the misunderstandings and myths. The illustrations here are especially well-chosen, so much so that readers may need to put on a sweater. GN2

Cordova, Carlos E. U. of Arizona Press, ©2007 254 p. $55.00 This work by Cordova (geography, Oklahoma State U.) is at once an introduction to the physical geography of Jordan for archaeologists, historians, geographers, and other scholars of social science and humanity and an introduction to the promises of recent research directions in the areas of geoarchaeology and cultural geography. After describing the current characteristics of Jordan’s woodlands, steppes, and deserts, he reviews the current geoarchaeological and paleoecological records and discusses millennial landscape change in relation to climate change, cultural development, and human-induced landscape transformation from roughly 20,000 years ago to the end of the first phase of urbanization roughly 4000 years ago. He concludes with a discussion of significant cultural ecological issues in paleoenvironmental research in Jordan.

2006-389753

2006-000280

978-0-915703-61-6

West African early towns; archaeology of households in urban landscapes. Holl, Augustin F.C. (Anthropological papers; no.95) U of Mich/Mus.of Anthropology, ©2006 168 p. $26.00 (pa) From an anthropological archaeological perspective, Holl analyzes the spatial organization of the inhabited space in medieval towns of West Africa, giving special attention to material excavated from the acropolis of Awdaghost, also known as Tegdaoust, dating to about 900-1500. He places the findings there with in the larger context of towns in the region, and compares them to early Arabic historical descriptions of the town. He does not provide an index.

–32–

GN36

2007-021965

978-1-84545-188-2

The future of indigenous museums; perspectives from the southwest Pacific. Title main entry. Ed. by Nick Stanley. (Museums and collections; v.1) Berghahn Books, ©2007 268 p. $90.00 The goals of many indigenous cultural centers and museums include preserving the heritage of the local population but also may involve capturing the tourist market. As they attempt to attain both goals they must create practices as they go, and sometimes must make compromises. Editor Stanley (art and design, U. of Central England) calls upon his and his contributors’ extensive experience in both collection and display in Melanesia, Europe and North America to determine how these cultural centers and museums evolve and develop best practices, including those most likely to support community and cultural development. The case studies presented here come from island Melanesia, including the Solomon Islands, Southern New Ireland and New Caledonia, northern Australia, and New Guinea with examples of women’s projects, museums for field workers, and even displays of violent events. The collection closes with comments on the future of indigenous museums. GN316

0-8020-9111-3

The neo-primitivist turn; critical reflections on alterity, culture, and modernity. Li, Victor. U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 292 p. $50.00 Primitive is a category invented by the modern West to denigrate other people and then abandoned as not politically correct. Li (English, U. of Toronto) looks at neo-primitivism, a rejection of primitivism that allows it to reappear in new and more acceptable forms. He shows how it functions in the writings of postmodernist theory, literary and cultural studies, cultural anthropology, and philosophical modernity. GN386

2006-037939

1-58178-063-X

Lost maritime cultures; China and the Pacific. Title main entry. Ed. by Tianlong Jiao. Bishop Museum Press, ©2007 219 p. $49.95 Published to accompany an exhibition held at the Bishop Museum in Honolulu, this handsome oversized catalog (9.25x12.25″), presents the story of numerous excavations in China of ancient cultures that ultimately settled widely across the Pacific Ocean. The text is divided by excavation, with a description of the site and its history. Color plates accompanying each chapter are of the objects found in situ at the excavation, including many works in carved jade, as well as photos and drawings of the site itself. Several maps are included. The editor is chair of the anthropology department in the Bishop Museum; the contributors are archaeologists and anthropologists mainly in China. GN406

2006-935416

978-0-7619-4225-2

Understanding material culture. Woodward, Ian. Sage Publications, ©2007 191 p. $120.00 Focusing on the material as culture from newer perspectives applied to contemporary consumption, Woodward (cultural sociology, Griffith U., Australia) surveys diverse approaches (e.g., sociological, psychological, marketing, cross-disciplinary) to studying people-object relations as a lens on the values of modern consumer society. Case studies (e.g., of homes, objects in youth subcultures) illustrate basic premises of objects as markers of identity and cultural-political power. Objects of consumption are viewed as having “social lives” as part of social performance. Classic and modern theoretical approaches discussed include Marxist views of the role of commodities, structuralist models, and aesthetics. Chapters include annotated suggested reading. GN497

87-7934-110-1

Warfare and society; archaeological and social anthropological perspectives. Title main entry. Ed. by Ton Otto et al. Aarhus University Press, ©2006 557 p. $83.95 Over the past few decades, military historians have begun to look at the social aspects of war, but the archaeologists and anthropologists here find that even these historians treat war as something set aside from other practices. Seeking to show how war is instead an outgrowth or extension of fundamental features of a society, they cover conceptions of warfare in Western thought and research, pre-state societies, the state, discourse and identity, and weaponry and material culture. Their time frame stretches from Neolithic Britain and Ireland to Bosnia in the 1990s.

–33–

GN635

2006-029541

0-313-33671-7

Culture and customs of Jordan. Shoup, John A. (Culture and customs of the Middle East) Greenwood Press, ©2007 131 p. $49.95 Shoup (anthroplogy, Al Akhawayn U., Ifrane, Morocco) has done a fine job of surveying Jordan for this series, which is directed at the general reader and the undergraduate student. Jordan’s geography, history, religion, literature, arts, traditional food and costume, gender, and social customs are the main themes described. Attention is given throughout to the Bedouin people as well as the Arab majority. Differences between the culture and customs of city, village, and rural people are carefully noted. A glossary and bibliography are provided. GN657

2006-023773

0-313-33246-0

Culture and customs of Zambia. Taylor, Scott D. (Culture and customs of Africa) Greenwood Press, ©2006 148 p. $49.95 Emphasizing that culture is a thing of both continuity and change, this book presents a portrait of the African nation of Zambia’s culture and custom in manner accessible to the general reader. After an introduction to Zambia’s land, people, and history, chapters are presented on religion and worldview; literature and the media; art, architecture, and housing; cuisine and traditional dress; gender roles, marriage, and family; social customs and lifestyle; and music and dance. Also included are a chronology, a glossary, a selected bibliography, and an index. GN659

2006-025373

978-0-313-33163-3

Culture and customs of Mozambique. Ndege, George O. (Culture and customs of Africa) Greenwood Press, ©2007 133 p. $49.95 For general readers, Ndege (history, St. Louis U.) provides an overview of the culture and traditions of Mozambique, with attention to its geography, economy, and politics; religions and worldview; literature; media; art; architecture and housing; cuisine; dress; gender roles, marriage, and family; social customs; and music and dance. Its ethnic diversity—yet common cultural elements—as well as conflict between the traditional and modern aspects of life, are emphasized. Some b&w photos are included. GN772

90-76368-12-0

Beyond the site; the Saalian archaeological record at Maastricht-Belvèdère (The Netherlands). (CD-ROM included) De Loecker, Dimitri. (Analecta praehistorica leidensia; 35/36) Faculty of Archaeology, Leiden, ©2005 300 p. $110.00 (pa) Beginning in 1985, De Loecker participated in the annual excavation program and used the experience as the basis of this, his doctoral dissertation, which he began in 1992. He also took part in a program between 1994 and 1999 investigating the cultural adaptations of Pleistocene hunter-gatherers in Northern Europe during the past 500,000 when climate fluctuations resulted in the ebb and flood of hominid presence. Here he summarizes the geology, palaeoenvironment, and dating; Middle Palaeolithic technology; sites and finds; and patterns of behavior and spatial aspects of technology. The disk contains site-specific data. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. GN776

978-1-902937-32-8

Marshland communities and cultural landscapes. Evans, Christopher and Ian Hodder. (The Haddenham project; v.2) McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2006 509 p. $75.00 This is the second volume reporting on the archaeological investigations of the Haddenham project, which conducted landscape surveys at four sites north of Cambridge (UK) from 1981-1987, documenting shifting human settlement and land use patterns as Neolithic woodland transformed into Romano-British marshland. In this volume, Evans (director, archaeological unit, Cambridge U., UK) and Hodder (cultural and social anthropology, Stanford U., US) focus on the later periods investigated by the project, describing the material finds from Bronze Age, Iron Age, and Roman, and post- Medieval landscapes and commenting on their meaning for our understanding of landscape use, ritual, and other cultural practices. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

GN776

GN780

1-902937-31-7

978-1-84217-252-0

A woodland archaeology; neolithic sites at Haddenham.

The later Iron Age in Britain and beyond.

Evans, Christopher and Ian Hodder. McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2006 389 p. $75.00 This publication (the first in a two-volume set) provides the details of sites excavated at Haddenham, north of Cambridge. Evans (Cambridge U. Archaeological Unit) and Hodder (cultural and social anthropology, Stanford U.), along with other contributing specialists, describe the results of the U. of Cambridge’s research excavations in the marshland environs of Haddenham, Cambridgeshire, along the lower fenland reaches of the River Great Ouse. They focus on long-term construction of the cultural landscape, regional environmental adaptation, and the changing interrelationship and constitution of ritual settlement over time. Methodology and process are explained, in addition to themes of community resolution, marginalization, and representation. Analogical commentaries from local and international sources are incorporated. Fieldwork was undertaken from 1981-1987, during the later phases of the Fenland Survey Project. Diagrams and photos are included. The book is intended for practitioners of British and European prehistory and wetland and landscape archaeologists. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.

Title main entry. Ed. by Colin Haselgrove and Tom Moore. Oxbow Books, ©2007 528 p. $180.00 Haselgrove (archaeology and ancient history, U. of Leicester, UK) and Moore (archaeology, U. of Durham, UK) present 31 papers that review current archaeological knowledge about Later Iron Age (c. 400/300 BC to the Roman conquest of 43 AD) Britain as well as, for comparative purposes, Ireland, northern France, the Low Countries, Denmark, and Germany in the same time period. Among the topics addressed are exchange, community, and identity in the Severn-Cotswolds; cultural choices in the British Eastern Channel area; social landscapes and identity in Ireland; the landscape of the Upper Thames valley; enclosures in the landscapes of the Trent valley; pit alignments and their landscape context; the ladder enclosures of East Yorkshire; displays of position and possession in northern Cheviot “hillfort” design; fantastic animals in the Celtic art of Britain; hoarding patterns in Norfolk; evidence for the possible avoidance of fish consumption around the North Sea; the question of scale in the production and consumption of cereals; salt production in the Lincolnshire fenland; weapons, ritual, and communication in northern Europe; and social change in the lower Rhine region of Germany. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

GN778

2007-927320

978-1-885923-50-9 GN796

Performing death; social analyses of funerary traditions in the Ancient Near East and Mediterranean. Title main entry. Ed. by Nicola Laneri. (Oriental Institute seminars; no.3) The Oriental Institute, ©2007 317 p. $24.95 (pa) The 16 papers are from a February 2006 seminar at the Chicago Oriental Institute that was called to interpret the social relevance of the enactment of funerary rituals within the broad-reaching Mediterranean basin from prehistoric periods to the Roman age. The overarching themes are exercising authority and cultural and social transmission. Three papers also look at a theoretical approach to the archaeology of funerary rituals. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. GN780

2007-013793

978-1-931707-99-2

2007-367532

0-7524-4013-6

Earthen long barrows; the earliest monuments in the British Isles. Field, David. Tempus Publishing, ©2006 192 p. $39.95 (pa) Field, an archeological investigator with English Heritage, analyzes the placement and purpose of the long barrows, distinctive mounds of earth scattered across the countryside. With accessible text, sketches, and photographs, including a set of plates in full color, we explores what we used to think we knew and what we now know we do not know about the earliest evidence that humans were builders (but of what?) as far back as the first quarter of the fourth millennium BC. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar Square Publishing.

Dún Ailinne; excavations at an Irish royal site, 1968-1975. (CD-ROM included)

GN799

Johnston, Susan A. and Bernard Wailes. (University Museum monograph; 129) U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2007 232 p. $100.00 Anthropologists Johnston (George Washington U.) and Wailes (emeritus, U. of Pennsylvania), along with other workers on the project, present the full description of their work to date on the Iron Age royal site and its archaeology. Some of the descriptions and characterizations of artifacts have been updated from the interim reports issued over the years. Chapters report on the strategy and execution of the excavation; artifacts such as lithic remains, iron, and worked bone; special analyses; biological remains; chronology; Dún Ailinne’s role in folklore, myth, and the sacred landscape; the social and cultural context; and other aspects. The book contains 91 b&w figures, and the 113 color and b&w plates are included on the accompanying CD-ROM.

Whitley, David S. Left Coast Press, ©2005 215 p. $24.95 (pa) For students, professional archaeologists, and resource managers, Whitely introduces methods of rock art research including fieldwork (which is treated as only one component of research), classification, dating, the scientific method and analysis, and symbolic and ethnographic interpretation. Theory is not emphasized. He also discusses neuropsychology and rock art; other approaches such as quantitative, landscape, and archaeoastronomical methods; management and conservation; and archaeology and anthropology. The text was first prepared to go with a course he taught at a university in Guatemala. He is the author of Handbook of Rock Art Research and runs a contract archaeology firm.

GN780

1-59874-001-6

GN803

91-7209-385-4

Dealing with the dead; archaeological perspectives on prehistoric Scandinavian burial ritual.

978-1-84217-253-7

The earlier Iron Age in Britain and the near continent. Title main entry. Ed. by Colin Haselgrove and Rachel Pope. Oxbow Books, ©2007 528 p. $150.00 Haselgrove (archaeology and ancient history, U. of Leicester, UK) and Pope (archaeology, U. of Cambridge, UK) present 26 research papers that review current archaeological knowledge about Earlier Iron Age (c. 800400/300 BC) communities in Britain, for the most part, but also across the waters in France, Ireland, Denmark, and the Low Countries. Papers discuss the character of settlement in southern Britain, a review of metalwork, evidence on the intensification of animal husbandry, the social organization of agriculture, environmental evidence, deposit patterns at Crick Covert Farm in Northamptonshire, the ritual use of domestic space, the aesthetics of landscape on the Berkshire Downs, the emergence of early Iron Age chieftain’s graves, burial practices and social constructions in the Marne-Moselle region of France, and similar topics. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2005-928676

Introduction to rock art research.

Title main entry. Ed. by Tore Artelius and Fredrik Svanberg. (Riksantikvarieämbetet (National Heritage Board Sweden)) Riksantikvarieämbetet, ©2005 280 p. $20.00 (pa) The 14 essays in this volume examine how prehistoric Scandinavian burial rituals can be interpreted within contemporary Swedish contract archaeology. They analyze the material culture of burial rituals from a historical perspective and aim to indicate the range and depth of current Swedish archaeology. The essays are case studies of graves and collective religious rituals over a broad period of time (Neolithic, Viking, Bronze, and Iron Ages, for example) and region (such as Uppland, eastern and southern Sweden) and topics such as gender, symbolism, and terminology. Authors of the essays are associated with the Archaeological Excavations Department of the Swedish National Heritage Board or The Museum of National Antiquities in Sweden. There is no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–34–

GN806

978-1-905172-36-8

Stones of adoration; sacred stones and mystic megaliths of Ireland.

2006-928846

978-0-87846-708-2

Fashion show; Paris style.

Zucchelli, Christine. The Collins Press, ©2007 223 p. $44.95 This is a photographically illustrated profile of the sacred stones and stone monuments found across the landscape of Ireland. Color photographs of cairns, druid circles, monoliths, memorial stones, wishing stones (including the famous Blarney Stone), and other sacred stones are accompanied by textual descriptions explaining their place in Irish folkloric history. Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions. GN855

GT889

978-1-84217-212-4

The early prehistory of Wadi Faynan, Southern Jordan; archaeological survey of Wadis Faynan, Ghuwayr and alBustan and evaluation of the pre-pottery Neolithic A site of WF16.

Parmal, Pamela and Didier Grumbach. MFA Publications, ©2006 221 p. $65.00 (pa) The director of the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, notes that the museum’s definition of art includes fashion. In conjunction with an MFA exhibition (11/12/06-3/18/07 per the MFA website), this lavishly illustrated book profiles ten designers showing in Paris today from such houses as Chanel Haute Couture, Rochas, Valentino Haute Couture, and Yohji Yamamoto. Besides featuring creations ranging from classic to experimental, museum curator Parmal traces Paris’s history as a center of style and the fashion industry since the 17th century with vintage illustrations. Grumbach is president of the Fédération Françcaise de la Couture, Paris. GT1446

2007-429146

978-88-8491-970-0

Kyrgyzstan.

Title main entry. Ed. by Bill Finlayson and Steven Mithen. (Wadi Faynan series; 1/Levant supplementary series; 4) Oxbow Books, ©2007 600 p. $150.00 The 25 chapters of this major study each present the results of excavation carried out at this pre-neolithic site in Jordan. Published in an oversized format (8.5x12″), a wealth of drawings, photos, charts, and other visual aids are incorporated into the text. Four initial chapters describe the archaeological survey of the region, including its rock art. Subsequent chapters discuss topics that include the sediment micromorphology, chipped stone, worked bone, and radiocarbon dates. The final chapter, WF16 and the pre-pottery neolithic of the southern Levant is given in both English and Arabic versions. A detailed bibliography is provided; there is no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Antipina, Klavdiya et al. Photographs by Roland Paiva. Skira Editore, ©2006 189 p. $65.00 Published in an oversized format (8.5x12.75″) this volume presents a detailed survey of the traditional clothing worn in Kyrgyzstan that was compiled but never published by Klavdiya Antipina, the primary scholar of Kyrgyz costume and material culture (and derived from interviews with her before her death in 1996). Skilled color drawings of the costumes (by Temirbek Musakeev) and superb contemporary b&w and color photograph portraits of Kyrgyz wearing traditional clothing or hats (by Paiva) accompany the text. The full-page color plates are of the highest quality (though there are captions for the drawings only, not for the photos). There is a glossary of clothing terms and a bibliography of ethnography and textiles, but no index. Distributed by Rizzoli.

GN855

Tibet style.

82-519-2086-8

The petroglyphs at Calmn-Varre on the Kola Peninsula; analysis and analogies. Gurina, Nina Nikolaevna. Ed. by Anne Stalsberg. (Archaeological studies; no.6, The Institute of the History of Material Culture, Russian Academy of Sciences.) Tapir Academic Press, ©2005 94 p. $67.00 (pa) This posthumously-published book represents the work of a leading Soviet archeologist who headed a team studying the Ponoj River petroglyphs discovered in 1973 in a former settlement on the Eastern Kola Peninsula. Among the northernmost examples of pictorial art found, they differ in style from rock art found in analogous Eurasian regions though all feature human and reindeer figures. After assessing possible interpretations, Gurina concluded that the artists were ancestors of today’s indigenous Saami people (aka: Laplanders). Published in cooperation with the Norwegian U. of Science and Technology’s Museum of Natural History and Archeology, the volume includes images, methodological notes, and a final untranslated chapter in Russian. Lacks an index. Distributed in the US by ISBS. GT732

978-1-902771-54-0

Cloth and clothing in early Anglo-Saxon England, AD 450700. Rogers, Penelope Walton. (CBA research report; 145) Council /British Archaeology, ©2007 289 p. $39.95 (pa) Rogers, of The Anglo-Saxon Laboratory, details how clothing was made in the Early Anglo-Saxon period from AD 450 to AD 700. She draws on material excavated from settlements and cemeteries in England and discusses clothing manufacturing in the context of gender, immigration, economy, and the meaning of costume in Anglo-Saxon society. After detailing the process of production, she describes the main cloth types, costume accessories, styles, and regional and chronological variations, as well as those based on age and social status. Many illustrations are provided throughout. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Published since 1976 and 1986, SciTech Book News and Reference & Research Book News annotate high-level books for librarians, academics, and professionals in all fields of the sciences, social sciences, and humanities. Together the two quarterlies present a total of nearly 20,000 new titles each year. Art Book News Annual selects titles from both publications.

–35–

GT1555

2006-299547

2-08-030536-0

Romain, Hippolyte. Photography Yann Romain. Flammarion, ©2006 158 p. $34.95 Author Hippolyte and photographer Yann Romain offer readers a glimpse of the fashion of the Amdo region of Tibet, which lies on the Mongolian border. Patchwork clothing made of animal skins, silk, and modern patterns and materials reflect the intersection between tradition and modernity visible also in Amdo’s streets and homes. Approximately 150 matte images display the everyday dress of elders, young street urchins, and holy people, as well as the fantastic costumes that are donned during street festivals. The text offers insight, through the author’s foreign perspective, into Amdo life and history. This book is distributed by Rizzoli. GT2112

2006-023158

978-0-8166-4782-8

Sheer presence; the veil in Manet’s Paris. Kessler, Marni Reva. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 215 p. $22.50 (pa) Kessler (art history, U. of Kansas) examines these most ubiquitous of garments and their meanings in the world as expressed in France from the early 1850s to the late 1880s. She begins with the medicalization of dust, and the movement to make the veil cautionary and sensible, then shows how the veil became both complex and perplexing in the language of the body as men try to peer in and women try to peer out. She concludes with the impact of the veil on Orientalist fantasy in a nimble analysis of how, in some times and places, some veils can never turn to dust.

RECREATION, LEISURE, SPORT GV1317

978-0-7141-1153-7

Ancient board games in perspective; papers from the 1990 British Museum colloquium, with additional contributions. Title main entry. Ed. by I.L. Finkel. The British Museum Press, ©2007 281 p. $100.00 Archaeologists and historians gathered at the Museum in September 1990 for what appears to have been the first ever academic gathering on board games of the ancient world. Vicissitudes clearly intervened between the act and the publication. The topics include the royal game of Ur, the Egyptian game of Senet and the migration of the soul, inscribed Roman gaming boards, pavement games of Greece and Roman, Go in China, board games and backgammon in ancient Indian sculpture, Mancala game boards as African emblems of status, and Robert Stewart Culin and New World games. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

Art Book News Annual 2008

GV1801

2006-020841

978-0-8108-5734-6

HD62

The contemporary circus; art of the spectacular. Albrecht, Ernest. Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 262 p. $60.00 A couple of monkeys and a clown car—no longer make a circus. Now audiences, designers, owners and performers expect the circuses they watch and perform to bend the quality and quantity of space and time, seek out the truths behind fantasy and reality, and hit an emotional and even spiritual spot unreachable by any other art form. Albrecht, a specialist whose credits include a quarterly journal devoted to the circus arts, augments his case studies of productions of leading circuses, including detailed descriptions of the collaborative and individual creative work involved, with commentary pitched to the fascinations of the audience. Commentators include directors, clowns, acrobats, musicians, animal trainers, and dancers as well as instructors in schools for all the above. GV1853

2006-927403

978-0-7546-4333-3

Total landscape, theme parks, public space. Mitrasinovic, Miodrag. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 296 p. $79.95 Mitrasinovic uses the example of theme parks to explain the properties of privately-owned publicly accessible space, a hybrid form of public space that is emerging in urban environments worldwide. He argues that the process of systematic totalization that brings these two types of spaces together are values, conditions and techniques that extend throughout the social realm. The relationship between theme parks and privately-owned publicly accessible spaces offers insights into the ethos of total landscape, a condition that emerges from convergences of the globally emerging socio-economic systems and that is based on the idea of systematic totality.

2006-039255

978-1-4133-0658-3

Every nonprofit’s guide to publishing. (CD-ROM included) Woodward, Cheryl and Lucia Hwang. Nolo, ©2007 440 p. $29.99 (pa) Woodward and Hwang provide tips for those in nonprofit associations for creating newsletters, magazines, and websites. They discuss every step of the process, from story ideas to editorial procedures, and how to modify publishing industry practices to suit their needs. Their advice is based on studying print and online publications of large and small nonprofits and their own experiences in publishing. Tips relate to creating mission statements, budgeting documents, the production process, software and internet services for websites, rules and policies for raising money, hiring staff, content and design, distribution, advertising, and feedback. The CD-ROM contains forms, checklists, templates, worksheets, and spreadsheets. Woodard is a publishing business consultant and the co-founder of PC Magazine, PC World, and MacWorld. Hwang, an investigative reporter, works as the editor for the magazine of a nonprofit association. HD62

2006-102545

978-0-940069-55-8

Generations; the challenge of a lifetime for your nonprofit. Brinckerhoff, Peter C. Fieldstone Alliance, ©2007 219 p. $34.95 (pa) An internationally-known consultant, Brinckerhoff (social enterprise, Kellogg School of Management, Northwestern U., Evanston, Illinois) has worked with thousands of nonprofit staff and board members in the U.S. over the past 25 years. He offers a practical guide for the leadership—volunteer and paid—of nonprofits and nongovernmental organizations worldwide, and for those who study and care about the nonprofit sector. The text examines the three generations currently in the workforce— Boomers, GenXs, Millennials—and how to plan for and manage generation change in each area of an organization, including staff, board, volunteers, clients, marketing, technology, and finances.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-4133-0578-4

Pakroo, Peri H. Nolo, ©2007 317 p. $29.99 (pa) Media developer and consultant Pakroo offers a guide for people who are thinking about starting a nonprofit corporation or reorganizing an existing one. A typical situation, she says, is that a group of people who have been working together realize they need to make their efforts and organization more explicit and formal, partly in order to attract grant money and other sustenance. She considers legal, financial, and practical elements. The disk contains forms, and requires Windows or Mac. No date is mentioned for the first edition. HD6136

2005-033201

0-7546-5103-7

Representing female artistic labour, 1848-1890; refining work for the middle-class woman. Zakreski, Patricia. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 219 p. $99.95 Zakreski (English, U. of Exeter) adds her study to the growing evidence that has deflated the “separate spheres” conceptualization of male and female labor in the 19th century. Drawing on fiction, prose, painting and the periodical press, Zakreski examines the professions of sewing, art, writing and acting, showing how they came to be defined as “artistic” and thus as suitable professions for middle-class women. She argues that representations of creative women by such authors as Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Dinah Craik, Charles Dickens, Anthony Trollope and Charlotte Yonge shaped new forms of mainstream society that did not consign working women to the margins of patriarchal culture. HF5413

2005-058224

0-88173-528-0

Marketing green buildings; guide for engineering, construction, and architecture.

PRODUCTION, INDUSTRY, COMMERCE HD62

2006-047127

Starting & building a nonprofit; a practical guide, 2d ed. (CD-ROM included)

Yudelson, Jerry. Fairmont Press, ©2006 251 p. $125.00 Aimed at engineers, architects, and contractors, this guide provides an overview of today’s “green” building market and describes a number of marketing strategies that have proven to be successful in this emerging field. Just a few of the topics discussed: the business case for green buildings, the opportunities afforded by the LEED rating system, and growth trends in the industry. A professional engineer, Yudelson has been involved in the marketing of green buildings and renewable energy systems for 25 years. The book is distributed in the U.S. by Taylor & Francis. HF5415

978-0-940899-98-8

Internet 101 for artists; with a special guide to selling art on eBay, 2d ed. Smith, Constance. ArtNetwork Press, ©2007 123 p. $15.95 (pa) Smith, owner and founder of ArtNetwork, gives artists plain-language explanations and step-by-step instructions for exhibiting, promoting, and selling their original artwork online. From Internet basics, the book moves through setting up and doing business through e-mail, using the Web for research and for finding people, exhibiting in cyber galleries, designing a Web page, using blogs and online marketing tactics, and using MySpace and YouTube. Other features include a guide to selling art on eBay written by expert Susan Greaves; Action Plans at the end of each chapter for creating an online marketing plan; margin notes, tips, glossaries, and links to web sites of interest; and plenty of white space for jotting down notes and ideas. HF5478

2007-009076

978-0-910627-86-3

eBay’s secrets revealed; the insider’s guide to advertising, marketing, and promoting your eBay store, with little or no money. Blacharski, Dan W. Atlantic Publishing, ©2007 288 p. $24.95 (pa) For those who already operate on eBay, Blacharski, a writer and online entrepreneur, explains how to promote an eBay store and make more money from online auctions. Topics covered include email campaigns, inventory, payments, accounting and taxes, preventing fraud, security, getting positive feedback, cross-selling and up- selling, photos, writing descriptions, listings, and finding products. Other chapters discuss pricing, alternative auction sites, search engine optimization, customer service, bulk versus individual items, and auction management. Many online resources are listed in the bibliography.

–36–

HISTORY OF MONEY

HM621

See also p. 12 (Numismatics)

Highmore, Ben. Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 188 p. $29.95 (pa) Making a compelling case for the importance of de Certeau to the field of cultural studies, Highmore (cultural studies, U. of the West of England, Bristol) explores those aspects of de Certeau’s work that both challenge and re-imagine cultural studies, highlighting the potential this work has for supplying a critical epistemology and a practical ethics for the study of culture within the arts and humanities more generally.

HG231

2007-295283

0-06-088837-7

All the money in the world; the art and history of paper money and coins from antiquity to the 21st century. Mudd, Douglas. Harper Collins Publishers, ©2006 175 p. $24.95 In a volume published in collaboration with the Smithsonian Institution with which he was affiliated, Mudd (curator, American Numismatic Association Money Museum) presents an illustrated history of money. Illustrations range from cowrie shells used in trade to the legal tender of countries in regions from Western Europe to Australia. (US currency looks dull by comparison.) The book includes a glossary, bibliography, and tips on collecting.

SOCIOLOGY, CULTURAL STUDIES HM101

978-0-7619-4862-9

Cultural theory. Title main entry. Ed. by Tim Edwards. Sage Publications, ©2007 284 p. $130.00 Concentrating on issues of cultural sociology and the sociological significance of culture, the contributors of these 13 original papers address questions about the significance of culture, culture practice and culture theory. Topics centering on the legacy of sociology include cultural analysis in Marxist humanism, the thought of George Simmel and the Frankfurt School, Stuart Hall and the Birmingham School, and Giddens’s work on the absent word and the central concept, while those on contemporary cultural theory focus on Zygmunt Bauman, Foucault, Bourdieu, and Baudrillard. The final papers address contemporary cultural analysis address the juncture between cultural sociology and feminism, feminist praxis, popular music, and cultural citizenship within consumerism. HM621

2006-276592

0-7619-6389-8

Culture and everyday life. Bennett, Andy. Sage Publications, ©2005 207 p. $41.95 Bennett, who based this volume on a course he taught on contemporary culture and media at the U. of Surrey in the UK, examines culture and everyday life through the contemporary understanding of different and contested meanings in a heterogeneous society. He discusses key theoretical debates, including critiques of mass culture, postmodernism, and the recent concept of “cultural turn.” He then discusses the impact of this concept of an interactive process between individuals and the media and consumer products on the understanding of culture and everyday life in media, fashion, music, tourism, and counterculture. HM621

0-8264-6073-9

Michel de Certeau; analysing culture.

2007-010684

978-0-313-33255-5

The Greenwood encyclopedia of world popular culture; 6v. Title main entry. Ed. by Gary Hoppenstand. Greenwood Press, ©2007 2640 p. $699.95 This six-volume reference set from general editor Hoppenstand (American studies, Michigan State U.) and colleagues provides a student or general audience with an introduction to popular culture around the world. The encyclopedia has adopted a broad definition of popular culture that includes mass-produced/mass consumed culture and such lifestyle dimensions of culture as architecture and foodways. Individual volumes cover North America, Latin America, Europe, North Africa and the Middle East, Sub-Saharan Africa, and Asia and Pacific Oceania. The volumes are structured uniformly, each containing narrative articles on architecture; art; dance; fashion and appearance; film; food and foodways; games, toys, and pastimes; literature; love, sex, and marriage; music; periodicals; radio and television; sports and recreation; theater and performance; and transportation and travel. The articles generally favor broad and accessible coverage of their subjects, so focus on any particular nation, time period, cultural style, or other specific topic tends to be quite brief. Somewhat surprisingly, the volumes only contain a limited number of photographs—typically only two or three per article—and they are all located in the center of each volume away from the particular article they are intended to illustrate. Each volume also contains its own individual general bibliography and index.

–37–

HM623

978-0-7619-4268-9

Culture and society; an introduction to cultural studies. Oswell, David. Sage Publications, ©2006 246 p. $115.00 Oswell’s introduction to cultural studies addresses cultural matters from two perspectives: material practices and the technologies that support them, and the value of culture in shaping lives. In addition to the main theoretical models in the field, Oswell discusses longstanding debates in cultural studies, including the production of cultural meanings, the shaping of cultural identities within structures and institutions of power, and the valorization of popular culture. He also investigates the problems of identity, of the body, of economy and of globalization. He concludes with a synthesis of the various debates and schools of thought discussed in the text and considers an ethics of cultural study. HM636

2006-009524

978-0-7546-4726-3

Body/embodiment; symbolic interaction and the sociology of the body. Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Waskul and Phillip Vannini. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 297 p. $84.95 The body is not just an artifact but actually a many-chambered vessel of great significance to the individual and society; body, self and social interaction are intimately interrelated and constantly reconfigured. Using empirical evidence and armed with symbolic interactionism as explored by John Dewey, William James, Charles Pierce, Charles Copley and George Herbert Mead, contributors explore the sociology of the body in terms of its reflexivity, drama, phenomenology, place in the culture, and function as a form of narrative. Papers cover such topics as visibility and invisibility in chronic illness and disability, embodied enactment and experience, managing disabilities and the precariousness of the territories of the self, performance, the body in interpretive sociology, human-horse interaction, the addict’s body, the dualism of body image, food metaphors and the black body, masculinity and pregnancy. HM636

2006-022449

0-8204-8686-8

Curriculum and the cultural body. Title main entry. Ed. by Stephanie Springgay and Debra Freedman. (Complicated conversation; a book series of curriculum studies; v.20) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 269 p. $32.95 (pa) In school the human body exists to be disciplined to the point of it virtually disappearing. In society the human body is one’s most significant artifact of identity and primary means of communication about oneself and one’s culture. Comparing and to some extent reconciling the two is one of the purposes of these 15 papers, which remark upon curriculum in culture, media and technology, feminist and queer theory, phenomenology and art. Topics include pedagogical intersections of art and technology with the body, filmed bodies and the body of film, the body online and in curriculum, silent bodies at a disadvantage in schooling, sartorial inquiry, male bodies as teachers, disability in popular culture, women’s bodies in popular culture, the importance of veils, teaching around homophobia, birth and female embodiment, intimacy in curriculum, and the performance of the curricular body.

Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HM856

2007-021378

978-1-4129-2761-1

HQ1147

2006-048638

0-415-96944-1

Encyclopedia of environment and society; 5v.

Women and gender in medieval Europe; an encyclopedia.

Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Robbins. Sage Publications, ©2007 2198 p. $595.00 In order to address the complex topics that arise when attempting to understand the environment and society as being of a piece, Robbins (geography and regional development, U. of Arizona) has brought together political scientists, chemists, anthropologists, medical practitioners, development experts, sociologists, and other specialists to pen the 1200 entries contained in this five-volume encyclopedia. The entries cover key individuals, policies, problems, processes, and theoretical concepts of socio-environmental problems in the broad topical areas of agriculture, animals, biology and chemistry, climate, conservation and ecology, countries, history, movements and regulations, organizations, people, politics, pollution, and society. The range of issues covered is perhaps demonstrated by citing some specific examples of entry topics: collective agriculture, aquaculture, farmland conservation, agrodiversity and seeds, elephants, Endangered Species Act, Dian Fossey, genetics and genetic engineering, mad cow disease, whales and whaling, biomagnification, Human Genome Project, volatile organic compounds, butterfly effect, ocean currents, community forestry, cultural ecology, wind energy, continental shelf, Grand Canyon, Charles Darwin, Ralph Nader, postcolonialism, Earth First!, deregulation, public land management, monoculture, Peter Kropotkin, Henry David Thoreau, Frank Lloyd Wright, industrialization, and petroleum. Approximately 100 countries are individually profiled, as are individual regions of the United States. Also included are topographical and political maps of the world.

Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret Schaus. (Routledge encyclopedias of the Middle Ages; v.14) Routledge, ©2006 944 p. $175.00 Female patronage of the arts and the church, female mysticism and devotional practices, women’s medicine and understandings of the female body, and women’s roles in politics and diplomacy are among the activities discussed in the 563 signed articles, each with cross-references to other articles and a bibliography of primary and secondary sources. The very few illustrations are monochrome.

HN9

Between image and identity; transnational fantasy, symbolic violence, and feminist misrecognition.

2006-051692

978-90-04-14414-9

Social and political life in late antiquity.

HQ1170

978-90-04-12821-7

Encyclopedia of women & Islamic cultures; v.5: Practices, interpretations and representations. Title main entry. Ed. by Suad Joseph et al. BRILL, ©2007 594 p. $249.00 For the final thematic volume of the series, scholars from around the world look at the arts, Islam, language, the Qur’an, religious practices, and representations of women in countries and regions, including some that are not majority Muslim. Among the topics are theater in Central Asia, saints and sacred geographies in the Ottoman Empire, language use by women in Western Europe, and film representations in East Africa. A sixth volume will contain a cumulative index plus articles that were completed after the deadline of the volume they were intended for. HQ1190

2007-009276

978-0-7391-1812-2

Title main entry. Ed. by William Bowden et al. (Late antique archaeology; v.3.1-2005) BRILL, ©2006 656 p. $198.00 Archaeologists, historians, and scholars of classical literature investigate the social world of individuals in late antiquity and integrate the study of social groupings within the trajectory of political change during the period. Among their topics are material culture on the western frontier, monuments and memory in the Forum Romanum, the control of public space and the transformation of the early Medieval town of Brescia, towards an interactive topography of Dark Age Rome, middle class houses, the urban poor, and social and cultural time.

Eileraas, Karina. Lexington Books, ©2007 177 p. $29.95 (pa) Eileraas (women’s studies, U. of California-Los Angeles) examines the constitutive power of images, especially how post-colonial women forge relationships between image and identity. As a case study, she focuses on the autobiographical art and literature of post-colonial Francophone women from the Maghreb and Southeast Asia. She finds that they challenge or misrecognize nationalist, colonialist, and Orientalist imagery, especially by confronting the racial and sexual fantasies embedded in colonial photography, film, and painting.

GENDER STUDIES

Killing women; the visual culture of gender and violence.

HQ16

`

978-0-02-865960-2

Encyclopedia of sex and gender; 4v. Title main entry. Ed. by Fedwa Malti-Douglas. Gale, ©2008 1682 p. $425.00 In this four-volume encyclopedia, chief editor Malti-Douglas (Indiana U.) presents some 730 alphabetical entries, written by an international team of scholarly contributors, that collectively explore a broad array of topics that fall under the purview of investigations of sex and gender across cultures and time in the social sciences. Thematically, the entries are said to address bodies and body parts; body art; body modification; biology of sex; civilizations and cultures; commerce and crime; dance and performance; digital and mass media; diseases; film; folk and popular culture; gender roles; high art; literature; magazines and pin-ups; marriage and family; media, performance, and the arts; music; objects; photography and comics; politics; religion and religious traditions; reproduction and birth control; sex acts, sex aids; sex practices; sexualities and sexual preferences; spaces and places; and systems of knowledge. A significant number of entries are devoted to personalities, but only deceased ones. Entries range in length from several thousand to several hundred words. A cumulative index is included in the final volume. HQ1059

2005-029668

0-87417-672-7

Swooning beauty; a memoir of pleasure. Frueh, Joanna. U. of Nevada Press, ©2006 289 p. $24.95 (pa) Performance artist and art historian (U. of Nevada, Reno), Frueh chronicles her spiritual recovery after the death of her parents and her divorce. Through an examination of her intuitions, desires, fantasies, dreams and emotions, Frueh is able to reassess her life and her potential. She credits her capacity for pleasure and her sense of a heroic female identity for her recovery and self- realization.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HQ1206

0-88920-497-7

Title main entry. Ed. by Annette Burfoot and Susan Lord. (Cultural studies series) Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2006 328 p. $38.95 (pa) Choosing their title to reference both women who are killed and women who kill, Burfoot (feminist science studies and visual culture, Queen’s U., Canada) and Lord (film studies, Queen’s U.) present a wide-ranging collection of theoretical essays on the representation of gender and violence in historical and contemporary visual culture. They have organized the essays into three sections that explore the construction and reception of histories and memories of gendered violence; strategies, discourse, and technologies of the representation of violence; and collectivity in the form of national culture as it relates to representations and mediations of women and violence. HQ1419

2006-004333

978-1-57233-542-4

The saturated world; aesthetic meaning, intimate objects, women’s lives, 1890-1940. Gordon, Beverly. U. of Tennessee Press, ©2006 273 p. $38.00 Gordon (chair, environment, textiles and design department, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) adds a new and useful dimension to the study of 19th and 20th-century domesticity by demonstrating the ways that women elaborated on their everyday tasks and responsibilities by transforming them into playful, emotionally satisfying amusements. Through this study, Gordon seeks to redress the assumption that women’s domestic activities had less value than work done outside the home.

–38–

HQ1587

2007-061480

978-0-582-35718-1

HT166

2006-021878

978-1-84407-246-0

Women in early modern Europe, 1500-1700.

The art of city-making.

Fairchilds, Cissie. (Longman history of European women) Longman, ©2007 378 p. $30.00 (pa) They had social, economic and moral power, although most used it so subtly it was difficult for later historians to discern. Although domestic patriarchy was definitely on the rise, they sought and won love in marriage and a growing sense of emotional equity in their relations with their husbands. They owned property and businesses, served as soldiers, ruled as queens regnant and died as martyrs. Fairchilds (history emerita, Syracuse U.) examines the true record of women in an era presumed in which they are presumed to have lost much of their power, and finds progress instead. Early modern women increased the prestige of marriage and motherhood, found loopholes in the law that afforded them independence, and proved themselves able leaders in a variety of fields, including the arts. Fairchild proves here independent modern women were not engendered by those thought sinful, deranged and disposable.

Landry, Charles. Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 462 p. $127.50 Unlike urban planners who treat cities as if they were abstract entities defined primarily in terms of the “hardware” of economics, politics, and outcomes, Landry (The Creative City, 2000), an authority on city and cultural planning, offers a secular humanist perspective on cities that includes beauty, creativity, ethics, and an understanding of the dynamic complexities of culture (a city’s “soft” infrastructure). His provocative ideas include developing a broad creativity agenda in which anyone with expertise in an area can be a leader, creating more value-driven cities, viewing global cities as an interconnected system, and dramatically changing lifestyles. Color and b&w photos feature seedy, glitzy, and creative aspects of cities worldwide. Distributed by Stylus.

HQ1726

978-0-86356-745-2

The private world of Ottoman women. (reprint, 1997) Goodwin, Godfrey. Saqi Essentials, ©2006 261 p. $24.95 (pa) A reprint from 1997, this volume enumerates the role of women in Ottoman high society and politics. The focus is the period of the sultanate up to 1924, when Atatürk founded the Republic. Syrian and Egyptian women are excluded. Godwin also discusses the lives of slaves and peasant women, harems, trade and wealth, marriage, and women in the arts and literature. The late Godwin was the author of several books, including The Janissaries, Sinan: Ottoman Architecture and its Values Today. Distributed in the US by Consortium. HS539

2005-938286

978-0-7385-4034-4

Detroit’s Masonic Temple. Lundberg, Alex and Greb Kowalski. (Images of America) Arcadia Publishing, ©2006 127 p. $19.99 (pa) The series generally focuses on the history of small town and city neighborhoods, but here journalists Lundberg and Kowalski assemble photographs relating to the world’s largest Masonic lodge, in Detroit, Michigan, which opened in 1922. They look at the Masons in Detroit between the 1700s and the 1920s, the exterior and interior of the temple, decorative details, and the neighborhood. They do not provide an index.

CITY PLANNING, URBAN STUDIES HT115

2006-285489

978-1-55111-449-1

Medieval towns; a reader. Title main entry. Ed. by Maryanne Kowaleski. (Readings in medieval civilizations and cultures; 11) Broadview Press, ©2006 405 p. $34.95 (pa) Kowaleski (medieval studies, Fordham U., New York) has assembled 153 primary documents relating to medieval towns in Europe. She focuses on the ones large enough to be called cities—because they produced more documents and are generally of more interest—but also includes texts from and relating to smaller towns. Though one section covers the early Middle Ages, most of the material is from after 1100 when urbanization quickened, and especially after the demographic crises following the Black Death in 1348-49. Discussion questions follow each selection. Three maps are included. HT147

2006-027503

1-57607-919-8

Cities of the Middle East and North Africa; a historical encyclopedia. Title main entry. Ed. by Michael R. T. Dumper and Bruce E. Stanley. ABC-CLIO, ©2007 439 p. $95.00 Covering 5,000 years of history, this reference for students and general readers contains alphabetically arranged entries on 100 ancient and modern cities in the Middle East and North Africa. Each entry offers a thorough overview of a particular city’s history and discusses its ties with other cities in the region. Most are accompanied by a b&w photo or drawing. Supplemental materials include regional and sub-regional maps, a glossary, and several timelines. The editors are affiliated with the U. of Exeter, UK.

–39–

HT166

2006-287479

978-1-58603-650-8

Open design; a stakeholder-oriented approach in architecture, urban planning, and project management.... Title main entry. Ed. by Ruud Binnekamp et al. (Research in design series; v.1) IOS Press, ©2006 389 p. $100.00 Open Design bypasses classical theory of decision making and uses a linear programming model to capture the elements of group decision making in an attempt to develop a theory of architectural design. Especially as the theory evolves, it should also be applicable in other fields. This volume collects revised second editions of Open Design; A Collaborative Approach to Architecture, first published in 2000; Open Design and Construct Management; Managing Complex Building Projects Through Synthesis of Stakeholders’ Interests, first published in 2001; and the first edition of Open Design, Cases and Exercises. Lex A. van Gunsteren and Peter-Paul van Loon wrote the first two, and Binnekamp joins them as co-author on the third (all: architecture, Delft U., the Netherlands). HT167

2006-015237

978-0-7591-0755-7

The politics of historic districts; a primer for grassroots preservation. Schmickle, William Edgar. AltaMira Press, ©2006 269 p. $60.00 A political scientist who bolted from academia to practice in historic preservation, Schmickle offers a field manual for others seeking to protect parts of cities from development. His emphasis of course is on the political process: dealing with supporters and opponents, planners, the media, and government at the various layers necessary. Among his discussions are planning and strategy, leadership and organization, the campaign kickoff, countering standard objections, public hearings, compromise, and winning the vote. HT168

2006-001813

0-8018-8328-8

Worthy of the nation; Washington, DC; from L’Enfant to the National Capital planning commission, 2d ed. Gutheim, Frederick and Antoinette J. Lee. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 430 p. $65.00 In this update to the 1977 edition, Washington DC historians Lee and Gutheim detail the history of the capital city’s planning and development, from its inception following L’Enfant’s survey of 1791, through the “city beautiful movement” of the early 20th century and the New Deal era residential rush to the suburbs, and up to modern growth and controversial urban renewal campaigns. Black and white photographs, maps, and plans support discussion of major projects, disputes, architectural feats, and movements of populations, all weighted by the city’s responsibility to embody the ideals of an entire nation. First Lady Laura Bush authored the foreword. Oversize: 9x11.5″.

Art Book News Annual 2008

HT177

2006-003180

SOCIOLOGY (continued), POLITICAL SCIENCE, LAW

1-55849-547-9

The Lowell experiment; public history in a postindustrial city. Stanton, Cathy. U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2006 299 p. $24.95 (pa) Stanton (Tufts U. and Vermont College of Union Institute and U.) theorizes public history as a form of cultural performance through examining the efforts of Lowell, Massachusetts to reinvent itself as a postindustrial site of cultural knowledge by establishing the Lowell National Historical Park as a means of looking back on its ethnic and working class past. She first situates the development of the park in the context the public history movement. Then she describes three walking tours in the park at considers how the patterns of choices and omission is ultimately shaped by the park’s role in reinventing the city’s identity, a process that serves to limit critical discourse about Lowell’s past and present history. HT1119

2006035354

978-0-8166-4802-3

Urban imaginaries; locating the modern city. Title main entry. Ed. by Alev Çinar and Thomas Bender. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 290 p. $25.00 (pa) With a series of case studies from Brazil, France, India, Israel, Lebanon and the US, the contributors of these ten articles use social, cultural and political approaches to explain perceptions of the nature of cities by those in and out of the imaginary or real city walls. They describe the economy and gender of an Istanbul borderland, the waterfront and its impact on Haussmann’s Paris, and the condition of being borderlined. They examine the competing narratives of the city, from the triads of a Mediterranean port city to the imaginary assembly of Doula, and the role of the city in the vision of nationality, as in the remaking of Ankara, the postcolonial differences in the steel towns of India, the questions arising in Middle Eastern cities, and the conflicts between the living and the dead in Beirut. HT1322

2007-016156

978-0-313-33480-1

Encyclopedia of the middle passage. Title main entry. Ed. by Toyin Falola and Amanda Warnock. (Greenwood milestones in African American history) Greenwood Press, ©2007 426 p. $75.00 Falola (history, U. of Texas at Austin) and Warnock, a doctoral candidate in history at the university, provide an encyclopedia that contains entries relating to the Middle Passage of the slave trade, covering the route from Africa to the Americas during the fifteenth to nineteenth century. The 228 entries are on topics concerning abolition, art, literature, film, the demographic characteristics of slaves, documenting and memorializing the slave trade, financing, mortality, execution of the trade, slave experiences, ethnicity, key people, places, and ships and shipping. HT1595

2006-011683

978-0-472-06955-2

Queering Mestizaje; transculturation and performance. Arrizón, Alicia. (Triangulations series) U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 246 p. $28.95 (pa) “Mestizaje” refers to the product of mixed races. In this postmodern inquiry, Arrizón (women’s studies, U. of California, Riverside) links mestizaje as a conceptual framework with transculturation: “the inbetweenness of identities produced by the impact of colonial/cultural encounters...” She makes the case that the queer- mestiza feminist body represented in Chicana/o feminist prose, poetry, art, and theater offers a new theoretical paradigm of the cultural politics of this contact and its complex implications.

We're always delighted to hear from our readers. Contact us at (503) 2819230 or [email protected].

Art Book News Annual 2008

HV4915

2006-034333

978-1-55753-432-3

The sacrifice; how scientific experiments transform animals and people. Birke, Lynda et al. (New directions in the human-animal bond) Purdue University Press, ©2007 224 p. $32.95 (pa) Birke, Arluke, and Michael explore the ways in which the identities of scientists, the public, and the animals used in experiments construct and depend upon each other. Coverage includes an overview of biomedical research and laboratory animals—how different kinds of animals first entered the lab, and how that is tied up with cultural change, public expectations, and changes in scientific practices; how the human practitioners of science—the researchers and technicians—make sense of what they do, particularly within their own communities; and the “public relations” work of researchers, including how they argue their case to wider constituencies and participate in debates over animal experimentation. Academic but accessible to the interested general reader. The authors’ credentials are not stated. HX521

2006-297125

978-0-7453-2329-9

Marxism and the history of art; from William Morris to the New Left. Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Hemingway. (Marxism and culture) Pluto Press, ©2006 276 p. $29.95 (pa) Part of series on Marxism and Culture that is premised on the idea that the resources of Marxism have much yet to yield, not least in the cultural field, this anthology is dedicated to unearthing the legacy of Marxist art history through c. 1985. Hemingway (history of art, U. College London, UK) presents 12 papers that primarily focus on the intellectual contributions of individual figures, including William Morris, Mikhail Lifshits, Frederick Antal, Francis Klingender, Max Raphael, Walter Benjamin, Meyer Schapiro, Henri Lefebvre, Arnold Hauser, Theodor Adorno, and George Lukáks. However, two of the essays examine writings from the New Left and a concluding essay discusses the German turn from Marx to the depoliticized social history of art of Aby Warburg. Distributed in the US by the U. of Michigan Press. HX833

2006-000679

978-1-57591-105-2

Anarchism and the crisis of representation; hermeneutics, aesthetics, politics. Cohn, Jesse S. Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2006 325 p. $60.00 Cohn (English, Purdue U.) appears to agree with Marxist theorist Frederic Jameson that an all-encompassing “crisis of representation” has befallen Western thought, calling into question “the relationships between our concepts and the truths they are meant to denote, our images and the realities they are supposed to depict, our institutions and the interests they are meant to serve.” Finding in the social anarchist tradition the earliest modern critique of political representation, he believes that a close reading of the tradition shows a path out of the contemporary representation impasse, not only in the field of politics but also in the realms of hermeneutics and aesthetics. JQ1758

2006-027184

978-0-8386-4113-2

Putting the caliph in his place; power, authority, and the late Abbasid caliphate. Hanne, Eric J. Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2007 277 p. $54.50 The commonly held notion of the Abbasid caliphs being mere puppets from the Buyid period on is disproven in this study by Hanne (Florida Atlantic U.). Based on research of medieval sources, Hanne describes the evidence for the caliphs’ exercise of power from al-Qadir billah in the 10th-11th century C.E. to al-Mustadi bi-Amr Ahllah in the 12th century, ranging from their involvement in politics at home, building activities, and their influence on politics throughout the Muslim world. The study is a revision of his doctoral thesis at U. of Michigan.

–40–

KD1289

2006-925662

978-1-58428-194-8

Legal handbook for photographers; the rights and liabilities of making images, 2d ed. Krages, Bert. Amherst Media, ©2007 125 p. $34.95 (pa) Krages, a Portland, Oregon-based attorney who specializes in intellectual property matters, is an advocate for the rights of photographers to document what they see in public places. In this update of the 2001 edition, he addresses post-9/11 suspicions about photos taken in public places, and publication and copyright issues generated by increased use of the Internet and digital photography. B&w photos illustrate legal and ethical points. A glossary of legal terms is included. KF3022

2005-058980

1-4133-0454-0

The public domain; how to find & use copyright-free writings, music, art & more, 3d ed. Fishman, Stephen. Nolo Press, ©2006 — p. $34.99 (pa) This volume explains how to find creative works that are not protected by copyright and that can be copied and used without permission or fees. Public domain works involving writing, music, art, architecture, maps, choreography, photography, film, television, databases and collections, titles, and software are covered. The book also provides an overview of copyright law, how to determine a work’s public domain status, foreign publications, the length of copyright protection, where and how notices appear, and legal problems. Doing research in the Copyright Office and what to do if a work is not in the public domain is also discussed. In this edition, Fishman details resources such as Google Books, MorgueFile, Image*After, Hollywood Film Archive, and Creative Commons. An expanded section on copyright case law is presented and the most recent court decisions are described. One of the appendices lists popular songs in the public domain. Fishman is a legal writer with experience in government and private practice. KF4288

2006-283873

978-0-314-15878-9

Art law in a nutshell, 4th ed. DuBoff, Leonard D. and Christy O. King. (West nutshell series) Thomson West, ©2006 330 p. $27.00 (pa) In this compact reference, attorneys DuBoff and King provide a summary of federal and state law as it pertains to art. Although many complex issues are addressed, the text is written to be accessible to a broad audience that includes artists, dealers, collectors, and students as well as legal practitioners. Sixteen chapters cover such topics as auctions, insurance, taxes, copyright, trademark, and freedom of expression.

EDUCATION LB1591

2006-044568

0-398-07671-5

Art therapy activities; a practical guide for teachers, therapists and parents. Stack, Pamela J. C.C. Thomas, ©2006 134 p. $31.95 Pamela J. Stack (St. Louis Art Psychotherapy Institute) is an art therapist and educator who works with severely emotionally and behaviorally disturbed children. In this workbook for teachers, therapists, and parents, she shares some of the easy and fun art therapy activities she uses in her practice. A few examples of the lesson plans described: free-association collage, drawing two fantasy creatures, and a complete-the-line drawing game. LG715

2007-367873

978-1-920694-51-7

A landscape for learning; a history of the grounds of the University of Western Australia. Title main entry. Ed. by George Seddon and Gillian Lilleyman. U. of Western Australia Pr., ©2006 196 p. $58.50 Seddon (environmental science, U. of Melbourne), a research fellow at the university, and Lilleyman, a former student there, describe the history of the grounds of the U. of Western Australia, from early days of the site through more recent periods of growth and change. They trace its beginnings as an Aboriginal meeting place and under the ownership of colonists, and its building, design, and expansion. The various people involved, including Henry Campbell, Oliver Dowell, William Somerville, George Currie, George Munns, Arthur Bunbury, and Hubert Whitfield, are discussed. The university’s landscape, grounds staff, and grounds as a botanic, scientific, and art resource are also covered. Information is presented with many photos, diagrams, and other illustrations. The book measures 10x11.75″. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

–41–

ART Subjects progress in this order: General Museums & Galleries Exhibitions History Techniques Criticism Portraits Conservation Economics Public Art See also p. 114 for photography N25

2-503-52364-1

Emblematic paintings from Sweden’s age of greatness; Nils Bielke and the Neo-Stoic gallery at Skokloster. McKeown, Simon. (Imago figurata studies; v.6) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 279 p. $96.00 Held in the collection of Skokloster Castle in central Sweden is a series of 18 paintings that are based upon emblematic plates found in Otto Vænius’s Emblemata Horatiana (Antwerp, 1607). In this study, McKeown (King’s College School, Wimbledon) discusses the paintings within the context of the micro-history of the aristocratic families they belonged to. In the second part of the volume, b&w reproductions of the paintings are presented, along with reproductions of their sources and transcriptions of the commentaries that accompanied the emblems in their original printed context. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. N45

2006-033602

978-0-8108-5895-4

American artists II; signatures and monograms from 1800, a comprehensive directory. Castagno, John. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 525 p. $225.00 This volume features signatures and monograms of about 3,500 American artists, for use in identifying, authenticating, or verifying their works. They are listed alphabetically, date from 1800 on, and are compiled from many sources. Included are initials, common and alternative surname signatures, symbols, Cyrillic signatures, and illegible signatures. Very few of the artists listed in this volume are in the original volume, American Artists: Signatures and Monograms, 1800-1989. A small number of Canadian and Latin American artists are listed. In addition to the signatures, their birth and death dates and ethnicity are included, as are the source or sources from which the signature was found. Castagno is a multimedia artist, sculptor, and art researcher. N45

2006-033603

978-0-8108-5896-1

European artists II; signatures and monograms from 1800, a comprehensive directory. Castagno, John. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 431 p. $200.00 Castagno, a multimedia artist, sculptor, and art researcher, provides a directory of signatures and monograms of 2,100 European artists for readers wishing to identify, authenticate, or verify them or works. Listed alphabetically, signatures are from 1800 on and include monograms and initials, common and alternative surname signatures, symbols, Cyrillic signatures, and illegible signatures. Only a small number of those in this volume are listed in the original volume, European Artists Signatures and Monograms, 1800-1990. Some Australian and Asian artists are included. Signatures are drawn from a number of reference sources, which are listed along with the signatures, and birth and death dates and ethnicity of the artist. N61

2006-017215

1-60021-232-8

Chaos and complexity in arts and architecture. Title main entry. Ed. by Nicoletta Sala. Nova Science Publishers, ©2007 178 p. $89.00 Scholars in various art disciplines, but also from such fields as mathematics and mechanical engineering consider such topics as visual and semantic ambiguity in art, the morphology of the amorphous, the tonal structure of music and controlling chaos in the brain, complexity in the Mesoamerican artistic and architectural works, and pseudo-urban automatic pattern generation.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N66

2005-440636

0-522-85124-X

N71

Material thinking; the theory and practice of creative research. Carter, Paul. Melbourne U. Pr., ©2004 216 p. $35.00 (pa) For artists, students, and teachers, Carter (architecture, building, and planning, U. of Melbourne, Australia) describes a philosophy of the creation of art, in an attempt to show “how the process of material thinking enables us to think differently about our human situation.” He also addresses the role art plays in collective and individual identity construction. He uses six artistic collaborations that he was involved in as a conduit for his philosophy, undertaken with artists Charles Anderson, Chandrabhanu, Peter Emmett, Ettore Siracusa, and John Wolseley, describing in turn how each collaboration developed. N66

978-87-7289-967-1

Peripheral insider; perspectives on contemporary internationalism in visual culture. Title main entry. Ed. by Khaled D. Ramadan. Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2007 240 p. $34.00 (pa) Visual artists are perceived as being on the margins of society, if not firmly ensconced outside the city gates. From that vantage point, we understand, they have more to say about that society than those barbecuing on their patios in the shadow of the inside of the city walls. In this collection of articles, contributors examine the true outsiders, those whose lives’ choices or circumstances have made them expatriates, whether in the West or elsewhere. Topics include the experiences of visual artists from Egypt in the West, post-colonial theory and its implications for artistic expression, Lacan’s approach to Orientalism, the shifts engendered by globalization, and the further shifts necessary to survive and thrive on the cusp as a peripheral and perpetual insider. Distributed in the US by ISBS. N71

2006-024755

978-159017-213-1

Born under Saturn; the character and conduct of artists. Wittkower, Margot and Rudolf Wittkower. (New York Review Books classics) New York Review Books, ©2007 344 p. $18.95 (pa) First published in 1963, Margot and Rudolf Wittkower’s Born Under Saturn examined the evolution of the concept of the “alienated artist” from antiquity to the beginning of the romantic era. Drawing upon biographies, letters, and other primary documents, the authors investigated what people in the Western world thought about the artists in their midst. The focus is primarily on attitudes towards European master painters, sculptors, and architects. This reprint features a new introduction by Joseph Connors (Director, Harvard Center for Italian Renaissance Studies, Florence). N71

2006-939721

978-0-495-10262-5

Foundations of art and design. Fichner-Rathus, Lois. Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2008 345 p. $58.95 (pa) Aimed at art students preparing for a professional career, this textbook introduces the main elements of art and explains the fundamental principles of design. The approach is highly visual, and full-color examples of contemporary and classical art accompany the text throughout. Pedagogical features include chapter outlines, compare/contrast exercises, and definitions of key terms.

Art Book News Annual features selections from four issues of SciTech Book News and four issues of Reference & Research Book News published during 2007. See www.booknews.com for subscription information, or contact us: [email protected] or (503) 281-9230. Sample copies are available.

2005-9110541

978-1-4129-0044-7

Images; a reader. Title main entry. Ed. by Sunil Manghani et al. Sage Publications, ©2006 331 p. $110.00 This collection of readings has been put together by Manghani (critical and cultural theory, York St. John U., UK), Piper (image studies and visual culture, U. of Nottingham, UK), and Simons (communications, Indiana U., US), in part, as a response to W.J.T. Mitchell’s complaint that “there is, at present, no real `field’ in the humanities . no `iconology’ that studies the problem of perceptual, conceptual, verbal and graphic images in a unified way.” In pursuit of such an interdisciplinary field of image studies, they gather 81 essays and excerpts of longer works in order to indicate the types of concerns, methods of inquiry, subjects of study, and disciplinary connections that would constitute the field. Historical and philosophical precedents are presented in selections from the Bible, Plato, Aristotle, Descartes, Hobbes, Locke, Kant, Marx, Nietzsche, Freud, and others. Theories of images are examined in sections dealing with ideology critique, art history, semiotics, phenomenology, and psychoanalysis. Finally, image culture is explored in sections on images and words, image as thought, image fabrication, visual culture, vision and visuality, and image studies. Among the notable authors represented in these last two sections are Régis Debray, Susan Sontag, Marshall Mcluhan, Sergei Eisenstein, Paul Klee, Marcel Proust, Ludwig Wittgenstein, Walter Benjamin, Michel Foucault, Martin Heidegger, Roland Barthes, Jacques Lacan, Jean Baudrillard, Charles Sanders Peirce, and Theodor Adorno. N71

2006-038677

978-0-89236-823-5

The life and the work; art and biography. Title main entry. Ed. by Charles G. Salas. Getty Publications, ©2007 162 p. $45.00 The theme of the Getty Research Institute in 2002/2003 was “Biography.” Salas (research and education, Getty Research Institute) presents a collection of six essays from two of the Institute’s symposia of that year, which deal with the challenges in linking an artist’s work with his/her life and suggest that, in fact, the relationship between the two is rarely straightforward. Major figures discussed include Leonardo da Vinci, Paul Cézanne, Vincent van Gogh, Paul Gaughin, Andy Warhol, Bob Dylan, and the artists associated with the collaborative British organization known as Art & Language. Illustrated with b&w and color photographs and reproductions. N71

2006-925227

0-940717-86-7

The persistence of geometry; form, content, and culture in the collection of the Cleveland Museum of Art. Sims, Lowery Stokes. Cleveland Museum of Art, ©2006 127 p. $22.50 (pa) This appealing catalogue—appropriately, it measures 6 inches square— contains an extensive essay by the noted art historian Sims on the uses of geometry in all kinds of art. It also includes commentary and copious color illustrations of specific examples from the eponymous exhibition she organized, held in Cleveland’s Museum of Contemporary Art in 2006. Not indexed. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. N72

2006-020375

978-1-4051-3537-5

Art’s agency and art history. Title main entry. Ed. by Robin Osborne and Jeremy Tanner. (New interventions in art history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 226 p. $84.95 As the title suggests, this group of essays engages with the theoretical approach set forth by Alfred Gell in his 1998 work Art and agency; an anthropological theory. Articles are offered by classicists, anthropologists, archaeologists, and art historians who teach in the UK and the US. The nine articles consider objects created in ancient Egypt, ancient Mesopotamia, Elizabethan England, ancient Greece and Rome, and Peru. Osborne (ancient history, U. of Cambridge, UK) and Tanner (classical archaeology, University College, London, UK) contribute a lengthy introductory essay applying Gell’s theory to the practice of art history. N72

2006-009193

978-1-84553-171-3

Art as theology; from the postmodern to the medieval. Andreopoulos, Andreas. (Cross cultural theologies) Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2006 179 p. $29.95 (pa) Art lost its sacred character during the late Middle Ages, says Andreopoulos (Christian theology, U. of Wales-Lampeter), and modern art—both popular and classical—is losing its place as a distinct entity, replaced by a growing religious awareness or practice that is consistent with, though still far from, the medieval view. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

Art Book News Annual 2008

–42–

N72

978-1-883015-38-1

N105

2006-929812

978-0-87192-745-3

Branded and on display.

Gender matters in art education.

Cook, Daniel Thomas et al. Krannert Art Museum, ©2007 112 p. $40.00 (pa) This catalog accompanies the exhibition Branded and On Display, organized by Krannert Art Museum and Kinkead Pavilion, U. of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, and presented in 2008 at Tufts U. Art Gallery and Scottsdale Museum of Contemporary Art. The exhibition examines works of artists who explore branding and presentation in today’s commoditized environment. Sculpture, video, installation, sound, painting, and photography are included. Brief essays on the topic accompany the catalog, written by U. of Illinois faculty members, and nine stories by Dung Kai-cheung (translated by Winnie Won Yin Wong) are interspersed. Copyright by the Board of Trustees of the U. of Illinois. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press.

Rosenberg, Martin G. and Frances Thurber. (Art education in practice) Davis Publications, ©2007 155 p. $24.95 (pa) American art historians/educators Rosenburg and Thurber provide students, K-12 teachers of art and related subjects, university art educators, and interested laypersons involved in K-12 art education with an up-todate examination of gender and the role it plays in culture and art education. The text includes general discussion of key issues relating to gender and art education, ideas about content selection, sample strategies for implementation of curricula, worksheets, and a list of resources that will assist the reader in teaching in a more gender-equitable manner. Illustrated with b&w photographs and reproductions.

N72

978-0-8020-9094-2

Char Davies’ immersive virtual art and the essence of spatiality. McRobert, Laurie. U. of Toronto Press, ©2007 190 p. $50.00 Philosopher at large McRobert explores the impact of Canadian artist Davies’ immersive virtual art and the dynamics encountered by people when they experience it. She concentrates on the aesthetics of the digital art, but also examines the phenomenon of the spatiality in which not only the art forms but also the participants float. N72

2006-022051

978-0-8047-5477-4

Creative reckonings; the politics of art and culture in contemporary Egypt. Winegar, Jessica. (Stanford studies in Middle Eastern and Islamic societies and cultures) Stanford U. Press, ©2006 377 p. $24.95 (pa) Winegar (anthropology, Fordham U.) explores how the artistic and historical past, and internal and external economic, political, and social factors are influencing the production of art in Egypt at the beginning of the 21st century. Profiles of artists alternate with thematic chapters. N72

2005-033924

978-0-8166-3587-0

The matrixial borderspace. Ettinger, Bracha L. (Theory out of bounds; v.28) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 244 p. $25.00 (pa) Painter Ettinger (psychoanalysis and aesthetics, U. of Leeds) presents a matrixial realm as a shareable, psychic dimension that underlies the individual unconscious and experience. It is a counter to the phallocentrism of mainstream Lacanian theory and the masculine-feminine opposition. N72

2006-005222

0-7546-5506-7

Pictures and popery; art and religion in England, 16601760. Haynes, Clare. Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 185 p. $99.95 During the 18th century, says Haynes (world art and museology, U. of East Anglia) the English, who prided themselves on their defense of the Reformation, highly prized art that was Roman Catholic in matter and provenance, and the anti-image Church of England was full of images. She investigates the related paradoxes by looking at the nature of English Protestantism, and explaining the religious concerns and debates over how art was viewed and made. N72

2005-044750

1-4000-4129-5

Visual shock; a history of art controversies in American culture. Kammen, Michael. Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 450 p. $35.00 Pulitzer Prize winner Kammen explains why art matters in this study of the nature, diversity and persistence of major disputes generated by art and artists since the 1830s. In reviewing the controversies over art in US history, he discusses the kind of art appropriate for a democratic society, how a distinctively American art can be achieved, and the reasons for the politicalization of art since the late 1960s. Kammen also considers the quest for provocative shows in some galleries and museums and the commercialization stemming from dependence on corporate sponsorship at others.

–43–

N350

2006-033980

978-1-59158-359-2

Art in story; teaching art history to elementary school children, 2d ed. Saccardi, Marianne C. Teacher Ideas Press, ©2006 458 p. $35.00 (pa) Saccardi uses her own experiences as a former elementary school and college teacher to demonstrate how to use stories to teach art history to elementary school children, from art of the ancient world to the twentyfirst century. Each chapter has background on the period or artist, a story, activities such as journal writing, suggestions for integration with other areas of curriculum, and resource lists for child to adult levels. New chapters in this edition cover Middle Eastern art (which contains the previous material on Egyptian art), and other material has been revised, including the bibliography. Activities have been linked to national standards. Saccardi is currently an educational consultant. Both subject and title indexes are included. N353

2007-019062

978-0-8077-4818-3

Studio thinking; the real benefits of visual arts education. Title main entry. Ed. by Lois Hetland et al. Teachers College Press, ©2007 120 p. $24.95 (pa) The authors, all academics or practitioners in art education or educational psychology, relate the results of their research on the positive cognitive habits instilled by applying visual learning techniques not only in the art classroom but across the curriculum. They establish a framework for making visual education relate to the development of cognitive and social skills, assessment and critical thinking, and they provide elements of language and tools educators can use to assess educational outcomes. N430

2006-016597

978-1-4051-3627-3

Museums after modernism; strategies of engagement. Title main entry. Ed. by Griselda Pollock and Joyce Zemans. (New interventions in art history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 248 p. $84.95 Pollock (social and critical histories of art, U. of Leeds) and Zemans (arts and media administration, York U., Toronto) present a collection of essays by 13 international artists, curators, art historians, and cultural analysts exploring the museum, its time, its place, and its function now. The text includes discussions about art-making, curation, exhibition, display, special projects, access, publics, communities, histories, controversies, public reception, pedagogy, and readings of exhibitions and explorations of exhibitions as readings of contemporary culture. Collectively they explore in what sense the museum can become a public place, publicly responsible for stimulating and housing critical thinking in and through art. N716

97-24981

978-0-917046-82-7

Selections from the Virginia Museum of Fine Arts, rev. ed. Barriault, Anne B. Virginia Museum of Fine Arts, ©2007 355 p. $45.00 The first edition was published in 1997, to offer an overview of VMFA’s collection—a sampling of the diverse cultures, periods, and styles of art that are represented in the Richmond, Virginia institution. This revised edition features the original edition’s 100 objects along with 50 acquisitions made in the last decade. In an oversize format (9x11″), each work is presented full page with a facing page of text discussing its context, interpretation, and reception, and the artist. Arrangement is in chapters devoted to regions of the world followed by chapters on late 19th & 20th century decorative arts, and on modern and contemporary art. Distribution is by the U. of Virginia Press.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N4395

2005-055529

978-0-393-73211-5

N5310

Exhibition design. Dernie, David. W.W. Norton, ©2006 192 p. $65.00 Dernie (Manchester School of Architecture, UK), an architect and designer, discusses contemporary exhibition design, themes, and procedures. He outlines the subject’s history, describes different techniques used in display, and demonstrates by including many color photos from recent international exhibitions ranging from consumer pavilions to small-scale displays from as far back as 1985. Lighting, and combining communication, color, and graphics are detailed in the final chapter. Approaches covered include narrative and performance spaces and simulated experiences. The techniques detailed are not intended to be guides, but as an example of possible tools. N5300

2006-933357

Exploring art; a global thematic approach, 3d ed.

2006-907655

0-534-60511-7

Gardner’s art through the ages; a concise history of Western art. (CD-ROM included) Kleiner, Fred S. and Christin J. Mamiya. Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2008 479 p. $85.95 (pa) The concise edition of this standard art history survey contains the essential coverage of the larger full edition by providing fewer examples for given time periods. The CD-ROM is closely linked to the text through the use of a CD-ROM symbol that sends the student to the appropriate additional material. Chapters include an introductory overview of the history of the era considered and inset boxes describing terms, techniques, and relevant issues. Time-line style overviews are inserted throughout. N5300

2007-270937

978-0-06-117610-4

The power of art. Schama, Simon. Ecco Press, ©2006 448 p. $50.00 In this companion volume to a PBS television series of the same name, Schama (art history, Columbia U., New York) discusses the power and “the whole point” of art through examinations of the life and work of Caravaggio, Bernini, Rembrandt, David, Turner, Van Gogh, Picasso, and Rothko. Particularly focusing on one piece by each artist (though others are reproduced as well) and placing them in context of artistic and political history as well as their contemporary circumstances, the author seeks to explain Picasso’s contention that “art is dangerous.” N5300

978-0-7148-4703-0

The story of art; pocket edition. (reprint, 1995) Gombrich, E.H. Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2006 1046 p. $19.95 (pa) Phaidon has succeeded admirably in producing an appealing reprint of this classic introduction to the world of art. Published in a small format with a sturdy but flexible cover and containing full-page color plates of good quality, the text is published on onion skin with ribbons for page markers. Gombrich (d.2001) achieved a classic in this text through his attention to context and larger issues, deft description of the aesthetics of artistic styles, breadth of focus that included the arts of Asia as well as the West, and a gift for conveying in a timeless manner the meaning of art. The 1995 edition reprinted here was the 16th edition of a text originally published in 1950.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-4000-4348-4

Curtis, Gregory. Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 278 p. $25.00 In this comprehensive study of the cave paintings of France and Spain, Curtis touches on every aspect of the paintings, from their beauty and theories about their origins to the men and women who rediscovered them. He considers the meaning of the paintings by reviewing the major theories—that the art was part of fertility or hunting rituals, was used for religious purposes or was clan mythology—and explaining the ways in which ethnography, archeology and religion have influenced the thinking about the paintings over time. N5311

978-0-495-09487-6

Lazzari, Margaret and Dona Schlesier. Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2008 492 p. $101.95 (pa) This is an introductory art history text that steps away from the traditional chronological and regional orientation in order to teach art appreciation and understanding through the context of human needs and wants. For instance, the chapter on mortality and immortality moves from discussion of the Great Pyramids of Giza to an Etruscan sarcophagus, to the funeral complex of Shi Huangdi to Viking ship burial artifacts. Authors Lazzari (Gayle Garner Roski School of Fine Arts, U. of Southern California) and Schlesier (Divine Word College) include chapters on the language and media of art and architecture; meaning in art; food and shelter; reproduction and sexuality; deities and places of worship; mortality and immortality; power, politics, and glory; social protest/affirmation; the body; race, gender, clan, and class; nature, knowledge, and technology; and entertainment and visual culture. Western and nonWestern cultures are about equally represented and much of the coverage focuses on contemporary art. Some 130 new artworks have been added to the 410 or so discussed in the last edition. Although they have rejected a chronological approach, they do include “Art and History in Context” boxed features that introduce historical developments in religion, culture, and technology. N5300

2006-040888

The cave painters; probing the mysteries of the first artists.

978-0-87846-715-0

Material journeys; collecting African and Oceanic art, 1945-2000. Title main entry. Ed. by Christraud M. Geary and Stéphanie Xatart. MFA Publications, ©2007 246 p. $35.00 (pa) For over sixty years, Geneviève McMillan has been collecting African and Oceanic art. Featuring high-quality color photography throughout, this volume showcases some of the more than 100 objects from her collection that have been selected for a special exhibit at the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston in 2007. In tracing the physical and conceptual journeys of key objects, the authors also explore some of the issues raised by the flow of African and Oceanic art into Western collections and museums during the second half of the 20th century. Geary is a curator and Xatart is a research assistant at the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston. N5337

2007-367502

978-1-74051-375-3

The gods of Freud; Sigmund Freud’s art collection. Burke, Janine. Knopf, ©2006 455 p. $42.00 Sigmund Freud is revealed in this biographical work as a dedicated and passionate collector of Egyptian, Roman, and Greek antiquities. For the author, who documents Freud’s collecting activities through the years, his collection offers multiple readings: “as the embodiment of Freud’s theories; as an investigation and celebration of past cultures; as an exercise in aesthetics; as a quest for excellence; as a memento of real and imagined journeys; as a catalogue of desires; and as a self-portrait.” Fittingly, she subjects Freud’s collection to analysis, exploring such issues as the relationship of his affinity to his “grumpy old gods,” as he called them, to his views on religion and the failure of the images of Isis, Athena, Artemis, and Venus that surrounded him to influence his contradictory attitudes towards women. N5370

2007-010469

978-90-04-15702-6

Ancient Near Eastern art in context; studies in honor of Irene J. Winter by her students. Title main entry. Ed. by Jack Cheng and Marian H. Feldman. (Culture and history of the ancient Near East) BRILL, ©2007 521 p. $189.00 American art historians and archaeologists explore such aspects of ancient Middle Eastern art as the treatment of enemies in Ashurbanipal’s reliefs, ceremony and kingship at Cachemish, high priestesses in images from the Akkad to the Isin-Larsa Period, and barley as a key symbol in early Mesopotamia. They also include essays on Winter’s scholarly career and her approach to teaching. N5610

2007-000487

978-0-19-530082-6

The Grove encyclopedia of classical art and architecture; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by Gordon Campbell. Oxford U. Press, ©2007 1474 p. $250.00 The 1000-plus entries of this 2v. encyclopedia were compiled from the 34v. Grove dictionary of art and from Grove art online, with the addition of 100 entries written specially for this work. In keeping with the authoritative presentation of its sources, this is a substantial reference, with (unsigned) in-depth entries on all manner of things related to classical art and architecture, including lengthy entries on Greece and Italy, on major styles such as Etruscan and Hellenistic, and on major cities, major monuments, and artistic media. Shorter, but equally pithy articles are offered for sculptors, artists, monuments, specific forms of architectural decoration, and archaeologists, among other topics. B&w illustrations appear throughout, and there are two groups of color plates. Each entry concludes with a selected list of scholarly bibliography. Campbell teaches Renaissance studies at the U. of Leicester, in the UK.

–44–

N5640

2007-011228

978-1-931534-21-5

Introduction to Aegean art. Betancourt, Philip P. Inst. /Aegean Prehistory Press, ©2007 212 p. $36.00 (pa) This volume presents a chronological survey of the art of the Aegean, with b&w and some color photos of the works of art and buildings discussed. The material is accessible to the undergraduates beginning their study of art history and archaeology, but it’s also thorough in its presentation. Each chapter concludes with a bibliography. Betancourt’s (art history, archaeology, Temple U., Philadelphia, Penn.) archaeological research is concentrated on Crete, once the center of Minoan civilization. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. N5871

2007-008006

978-0-89236-883-9

Greeks on the Black Sea; ancient art from the Hermitage. Title main entry. Ed. by Anna A. Trofimova. Getty Publications, ©2007 307 p. $65.00 Published to accompany an exhibition of 175 works from the State Hermitage Museum in St Petersburg, Russia held at the J. Paul Getty Museum in Los Angeles in 2007, this handsome, oversized (9x11.75″) catalog presents color plates and entries discussing the sculpture, glass, jewelry, metalwork, and other objects from the exhibition. Nine essays by curators from the Hermitage describe specific geographical areas, archaeological sites, and tombs associated with the artworks, which are unusual for their amalgamation of the styles of classical Greece and the animal style and fine metalworking techniques of this region. A glossary is provided. N5925

978-1-85182-986-6

Making and meaning in insular art; proceedings. International conference on Insular Art (5th: 2005: Dublin, Ireland) Ed. by Rachel Moss. (TRIARC research studies in Irish art; 1) Four Courts Press, ©2007 342 p. $70.00 The 23 papers of this handsome oversized volume (8.5x11.25″), many of them written by senior scholars in the field, constitute the proceedings of the Fifth International Conference on Insular Art, held in August 2005 at Trinity College Dublin, Ireland. Moss (Trinity College Dublin) contributes a thought-provoking essay on the larger artistic and religious contexts for Romanesque sculpture in Ireland. Other topics include an essay by Lawrence Nees (U. of Delaware) on two pieces from Sutton Hoo that makes a strong case for manuscript models of influence, and a long and satisfying piece by Carol Neuman de Vegvar (Ohio Wesleyan U.) on the references to Jerusalem in the columns used to decorate canon tables. The volume is well illustrated with b&w and a series of color plates, all of excellent quality. Distributed in the US by ISBS. N5970

2005-033250

978-1-4051-0286-5

A companion to medieval art; Romanesque and Gothic in Northern Europe. Title main entry. Ed. by Conrad Rudolph. (Blackwell companions to art history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 676 p. $174.95 This impressive volume gathers 30 essays by prominent medieval art historians that survey the state and historiography of the field, describing its theoretical basis and controversies in the process. Among the topics are vision, Gregory the Great and image theory, the concept of spolia, art and exegesis, the monstrous in medieval art, and art and pilgrimage. Five essays are devoted to architecture, with Eric Fernie (emeritus, the Courtauld Institute of Art, U. of London, UK) writing about Romanesque, Columbia University’s Stephen Murray writing about Gothic, and Peter Fergusson (Wellesley College) on Cistercian. Two essays consider medievalism in architecture (by Tina Waldeier Bizzarro, Rosemont College, Penn.) and current museum practices in presenting medieval art (by Michelle Brown, of the British Library). All the essays are illustrated with b&w plates, annotated, and concluded with a list of bibliography. Both scholars and students of art history will find this a handy and thought- provoking resource.

–45–

N6250

2006-034590

978-1-58839-208-4

Byzantium; faith and power (1261-1557); perspectives on late Byzantine art and culture. Title main entry. Ed. by Sarah T. Brooks. (The Metropolitan Museum of Art symposia) Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 201 p. $29.95 (pa) The academic symposium was held in April 2004 in connection with an exhibition of loaned art works shown from March to July. The 12 papers include such discussions as small-state policies and complexities, exchanges with Arabic writers, the urban physiognomy of Constantinople from the Latin conquest through the Palaiologan era, the monastery of Mount Sinai and the cult of Saint Catherine, and art and frontiers between Byzantium and the Caucasus. Black-and-white reproductions are included. There is no index. Distributed in the US by Yale University Press. N6260

978-90-04-15492-6

Muqarnas; an annual on the visual culture of the Islamic world; v.23. Title main entry. Ed. by Gülru Necipoglu. BRILL, ©2006 344 p. $129.00 Sponsored by the Aga Khan Program for Islamic Architecture at Harvard and MIT, this well-respected annual presents current research in the history of Islamic art and architecture. The 13 essays contained in the 23rd volume present topics that include the Islamic history of the Lighthouse of Alexandria, the mausoleum of Imam al-Shafi’i in Cairo, Gujarat architecture, the Imambara complex of Lucknow of the Twelver Shi’i, calligraphy exercises in Iran, and a survey on post-revolutionary art in Iran. Manuscript painting is discussed in four articles. Each article is illustrated with color plates. The volume is not indexed. N6370

2006-036531

978-1-4051-4640-1

Renaissance art reconsidered; an anthology of primary sources. Title main entry. Ed. by Carol M. Richardson et al. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 449 p. $84.95 Master Enguerrand Quarton agreed to depict all the estates of the world in the paradise of his altar piece. Purveyors of the new technology, printing, found the pope could drive a hard bargain. Lorenzo de’ Medici’s possessions included exquisite art and an ostrich egg. This collection of primary documents makes fascinating reading, covering drawing and workplace practice (including linear perspective, sculpture, architecture, panel painting, prints and printmaking), the intellectual state of artists and art education process, the places where art was done and patronized, the influence of class and wealth, and the impact of various markets, including the French royalty and the buyers of icons. Two particularly interesting collections include one on how art related to death and another on how, in later years, artists were called to reform and remove the images of the past. N6371

978-0-89236-859-4

European art of the fourteenth century. Baragli, Sandra. Trans. by Brian D. Phillips. (Art through the centuries) Getty Publications, ©2007 383 p. $24.95 (pa) Part of a series produced by Mondadori Electa (Milan, Italy—this title was first published in 2005 as Trecento), this beautifully illustrated small volume does contain many examples of Italian painting, sculpture and architecture, however, the other countries of Europe, especially England, France, and Catalonia, are also well represented. With a handful of pages devoted to each topic, the volume is divided into two halves. The first surveys buildings, the art and architecture typical of specific areas, and representations of important issues and events. The second half contains a survey of significant artists. Each image is accompanied by expansive descriptive captions.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N6450

978-0-8020-9170-3

N6490

Modern art and the idea of the Mediterranean. Title main entry. Ed. by Vojtech Jirat-Wasiutynski. U. of Toronto Press, ©2007 254 p. $85.00 In the fall of 2002, the Art Gallery of Ontario presented the exhibition ‘Voyage into Myth: French Painting from Gauguin to Matisse from the Hermitage Museum, Russia.’ The exhibition examined French PostImpressionist and early modern responses to the concept of a mythological Golden Age located in an ancient past, and especially focused on these artists’ marriage of the idea of the Golden Age with their personal experience of the South of France and the Mediterranean. A December 2002 symposium based on the exhibit, ‘Modern Art and the Mediterranean: Spaces, Bodies and Identities,’ investigated competing classicizing, Orientalizing, and resistant indigenous versions of the Mediterranean in the modern period. Ten papers from the symposium are presented here. Contributors from Canada, the US, and the UK examine the representations of the region in the visual arts since the late 18th century. Essays are grouped around three themes: visualization of the space of the new Mediterranean, varied uses of the classical paradigm, and issues of identity and resistance in an age of modernity and colonialism. There is a 72-page section of b&w photos of various works of art, including photography, painting, and sculpture. Jirat-Wasiutynski was a professor of art history at Queen’s University. N6487

2005-938469

0-87070-085-5

Without boundary; seventeen ways of looking. Daftari, Fereshteh. Museum of Modern Art, NY, ©2006 109 p. $29.95 Published in conjunction with the Without Boundary: Seventeen Ways of Looking exhibition held at the Museum of Modern Art, February 26-May 22, 2006, this catalog showcases the diverse work of contemporary Islamic artists who live in the West. Against the backdrop of more traditional Islamic art, curator Daftari and the artists address the issue of what constitutes such art. The volume includes a foreword by MOMA’s director and biographies of artists, including Shirazeh Houshiary, Mona Hatoum, and Bill Viola. N6490

978-88-7624-804-7

The art of the 20th century; v.2: The artistic culture between the wars, 1920-1945.

978-88-7624-604-3

Title main entry. Skira Editore, ©2006 456 p. $60.00 This is the first volume of “Art of the Twentieth Century.” When finished the set will comprise five volumes covering art history since 1900, for a broad audience of students and general readers. Aiming for a global, upto-date, multifaceted approach, this ambitious project has been in preparation for many years and is a joint project of Skira Editore and UniCredit. Editor Valerio Terraroli and a committee of Italian art historians have shaped the work, commissioning themed articles from specialists and interweaving these essays with narrative text, “analysis boxes” that highlight specific subjects, and year-by- year synoptic tables that link historical events with events in science, literature, music, criticism, and art. The carefully chosen, abundant illustrative images (many full page) are integrated with the text and purposefully include a good number that are little known as well as those that are well known. This first volume begins with discussion of aesthetic experimentation and transformation of artistic language at the beginning of the 20th century, and ends with The Dada revolution. A thematic bibliography and an analytical index complete the work. A note to librarians and others regarding the title, subtitle, and “series”: Library of Congress cataloging, booksellers, and the publisher have mixed these elements in various ways. Distributed by Rizzoli. N6490

978-1-877372-23-0

Gothic NZ; the darker side of Kiwi culture. Title main entry. Ed. by Misha Kavka et al. Otago University Press, ©2006 175 p. $39.95 (pa) To find a New Zealand gothic sensibility, these essays look at a variety of images, from Martin Edmond’s abandoned houses and Saskia Leek’s ghost paintings to Peter Jackson’s movies and gory traffic- accident billboards. The contributors, who are scholars primarily from New Zealand and Australia, do not reach a consensus about the origin or definition of “gothic” but find various sources and examples of it in many different art forms. Distributed in the US by ISBS. N6490

Title main entry. Ed. by Valerio Terraroli. Skira Editore, ©2006 448 p. $60.00 Beginning with a narrative on American art, tradition, and the avantgarde, and ending with discussion of surrealism and abstract expressionism, this is the second volume of “Art of the Twentieth Century”—a five-volume project covering art history in chronological segments since 1900. Signed essays offer discussion of artists’ writings and critical debates, dance, photography, propaganda, film, and decorative arts and decoration. These essays are interwoven with narrative text (presumably written by the editorial team), “analysis boxes” that highlight specific subjects, and year-by-year synoptic tables that link historical events with events in science, literature, music, criticism, and art. Carefully chosen, abundant illustrative images (many full page) include a good number that are lesser known. This ambitious project is a joint project of Skira Editore and UniCredit; the editor is identified as Valerio Terraroli, who worked with a “scientific committee” (the publisher’s words) of Italian art historians. A thematic bibliography and an analytical index complete the work. A note to librarians and others regarding the title, subtitle, and “series”: Library of Congress cataloging, booksellers, and the publisher have mixed these elements in various ways. Distributed by Rizzoli.

Please verify price and availability by contacting publishers or book vendors.

2007-270561

Art of the twentieth century; v.1: The avant-garde movements, 1900-1919.

978-0-7165-3327-6

Irish intellectuals and aesthetics; the making of a modern art collection. Herrero, Marta. Irish Academic Press, ©2007 214 p. $75.00 Herrero (sociology of culture, U. of Plymouth) takes a sociological approach to art collecting in her study of the creation of the Irish Museum of Modern Art collection. Drawing on the works of Zygmunt Bauman and Pierre Bourdieu, Herrero argues that art collecting can be theorized as a form of intellectual practice in which art objects are assigned collecting value. She bases her discussion on interviews with museum and gallery directors and curators. Distributed in the US by ISBS. N6490

978-0-917046-80-3

Modern & contemporary art at the Virginia Museum of Fine Arts. Ravenal, John B. Virginia Museum of Fine Arts, ©2007 238 p. $19.50 Easily held in the hand, this is a fine presentation in a book of charming size (6x6″). Representing as many artists, 114 works are presented, each with a photo, a couple paragraphs of explanatory text, and a quote from the artist. The Virginia Museum of Fine Arts has been a strong collector of the major players, and all media are represented. The book is distributed by the U. of Virginia Press. N6490

2006-935992

0-87846-709-2

The romance of modernism; paintings and sculpture from the Scott M. Black collection. Shackelford, George T.M. MFA Publications, ©2006 136 p. $50.00 This volume showcases 60 artworks from Scott Black’s collection of Impressionist, Post-impressionist and Modernist paintings and sculpture, which includes works by every well known artist of the period from 1870 to 1970. Shackelford (chair, Art of Europe, and curator of Modern Art, Museum of Fine Arts, Boston) provides historical commentary on each object, as well as an interview with Black about his collecting and love of art.

Art Book News Annual 2008

–46–

N6490

978-1-881450-25-2

Territories of terror; mythologies and memories of the Gulag in contemporary Russian-American art. Boym, Svetlana. Boston University Art Gallery, ©2007 55 p. $20.00 (pa) A companion to the art exhibition, GULAG: Soviet Forced Labor Camps and the Struggle for Freedom, this volume documents the work of seven contemporary artists representing two generations of non- conformists born during the Stalin and Kruschev eras grappling the history and mythology of the gulags. In addition to presenting photographs of sculptures and installations and reproductions of paintings from the exhibition, editor Boym (Harvard U.) discusses the characteristic themes and concerns of each of the seven artists. Distributed in the US by the U. of Washington Press. N6494

2006-033604

978-0-8108-5897-8

Abstract artists; signatures and monograms, an international directory.

N6512

2007-028435

978-0-300-12252-7

Abstract expressionism and other modern works; the Muriel Kallis Steinberg Newman collection in the Metropolitan Museum of Art. Title main entry. Ed. by Gary Tinterow et al. Yale University Press, ©2007 214 p. $50.00 Promised more than two decades ago, the Muriel Kallis Steinberg Newman Collection of modern art only joined the permanent collection of The Metropolitan Museum of Art recently. Published in celebration of that event, this catalogue reproduces images of works by some 50 artists found in the collection, including pieces produced by Arshile Gorky, Franz Kline, Mark Rothko, Willem de Kooning, Jackson Pollock, Clyfford Still, Max Ernst, and Joan Miró. The focus of the collection is on abstract expressionism, but such focus is not exclusive. Each artist is discussed, together with the examples of their work found in the Newman Collection, in individual scholarly essays. N6512

2006-010859

1-58685-766-5

Creating the artful home; the aesthetic movement in America.

Castagno, John. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 567 p. $225.00 Castagno, a multimedia artist and sculptor and author of other books in the Artists’ Signatures and Monograms series, presents a reference for identifying, authenticating, and verifying signatures and works of wellknown and little-known abstract artists. About 2,300 painters, printmakers, sculptors, and photographers around the world are listed. Monograms and initials, common and alternative surname signatures, symbols, and Cyrillic signatures are included. An additional 1,500 artists whose work bears no signature are listed as well. Information on their nationality, birth and death dates, and sources where the signature was found are included.

Zukowski, Karen. Gibbs Smith, ©2006 176 p. $39.95 Zukowski, a historian of late 19th-century American visual arts, covers the history of the Aesthetic movement, which popularized the notion that everyone should be able to enjoy beautiful, well-made homes and furnishings. In her discussion of the way American homes of the past have shaped homes today, Zukowski analyzes gender roles and the development of architecture as a moral imperative. The many illustrations include rare color views of the interiors and exteriors of homes built in the 1880s.

N6494

N6530

2007-367413

1-85177-474-2

Modernism, 1914-1939; designing a new world. Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Wilk. V & A Publications, ©2006 447 p. $85.00 Wilk (of the Victoria and Albert Museum, England) and fellow contributors delve deep into Modernism, the design concept that bloomed between 1914 and 1939, seeking to pin down the definition of the movement that often eludes scholars. The text dissects film, furniture, advertising, fashion, art, ceramics, transportation, architecture, and photography that demonstrate the characteristics of utopian design or “a clear concept of things” that are part of that definition, as exemplified by the Bauhaus school. Discussion is accompanied by 420 color and b&w illustrations. This book is distributed in North America by Harry N. Abrams, Inc. Oversize: 9.7x11.75″. N6494

2006-028165

978-0-8166-4653-1

2006-035089

978-0-89013-497-9

The art of New Mexico; how the West is one; the collection of the Museum of Fine Arts. Traugott, Joseph. Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2007 276 p. $55.00 The 225 works collected here are from the Museum of Fine Arts in Santa Fe, New Mexico, and they tell the story of that state’s art, including discussion of aesthetic movements and of the combination of Native American, Hispanic, and European cultural traditions that have intermeshed there since the arrival of the railroad in 1879. Essays explore such topics as the formation of artist communities, the creation of a modernist destination, the role of art in reviving culture by rejecting cheap tourism, art during the Great Depression and during the Cold War, and the role of art in reconceptualizing the contemporary Southwest, among other topics. The book is oversize: 9.75x11.75″.

The scar of visibility; medical performances and contemporary art.

N6530

Kuppers, Petra. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 259 p. $29.95 (pa) Kuppers (English, U. of Michigan-Ann Arbor) explores how people use art about bodies in order to find alignment between the social knowledge, medical perspectives, their own sensations, and their sense of self. Her topics include pain and performance; blood, laughter, and the space-off; and the discourses of AIDS in medical museums and art displays.

Inglot, Joanna. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 190 p. $34.95 (pa) In this first published history of the influential Women’s Arts Registry of Minnesota (WARM) cum-catalog for an exhibition of WARM works held at Weisman Art Museum, Minneapolis, in 2006, Inglot (art history, Macalester College) situates WARM within the national feminist art scene. After offering biographical sketches of a dozen of the collective’s artists including Patricia Olson, Vesna Kittleson, and Linda Gammell, she presents color art images reflecting their themes: e.g., sexuality, spirituality, the personal as political, and identity. Exhibit works and WARM Gallery members (1976-1991) are listed in the white dust cover- encased book.

N6494

2007-927111

978-0-87846-720-4

Shy boy, she devil, and Isis; the art of conceptual craft. Ward, Gerald W.R. and Julie M. Muñiz, MFA Publications, ©2007 183 p. $35.00 (pa) This book accompanies a large exhibition by the Museum of Fine Arts in Boston of post-1980 works from the Wornick collection, displaying the contemporary sculpture of 107 artists of the studio craft movement. Fine works in wood, glass, clay, metal, and fiber are accompanied by a writeup on each artist, along with essays exploring postmodernism in studio craft and the creative use of materials and techniques by artists in the collection. Oversize: 11.25x9.5″. N6494

2006-050906

978-0-8166-5038-5

WARM; a feminist art collective in Minnesota.

978-90-04-15714-9

Subjects and objects; art, essentialism, and abstraction. Strayer, Jeffrey. (Philosophy of history of culture; 25) BRILL, ©2007 388 p. $129.00 Strayer (philosophy, Indiana U.-Purdue U.) presents a philosophical consideration of the limits of abstraction in art, but in order to make a proper job of it, he finds he must reflect widely on the philosophy of subjects—who make and apprehend the art—and objects—the art itself and whatever it depicts. He is also working on a series of artworks exploring the limits of abstraction.

–47–

N6535

2006-011560

1-4236-0114-9

Artists of the canyons and caminos; Santa Fe, early twentieth century. Robertson, Edna and Sarah Nestor. Gibbs Smith, ©2006 188 p. $19.95 (pa) Robertson was Curator of Collections at the Fine Arts Museum in Santa Fe, New Mexico, when she wrote this book with the assistance of her writer-editor daughter, Nestor. Originally published in 1976 by P. Smith, the text highlights the now legendary group of painters living and working in early-20th century Santa Fe. The text is based on information gathered by Robertson from the artists themselves, their families and friends, and the Santa Fe Fine Arts Museum’s artists’ files, old exhibit catalogues, and photo archives. Illustrated throughout with b&w and color photographs and reproductions.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N6535

2006-034572

978-0-8109-9306-8

N6537

2006-043184

0-7649-3747-2

Venice, CA; art + architecture in a maverick community.

David C. Driskell; artist and scholar.

Webb, Michael. Photographs by Juergen Nogai. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 190 p. $40.00 The houses of artists and collectors and houses notable for their architecture are profiled in this colorful volume. The essays for each house describe the genesis of the house’s design, often in conjunction with details about the owner. Many interior and exterior photos are included for each. The volume is slightly oversized: (9x10.5″)

McGee, Julie L. Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 216 p. $45.00 In 2001, in honor of Driskell’s tenure there, the U. of Maryland opened the David C. Driskell Center for the Study of the Visual Arts and Culture of African Americans and the African Diaspora. Many other honors have come his way, but this volume is the first biography and comprehensive monograph devoted to Driskell (b.1931), who is now retired but is still painting, drawing, designing, and printing—and is active also as a lecturer and visiting professor. Art historian McGee (Bowdoin College) begins with Driskell’s college years at Howard U. and follows his journey over five decades—his affiliations with various educational institutions, his family, his career, and his artistic development. Some 200 color and b&w images are showcased.

N6537

2006-011347

978-0-8118-5534-1

The art of Alex Gross; paintings and other works. Gross, Alex. Chronicle Books, ©2007 159 p. $40.00 The art of Alex Gross, rife with anachronistic images, is influenced by 1930s militaristic Japan, Victorian etchings, and American advertising and sci-fi movies. In this first published collection of his works, over 100 full-page color plates display his contributions to Southern California’s Lowbrow and “pop surrealism” movements in the form of screen prints, paintings, etchings, drawings, and digital art. In his introduction, Wired Contributor Bruce Sterling best summarizes Gross’s themes as the following: “globalization, cross-cultural impact, commerce, engineering, great beauty, dark mayhem, and the remorseless passage of time.” This book also includes an interview with the artist. No index is provided. Oversize: 9.5x12″. N6537

2006-028171

978-0-8166-4470-4

Cabinet of curiosities; Mark Dion and the university as installation. Title main entry. Ed. by Colleen J. Sheehy U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 107 p. $29.95 (pa) This is a catalogue and companion to Dion’s exhibition at the Weisman Art Museum in 2001, which assembled objects from the University of Minnesota’s various museum collections into thematic cabinets. Student curators who participated in the project and others comment on the exhibition. N6537

2005-038067

1-55595-265-8

Celebrating freedom; the art of Willie Birch. Rubin, David S. and Leslie King-Hammond. Hudson Hills Press, ©2005 134 p. $50.00 Rubin (Curator of Visual Arts, Contemporary Art Center in New Orleans) and King-Hammond present this collection of the art of Willie Birch, whose large-scale drawings and polychrome sculptures depict a social and ethnic record of African-American culture in New Orleans. An interview with the artist and two essays on his life, work, and influences are followed by 60 color reproductions of works from 1968-2004. This book was published in conjunction with an exhibition organized by the Contemporary Art Center. Oversize: 10.5x10.5″. N6537

2006-030139

Charles Alston.

2006-013202

0-8109-3030-7

978-0-295-98710-1

Hackett, Regina. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 64 p. $27.95 Demonstrating that slim books can sometimes be the best books, this thoughtfully prepared 64-page volume offers a selective retrospective of the long career of Seattle-based artist Elizabeth Sandvig (b.1937). Forty plates present colorful paintings and prints made over several decades, and early sculpture from the 1960s and 70s. Providing context: a lucid artist’s statement, a list of exhibitions, and two essays (by Regina Hackett, art critic for the Seattle Post- Intelligencer, and by Sean Elwood, active in the arts and the grant-giving communities and clearly a fan). Published by the Francine Seders Gallery (Seattle) in association with the U. of Washington Press. N6537

2006-287907

0-87070-392-7

Jasper Johns; a retrospective. (reprint, 1996) Varnedoe, Kirk. Museum of Modern Art, NY, ©2006 408 p. $65.00 The Museum of Modern Art wisely chose to reprint the catalogue for the 1996 exhibition; a quick online search shows only one copy of the original 1996 publication, at a cost of $385! Now a wider audience can experience what a book can convey of the enormous vitality of painter Jasper Johns (b. 1930). Appropriately, it’s a big book (9.25x12.25″), with 482 illustrations (275 in color). Providing background, context, and interpretation, the essays by Roberta Bernstein and Kirk Varnedoe include a generous allotment of small images showing works by artists who influenced Johns and those who were influenced by him. The heart of the book of course lies in the chronologically arranged full-page plates, beginning with the period 1930-1958, and ending with 1990-1995, representing the many stages of Johns’ creative output. Notes to the chronology and a bibliography round out the volume. 2006-012297

978-1-57441-220-8

A life on paper; the drawings and lithographs of John Thomas Biggers. Theisen, Ollie Jensen. Univ. of North Texas Press, ©2006 149 p. $29.95 Standing behind the murals at Hampton U., Winston-Salem University, and Texas Southern are lesser-known drawings and lithographs of John Thomas Biggers (1924-2001). After formal training, Biggers was deeply influenced by six months spent in Ghana in 1957, and African abstract elements combined with rural Southern images formed his personal iconography. Art historian Theisen interviewed Dr. Biggers during the last 13 years of his life, and together they selected 100 representative works for this volume. The works are set in context by the text (created with the help of his widow) describing his life, career, and the development of his art.

The color of love; an artist’s book of poetry and passion; moving through the world; selections and paintings. Bancou, Marielle. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 — p. $85.00 Published in an oversize, slightly vertical format (9x13″), this volume presents full-page color plates of excellent quality of the silkscreened images of textile and book artist Bancou’s favorite love poems, which she wrote in gold on backgrounds in all shades of red and violet. In a sturdy red slip-case. Not indexed.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-039163

I surprise myself; the art of Elizabeth Sandvig.

N6537

978-0-7649-3766-8

Wardlaw, Alvia J. (The David C. Driskell series of African American art; v.6) Pomegranate Communications, ©2007 118 p. $35.00 Wardlaw (Museum of Fine Arts, Houston, and University Museum, Texas Southern U.) presents about 70 color and b&w reproductions of the work of artist, teacher, and social activist Charles Alston (1907-1977). Paintings, sculptures, and public murals are shown, along with critical commentary. Wardlaw also recounts Alston’s life and contributions to African American art history, including his role in the Harlem Renaissance, the establishment of the WPA Harlem Art Workshop, and as the first black supervisor in the WPA Federal Art Project. N6537

N6537

–48–

N6537

2006-026597

1-58839-201-5

Louis Comfort Tiffany and Laurelton Hall; an artist’s country estate.

978-1-883124-25-0

Manuel Neri; the figure in relief. Nixon, Bruce. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 195 p. $65.00 This exhibition catalog presented by Grounds for Sculpture (Hamilton, New Jersey), Portland Art Museum, and the San Jose Institute of Contemporary Art features relief sculptures and related drawings by Manuel Neri. Nixon provides an essay on the evolution of his ideas; Maxwell Anderson, from the Indianapolis Museum of Art, provides a brief introduction on the historical context of his approach. Two hundred and forty illustrations of his works and other influential artists are shown in color. There is no index. The book measures 10.25x12.25″. Nixon is an independent scholar who has written several books and articles about contemporary art. N6537

2006-033012

978-1-55595-279-2

Marylyn Dintenfass; paintings. Dintenfass, Marylyn. Hudson Hills Press, ©2007 144 p. $50.00 Known equally well for her sculpture, prints and paintings and for her mastery of a range of artistic methods, from millennia-old ceramic techniques to digital technology, Dintenfass has emerged as a leading artist of her generation. This volume focuses on her paintings, shown here in 70 large-scale color plates and analyzed by Lily Wei, a contributing editor to ARTnews and Art AsiaPacific. The text includes a chronology, bibliography and an interview of the artist by John Driscoll (Babcock Galleries, Palmer Museum of Art, National Academy of Design and Metropolitan Museum of Art). N6537

2006-018718

978-0-300-12120-9

Maya Lin; systematic landscapes. Lin, Maya Ying. Yale University Press, ©2006 112 p. $40.00 Those interested to see the full range of Lin’s ouevre—so evocative of maps and topography (she designed the Vietnam Memorial in Washington, DC)—will welcome this catalogue, which contains full-page photos of her site-specific as well as gallery-sized works and two lengthy essays (by Richard Andrews, director of the Henry Art Gallery, Seattle, and John Beardsley, Harvard U. Graduate School of Design). The volume, which is oversized (10.75x10.75″), was published in association with the Henry Art Gallery, where the exhibition originated in 2006 (it travels to locations in St Louis, San Diego, and Denver in 2007-2008). N6537

2007-007335

2006-940762

978-0-9704295-7-5

Ruth Weisberg; unfurled.

Frelinghuysen, Alice Cooney. Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 262 p. $65.00 This publication accompanies the 2006-07 exhibition of art from Louis Comfort Tiffany’s country estate, Laurelton Hall, at the New York Metropolitan Museum of Art. The exhibition’s developer Frelinghuysen, along with other contributors, trace the genesis of Laurelton Hall, explaining the eastern influence on Tiffany’s early interiors; and attractively displaying the elaborate lamps, vases, murals, leaded-glass windows, paintings, ceramics, and enamelwork that made up his personal museum. The book also features Tiffany’s extensive collections of Asian and Native American art, provides insight into life at Laurelton Hall, and describes the work of the Louis Comfort Tiffany Foundation. Distribution is by Yale U. Press. Oversize: 9.25x12″. N6537

N6537

978-0-8173-5469-5

Roger Brown; southern exposure. Lawrence, Sidney. U. of Alabama Press, ©2007 55 p. $25.00 (pa) Published to accompany an exhibition held at the Jule Collins Smith Museum of Fine Art at Auburn University, this oversized catalog (10x11″) presents an essay about Brown’s life and art by Sidney Lawrence, who was guest curator, with several photos of the artist and his studios. The paintings from the exhibition are reproduced in full-page color plates. A list of Brown’s paintings in southern collections, a timeline of his life, and a list of further reading are provided. Not indexed.

–49–

Kuspit, Donald and Matthew Baigell. Skirball Cultural Center, ©2007 86 p. $19.95 (pa) Contemporary American painter and printmaker Weisberg’s work is concerned with the intersection of her life as a Jewish-American and the recent and ancient memory of the Jewish people. Los Angeles’ Skirball Cultural Center published this retrospective along with an exhibition of the same name which displayed her 94-foot-long mixed-media drawing The Scroll for the first time in its entirety, as well as 36 other works spanning three decades. In two essays, Kuspit and Baigell (art historians from the State U. of New York and Rutgers) place The Scroll in historical context and consider its use of spiritual realism. Distributed by University of Washington Press. N6537

2006-021457

0-915977-60-5

Weaving his art on golden looms; paintings and drawings by Art Rosenbaum. (DVD included) Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Harper. Georgia Museum of Art, ©2006 103 p. $35.00 (pa) Published in conjunction with an exhibition at the Georgia Museum of Art, October 2006 - January 2007, this catalogue presents 51 color plates (in a horizontal, oversize format: 9x12″) representing 52 years of work by Rosenbaum (b.1938), who until 2006 was affiliated with the U. of Georgia. Three essays, a chronology, and a DVD support the paintings and drawings selected as representative of Rosenbaum’s long career. N6537

2006-045894

978-0-7407-6080-8

Wyland; 25 years at sea. Wyland. Ed. by John Yow. Andrews McMeel, ©2006 178 p. $39.95 Yow, a freelance writer, brings together a volume on the life and work of marine-life artist Wyland (who provides a foreword), consisting of many stunning one and two-page color spreads of his paintings, along with descriptions of his recent environmental projects, specifically the Wyland Ocean Challenge. His international mural series Whaling Wall, and new directions in his work as a sculptor, muralist, and photographer are detailed. The book measures 10.5x12.5″. N6538

2007-000421

978-0-313-33451-1

Encyclopedia of Asian American artists. Hallmark, Kara Kelley. (Artists of the American mosaic) Greenwood Press, ©2007 281 p. $85.00 Hallmark (art history and education, Florida State U.) selected the 75 artists featured here for their cultural connections to the US and one or more East Asian countries. The brief alphabetically-arranged entries offer career biographies, bibliographies and places to see each artist’s work; and basic information including birth and death dates, country of ancestry or origin, and his or her predominant media. Some b&w and color prints support the text. N6538

2006-028661

978-0-313-33637-9

Encyclopedia of Jewish American artists. Baskind, Samantha. (Artists of the American mosaic) Greenwood Press, ©2007 323 p. $85.00 Basking (Cleveland State U.) provides a thoughtful preface elucidating her selection of artists (she does not claim comprehensiveness). Regarding Jewishness: some of the artists explicitly express their Jewish identity in their work; others do not. Regarding “American”: many were not born in the US, but they did arrive at a young age and identify as Americans. After setting context with a historical essay, Baskind profiles 80-plus artists, offering, for each, biographical information, discussion of oeuvre, a bibliography, and a selected list of public collections. Aside from providing a convenient resource, one of Baskind’s aims is to support discussion about what indeed can be seen as “Jewish” about an artist’s work. N6538

2006-021369

978-0-7425-4641-7

Jewish art in America; an introduction. Baigell, Matthew. Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 251 p. $29.95 (pa) Surveying subjects and themes explored by Jewish artists and America, Baigell (emeritus art history, Rutgers U.) suggests a few ways to think about how artists dealt with Jewish themes over the past 250 years (but mostly since the 1920s), how they responded to events of their time, and how their subject matter has changed and developed over the decades.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N6538

2005-028434

1-930618-56-5

N6789

Painting the underworld sky; cultural expression and subversion in art. Romero, Mateo. (School of American Research Native America series) School for Advanced Research, ©2006 94 p. $29.95 (pa) This work reproduces 50 paintings by Pueblo artist Mateo Romero. In addition to the color plates representing a range of different styles and topics, the paintings are accompanied by Romero’s own explanations of his efforts, most of which express the current and historical concerns of his people, as well as of his own biography and family. N6573

978-90-04-15392-9

Woman and art in early modern Latin America. Title main entry. Ed. by Kellen Kee McIntyre and Richard E. Phillips. (The Atlantic world: Europe, Africa and the Americas, 1500-1830, v.10) BRILL, ©1007 449 p. $129.00 McIntyre (art history, U. of the Incarnate Word, San Antonio) and Phillips (art history, U. of Texas-Pan American, Edinburg) offer a collection of 17 essays on the visual representation of women in early modern Latin America. Noticing the omission of art and architecture of this period in feminist art historical publications, they sought to compile a volume that combines feminist approaches with interdisciplinary methodologies as a means to expand understanding of the topic. Essays are grouped according to forms of representation in places such as Mexico, Peru, and Spain. Some b&w illustrations are included. N6757

2006-050058

978-1-4128-0607-7

Art in crisis; the lost center. (reprint, 1957; new intro.) Sedlmayr, Hans. Trans. by Brian Battershaw. Transaction Publishers, ©2007 266 p. $29.95 (pa) First published in Germany in 1948 as Verlust der Mitte, Sedlmayr’s (1896-1984) text argued that the aesthetic disjunctures of modern art represented more than matters of style, that in fact they were indicative of deeper processes of cultural and religious disintegration. This reprint of the 1957 English translation (Hollis and Carter Limited, London) includes a new introduction by Kimball (The New Criterion) which provides background on Sedlmayr’s work in Austria as an art and architectural historian, the significance of the text and analysis of Sedlmayr’s key points. For art critics and theological thinkers. No subject index. N6768

2006-287083

978-1-84467-085-7

High art lite; the rise and fall of young British art. (reprint, 1999) Stallabrass, Julian. Verso, ©2006 356 p. $24.95 (pa) A writer and art critic, Stallabrass lectures at London’s Courtauld Institute of Art. Originally published in 1999, his text offers an assessment of “young British art” (YBA)—also referred to by the author as “high art lite”—of the 1990s, its legacy in the 21st century, and what it reveals about the fate of high art as a whole in contemporary society. The text explores the success of YBA and the obsession of young British artists with commerce, mass media, and the cult of personality. The revised edition includes some updating and correction of errors in the original text, and features a new final chapter analyzing the end of high art lite as the leading tendency in British contemporary art, and the settling of some of its elements into an accommodation with new cultural and political powers. Illustrated with color photographs. N6784

978-1-85182-987-3

Art and devotion in late medieval Ireland. Title main entry. Ed. by Rachel Moss et al. Four Courts Press, ©2006 234 p. $55.00 The authors examine the material culture of Ireland in the context of continental popular piety by situating texts, topics and artifacts within their theological, artistic and historical milieux. As a result of the multi-disciplinary approach of the contributors, wall paintings, reliquaries, stained glass, figure sculpture and vestments appear along religious poetry, hagiography and devotional literature. The text includes illustrations and color plates. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2007-367094

978-1-905172-03-0

Movers and shapers; Irish visual art, 1940-2006. Ryan, Vera. The Collins Press, ©2006 381 p. $29.95 (pa) This volume presents oral histories on Irish artistic production and its infrastructure from 1940 to 2006. Twelve collectors, scholars, gallery directors, educators, writers, and artists were interviewed and discuss topics such as their experiences at galleries, corporate collecting, art groups, the Kilkenny Design Workshops, specific works and artists, research, and writing on art. The interviews are preceded by brief biographies. Gordon Lambert, John Kelly, Frances Ruane, Homan Potterton, Barrie Cooke, and Jamshid Mirfenderesky are among those interviewed. Ryan is the author of Movers & Shapers: Irish Visual Art Since 1960. Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions. N6797

2006-049905

978-0-87661-960-5

The art of antiquity; Piet de Jong and the Athenian Agora. Papadopoulos, John K. Am.School of Classical Studies at Athens, ©2007334 p. $75.00 (pa) Essays by Papadopoulos and colleagues working on archaeological projects at the Athenian Agora are combined here with the lifelike watercolor illustrations of the site by Piet de Jong (1887-1967), which are archived at the American School of Classical Studies at Princeton. The illustrations portray materials found at the sight as well as landscapes and simulations of the appearance and society of the Agora in its heyday. Essay topics include de Jong’s style and career, Neolithic through Middle Helladic pottery, Archaic and Classical odds and ends, Athenian blackfigured and black- gloss pottery, bronzes and bronze sculpture, ivory and terracotta, Roman mosaics, Byzantine and Post-Byzantine pottery, and the signature labels of de Jong, among others. Approximately 240 color images are provided, some of which have had color added for this publication. This book is distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. Oversize: 9.25x11″. N6797

0-85331-938-3

Doves and dreams; the art of Frances Macdonald and James Herbert McNair. Title main entry. Ed. by Pamela Robertson. Lund Humphries, ©2006 191 p. $80.00 Robertson (Mackintosh studies, U. of Glasgow, UK) is joined by other art scholars from Canada and the UK in this examination of the lives and careers of Frances Macdonald (1873-1921) and J. Herbert McNair (18681955), the less often studied members of the “Glasgow Four.” The volume has been published in association with the exhibition of the same name, showing in 2006 and 2007 at the Hunterian Art Gallery at the U. of Glasgow and Walker Art Gallery at the National Museums Liverpool. Essays, which survey the contributions of Macdonald and McNair, present a comparative analysis of the urban context, and discuss their collaborative partnership and 3-D designs, are followed by a catalog of the works, most held at the U. of Glasgow. Color and b&w photos show furniture and interiors, graphics, metalwork, pastels, textiles, and watercolors. Distributed in the US by Ashgate. N6847

2006-004367

0-8109-5738-8

Impressionist and post-impressionist painting and sculpture; in the Israel Museum Jerusalem. Rachum, Stephanie. Harry N. Abrams, ©2005 183 p. $40.00 The 19th-century French painting and sculpture collection of the Israel Museum is suitably showcased in this handsome volume, which presents the works in full-page plates in an oversize format (10.25x12.25″) side-byside with a descriptive catalogue essay. The works are organized by style then by artist, with works included by Cezanne, Gauguin, Degas, Rodin, and Renoir, among others. Short essays are also provided for each artist, to introduce and characterize their work, making this a useful introduction to these stylistic trends. Rachum, former curator of modern art at the Israel Museum, contributes an essay on the history of the collection. The volume is not indexed.

–50–

N6853

2006-047124

978-0-7734-5697-6

Manet, Baudelaire and photography; v.2.

N6953

2006-036412

978-1-933045-44-3

Rembrandt’s nose; of flesh & spirit in the master’s portraits.

Ligo, Larry L. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 389+ p. $199.95 In this 2-volume analysis (the volumes are sold separately), Ligo (Davidson College, North Carolina) argues that Manet’s approach was mainly influenced by the aesthetic theory of Charles Baudelaire, which argued for the use of non-art to present art, achieved by Manet with techniques garnered from the new medium of photography. Using an exhaustive analysis of Manet’s iconography to support this thesis, Ligo presents a novel and detailed chronological discussion of the artist’s career. There are copious b&w illustrations, but of indifferent quality. Oversized: 9x11.25″.

Taylor, Michael. Distributed Art Publishers, ©2007 167 p. $27.50 Taylor analyzes the work of Rembrandt, looking specifically at how he painted noses in his portraits and how they work with other features to add life to the paintings. He examines paintings from the artist’s early to late years: the 1620s to the 1660s. All paintings and drawings are shown in b&w. No index is provided. Taylor, a translator and author, teaches at Parsons School of Design in Paris.

N6853

The space of freedom; apartment exhibitions in Leningrad, 1964-1986.

2006-047124

978-0-7734-5695-2

Manet, Baudelaire and photography; v.1. Ligo, Larry L. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 384 p. $199.95 In this 2-volume analysis (the volumes are sold separately), Ligo (Davidson College, North Carolina) argues that Manet’s approach was mainly influenced by the aesthetic theory of Charles Baudelaire, which argued for the use of non-art to present art, achieved by Manet with techniques garnered from the new medium of photography. Using an exhaustive analysis of Manet’s iconography to support this thesis, Ligo presents a novel and detailed chronological discussion of the artist’s career. There are copious b&w illustrations, but of indifferent quality. The index and bibliography are in Volume 2. Oversized: 9x11.25″. N6923

2006-052933

978-0-472-11584-6

The serpent and the stylus; essays on G.B. Piranesi. Title main entry. Ed. by Mario Bevilacqua et al. (Memoirs of the American Academy in Rome; supplementary v.4) U. of Michigan Press, ©2007 274 p. $80.00 Contributors identified only by name offer perspectives on Italian architect, engraver, archaeologist, furniture and fireplace designer, and author and bookseller Piranesi (1720-78). They consider such aspects as his stylistic and technical development from 1740 to 1761, the controversy between him and Pierre Jean Mariette, architecture and history, and his influence on modern Italian architecture. No index is provided. N6946

2006-014746

978-1-883124-23-6

Rembrandt and the Golden Age of Dutch art; treasures from the Rijksmuseum, Amsterdam. Priem, Ruud. Ed. by Penelope Hunter-Stiebel. Portland Art Museum, ©2006 144 p. $29.95 This book accompanies the first American touring exhibition of works from the Rijksmuseum in Amsterdam since 1885. Framed by 90 works from Rembrandt, Frans Hals, Jacob van Ruisdael, Jan Steen, and other artists of the 17th-century Golden Age of Dutch Art, the text takes the readers from descriptions of the artists and their world through their masterful renderings of life in the city, the countryside, the church, and the aristocracy. One section discusses museums in the US whose collections prominently feature Holland’s Golden Age painters. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. N6953

2007-366164

978-90-5662-512-2

The devil drives and other true stories. Beijer, Jasper de. NAi Publishers, ©2006 111 p. $35.00 (pa) Three series by Dutch artist Jasper de Beijer displayed here depict three distinct worlds drawn from photographs depicting the Dutch East Indies in 1920, a Victorian explorer’s search for the source of the Nile, and a former rubber boomtown in the South American jungle. Each is editorialized by the artist’s often grotesque embellishments that seem to tell more truth than a simple photo. Combining photography, paper models, computer imaging, and cinema techniques, the works recreate the encounters of far-off places with Europeans, and capture time in such stillness and detail as to unnerve the viewer. Study models are included for each series. Text and an interview in both English and Dutch shed light on de Beijer’s fascination for each subject and his singular technique. Distributed by Distributed Art Publishers. Oversize: 9.25x11.75″.

–51–

N6988

2006-906347

978-0-9765047-3-3

Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Waller et al. U. of Richmond Museums, ©2007 108 p. $29.95 (pa) This is the catalogue for the eponymous traveling exhibition of artwork from the collection of the Museum of Nonconformist Art, located in St. Petersburg, Russia. The exhibition sought to present representative nonconformist art originally shown in communal apartments in Soviet Russia between 1964 and 1986, as well as to recreate the experience of such exhibitions themselves. The catalogue reproduces 46 paintings from the exhibition and provides a brief history of the nonconformist art movement. N6999

2005-020644

978-0-8204-7850-0

Kandinsky’s quest; a study in the artist’s personal symbolism, 1866-1907. Aronov, Igor. (Hermeneutics of art; v.13) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 270 p. $74.95 Aronov (art history, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem and history and theory of art, Bezalel Academy of Arts, Jerusalem) focuses on Russian painter Vasily Kandinsky’s (1866-1944) enigmatic figurative art, the framework for his later abstraction, as his personal symbolic language. He draws on published and unpublished material to explore the artist’s spiritual world. The 68 reproductions are in black and white. There is no index. N7073

82-7477-231-8

Edvard Munch; an anthology. Title main entry. Ed. by Erik Mørstad. Oslo Academic Press, ©2006 225 p. $69.00 Taken together, the work of Munch represents an eternal search for either life or death, punctuated by moments of groping for spirituality. His is a powerful presence. Here nine contributors examine that presence in terms of the early work that reflected Kristania Bohemia, the influence of both originality and repetition, the self-portrait, the ambiguity of gender, masculinity in later works, the influence of Munch on Kirchner, and the inappropriate appropriation of Munch by postmodernists. This includes a well-chosen bibliography. Distributed by ISBS. N7093

2007-004078

978-0-7734-5503-0

The modernist-utopian art of Karl Momen, b. 1934; a Persian-Russian-American life. Du Toit, Herman. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 140 p. $109.95 Momen’s work extends from his roots in Iran and his secular life, with acknowledgment of his experience among third-wave modernists in Russia, Europe and the US. Du Toit (research, Brigham Young U. of Art) includes 40 illustrations in his account of Momen’s passage, including his association with Utopianism and constructivism, his life as a secular Iranian, his search for the modernist influence in Russia, Europe and the US, his development of a personal iconography, his close association with Utah, and the consequences of a life lived wholly for art. N7253

2006-424103

88-7624-678-9

Marina Abramovic; Balkan epic. Abramovic, Marina. Ed. by Adelina von Fürstenberg. Skira Editore, ©2006 112 p. $34.95 (pa) Performance and video installation Abramovic presents images from six works since 1997 that were inspired by her return to her native Serbia and Montenegro after the devastating wars there. Some photographs also show preparations for the performances. Art critics discuss the pieces and her overall themes. Distributed in the US by Rizzoli.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N7258

2006-036886

978-1-4051-2071-5

N7353

978-0-87846-711-2

Late antique and medieval art of the Mediterranean world.

Drama and desire; Japanese painting from the floating world; 1690-1850.

Title main entry. Ed. by Eva R. Hoffman. (Blackwell anthologies in art history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 426 p. $39.95 (pa) Hoffman (art history, Tufts U., Boston, Mass.), a specialist in early Islamic art, has drawn from her long experience in the field to gather a fascinating collection of articles and chapters concerning the art of the Mediterranean, with a focus throughout on the shared characteristics of the art of the different religions and states in the area. The 21 selections are grouped into six topics, including late antiquity (with selections on Roman, Jewish, and Sasanian art), early non-classical art, luxury arts, and the later Mediterranean, when Venice, Norman Sicily, and the Islamic world were dominant. Among the scholars whose work is included are Henry Maguire, Lisa Golombek, Oleg Grabar, Jerrilynn Dodds, and William Tronzo. This will be a terrific resource for the art history classroom.

Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Nishimura Morse. MFA Publications, ©2007 243 p. $37.50 (pa) Ukiyo-e, “pictures of the floating world,” is mainly associated with woodblock printing in Japan, but this book is the first to feature the much less familiar ukiyo-e paintings, which use some of the same motifs as the prints but present a very different aesthetic experience. Boston’s Museum of Fine Arts has amassed some 700 examples of ukiyo-e from the 17th to the mid-19th centuries and the exhibition “Drama and Desire” was the first to highlight this collection. For this exhibition catalogue, Morse (curator of Japanese art at the Museum) presents reproductions of the 80 or so pieces from the exhibition—including series devoted to explicit sexual imagery—together with textual descriptions. She also includes essays discussing ukiyo-e in the context of Edo (Tokyo) society and culture; ukiyo-e’s mixture of the “high” and the “low;” and the subculture of Edo courtesans, geishas, and male prostitutes.

N7310

N7355

2007-007900

978-0-300-12027-1

The art of Gandhara in the Metropolitan Museum of Art. Behrendt, Kurt A. Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2007 115 p. $24.95 (pa) This well-illustrated volume describes the rich sculptural tradition (from the 2nd century BC until the 8th century AD) of Gandhara, a region in modern-day Pakistan and Afghanistan. Behrendt, a curator at the Met, describes the artistic trends and monuments of the region—including the destroyed Bamiyan Buddhas—as he discusses the collection of luxury and religious goods and Buddhist sculpture from Gandhara in the Met. The volume, which is oversized (8.5x11″), includes a glossary and full bibliography. It is distributed by Yale U. Press. N7349

2007-002859

978-0-8248-3050-2

Refracted modernity; visual culture and identity in colonial Taiwan. Title main entry. Ed. by Yuko Kikuchi. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 285 p. $60.00 Despite their substantial influence in contemporary art, few Taiwanese artists receive serious critical attention. These nine essays seek to remedy this by explaining Taiwanese visual culture and landscape during the Japanese colonial period (1895-1945). Four essays explain the traditional images of Taiwan and the discovery by others of the Taiwanese landscape and cover Japanese travel writing about colonial Taiwan, the elements of exploration and travel in landscape painting, the links between Japanese landscape painting and Taiwan in terms of national identity and the decline and demise of Oriental-style painting in Japan. Two essays describe images by and about women, including their changing representation and their depiction by Taiwanese women artists under Japanese rule, and three papers address Taiwan’s vernacular landscape, including the Taiwanese element in architecture, aboriginal art and its entanglements with identity and modernity, and the treatment of colonial ideas in Taiwan’s crafts. 978-0-295-98733-0

N7355

2006-030601

978-4-7700-3031-3

Warriors of art; a guide to contemporary Japanese artists. Yamaguchi, Yumi. Trans. by Arthur Tanaka. Kodansha International, ©2007 175 p. $34.95 Tokyo-based art critic Yamaguchi discusses the life and work of 40 painters, sculptors, photographers, and performance artists from contemporary Japan. In approximately 320 color plates, readers are introduced to Yasuyuki Nishio, whose “hollow relief casting” technique gave way to a series of female corpses wearing the latest fashions; pop art and anime incorporating the grotesque, the sexy, and the adorable by Kumi Machida, Mahomi Kunikata, and Sako Kojima; and modern remarks on traditional art by Hisashi Tenmyouya, among others. 978-0-7734-5334-0

Ancestral spirits embodied in Ekpu figurines of the Oron people; a study in Nigerian traditional art.

Crafting beauty in modern Japan; celebrating fifty years of the exhibition of Japanese art crafts. Title main entry. Ed. by Nicole Rousmaniere. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 208 p. $45.00 (pa) Japanese crafts have long been renowned for their beauty, quality in execution, and ability to communicate even the most obscure and abstract ideas. This catalogue, written in support of the British Museum’s exhibit held from July to October 2007, displays the collection of objects in ceramics, tiles, lacquer, metal, wood and bamboo, dolls, cut metal foil and glass to its best advantage. It also includes essays on the contexts of traditional Japanese art crafts and on how the exhibit reflects its history and spirit. The editors include descriptions of traditional techniques and biographers of the creators of the works displayed here.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-0-89236-866-2

Title main entry. Ed. by Charles Merewether and Rika Iezumi Hiro. Getty Publications, ©2007 140 p. $39.95 As Japan emerged from the destruction of World War II and began to reconstruct itself as a modern metropolitan society, according to Merewether (former collections curator at the Getty Research Institute) and Hiro (a research assistant at the Getty Research Institute), “an art of intense self-reflection arose, created by artists who were acutely aware of the legacy of the atomic bomb and the experience of foreign occupation.” This volume accompanies the eponymous exhibition by the Getty Research Institute devoted to displaying the work of some of the most prominent groups of artists from this era, including Experimental Workshop/Jikken Kobo, Gutai, Group Ongaku, Neo Dada, Tokyo Fluxus, Hi Red Center, Vivo, Provoke, and Bikyoto. Thirty-nine plates reproduce works displayed at the exhibition, while opening essays offer a historical narrative of artistic production of the period and discuss the artists’ own views of their work.

N7399 N7350

2006-017920

Art, anti-art, non-art; experimentations in the public sphere in postwar Japan, 1950-1970.

Onyile, Onyile Bassey. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 201 p. $109.95 (pa) Onyile (art history and graphic design, Georgia Southern U.) examines the art history and history of Ekpu ancestral figures of the Oron people. He aims to reconstruct this history, as it exists mostly in oral accounts. Onyile grew up in the culture and also uses interviews with those in the community to make his argument. He describes the Oron people and the importance of the Ekpu figure in their society, its meaning and definition, analysis of their physical attributes, styles of carving, and visual symbolism. He also explores the roles of secret and political institutions in relation to Ekpu history, including the all-male Ekpe Association, the Inam institution, and the nka age. Oron religious and cultural values were taken over by the Primitive Methodist mission, he notes, and discusses the transformation of Ekpu ancestral figures from Oron ritual object to museum object to an icon of national unity. B&w photos are included.

–52–

N7400

978-0-642-54192-5

Grace Crowley; being modern. Taylor, Elena. Nat’l Gallery of Australia, ©2006 64 p. $35.00 (pa) This retrospective on the life and work of Australian modernist painter Grace Crowley accompanies a touring exhibition curated by Taylor for the National Gallery of Australia. Crowley’s roots in rural New South Wales are apparent in her early (1920s) work, while her evolution to cubism coincided with a move to Paris and time spent among its avantgarde personalities. These eras, her muted portraits of women, her moves to abstraction and figure experimentation, and her lifelong friendship with Anne Dangar are among the subjects of four chapters with approximately 35 prints and photographs. This book is distributed by U. of Washington Press. N7405

978-0-642-27644-5

The diaries of Donald Friend; v.4. Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Hetherington. National Library of Australia, ©2006 711 p. $64.95 The culmination of a project by the National Library of Australia, this volume is the fourth and final volume of the diaries of Australian artist Donald Friend (1915-1989). It covers his time spent in Bali, his return to Australia and final decade there, spanning 1966 to 1988. While in Bali, he had guests such as Mick Jagger and the Duke and Duchess of Bedford, and wrote about Balinese domestic and religious activities, traditions, village life, and landscapes. He describes encounters with friends and colleagues, such as Richard Griffin, Mitty Lee-Brown, Geoffrey Bawa, Russell Drysdale, and gallery owners and others, as well as insights on himself. The volume includes about 70 drawings. Hetherington is editor of volumes two and three of Friend’s diaries. Distributed in the US by Antipodes Books & Beyond, Ltd. N7411

2007-407280

978-1-84718-088-9

Art and life in Melanesia. Cochrane, Susan. Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2007 231 p. $79.99 Cochrane surveys the contemporary art and artists of the Pacific islands from such perspectives as exchanges, Christianity, market, copyright, open learning, cultural politics, urban politics, and diasporas. She includes photographs that she has collected over the years of her study, and some from the archive established by her parents before her. N7430

2006-940184

978-0-495-10168-0

Understanding art; a concise history. Fichner-Rathus, Lois. Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2008 328 p. $49.95 (pa) Fichner-Rathus’ (College of New Jersey) introductory student text provides essential information on the chronology and context of art. Intended as a flexible framework for professors who may have their own cache of favorite materials, primary sources, and visual images, it is organized in a way to stimulate students interest and reflect the ways in which professors teach. Included throughout are exercises to compare and contrast two or more works of art, “a closer look” features delving into artists’ personalities and other topics in greater depth, and “art tours” to seven major cities around the world. A companion website, correlated chapter by chapter with the book, provides additional multimedia resources as a supplement to the text. Oversize: 9x10.75″. N7475

2007-416617

978-90-420-2152-5

Avant-garde and criticism. Title main entry. Ed. by Klaus Beekman and Jan de Vries. (Avant garde critical studies; 21) Editions Rodopi, ©2007 361 p. $95.00 Meant for scholars, students, and teachers of literature, art, film, and architecture, this volume examines art criticism in relation to the European avant-garde during the inter-bellum period. Fifteen essays consider the power of critics such as André Lhote, Theo van Doesburg, and Mayakovsky, and contributors also investigate architecture, film, theater, and literary criticism, how critics who were also artists used their position, how they were influenced by the opinions of other critics, and their reactions to Dadaism and Marcel Proust. No index is provided. The book is also available for download from the Ingenta website.

–53–

N7480

2006-042302

0-931102-67-7

Compression vs. expression; containing and explaining the world’s art. Clark Conference (2000: Sterling and Francine Clark Art Institute) Ed. by John Onians. (Clark studies in the visual arts) Sterling & Francine Clark Art, ©2006 252 p. $24.95 (pa) If one expands the study of art beyond the works valued by Europeans to consideration of all human artifacts of visual interest it becomes clear, notes Onians (director, World Art Research Programme, U. of East Anglia, UK), that a fundamental rethinking of the field must take place. He presents 16 papers from a conference held in 2000 in order to advance this agenda and consider the problems inherent in such an endeavor, including the issues, reflected in the title and subtitle, of how to embrace the vaster field of knowledge than typical of art history (compression) without losing depth of presentation and intellectual reflection (expression), how it is to be constituted and defined (contained), and how it is to be studied (explained). The collection offers museological studies, comparative analysis of how art history is pursued in different geographical settings, discussion of different approaches to art-history, exploration of an attempt to root world art history in neuroscience, and reflections on the difficulties of distilling world art history into a single text or theory, among other topics. N7485

2006-014453

978-0-8014-4166-0

Chaos and cosmos; on the image in aesthetics and art history. Lang, Karen. Cornell U. Press, ©2006 295 p. $55.00 Concentrating on the image, aesthetics, and the discipline of art history, Lang follows the arc of theory from chaos—a jumble or aggregate of sensuous impressions—to cosmos—the rendering of perceptible and intellectual data into form and system. Her core argument is that aesthetic phenomena defy human desire to find a unitary truth or meaning in them. N7572

2006-035885

978-0-8133-4350-1

The nude; the cultural rhetoric of the body in the art of Western modernity. Leppert, Richard. Westview Press, ©2007 318 p. $37.00 (pa) Art students intrigued (or dismayed) by figure drawing classes, parents at an art museum with puzzled children, and policy makers involved with public art controversies—all are potentially part of the audience for this work, which offers historical insight on representation of the nude, primarily for students and scholars of cultural studies and art history. Leppert (cultural studies and comparative literature, U. of Minnesota) begins with discussion of “the state of being without clothes—in art,” covering who’s looking and why, among other topics. Subsequent chapters look in detail at representation of the young, the female nude, and the male nude, with discussion throughout on such topics as innocence, eroticism, voyeurism, romanticism, confrontation, various kinds of representation and artistic intent, social context, and the roles and responses of viewers. N7598

2007-005808

978-0-87413-992-1

Facing the late Victorians; portraits of writers and artists from the Mark Samuels Lasner collection. Stetz, Margaret D. Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2007 158 p. $49.00 (pa) Stetz curated Beyond Oscar Wilde, an exhibition focusing on the surge of interest in portraits of writers and artists in Victorian Britain, for the U. of Delaware’s University Gallery. This volume expands on that exhibition, detailing how Victorians “read” the faces of public figures and why such portraits became ubiquitous. Approximately 110 b&w reproductions of drawings, paintings, photographs, and lithographs are each accompanied by a brief analysis of how the portraitist meant to depict their subject. Among the figures portrayed are Wilde, Sir John Irving, Rudyard Kipling, Caroline Blanche, Robert Browning, Tennyson, and James McNeill Whistler. This book is distributed by Associated University Presses.

Art Book News Annual 2008

N7660

2006-033576

978-0-7391-1120-8

N8189

2007-033159

978-90-04-16271-6

Political animals; public art in American zoos and aquariums.

Contesting the logic of painting; art and understanding in eleventh-century Byzantium.

Donahue, Jesse and Erik Trump. Lexington Books, ©2007 203 p. $65.00 The authors (professors of political science at Saginaw Valley State U.) explore intersections between political messages and the art and architecture of American public zoos and aquariums from the late 19th century through the 20th century. The scientific, educational, and religious messages purposefully conveyed by displayed art are discussed in terms of the interest groups that have influenced their commissioning. The volume also explores the differences in art displayed for mass audiences and the art found in semi-privatized spaces within zoos aimed at more elite audiences.

Barber, Charles. (Visualising the Middle Ages; v.2) BRILL, ©2007 179 p. $119.00 Paintings of the Christian God cannot be dismissed as a special case, argues Barbar (history of art, U. of Notre Dame), but in fact raise questions about the fundamental modern assumptions regarding how representational painting works—particularly ideas that the object or image represented must be within the perceptual boundaries of the viewer. He examines a body of writing on art and vision produced during 11thcentury Byzantium, and points out the influence of that writing in iconophile doctrines and compendia of heresies produced in the Middle Byzantine era.

N7760

N8193

2006-027681

978-0-8166-4749-1

Too beautiful to picture; Zeuxis, myth, and Mimesis.

2006-013867

978-0-295-98649-4

Reinventing the wheel; paintings of rebirth in medieval Buddhist temples.

Mansfield, Elizabeth C. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 232 p. $25.00 (pa) Greek painter Zeuxis, unable to find a suitable model for his painting of Helen of Troy, chose five models and combined the best features of each. Mansfield (art history, U. of the South) argues that the myth holds special significance for the history of Western art, functioning as a myth about mimetic representation. By mimetic she means the full classical sense of copying forms observed in nature, then generalizing or perfecting those forms to achieve a kind of ideal.

Teiser, Stephen F. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 319 p. $60.00 Without aspiring to a comprehensive account of Buddhism, Teiser (Buddhist studies, Princeton U.) finds religious and political significance in the changing portrayals of the wheel of rebirth from western India in the fourth century CE through various Asian locations to Sichuan in the 13th century. Drawings, charts, maps, and color and monochrome photographs help him tell the story.

N7832

N8193

978-2-503-52526-6

Atlante; percorsi visivi. Andaloro, Maria. (La pittura medievale a Roma, 312-1431, corpus e atlante; v.1) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 325 p. $211.00 This extraordinary volume presents the ambitious project of cataloging and presenting all of Rome’s medieval wall painting. Published in an oversized format (11.25x12.5″), the volume is devoted to color images of the paintings and mosaics, and of the remarkable 3D models of the churches in which the paintings occur, with images of the paintings in situ within the church model. Floor plans and detailed captions accompany the images, which themselves are part of chapters describing the church as a whole, with photos of the church and related materials included with the text. The volume is in Italian (only). Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. N7832

978-2-503-52514-3

L’orizzonte tardoantico e le nuove immagini, 312-468. Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Andaloro. (La pittura medievale a Roma, 312-1431, corpus; v.1) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 482 p. $230.00 Wall painting and mosaics from 312-468 in Rome are discussed in this sumptuous and exhaustive survey, which is oversized (9.75x12.5″) and heavily illustrated with excellent color plates. Essays by Italian historians describe the sites and art works, including catacombs, tombs, and church wall paintings and mosaics. The volume is in Italian. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. N7952

978-2-503-52525-9

Riforma e tradizione, 1050-1198. Title main entry. Ed. by Serena Romano. (La pittura medievale a Roma, 312-1431, corpus e atlante; v.4) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 407 p. $217.00 Wall painting and mosaics from the 11th and 12th centuries in the churches of Rome are discussed in this sumptuous and exhaustive survey, which is oversized (9.75x12.5″) and heavily illustrated with excellent color plates. The volume is in Italian. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-90-04-15549-7

Text, image and song in transdisciplinary dialogue; proceedings. (CD-ROM included) Seminar of the Int’l Association for Tibetan Studies (10th: 2003: Oxford, UK) Ed. by Deborah Klimburg-Salter et al. (Brill’s Tibetan studies library; v.10/7) BRILL, ©2007 247 p. $120.00 Many of these papers come from field work by the Interdisciplinary Research Unit of the Austrian Science Fund. Papers include an analysis of art history relative to transdisciplinary research in the Nako Sacred Compound, an introduction to the Western Himalayan Archive in Vienna, an analysis of cultural preservation and research in central Tibet in the Ke ru lha khang, and examinations of fragments of pramana texts, a manuscript of the Gondhla Kanjur, historical inscriptions at Wanla and a narrative composition found in the Main Temple at Tabo. Others cover art of the court reflecting eastern Iranian elements, methods of preserving oral traditions, and songs in Tibetan recorded in Spiti and Upper Kinnaur. Three papers describe the structure, methods and advantages of transdisciplinary research and are based on the interactive dialogue of scholars attending the seminar. The illustrations are especially wellchosen and the color plates are on the accompanying CD-ROM. N8217

2006-013685

978-0-7892-0900-9

The lure of gold; an artistic and cultural history. Bachmann, Hans-Gert. Trans. by Steven Lindberg. Abbeville Press, ©2006 279 p. $75.00 Filled with color images in the superb quality for which this publisher is known, this suitably sumptuous, oversized (10.5x12″) volume presents many examples of the use of gold in art and architecture throughout the world. Bachmann, a specialist in geosciences and archaeology in Germany, has provided a chronological account describing uses of gold from ancient times to the neoclassical era; art historian Jörg Völlnagel contributes the final chapter on gold in modern and contemporary art. N8217

2006-020376

978-1-4051-3234-3

Material identities. Title main entry. Ed. by Joanna Sofaer. (New interventions in art history) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 172 p. $79.95 Art historians, architectural historians, and archaeologists explore how the activity of objects can be enrolled in the projection of public identities by looking at how the fabrication of identities are linked to the fabrication of the material world. Among their case studies are the Greek symposium, architectural style and identity in Egypt, and body ornamentation in later prehistoric Europe.

–54–

N8223

978-1-84619-052-0

Doctors and paintings; insights and replenishment for health professionals.

2006-033585

978-0-8230-4876-2

Space art; how to draw and paint planets, moons, and landscapes of alien worlds.

00-41760

978-0-943549-85-9

Images of plague and pestilence; iconography and iconology. (reprint, 2000) Boeckl, Christine M. (Sixteenth century essays & studies; 53) Truman State University Press, ©2007 210 p. $30.00 (pa) Crossing the history of art with the history of medicine, Boeckl (history of art, U. of Nebraska-Kearney) overviews various sources of plague iconography, interprets the meanings of plague images in a few significant paintings dating from the 14th to the 20th century, and highlights the most influential innovative artistic works that originated during the Renaissance and the Catholic Reformation. N8260

2006-411993

1-902771-56-7

War art; murals and graffiti—military life, power and subversion. Title main entry. Ed. by by Wayne Cocroft et aL. (CBA research report; 147) Council /British Archaeology, ©2006 140 p. $35.00 (pa) The murals and graffiti displayed in this volume, mostly created by British soldiers and civilians in the 20th and 21st centuries, do not all adhere to what one might think of as the characteristics of “war art.” The paintings, bas-relief, and other forms of art that appear (some sanctioned and others unofficial) were selected because they were located in an active or bygone site of combat or shelter; and while many immortalize battles, aircraft, comrades, and women, others display anger and subversion, poke fun at war, or appear to have little to do with it. Approximately 250 color photographs display images such as graffiti in the Persian Gulf, protest statements in Northern Ireland, large murals on the Berlin wall, and soldiers’ renderings of pin-up photos from WWII, among others. Text exploring context and significance supports the images. This book is distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. N8600

Title main entry. Ed. by Donna Poehner and Erika O’Connell. Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 633 p. $26.99 (pa) This is the 30th annual edition of this directory for professional photographers seeking contact info for commercial, trade, and news publications; galleries; stock photo agencies; art fairs (new to this edition); and photo contests. The majority of the 1,800 listings are for the US and Canadian markets; some represent the international market as well. Other materials include articles and interviews advising novices on building and selling their body of work, as well as listings of grants, organizations, websites, and publications that help career photographers. Listings are indexed separately by geography, subject, and name. N8660

Carroll, Michael W. Watson-Guptill Pubns., ©2007 144 p. $24.95 (pa) Carroll has contributed astronomical art to NASA and the Jet Propulsion Laboratory. Whether for scientific or fantastic designs, readers can learn here how to draw and paint bodies in space. Chapters discuss color choice and how to draw common shapes such as spheres, show how to use real images from Earth and space, and detail features of the earthlike and gas giant planets. One is dedicated to imagining and painting alien worlds. Profiles of other astronomical artists are included. N8243

978-1-58297-428-6

Photographer’s market, 2007.

Middleton, John and Erica Middleton. Radcliffe Publishing, ©2006 102 p. $48.00 (pa) John and Erica Middleton, who are a doctor and artist respectively, use a casual novelistic tone to explain the benefits of art appreciation for doctors. The authors contend that reflection about art allows doctors to build empathy with patients and to reduce stress. In every chapter they include references to websites and to literature about the paintings and artists they discuss. Distributed in the US by BookMasters. N8234

N8600

978-1-58297-429-3

Artist’s & graphic designer’s market, 2007. Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Cox and Michael Schweer. Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 650 p. $26.99 (pa) This reference for artists hoping to establish a career in fine art, illustration, cartooning or graphic design lists contact information for over 1,900 art markets, including greeting card companies, magazine and book publishers, galleries, art fairs, and ad agencies. The listings include pay scales and tips from art directors. This annual edition contains advice from art professionals, such as Louise Bourgeois, Christoph Niemann, Bob McLeod and Steven Diamant, as well as from successful freelancers.

2006-023514

1-58839-195-7

Cézanne to Picasso; Ambroise Vollard, patron of the avant-garde. Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca A. Rabinow. Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 450 p. $65.00 Renoir, Picasso, Degas, Gauguin, Cézanne, and other well known painters are among those whose works Vollard sold as an art dealer in Paris in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. His relationships with these artists, his work as an editor of artists’ books, his clients, his estate, and the exhibitions he mounted are discussed in 22 fascinating, heavily illustrated essays in a catalogue remarkable for its depth of research. The volume, which is published in an oversized format (9.25x12.25″), accompanies an exhibition held at the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York, the Art Institute of Chicago, and the Musée d’Orsay in Paris in 2006-2007. The 202 works of the exhibition are the subject of full entries (in small type) and fingernail b&w images at the book’s conclusion (with reference to the color image of many of the images in the essays). Distributed by Yale U. Press. N8660

2006-100886

978-0-8109-3080-3

The Maeght family; a passion for modern art. Maeght, Yoyo. Trans. by Graham Edwards. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 309 p. $75.00 Beginning in the 1930s as a filmmaker and salesman of “modern” furniture in Cannes, Aimé Maeght eventually established, through the creation of the Maeght foundation, one of the finest private modern art collections, forming friendships and patronages with many masters of the day. Here, his granddaughter Yoyo tells the family’s story, highlighting relationships with figures like Chagall, Miró, and Alechinsky and tracing Aimeé’s business efforts and progeny through times of war and peace. Approximately 300 images, depicting the family and works in their collection, are included. Oversize: 9x11.5″.

ARCHITECTURE See also p. 109 NA27

2006-045376

978-0-393-73229-0

James Marston Fitch; selected writings on architecture, preservation, and the built environment. Fitch, James Marston. Ed. by Martica Sawin. W.W. Norton, ©2006 312 p. $27.95 (pa) James Marston Fitch (1909-2000) was an American architect, critic, historian, climatologist, and historic preservationist. Edited by his widow and literary executor, herself an art historian and critic, this is a collection of essays by Fitch that aims to be representative of his broad interests and to serve as a form of professional biography. Originally written between 1933 and 1997, the 24 included essays offer architectural criticism, histories of the design and construction of notable structures (including Jefferson’s Monticello and the German Bauhaus), discussion of preservation practice and theory, exploration of the interaction between the climate and post-industrial architecture, and reflections on Fitch’s philosophy of architecture. NA105

2006-036885

978-1-4051-2656-4

Conservation and sustainability in historic cities. Rodwell, Dennis. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 262 p. $89.95 (pa) Rodwell, a practicing architect and planner specializing in historic cities and a consultant on site management, examines how conservation and sustainability relate to each other and to the historic sites themselves. He reviews the theories behind conservation and its effect on cultural identity, reveals the weaknesses and strengths in current philosophy and practice, and describes best practices.

–55–

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA107

2006-008560

NA610

0-9749195-7-8

Picturing the past; South Dakota’s historic places.

978-1-904965-11-4

Sir Ninian Comper; an introduction to his life and work with complete gazetteer.

Vogt, Jay D. and Stephen C. Rogers. Photographs by Scott Myers. (Historical preservation series) South Dakota State Historical Society, ©2006107 p. $29.95 The superb b&w photos of art historian and professional photographer Myers are well displayed in this lovely volume on historic architecture. Published in a horizontal format (11.25x9.25″), the photos (each with a lengthy descriptive caption) are accompanied by essays by the authors on the state’s formation and attitudes towards historic buildings, their meanings, and the importance of their preservation. Vogt is South Dakota’s State historic preservation officer and the director of the State Historical Society; Rogers is the director of the State Historic Preservation Office.

Symondson, Anthony and Stephen Arthur Bucknall. Spire Books, ©2006 336 p. $60.00 (pa) The works and thought of the Gothic Revival architect (1864-1960) is given complete coverage in this heavily illustrated volume. Symondson provides a survey of Comper’s buildings, restorations, and decorative works, with the discussion of each building accompanied by a b&w period photograph. Bucknall provides an exhaustive gazetteer, which documents Comper’s prolific activity. Also included is a reprint of Comper’s essay, “Of the atmosphere of a church”, which is an excellent example of Gothic Revival theory. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

NA107

NA680

2006-019577

978-1-59629-152-2

Preserving paradise; the architectural heritage and history of the Florida Keys. Born, George Walter. History Press, ©2006 156 p. $19.99 (pa) From a Hemingway writing retreat built after the Civil War to preservation of its diverse communities (e.g., Cuban, Jewish, gay), the executive director of the Historic Florida Keys Foundation discusses the area’s vernacular architectural styles, traditional building materials, and preservation methods. Born distinguishes between preservation, restoration, and rehabilitation. The book includes period photographs of historic buildings, lessons learned from hurricanes, Federal standards for property rehabilitation, and some chapter sources. NA204

2005-930004

0-7893-1380-4

Isms; understanding architectural styles. Melvin, Jeremy. Universe, ©2006 159 p. $16.95 Though “ism” is occasionally applied rather strangely to garner more styles (Indism, for example, referring to Indian architecture), this is a handy and attractive guide for students and the popular reader as they look for definitions and examples of architectural styles and their bestknown examples and practitioners worldwide. The book includes a chronology, and glossaries of terms, architects, and buildings. Not indexed. Universe Publishing is an imprint of Rizzoli. NA270

2007-270091

0-8020-3914-6

Studies in Hellenistic architecture. Winter, Frederick E. (Phoenix; supplementary v.42) U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 464 p. $150.00 This is a survey of the architectural achievements of the Hellenistic world. Winter (emeritus, fine arts, U. of Toronto) concentrates on monuments in the Aegean heartland (Greece, the islands, and Western Asian Minor), where architects followed closely in the footsteps of the predecessors of Classical Greece, and on the Italo-Hellenistic tradition west of the Adriatic, which contributed to the development of Roman architecture during the late Republic and early Empire. The contributions of the Ptolemaic and Seleukid kingdoms are noted, but only in dealing with individual types of monument. The material is organized into chapters treating temples and sanctuaries; entranceways; stoas in later Greek architecture; tombs and commemorative monuments; theaters and stadia; gymnasia, palaistrai, and baths; covered halls and storehouses; and residential architecture. Also included are discussions of the role of setting and vista in Hellenistic design and of the columnar orders in Hellenistic times. Four hundred and twenty-nine black and white illustrations are included in an appendix. NA335

978-90-04-16037-8

Roman villas in Central Italy; a social and economic history. Marzano, Annalisa. (Columbia studies in the classical tradition; v.30) BRILL, ©2007 823 p. $209.00 Marzano (archaeology, Oxford U.) analyzes wide range of texts and artifacts to find how elite villas in Roman central Italy related to their socioeconomic surroundings. Through close observations of such elements as the placement and quality of slave quarters and intense study of the putative second century Roman economic crisis, Marzano goes far beyond typical assumptions about the moral choices villa owners made, models of operation, and amount and type of interaction between the villas and their complex networks of supporting enterprises. Marzano closes with a fascinating catalog of sites with commentary. The illustrations and maps are superior.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2007-004176

978-1-59017-227-8

Makers of modern architecture. Filler, Martin. (New York Review Books classics) New York Review Books, ©2007 323 p. $27.95 Filler’s articles on architectural history in The New York Review of Books were the first to which architecture buffs turned. Through him they began to understand what happened to make modern architecture modern, who caused it to happen, and why. Filler concentrates on the “who” and rightly so as he traces the personalities of everyone from Louis Sullivan, the largely unsung father of the skyscraper, to Frank Lloyd Wright, Mies van der Rohe, Robert Ventura and Frank Gehry, revealing both their aesthetics and construction innovations. The result is remarkably satisfying for those whose primary architectural aesthetic is based on confusion as well as those who are able to identify Wright’s Fallingwater by the sound. NA682

2006-018102

978-1-56898-616-6

Architectural regionalism; collected writings on place, identity, modernity, and tradition. Title main entry. Ed. by Vincent B. Canizaro. Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2007 463 p. $39.95 (pa) Discourses of regionalism are central to the history of architecture, yet their breadth and richness are rarely tapped. Acknowledging that the discourses have not been consistent or organized, this anthology pulls together a diverse set of 45 writings that are organized into sections discussing critical positions in architectural regionalism, modern referential regionalism, regionalism and regional planning, conflict and maturation in regional modernism, bioregionalism, critical regionalism, and regionalisms for the third millennium. NA682

2006-018792

978-0-06-089316-3

New minimalist houses. Title main entry. Ed. by Anja Llorella Oriol. Collins Design, ©2006 335 p. $50.00 Llorela (communication design, U. of Art Berlin) presents this attractive volume profiling minimalist houses designed by 36 international architects. Each profile includes descriptive text and a number of interior and exterior color photographs. Floor plans are also included. The houses featured demonstrate recent interpretations of the minimalist principles of pureness of space, light, and form combined with functionality and flexibility. No index is provided. Oversize: 9.5x11.75″. NA687

2006-925129

978-0-8478-2879-1

Cities; architecture and society; 10. Mostra internazionale di architettura, la Biennale di Venezia; 2v. International Architectural Exhibition (10th: 2006: Venice, Italy) Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 578 p. $85.00 (pa) Published to accompany the Tenth International Architecture Exhibition (Mostra Internazionale di Architettura), held in Venice, Italy, the two volumes contain profile articles about 16 individual cities in Volume One, and the exhibition’s events in Volume Two. The latter are submitted by country and present unusual architecture projects and concepts. The city profiles each include an essay—often by a noted writer or critic, and always by someone who lives there—that describes the city today and its unique flavor in terms of such things as location, history, inhabitants, economic conditions, growth issues, and architecture. Population and other maps are included. Both volumes, which are oversized (9.5x11.5″), are beautifully illustrated with color photos. Not indexed.

–56–

NA705

2006-297278

1-57233-440-1

NA735

2006-003575

0-8018-8467-5

Building environments.

AIA guide to the architecture of Washington, D.C., 4th ed.

Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth A. Breisch and Alison K. Hoagland. (Perspectives in vernacular architecture; 10) U. of Tennessee Press, ©2005 299 p. $32.00 (pa) A Japanese-style lunch room of an American hotel features diner-style seats. Elaborate wayside shrines dotting Lithuania provide a window into faith. Windows in slave quarters reflect the severest of political economies. How did the occupants feel about these sites and buildings? What are the symbolic implications? In this collection of 17 essays chosen from conventions of the Vernacular Architecture Forum, contributors describe the houses of New England, including the stories of small urban houses of the North Shore from 1630-1830, built-in gender and class, the double house, and housing for workers. They show how buildings relate to their social contexts, describing a church in early Jamaica, barns in Maryland, residences on the Crow Indian Reservation, and early 1900s hotels, explain the history of methods of understanding buildings, and move beyond buildings to commercial fishing architecture, Northern Umiak shelter, and the snap of cereal places and the pop of crop art.

Moeller, G. Martin. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 379 p. $35.00 This rewritten and updated edition of the guide to Washington D.C. architecture also includes added entries on the National Museum of the American Indian and other places. Provided are walking tours of Capitol Hill, the Mall, Judiciary Square/Gallery Place, Pennsylvania Avenue, downtown, the White House/Lafayette Square, Georgetown, Dupont Circle, Arlington National Cemetery, and other areas, with each citing several places, their location, names of architects and designers, dates of completion, and a brief description. Maps and b&w photos are provided. Information was drawn from documents of the Historic American Buildings Survey, institutional archives, local governmental agencies, and articles and books. Moeller is a curator at the National Building Museum and former executive director of the Washington Chapter of the America Institute of Architects.

NA712

2006-281576

0-7649-3659-X

An American architecture. (reprint, 1998)

NA735

978-0-7734-5340-1

Architecture and regional identity in the San Francisco Bay area, 1870-1970.

Wright, Frank Lloyd. Ed. by Edgar Kaufman. Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 269 p. $39.95 This work was first published in 1955 and was revised in 1998; this is a reprint of the revised edition. It features the writings and lectures of architect Frank Lloyd Wright, along with about 300 plans, drawings, and b&w and color photos from the Frank Lloyd Wright Archives at Taliesin West in Scottsdale, Arizona. Describing his architectural vision, Wright discusses the elements of architecture, his ideas about organicism, working with different materials and landscapes, form and style, and specific projects as examples. Case histories of the Larkin Building in Buffalo, the Unity Temple in Illinois, the Imperial Hotel in Japan, and the Johnson Administration Building in Wisconsin, are provided, among several others. No index is included.

Bernard, Lance V. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 176 p. $109.95 Some are Victorian painted ladies, still holding court on steep and narrow streets. Others blend organically into the hillsides or reflect the bay in their banks of windows. Bernard (history, Corinthian Colleges, Inc.) perceives these buildings as regional artifacts from their construction as early as the mid-1850s to the beginnings of the Bay Tradition from the late nineteenth to the early twentieth century. He also analyzes the modern pastoral of the Bay Tradition and the International style as expressed in the era of modernism, and the new artifacts that help define the old from the 1940s to the 1970s. One of the most interesting passages compares the Bay Tradition to forms of modernism expressed in other regions. Bernard supplies snapshots of archetypal buildings for each era.

NA720

NA735

2005-016988

978-1-59629-058-7

Mantlepieces of the Old South; lost architecture and southern culture. Baldwin, William P. and V. Elizabeth Turk. History Press, ©2005 214 p. $34.99 (pa) Southerners Baldwin (author of books about the South, most recently, A Gentlemen in Charleston and the Manner of His Death) and Turk (photography, Atlanta College of Art) laud the mantel as “our domestic altar.” The photobook features some 200 b&w images of Southern homes (not just mantelpieces) drawn from the Library of Congress’s Historic American Building Survey catalog and its website, from farmhouses to a mansion whose owner may have been the model for Rhett Butler in Gone with the Wind. Design comments on each house are compiled in a concluding chapter. NA720

2005-037586

2007-009934

978-0-87071-191-6

An architectural guidebook to Portland, 2d ed.

0-8139-2539-8

Southern built; American architecture, regional practice. Bishir, Catherine W. U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 332 p. $35.00 (pa) Bisher (architectural historian, Preservation North Carolina) offers three decades of significant research into the local economies and class structures and their expression in a mythology of wood and stone while focusing on the builders, bringing to light the work of slave artisans. Her case studies include Alexander Parris’s Wickham House, the New Bern Jail, the Hayes Plantation House, and beach cottages of Old Nags Head, and she considers the influence of women and politics in the construction of memorials to the confederacy in nineteenth-century Raleigh and the ways the south rebuilt its past from 1885 to 1915 in monumental buildings. Her final, very entertaining chapter focuses on new money’s attraction to the fictions of the old south.

King, Bart. Oregon State U. Press, ©2007 320 p. $22.95 (pa) King provides a tour of Portland’s cityscape that offers new information even to long-time residents. This update of the 2001 edition includes a focus on “green” buildings, one of Portland’s claims to fame. The some 250 sites toured include downtown’s Pioneer Courthouse Square (“Portland’s living room”), Michael Graves’ controversial postmodern Portland Building, the city’s many bridges, and its new aerial tram. The guide includes b&w illustrations, maps, a glossary, and decent bibliography. NA735

2006-016684

978-0-8214-1700-3

Architecture in Cincinnati; an illustrated history of designing and building an American city. Title main entry. Ed. by Sue Ann Painter. Photographs by Alice Weston. Ohio University Press, ©2006 352 p. $75.00 Painter (executive director, Architectural Foundation of Cincinnati) reviews the architectural history of Cincinnati, Ohio from the early Native American earthworks to the present time. She focuses on large institutional structures—banks, museums, churches, colleges, etc.—and pays little attention to small residential buildings. Her text, which is accompanied by numerous photographs and other illustrations, discusses the history of particular buildings, social and cultural issues that influenced architectural developments in Cincinnati, and the contributions of particular architects and architectural firms in a broadly chronological fashion. NA735

2006-904380

0-8478-2872-7

Sarasota modern. Weaving, Andrew. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 207 p. $50.00 With low, long facades, large windows, and cool open square spaces inside and out, the Sarasota School of Architecture exemplifies the modernist ideal. Weaving, who owns houses by two of the architects, has assembled a photo essay of surviving examples, which were built by architects Ralph Twitchell, Paul Rudolph, and Philip Hiss, among others. The volume, which is filled with photos of excellent quality (in an oversized format—10.25x10.25″), includes essays for each example describing the patrons and particulars of each house.

Art Book News Annual features selections from four issues of SciTech Book News and four issues of Reference & Research Book News published during 2007. See www.booknews.com for subscription information, or contact us: [email protected] or (503) 281-9230. Sample copies are available.

–57–

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA737

2007-007766

978-0-393-73248-1

NA737

2006-018342

978-0-393-73219-1

Alden B. Dow; midwestern modern.

Bertram Goodhue; his life and residential architecture.

Maddex, Diane. W.W. Norton, ©2007 239 p. $55.00 In four decades, architect Alden B. Dow, the son of the founder of Dow Chemical Company, designed some six hundred American homes, civic and religious buildings, schools, and colleges, as well as an entire town in Texas. Illustrated by large color plates and b&w photographs, this book examines his life, inspirations, and the works that embodied his principles of functionality, honesty, humility, and enthusiasm. Particular attention is paid to Dow’s own home, garden and studio. Oversize: 10.5x11″.

Wyllie, Romy. W.W. Norton, ©2007 224 p. $60.00 As cofounder of the Caltech Architectural Tour Service, Wyllie’s interest in Goodhue (1869-1924) stems from research for her book Caltech’s Architectural Heritage (2000), in which she cites his master plan for the campus in Pasadena. Despite being considered one of the outstanding American architects of the early 20th century, Goodhue’s contributions have largely been neglected according to the author. From his influences and writings, she provides insights into his philosophy of using local materials and forms to create an architecture compatible with its surroundings. Though residences were not his main focus, they display the fine drawing and experimentation apparent in his larger commissions. The volume features family and architectural photographs, floor plans, and a chronology of Goodhue’s projects.

NA737

2006-932443

978-0-8478-2849-4

Antoine Predock, architect 4. Predock, Antoine. Ed. by Brad Collins. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 292 p. $50.00 This survey of architect Antoine Predock’s recent works displays his acute attention to the geological and cultural strata of place in such buildings as the Tacoma Art Museum, Austin City Hall and Public Plaza, the new San Diego Padres ballpark, and the McNamara Alumni Center at the University of Minnesota. Large color photographs display the 2005 AIA gold medal winner’s mastery of all building types. Projects in the works including the dramatic National Palace Museum and Taichung Opera House, both in Taiwan, are displayed in digital renderings, demonstrating a maturation of Predock’s art and his status in the contemporary architecture world. NA737

2006-013389

1-59714-042-2

The architecture of Ratcliff. Minor, Woodruff. Photography by Kiran Singh. Heyday Books, ©2006 224 p. $39.95 For three generations members of the Ratcliff family have, with various partners and business structures, created a West coast vernacular with which they interpret, redefine and realign space with an emphasis on quiet grace. Some of their projects are very large, including installations for high tech firms, universities and transportation facilities, but they also influenced residential architecture, building in the California experience in their clients’ demands for Spanish and English fantasies. The result of this elegant text and beautiful photography is a better idea of what architects do, when they have talent and taste. NA737

2006-102225

978-0-393-73104-0

The architecture of Ralph Adams Cram and his office. Anthony, Ethan. W.W. Norton, ©2007 256 p. $60.00 In this volume Anthony, the president of the firm founded by architect Ralph Adams Cram in 1889, surveys Cram’s life and career. Approximately 300 b&w photographs depict the architect’s achievements, which vary greatly in function (religious, educational, commercial) and style (gothic, renaissance, Tudor, and Arts and Crafts, to name a few). Well-known buildings include the Cathedral of St. John the Divine in New York City, and the Post Headquarters at the US Military Academy at West Point. Some floor plans are included. NA737

2006-006437

978-0-8118-5041-4

NA737

2006-033405

978-1-55849-555-5

Building Victorian Boston; the architecture of Gridley J.F. Bryant. Reed, Roger G. U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2007 224 p. $39.95 In this monograph, Reed describes a number of representative projects by Gridley James Fox Bryant (1816-1899), the most prolific architect in mid-19th-century Boston. The chronological narrative traces the trajectory of Bryant’s career and sheds light on the development of the architectural profession during this period. B&w historical photos and drawings illustrate the volume. Reed is an architectural historian and preservation planner in Brookline, Massachusetts. NA737

2006-031765

978-0-299-22210-9

Death in a prairie house; Frank Lloyd Wright and the Taliesin murders. Drennan, William R. Terrace Books, ©2007 218 p. $29.95 Constructed in 1911 as a summer home for the architect and his mistress, Frank Lloyd Wright’s Taliesin residence stood for only a few years. On an August night in 1914, it became the scene of a brutal mass murder and was almost completely destroyed by fire. In this text, Drennan (English, U. of Wisconsin) traces the events that led up to that night, examines the murderer’s motives, and considers the effects of the loss of his home and loved ones on Wright’s life and career. Terrace Books is a division of the U. of Wisconsin Press. NA737

2006-928780

0-8478-2858-1

Frank Lloyd Wright; prairie houses. Hess, Alan. Photographs by Alan Weintraub. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 275 p. $50.00 Published in an oversized format (10.25x10.25″) to better display the images, this volume presents the 22 prairie houses built by Wright in the Chicago area, with many excellent color photos of each detailing the exterior and interior architecture and design details. The text consists of an essay by Hess, an architect and critic in California, on the prairie houses, and a selection of plans with brief descriptions compiled by Kathryn Smith, an architectural historian.

At home on the prairie; the houses of Purcell & Elmslie.

NA737

Legler, Dixie. Photographs by Christian Korab. Chronicle Books, ©2006 191 p. $40.00 William Gray Purcell and George Grant Elmslie were among the architects who helped revolutionize residential design at the turn of the 20th century. This volume showcases a number of the homes custom designed by their firm and highlights the signature elements of their “Prairie” style. Color photographs accompany the text throughout. Legler is the author of several books on the Prairie School. Oversize: 9.75x11.25″.

Hometown architect; the complete buildings of Frank Lloyd Wright in Oak Park and River Forest, Illinois.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-043177

0-7649-3746-4

Cannon, Patrick F. Photography by James Caulfield. (Pomegranate catalog; no.A118) Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 144 p. $35.00 Paying homage to the hometown boy who made good, Cannon, a journalist, editor and publicist and tour leader of the Frank Lloyd Write Preservation Trust, presents, in chronological order, 27 Wright homes built in Oak Park and River Forest, Illinois. The last chapter surveys eight “lost, altered and possibly Wright” structures. The text includes over 90 photographs of the buildings’ exteriors and interiors and an introduction to each chapter that details the story of each commission, along with commentary on Wright’s relationships with his clients, the importance of each building in Wright’s body of work and the characteristics that make each house unique.

–58–

NA737

2006-030936

978-0-393-73165-1

Louis I. Kahn; beyond time and style, a life in architecture.

NA961

978-1-85074-969-1

The English buildings book.

Wiseman, Carter. W.W. Norton, ©2007 284 p. $60.00 Wiseman (Yale School of Architecture) presents the first in-depth biography of famed American architect, Louis I. Kahn (1901-1974). Drawing on some 100 interviews with colleagues, coworkers, clients, and family members, the text traces Kahn’s life from his birth in Estonia and immigration to America as a young child to his death in 1974. The text provides a detailed account of the personal and public life of a key figure in modern architecture, concentrating in particular on a selection of Kahn’s architectural masterpieces. Illustrated throughout with b&w and color photographs and diagrams.

Wilkinson, Philip and Peter Ashley. English Heritage, ©2006 389 p. $70.00 Collaborators on books associated with the popular BBC Restoration television series present a tour of some 700 English buildings from the country’s castles, cathedrals, Kew Gardens’ Palm House, and other historic architectural icons to modern shops, barns, pubs, and those photogenic red telephone kiosks. The volume includes a timeline of the dates of major historical styles and major architects alongside key historical eras, further reading, and a glossary. Wilkerson’s many books include Amazing Buildings and England’s Abbey. Writer- photographer Ashley’s books include London Peculiarities. The 9x12″ volume is distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

NA737

NA961

2005-924723

0-8478-2754-2

1-86077-388-5

Prairie skyscraper; Frank Lloyd Wright’s Price Tower.

Gerrards Cross; a history.

Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony Alofsin. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2005 176 p. $49.95 Alofsin (architecture, U. of Texas at Austin) brings together five essays (punctuated by many color and b&w photos and illustrations) on the history and evolution of the Price Tower, as part of the exhibition of the same name organized by the Price Tower Arts Center in Bartlesville, Oklahoma. This volume is the first critical analysis of the building and the first account of it since Frank Lloyd Wright’s from the year of completion (1956). A general overview is provided, as well as a study of Wright’s approach to total design coordination of objects, furnishings, and textiles, and a discussion of the transformation of this prototype across the country. An exhibition catalogue is included, and many documents and drawings are being published here for the first time. Contributors are US scholars of art history, design history, and architecture.

Hunt, Julian and David Thorpe. Phillimore, ©2006 164 p. $36.00 Local historians based in Buckinghamshire, Hunt and Thorpe recount the history of the area that came to be known as Gerrards Cross. Emerging from their work to celebrate the centenary of the coming of the railway, they focus on the 19th century and the first four decades of the 20th, when Gerrards Cross became a parish and then a special type of suburban village. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.

NA737

2006-926514

978-0-8478-2835-7

Richard Meier; museums, 1973/2006. Meier, Richard. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 296 p. $85.00 The Getty Center is the most famous, but Meier has built many museums, in the Europe and the US, including the Gagosian Gallery in Beverly Hills, California, the High Museum in Atlanta, the Ara Pacis Museum in Rome, Italy, and his most recent, the Hans Arp Museum in Rolandseck, Germany. In all, 16 museums are showcased in this big volume (12.25x12.25″), with plans, sections, and many excellent photos of each. There is an introduction by Germano Celant, a curator at the Guggenheim in NY, and a selected bibliography, but no index. NA737

2005-935563

978-0-8478-2813-5

Roto works; stillpoints. Rotondi, Michael and Clark P. Stevens. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 239 p. $65.00 L.A.’s Roto Architects, founded in 1991 by Michael Rotondi and Clark Stevens, has stamped its post-Frank Gehry modernism and avant-garde aesthetic on sites including the School of Architecture in Prairie View, Texas, the first tribal university in the U.S., a memorial for the L.A. fire department, and a large Buddhist Stupa in La Jolla, California, among others. This volume, designed with similar principles, collects digital renderings, floor plans, and photographs of the finished product at Roto sites. Also discussed are their contributions to city planning projects in the U.S., China, and Japan. NA737

2006-925127

0-8478-2889-1

Tracing Eisenman; Peter Eisenman complete works. Eisenman, Peter. Ed. by Cynthia Davidson. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 400 p. $75.00 Printed in an oversized format (8.75x11″), this heavily illustrated volume pays homage to the architect, surveying the designs, buildings, and installations of his entire career. Each project is presented in eye-catching format, with an introductory description accompanied by lots of plans, models, and views. Four essays contextualize his oeuvre. Not indexed. This book was published in the UK by Thames & Hudson (2006).

–59–

NA961

978-1-904965-09-1

Ham Hill; portrait of a building stone. Durman, Richard. Spire Books, ©2006 241 p. $39.95 (pa) Durman explores the use of stone quarried at Ham Hill in southern Somerset for building, from Roman times to the present. Before beginning the history, however, he looks at the area, how the hill came about, the stone’s qualities for building, and the quarries. A final chapter considers repair, conservation, and the future. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. NA961

978-1-904965-13-8

The Renaissance villa in Britain 1500-1700. Airs, Malcolm and Geoffrey Tyack. Spire Books, ©2007 276 p. $70.00 Airs and Tyack (both U. of Oxford) examine Renaissance villas in the London area, the English provinces and Scotland through a series of thematic chapters and individual case studies. Along with famous examples such as Inigo Jones’s Queen’s House at Greenwich they and their contributors examine lesser-known structures such as the Countess of Arundel’s Tart Hall, Kew palace (including some fascinating finds under the plaster) and Charleton House (as seen on TV). The illustrations, including floor plans and color plates are especially well done and inform rather than intrude. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. NA997

2006-044928

0-7734-5769-0

Augustus Welby Pugin, designer of the British Houses of Parliament; the Victorian quest for a liturgical architecture. Powell, Christabel. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 397 p. $129.95 Pugin greatly admired the work of Savonarola, perhaps because the famous Inquisitor sought out and corrected the encroachment of wrongful thoughts within faith while Pugin felt a compulsion to do the same for architecture. Pugin longed for the day when Anglicanism would return to the Roman Church, and his architectural work and writings reflected his increasing desire for orthodoxy and the powerful and beautiful place of worship. Powell (research fellow, Harris Manchester College, Oxford) casts her architect’s eye upon the stones Pugin thereby had assembled and his literary works designed to re-establish architecture as an act of liturgy, a place created by man to reflect God’s revelation. She closely analyzes Pugin’s treatises and books, explaining how they fit within his life and his thought, shows how his themes grew and developed and how they were received by his peers, and offers an impressive bibliography.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA1053

3-932565-55-X

NA1141

2-503-51847-8

Reinhard Gieselmann; on the search of style/auf der Suche nach Stil.

The architectural network of the Van Neurenberg family in the low countries (1480-1640).

Reinhard Gieselmann. Ed. by Gerhard Kabierske. Edition Axel Menges, ©2007 223 p. $89.00 The work and theory of architect Reinhard Gieselmann is illuminated here through excerpts of his own texts and contributions from art historian Kabierske (Karsruhe U., Germany). Text in both English and German is accompanied by mostly b&w photographs of Gieselmann’s sites (mainly houses and churches from the 1960s and 70s) that stood in protest of the concept of functionality-as-art, with emphasis on light and material effects and form as an expression of intellectual content. Gieselmann’s work in public housing in Vienna concludes the book. This book is distributed in the US by National Book Network.

Tussenbroek, Gabri van. (Architectura moderna; v.4) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 250 p. $102.00 (pa) On the basis of little-known or unpublished archival material and a new examination of surviving buildings, van Tussenbroek (municipal building archeologist, Bureau Monumenten and Archeologie) creates a complex picture of the Netherlandish professional world of the 16th and early 17th centuries. He follows the evolution of the Van Neurenberg family’s stone trading business, which expanded northwards to Nijmegen and Dordrecht and became an international trading company. Their subsequent activities reflect the changes in the Dutch building sector during the 17th century. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

NA1068

2004-018644

978-0-521-79004-8

Before the Bauhaus; architecture, politics and the German state, 1890-1920.

NA1153

Maciuika, John V. Cambridge U. Pr., ©2005 386 p. $85.00 In this interdisciplinary contribution to studies of the German Second Empire (shown in a map), Maciuika (U. of Virginia School of Architecture) examines the roots of such post-World War I German architectural and design reform as Walter Gropius’ Bauhaus and more broadly, the role played by architects as Germany sought and fought modernization. Period photos and illustrations include buildings featured at early 20th century German applied arts exhibits, and other new residential and commercial buildings. Appendices include—in the original German and in English translation—principles espoused in 1914 by Hermann Multesius on the future directions of the Werkbund, a design association dedicated to harmonizing German culture and work, and opposing views.

Dubbeldam, Winka. Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2006 224 p. $40.00 (pa) Like that of other European émigrés, the work of Dutch-born and New York-based architect Winka Dubbeldam and her firm Archi-Tectonics has been characterized as “data-drive investigations” and is setting precedents for the use of digital technology in architecture. This volume profiles 20 of Dubbeldam’s projects, calling attention to her methods and offering numerous color illustrations of her work.

NA1088

3-932565-02-1

Peter Hübner; building as a social process. Jones, Peter Blundell. Edition Axel Menges, ©2007 358 p. $89.00 With a philosophy devoted to the people that inhabit and use buildings, rather than buildings as a reflection of their designer’s ego, Hübner has established a career facilitating group-built housing of modules and unusual shapes and groupings to fit the community’s needs. His architecture, mainly in southwest Germany, is profiled in this oversized volume (11.25x12.25″), which contains many photos of the buildings, their construction, and ground plans. The text is in German and English. NA1135

978-2-503-51366-9

Unity and discontinuity; architecture relationships between the Southern and Northern Low countries, 15301700. Title main entry. Ed. by Krista De Jonge and Konrad Ottenheym. (Architectura moderna; v.5) Brepols Publishers, ©2007 428 p. $130.00 (pa) The north of the Low Countries in the early modern era was classicist and the south was baroque, but that is hardly the end of the matter. In this collection of articles the two regions do not compete but instead coordinate as contributions examine the first reception of the antique, the workings of antique and modern architectural theory, the impact of patronage and the prevailing building materials and trade practices. Topics include the standardization of “antique” architecture in a remarkably short time, court architecture, the systematization of ornament about 1600, the production process of building within the court, religious architecture and trade changes in the building industry. The illustrations are well-chosen and clearly show how what could have been two architectures became, in essence, different facets of the same theory. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2005-021807

1-56898-535-5

AT-INdex.

NA1153

2006-424558

88-7624-269-4

DPA; Dominique Perrault architecture; recent works. Capitanucci, Maria Vittoria. Skira Editore, ©2006 223 p. $34.95 (pa) Capitanucci (historical research and architectural criticism, University of Federico II of Naples, Italy) presents this examination of the recent and ongoing work of architect Dominique Perrault, whose designs include the Bibliothéque Nationale de France in Paris, and more recently the Velodrome and Olympic Swimming Pool in Berlin. That project and others in Australia, Luxemborg, and other locales represent the artist’s evolving interpretations of architectural language and the relationship between public and private space. Abundant color images of interiors, exteriors, blueprints, and computer simulations are supplemented by essays on and interviews with Perrault. This book is distributed by Rizzoli. NA1211

87-7288-972-1

Arkitekture fortaellinger; om Aarhus Universitets bygninger. Title main entry. Ed. by Olaf Lind. Photographs Poul Ib Henriksen. Aarhus University Press, ©2006 239 p. $33.00 Written mostly in Danish, with some English translations, this volume describes the architecture of the U. of Aarhus in Denmark on its 75th anniversary, particularly its parks and surrounding buildings and its construction history. Also detailed: the architectural competition held during the 1930s, material types, phases of building, and long- term development. Many color photos are included. The book measures 11.25x11.25″. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co. NA1284

2005-058545

978-0-393-73172-9

Classical Swedish; architecture and interiors; 1650-1840. Cederlund, Johan. Trans. by Lani Summerville-Sternerup. W.W. Norton, ©2006 270 p. $60.00 The lavish architecture and interiors of Sweden between the 1600s and early 1800s have largely been overshadowed by the high-profile splendors of Italy and France; what literature does exist about Swedish architecture, interior design, and the decorative arts has been produced primarily in Swedish. Illustrated throughout with full-color photographs, Cederlund’s text opens the world of Swedish architecture to a broader, Englishspeaking audience of scholars and interested general readers. Following an introductory overview to Sweden’s architectural development, subsequent chapters cover a succession of historical and political periods—the Baroque, the Late Baroque, the Rococo, Neoclassicism, and the Empire style—detailing the work of the country’s major architects, designers, and builders of those times. Cederlund is museum director of the Zorn Collections in Mora, Sweden. Summerville-Sternerup is a translator and the founder of a tour company specializing in architectural study tours.

–60–

NA1308

2005-937778

0-87070-499-0

On-site; new architecture in Spain.

NA1996

2006-100744

978-1-58115-474-0

How to start and operate your own design firm; a guide for interior designers and architects, 2d ed.

Riley, Terence. Museum of Modern Art, NY, ©2005 280 p. $45.00 (pa) This volume surveys 35 projects in Spain that are or will be constructed and presents photos of 18 recently completed buildings from around the country, including single-family homes, the new Madrid airport, stadiums, museums, and city hall. Following an introductory essay on contemporary architecture in the country, photos and plans for the new projects are presented, along with brief descriptions and the names of architects and firms. The book is part of a series of five exhibitions sponsored by the Lily Auchincloss Fund for Contemporary Architecture. Riley is a curator of architecture and design at the Museum of Modern Art. There is no index.

Rubeling, Albert W. Allworth Press, ©2007 243 p. $24.95 (pa) Baltimore-based Rubeling draws from two decades of owning a multimillion-dollar architectural firm to offer insights to readers interested in the business side of design. Fourteen chapters offer tips and exercises for making the decision to own a firm; establishing vision and goals; understanding financial, marketing, banking, equipment, legal, and insurance considerations; developing marketing and business plans; assessing risk; setting fees and establishing a client base; defining success; and thinking about the future. Appendices contain a sample design proposal and glossaries.

NA1546

NA1996

2006-015042

978-0-8248-2151-7

2006-103523

978-0-471-99849-5

Allegorical architecture; living myth and architectonics in southern China.

Integrated practice in architecture; mastering design-build, fast-track, and building information modeling.

Ruan, Xing. (Spatial habitus; making and meaning in Asia’s architecture) U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 219 p. $45.00 Ruan (architecture, U. of New South Wales-Sydney) argues that, at least for the minority peoples in southern China that he studied, making and inhabiting a space cannot be separated. Meaningful engagement from the designers as well as from the inhabitants with their built world requires conscious efforts from both sides, he says.

Elvin, George. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 255 p. $70.00 In integrated practice, all stakeholders and participants in an architectural project—architects, engineers, contractors, and owners—collaborate extensively throughout the facility life cycle. Based upon 50 interviews with members of leading integrated firms, this text describes the strategies and techniques they use to ensure project success. Elvin (architecture and planning, Ball State U.) also draws upon his own experience operating an integrated practice in architecture. The text is accompanied throughout by b&w photographs, drawings, and other illustrations. A glossary of terms completes the volume.

NA1581

2005-026817

0-8109-5538-5

Egyptian palaces and villas; pashas, khedives, and kings. Johnston, Shirley. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 207 p. $50.00 This volume presents a dramatization of Egypt and its places, people, and events, singling out 41 palaces as the focus. With a grounding in scholarly works and Egyptian stories and tales, each palace and its owner is described through a narrative, and accompanied by color photos of interiors, exteriors, and related artwork. Serif Sonbol, who lives in Cairo, provides the photos. Johnston is a writer and photographic director of books. The book measures 10.5x12.5″. NA1995

2005-034526

0-471-70954-9

Becoming an architect; a guide to careers in design. Waldrep, Lee W. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 304 p. $35.00 (pa) Waldrep (architecture, U. of Maryland) brings the perceptions and narratives of dozens of students and practitioners as he defines the role of an architect and who is most likely to succeed, education from childhood through high school and pursuit of an accredited degree, experience at various levels, including as a volunteer, researcher, intern and full-time professional, licensure, career design, and the future of the profession. He gives a number of valuable resources for architects, including professional organizations and websites, and lists accredited architecture programs in the US and Canada. Although nominally designed to help high school students plan their educational and work experiences toward a career in architecture, this guide can double as a resource for those in later life seeking a second career or as a reference for professionals in related fields such as urban planning and construction. NA1996

2006-001920

978-0-471-79294-9

The architect’s handbook of professional practice; update 2006. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph A. Dempkin. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 182 p. $85.00 This volume serves as a companion to the 13th Edition of The Architect’s Handbook of Professional Practice and consists of 14 articles by architects and others in the US who discuss reports on advancing practice and professional development; practice topics (relating to clients, business, delivery, services, and methods and techniques); and American Institute of Architects contract document updates, covering new and revised documents and those under development. A CD-ROM, containing samples of existing, revised, and new AIA contract documents, is included. There is no bibliography.

–61–

NA1996

2006-015559

978-1-4195-2812-5

Project management for design professionals. Ramroth, William G. Kaplan Publishing, ©2006 286 p. $34.95 (pa) Ramroth is an architect with 30-plus years of experience, ranging from small remodeling projects to large complex building programs with budgets of more than $100 million. He presents a text for architects, designers, landscape architects, urban planners, interior designers, engineers, and other professionals looking to plan and complete multidisciplinary projects successfully. Coverage includes a short history of project management; goals and activities; the design firm and project management; characteristics of a good project manager; project planning; risk management; controlling construction costs, design budgets, and project schedules; project team and client management; quality control; and rules of thumb. The text also includes a project management checklist and list of acronyms and abbreviations. NA2105

2006-044317

1-56377-100-4

From the studio to the streets; service-learning in planning and architecture. Title main entry. Ed. by Mary C. Hardin. (AAHE’s series on servicelearning in the disciplines) Stylus Publishing, ©2006 234 p. $29.50 A dozen essays by American academics describe how they have used service learning pedagogy in their urban planning and architecture courses. Several more contributions look at broader issues, such as institutional support for community-based architecture and the integration of planning theory and practice. Together, they identify some successful service learning practices while pointing out some commonly encountered obstacles. The editors teach architecture at the U. of Arizona. The volume is not indexed. NA2304

2006-028539

978-0-8139-2602-5

Inventing American modernism; Joseph Hudnut, Walter Gropius, and the Bauhaus legacy at Harvard. Pearlman, Jill. U. of Virginia Press, ©2007 276 p. $40.00 According to Pearlman (history of architecture and urbanism, Bowdoin College), standard accounts of the modernist influence of the Harvard University Graduate School of Design (GSD) err in their near-exclusive focus on Bauhaus founder Walter Gropius, thereby missing a far more complex story. He chooses instead to focus on GSD founder Joseph Hudnut and his rivalry with Gropius. He argues that Hudnut, while eventually eclipsed in influence by Gropius, played a key role in advancing values of humanism in the early stages of American modernism, a role that was a result of his collaboration in the early 1920s with the German city planner Werner Hegemann, a sustained interest in the history of architecture, and a deep engagement with the philosophy of John Dewey.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA2500

2005-033488

978-0-8133-9045-1

NA2545

2006-017369

978-1-4051-4626-5

Understanding architecture; its elements, history, and meaning, 2d ed.

The access manual; auditing and managing inclusive built environments, 2d ed.

Roth, Leland M. Westview Press, ©2007 652 p. $55.00 (pa) Roth (architectural history, U. of Oregon, Eugene) offers the second edition of his text for use in basic introduction to Western architecture courses and as a visual guide for the general reader, examining architecture from cultural, artistic and technological perspectives. The text assumes the reader has no prior knowledge of the subject. The material is presented in two main components: the elements of architecture, and the history and meaning of architecture. The fully revised and updated text includes new material on Postmodernism and its relationship to the Modernist era, restructured coverage of Mesopotamian and Prehistoric architecture based on thematic lines of development and chronology, and an expanded chapter on Medieval architecture. Illustrated throughout with b&w photographs and diagrams and 14 color plates.

Sawyer, Ann and Keith Bright. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 263 p. $79.95 (pa) Building access consultants Sawyer and Bright provide guidance on designing buildings and building elements that enable access by disabled individuals mandated by British Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 and related standards and regulations. Over the course of the work, they give advice on access management, handover and commissioning of new and improved buildings, feedback procedures, post-occupancy evaluation, and access audits. While legal standards and regulations are discussed in the British context, there is enough coverage of general issues of accessibility to interest other audiences.

NA2540

Erlandson, Robert F. CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2008 258 p. $89.95 If buildings should not have stairs that keep people out, why should products have features that bar users from being able to use them? Erlandson (electrical and computer engineering and bioengineering, Wayne State U.) notes that global competition and ethics, not to mention the laws of many nations, mandate engineering products, processes and services to suit as many people as possible, regardless of their physicality. Focusing on recent research about the nature of disability and the ethics of universal and accessible design, Erlandson makes clear distinctions amongst universal, accessible and adaptable design, describes disability and disability laws and how they relate to accessible design, gives examples of universal design principles and strategies, and explains such concepts as ergonomic and cognitive soundness, perceptibility, flexibility, error-proofing, efficiency, stability, predictability, equitable treatment, and ethics. He includes information specific to the Wen and to social and political perspectives on universal and accessible design.

2006-048356

3-7643-7597-3

5 codes; architecture, paranoia and risk in times of terror. Title main entry. Ed. by Igmade. Birkhäuser Boston, ©2006 299 p. $40.00 (pa) The 18 contributions to this collection together represent architectural theory’s critical reaction to Homeland Security’s creation of its five-color terror warning system. The papers, in the words of the editors, investigate “the entanglements of producing space, paranoia, and risk.” The collection is itself color-coded, with each color representing a different theme: green for wilderness, blue for suburbia, yellow for gated communities or camps, orange for back-up and gadget architecture, and red for war rooms. NA2540

2006-044797

0-375-42443-1

The architecture of happiness. De Botton, Alain. Pantheon Books, ©2006 280 p. $25.00 De Botton, author of How Proust Can Change Your Life, continues to be concerned about our happiness, in this case demonstrating lucidly and convincingly that the spaces we inhabit are essential to our well-being. Tracing the way human needs and desires have been served by styles of architecture from Classical to Gothic to Modern, he argues that the stylistic choices of a society can represent both its cherished ideals and qualities it lacks. NA2543

2006-010501

978-0-393-73220-7

Poetry, property, and place 01; Stefan Behnisch/Gerald Hines. Title main entry. Ed. by Nina Rappaport. (The Edward P. Bass Distinguished Visiting Architecture Fellowship; v.1) W.W. Norton, ©2006 192 p. $35.00 (pa) The Edward P. Bass Distinguished Visiting Architecture Fellowship provides opportunities for advanced students at the Yale School of Architecture to work collaboratively with leading architects and developers. This first volume in a planned series features interviews with developer Gerald D. Hines and architect Stephan Behnisch, as well as student participants in the inaugural studio. It also contains descriptions of a number of student-designed projects aimed at transforming a neglected site in central Milan into a vital urban place. NA2543

2006-936820

978-1-932236-96-5

Till we have built Jerusalem; architecture, urbanism, and the sacred. Bess, Philip. (Religion and contemporary culture series) ISI Books, ©2006 309 p. $28.00 Without apology Bess (architecture, U. of Notre Dame) adds to the considerable literature purporting to explicate the state of and threats to Western Civilization. In the built environment he finds a marker of a more general cultural condition, pointing out that the architecture and urbanism he considers reflect two centuries of social theories and ameliorative political movements in the wake of the Industrial Revolution. He looks at cities and human flourishing, the sacred and the city, new urbanism, and various theories.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA2545

2007-011402

978-0-8493-7493-7

Universal and accessible design for products, services, and processes.

NA2560

2006-034835

978-0-8076-1579-9

The architecture reader; essential writings from Vitruvius to the present. Title main entry. Ed. by A. Krista Sykes. George Braziller, Inc., ©2007 333 p. $35.00 Sykes presents an introductory collection of 40 writings aimed towards general readers and beginning architecture students, which demonstrate different approaches to architecture both as subject and discipline. They span some 2,000 years, with the majority from the 20th and 21st centuries, and were written by authors—primarily architects—of many nationalities. Drawn from a variety of genres, including journal articles, editorials, book chapters, lectures, interviews, and manifestos, the excerpts ponder, critique, and sometimes attack architectural norms, and, in many cases, pose alternative methods of architectural thought and practice. Illustrated in b&w. No subject index. Sykes is managing editor of the Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians. NA2599

2006-038856

978-2-503-52581-5

Building the kingdom; Giannozzo Manetti of the material and spiritual edifice. Smith, Christine and Joseph F. O’Connor. (Medieval and renaissance texts and studies; v.317) ACMRS, ©2006 518 p. $69.00 In a day when to be an intellectual was to also be a cleric, he thought, and yet was a layman. In an era when to be rich was not necessarily to be generous, his was a relatively open hand. Further, while others built monuments to themselves he built words that described what those monuments actually said about literature, history and spirituality. Smith (history of medieval and Renaissance architecture, Harvard U.) and O’Connor (classics, Georgetown U.) offer Manetti’s detailed texts on fascinating aspects of papal court life, in which he was intimately involved, as they related to building projects that served to reinforce power and privilege. Their translations are accessible and their commentaries are thorough, making for exciting reading and true insight into what a welleducated layman actually thought about symbols of power. Published by the Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies.

–62–

NA2599

2006-032375

978-0-8166-5011-8

Judging architectural value.

NA2750

2006-045074

0-471-73622-8

The architect’s studio companion; rules of thumb for preliminary design, 4th ed.

Title main entry. Ed. by William S. Saunders. (Harvard design magazine readers; 4) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 175 p. $22.95 (pa) Saunders (editor of Harvard Design Magazine presents 13 essays in which architects, critics, and scholars take on the question of how the value and quality of architecture should be evaluated— and who is most qualified to perform that evaluation. Contributors propose that architectural value means the receipt of lauds from the architectural community; that it is reflected in the friendliness, reliability, usefulness, or classiness of a site; and that it ought to be determined by groups of design, engineering, landscape, and supply professionals, among other arguments. In essays that consider architecture in general, its canon, and some of its finest/flimsiest (depending on the writer’s opinion) examples, one unifying conclusion emerges: that the evaluation of a building must include consideration of its impact on the people living within and around it.

Allen, Edward and Joseph Iano. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 468 p. $85.00 Allen has taught at various institutions across the U.S., including Yale and MIT for 30 years, and is the author of several books on architecture; a practicing architect, Iano has been Allen’s illustrator, collaborator, and coauthor for 25-plus years. They present an updated edition of their resource text for architects and builders, now in a flex binding for ease of use. Functioning as a desktop technical advisor, it reduces complex engineering and building code information to simple formal and spatial approximations that are readily incorporated into design explorations. It provides vital help for selecting, configuring and sizing structural systems; heating, cooling, and electrical systems; egress provisions, including exit stairways, parking garages, and parking lots; and daylight provisions. Specific revisions to the text are not stated.

NA2728

NA2760

1-84564-047-0

Digital architecture and construction. Title main entry. Ed. by A. Ali and C.A. Brebbia. (WIT transactions on the built environment; v.90) WIT Press, ©2006 259 p. $155.00 Architects explore the possibilities of new computer technology that can translate a design into construction specifications, thus eliminating much rather mechanical work that never paid very well anyway. Their topics include formal complexity in digital architecture, acquiring designable space for planar steel frames, operative representation and the digital, and a comparative navigation system for collaborative architectural design. The 25 papers are from a September 2006 conference in Seoul. Only the authors are indexed. The US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics. NA2728

2007-012618

978-0-470-12652-3

Introducing Revit architecture 2008; BIM for beginners. (CD-ROM included) Krygiel, Eddy et al. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 399 p. $39.99 (pa) For beginners, this book introduces the Revit architecture software and describes BIM (Building Information Modeling) basics using examples and tutorials. The authors provide an overview of BIM concepts and outline working with basic modeling features and creating walls, floors, roofs, and stairs. They also explain how to use components and examples of Revit’s editing tools, how the program works with other applications, documenting the model for construction, and integrating annotations. Other topics include the Family Editor, worksets and team collaboration, and advanced options and troubleshooting. The CD-ROM contains sample families and tutorial files for completing the exercises in the book. Krygiel teaches Revit at Boston Architectural College and lectures on the use of BIM in the construction industry. Both architects, Demchak, a product designer, and Dzambazova, a product manager, work for Revit Architecture. NA2728

978-0-8311-3340-5

2007-002358

978-0-471-75216-5

Architecture; form, space, & order, 3d ed. (CD-ROM included) Ching, Frank D. K. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 431 p. $45.00 (pa) Ching (U. of Washington, Seattle) is a registered architect and the author of numerous books on architecture and design. His classic introduction to the basic elements of architecture has served as a reference for both students and practicing architects for 30-plus years. Illustrated throughout with b&w diagrams and renderings, the third edition includes expanded sections on circulation, light, views, and site context; new material on environmental factors and building codes; and contemporary examples of form, space, and order. The accompanying interactive CD-ROM contains a series of digital presentations organized into modules corresponding to the book chapters. Featuring three-dimensional models and animations created by the author, it adds an electronic component to introduce the aspects of time and movement to the exposition of elements and principles. NA2840

2006-020553

978-0-471-48817-0

Architectural detailing; function, constructibility, aesthetics, 2d ed. Allen, Edward et al. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 321 p. $65.00 (pa) Allen (formerly architecture, Yale U. and Massachusetts Institute of Technology) and Rand (architecture, North Carolina State U.) keep their attention on what adds up to make a great space while including sustainability and the International Building code to this edition. Their concise patterns control water and air leakage, control heat and sound flow, accommodate movement, provide structural support, allow for mechanical and electrical services, maintain health and safety, consider the life cycle of the building, and ensure construction through ease of assembly, efficient use of construction resources, and judicious use of aesthetically satisfying but forgiving details. The authors include applications of the detail patterns and advice on getting started using them.

Learning and applying Autodesk Inventor 2008 step-bystep.

NA2840

Hansen, L. Scott. Industrial Press, ©2007 485 p. $39.95 (pa) Hansen (engineering technology, Southern Utah University) introduces Autodesk Inventor for students with little or no experience with the software. Step-by-step instructions are demonstrated with b&w illustrations and screenshots, and commands are highlighted in bold for more efficient reading and review. The book begins at a basic level, and ends with chapters on advanced topics, such as advanced design procedures, assembly view procedures, the presentation panel, and advanced commands. The text can be used in almost any educational setting, including four-year engineering schools, community colleges, vocational/technical schools, and industrial training centers. It can also be used for self-study, and as a reference on the job.

Snyder, Frank M. (The classical America series in art and architecture) W.W. Norton, ©2008 144 p. $60.00 Published in an oversized format (10.25x13.75″) and accompanied by a DVD-ROM with printable TIFF files of the plates, this volume presents the skillful drawings of Snyder, which he produced between 1906-1914. Depicting elevations, sections, and architectural details, and including b&w photos of some details, the drawings reproduce the decorative details of buildings and mansions in New York City, Philadelphia, and other locations. Published in association with the Institute of Classical Architecture and Classical America.

2007-018949

978-0-393-73245-0

Building details. (DVD-ROM included)

NA2840

2006-024384

978-1-56898-576-3

Details in contemporary architecture. Title main entry. Ed. by Christine Killory and René Davids. (AsBuilt) Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2007 206 p. $55.00 Presenting 25 buildings and projects created from 2004-2007, this oversized (9.25x12.25″) volume offers copious details of their construction and design details both in the concise essays and the large selection of color photos, drawings, and plans. Among the 25 selected are the Genzyme Center in Cambridge, Mass., by Behnisch, Behnisch & Partner; the Figge Museum of Art in Davenport, Iowa, by David Chipperfield Architects; and the Bengt Sjostrom Starlight Theater at Rock Valley College in Rockville Illinois by Studio Gang Architects. Not indexed.

Please verify price and availability by contacting publishers or book vendors.

–63–

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA2850

2006-013278

978-0-471-68473-2

NA4140

2006-003905

0-7546-3813-8

Residential interior design; a guide to planning spaces.

Cultures of glass architecture.

Mitton, Maureen and Courtney Nystuen. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 248 p. $45.00 (pa) Aimed at interior design students, this thoroughly-illustrated volume explains the minimum requirements for specific types of residential spaces and rooms. Introductory chapters provide an overview of basic requirements, such as accessibility and lighting, and discuss the role of the various types of design graphics. Subsequent chapters focus in turn on bedrooms, bathrooms, kitchens, leisure spaces, utility spaces, and circulation spaces. The authors teach interior and architectural design at the U. of Wisconsin-Stout.

Elkadi, Hisham. (Design and the built environment series) Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 103 p. $69.95 British architect has long been fascinated with glass, especially as a building material. Here he explores, the history, aesthetics, environmental and cultural perspectives, and the future of glass architecture. He also includes a technical review of seeing through glass.

NA2960

2007-001278

978-0-393-73233-7

Theory of mouldings. Walker, C. Howard. (The classical America series in art and architecture) W.W. Norton, ©2007 146 p. $25.00 Walker, a Boston architect who practiced in the first third of the twentieth century, wrote his treatise for a knowledgeable audience at a time when houses spoke volumes with their columns and informed both those inside and outside their paneled and decorated walls about the wonders of nature, the mathematics of human thought, and the intelligence that can come from taking a close look at a cornice. This edition, which has been prepared for an audience which is probably slightly less informed but nevertheless newly enthusiastic, Walker’s comments upon whorls, profiles and ogees approaches the poetic without becoming sloppy. For those who love older buildings and their ways of speaking he is a careful guide to the meanings behind the shapes; to those who practice architectural history his descriptions will serve as both an encyclopedia and comprehensive dictionary. NA3574

2007-926335

978-1-885923-51-6

Daily life ornamented; the medieval Persian city of Rayy. Treptow, Tanya. (Oriental Institute Monograph; 26) The Oriental Institute, ©2007 64 p. $24.95 (pa) The exhibit at the Oriental Museum in Chicago (no date cited) and this companion volume demonstrate how archaeologists work with shards, while illuminating aspects of life along the Silk Road from the ninth to the 14th centuries in the Persian city south of the Caspian Sea. Among the topics are Erich Schmidt’s excavations during the 1930s, putting the whole picture together, and industry and innovation. There is no index. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. NA3770

978-0-9547916-1-2

NA4471

2006-022751

978-0-393-73070-8

Celebrating the courthouse; a guide for architects, their clients, and the public. Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Flanders. W.W. Norton, ©2006 240 p. $60.00 Thirteen American architects, judges, administrators, and attorneys contribute 10 chapters examining the issues involved in designing an effective and satisfying courthouse building. The text is intended for those who are new to courthouse projects, including government agency personnel responsible for funding decisions, citizens’ groups and bar associations, and architects. Coverage includes an historic overview of the courthouse as a building type and its image within the community; solving the distinctive problems of a courthouse project; the courthouse, its publics and its users; and the future of the courthouse. The text includes a forward by Justice Stephen G. Breyer and epilogue on Daniel Patrick Moynihan and federal architecture. Illustrated throughout with b&w photographs and diagrams, and 48 color photographs. NA4800

978-1-904965-08-4

600 new churches; the Church Building Commission 18181856. Port, M.H. Spire Books, ©2006 386 p. $100.00 The Church Building Commission was established in 1818 with a mandate to solve intractable social, political and religious problems by bringing the Anglican Church to the church-identified godless towns and cities of Britain. Port, an architectural historian, describes the creation of the Commission, the buildings it erected and the architects who designed them. The historic and modern photographs, plans and drawings reveal a great diversity of architecture, demonstrating that the Commissioners’ churches were an essential factor in making possible the Victorian explosion of church-building. In this volume, Port updates his 1961 study of the Commission by adding new material and illustrations, many of which have not been published previously. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.

Roman mosaics of Britain; v.2: South-West Britain.

NA4830

Cosh, Stephen R. and David S. Neal. Illuminata Publishers, ©2005 406 p. $320.00 The second of an anticipated four volumes documenting the nearly 2000 Roman mosaics of Great Britain, this handsome, oversized volume (9.5x12.25″) contains the mosaics found in the counties of Bristol, Cornwall, Devon, Dorset, Somerset, and Wiltshire. An initial section describes the history of the mosaics’ discovery, their locations, dating, stylistic influences, and materials. The catalogue is organized by county, with either color photos or notably fine color or b&w drawings by the authors provided for each mosaic. A full descriptive essay accompanies the entry for each mosaic, with lengthy discussion of the mosaic’s location, context within the building, and stylistic aspects. Each entry concludes with full list of references. A glossary is provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

The Cathedral of Saint Fin Barre at Cork; William Burges in Ireland.

NA4135

2007-024334

978-0-393-73240-5

Corrugated iron; building on the frontier. Mornement, Adam & Simon Holloway. W.W. Norton, ©2007 224 p. $60.00 Mornement (author on the history of design) and Holloway (engineer in architectural restoration) present a history of the use of corrugated iron in building, from its early use in railroad terminals and temporary gold digging communities in the mid 19th century, to the invention wartime Nissen and Quonset huts, its integral role in prefabricated buildings and relief work shelter, and its celebration by fine architects including Buckminster Fuller and Nicholas Grimshaw. Oversize: 10.25x12″.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-84682-023-6

Lawrence, David and Ann Wilson. Four Courts Press, ©2006 200 p. $55.00 Lawrence, a historian and photographer of stained glass, and Wilson (art and design history, Cork Institute of Technology) describe and colorfully illustrate the cathedral—with its furniture, and decoration—as it was rebuilt under the direction of architect William Burges in the 1870s. They also tell the story of the project, profiling many city residents who played a role. Only 1,000 copies of the edition were printed. Distributed in the US by ISBS. NA4850

978-1-905981-35-9

The medieval cloister in England and Wales. Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Henig and John McNeill. (Journal of the British Archaeological Assocation; v.159) Legenda, ©2006 333 p. $55.00 (pa) This special thematic issue (vol. 159) of the Journal of the British Archaeological Association contains 10 essays on the medieval cloister in England and Wales, seven of which were drawn from a conference held at Rewley House, Oxford, in April of 2004. Topics consider Lincoln Cathedral, Cistercian east ranges, Augustinian and Benedictine cloisters, and the origins, uses, architecture, and imagery of the Latin medieval cloister. Others discuss Old Sarum, cloisters in English palaces, at Canterbury Cathedral Priory, experimental architecture, and religious politics. Book reviews appear at the end of the volume. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–64–

NA5453

978-2-503-52301-9

NA5494

2006-445953

978-1-904350-81-1

The medieval cathedral of Trondheim; architectural and ritual constructions in their European context.

Cardiff; architecture and archaeology in the medieval diocese of Llandaff.

Title main entry. Ed. by Margrete Syrstad Andäs et al. (Ritus et artes; traditions and transformations; 3) Brepols Publishers, ©2007 375 p. $81.00 The architecture, reconstruction, liturgical use, and relation of the cathedral to the mainstream European architectural trends are topics of nine scholarly articles (one article is in German). The baptismal practices, specifics of chapel use, and processions are described in detail. This volume provides a useful service in situating a significant but less wellknown monument within the context of European cathedral architectural studies. The volume is well illustrated with plans and b&w photos. Appendices contain liturgical documents (in Latin) from Nidaros (Trondheim) and many other northern European cities. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Title main entry. Ed. by John R. Kenyon and Diane M. Williams. (The British Archaeological Association conference transactions; 29) Maney Publishing, ©2006 214 p. $45.00 (pa) The proceedings of the July 2004 annual conference of the British Archaeological Association comprise 11 papers on the capital city of Wales, where the conference was held. Historians and art historians as well as archaeologists consider such features as the evidence of the early Christian monuments, the Early Gothic fabric of Llandaff Cathedral and its place in the West Country school of masons, and three rood-screens in southeast Wales. There is no index.

NA5461

Martin, Therese. (The medieval and early modern Iberian world; v.30) BRILL, ©2006 285 p. $169.00 San Isidoro de Léon is a royally-sponsored monastic church, one of the best known monuments surviving from Romanesque Spain. Yet Martin (medieval art history, U. of Arizona) notes that scholars have never given the full site its due because they found it difficult to date the buildings and name its patron. This study traces the construction history of San Isidoro and determines the identities of its patrons, including the remarkable Urraca, Queen of Léo-Castialla, who ruled in her own right. Martin traces the history of the site and its growth to a major site of pilgrimage, the elements of monarchic power introduced into the building as symbols of Urraca’s self-identity, and the complex ways in which Urraca and other political women made themselves known in stone. This contains over 100 well-chosen monochrome and color photographs supporting Martin’s claims.

978-1-905624-28-7

Jewish heritage in England; an architectural guide. Kadish, Sharman. English Heritage, ©2006 220 p. $38.00 (pa) Published in association with Jewish Heritage UK, of which Kadish (Jewish studies, U. of Manchester) is the director, this guidebook provides an illustrated survey of synagogues, cemeteries, museums, schools, and other notable historic and contemporary Jewish architecture in the UK. Touring England (from London to the North-East), Scotland, Wales, Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, the book includes visitor tips, a master site map, information on architectural features, color photographs, and a glossary of Hebrew terms. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. NA5463

978-1-85074-944-8

England’s abbeys; monastic buildings and culture. Wilkinson, Philip. English Heritage, ©2006 216 p. $40.00 The author of The British Buildings Book and other books for adults and children on architecture traces the history of UK monasteries (including nunneries) from the 7th-early 16th centuries. In this photoessay, Wilkinson introduces changing patterns of monastic life, the architecture of various orders, and a gazetteer of about 290 selected from some 1,000—indicating which ones are open to the public and relevant Web sites. The Cotswolds-residing author views these monastic ruins as a window on the medieval past in addition to being inherently interesting. The volume includes a glossary of Abbey-related terms and further reading. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. NA5471

1-902771-55-9

NA5811

2006-047549

978-90-04-15297-7

Queen as king; politics and architectural propaganda in twelfth-century Spain.

NA5977

2006-043942

978-90-04-15186-4

Art and architecture of the synagogue in late antique Palestine; in the shadow of the church. Milson, David. (Ancient Judaism and early Christianity; v.65) BRILL, ©2007 579 p. $239.00 Revising his 2002 doctoral dissertation at Oxford University, biblical archaeologist Milson assesses several aspects of the impact of Christian art and architecture on synagogues in Byzantine Palestine from the middle fourth to the early seventh centuries when the eastern provinces came under Arab rule. He compares orientation, the chancel screen, facade motif, ecclesiastical furnishings, and niche and apse. Other chapters consider evolution and ancient synagogues, and excavation and dating.

Roman Droitwich; Dodderfill Fort, Bays Meadow Villa, and roadside settlement. (CD-ROM included)

NA6008

Title main entry. Ed. by Derek Hurst. (CBA Research Report; 146) Council /British Archaeology, ©2006 265 p. $70.00 (pa) As part of a series of reports on the results of excavations in Droutwich, in Worchestershire county, archaeologists focus on three cites important for their association with control of the area and potentially of the salt industry. The first is the Roman fort on Dodderhill, which overlooks the principal settlement focus; another is the Bays Meadow Roman villa, the best appointed in the whole county; and the last is a typical roadside settlement on Hanbury Street, where civilians processed food. The disk contains illustrations. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

Spink, Walter M. (Handbook of oriental studies=Handbuch der Orientalistik: Section two: India=Indien; v.18) BRILL, ©2007 396 p. $134.00 The complex of sacred caves in India enjoyed two distinct periods of patronage, a Hinayana Buddhist phase about 100 BC to 100 CE, and a revival in the middle fifth century under the powerful emperor Harisena of the Vakataka Dynasty. Having written extensively about Indian art in general and specifically that found in the Ajanta caves, Spink (emeritus history of art, U. of Michigan-Ann Arbor) here offers a guide to visitors, detailing the art to be seen in each of the more than 36 caves. He includes maps, floor plans, and elevations, but no reproductions of the art itself, which readers are presumably looking at with their own eyes. There is no index.

NA5471

978-90-04-15644-9

Ajanta; history and development; v.5: Cave by cave.

978-1-84217-283-4

St Peter’s; Barton-upon-Humber, Lincolnshire; a parish church and its community; v.2: The human remains.

NA6234

Waldron, Tony. Oxbow Books, ©2007 193 p. $60.00 St. Peter’s Church was a site of worship and burial from the Middle Ages to 1972. Now in the care of heritage maintainers, the church and the graves are studied as archeological sites. Waldon, taking up the work of the late Juliet Margaret Rogers, places the church within its local contexts and through text and photographs displays the bones, describing all their paleopathological characteristics. As a result we know which denizens of the graves died of trauma, tumors, or other diseases, which had gout and spinal injuries, and which went the their graves for no apparent reason, except perhaps to dance for the diggers. Distributed in North American by The David Brown Book Co.

Pelli, Cesar and Michael J. Crosbie. John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 128 p. $40.00 (pa) Pelli (architecture, Yale U.) designed the twin towers that form part of the larger complex Kuala Lumpur City Centre in Malaysia, and comprise the tallest buildings on the planet. He and practicing architect Crosbie describe his design principles and goals, the negotiations, and the construction. Large color photographs adorn nearly every page. No index or bibliography is provided.

–65–

2006-272745

978-0-470-01867-5

Petronas twin towers; the architecture of high construction.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA6243

2006-030677

978-0-7649-4040-8

NA6920

978-1-55046-484-9

Louis Sullivan’s Merchants National Bank.

Boathouses.

Menner, Bill. Pomegranate Communications, ©2007 71 p. $18.95 In the later years of his career Louis Sullivan, American architect and mentor to Frank Lloyd Wright, created a number of banks in small midwestern towns. The buildings are known as “jewel box” banks for their compact size and stained glass ornamentation. This book profiles his Merchants National Bank in Grinell, Iowa through a biographical essay, blueprints, and approximately 50 stunning color photographs displaying details both inside and out. A few images of the other jewel box banks are also included.

Ross, Judy. Photographs by John de Visser. Boston Mills Press, ©2006 164 p. $49.95 Ross, a travel and lifestyle writer and boathouse dweller, is joined by photographer Hohn de Visser in this description of 45 boathouses on the Muskoka Lakes in Ontario, Canada, including Lake Muskoka, Lake Rousseau, and Lake Joseph. The construction, remodeling, and history of the houses are briefly detailed, with quotes from owners and many color photos of exteriors and interiors. Distributed by Firefly Books.

NA6290

2007-386427

978-1-84533-218-1

Jones, Will. Mitchell Beazley, ©2006 272 p. $50.00 Jones, a freelance writer specializing in architecture and design, offers a global overview of innovative responses to contemporary transport-hub design and construction with these profiles of 36 of the world’s most significant new transport structures. Organized around the four transport types (air, road, water, and rail), the projects profiled include the International Terminal at Philadelphia Airport, the Whale Jaw bus station in the Netherlands, the Yokohama International Port Terminal in Japan, and the Leuven Train Station in Belgium. Unbuilt projects are also featured, including the Beijing Airport in China. Supplementing the projects are essays by influential architects on a variety of themes pertinent to the modern transport hub, such as the importance of ecologically friendly design. The book is highly illustrated throughout with color photographs, technical drawings, and computer renderings. It will be of interest to architects, designers, and engineers. 978-0-7734-5393-7

Museum, gallery and cultural architecture in Australia, New Zealand and the Pacific region; essays in Antipodean identity. Title main entry. Ed. by Michael J. Ostwald and Steven Fleming. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 201 p. $109.95 Ostwald (architecture, U. of Newcastle, Australia) and Fleming (history and theory of architecture, U. of Newcastle, Australia) bring together a collection of essays that analyze major pieces of architecture in Australia, New Zealand, and the South Pacific for the link between architectural expression and cultural identity. The nine studies are by contributors from that region and look at museums, galleries, and cultural centers— the Sydney Opera House, the Museum of New Zealand, the National Museum of Australia, the Eltham Library, Federation Square, and others—and how they express cultural and national identity. Most of the buildings have recently been completed. The volume is aimed at scholars of architectural studies, urban design, museology, and cultural theory. NA6750

2007-009547

978-0-8166-4836-8

Building a century of progress; the architecture of Chicago’s 1933-34 World’s Fair. Schrenk, Lisa D. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 357 p. $39.95 The Century of Progress International Exposition at the 1933 Chicago World’s Fair was a major architectural event that played a significant role in stimulating the world of design. Schrenk (architecture and art history, Norwich U.) describes the architectural planning of the Century of Progress and the material and structural innovations of the Fair’s pavilions. She also places the architecture of the Exposition within the context of wider cultural and political developments of the era, including relationships between science, industry, and government; the rise of corporate consumer culture; and the Great Depression. NA6830

2006-927800

0-7643-2491-8

American theaters; performance halls of the nineteenth century, 2d rev.ed. Naylor, David and Joan Dillon. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2006 254 p. $39.95 This volume profiles some 40 American theaters constructed in the 19th century that are still in operation today. In the course of their research, architectural historian Naylor and arts activist Dillon (League of Historic American Theaters) visited a wide variety of venues, including town hall opera houses, Chautauqua auditoriums, Victorian playhouses, and grand concert halls. The text is accompanied by historical and recent photographs in b&w and color. Included in the appendix are lists of more than 250 19th-century theaters arranged geographically and chronologically.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2007-002207

978-1-58816-470-4

House beautiful; your dream home; a design sourcebook.

New transport architecture.

NA6690

NA7115

Siglag, Lisa S. Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2007 224 p. $24.95 In this lavishly photographed guide from House Beautiful magazine, Siglag presents the latest home building and renovation trends (e.g., open-plan design) and tips on layout basics, working with a team of professionals, and reading architectural drawings. Especially useful are questions to ask yourself on preferences and lifestyle. Sidebars cover such aspects as decor and “green” design. NA7117

2007-270578

978-1-59228-868-7

Little house on a small planet; simple homes, cozy retreats, and energy efficient possibilities. Salomon, Shay. The Lyons Press, ©2006 265 p. $19.95 (pa) Carpenter and construction manager Salomon presents readers with ideas for saving money, protecting the environment, and improving their livelihood by smart living in small spaces. The author profiles dozens of people around the world whose methods of scaling-down vary as widely as their locations—from single mothers in cooperative housing to homeowners converting to multi-use bathroom/lofts, adding home business spaces, or building from scratch. Floor plans; b&w and color images; and practical advice on legal matters, energy efficiency, creativity, and the importance of common spaces supplement the stories. NA7125

2006-002623

978-1-56158-807-7

The barefoot home; dressed-down design for casual living. Vassallo, Marc. Taunton Press, ©2006 218 p. $30.00 “Barefoot” in the title of this compendium of stylish homes is not a call to nudism but a reference to the carefree way of life these homes reflect and can instill. Their purpose is to make living at home feel like being on vacation and they accomplish this through light, open floor plans and by blurring the division between indoors and out. NA7125

98-23080

978-1-56158-376-8

The not so big house; a blueprint for the way we really live. (reprint, 1998) Susanka, Sarah. Taunton Press, ©2006 199 p. $22.95 (pa) This is a paperbound reprint of a 1998 book. Susanka designs houses for living: comfortable, compact, uncrowded space for, often, multiple functions. Contrast her inviting, manageable houses with the vulgar, wasteful, show-off monuments to consumption containing specialized rooms that are rarely used (often because they are icy, sterile, forbidding). Taunton’s usual splendid photography is evident in some 200 color plates. Floor plans show how traffic and life will flow. NA7126

2006-016248

978-0-393-73205-4

Key houses of the twentieth century; plans, sections, and elevations. (CD-ROM included) Davies, Colin. W.W. Norton, ©2006 240 p. $45.00 (pa) This volume profiles the architectural features of some 100 houses that made an important contribution to 20th century residential design. Included are key works by such architects as Le Corbusier, Frank Lloyd Wright, Alvar Aalto, Rem Koolhaas, and Ma Qingyun. Each profile is illustrated with color photographs along with accurate scale plans of every floor. Digital files of all of the drawings are contained on the accompanying PC- and Mac-compatible CD-ROM. Davies teaches at London Metropolitan U. The book is oversize: 10x11.5″.

–66–

NA7195

2006-028296

978-0-87480-877-3

At nature’s edge; Frank Lloyd Wright’s artist studio. Whiting, Henry. U. of Utah Press, ©2007 125 p. $39.95 Whiting, an architectural writer, describes the design and history of an artist’s studio designed by Frank Lloyd Wright in Idaho’s Hagerman Valley, built for painter Archie Teater and his wife. Whiting restored the studio in the 1980s and 1990s and also recounts this process. He provides facsimiles of Wright’s plans and photos of the studio and area. There is no index. NA7207

2006-010842

0-8109-3085-4

The Queen Anne house; America’s Victorian vernacular. Foster, Janet W. Photographs by Radek Kurzaj. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 240 p. $50.00 Through photographs of 21 different examples, Foster (associate director, Historic Preservation Program, Columbia U.) examines the evolution of the American version of the Queen Anne home. The examples include notable homes such as the Watts Sherman House in Newport, Rhode Island and one of Frank Lloyd Wrights’ earliest houses, the Robert Parker House in Oak Park, as well as more modest Queen Anne-style houses that can be matched with their published pattern-book design sources. NA7208

2006-004614

1-4236-0002-9

Atomic ranch; design ideas for stylish ranch homes. Gringeri-Brown, Michelle. Photographs by Jim Brown. Gibbs Smith, ©2006 192 p. $39.95 Gringeri-Brown proves that even the humble ranch house can blossom under a makeover in this beautifully illustrated accolade to the “cookie cutter” homes of the 1950s. In 25 examples of tract, split- level and rambler houses, she shows why these homes worked so well for their first residents and how they can be updated. The volume includes before and after shots, design-tip sidebars, and a resource index. Gringeri-Brown and her husband, Jim Brown, are the founders and publishers of Atomic Ranch magazine, a quarterly devoted to mid-century homes. NA7208

2006-019645

978-1-56158-831-2

The simple home; the luxury of enough. Nettleton, Sarah and Frank Edgerton Martin. Taunton Press, ©2007 249 p. $40.00 Nettleton (U. of Minnesota School of Architecture) and Martin (contributing editor for Landscape Architecture) offer readers inspiration for envisioning a simple home—one that favors natural light and ventilation, landscape, functionality, sustainability, and timeless style over modernism and convenience. Approximately 20 homes are featured in color photographs and floor plans, showing that a simpler life can be achieved through design in any environment, be it dense San Francisco, arid Taos, or remote Lopez Island, Washington. No index is provided. Oversize: 9.5x11″. NA7238

2006-016245

0-295-98640-9

Frank Lloyd Wright’s Palmer House. Hildebrand, Grant. U. of Washington Press, ©2007 125 p. $30.00 (pa) Hildebrand (architecture and art history, U. of Washington) examines Frank Lloyd Wright’s Palmer House, built in Ann Arbor, Michigan, in the early 1950s. Photos, plans, and diagrams punctuate discussion about the design, construction, and furnishing of the house, the surrounding town and neighborhood, the evolution of its garden and teahouse, and formal and spatial qualities. Hildebrand uses interviews recorded by Ann and Leonard Eaton with Mary and Billy Palmer and their family and other materials documented by the Eatons, who began the monograph from which this volume was completed. Leonard Eaton is a retired professor of architecture at the U. of Michigan. NA7238

2006-035482

978-1-59714-056-0

Gables and fables; a portrait of San Francisco’s Pacific Heights. Bloomfield, Anne and Arthur Bloomfield. Heyday Books, ©2007 386 p. $19.95 (pa) Anne Bloomfield, a consultant in architectural history, intended to produce a bare-bones survey of historical properties in the San Francisco neighborhood, sweetened with a selection of articles about particular buildings that she wrote over the course of 14 years for the New Fillmore, a neighborhood monthly. When she died with the project not even started, her husband Arthur, a music critic and food writer, decided to scrap the boring survey part, and just edit slightly and assemble her articles. He presents 110 of them, arranged geographically. The book includes illustrations by Kit Haskell. Only names are indexed.

–67–

NA7346

2006-004914

0-295-98632-8

The problem of the house; French domestic life and the rise of modern architecture. Anderson, Alex T. U. of Washington Press, ©2006 220 p. $60.00 Anderson (architecture, U. of Washington) explores the work of a likeminded group of designers in France, most of whom began their creative lives as decorative artists, interior designers, and painters but moved into the field of architecture in the 1920s. The author argues that this movement placed particular emphasis on the problems of domestic settings, and the house became central to the development of modernist architecture in Europe. Coverage includes an introductory overview of the movement; an examination of interior ensembles exhibited in the Paris Salons d’Automne of 1910 to 1913; the effects of WWI on house reconstruction and furniture production; and the work of Pierre Chareau, Le Corbusier, Eileen Gray, Francis Jourdain, and Robert Mallet-Stevens in the 1920s, and the nature of their program for modern architecture. Illustrated throughout with b&w photographs and diagrams. NA7520

2006-015663

978-0-06-113892-8

The modern townhouse; the latest in urban and suburban designs. Trulove, James Grayson. HarperCollins, ©2006 188 p. $35.00 Featuring full color photography and architectural diagrams, this volume showcases 16 projects that exemplify current trends in townhouse design in cities around the U.S. The projects fall into three main categories: renovations of existing townhomes, new construction in vacant urban lots, and new “one off” luxury townhomes. Trulove is an author and editor of books on architecture, landscape architecture, and garden design. NA7533

2006-015633

978-0-06-113933-8

Mini house now. Losantos, Àgata. Trans. by Jay Noden. Collins Design, ©2006 191 p. $29.95 An editor of books on architecture showcases 22 tiny houses that make innovative use of space. These include a German micro-compact module that draws on aeronautical and automotive as well as Japanese teahouse design, a 275-square foot glass-walled cabin for sunset viewing in Canada, a two-person home in Austria for those on a small budget, and a relatively large 880-square foot weekend place in Texas. The volume (a square 9.4″) includes color photos, floor plans, and a directory of the architectural firms whose designs are featured. NA7561

2006-013466

1-58685-810-6

The rustic home. Kylloe, Ralph. Gibbs Smith, ©2006 256 p. $60.00 In part an homage to Montana architect Larry Pearson, several of whose homes are featured, this oversize volume (11x12.25″) presents exterior and interior views of new lodges lavishly built in a rustic style, with their hand hewn wood and logs, stone walls and fireplaces, wrought iron and other details carefully observed. To better convey their rusticity and mountain location, several were photographed in winter. A list of builder resources is included. Not indexed. NA7571

2006-002429

0-295-98627-1

The Seattle bungalow; people and houses, 1900-1940. Ore, Janet. U. of Washington Press, ©2006 202 p. $24.95 (pa) The Seattle bungalow is the focus of this history, written from the perspective of the lower middle class families who were its primary consumer from 1900-1940. Ore (history, Colorado State U.) uses both social history and vernacular architectural history methodologies and concentrates on 800 houses in four neighborhoods: Ballard, Fremont, Green Lake, and Wallingford. Utilizing both primary source materials from tax records and the census, as well as interviews with former owners, her narrative history describes the architecture, philosophy, construction, sales, and experiences of those living in the bungalow style home. B&w photos are included.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NA7575

9788496263512

NA8450

Great spaces; cabins. Mostaedi, Arian. Links International, ©2006 191 p. $39.95 Published in an oversized format (9.75x10.5″), this volume showcases innovative designs of 19 small vacation homes, many of them located in northern Europe. Each house is presented through excellent and copious color photos of interiors and exteriors, as well as a descriptive introduction, plans, sections, and renderings. The book is not indexed. Note that the title inside the book, Small houses in nature, (intended for a European audience) differs from the dustjacket, Great spaces; cabins, which is aimed at the American reader. NA7845

2006-012172

1-4236-0012-6

Big Sur Inn; the Deetjen legacy. Alan, Anita. Gibbs Smith, ©2006 160 p. $29.95 The Big Sur Inn on the spectacular California coast is now listed on the National Register of Historic Places for its faithful preservation of local architecture. A former longtime resident who was a writer/photographer for a local newspaper, pays homage to this landmark. In this photoessay, Alan traces the inn’s history and visitors under the stewardship of a resourceful Norwegian family. (Helmuth Deetjen died in 1972). She includes poems that have been inspired by the inn and its environs, e.g., those of Robinson Jeffers. NA7882

2005-016127

0-8118-5172-9

L.A. lofts. Thornburg, Barbara. Photographs by Dominique Vorillon. Chronicle Books, ©2006 190 p. $50.00 This volume shows 20 homes in the diverse L.A. loft style, with descriptions by Thornburg and photographs by Vorillon. Types shown are traditional open-plan, demi-lofts, and new luxury lofts mostly in the downtown area, with some in West Hollywood and Venice. The lofts are in art deco, dojo, country, modern, urban, Zen, and other styles and display interiors with explanations of their décor, layout, and how owners remodeled and designed them. The book measures 10.5x12.5″. There is no index. Thornburg is senior editor for home design for the Los Angeles Times Sunday Magazine. NA8001

2005-034192

1-57233-496-7

Masonic temples; freemasonry, ritual architecture, and masculine archetypes. Moore, William D. U. of Tennessee Press, ©2006 216 p. $34.95 Moore (history, U. of North Carolina, Wilmington) presents a study of Masonic temples constructed by American Freemasons from 1870 to 1930, focusing on New York State, although his ideas are applicable to other areas. Drawing from his experience as director of the Livingston Masonic Library in New York City, he investigates ceremonies and the places where they occurred, their history, and connections to American concepts of masculinity. This last idea he closely ties to specific archetypes and spaces like the lodge room, armory and drill room of the Knights Templar, the Scottish Rite Cathedral, and the Shriners’ mosque. He also addresses the architectural, financial, and symbolic significance of the structures. The book is aimed at readers interested in vernacular architecture, material culture, American studies, architectural and social history, Freemasonry, and voluntary associations. B&w photos and illustrations are incorporated throughout. NA8330

2006-920918

0-7643-2399-7

Contemporary kitchens; a style portfolio. Cardona, Melissa and Nathaniel Wolfgang-Prince. (A Schiffer design book) Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2006 125 p. $24.95 (pa) Two hundred and fifty color photographs illustrate current trends in kitchen cabinets, countertops, appliances, color, and workflow. Each set of pictures is accompanied by a brief description of the design. The last page lists manufacturers’ and designers’ phone numbers and website address. No table of contents or index is provided.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-052600

978-0-87169-258-0

The Temple of Night at Schönau; architecture, music, and theater in a late eighteenth-century Viennese garden. Rice, John A. (Memoirs of the American Philosophical Society held at Philadelphia for promoting useful knowledge; v.258) Am. Philosophical Society, ©2006 257 p. $70.00 In the late 1700s, Baron Peter von Braun built a grotto and underground temple in the gardens of his estate at Schönau, in honor of the GrecoRoman goddess Night. By examining the ruins of the temple, as well as its design (by Johann Ferdinand Hetzendorf von Hohenberg), Rice, an independent scholar with a Ph.D. in music history, explores how it is a symbol of Viennese culture during this period. He discusses the construction of the temple in the context of Braun’s life, eyewitness accounts and related documents, the temple as a garden, the perception of night in eighteenth century culture, and the temple’s relationship to music, freemasonry, theater and opera, and as a Kunstgalerie (a multimedia-like structure). B&W photos and other illustrations are incorporated. The book is aimed at those interested in the history of garden design, architecture, theater, and music. NA9053

2006-103438

978-1-4195-9373-4

Planning for disaster; how natural and manmade disasters shape the built environment. Ramroth, William G. Kaplan Publishing, ©2007 294 p. $19.95 (pa) Architect Ramroth considers the effects of both natural and humancaused catastrophes on the design and construction industry. Topics include (for example), the impact of the Triangle Shirtwaist Fire (1911) on city building codes; the demolition of San Francisco’s Embarcadero Freeway following the Loma Prieta Earthquake (1989); and efforts to rebuild New Orleans in the aftermath of Hurricane Katrina (2005). Ramroth is also the author of Pragmatism and Modern Architecture. NA9085

2006-021764

978-0-375-42280-5

Grand avenues; the story of the French visionary who designed Washington, D.C. Berg, Scott W. Pantheon Books, ©2007 336 p. $25.00 Berg (nonfiction writing and literature, George Mason U.) recounts the story of Pierre Charles L’Enfant (1755-1825), a Frenchman who left Paris to volunteer in the army of the American colonies, serving under George Washington, and was later chosen by Washington to plan the nation’s capital. Illustrated with b&w maps and reproductions. Academic but accessible to the general reader. NA9085

2006-037123

978-0-393-73206-1

Robert Moses and the modern city; the transformation of New York. Title main entry. Ed. by Hilary Ballon and Kenneth T. Jackson. W.W. Norton, ©2007 336 p. $50.00 Published in conjunction with a three-part exhibition appearing at the Queens Museum of Art, the Museum of the City of New York, and the Miriam and Ira D. Wallach Art Gallery of Columbia University, this volume profiles the work of Robert Moses (1888-1981) perhaps the most influential urban planner in the history of 20th century New York. Rather than produce a simple catalogue, editors Ballon (architectural history, Columbia U.) and Jackson (history, Columbia U.) instead have sought to complement the exhibitions by presenting an extensive collection of Moses’s public works, built and unbuilt, and seven scholarly essays examining Moses as a New York City power broker, exploring the views of his many critics; and discussing his impact on urban recreation, transportation, urban renewal programs, city planning, and race relations. NA9127

978-0-7734-5429-3

The miniature and the gigantic in Philadelphia architecture; essays on designing the city to human scale. Read, Gray. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 127 p. $99.95 Read (architecture, Florida International U.) considers scale and measure in the architectural traditions of Philadelphia, focusing on instances when architects manipulated urban scale to engage a “larger mythic narrative.” She posits that architecture defines the city spatially and rhetorically and traces four traditions of its poetic, or symbolic, scale: traditions of dimension and proportion, miniature architecture in the skyline, and architectural framing. The book is aimed at architects and social urban historians.

–68–

SCULPTURE NB87

NB450 2006-001040

978-1-931707-84-8

Classical sculpture; catalogue of the Cypriot, Greek, and Roman stone sculpture in the University of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology. (CD-ROM included) Romano, Irene Bald. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2006 331 p. $59.95 Romano (American School of Classical Studies at Athens, U. of Pennsylvania, and Bryn Mawr College) provides the first complete catalogue of the Classical sculpture collection at the U. of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology. It contains all the Cypriot, Greek, and Roman stone sculptures in the Museum, including relevant pieces in the Eastern and Egyptian Sections. Organized by provenience, each piece has a description, measurements, report of condition, list of published sources, commentary, and b&w photographic documentation. It is meant for scholars, students, and general readers. The accompanying CD-ROM has 54 color images of pieces. NB91

2006-042547

0-521-85797-X

Temple decoration and cultural identity in the archaic Greek world; the metopes of Selinus. Marconi, Clemente. Cambridge U. Pr., ©2007 352 p. $90.00 Marconi (history of Greek art and archaeology, Institute of Fine Arts, New York U.) analyzes the Archaic metopes of Selinus, presenting a new interpretation of the use of figural decoration in Greek temples of the Archaic period. He argues against the typological approach to the study of temple decoration and the tendency in the field of Greek architectural sculpture to consider style and iconography as unrelated to cultural and social background. Therefore, he addresses these aspects and the reintegration of the figures into the fabric of buildings, the landscape of sanctuaries and cities, and related rituals. His interpretation uses semiotics, anthropology, and hermeneutics and is based on the rediscovery of the archival sources in Palermo and Rome and new fragments from the Palermo Museum and the Sala Gàbrici. The book is based on Marconi’s dissertation. NB237

2006-286369

0-7884-4263-5

Anthracite coal art by Charles Edgar Patience. Moss, Juanita Patience. Willow Bend Books, ©2006 152 p. $25.50 (pa) This biography features the African-American anthracite coal sculptor Charles Edgar Patience. Moss, an author and retired biology teacher, is Patience’s daughter, and she uses newspaper and magazine articles to describe his life and work, bringing this unknown artist to the mainstream. Many b&w photos, including those of his works, are provided. Facsimiles of some of his correspondence are appended. NB237

2006-403887

978-88-7624-870-2

Claes Oldenburg, Coosje van Bruggen; sculpture by the way. Title main entry. Skira Editore, ©2006 367 p. $85.00 Produced to accompany an exhibition held at the Castello di Rivoli Museum of Contemporary Art in Rivoli-Turin, Italy, this catalogue presents a delightful overview of the artist’s sculpture as it has been presented at exhibitions held from 1985-2005, in permanent installations, large-scale projects, and his most recent projects. An interview, working drawings and models, photos of performances, and lengthy descriptive essays accompany the pieces, which are illustrated with color plates of excellent quality in an oversized format (the volume is 9.75x11.25″), making this a terrific resource on the artist. Not indexed. Distributed by Rizzoli.

–69–

978-1-903470-30-5

Display and displacement; sculpture and the pedestal from renaissance to post-modern. Title main entry. Ed. by Alexandra Gerstein. Paul Holberton Publishing, ©2007 167 p. $65.00 Pedestals, as Gerstein (Acting Curator of Sculpture and Decorative Arts, Courtauld Institute of Art, UK) observes in her introduction, “determine our physical and spatial relationship to sculpture and mediate both our aesthetic and intellectual appreciation of it through elements such as inscriptions,” yet they have remained relatively neglected as an object of study. She presents eight papers that address the relationship of the pedestal to sculpture across a range of approaches and time periods. Topics include the wide variety of pedestals employed by 16th century artist Alessandro Vittoria, the meanings of pedestal inscriptions on the tombs of women of the early 19th century, Victorian sculptural politics and the pedestal of Nelson’s Column in London’s Trafalgar Square, gender and the rejection of the pedestal in the works of 20th century artists Giacometti and Epstein, and the artistic potential of pedestals in and of themselves. Distributed in the US by the U. of Washington Press. NB464

2006-004749

0-7546-3030-7

Sculpture and the garden. Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Eyres and Fiona Russell. (Subject/object; new studies in sculpture) Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 196 p. $99.95 This collection of 10 essays by history and art scholars from the UK addresses the relationship between sculpture and gardens there since the early eighteenth century. They discuss different types of gardens and how sculpture has “embellished” them. Concentrating on four key landscapes—the Georgian Landscape, Victorian urban park, outdoor spaces of twentieth-century modernism, and late-twentieth century sculpture parks—the essays trace a continuous example of British culture and aspects relating to royalty, gender, public areas, meaning, modernism, and neoclassicism. The volume begins with color photographs of several gardens by Geoffrey James. It originated in a conference held at the U. College Bretton Hall in the Yorkshire Sculpture Park in 1998. Eyres is the editor of the New Arcadia Journal, UK. Russell is a freelance writer and editor. NB615

978-2-503-52459-7

Benedetto da Maiano; a Florentine sculptor at the threshold of the high Renaissance; 2v. Carl, Doris. Brepols Publishers, ©2006 1147 p. $204.00 The sculpture of this 15th-century Italian is surveyed in a detailed analysis of the style and patronage of reliefs, terracottas, and marble. The influences of compatriots, especially Verrocchio, are discussed in terms of specific works. Notable is Carl’s attention throughout of the patronage of the altarpieces, sculptural groups, and individual works she describes. Initial chapters analyze artistic development. Subsequent chapters describe portraits and works grouped by their patrons, including the Santa Fina Chapel, the Florentine Signoria, and individual patrons in Siena and Rome. An appendix contains the texts of some of the original sources of this research (in Italian or Latin, they are not translated). A full bibliography is included. Vol.1 contains the text, vol.2 contains fullpage color and b&w plates of excellent quality in oversize format (9x11.75″). Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Company. NB1008

2006-049268

978-90-04-15537-4

History of early stone sculpture at Mathura, ca. 150 BCE100 CE. Quintanilla, Sonya Rhie. (Studies in Asian art and archaeology; v.25) BRILL, ©2007 314+ p. $194.00 Scholars and students of Indian art will welcome this study, which provides a thorough survey and analysis of the celebrated Mathura school of sculpture. The volume proceeds chronologically, organizing the extant sculpture both in India and in collections worldwide. Quintanilla used the style and iconography for each work to formulate the existence of schools during specific eras in Mathura. The process of her analysis is present in the lengthy descriptions of the style and iconography of each piece of sculpture. A glossary and lengthy bibliography are provided. Quintanilla (curator, San Diego Museum of Art) first researched the Mathura school for her PhD dissertation of 1999 at Harvard with Pramod Chandra, who provides a preface. The volume, which is oversized (8.5x11.75″), contains over 300 b&w photos of the sculpture.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NB1912

2006-024200

978-0-8248-2994-0

NC139

978-1-882507-17-7

Donors of Longmen; faith, politics, and patronage in medieval Chinese Buddhist sculpture.

The powerful hand of George Bellows; drawings from the Boston Public Library.

McNair, Amy. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 230 p. $52.00 The Longmen Grottoes near Luoyang, China are the site of nearly 100,000 individual Buddhist statues produced approximately between 494 and 794 BCE. In this work, McNair (Chinese art, U. of Kansas) is concerned not just with who the sponsors of these statues were (they included emperors, empresses, aristocrats, court eunuchs, imperial artisans, monks, nuns, military officials, local government functionaries, and members of commercial guilds), but also their motivations for paying for the statues, often revealed through the commissioned inscriptions engraved near the statues.

Conway, Robert. Trust for Museum Exhibitions, ©2007 159 p. $35.00 Bellows (1882-1925) was esteemed during his short life and is recognized as a founder of the Ashcan School in New York, a group of artists that rejected academic boundaries in favor of direct contact with city life. The Boston Public Library, holder of the Wiggins Collection of drawings by George Bellows, and the Trust for Museum Exhibitions worked together for several years to prepare an exhibition scheduled for at least seven venues during 2007 and 2008. Art historian Conway provides an introductory essay in which he comments on Bellows’ gift for balancing spontaneity and planning, and his fascination with the composition system called Dynamic Symmetry. The drawings are organized chronologically and include descriptive data and interpretive and contextual commentary. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press.

NB1912

2007-002856

978-0-8248-2924-7

Violence and serenity; late Buddhist sculpture from Indonesia. Reichle, Natasha. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 289 p. $55.00 Reichl, a curator of Southeast Asian art at the Asian Art Museum of San Francisco, has written an in-depth study of Buddhist sculpture made in Indonesia in the 14th and 15th centuries that examines and rejects longheld assumptions about their association with historical figures and the hybrid form of Buddhism in Indonesia. To make her argument, Reichl uses extensive reading of historical and religious texts (which are extensively quoted) alongside analysis of the sculpture themselves and the art historical interpretations of them. The volume, which is well illustrated with b&w plates, will be of interest beyond the art historical community to anyone interested in the history of Indonesia, its politics, culture, and religion. NB1932

2006-020906

978-0-300-11781-3

Set in stone; the face in medieval sculpture. Title main entry. Ed. by Charles T. Little. Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 222 p. $50.00 In this beautifully illustrated catalog of over 80 sculpted heads from French, German, and US museums, private collections and anonymous lenders, curator Little and his contributors describe each of the pieces and work through several interrelated themes. They cover such issues as the role of the face in medieval art, iconoclasm and its legacy of violence, the scientific detective story known as the Limestone Project, Faith in images in an illiterate age, marginalia, identity as portrayed in the carved faces, gothic Italy as a reflection of antiquity, and the unique history of reliquary busts. It is especially interesting to find out why the faces survive while the bodies to which they were attached did not. Distributed by Yale University Press.

DRAWING, DESIGN, ILLUSTRATION NC95

2006-923180

0-87070-667-5

An atlas of drawings; transforming chronologies. Pérez Oramas, Luis. Museum of Modern Art, NY, ©2006 — p. $39.95 To encourage the pleasures of unexpected connections and comparisons, explains Glenn D. Lowry (director of the Museum of Modern Art, NY) in his brief foreword, the 2006 exhibition (for which this publication is the catalogue) presented drawings dating from 1886 to 2004, organized by theme rather than by chronology. As the exhibition departed from the conventional, so does the catalog: instead of a binding, a folded cardboard box houses the material. First, a pamphlet, with an essay by curator Luis Perez-Oramas, a checklist of the exhibited drawings, a few photos of the exhibition, and a bibliography. The drawings themselves are presented in six accordion-folded booklets (unbound, 7x9″), which can be stretched out to display the works side by side. Each is devoted to a theme—tectonics, faces, digital, figures, constructions, and movement—and each theme is represented by 25 to 30 drawings.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NC257

2006-022395

978-0-521-55133-5

The drawings of Michelangelo and his followers in the Ashmolean Museum. Joannides, Paul. Cambridge U. Pr., ©2007 491 p. $250.00 Joannides (art history, U. of Cambridge, the UK) has performed the notable and monumental task of compiling a catalogue raisonnée of all the Michelangelo drawings in the Ashmolean Museum at Oxford, as well as the drawings of his followers, all of them collected by Sir Thomas Lawrence and acquired by Oxford in the 1840s. Two lengthy chapters describe in detail the formation and dispersal of Lawrence’s collection and the study and categorization of Michelangelo’s drawings. The catalogue is a feat of serious scholarship, with each entry containing discussion of the drawing’s condition, a discussion of its content, its original purpose, its provenance, a list of references and a reproduction of the drawing. Appendices contain lists of drawings attributed to Michelangelo in William Young Ottley’s sales, a list of the Michelangelo and related drawings in the Lawrence Collection, a list of former owners, a concordance to major catalogues, and an exhaustive bibliography. The volume is oversized: 8.75x11.25″. NC615

2006-277851

978-0-8264-8956-2

Teaching children to draw, rev. ed. Ward, Barbara. Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 178 p. $29.95 (pa) This book describes methods for teaching students how to draw, beginning with the basics, using shapes, and motivation. Those teaching do not need a drawing background. Portraits, animals, and natural scenes, as well as working with color, are explained. This edition contains new chapters on using sketching materials, painting skills, and more on drawing movement and people. Many examples are provided, including children’s works. Ward has taught in primary and secondary schools for 40 years and has worked as an artist. NC730

2006-931532

978-0-495-09491-3

Drawing: a contemporary approach, 6th ed. Sale, Teel and Claudia Betti. Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2008 318 p. $100.95 (pa) The examples offered in this text for drawing students are b&w (except in the “color” chapter) prints from 20th and 21st century artists. The techniques discussed in the series of problems and projects are contemporary updates of classic study. Text explores spatial relationship of the art elements, value, texture, line, contemporary and traditional perspectives on the picture plane, organization of the picture plane, and contemporary trends in drawing. Practical guides at the end help readers understand and select materials as well as correct problem drawing.

–70–

NC892

2006-000954

0-471-74190-6

Color drawing; design drawing skills and techniques for architects, landscape architects, and interior designers, 3d ed. Doyle, Michael E. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 425 p. $65.00 A former instructor at the U. of Colorado, Doyle is a practicing architect in Boulder. He presents an updated resource for professionals and students who need to develop and communicate design ideas with clear, attractive, impressive color drawings. Coverage includes an overview of basic phenomena, media, papers, and techniques, followed by application of the basic skills to create a range of drawings for presentation purposes. The third edition has been updated with 100-plus pages, including an entirely new section on state-of-the-art digital techniques, and new and innovative techniques for the reproduction and distribution of finished drawings. Illustrated throughout with b&w and color drawings, diagrams, and photographs. NC905

2006-002774

978-1-58180-754-7

Pen & ink with watercolor. Olson, George. North Light Books, ©2006 111 p. $19.99 (pa) Using the classic method of drawing with a crow quill pen and India ink, Olson introduces students to the art of pen-and-ink drawings accented with watercolor. Students are guided by hands-on exercises through lessons on mastering the pen and adding color to drawings. The guide includes 12 step-by-step demonstrations for creating landscapes, flowers, portraits, animals, buildings and interior scenes. NC961

2006-014593

978-0-295-98624-1

Ehon; the artist and the book in Japan. Keyes, Roger S. U. of Washington Press, ©2006 320 p. $60.00 The tradition of Japanese picture books or ehon began with religious talismans created in the eighth century, and represents the collaboration of writers, calligraphers, visual artists, block printers, and other craftsmen, explains Keyes (East Asian studies, Brown U.). Here he traces the evolution of ehon into story books, plays, and other media, noting the insights they give into culture, royalty, and everyday life in Japan from the “modern” period (1600- 1868) through the 20th century. Seventy works are portrayed in color plates; one book, Kitagawa Utamaro’s Shiohi no tsuto (1789) is reproduced in full. Oversize: 9x12″. NC975

2006-039084

978-0-87413-961-7

From sacred to secular; visual images in early American publications. Lacey, Barbara E. (Studies in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century art and culture) Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2007 220 p. $69.50 Contextualizing the images to demonstrate their link with religious and political thought of the time, this text describes and analyzes Puritan ideas as expressed in imagery found in broadsides, caricatures, political portraiture, representations of women, religious tracts, primers, and chapbooks, among other media. Published in an oversized format (8.75x11.25″), the images are presented in clear b&w plates. Distributed by Associated University Presses. NC978

2007-386112

0-7206-1284-5

Mervyn Peake; the man and his art. Title main entry. Ed. by Sebastian Peake et al. Peter Owen, Ltd., ©2006 216 p. $84.95 Mervyn Peake is best known for his Gormenghast trilogy of novels. With this volume, biographer Winnigton and Peake’s son Sebastian seek to enlighten fans to his numerous other accomplishments, including children’s books and nonsense verse, abundant drawings and paintings, war art and lampoons, and illustrations for classic novels such as Alice’s Adventure’s in Wonderland. Accompanying approximately 350 of his works, patrons, friends, and family of the British artist weigh in on his childhood in China as the son of a missionary, his playful and dark comic drawings, his novel Mr. Pye and other work with Penguin publishing, and the stage and television adaptations of the Gormenghast series. Oversize: 9.5x11.25″.

–71–

NC997

978-0-321-35024-4

Hot-wiring your creative process; strategies for print and new media desingers. Cloninger, Curt. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 260 p. $40.00 (pa) Cloninger (multimedia arts and sciences, U. of North Carolina at Asheville) gives designers of print and media a nudge of inspiration and ideas on how to work efficiently while tapping creative strategies. With the wisdom of one who has overcome staring clueless into space, he gives the basics of the creative process, reasons to believe in your creative powers and get past reliance on the epiphany moment, ways to bypass inertia, sources for art and design history with varying degrees of derivation, edits without cringing, software and systems, and making use of the five realms of design while balancing form and reconciling paradigms. He includes interviews with industry leaders and plenty of illustrations to shake you up. NC997

978-0-642-27619-3

James Northfield; and the art of selling Australia. Hetherington, Michelle. National Library of Australia, ©2006 96 p. $34.95 (pa) This catalog commemorates the posters and other works of Northfield, a prolific and successful commercial artist in the 1920s-1950s in Australia. The works are reproduced in full-page color plates in an oversized format (9.5x11″). Hetherington (National Museum of Australia) provides an introduction. Distributed by Antipodes Books & Beyond. NC997

2-08-030523-9

Typography and graphic design; from antiquity to the present. Jubert, Roxane. Flammarion, ©2006 431 p. $95.00 Jubert (art history, Ecole Nationale Supérieure des Arts Décoratifs, France) combines the histories of typography and graphic design, from proto-inscriptions in ancient Europe, through the advent of the printing press, and up to the reinvention of the arts during the digital revolution. Three-fourths of the coverage in this volume, translated from French, is devoted to the 19th and 20th centuries. Supported by 850 images, discussion includes the relationship of advancements in typography and graphics to contemporary artistic movements, and examines their role— at turns both empowering and sinister (particularly their use for propaganda and class repression)—in major political and social events. Later chapters cover post-WWII advertising booms in several industrialized countries, trace the evolution of computer fonts, and discuss the unprecedented accessibility of today’s tools for typography and graphic design. Serge Lemoine, president of the Musée d’Orsay, authored the foreword to the French edition, which is translated here. Oversize: 9.5x11.25″. Distributed by Rizzoli. NC999

2006-295646

1-55297-913-X

Shigeo Fukuda; masterworks. Fukuda, Shigeo. Firefly Books Ltd., ©2005 167 p. $49.95 Tokyo native Fukuda is an internationally recognized graphic artist who, over a 50- year period, has created some 1300 large posters for Japanese corporations, exhibitions, and the entertainment and merchandising industries, most designed with the Japanese lifestyle and culture in mind. He presents a selection of 140 full-page, full- color posters which he feels best represent his work while also remaining accessible to a global audience despite differences in lifestyles, cultures and customs. The work is introduced with an essay by American designer and cofounder of the Push Pin Studios, Seymour Chwast. For professionals in the visual arts, and enthusiasts of Japanese graphic art and optical illusions. NC1000

2006-282381

0-321-33658-5

Graphic design portfolio-builder; Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator projects. Title main entry. Ed. by the instructors of sessions.edu. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2006 353 p. $44.99 (pa) Developed by the faculty of Sessions, an online school of design licensed by the New York Education Department and accredited by the Distance Education and Training Council, this guide offers projects, case studies, and tips for developing graphic design skills. Following a refresher course on digital imaging applications of Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator, step-by-step, well- illustrated lessons are presented on elements of design and designing for advertising, magazines, 3-D packaging, and other types of projects.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NC1002

2006-284438

978-1-59253-220-9

NC1479

978-0-9554063-0-0

The best of business card design 7.

Hogarth, France and British art.

Loewy. Rockport Publishers, ©2006 238 p. $45.00 Compiled annually by the staff at London’s Loewy agency, this colorful volume showcases a number of innovative business cards created by some of the world’s top designers. Close-up photographs show the cards from a variety of angles and reveal the unusual details that make them stand out from the crowd. The emphasis is visual, with photo captions limited to basic identifying information (design team, client, and materials).

Simon, Robin. Hogarth Arts, ©2007 313 p. $90.00 Hogarth (1697-1764), like his contemporaries, had no choice but to interact with French culture and come to terms with it—in order to diverge from it. This scholarly work investigates the multitude of ways he did so, exploring Hogarth’s engagement with both French and British art, music, literature, and theory and setting the context for his art and tremendous influence. Long a professor of art history and English literature, Simon is currently editor of The British Art Journal, which he founded in 1999. He offers new insight into the broad picture of European culture as well as close study of particular works, including many that are not well known. The book is illustrated with a section of color plates and many b&w images. Distribution in the US is by the University of Washington Press.

NC1002

2006-023118

978-1-58180-868-1

The secret life of logos; behind the scenes with top designers. Cabarga, Leslie. HOW Books, ©2007 192 p. $29.99 In this collection of words and works by 70 designers, readers get a good idea of what it takes to produce 160 logos that meet the mark as design elements while satisfying the inner needs of the aforesaid designers and their clients. Samples include all their permutations from a squiggle on the back of a napkin to the finished product, and include commentary on what it takes to produce each in a highly competitive industry. The materials are sorted mostly into industry segments and the index is invaluable for finding specifics, but simply paging through will provide plenty of information and tips on working with, rather than around, clients. NC1305

2006-013711

978-1-4144-0440-0

UXL graphic novelists; 3v. Pendergast, Tom and Sara Pendergast. Thomson Gale, ©2007 634 p. $181.00 This three-volume work profiles 75 authors, artists, and (mostly) author/artists of graphic novels, including some of the most influential and celebrated English-language creators such as Neil Gaiman, Will Eisner, Frank Miller, Alan Moore, and Art Spiegelman, as well as a significant number of Japanese manga artists and writers whom one suspects are just as important in their respective milieu. The profiles are largely biographical in nature, although some limited discussion of the creators’ most important works is usually included. Introductory essays offer short histories of the graphic novel and manga. Also, a guide to graphic novel publishers and a glossary are included. Some examples of the artists’ illustrations are reproduced, but not as many as might be expected given the topic. Twenty-four of the authors agreed to be interviewed for the project. NC1428

2004-017270

978-0-8018-8753-6

978-1-4129-2701-7

The lighter side of classroom management. Bacall, Aaron. Corwin Press Inc., ©2007 84 p. $45.95 A former teacher and curriculum writer, Aaron Bacall is now a full- time cartoonist. This volume reproduces more than 80 of his single- panel cartoons that focus on “the lighter side of classroom management.” Bacall also briefly summarizes his views on the importance of attitude in effective teaching in the introduction.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-0-15-101282-4

Steadman, Ralph. Harcourt, ©2006 396 p. $26.00 To describe the 30-year relationship of Thompson and Steadman as bizarre would be a disservice to the language, and yet the two found compelling ways to describe some the more significant occasions of the end of the twentieth century, if not the end of the world, including Watergate. Steadman tracks through the decades, filling in and correcting details, and keeps the proceedings charmingly graphic and profane. The letters between the two men about business and credits are enlightening, and Steadman’s last letter to Thompson, written after the latter’s suicide in 2005, is a classic. NC1764

2007-017227

978-1-933330-54-9

The Astro Boy essays; Osamu Tezuka, Mighty Atom, and the manga/anime revolution. Schodt, Frederik L. Stone Bridge Press, ©2007 215 p. $16.95 (pa) Japanese artist Osamu Tezuka (1928-1989), perhaps best known for his Tetsuwan Atomu (Mighty Atom) stories about an android longing to be more human (published in the US as Astro Boy), had such a cultural impact on Japanese comics and animation that he became known to some as the “God of Manga.” In this volume his longtime friend and translator describes the origins and developments of the Mighty Atom series, its reception in Japan, and the stories behind its translation and presentation to Western audiences. 2006-010584

978-0-8230-5978-2

Zap!; how to draw fantastic sci-fi comics.

Topliss, Iain. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 325 p. $29.95 (pa) We can’t improve upon our review of the 2005 first edition: What’s billed as the first full-scale scholarly study of the subject assesses the four New Yorker cartoonists’ work, their development, and the social and cultural contexts that made them funny. Topliss (communication, arts, and critical inquiry, La Trobe U., Melbourne, Australia) considers the general nature of humor and draws particular attention to the way the four artists mocked the status quo without alienating the upscale magazine’s readers; he argues that in fact New Yorker cartoons helped define American consciousness in the mid-20th century. The work is salted with b&w images published between 1925 and 1975. 2006-049175

2006-011375

The joke’s over; bruised memories; Gonzo, Hunter S. Thompson, and me.

NC1764

The comic worlds of Peter Arno, William Steig, Charles Addams, and Saul Steinberg. (reprint, 2005)

NC1429

NC1479

Baugh, Bryan. Watson-Guptill Pubns., ©2006 144 p. $19.95 (pa) Featuring a wealth of full-color examples, this practical guide offers stepby-step instructions for drawing robots, aliens, and other characters populating sci-fi comics. Storyboard artist Baugh also takes readers through a brief history of the genre and shares interviews he conducted with illustrator Al Williamson (Marvel Comics) and video game artist Dave White. Contributing artists include Jojo Aguilar, Bill Bronson, and David Hartman, among others. NC1766

2007-023573

978-0-7864-3234-9

Anime intersections; tradition and innovation in theme and technique. Cavallaro, Dani. McFarland & Co., ©2007 209 p. $35.00 (pa) Anime started as an ambitious project but a minor preoccupation in the Japanese film industry but has grown beyond cult status as a genre deserving comment by mainstream as well as academic critics. Enthusiast Cavallaro takes readers from what have become complex and exacting stages of production to their application in nine films that established and re-established anime techniques and themes. Cavallaro analyzes the interplay of Japanese and Western myths, the development of subtle but district subgenres such as the quest for justice and equity, and the interplay of darkness, which is not always a negative theme and light, which is not always positive. Accessible and detailed, this works for anime lovers as well as first-time viewers.

–72–

PAINTING ND205

ND237 2007-002258

978-0-942614-37-4

American paintings to 1945; the collections of the NelsonAtkins Museum of Art; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret C. Conrads. Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art, ©2007 768 p. $125.00 Twenty years in the making, this impressive 2-volume catalogue presents a selection of 125 paintings, arranged alphabetically by artist, with an essay-length entry accompanying each. The essays describe the life and career of the artist, developing a context for the work under discussion by situating it within the artist’s oeuvre. Volume Two contains detailed notes for each entry, including a thumbnail color plate, exhaustive list of references, list of exhibitions, and full technical discussion for each work. Together with Conrad’s introductory essay on the history of the NelsonAtkins collection, the catalog is a valuable addition to the history of American painting. The paintings are reproduced in full-page color plates of excellent quality in a large format (9.5x12″). Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. ND237

2006-013390

1-59714-041-4

Dark metropolis; Irving Norman’s social surrealism. Norman, Irving. Ed. by Ray Day and Scott A. Shields. Crocker Art Museum, ©2006 223 p. $35.00 (pa) The uncompromising nature of the paintings of California artist Irving Norman (1906-1989), with their dense and hostile cityscapes, dehumanized workers and students, and political perspective shaped by his experiences as a soldier in the Spanish Civil War, have perhaps denied him the wider recognition he deserves beyond his passionate supporters and collectors, but maybe the recent exhibit by the Crocker Art Museum, which has resulted in this catalogue, may go some way towards redressing that wrong. Following essays discussing Norman’s life and politics and the themes and techniques of his paintings (which often remind one of the scale and concerns of Diego Rivera mixed with the surrealist vision of Salvador Dali), a wide selection of his paintings are reproduced in thematic sections labeled “The Capitalist Enigma,” “The Social Illusion,” “The Cycle of War,” “The Urban Transformation,” and “The Human Predicament.” Because of the scale of Norman’s paintings, details are frequently reproduced in addition to whole works. Appendices list a catalogue of Norman’s works, exhibitions and collections, and reproductions. Distributed in the US by Heyday Books. ND237

2006-016371

978-1-55595-269-3

East Coast/West Coast, and beyond; Colin Campbell Cooper, American impressionist. Gerdts, William H. and Deborah Epstein Solon. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 143 p. $50.00 The span of Cooper’s output, which ranges from optimistic paintings of New York’s financial district at the turn of the 20th century to paintings of a more natural world in California in the 1920s, allows the curators of this exhibition to focus equally on East Coast and West Coast subject matter. Gerdts (art history, CUNY, emeritus) provides a comprehensive essay on Cooper’s contribution to art on the East Coast, while Solon (independent curator) writes about Cooper’s work in California. The “and beyond” portion of his works includes some large-scale paintings from his travels in Europe, such as the impressive Greco-Roman Theater at Night, Taormina, Sicily. The catalog has 79 color reproductions of Cooper’s paintings, including some which have never been published. ND237

2006-93928

978-0-8478-2930-9

Edward Hopper; an intimate biography, rev.ed.

2006-939431

978-0-87846-713-6

Edward Hopper. Troyen, Carol et al. MFA Publications, ©2007 263 p. $45.00 In this volume that accompanies a large traveling exhibition, Troyen (curator of paintings, Museum of Fine Arts, Boston) and Barter (American art, Art Institute of Chicago) couple approximately 150 works by 20th-century American painter Edward Hopper (particularly emphasizing paintings from the 1920s and 40s) with nine essays discussing his life, work, context, and influence. The chronologically arranged prints display his mastery of and devotion to realism through the era of Abstract Expressionism, and text discusses topics such as his absorption of European influences, critical reactions to his work, his fascination with architecture, and his struggle in his last years to produce original works. Oversize: 10.5x11″.

–73–

Levin, Gail. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2007 777 p. $40.00 Levin (art history, City U. of New York-Baruch College and Graduate Center) updates her biography of American painter Hopper (1882-1967), which was first published in 1995 by Alfred A. Knopf. Three new essays discuss his legacy for visual arts and for cinema, and the recovery of Jo Nivison Hopper. Also included are nearly 100 color reproductions. ND237

2006-006792

978-1-59629-090-7

Fitz H. Lane; an artist’s voyage through nineteenthcentury America. Craig, James A. History Press, ©2006 222 p. $32.99 (pa) Born in 1804 and raised in the maritime community of Gloucester, Massachusetts, Luminist painter Fitz H. Lane’s sea images have become celebrated examples of the form and his work has been exhibited at the White House and numerous museums and have been no less prized by the general public. Not surprisingly, then, many works have been published analyzing Lane’s work, but much less is known about the man himself. This work by Craig (a curator at the Cape Ann Historical Association in Gloucester) represents an effort to reconstruct a more detailed understanding of Lane’s life and historical and cultural contexts and the relationship of these to the paintings so prized by so many. ND237

2006-036053

978-0-943411-49-1

Georgia O’Keeffe; circling around abstraction. Stuhlman, Jonathan and Barbara Buhler Lynes. Hudson Hills Press, ©2007 134 p. $50.00 This catalogue is published in conjunction with a 2007-2008 exhibition— a collaborative effort involving the Norton Museum of Art (West Palm Beach) and the Georgia O’Keeffe Museum (Santa Fe); the exhibition is scheduled for both venues and the Minneapolis Institute of Arts. Gathered as a means of exploring O’Keeffe’s personal path to abstraction, 51 works are showcased in full-page plates. Curator Stuhlman’s thoughtful essay discusses the distinctiveness of O’Keeffe’s use of swirling, spiral, and circular forms and how they evolved as her visual vocabulary from the combined forces of the subjects she chose, various artistic influences, and her own vision. The book measures 9.25x11″. ND237

978-1-55595-277-8

James Havard. Havard, James. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 237 p. $65.00 The work of Santa Fe artist Havard, full of the influences of his own collection of Native American and African art, is celebrated in this luxurious volume, which presents full-page color plates of pieces created from the late 1980s to the present in an oversize format (12.25x12.75″). A lengthy essay of his life and work is provided by Julie Sasse, curator of modern and contemporary art at the Tucson Museum of Art, and a chronology of his life, list of exhibitions, and bibliography are provided. The volume is not indexed. ND237

2006-015741

0-300-11771-X

Jennifer Bartlett; early plate work. Richardson, Brenda. Yale University Press, ©2006 122 p. $24.95 Published to accompany an exhibition at the Addison Gallery of American Art, this work documents the emergence and development of painter Jennifer Bartlett’s signature style—colored dots on gridded steel plates and canvas. Over 35 works produced between 1968 and 1976, the year of her production of Rhapsody painting (The Museum of Modern Art, New York), are reproduced in color. The volume also includes an analytical essay focused on this earlier period, examining Bartlett’s style of working, her connection to other artists, and the development of her aesthetic, among other issues.

Art Book News Annual 2008

ND237

2006-050134

ND237

978-0-87414-155-9

Jules Kirschenbaum; the need to dream of some transcendent meaning. Worthen, Thomas. U. of Iowa Museum of Art, ©2006 132 p. $29.95 (pa) Kirschenbaum (1930-2000) was an artist deeply involved in esoteric ideas, including study of the Kabbalah; Worthen was his colleague for 30 years at Drake University. Published in conjunction with an exhibition Worthen curated for the U. of Iowa Museum of Art in 2006, this catalogue contains his extended biographical and interpretive essay, which draws depth and breadth from that long association. Thoroughly captioned, thumbnail-size images (179 in all) are interspersed with the essay, and some full-page images of selected works and details are also included. The transcript of a lecture by Kirschenbaum is appended as are listings of additional works and supporting material. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. ND237

1-885116-12-8

2006-931282

978-1-85437-573-5

The Rothko book.

McDonnell, Patricia. Frederick R Weisman Art Museum, ©2006 83 p. $27.95 (pa) The Frederick R. Weisman Art Museum in Minnesota holds 61 paintings and 54 works on paper by Marsden Hartley, all of which came as a gift from a foresighted collector, Hudson Walker, who befriended and appreciated the artist long before his reputation became secure. This catalogue is published in conjunction with the second incarnation of an exhibition that has had two lives, the first from 1997 to 2000, and the second starting in 2005. Curator Patricia McDonnell provides an insightful essay about the complexities of Hartley’s life and work. The oversize format (11x12″) holds 53 full-page color plates, followed by captioned b&w thumbnails, a chronology, and a bibliography. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. 2007-003916

978-1-55595-280-8

Boyle, Richard J. Hudson Hills Press, ©2007 148 p. $60.00 Following a foreword by E. John Bullard and an essay titled “Solitude and Silence: The Paintings of Robert Kipniss” by Richard J. Boyle, 102 plates offer a 50-year retrospective on the works of this American master. They include prints loaned by long-time collector and patron James F. White, as well as recent paintings from the artist’s collection (most of which had never been exhibited before), all of which were part of two exhibitions at the New Orleans Museum of Art in 2006. Appended is a long list of selected publications, collections and exhibitions which have featured Kipniss’s work. This volume is a companion publication to Robert Kipniss: Intaglios 1982-2004 (Hudson Hills Press, 2004). Oversize: 9.25x12.25″.

ND237

Marsden Hartley; American modern.

ND237

2006-036052

Robert Kipniss; paintings 1950-2005.

Clearwater, Bonnie. Tate Publishing, ©2006 222 p. $29.95 (pa) Rothko (1903-1970) is the subject of this volume in the Tate Essential Artists Series, which offers attentive, engaging treatment of individual artists. Clearwater (director, Museum of Contemporary Art, Miami) draws on the artist’s own letters and writings to trace the artist’s life and the development of his career. Her text is presented with 100 color reproductions and, as features of the series, end-sections comprising criticism and commentary on Rothko’s art from 1933-71; a chronology of his life and work; and a listing of works in public collections. Distributed by Abrams. ND237

2006-283821

978-0-7148-3992-9

Winslow Homer; an American vision.

978-0-87480-896-4

Pobil, Pilar. U. of Utah Press, ©2007 173 p. $29.95 (pa) Spanish born, but a long-time resident of Salt Lake City, Utah, where she settled with her American husband in the 1950s, artist Pilar Pobil has extraordinary tales to tell, and she knows how to tell them. Fifty color reproductions of her evocative paintings and lively sculptures accompany Pobil’s equally vivid narrative of her life and work. The dean of the U. of Utah’s college of humanities offers a foreword to this attractively produced book.

Griffin, Randall C. Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2006 239 p. $69.95 This critical survey of Homer’s life and work features all of his major paintings, along with a selection of his lesser-known etchings and woodcuts. Asserting that Homer’s works have helped shape America’s view of itself, Griffin (art history, Southern Methodist U.) argues that Homer exemplifies the aspiration to create specifically American subjects and a specifically American character. In support of his argument, Griffin discusses the criticisms and themes of Homer’s work, such as post-war American values, the relationship between man and nature, and the American pastoral.

ND237

ND249

My kitchen table; sketches from my life.

2006-014667

0-86534-498-1

Passionate landscape; the painting journeys of Buffalo Kaplinski. Graves, Harmon S. Sunstone Press, ©2006 183 p. $65.00 A Denver lawyer active in art-related legal issues presents a well-illustrated biography of his longtime artist friend known as Ronald Kaplinski (1943- ) until he left Chicago for New Mexico in the 1960s. There, he became “Buffalo” and part of the Taos Society of Artists, representing a new breed of Western plein-air painters. The volume features many of Kaplinski’s paintings from Sky of the Kachinas (1967) to The Observation Point—Phantom Canyon, Colorado (2004), and photos of the artist. The director of the Charles M. Russell Center for the Study of Art of the American West, U. of Oklahoma, supplies the foreword. ND237

2005-937921

0-8478-2807-7

Richard Estes. Wilmerding, John. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 254 p. $85.00 Though best known for his views of New York, Estes has painted scenes of the places he’s traveled—Venice, Alaska, and Maine, among others—in the same startling photorealist style. Filled with color plates of his paintings in an oversized format (11.5x12.75″), this volume surveys Estes’ entire oeuvre, accompanied by a full and authoritative text by Wilmerding (American art, Princeton U.).

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-411421

1-55365-173-1

Emily Carr; new perspectives on a Canadian icon. Carr, Emily. Ed. by Charles C. Hill et al. Douglas & McIntyre, ©2006 335 p. $65.00 The Vancouver Art Gallery (celebrating its 75th anniversary) and the National Gallery of Canada collaborated to create the eponymous exhibition, which opened in 2006, and is scheduled for several venues during 2007. This book presents scholarly essays by the three curators (Ian M. Tom, Charles C. Hill, and Johanne Lamoureux) and seven contributors, who discuss Carr’s life, work, influences, and formidable impact on art and imagination in Canada. Over 150 of Carr’s paintings (and, also, some rugs and pottery) represent the years 1900 through 1927, and showcase her involvement with native peoples and the environment of the northwest coast of British Columbia, as well as with contemporary colleagues and the larger art world. Offering visual context, the elegantly prepared volume, which measures 10x11″, also contains another 150 or so images, including photos and some images of work by other native artists. ND249

2006-389072

978-1-55365-172-7

Hundreds and thousands; the journals of Emily Carr. (reprint, 1966; new intro.) Carr, Emily. Intro. by Gerta Moray. Douglas & McIntyre, ©2006 440 p. $16.95 (pa) In 1927, after decades of working in obscurity, Canadian painter and writer Emily Carr was invited to participate in an exhibition at the National Gallery. During her cross-country journey to the exhibition, she began recording her experiences, thoughts, and emotions—a practice she would continue throughout most of the rest of her career. This reprint of a volume originally published by Clarke, Irwin & Company in 1966 presents Carr’s journals along with a new introduction by Gerta Moray (art history, U. of Guelph).

–74–

ND249

1-55238-183-8

ND497

2006-924553

978-1-930957-56-5

Reta Summers Cowley.

Camille Patha; geography of desire.

Fenton, Terry. (Art in Profile series) Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 107 p. $29.95 (pa) As part of a series focusing on contemporary Canadian artists and architects co-published with the Mendel Art Gallery, Saskatoon, of which Fenton is a former director, this volume profiles Reta Cowley (1910-2004). From his personal acquaintance with this Saskatoon-area watercolorist, the author showcases the work of a major contributor to Canadian landscape painting. Her critical thoughts on her own work is included as well as a record of her painting trips, as evidence that she was hardly a Sunday painter as sometimes criticized. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press.

Kangas, Matthew. Hallie Ford Museum of Art, ©2006 137 p. $40.00 Printed in an oversized format (11.25x13.25″), this volume surveys the career of the Seattle-area painter, with a text by Seattle art critic Kangas that features interview material with Patha. Her work is presented in fullpage color plates of superb quality.

ND259

Title main entry. Ed. by Michael J. K. Walsh. Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2007 213 p. $65.00 The son of a social commentator (considered a radical) and a suffragist (considered equally radical), Nevinson was probably not predestined to produce pastel watercolor landscapes for the parlor market. Instead he created visual commentaries on the dreariness of everyday life, and scathingly drawn reviews of questionable entertainment. He is best known, however, for his visual record of World War II and his experiences as a soldier, of his battles with the Royal Academy, and his ability to slip from the visual to the literary without raising a ripple. These nine essays regard his family, his years in the most brilliant class of the Slade School of Art, his involvement with futurism, his activism, his approach to Jazz Age America, his fiction, his prints, his attitude toward photography and his fight with fascism and elitism in the 1930s. Distributed by Associated University Presses.

2006-045435

978-0-8118-5692-8

I will never forget you; Frida Kahlo & Nickolas Muray, unpublished photographs and letters. Grimberg, Salomon. Chronicle Books, ©2006 177 p. $24.95 (pa) Offering a surprisingly fresh perspective on the life and work of Frida Kahlo, this illustrated text chronicles Kahlo’s collaboration with the portrait photographer Nickolas Muray. Grimberg, a historian and Kahlo specialist, provides a biography of Muray and a discussion of Muray and Kahlo’s relationship. Grimberg includes an illustrated index of all existing Kahlo portrait photographs taken by Muray. ND454

2006-416852

978-88-7624-662-3

Only in America; one hundred paintings in American museums; unmatched in European collections. Rosenberg, Pierre. Skira Editore, ©2006 239 p. $65.00 When selecting the 98 paintings and two pastels in this collection, all by different European artists and housed in American museums) Rosenberg (former President-Director of the Musée du Louvre) chose works that, while not necessarily grand masterpieces, were unique and “enrich...the idea we have of [each] artist.” Likewise, he took care to represent every major European school from the fifteenth century to modern times. Among the works discussed and displayed chronologically in full-page plates are Picasso’s “Les Demoiselles d’Avignon,” Thomas Lawrences “Pinkie,” and Renoir’s “Luncheon of the Boating Party.” This book is distributed by Rizzoli. Oversize: 9x12.25″. ND467

978-1-904350-44-6

The influence of Pre-Raphaelitism on fin de siécle Italy. Pieri, Giuliana. (Modern Humanities Research Association texts and dissertations; v.65) Maney Publishing, ©2007 199 p. $82.00 Pieri (Italian, Royal Holloway, U. of London, UK) provides the first comprehensive study of the influence of English Pre-Raphaelitism on Italian art and culture in the late nineteenth century. He considers the influence and how it was transmitted by English and Italian writers and reviewers, as well as the interrelationships between English communities in Italy and Italian artists, critics, and writers on art and literature. He discusses Italian Ottocento painting, the development of the English Pre-Raphaelite movement and critical response to it in Italy; the works of Gabriele D’Annunzio and influence of Lawrence Alma-Tadema and Dante Gabriel Rossetti; painters Nino Costa and others; and artists’ societies. Earlier versions of two of the chapters were previously published elsewhere. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. ND467

2007-004156

978-0-7734-5443-9

The use of classical art and literature by Victorian painters, 1860-1912; creating continuity with the traditions of high art. Barrow, Rosemary Julie. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 248 p. $109.95 Just as Victorian art came to that certain age when it was sent piece by piece into obscurity in the less-prestigious museums and galleries, so did the knowledge behind many of their inspirations and themes based on classical references and allusions to archeological discoveries. Here Barrow (classical art and reception, Rochampton U.) resurrects that knowledge in her analysis of the Victorian artists neglected in the push to document everything even remotely Pre-Raphaelite. Using 15 wellchosen samples of line art and five color plates she analyzes the Victorian take on Roman history and the historical genre, including considerations of decadence, images ranging from the aforesaid archeological studies to sculpture and drapery and the nude, mythology in the form of Roman religion and Greek ritual, and the workings of new appreciation of Homer, Latin love poetry and contemporary verse in high art.

–75–

ND497

2006-022576

978-0-87413-942-6

A dilemma of English modernism; visual and verbal politics in the life and work of C.R.W. Nevinson (18891949).

ND497

2006-102736

978-0-8478-2928-6

International lonely guy. Miller, Harland. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2007 141 p. $45.00 The title refers to the text in one of Miller’s paintings in a series of works incorporating the iconic penguin of Penguin Books. Miller (b.1964, Yorkshire) is an internationally acclaimed painter and also a published novelist. His visual works, represented here in full- page plates, are distinguished by their layering of literary and pop (and “Pop Art”) sensibilities, and by extraordinary intelligence and energy. This volume begins with Miller’s preface and includes, along with the plates, interviews with eminent artist Ed Ruscha, film director Sophie Fiennes, novelist Gordon Burn, and artist/musician/writer/producer Jarvis Cocker. A list of exhibitions and a bibliography round out the book (which measures 9.25x12″). ND497

978-3-7774-3455-1

Karl Schmidt-Rottluff; Formen und Farbe. Title main entry. Ed. by Janina Dahlmanns. Hirmer Verlag, ©2007 190 p. $52.50 (pa) Published to celebrate the 40-year anniversary of the founding of the Brücke Museum in Berlin, and of the artist’s gift of 74 paintings, this attractive catalog presents full-page color plates of paintings, drawings, and watercolors in an oversized format (9.25x9.75″). Three essays discuss Schmidt-Rottluff’s still lifes, use of color and composition, and his relationship with the artist group Die Brücke. The text is in German. A short chronological biography of the artist and a bibliography (but no index) are included. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. ND497

978-0-86713-096-6

Lowell Herrero. Herrero, Lowell. Greenwich Workshop Press, ©2007 221 p. $65.00 Dedicated to design and color, Herrero’s paintings of California’s wine country are showcased in full-page and two-page color plates in this oversized volume (12x13″). Not indexed. Co-published with Napa Valley Museum. Distributed by Workman Publishing.

Art Book News Annual 2008

ND497

2006-927023

ND553

978-0-9538525-5-0

Richard Woods. Livingstone, Marco and Gordon Burn. Lund Humphries, ©2006 192 p. $60.00 This monograph presents the delightful work of British artist Richard Woods, whose sculptures and installations operate on the boundary between art, architecture and design. Drawing on unpublished interviews with the artist and previously unseen documentation of earlier sculptures and installations, the art historian and independent curator Marco Livingstone charts the development of Woods’ work since his days as an art student at the Slade School of Fine Art. The volume is lavishly illustrated and focuses on Woods’ building-based projects completed since 2000. Distributed in the US by Ashgate. ND497

978-1-904449-49-2

Spencelayh. Noakes, Aubrey. (Chaucer art) Chaucer Press, ©2006 192 p. $55.00 This is the second edition of the 1970s study of the life and work of turnof-the-century British painter Charles Spencelayah, for which art critic Noakes consulted the artist’s personal papers and interviewed his son, stepson, and executor. Text accompanied by paintings, sketches, and b&w plates covers the artist’s childhood in Rochester, his formative years at the Royal Academy, the patronage of Queen Mary, and the specter of World War I in his “Bozeat” years. The author dedicates one chapter to refuting the claim that Spencelayah never painted women. Also addressed are the painter’s devotion to the study of the common man, his celebrated miniatures, and his rejection (or ignorance) of changing artistic trends. This book is distributed by International Publishers Marketing. ND497

2006-931283

2006-043621

2006-921452

0-8478-2842-5

Monet in Normandy. Lemonedes, Heather et al. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 192 p. $45.00 This oversized catalogue (9.25x11.25″) was published in conjunction with an eponymous exhibition of 2006-2007 that traveled from the Fine Arts Museum of San Francisco to the North Carolina Museum of Art and the Cleveland Museum of Art. Richard Brettell (U. of Texas, Dallas), a wellknown art historian of Impressionism, contributes three initial essays on Normandy and Monet. Lengthy essays accompany each of the 62 paintings featured in the catalog. The volume is heavily illustrated with color plates. 2006-103293

978-0-8387-5671-3

Monument, moment, and memory; Monet’s cathedral in fin de siécle France. Bernier, Ronald R. Bucknell University Pr., ©2007 112 p. $45.00 Bernier (art history, Wilkes U., Pennsylvania) examines the critical responses of Claude Monet’s contemporaries to his paintings of Rouen Cathedral, a departure from his natural subjects that better suited the widespread discourse on instantaneity and temporality. Among other things, the author relates how these themes translated (and how they didn’t) in the opinion of nineteenth-century critics when the impressionist’s subject changed from transient nature to a monument of history and nation. Oversize: 8.5x11.25″. 2006-038288

978-0-300-12099-8

Picasso and Gertrude Stein.

Brettell, Richard R. and Joachim Pissarro. Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art, ©2007 167 p. $35.95 Thirty works by well-known French Impressionists are showcased in this volume, which accompanied an exhibition held at the Nelson-Atkins Museum in 2007. Published in an oversized format (9x12″), the paintings are reproduced in full-page color plates of excellent quality, with lengthy catalog entries by Brettell (U. of Texas, Dallas) and Pissarro (curator, Museum of Modern Art, New York). Two essays describe the formation of the Bloch collection and collecting in the days of the Impressionists in France. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press.

Giroud, Vincent. Yale University Press, ©2007 55 p. $14.95 (pa) Giroud, who has a background in both art and books and manuscripts, looks at the graphical relationship between Spanish painter Pablo Picasso (1881-1973) and American writer Gertrude Stein (1874-1946) during the course of their long relationship. The Winter 2007 issue of The Metropolitan Museum of Art Bulletin, from which the volume is reprinted, celebrates the centenary of his painting Portrait of Gertrude Stein and the 60th anniversary of her bequeathing it to the Museum, where it has served as a cornerstone of the modern art collection. ND565

2005-053446

978-0-942614-34-3

German and Netherlandish Paintings, 1450-1600; the collections of the Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art.

0-06-054558-5

The private lives of the Impressionists. Roe, Sue. HarperCollins, ©2006 356 p. $29.95 Biographer Roe describes the private lives of the nine Impressionist painters—Manet, Monet, Pissarro, Cézane, Renoir, Degas, Sisley, Berthe Morisot, and Mary Cassatt—and illuminates the intersections between their personal experiences and the themes and development of their art. Her chronological account covers the years between the first meeting of the Impressionists in 1860 and the introduction of their work in New York in 1886. The volume features b&w artistic reproductions and archival photographs as well as a section of color plates.

Art Book News Annual 2008

ND553

ND553

978-0-942614-35-0

Manet to Matisse; impressionist masters from the Marion and Henry Bloch collection.

ND547

Title main entry. Ed. by Mary D. Sheriff. (University of Delaware Press studies in seventeenth- and eighteenth- century art and culture) Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 201 p. $62.50 Sheriff (art history, U. of North Carolina) presents ten essays from scholars of French history, literature, and art discussing the art and context of 18th-century painter Antoine Watteau, known for his fetes galantes and scenes from the theater. Topics explored include the history of writing about the artist across the centuries; how the practice of drawing shaped Watteau’s artistic production; how his works respond to his contemporary social and political climate; his relationship to various theatrical institutions; and his influence on contemporaries and modern painters, among other subjects. About 30 of Watteau’s drawings and paintings are reproduced in b&w. This book is distributed by Associated University Presses.

ND553

Smiles, Sam. (Tate essential artists series) Tate Publishing, ©2006 224 p. $29.95 (pa) The Tate Essential Artists Series aims to present individual artists in attractively designed books with excellent reproductions and engaging text. The prolific and innovative Turner (1775-1885) is given his due, with 100 images and text by Smiles (art history, U. of Plymouth). The presentation is further enhanced by several features at the end of the book, the first a section on Turner’s writings, including his commentary on other artists, on creativity, and on theory and practice, as well as some of his poetry and correspondence. Following sections include a chronological arrangement featuring criticism and commentary on Turner’s art from 1797 through 1966; a chronology of his life and work; and a listing of works in public collections. Distribution is by Abrams. 2007-001994

978-0-87413-934-1

978-1-85437-572-8

The Turner book.

ND547

2006-000843

Antoine Watteau; perspectives on the artist and the culture of his time.

Dunbar, Burton L. (The collections of the Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art; 2) Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art, ©2005 347 p. $75.00 The remarkable collection of top-notch German and Netherlandish paintings held by the Nelson-Atkins Museum in Kansas City receives substantial treatment in the lengthy essays on each of the selected paintings presented in this volume. Dunbar’s (art history, U. of Missouri, Kansas City) in-depth analysis of the work includes a scientific report of the dendrochronology of the panel and infrared reflectography of the painting, and the place of the painting within the artist’s oeuvre. The lengthy introduction surveys the history of collecting in the Midwest of Northern Renaissance painting. The volume, which is oversize (9.25x12.25″), is illustrated with color and b&w images of excellent quality. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press.

–76–

ND623

2006-008312

978-0-87413-936-5

Caravaggio; realism, rebellion, reception. Title main entry. Ed. by Genevieve Warwick. (University of Delaware Press studies in 17th- and 18th- century art and culture) Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 145 p. $52.50 These essays consider Caravaggio’s revolutionary “realism” from a range of perspectives. As a whole, the volume adds to the understanding of Caravaggio’s relationship to the “new” science of observation championed by Galileo and reexamines the theoretical nature of Caravaggio’s seemingly direct realism. Some of the essays extend the research on Caravaggio’s intellectual and social milieu and the effects of high and low cultures. Distributed by Associated University Presses. ND623

2007-007541

978-0-8047-3442-4

A childhood memory by Piero della Francesca. Damisch, Hubert. Trans. by John Goodman. (Cultural memory in the present) Stanford U. Press, ©2007 113 p. $19.95 (pa) Renaissance painter della Francesca (1416-1492) is known for an unusual painting of the Virgin Mary, Madonna del Parto, in which she points to her partially open dress and pregnant belly. Damisch (École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales, Paris) applies Freud’s A Childhood Memory of Leonardo da Vinci as a point of departure for a postmodern analysis of the relations between art and life. The book includes illustrations but no index. This is a translation of Souvenir d’enfance par Piero della Francesca (1997). ND623

2006-033677

978-0-8204-8813-4

Giorgio Vasari’s teachers; sacred and profane art. Cheney, Liana de Girolami. Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 392 p. $42.95 (pa) Cheney (art history, U. of Massachusetts-Lowell) examines the artistic, cultural, and historical influence that his teachers, mentors, and patrons had on the work of Florentine painter, architect, and writer Vasari (151174). Among the influences she finds are Dante’s literary writings, Marsilio Ficinio’s Neoplatonic philosophy, and Niccoló Machiavelli’s political views. ND623

2006-038238

978-0-89236-873-0

Titian remade; repetition and the transformation of early modern Italian art. Loh, Maria H. Getty Publications, ©2007 202 p. $45.00 In this analysis, Loh (art history, U. College, London, UK) explores the question of copy and repetition in examples that extend beyond Titian and his contemporaries to the world of film and current theoretical approaches to art and culture. The 17th-century writer Marco Boschini is quoted extensively as Loh provides a complexly interwoven argument concerning copies of works by Titian, and with regard to his art, reception, and influence. ND635

2-503-51743-9

The Flemish primitives; v.4: Masters with provisional names. Syfer-d’Olne, Pascale et al. (Catalogue of Early Netherlandish Painting: Royal Musuems of Fine Arts of Belgium; 4) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 458 p. $189.00 This volume of the Flemish Primitives series undertaken by the Royal Museums of Fine Arts in Belgium diverges from the first three volumes by focusing on anonymous, rather than famous, painters, particularly those painters whose artistic identity is defined in relation to a base work. The biographical notes of the earlier volumes have been replaced here with introductions that set out the questions surrounding each of these painters and the groups of works associated with them. The examination of the 20 panels uses a multidisciplinary approach that combines traditional historical, stylistic and iconographic research with laboratory analysis methods. This in-depth analysis gives the anonymous paintings the recognition they deserve. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

ND635

2-503-51605-X

Making and marketing; studies of the painting process in fifteenth- and sixteenth-century Netherlandish workshops. Title main entry. Ed. by Molly Faries. Brepols Publishers, ©2006 279 p. $115.00 (pa) Twelve contributions from art historians describe the results of research investigating the workshop practices of Netherlandish painters in the 15th and 16th centuries. Particular emphasis is placed on the activities of 16th-century masters such as Joos van Cleve, Bernard van Orley, and Joachim Beuckelaer, whose work is not as well known as that of their 15th century counterparts. Five of the papers were originally presented at the Historians of Netherlandish Art International Conference, held in Antwerp in March 2002. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. ND636

978-2-503-51566-3

Munuscula amicorum; contributions on Rubens and his colleagues in honour of Hans Vlieghe; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by Katlijne van der Stighelen. (Pictura nova; v.10) Brepols Publishers, ©2006 688 p. $195.00 The 34 scholarly articles of this well illustrated two- volume Festschrift delve into many aspects of Rubens’ oeuvre and that of his contemporaries, as well as the larger context of painting and patronage in 17thcentury Flanders. Following a tribute to Vlieghe and bibliography of his scholarship, David Freedberg (art history, Columbia U., New York) offers an essay on connoissership. The subsequent articles are grouped into four sections: Rubens’s reputation and life, his works, the artistic and architectural commissions of his contemporaries, and their paintings and audience. Typical for this publisher, the plates are numerous and of superb quality. The origin of the Festschrift was a Symposium held in May 2005 at the Katholieke Universiteit Leuven in the Netherlands. Fourteen of the articles are in Dutch, two are in German, the balance are in English. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. ND646

2007-030068

978-0-300-12406-4

The age of Rembrandt; Dutch paintings in the Metropolitan Museum of Art. Quodbach, Esmée. Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2007 72 p. $24.95 (pa) Quodback ably describes the pictures exhibited at the Metropolitan Museum of Art from September 2007 to January 2008, supplemented by superb color photographs. Along with information about the works by Rembrandt, Vermeer, de Hooch, Maes, Halls, and virtually every other painter of the time, Quodback describes how the exhibit came together, along with their provenance. She includes period photographs of early exhibitions related to the Dutch works and surprises here and there, such as passages of critical reviews and even cartoons. Distributed by Yale U. Press. ND653

2007-019854

978-90-272-4961-6

The paintings of Hendrick ter Brugghen (1588-1629); Catalogue Raisonné . Slaatker, Leonard J. and Wayne Franits. (OCULI: Studies in the arts of the low countries; v.10) John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2007 468 p. $408.00 At his death in 2003, Slatkes’ lifelong project to create a catalog raisonné of the Dutch artist consisted of entries, but no text and only a partial bibliography. Franits, his former student and a well-known scholar of Dutch painting, undertook the mammoth task of researching and assembling the material to produce a complete catalog, as well as writing two major essays on ter Brugghen’s art and its reception, all presented in this impressive volume. Franit’s essays are exhaustive in detail, with meticulous citing of primary and secondary sources. 17 color plates and 115 b&w plates of ter Brugghen’s and comparative works accompany the catalog. Indexes are included for names and paintings, present and previous owners. Students and specialists in art history, and those interested in the history of Dutch art will find this an invaluable resource. ND653

2006-010091

978-0-89236-844-0

Pieter de Hooch; A woman preparing bread and butter for a boy. Franits, Wayne E. Getty Publications, ©2006 86 p. $22.50 (pa) Franits, a specialist in Dutch art (fine arts, Syracuse U., NY), has written a fascinating extended essay describing the life and ouevre of de Hooch, the world of 17-century Holland, the content and context for the paintings produced there, and the art market of which de Hooch was part, all within the specific context of the Getty’s notable painting. The volume is heavily illustrated with color and b&w images of excellent quality, making this a useful overall introduction to this congenial style.

–77–

Art Book News Annual 2008

ND653

2006-017414

0-936260-83-1

ND699

2006-922385

0-87846-702-5

Rembrandt face to face.

Concerning the spiritual in art.

Dickey, Stephanie. Indianapolis Museum of Art, ©2006 75 p. $20.00 (pa) As the Indianapolis Museum of Art’s director notes in his forward to this companion to the museum’s Rembrandt Face to Face exhibition in 2006, the “Clowes” Rembrandt self-portrait as a young man (c. 1629) counters more typical Rembrandt images to the extent that it was until recently attributed to his students. Dickey (northern Baroque art, Queen’s U., Kingston, Ontario; art history, Indiana-Purdue U., Indianapolis, 19952006) traces influences on the master and the place of the Cowles selfportrait in his canon.

Kandinsky, Wassily. Trans. by Michael T. H. Sadler. MFA Publications, ©2006 138 p. $24.95 First published in 1912, Kandinsky’s treatise on art lays the theoretical foundation for German Expressionism and for non-objective art in general. This new edition includes not only letters between Kandinsky and his translator, Michael Sadler, but also Kandinsky’s unpublished prose poems from the time of the book’s composition. With these additions, as well as the introduction by Adrian Glew, archivist at the Tate, this text is an important record of the modernist period. ND1101

ND653

2006-001759

978-0-8014-4461-6

Tables of knowledge; Descartes in Vermeer’s studio. Stone, Harriet. Cornell U. Press, ©2006 168 p. $39.95 Stone (Romance languages and literature, comparative literature, Washington U., St. Louis) demonstrates that Dutch genre paintings and still lifes enact in visual form a process of recording information similar to that of Descartes. Investigating such diverse topics as the explosion of data about the natural world resulting from 17th-century advances in optics and the proliferation of material goods in prosperous Dutch homes, she contends that art offered the Dutch a way of bearing witness to ordinary experiences that was satisfying and also surprisingly Cartesian. Her assertions are well argued and supported with 16 color reproductions of Dutch masterworks. ND653

2007-927304

978-0-8478-2993-4

Jansen, Leo et al. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2007 383 p. $50.00 This collection contains 19 of the extant letters from Vincent van Gogh to Émile Bernard. The letters, part of the Thaw Collection at The Morgan Library & Museum in New York and accompanying the exhibition there, were written between 1887 and 1889 (just before the end of Van Gogh’s life) and illustrate Van Gogh’s artistic struggles during this time. Facsimiles, transcriptions, and English translations of the letters are provided, including background and commentary. Along with the letters are approximately 100 paintings, photos, and drawings by both Van Gogh and Bernard and other prominent artists who are mentioned in or related to the letters, such as Rembrandt, Delacroix, Gauguin, and Millet. An introduction provides background on Van Gogh and Bernard’s relationship and the role of the letters, their publication history and provenance. Jansen is the Van Gogh Museum’s curator of painting and with Luijten, editor of the Van Gogh Letters Project. Bakker is a research assistant on the project. 978-1-904449-20-1

Rubens. Lawson, Susan. (Chaucer art) Chaucer Press, ©2006 192 p. $55.00 Lawson approaches Ruben’s masterful secular and religious paintings by exploring his mix of sex, violence and spectacle in relation to the taste of Counter-Reformation Catholic Antwerp. She grapples with both his infamous rendering of flesh and the body and the diversity of his work. By putting into context Ruben’s absolutist politics and Catholic rhetoric, Lawson shows how his painterly style and understanding of color, rhythm, scale and space have transcended his own times and circumstances. Distributed by International Publishers Marketing. ND684

978-3-7774-3485-8

Russlands Seele; Ikonen, Gemälde, Zeichnungen aus der Tretjakow-Galerie Moskau. Title main entry. Hirmer Verlag, ©2007 372 p. $60.00 (pa) Published to accompany an exhibition held at the Tretjakow Gallery in Moscow, Russia in 2007, this oversized catalog (9.5x11″) presents the impressive collection of the gallery’s paintings, icons, drawings, and sculpture in full-page color plates of excellent quality. Twelve essays describe the major movements and styles represented; one is devoted to the collecting of Pawel Tretjakow. Full catalog entries are presented for a selection of 151 works. A bibliography is included; the volume is not indexed. The entire text is in German. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

1-931707-95-2

Sanday, Peggy Reeves. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2007 164 p. $39.95 The walled meteor crater, a mile wide and some 160 feet deep, sits on the northeastern edge of the Great Sandy Desert in Western Australia. Visitors to the crater since her father became its first white discoverer in 1947 were told that the big hole held no significance for Aboriginal people, but Sanday (anthropology, U. of Pennsylvania) conducted her own research. Here she describes the Aboriginal connection to the place they call Kandimalal through Dreaming painting and stories produced by today’s Traditional Owners and Custodians of the crater. ND1316

2006-026372

1-58839-198-1

Glitter and doom; German portraits from the 1920s.

Vincent Van Gogh painted with words; the letters to Émile Bernard.

ND673

2007-002322

Aboriginal paintings of the Wolfe Creek Crater; track of the rainbow serpent.

Rewald, Sabine. Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 292 p. $65.00 Sinister, beautiful and sometimes just creepy, these portraits represent the Verism artistic movement, which occurred in Germany in the 1920s. The Verist artists, such as Max Beckmann, Otto Dix and George Grosz, portrayed the Weimar demimonde of prostitutes, pimps, cocaine addicts and transvestites and also businessmen, lawyers and poets. The artists used precise, hard-edged, smooth-surfaced forms to distill the appearance of each sitter so that he or she represents a type. The catalog accompanies a major exhibition at the Metropolitan Museum in New York and is the first book that focuses exclusively on the subject. Distributed by Yale U. Press. ND1318

2006-021563

978-0-7546-5404-9

Re-membering masculinity in early modern Florence; widowed bodies, mourning, and portraiture. Levy, Allison. (Women and gender in the early modern world) Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 194 p. $99.95 In her innovative and fruitful approach to Renaissance portraiture, Levy (art history, Wheaton College) argues that these paintings were generated within a discourse of male anxiety and pre-mortuary mourning. She contends that portraiture could defer memory loss, or, at least, pictorially console the subject against his own potentially unmourned death. To support her arguments, Levy examines an extensive selection of 15th- and 16th-century male and female portraits, primarily associated with the Medici family, circle and court, in the context of historical writings and contemporary discourses, including literary and cultural theory, psychoanalysis, feminism and gender studies, as well as critical theories of race and disability. ND1319

2006-038241

978-0-8232-2557-6

Manhood, marriage, and mischief; Rembrandt’s ‘Night watch’ and other Dutch group portraits. Berger, Harry. Fordham University Press, ©2007 272 p. $30.00 (pa) In this study of the theory and practice of 17th-century Dutch group portraits, Berger (literature and art history, U. of California, Santa Cruz) defines and discusses the portrait as the record of an event—the event of the artist’s act of representing the sitter’s act of self-representation. Focusing on portrait sitters who are husbands and householders and members of civic and proto-military organizations, the text includes analysis of Rembrandt’s The Night Watch which Berger interprets as both an overtly deliberate parody by the sitters and a covert parody of the sitters by the artist. Illustrated with 36 b&w figures and 16 color reproductions.

–78–

ND1352

2006-278772

0-8020-3894-8

ND1473

2006-004409

978-1-58180-777-6

Aspiring to the landscape; on painting and the subject of nature.

Big art, small canvas; paint easier, better & faster with small oils.

Halkes, Petra. U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 184 p. $55.00 Although the paintings of Canadian artists Wanda Koop, Stephen Hutchings, Eleanor Bond, and Susan Feindel differ markedly in style and iconography, independent painter and art critic Halkes found that they all invite “reflection on the troubled but desirous relationship between nature and the self.” She explores how each of these artists represent nature, how they appropriate from earlier traditions of landscape paintings, and how they deconstruct 19th-century Romantic ideas of “pure nature.” In her view, each of these artists produces landscape paintings that deconstruct landscape paintings.

Washor, Joyce. North Light Books, ©2006 144 p. $24.99 (pa) Washor, an art teacher and painter, describes how to create paintings of still lifes and landscapes on smaller scales. Many color images illustrate techniques relating to the characteristics of color and three-dimensional composition. She also details the tools needed, how to create a palette, and other general tips, as well as concepts relating to perspective, geometric forms, and scaling down. Demonstrations walk readers through several projects and show each stage of the image. There is no bibliography. ND1807

ND1383

2006-033595

978-0-8139-2601-8

Country pursuits; British, American, and French sporting art from the Mellon collections in the Virginia Museum Of Fine Arts. Cormack, Malcolm. U. of Virginia Press, ©2007 474 p. $75.00 This oversize volume (9.25x12.25″) presents full-page color plates of 127 paintings of sporting scenes contained in the Paul Mellon Collection at the Virginia Museum of Fine Arts (VMFA), with a descriptive essay accompanying each one. The paintings, many of them of horses, horse racing, and hunting with horse and hounds, were collected by Paul Mellon and feature a wealth of British, American, and French artists, including George Stubbs, Alvan Fisher, Edward Troye, and Henri Delattre. Cormack, a specialist in sporting scenes and former curator at the VMFA, has contributed, in addition to the catalogue essays, a lengthy article on the history of the genre. A bibliography, list of artists’ biographies, and index are included. ND1432

2006-000217

978-88-7624-613-5

The Virgin, saints, and angels; South American paintings 1600-1825, from the Thoma Collection. Stratton[Pruitt, Suzanne. Skira Editore, ©2006 230 p. $55.00 Published in conjunction with the 2006 exhibition of the same name and organized by the Cantor Arts Center at Stanford U., this catalog of the Thoma Collection at the university features paintings from South America when it was part of the Spanish Empire from 1600 to 1825. Each painting in the catalog is accompanied by a description. The first section of the volume contains essays by art scholars from the US, Japan, Peru, and Canada, who discuss cultural transfer, religious imagination, figurative art and visual culture in the Viceroyalty of Peru, and Andean colonial art. The catalog is the first of its kind in English. It measures 10x11.5″. Distributed by Rizzoli. ND1452

2006-020765

978-0-8248-3001-4

Mirror of morality; Chinese narrative illustration and Confucian ideology. Murray, Julia K. U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 194 p. $55.00 Murray (art history, East Asian studies, and religious studies, U. of Wisconsin) examines narrative illustrations in China that have Confucian themes. She concentrates on the educated elite who were involved in making, sponsoring, inscribing, and using narrative pictures that communicated values associated with Confucian ideology. She links literary and pictorial analyses with historical contexts and considers illustrations from the early imperial period and ending with the Song period, as well as methods and conventions used. Some examination of Buddhist illustration is included. The second half of the book focuses on types of pictures that promoted ideals of conduct for rulers and officials in the Song through Qing periods. Color plates and b&w illustrations are provided. ND1460

2007-002978

978-1-891771-44-6

The last Ruskinians; Charles Eliot Norton, Charles Herbert Moore, and their circle. Stebbins, Theodore E. and Virginia Anderson. Harvard Univ. Art Museums, ©2007 104 p. $17.95 (pa) This lovely catalogue presents three essays: on Charles Eliot Norton, Charles Herbert Moore, and teaching art at Harvard. The drawings and watercolors from the exhibition, which was held at the Fogg Art Museum in 2007, are reproduced in color plates of excellent quality. The volume is oversized: Short biographies of these Ruskin-impassioned American artists are included. There is a bibliography, but no index. ND1839

2006-020457

978-1-55595-272-3

Adam Van Doren. Berman, Avis and Richard J. Boyle. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 143 p. $50.00 Combining his architecture training and his inventive, artistic sensibilities, Adam Van Doren (b.1962) paints buildings plein air, using watercolor in a sophisticated and engaging manner. This book presents 84 full-page plates showcasing his renditions of buildings in New York, where he lives, as well as in Europe, where he has travelled. Essays by Avis Berman and Richard J. Boyle discuss the art of depicting architecture and Van Doren’s creative evolution and mastery. The oversize format (11.5x11.75″) affords full appreciation of the paintings. ND2420

2006-046449

978-1-58180-775-2

Lessons from a lifetime of watercolor painting. Voorhees, Donald. North Light Books, ©2007 144 p. $29.99 New Jersey resident Voorhees has been painting for some 50 years, and has taught watercolor and owned a gallery for 25 years. He offers a howto book for art enthusiasts interested in mastering the challenging medium of watercolor. Coverage includes materials and supplies basics, an overview of watercolor techniques, and step-by- step directions on how to paint specific subject matter—skies, water, flowers, trees and grass, dunes, light, shadow, people, porches, snow, and architecture. Illustrated throughout with full-color photographs and reproductions. Binding is hardcover with enclosed spiral. ND2590

2006-015287

0-8109-5747-7

Graffiti women; street art from five continents. Ganz, Nicholas. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 223 p. $29.95 This volume surveys the work of female graffiti and street artists, with approximately 1,000 color illustrations making up the bulk of the book. Often ignored, these women have had to fight against the idea that graffiti is a male realm. Ganz briefly discusses the trend in all parts of the world, and shows the work of many artists around the globe, with some background on them accompanying photos of tags, characters, and other art. No index is present. Ganz is a street and fine artist based in Germany. He is the author of Graffiti World.

92-1-101098-5

Water, mirror of the world. Silva, Sergio da. United Nations Publications, ©2006 190 p. $29.00 (pa) In 2002, United Nations U. in Tokyo hosted an exhibition of photographs by Sergio da Silva, titled “Water, Mirror of the World.” Rather than emphasizing the harm done by humans to this vital natural resource, the inviting and colorful images focused on the life-giving qualities of water. Proceeds from the sale of this exhibition catalog will be donated to projects assisting in the protection of fresh water.

–79–

Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.

Art Book News Annual 2008

ND2920

ND3171

978-2-503-51718-6

Bohemian and Moravian graduals 1420-1620. Graham, Barry Frederic Hunter. Brepols Publishers, ©2006 641 p. $162.00 This authoritative text presents a full survey of extant graduals (books containing the music for the mass) that were created in Bohemia and Moravia, for Catholic or Hussite mass. Graham (his affiliation is not noted) details the historic and liturgic context of the graduals then describes the patronage of these expensive books; the local literary guilds and nobility; and the scribes, illuminators, composers, and binders who created the books. Iconography of the illuminations is also discussed. The remaining text features detailed descriptions of each gradual (134 in all), noting ID marks, cover, leaves, layout, script, decoration, contents, bibliography, and including a summary and history. Published in an oversized format (8.5x11.25″), the volume concludes with a section of color plates of excellent quality (though the images are reproduced in small format, three or more to a page), and b&w plates of features of the binding. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. ND2920

978-1-905375-17-2

The Cambridge illuminations; the conference papers. Title main entry. Ed. by Stella Panayotova. Harvey Miller Publishers, ©2007 334 p. $174.00 The 26 papers of this handsome, oversized volume (8.5x11.25″) were presented in earlier form at a conference held in 2005 as part of a major exhibition of 215 manuscripts from the collection of Cambridge University Library and exhibited at the Fitzwilliam Museum. The papers, written by manuscript scholars in Europe and the US, describe and analyze specific manuscripts, dating from the 12th through the 15th century, often contextualizing them in a broader stylistic context. The volume, which is well illustrated with color and b&w plates, will be of interest to medievalists. Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Company. ND2920

978-1-905375-22-6

An index of images in English manuscripts; from the time of Chaucer to Henry VIII; US Libraries, New York City. Columbia Union - Union Theological. Title main entry. Ed. by M. Driver and M.T. Orr. Harvey Miller Publishers, ©2007 176 p. $75.00 (pa) A team of scholars describes the illustrations in English-language manuscripts from the period that are housed in seven collections in New York City. An appendix considers continental manuscripts made for the English market. Indexes are by author and text, pictorial subjects, and manuscripts with coats of arms. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company.

978-0-89236-858-7

French illuminated manuscripts in the J. Paul Getty Museum. Kren, Thomas. Getty Publications, ©2007 113 p. $19.95 (pa) Getty Publications presents the second volume in a series for the general reader about the J. Paul Getty Museum’s collection of illuminated manuscripts. Written by the Museum’s curator of manuscripts, the text celebrates the achievement of French manuscript illumination in the Middle Ages, from a Carolingian Bible of the ninth century to a diminutive devotional book of the 18th century. An introductory essay is followed by some 120 full-color, full-page reproductions from the Museum’s collection. ND3339

2006-037780

978-0-89236-888-4

Beasts factual & fantastic. Morrison, Elizabeth. (Medieval imagination) Getty Publications, ©2007 104 p. $19.95 The first of a new series for the popular reader that mines images on different themes from the Getty’s fine collection of medieval manuscripts, this beautifully illustrated volume surveys medieval notions of animals and imaginary beasts, with many examples of different categories and lengthy explanatory captions for each. There is a list of suggested reading, but no index. Morrison is a curator at the J. Paul Getty Museum.

PRINT MEDIA NE57

2006-921635

978-0-8166-4904-4

Herschel V. Jones; the imprint of a great collector. Michaux, Lisa Dickinson. Minneapolis Institute of Arts, ©2006 207 p. $39.95 This catalogue accompanies an exhibition held in 2006 showcasing highlights from the outstanding Herschel V. Jones collection of prints at the Minneapolis Institute of Arts. Two essays document the collection’s formation by William Mead Ladd in Portland, Oregon and its sale (to Portland’s great regret) to Jones in 1916, who donated it to the MIA. The 79 prints are reproduced in full-page plates of excellent quality, with catalogue essays by Michaux, a curator at the MIA. The volume is oversized (9.25x12.25″) and distributed by the U. of Minnesota Press. NE507

2006-923961

1-890751-13-8

Paths to the press; printmaking and American women artists, 1910-1930.

Scattergood, John. Four Courts Press, ©2006 320 p. $65.00 In some of the 16 essays, 11 reprinted, Scattergood, (Medieval and Renaissance English, Trinity College, Dublin) discusses how manuscript books were made, who commissioned them, who made them, who owned them, and how they passed from owner to another. In others he focuses on how the layout and execution of particular manuscripts generate meaning. The excerpts are in their various dusty old languages, and most but not all have English translations. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth G. Seaton. M. Kistler Beach Museum of Art, ©2006 261 p. $40.00 (pa) Featuring the art of female printmakers from America, this volume accompanies an exhibition at Kansas State U.’s Beach Museum of Art, for which the editor is assistant curator. A series of essays in the first section offer a history and analysis of the art as it was employed by American women between 1910 and 1930, touching on topics including the artists’ relationships with men, women’s depiction of women, and printmaking as a teaching tool. The remaining two thirds of the book comprise alphabetically arranged profiles of approximately 80 artists; each artist’s twopage biography is accompanied by one or two examples of her work. Additionally, a list of the names of 400 women printmakers and their dates of birth and death is also provided. This book is published by the Marianna Kistler Beach Museum of Art, Kansas State U. Distribution is by U. of Washington Press.

ND2920

NE539

ND2920

978-1-85182-930-9

Manuscripts and ghosts; essays on the transmission of medieval and early Renaissance literature.

1-872501-47-8

Tributes to Jonathan J.G. Alexander; the making and meaning of illuminated medieval & Renaissance manuscripts, art & architecture. Title main entry. Ed. by Susan L’Engle and Gerald B. Guest. Harvey Miller Publishers, ©2006 532 p. $270.00 In this volume honoring the well-known scholar of illuminated manuscripts, 38 senior scholars have contributed essays of their research, with b&w plates of the highest quality included for their illustration. There are essays on marginalia, the interaction of text and image, cultural context, and workshop methods. Seven essays are included on artists and scribes (one is in Italian), with contributions by Lilian Armstrong (Wellesley College, Massachusetts), Benjamin David (Lewis and Clark College, Portland, Oregon), and Lawrence Nees (U. of Delaware). Indexes are included of manuscripts, printed books, artists, scribes and painters, owners, and patrons. A complete bibliography of Alexander (Institute of Fine Arts, New York U.) is also provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-028414

978-0-295-98672-2

The prints of Roger Shimomura; a catalogue raisonné, 1968-2005. Stamey, Emily. (Jacob Lawrence series on American artists) Spencer Museum of Art, ©2007 152 p. $28.95 (pa) Shimomura’s prints are reproduced in full-page color plates of excellent quality in this oversized, horizontal format catalogue (10.5x9.5″). The themes of his art, sources of influence, and career are discussed in an essay by Stamey, and an artist’s statement is included, making this a valuable publication on a provocative American artist. Not indexed. Published by University of Washington Press and Spencer Museum of Art.

–80–

NE539

2006-050926

978-0-8166-4972-3

Vermillion Editions Limited; a history and catalogue, 1977-1992.

2006-024308

978-0-8173-1560-3

Imprinting the South; southern printmakers and their images of the region, 1920s-1940s.

90-74822-88-6

Chikanobu; modernity and nostalgia in Japanese prints. Coats, Bruce A. BRILL, ©2006 208 p. $89.00 Coats (art history and humanities, Scripps College) presents the first monograph in English on the Meiji print artist Yoshu Chikanobu (18381912), well known for his depictions of women and scenes of Japanese history and legends. Coats places Chikanobu’s life and works in the historic and artistic context of Meiji Japan, when rapid modernization and westernization created an interest for old Japan among the Japanese and when arts underwent significant changes. Hockley (art history, Dartmouth), Kurita (Asian languages and literatures, Pomona) and Mostow (Asian studies, U. of British Columbia) contribute essays on Chikanobu’s work as it relates to Meiji literature, the heroic ethos in the late Meiji period, and other topics relevant to the period. The text contains over 270 full color illustrations; two of Chikanobu’s series of prints are illustrated in their entirety. NE1321

978-90-74822-82-4

The Hundred Poets compared; a print series by Kuniyoshi, Hiroshige, and Kunisada. Herwig, Henk J. & Joshua S. Mostow. Hotei Publishing, ©2007 255 p. $125.00 In this attractive, oversized (10x12″) volume, full-page color plates of superb quality present all 100 scenes in Japanese prints by the artists, with a description of the story found in the scene on the facing page. Translations of the inscriptions, signature, and seals on each print are included in each entry. The authors relate the story depicted, indicating variations from other prints or poems, and aspects of the figure’s dress, pose, and enactment of the scene. A lengthy introduction describes the series and its production in print. Both authors are print collectors; Mostow teaches Asian studies at the U. of British Columbia, Canada; Herwig is editor of Andon, the Bulletin of the Society for Japanese Art. Distributed in North America by Brill. NE1321

978-0-7649-4039-2

Till, Barry. Pomegranate Communications, ©2007 112 p. $24.95 In the early 20th century, Japan’s Watanabe Shozaburo determined to revive his country’s interest in the ukiyo-e art form, commissioning modern versions of the centuries-old wooden block prints and initiating the shin hanga or “new prints” movement. Through essays and approximately 100 color reprints, Till chronicles the local and international popularity of shin hanga prints and features important artists including Yoshida Hiroshi, Ito Shinsui, and Ohara Shoson. All prints are drawn from the collection at the Art Gallery of Greater Victoria, British Columbia, for which Till is curator of Asian art. NE2049

Williams, Lynn Barstis. U. of Alabama Press, ©2007 211 p. $39.95 Surprisingly inexpensive for the quality, this handsome, oversized (9.25x12.25″) volume presents a much-needed survey of printmaking in the South, with knowledgeable essays accompanying the 60 prints selected. Many of the artists are African-American. A glossary of terms, list of artist’s biographies, and lengthy historical introduction by Williams (art and special collections librarian, Auburn U.) round out the catalog, making this a valuable addition to the history of American art. NE1321

2006-029310

Shin hanga; the new print movement of Japan.

Jon, Dennis Michael. Minneapolis Institute of Arts, ©2006 348 p. $54.95 A catalogue and accompanying exhibition celebrate the 15-year history of the print workshop in Minneapolis, founded by printer Steven M. Anderson. Essays cover a history of Vermillion Editions, and the origins of the modern collaborative press. Following the catalogue itself are biographies of the artists. No index is provided. Distributed by the University of Minnesota Press. NE962

NE1323

978-90-74822-84-8

Japanese warrior prints 1646-1905. King, James and Yuriko Iwakiri. Hotei Publishing, ©2007 408 p. $139.00 The history of this inventive genre is traced in a well-conceived and thorough catalog of 219 examples, arranged chronologically into six sections, and selected according to broad themes. The prints appear in fullpage color plates of superb quality in an oversize format (10x12″). The entry accompanying each plate describes the scene, giving the story it depicts, details about the print’s creator, and, frequently, the connections with theatre of the scene’s depiction or costumes. Many of the prints include poems, which are given in the entries in English and the Japanese original. An introduction describes the history of the genre. This volume is a model of excellent book design and production. Hotei is an imprint of Brill.

–81–

2001-037140

978-0-8204-5046-9

Making time; Picasso’s Suite 347 . Holloway, Memory. (American University studies. Series XX: Fine arts; v.35) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 268 p. $73.95 Between March and October of 1968, a year in which he uncharacteristically did very little drawing and almost no painting, Picasso produced 347 etchings in varying sizes and techniques. Halloway (20th-century art history, U. of Massachusetts-Dartmouth) says that his concentration on these etchings to the exclusion of other media makes them a particularly condensed site for the construction of meaning. She explores how and under what conditions he constructed that meaning.

DECORATIVE & APPLIED ARTS (FURNITURE, TEXTILES, CERAMICS) NK28

2006-009866

978-0-19-518948-3

The Grove encyclopedia of decorative arts; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by Gordon Campbell. Oxford U. Press, ©2006 1201 p. $250.00 Campbell (Renaissance studies, U. of Leicester) presents a two-volume reference work for general readers, collectors, curators, and scholars featuring some 3,000 articles covering all aspects of decorative arts from cultures around the world. The text combines some 2,000 articles culled from the 34-volume Grove Dictionary of Art (1996, ed. Jane Turner) with 1,000-plus new entries to cover designers, manufacturers, craftsmen and their works; materials and techniques; and periods in the history of the decorative arts. The entries include extensive cross-referencing in an easyto-use format and fully updated bibliographies. Illustrated with 600-plus photographs of furniture, ceramics, jewelry, interior decoration, and modern design, including 32 color plates. NK535

2006-016228

978-1-55595-268-6

The George Washington collection; fine and decorative arts at Mount Vernon. Cadou, Carol Borchert. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 303 p. $60.00 Printed in an oversize format (9.5x12.25″) and containing full-page color plates of 100 works and paintings, in addition to other photos of the museum and comparative works, this catalogue does justice to the historic collection in Mount Vernon. Clothing, furniture, glassware, ceramics, and metalwork are among the works included, each with a full catalogue entry. The seven chapters each begin with an essay, which describe the context and history of the material. Topics include George Washington as a planter, as a general, in retirement, and his and Martha’s personal style. Cadou is curator at the Mount Vernon Estate & Gardens. NK835

2005-026152

0-271-02690-1

Transforming images; New Mexican santos in-between worlds. Title main entry. Ed. by Claire Farago and Donna Pierce. Penn State U. Press, ©2006 355 p. $75.00 Dealing with Catholic instruments of religious devotion produced in New Mexico from about 1760 to the radical transformation of local artistic tradition in the 20th century, scholars of art history, music, literature, genetics, and other disparate fields argue that local artistic practice is indebted to many cultural traditions, and question why the tradition in New Mexico has been understood exclusively in terms of its Spanish roots. They also contend that the art traditions there have significance in art history and theory generally.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NK942

978-1-905119-14-1

NK1175

2006-932310

978-0-87846-698-6

William Morris’s Kelmscott; landscape and history.

American decorative arts and sculpture.

Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Crossley et al. Windgather Press, ©2007 210 p. $49.95 (pa) The Thames-side village of Kelmscott has been transformed by its association with William Morris, a 19th-century novelist, conservationist, utopian socialist, and father of the Arts and Crafts tradition. This portrait of the village originates in the Kelmscott Landscape Project, established in 1996 by the Society of Antiquaries, the present owners of Kelmscott Manor. The book examines Kelmscott’s archaeology, from prehistory to the present, and looks at the architectural development of Kelmscott Manor before and after Morris knew it, as well as other historic buildings in the village. It is illustrated with color and b&w historical and contemporary photos, drawings, and paintings on every page. Crossley is a historian. The book is distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Ward, Gerald W. et al. (MFA highlights) MFA Publications, ©2006 224 p. $19.95 (pa) Part of series individually highlighting the major collections of the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, this volume presents some 100 photographic reproductions of the museum’s prized collection of American decorative arts, including furniture, silver, glass, ceramics, base metals, coins and medals, basketry, and sculpture. Each piece is accompanied by textual description and seven included essays explore such topics as the history of the arts of New England, folk traditions and vernacular expressions, and individual crafts movements from the 17th century to the 20th century. NK1175

2006-299713

0-7566-2349-9

Decorative arts.

Korom, Frank J. Photographs by Paul J. Smutko. Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2006 119 p. $29.95 (pa) Korom (religion and anthropology, Boston U.) and photographer Smutko discuss the itinerant scroll painters of West Bengal who use the scrolls to illustrate the songs and stories they perform. They also describe the types, techniques, and style of the scrolls, and offer a gallery of photographs. Issued in conjunction with an exhibition held at the Museum of International Folk Art in Santa Fe, New Mexico from October 2006 to April 2007. There is no index.

Miller, Judith. DK Publishing, Inc., ©2006 440 p. $50.00 Miller, who has published numerous books on antiques and decorative arts, surveys the worldwide history of decorative pieces chronologically, from ancient beginnings in the Alhambra and other sites, through neoclassicism, the arts and crafts and art nouveau movements, modernism, and postmodern and contemporary design. For each era, trends in furniture, ceramics, glass, metalware, clocks, and textiles are discussed; along with major designers, workshops, and movements of that particular time. Abundant color images on every page feature remarkably preserved illustrations of the diverse history of interior decoration. Oversize: 10.25x12″.

NK1125

NK1447

NK1048

2006-009095

978-0-89013-489-4

Village of painters; narrative scrolls from West Bengal.

978-0-89689-332-0

2005-936755

0-8478-2804-2

Antique Trader antiques and collectibles price guide 2007, 23d ed.

Owen Jones; design, ornament, architecture, and theory in an age in transition.

Title main entry. Ed. by Kyle Husfloen. Krause Publications, ©2006 1007 p. $19.99 (pa) This longstanding reference, begun humbly in the 1970s, now features 11,000 items, illustrated with 5,000 color photos. Issued annually, with all new entries, this guide offers brief descriptions and price information on items in the major categories of collecting—ceramics, glass, furniture— as well as several dozen specialty categories—e.g. firearms, kitchenware, paperweights, signs, and soda fountain and ice cream collectibles, among others. New to this edition: eyewear, Foxy Grandpa collectibles, lipstick tubes, snowmen, Syrocowood, and Harris Strong ceramic designs. Editor Husfloen is a well-seasoned antiques expert and a long-time editor with Antique Trader publications.

Flores, Carol A. Hrvol. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 275 p. $75.00 In addition to being exceptionally lovely, this volume contains a useful and substantial text on Jones’s career, theory, and contribution to the fields of architecture and architectural and decorative ornament. Flores (architecture and planning, Ball State U.), a specialist on Jones, describes Jones’s buildings, designs, and publications as part of a coherent and full account of his career. The text is heavily illustrated with color and b&w plates, including many full-page plates, all of superb quality. The volume is oversized: 10.25x12.25″.

NK1141

2007-007302

978-0-88192-849-5

Kreisman, Lawrence and Glenn Mason. Timber Press, ©2007 398 p. $39.95 Crater Lake Lodge and Paradise Inn are pictured as representative of the Arts and Crafts movement in the Pacific Northwest (though the absence of Timberline Lodge is curious). In what is presented as the first comprehensive exploration of the design movement’s legacy in this region, Kreisman (architectural historian/preservation advocate) and Mason (museum and historical society consultant) trace its roots and impact in Oregon and Washington in the early 20th century. With the complement of ample period images, they discuss the influence of its hand craftsmanship “simple life” ethic on architecture, interior design, arts, crafts, and recent home building and restoration trends. The bibliography includes exhibition and product catalogs, trade journals, and manuscript collections as well as books and articles. 2006-100743

978-1-58115-472-6

The graphic designer’s guide to better business writing. Janoff, Barbara. Allworth Press, ©2007 287 p. $34.95 Two business communications instructors present this reference for commercial graphic designers discussing the business writing techniques most necessary to establishing and advancing a career in the field. The authors offer tips on writing: résumés, professional letters and reports, material for conducting client research, design briefs, client agreements, human relations copy, and brochures, among other tasks. The book teaches techniques according to when they might arise in different stages of the reader’s career, from setting up shop to building clientele and maintaining quality service. Numerous examples support the text.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-283825

978-0-7148-4547-0

Max Huber.

The arts and crafts movement in the Pacific Northwest.

NK1173

NK1464

Von Moos, Stanislaus et al. Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2006 232 p. $75.00 To assist their research, Max Huber’s widow granted this book’s authors unrestricted access to the largest archive of the Swiss graphic designer’s work. The result is an attractive career biography supported by 12 thematic portfolios that containing many never before published artworks and photographs. Three sections cover Huber’s formative years in Switzerland; his experience and legacy in the city of Milan and maturation into a sought-after commercial designer; and finally his activity in interior and exhibition design, in particular his collaboration with the Castiglioni brothers. Portfolio themes include architecture and design, politics, sport, music, publishing, textile industry, and stationery. Oversize: 10x11.75″. NK1484

2006-017437

0-8048-3749-X

Elements of Japanese design; key terms for understanding & using Japan’s classic wabi-sabi-shibui concepts. De Mente, Boyé. Tuttle Publishing, ©2006 142 p. $12.95 (pa) With an economy of approach that seems compatible with the contents, this book offers succinct discussion of 65 elements of Japanese design, each described in one or two pages. De Mente has studied Japan for about a half century and has worked there in many capacities. His accessible presentation of concepts offers a rich source of insight and, possibly, inspiration for designers and artists of all kinds, engineers and architects, travelers, entrepreneurs, and students of Japanese culture.

–82–

NK1990

2006-019879

0-7643-2499-3

Inspired high-end interior design. Reilly, Shane. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2006 192 p. $44.95 The approximately 300 images in this book display the work of 83 American designers of high end interiors. The designs are grouped loosely by the theme that inspired their creators, be it art and collected objects, personality, concept, furniture and fabric, color, or the architecture of the space itself. Brief text describes each designer’s vision; and emphasizes the qualities of truly high end design, including craftsmanship, personal taste, and a sizeable budget. Oversize: 11.25x8.75″. NK2002

2005-939060

0-9764713-6-1

Leading residential interior designers. Title main entry. Sandow Media Corp., ©2006 340 p. $39.95 Showcasing residential interiors by American designers, this oversized (11.25x11.25″) volume provides a brief essay on each designer or company accompanied by color photos of their work. Twenty-three designers or firms are featured (contact information is provided), including SAS Interiors (Dallas, Texas) and Harker Design in Wyoming. NK2002

2006-011175

978-1-56158-816-9

Shades of country; designing a life of comfort. Irvine, Chippy. Taunton Press, ©2006 234 p. $40.00 Irvine (art and fashion design, Leicester College of Art and London’s Royal College of Art) introduces readers to six country-inspired styles, detailing both interior and exterior features through text and color photographs. Approximately 14 homes are featured, each displaying the characteristics of one of the following categories: hallmarks of the country home, the farmhouse, grand country, cozy cottage, rusticators, clean and simple (Shaker and Swedish homes) and urban arcadia. This volume may be of interest to both professional and hobby designers. No index is provided. Oversize: 9.25x11″. NK2023

2005-033217

0-8109-5841-4

French island elegance. Connors, Michael. Photographs by Bruce Buck. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 175 p. $40.00 Offering an unusual combination of European stateliness and tropical vibrancy, the homes in this volume reveal the opulent world of the French Creole aristocracy of the colonial period. Connors, a scholar of the art and life of the West Indies, relates the social, cultural, architectural and interior design history of the French Islands to the accompaniment of sumptuous photographs by Buck, a renown photographer of interiors, architecture and the decorative arts. NK2049

2006-016969

978-0-8109-5496-0

The new eighteenth-century style; rediscovering a French décor. Lalande, Michéle. Photographs by Gilles Trillard. Trans. by Laurel Hirsch. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 269 p. $35.00 Brief descriptions accompany the many superb photographs of these interiors, located in various parts of France. The photos detail the sculpture, furniture, draperies, paintings, and bibelots that fill and define the decor. The volume is oversize: 10x11.25″. NK2113

2006-045220

978-0-7649-3764-4

The house beautiful. Gannett, William C. Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 — p. $25.00 As elegant as a Frank Lloyd Wright house but more ornate, this tribute to the Arts and Crafts aesthetic features page designs by Wright and text by Unitarian minister William Gannett, who muses on the requirements for a “house beautiful.” Originally published in 1898 in a limited edition of 90 copies, the book has been reproduced exactly, with the addition of an introduction by Kruty, an expert on Wright and the Prairie School from the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.

–83–

NK2115

2006-930957

978-0-8478-2847-0

For the love of old; living with chipped, frayed, tarnished, faded, tattered, worn, and weathered things that bring comfort, character, and joy to the places we call home. Carter, Mary Randolph. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 208 p. $50.00 Though not everyone’s chipped Limoges cup of tea, the design ideas presented in this pictorial ode to faded opulence are inspired by the notion that decay has its own beauty. The photos feature rooms stuffed with a plethora of tattered books, figurines with chipped paint, vases with chipped ceramic, dilapidated furniture, old photographs, and some real ratty boots, clothes and hats, all hung or arranged with a decorative eye. Carter is a senior vice president at Polo Ralph Lauren in New York City. NK2115

2006-048257

978-1-58816-500-8

House beautiful color workshop; decorating stylish rooms. Childs-Carlile, Sarah. Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2006 160 p. $24.95 Featuring high quality color photography throughout, this guide for homeowners explains how to use color to personalize their space and create an inviting atmosphere. Introductory chapters cover the basics of how colors work both singly and in combination. The main part of the volume is organized into sections offering specific tips for each of six main color palettes. The final section contains some more general color solutions that can make rooms appear smaller or larger, divide or unify spaces, and help with other architectural considerations. NK2115

2007-013721

978-0-471-60640-6

Interior textiles; fabrics, applications, & historical style. Nielson, Karla J. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 470 p. $80.00 Nielson (design, Brigham Young U.) acquaints students and professional interior designers with the use of textiles in residential and contract spaces. Following an overview of the textiles industry, fabrics and fibers are discussed, as well as applications for furniture, wallcoverings, and other uses. The final section covers period styles, from formal traditional to regional, thematic, and modern, and how they influence design today. Sustainability is addressed in one chapter. Many illustrations and some color photos are incorporated. NK2115

2006-045049

978-1-4027-4212-5

Living with books. Powers, Alan. Sterling Publishing Co., ©2006 144 p. $19.95 (pa) If you are merely reading your books, you are missing half the fun of having them, according to this guide to incorporating books into your interior design. Powers goes from room to room to demonstrate the many ways that books can create character in the home. This beautifully illustrated text shows vast, two-story libraries as well as tiny collections tucked into stairways and unused fireplaces. Powers includes advice on caring for books and instructions for building shelves. NK2117

2006-048251

978-1-58816-589-3

House beautiful storage workshop. Evelegh, Tessa. Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2006 158 p. $24.95 Illustrated throughout with color photographs, this practical guide helps readers to maximize the storage potential of any home. The first part of the volume covers general issues, such as principles of organization and types of storage (built-in vs. free-standing, for example). The remaining chapters describe traditional and contemporary storage solutions for each area of the home: living room, kitchen, dining room, bedroom, bathroom, hallways, and work/play spaces. NK2117

2006-017694

978-1-56158-802-2

Making room; finding space in unexpected places. Jordan, Wendy A. Taunton Press, ©2007 170 p. $19.95 (pa) You will never need to throw anything away once you master these tricks for turning every nook and cranny in your house into storage space. Jordan finds extra spaces under stairs, over doors, in walls and inside existing closets and provides instructions and diagrams for making use of them. Each of the 100 suggestions includes advice for customizing the patterns to fit your specific needs.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NK2117

2006-907915

978-0-7893-1529-8

NK2395

2006-928680

1-85177-494-7

The new apartment; smart living in small spaces.

The furniture machine; furniture since 1990.

Borrás, Montse. Universe, ©2007 423 p. $35.95 (pa) Aimed at interior designers and apartment dwellers seeking inspiration, this volume surveys current trends in the design of small living spaces. Profiles of 51 apartments and lofts in cities around the world illustrate a wide variety of techniques for maximizing the usability of every square inch while creating an inviting environment. Floor plans and color photographs of each dwelling are accompanied by brief descriptions of the design solutions employed. The author’s affiliation is not cited. Universe Publishing is an imprint of Rizzoli.

Williams, Gareth. V & A Publications, ©2006 174 p. $60.00 Non-handmade furniture by European designers is profiled in this fun catalogue full of color images of chairs, tables, couches, and other pieces, many of them made of plastic. The ideas and philosophies of 12 designers, including Philippe Starck, Ilse Crawford, and Gaetano Pesce are described, with discussion of the genesis, materials, and manufacture of specific pieces. The volume is oversized: 10x11.5″. Distributed by Harry N. Abrams. NK2395

NK2117

2006-024699

978-1-56158-862-6

The new bungalow kitchen. LaBau, Peter. Photography by Marco Prozzo. Taunton Press, ©2007 216 p. $30.00 Strongly influenced by the Arts and Craft movement of the late 19th century, bungalow-style homes are back in vogue. LaBau, founder of a Lexington, Massachusetts-based firm that specializes in building and renovating traditional homes, shares his enthusiasm for the bungalow aesthetic and tips on “living design” that blends this historic style with efficiency. Remodeling issues addressed include creating informal eating nooks that the original kitchens lacked, accommodating modern appliances, expanding storage space, and updating lighting and other features. The 10x10.5″ guide includes before-and-after photographs and floor plans, and resources. NK2130

2006-926593

978-0-8478-2826-5

Moore, Derry. Ed. by Joseph Holtzman. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 262 p. $60.00 Each of Moore’s photographs fills up an entire 10 inch square page with rich depictions of 24 rooms—elaborately and distinctly decorated—from around the world. The photos, taken between 1975 and 2005, display two homes (one a palace) in Hyderabad, India, as well as the dwellings of Rudolf Nureyev, Pauline de Rothschild, Lady Diana Cooper, and designer Elsie De Wolfe. The interiors are as varied as their inhabitants, from one Austro-Hungarian estate filled with mounted game, to the modern Madison Avenue apartment of contributing writer Carl Skoggard. Oversize: 10x10″. 2006-102171

978-0-471-72349-3

Designing commercial interiors, 2d ed. Piotrowski, Christine M. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 448 p. $85.00 This guide for students and practitioners covers design issues involved when planning the interiors of various commercial facilities. In addition to office spaces, coverage includes (for example) lodging, retail, healthcare, senior living, and recreational facilities. The second edition features new material on sustainable design, security, and accessibility. B&w photographs and diagrams accompany the text throughout. Consultant Piotrowski taught interior design at Northern Arizona U. NK2195

2006-279920

0-470-01809-7

Pub scene. Peyton, Jane. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 215 p. $70.00 London-based writer and journalist Peyton includes in her net any establishment maintained for the communal consumption of alcoholic beverage, but rarely needed to leave England to find all she needed. She profiles and provides lavish color photographs of individual pubs within the categories of classic, converted and new-built, beer gardens, brewpubs, and pubs with quality foods. With rare exception, no one seems to patronize any of them. NK2260

2007-013717

978-0-471-72796-5

Furniture design. Postell, Jim. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 366 p. $65.00 This work by Postell (College of Design, Architecture, Art, and Planning at the U. of Cincinnati) is intended as a comprehensive survey of the key issues involved in the design and manufacturing of furniture. Chapters explore furniture function and social use, physical and spatial characteristics of furniture design, case studies of significant designs, furniture design theory and principles, materials, fabrication, and professional practice and marketing. Also included is a historical overview of furniture design and manufacture around the world.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2-08-030527-1

Loyauté, Benjamin. Flammarion, ©2006 214 p. $75.00 In this book aimed at designers and home fashion lovers, the furniture designs of Pierre Cardin are described and shown in color and b&w photographs. The story of Cardin’s entrance into this specialty is told, as well as descriptions of his studio and collaborators. Full-page photos of many pieces follow the essays; most of the designs shown are from the 1970s. Included are interviews with Cardin and Mark Newson and photos of his clothing fashions from the 1970s and his villa in France. Loyauté is a critic who specializes in twentieth-century decorative arts. The book measures 10.5x11.5″. Distributed by Rizzoli. NK2406

2006-281476

1-57432-489-6

Early American furniture; a guide to who, when, and where.

Rooms; photographs by Derry Moore, 2d ed.

NK2195

2006-297126

Pierre Cardin evolution; furniture and design.

Obbard, John W. Collector Books, ©2006 464 p. $19.95 (pa) Several US colonies can lay claim to producing Chippendale furniture, and the same can be said for a variety of other styles also sure to confuse novice collectors. Obbard works from the originals and from a variety of primary sources, including period catalogs, to place pieces of all sizes and shapes squarely within their proper geography. He begins with the all-important evidence offered by varieties of wood and their treatment, then moves through the colonies of New England, the Middle Atlantic and the South to find major themes and trends. He then describes various pieces ranging from a range of chairs to sofas, chests, desks, serving and dining tables, cupboards, wardrobes, tea and card tables, stands for candles and work tables, daybeds, bedsteads, and furniture peculiar to certain regions. The illustrations are well-rendered and detailed and the references are comprehensive and accessible. NK2528

2006-927996

0-8478-2863-8

Classic English design and antiques; period styles and furniture; the Hyde Park Antiques collection. Eerdmans, Emily. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 304 p. $60.00 Published in celebration of the 40th anniversary of the store (Hyde Park Antiques, in New York City), this oversized volume (9.25x12.25″) presents a knowledgeable history of English furniture and interiors by Eerdmans, with discussion and examples of the styles of William and Mary, Queen Anne, Palladian, Rococo, Neoclassical, and Regency. The text is richly accompanied by drawings and photos of individual pieces and interiors. NK2715

2005-033218

0-8109-5484-2

Chairs; a history. Dampierre, Florence de. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 430 p. $65.00 A beautifully and generously illustrated homage to chairs, this history shows chairs in all their guises, humble, grand, practical and wacky, and in many stages of development. Dampierre, an antiques dealer and furniture historian, begins with the emergence of chairs in pre-dynastic Egypt and progresses to the forms, uses and social meanings of various types of seating in Classical Greece and the Roman Empire through the present day. Along the way, she makes fascinating observations about historical personalities, furniture- making technology, social life and fashions of dress and deportment.

–84–

NK3600

978-1-55407-179-1

NK3870

1-84217-083-X

The complete guide to calligraphy; master scripts of the West and East, step-by-step with 45 projects.

A corpus of Anglo-Saxon and medieval pottery from Lincoln.

Title main entry. Ed. by Ralph Cleminson. Firefly Books Ltd., ©2006 224 p. $35.00 (pa) This spiral-bound volume meant for calligraphers demonstrates Latin, non-Latin (Ancient Greek, Russian Cyrillic, Hebrew, and Arabic), and pictographic (Japanese and Chinese) scripts, together with the history and culture behind them. Cleminson (Slavonic studies, U. of Portsmouth, UK, and Central European U., Budapest) and other calligraphers and artists also describe how to use authentic writing materials and apply them to craft projects, such as greeting cards, invitations, plaques, poems, and lampshades, with many color photos and illustrations as a guide. They outline the different types of materials and beginning skills and techniques, with step-by-step illustrations of how to draw letters and numbers in each script.

Young, Jane and Alan Vince. (Lincoln archaeological studies; no.7) Oxbow Books, ©2005 292+ p. $63.00 Young and Vince continue the projected 10-volume series making the analysis of archaeological excavations in the city of Lincoln from 1970 to 1987 available to a wider readership than those with access to the reports of individual excavation projects. They explain the methodology and dating, then describe pottery in chronological chapters from early AngloSaxon (450-650) to post-medieval/early modern (1600-1770). Line drawings accompany the descriptions. A formal catalogue and technical appendices are included, along with color photographs of selected pieces. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

NK3633

2006-049114

978-0-8348-0575-0

Enso; Zen circles of enlightenment. Seo, Audrey Yoshiko. Weatherhill, Inc., ©2007 170 p. $18.95 Among other things, the ensô, a circular figure prominent in Zen calligraphy, is said to symbolize enlightenment, power, and the universe itself. Seo (Japanese art and culture, College of William and Mary, Virginia) presents a study of the history and the varied interpretations both of the meaning and the image of the ensô, collecting approximately 60 depictions from the 17th century to the present. Each of the images is accompanied by a brief discussion of the context and content of the calligraphy. The concluding pages comprise biographies of the artists. The book measures 7x8″. Weatherhill is an imprint of Shambhala Publications. NK3633

2006-284772

0-954901-48-7

Ink and gold; Islamic calligraphy. Fraser, Marcus and Will Kwiatkowski. Paul Holberton Publishing, ©2006 144 p. $40.00 (pa) This volume, which accompanies an exhibition at the Museum für Islamische Kunst in Berlin, catalogs and describes 42 pieces of Islamic calligraphy and illumination from Morocco to Central Asia, from the seventh to nineteenth century, and encompassing Hijazi, Kufic, Eastern Kufic, Maghribi, and cursive scripts. Pieces include Qur’an leaves, royal decrees, calligraphic albums, and Persian poetry. No index is provided. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. NK3637

2006-042062

978-0-8348-0571-2

77 dances; Japanese calligraphy by poets, monks, and scholars, 1568-1868. Addiss, Stephen. Weatherhill, Inc., ©2006 259 p. $65.00 Addiss (art, U. of Richmond, Virginia), who is also a calligrapher, has written essays to accompany each of the 77 works of calligraphy of this catalogue displayed in a traveling exhibition originating at the U. of Richmond Museums. Also a calligrapher, Addiss’s essays are adept and illuminating in their analysis of the unique characteristics of each artist’s achievement in this learned and poetic art. The works are grouped into the categories of Waka, Karayo, literati, Confucian, Haiku, and Zen, with each work presented as a full-page color plate, in an oversized format (8.75x12″). A glossary and introduction to East Asian calligraphy are included. NK3840

978-0-86159-162-6

Naukratis; Greek diversity in Egypt, studies on East Greek pottery and exchange in the Eastern Mediterranean. Title main entry. Ed. by Alexandra Villing and Udo Schlotzhauer. (BMP Research Paper 162) The British Museum Press, ©2006 235 p. $70.00 (pa) The 23 papers emerged from a workshop held at the Museum in December 2004 in conjunction with the Naukratis Project based at the Gutenberg-Universiät Mainz. They look at remains of archaic pottery made on the east coast of the Adriatic Sea that have been found in the Greek trading port of Naukratis in the Egyptian Nile Delta, and consider their use, production centers, and distribution. They focus in turn on the port; the pottery; and contact, exchange, and identity. No index is provided. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co

–85–

NK4147

2007-357110

978-88-7624-750-7

Persian ceramics; from the 9th to the 14th Century. Title main entry. Ed. by Giovanni Curatola. Skira Editore, ©2006 183 p. $49.95 About 140 examples of Medieval Persian ceramics are displayed here on full page color plates, some published for the first time. The accompanying essays assess the works from a technical, stylistic, and aesthetic standpoint, placing them in societal context and demonstrating their advancement with regards to technical innovation and refinement of iconography from the 9th to the 14th century. This book is distributed by Rizzoli. Oversize: 9.75x11.5″. NK4179

978-1-920731-19-9

Pippin Drysdale; lines of site. Snell, Ted. Fremantle Arts Centre Press, ©2007 174 p. $44.95 (pa) Snell (contemporary art, Curtin U. of Technology, Western Australia) presents the life, work, and techniques of Australia ceramic artist Pippin Drysdale. He details the development of her career and her life from 1943 to the present, and works she has produced, along with photographs of many of the pieces and some of landscapes she has drawn from to create certain works. No index is provided. Distributed in the US by ISBS. NK4210

978-0-87846-716-7

Art & reform; Sara Galner, the Saturday Evening Girls, and the Paul Revere pottery. Gadsden, Nonie. MFA Publications, ©2006 103 p. $24.95 (pa) In 1899, local reformers organized a club known as the Saturday Evening Girls (SEG) to provide cultural activities for young Italian and Jewish immigrants of Boston’s North End. This narrative describes how the group began creating the original “Paul Revere” pottery that was ultimately sold in department stores in cities throughout the Eastern U.S. Some 50 color photographs of these highly collectible ceramics accompany the text. Gadsden is a curator for the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston. NK4623

978-0-85668-747-1

Trademarks on Greek vases; addenda. Johnston, Alan W. Aris & Philips, ©2006 253 p. $120.00 Much has happened in the study of Greek pottery and trade since his Trademarks on Greek Vases (1982), according to Johnston (classical archeology, U. College, London). Acknowledging that keeping track of the “many wanderings of these pots on the market” is not an easy task, in this edition updated to 2004 (for the basic text), he incorporates reviewers’ corrections and feedback, e.g., a complete new databaseassisted catalog plus supplementary text and an alphabetical index of types to facilitate consultation. He also addresses the issue of vase prices. The volume includes a section of illustrations and indexes of marks, museums, general subjects, and subjects in Greek. Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Company.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NK4645

2006-033834

978-0-89236-807-5

NK5198

Pots & plays; interactions between tragedy and Greek vase-painting of the fourth century B.C. Taplin, Oliver. Getty Publications, ©2007 309 p. $75.00 In this compelling and beautifully illustrated volume (it’s oversized, at 8.5x10.5″), Taplin (classics, Magdalen College, Oxford), a specialist in Greek theatre, argues that staged presentations of specific tragedies were depicted on Greek vases used for funerals and in burials. His analysis is based on a selection of 109 vases, each discussed in a catalog format arranged by playwright. A glossary and bibliography are provided. The volume will be of interest to both specialists and non-specialists and is sure to generate new thinking about these objects. NK4645

2006-009172

Reading Greek vases.

2006-049191

978-90-04-14445-3

Dionysos in archaic Greece; an understanding through images. Isler-Kerenyi, Cornelia. Trans. by Wilfred G. E. Watson. (Religions in the Graeco-Roman world; v.160) BRILL, ©2007 291+ p. $169.00 Dionysos is by far the most common subject of Greek vase painting during the sixth and fifth centuries BC, but his image remains controversial and obscure. Classical archaeologist Isler-Kerenyi suggests that European scholars are uncomfortable accepting classical culture as a system based on values different from their own, and privilege literary evidence and dismiss any graphic evidence that conflicts with it. She finds that the pictures tell a different story of the important deity. No publication data is provided for the original Dionysos nella Grecia arcaica. NK4653

978-0-7141-2260-1

The Warren cup. Williams, Dyfri. (British Museum objects in focus) The British Museum Press, ©2006 64 p. $10.00 (pa) When The Warren Cup, a fine Roman art work of the first century, was acquired by the British Museum in 1999, great controversy arose partly because of the price, but mostly because of the explicit homo-erotic scenes on it. Keeper of Greek and Roman Antiquaries at the Museum, Williams describes the cup and its history, and places it in historical and artistic context. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.

Title main entry. Ed. by Robert C. Morgan et al. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 289 p. $60.00 Morgan (fine arts, Pratt Institute, New York City) and coauthors with the Corning Museum of Glass (Corning, New York) present this volume examining the evolution of American glassmaker Michael Taylor’s art. Abundant full-page images of his remarkable geometric designs accompany essays on his influences; process; journeys from ceramics to glass art, Modernism to Neo-Constructivism, and his early biomorphic ceramic forms to his now signature prismatic fused-glass sculptures. Oversize: 10.25x12.25″. NK5198

2006-035057

978-0-7643-2661-5

0-7643-2484-5

NK5198

2006-039648

978-0-935314-70-0

The way of the artist; reflections on creativity and the life, home, art and collections of Richard Marquis. Behrstock, Barry. Main Art Gallery, Cal State U. Fullerton, ©2007182 p. $29.95 For artists seeking inspiration and others seeking insight or delight, this book offers more than simply a catalogue of the 2007 exhibition at the Main Art Gallery, California State University Fullerton. The featured artist is Richard Marquis, who is based in the Puget Sound area and has been a glass artist for more than 40 years. Author Behrstock, an artist and photographer himself (and also a physician and a writer), offers commentary about art and creativity, thoughtfully chosen quotes, and firsthand insight into Marquis’ methods and artistic spirit. His text accompanies a rich display of photos of the glass pieces themselves and also of Marquis’ home and work environment. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. NK6784

2005-057896

978-4-7700-2494-7

The art of Japanese sword polishing. Takaiwa, Setsuo et al. Kodansha International, ©2006 191 p. $45.00 The Japanese sword has long been valued for practical and aesthetic reasons, and the art of sword polishing has evolved over centuries to a highly-specialized skill. Of this text’s four authors, Takaiwa is one of Japan’s top sword polishers, Yoshihara is ranked among the top swordsmiths in Japan, and Leon and Hiroko Kapp have studied Japanese swords for decades and written two books on the topic. The four authors combine their knowledge and experiences to create the first book in English to explain how the Japanese sword is polished today, and to illustrate the methods, materials, and tools used for this process. Illustrated throughout with b&w photographs and diagrams, the text will appeal to collectors and interested general readers. 2006-034599

978-0-300-12403-3

The golden deer of Eurasia; perspectives on the steppe nomads of the ancient world.

Archimede Seguso; mid-mod glass from Murano; lace & stone. Piña, Leslie. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2007 223 p. $69.95 The inventive, often whimsical, and highly collectable glass objects created by Seguso (d.1999) are surveyed in this oversized volume (9.25x12.25″). Each piece appears in a color photo, accompanied by a descriptive caption. A glossary of types and selected bibliography are provided.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-014868

Gray, Nina. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2006 112 p. $19.95 (pa) Tiffany lamps with their distinctive nature-based and other motifs have become such an icon of American design that the term is applied to virtually any lamp with a leaded-glass shade. The curator of The Neustadt Collection of Tiffany Glass showcases many examples with zoom-in details of the real McCoy—with their original identifiers—created by the famed Tiffany Studios (1902-1932) of Louis C. Tiffany. She describes the innovative materials, design, color, patterns, and processes involved in the making of genuine Tiffany lamps and other decorative items.

NK7106 NK5198

978-1-55595-262-4

Tiffany by design; an in-depth look at Tiffany lamps.

978-0-521-82522-1

Steiner, Ann. Cambridge U. Pr., ©2007 346 p. $85.00 Although earlier works have focused on the use of repetition in artistic representations on Ancient Greek vases, Steiner (classics, Franklin & Marshall College) goes beyond the typical aesthetic focus in order to theorize the meanings of repetition. She employs information theory to show how repetition helps convey meaning to the viewer through redundancies and mutual consistencies and inconsistencies, semiotics to explore the way repetitive images individually and collectively belong to wider sets of contexts beyond a particular vase and within a “all-inclusive cultural code,” and narratology to consider the “syntax” of repetitive images. Among other topics, individual chapters focus on the use of repetition to create narrative paradigms, visual versions of characters and points of view, and parody. In her final chapter, she argues that the symposion, the Athenian all-male drinking party is revealed as the ideal use context for the varied purposes of repetition. NK4648

2006-027164

Michael Taylor, a geometry of meaning.

Title main entry. Ed. by Joan Aruz et al. (The Metropolitan Museum Of Art symposia) Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 243 p. $40.00 (pa) This volume originates from a symposium held in conjunction with an exhibition on the golden deer held at the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York in October 2001. Based on the findings of the authors’ archaeological excavations, the 20 essays offer a rich resource on the art, burial customs, burials, military practice, fortifications, religion, and daily life of the Scythians and other ancient steppe nomads from the Ural region to Xinjiang. The volume is well illustrated with maps, drawings, and photos. There is a lengthy bibliography, but no index. Distributed by Yale University Press.

–86–

NK7150

2006-013727

978-0-300-11736-3

The art of the goldsmith in late fifteenth-century Germany; the Kimbell Virgin and her bishop.

2006-016695

978-1-55595-270-9

Women’s tales; four leading Israeli jewelers. Taragin, Davira Spiro et al. Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 128 p. $50.00 Documenting an international collaboration between the Israel Museum in Jerusalem and the Racine Art Museum in Wisconsin, this beautifully illustrated exhibition catalog focuses on the careers of four prominent Israeli women jewelers: Bianca Eshel-Gershuni, Vered Kaminski, Esther Knobel and Deganit Stern Schocken. The volume includes a discussion of the context in which the artists developed, biographies of each women, and essays evaluating their work. NK8212

2006-929316

0-7643-2549-3

Ironwork; dynamic details. Meilach, Dona Z. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2007 159 p. $39.95 Meilach (art history, Northwestern U.) displays the art of modern artistblacksmiths with approximately 250 images of ironwork in the form of flowers, grapevines, animal sculptures, and candlesticks and other fine variations on functional objects. The variety of color, twisting and folding techniques, textures, and size among the featured art astounds, and receives recognition in the attractive color plates. NK8212

2005-028161

0-8203-2700-X

An ornament to the city; old Mobile ironwork. Sledge, John S. Photography by Sheila Hagler. U. of Georgia Press, ©2006 109 p. $34.95 Sledge (architectural historian for the Mobile Historic Development Commission), along with photographer Hagler, tells a city history of Mobile, Alabama through the Victorian iron lace art still found on dozens of balconies, homes, and cemeteries. The iron industry there, initially booming, eventually had to compete with those in larger Northern cities, but its artistic arm became a defining feature of old Mobile. Historical images and documents accompany Hagler’s detailed b&w prints. The book is oversize: 11.25x11.25″. NK8595

2006-003680

978-0-87846-699-3

Textile & fashion arts.

Smith, Jeffrey Chipps. (Kimbell masterpiece series) Kimbell Art Museum, ©2006 86 p. $16.95 (pa) Smith (European art, U. of Texas, Austin) presents a monograph on the silver Virgin and Child statuette, housed in Fort Worth’s Kimbell Art Museum. Made in south Germany during the late 15th century for a powerful bishop of Echstätt, the sculpture is one of the rare surviving masterpieces of the art of the goldsmith. The text examines the creation of the statuette, its significance in the context of other works of art in Eichstätt, and the story of Bishop Reichenau and his intense devotion to the Virgin Mary. Illustrated with 78 b&w and color photographs, diagrams and reproductions. Distributed in the U.S. by Yale U. Press. NK7373

NK8806

Parmal, Pamela A. et al. (MFA highlights) MFA Publications, ©2006 208 p. $19.95 (pa) Introduced by material on the development of the study of textiles and fashion arts and the creation of collections and museums, this collection of 29 essays covers major techniques and genres of the last 25 centuries. The magnificent illustrations detail the tapestries, fragments, ceremonial garments, shoes, accessories, and fashion items such as ball gowns and visiting dresses of the elite. Essays consider Chinese dragon robes, needlework chimney pieces, elements of Japanese traditional couture, and the evolution of ceremonial and daily dress across the Middle East, Asia, the Americas and Europe. NK8806

978-0-9535353-3-0

Weaving tapestry in rural Ireland; Taipéis Gael, Donegal. Sayres, Meghan Nuttall. Photographs by Laurence Boland. ATRIUM, ©2006 198 p. $35.95 In County Donegal, within the Gaeltacht, or Irish-speaking region of Ireland, a small group of young weavers has sought to preserve an ancient art and also make it relevant. Together with local elders they formed Taiéis Gael, a cooperative dedicated to Irish weaving. Weaver Sayres profiles the founders, mentors and weavers and lets them speak for themselves, describes a gallery of tapestries reflecting St. Colmcille, the Famine, literature, legend, lore, and cross-cultural expressions, and examines tools, raw materials and the local natural dyes, closing with comments on the future of Taiéis Gael. She provides lists of references and further reading. This is both gorgeous and illuminating. ATRIUM is an imprint of Cork U. Press; distributed in the US by Dufour Editions. NK9112

2007-011533

978-0-7603-2688-6

The quilt; a history and celebration of an American art form. Roberts, Elise Schebler. Voyageur Press, ©2007 348 p. $50.00 With quilts included from various ethnic groups, historic periods, regions, and many with patriotic themes, this volume also contains many quotes from quilters and stories about quilting groups. Oversized: 11x12.25″. NK9112

2006-933127

0-7643-2316-4

Quilts of the Oregon trail. Cross, Mary Bywater. (A Schiffer book for collectors) Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2007 184 p. $29.95 (pa) This book features full-color images of 56 quilts made before, during, and after the Oregon trail migration between 1840 and 1870, along with vintage photos of their creators and families. Cross, a Portland, Oregonbased quilt expert “reads” these creations as historical documents and analyzes their themes and patterns. Also included are maps, other records of the trek, and Northwest and other resources on these multipurpose heirlooms.

978-4-7700-3017-7

Plastic culture; how Japanese toys conquered the world.

NK9112

Phoenix, Woodrow. Kodansha International, ©2006 109 p. $29.95 Extolling the creative potential of plastics, a London-based comics artist/critic traces the history of Japanese toys from the postwar period’s Godzillas to today’s “urban vinyl” blending graphic design and art. Phoenix draws on interviews with leading Japanese toymakers, and features full-color photos of collectible toys ranging from the cute to bondage fantasy figures. A glossary of terms includes production methods and “shokuan” (action toys that come free with other products).

Pritchard, Gayle A. (The Ohio quilt series) Ohio University Press, ©2006 130 p. $19.95 (pa) By turns zany, wistful and whimsical, the quilts presented in this volume demonstrate the creative revolution in quiltmaking that occurred in Ohio in the 1970s and 80s. Pritchard, a fiber artist and curator, describes these changes through interviews with artists, photographs and beautiful illustrations of quilts. Pritchard proves that the contemporary quilt movement could not have occurred without Ohio’s unparalleled contribution.

NK8700

2006-922860

2006-018931

978-0-8214-1706-5

Uncommon threads; Ohio’s art quilt revolution.

978-0-89236-849-5

Pietre dure ; the art of semiprecious stonework. Giusti, Annamaria. Getty Publications, ©2006 264 p. $85.00 The ancient art of stone inlay is the subject of this lavishly illustrated, oversized (10x13.25″) volume, which focuses in particular on works from the Renaissance and after. The Medici’s role in founding and supporting workshops in Florence is described in detail; later chapters discuss production at 18th-century courts in France, Spain, and Austria. The volume is heavily illustrated, with many full- and two-page color plates of the inlaid scenes created from semiprecious stones.

–87–

Please verify price and availability by contacting publishers or book vendors.

Art Book News Annual 2008

ARTS IN GENERAL (including works dealing with two or more media, religious arts, and special subjects) NX10

NX180

0-8018-8598-1

Studies in eighteenth-century culture; v.36. Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey S. Ravel and Linda Zionkowski. (Series: title) Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 298 p. $45.00 The 12 studies in this issue are from various conferences during the 2004-05 academic year and arranged in sections on media and messages, gendered perspectives, religion and commerce in Spanish America, and an irrational fin-de-seècle. The topics include Joseph Priestly and the graphic invention of modern time; physiology and character in La Nouvelle Héloöse; Christianity, coca, and commerce in the Peruvian Mercury; and architectural origins and the public sphere in 18th-century France. NX65

2006-024173

978-0-465-07800-4

Falling upwards; essays in defense of the imagination. Siegel, Lee. Basic Books, ©2006 337 p. $25.00 Cultural critic and essayist Siegel has published pieces in such prominent American periodicals as Harper’s, The New Republic (where he is a senior editor), Time, The Atlantic, The New Yorker, and The New York Times. Here he collects 21 of those essays commenting on such diverse cultural products as the Harry Potter books, the plays of Anton Chekhov, the television shows The Sopranos and Sex and the City, Stanley Kubrick’s film Eyes Wide Shut, and a biography of Saul Bellow. Throughout the essays he celebrates those works with imagination, those that display artistic authenticity and integrity, and denigrates those that are the products of an increasingly commercialized culture. His motto as a cultural critic is to “do unto art as what you would have art do unto you.” NX175

2006-046917

0-7734-5779-8

How to respond to strangeness in art; four studies in the unfamiliar. Greene, David B. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 157 p. $109.95 Greene (art, North Carolina State U.) grapples with issues regarding works of art that depict an engagement between two elements or cultures that are significantly different. His case studies are Mahler’s music and neo-Daoist poetry; Ming landscape paintings; the Iranian rug in European interior design; and textiles, architecture, and narratives from Guatemala. NX180

2007-360504

1-905512-07-4

Arts in society; essays by Angela Carter, John Berger, Reyner Banham, Michael Wood, Dennis Potter and others. (reprint, 1977) Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Barker. Five Leaves Publications, ©2006 316 p. $19.60 (pa) This compilation (a reprint from 1977) features 44 essays by critics and writers Reyner Banham, John Berger, Angela Carter, Albert Hunt, Paul Mayersberg, Dennis Potter, Andrew Weimer, Michael Wood, historian E.P. Thompson, and anthropologist Michael Thompson. All of the essays first appeared in the arts section of New Society from 1964 to 1976 and are reprinted in their original form in this volume. They reflect the objectives of the magazine to present ideas about social change, and cover themes in photography and painting, film, music, marketing and design, television and theater, and buildings and towns. Specific essays discuss D.H. Lawrence, Bob Dylan, John Lennon, A Clockwork Orange, Charlie Chaplin, Francis Bacon, war photography, and male pin-ups, for instance. There is no index. Barker is the former editor of New Society magazine.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2005-037730

0-7546-4002-7

Visual culture and decolonisation in Britain. Title main entry. Ed. by Simon Faulkner and Anadi Ramamurthy. (British art and visual culture since 1750, new readings) Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 277 p. $99.95 For editors Faulkner (history of art and design, Manchester Metropolitan U., UK) and Ramamurthy (media and cultural history, U. of Central Lancashire, UK), and presumably their contributors, decolonization means much more than formal constitutional decolonization, instead referring to “the interrelationships and conflicts between those complex historical forces that have been involved with the ongoing deconstruction of empire, and those that have defended colonialism and reconstructed imperialism in new contexts,” as well as ongoing cultural processes through which lingering aspects of colonialism and imperialism in the cultural sphere are critiqued or defended. It is the visual aspects of this latter meaning (as they relate to the decolonization of the British Empire) to which the nine historical essays presented attend, although obviously not in isolation from the former. Individual chapters discuss the re-articulation of otherness in feature film images of Africa, photographic representations of Caribbean migrants in England, corporate advertisements concerning large industrializing project in the decolonizing world as a form of “controlling gaze,” and the appropriation of colonial imagery in pro-Zionist films, among other topics. NX260

2007-008226

978-0-8166-4119-2

Database aesthetics; art in the age of information overflow. Title main entry. Ed. by Victoria Vesna. (Electronic mediations; v.20) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 305 p. $25.00 (pa) The contributors of these 16 essays work at both the cultural and aesthetic level as they assess how artists have changed the network culture by creating data art and thereby shaping the flow of data that rises around us every day. Topics include the database aesthetics of everything, the database as a symbolic form, work in data and allegory, data converting into a novel, the database as system and cultural form in cultural narratives, the database imaginary in memory and archive, recombinant poetics and related database aesthetics, an aesthetics of dignity in database form, network aesthetics, game engines as embedded systems, and reports on a variety of projects ranging from interfacing to specific artistic works in which the database serves as source and inspiration. NX303

2006-018749

978-1-4129-3682-8

Building parent involvement through the arts; activities and projects that enrich classrooms and schools. Sikes, Michael. Corwin Press Inc., ©2007 149 p. $65.95 Writing with school administrators, teachers, and parents in mind, Sikes, an educational consultant and adjunct at Antioch U. Santa Barbara, describes how to use the arts to engage parents and families in their child’s education. His main focus is to offer an action planning toolkit for this goal and he first details how the arts, parents, schools, and learning are connected, in addition to student achievement. Subsequent chapters explain how to develop programs in visual and literary arts, theater, dance, music, and folk and traditional arts. Creating a space for parent involvement and adult education, community resources, developing a school wide plan, and evaluating the program are other topics covered. Templates, forms, and project ideas are included. NX452

2007-006559

978-0-313-31764-4

The age of romanticism. Schneider, Joanne. (Greenwood guides to historic events; 1500-1900) Greenwood Press, ©2007 165 p. $45.00 Plume ready? Finger on forehead? Focused on nature? Is that all we need to know about Romanticism? Not by a long shot, according to Schneider (history, Rhode Island College), who gives high-school and general readers contexts and background so they can better understand the tenets of the movement, the players, and the repercussions of Romanticism. She describes how the Enlightenment and eighteenth-century responses to it built into a coherent aesthetic and agenda; how Romanticism expressed itself in poetry, prose, drama, painting and music; and how Romanticism shaped such concepts as environmentalism and nationalism. She includes a chronology of publications and life events, biographies of key actors, a bundle of original documents and a small but telling set of illustrations. They and the references bring this a step above the usual first contact with the likes of Keats, Shelley and Byron.

–88–

NX456

2006-037606

978-0-8166-4462-9

NX514

2007-008595

978-1-84545-291-9

Collectivism after modernism; the art of social imagination after 1945.

Intersected identities; strategies of visualisation in nineteenth- and twentieth-century Mexican culture.

Title main entry. Ed. by Blake Stimson and Gregory Sholette. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 312 p. $27.95 (pa) The modernist turn to individualism was coupled with the perceived death of artistic collectives that, according to editors Stimson (art history, U. of California at Davis) and Sholette (cofounder of the collectives Political Art Documentation/Distribution and REPOhistory), is in some ways connected to the failure of the ideal of communism. Yet, as this collection of ten essays demonstrate, collectivist art production didn’t disappear and continues to grapple with social, cultural, economic, and political questions and norms. Papers discuss the cultural politics of such European collectives as Internationale Lettriste and the Situationist International, the efforts of Art & Language to “resist and repurpose the functionalism of postwar culture,” the role of anti-colonialist guerilla movements in the formation of media-based collectives in the 1980s, the relationship between state promotion of murals and collective art in Mexico, relationships between the art world and the countercultural milieux of squats and raves in New York City, the public interventions of the Congolese collective Le Groupe Amos addressing specific community needs in Africa, and the political tactical media produced by recent collectives such as RTMark and The Yes Men.

Segre, Erica. (Remapping cultural history) Berghahn Books, ©2007 316 p. $90.00 Segre (Hispanic studies, U. of Cambridge, UK) examines the ways in which the interdisciplinary, the eclectic and the combinatory have served a strategic purpose in the development of a self-aware and identity-conscious visual discourse in Mexico, from the formative 19th century to the post-national 1990s. The analysis considers a broad array of creative forms—observational writing, illustrated periodicals, graphic art, painting, photography and film—in a series of linked studies examining the construction and interrogation of visual identities in reproductive media. In particular , it looks at ways in which discourses concerning ethnicity and cultural hybridity have been echoed and transformed in Mexican visual culture, resulting in fields of visual discourse which are eclectic and increasingly self-reflexive. Illustrated throughout in b&w.

NX456

2007-008229

978-0-292-71629-2

Conceptualism in Latin American art; didactics of liberation. Camnitzer, Luis. (Joe R. and Teresa Lozano Long series in Latin American and Latino art and culture) U. of Texas Press, ©2007 347 p. $27.95 (pa) Camnitzer (emeritus, art, State U. of New York, Old Westbury) provides a penetrating analysis of an art movement that spanned the continent and served in counterpoint to often more well-known writers and poets, with the artists sometimes also offering poetry and manifestos (quoted throughout). The harsh political realities and consequent activism of the artists is a recurring motif for the period after 1968. Those interested in contemporary art, the history of modern art, and the history and politics of Latin America and the politics of dissent there will all find this volume a rich resource. The volume is oversized: (8.25x10″). NX503

2006-100485

978-1-56663-706-0

Counterpoints; twenty-five years of The new criterion on culture and the arts. Title main entry. Ed. by Roger Kimball and Hilton Kramer. Ivan R. Dee, Inc., ©2007 500 p. $35.00 Launched in 1982, The New Criterion is a monthly literary magazine and journal of cultural criticism known for its political conservatism and artistic classicism. This volume reprints various critical essays selected by the editors that have appeared in this publication over the last 25 years. A sampling: Keith Windschuttle on “The Hypocrisy of Noam Chomsky,” Heather Mac Donald on “Revisionist Lust,” and Theodore Dalrymple on “The Epidemiology of Evil.” NX512

2006-016900

978-0-8160-6394-9

Latinos in the arts. Otfinoski, Steven. (A to Z of Latino Americans) Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 277 p. $44.00 Otfinoski has been writing for some 30 years and is the author of books and book chapters on Latino Americans, as well as a variety of Facts on File texts. In this alphabetically arranged text, he presents profiles of some 175 Latinos involved in the visual and performing arts. Each entry includes an introductory paragraph highlighting the individual’s main achievements, a concise biographical profile detailing key events relating to his/her field of expertise, and a list of further readings. Illustrated with some 50 b&w photographs.

–89–

NX542

2006-034689

978-0-87413-970-9

Performing the “everyday”; the culture of genre in the eighteenth century. Title main entry. Ed. by Alden Cavanaugh. (Studies in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century art and culture) Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2007 151 p. $57.50 With 9 essays contributed by academics in art history, music and English in the U.S., Canada, Israel, and Australia, this volume offers a range of examples and analysis of the popular style in art, literature, and music, especially in France and Britain. Many of the essays are concerned with issues of gender. Published in an oversized format (8.5x11.25″), the volume is well illustrated with b&w plates. Distributed by Associated University Presses. NX583

2006-044441

0-7734-5881-6

Renaissance in China; the culture and art of the Song dynasty. Bao, Yuheng et al. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 198 p. $169.95 Bao (communication, Sichuan Normal U., China), Liao (China Research Academy of Art, China), and Lane (a retired professor of English and art) have produced a straightforward account of the artistic productions of China’s Song Dynasty (907-1279) that provides some historical and intellectual background and otherwise focuses on the works of the most prominent cultural producers of the 300-year period. Chapters examine accomplishments in landscape painting; religious, flower-bird, and figure paintings; calligraphy; architecture and sculpture; religious architectural and sculptural arts; and ceramics production and other crafts. There is also a pair of chapters that focuses specifically on Song Hui Zong and the Empire Academy of painting and Su Shi and the Literati-painting of the Song era. Brief discussion of the art preceding and subsequent to the Song dynasty is included, along with a chronology; an annotated guide to some of the art literature of the period; and biographical entries on artists, critics, and other important figures from the Song Dynasty. Also included are 50 plates illustrating representative paintings, calligraphy, architecture, and sculpture discussed in the text; unfortunately, although the illustrations themselves are quite nice, the quality of some of the reproductions is not great. NX584

2006-031132

978-0-7391-1842-9

Inexorable modernity; Japan’s grappling with modernity in the arts. Title main entry. Ed. by Hiroshi Nara. Lexington Books, ©2007 269 p. $32.95 (pa) Modern Japan has sought to reconcile entrenched tradition with strong western influences. Many hold the process has resulted in a bifurcated nation with strong tendencies toward the west, but this collection of 11 essays shows that process is more subtle, complex and rich than westerners understand. Focusing on individual Japanese artists and specific trends, contributors explain the workings of outright censorship in the case of the painter Kawanabe, the critiques of Kojima of painting just before World War II, the rise of elements of yoga in the representations of that war in the Pacific, Watsuji’s philosophy of art and mind, dramatic and comic postwar depiction of mixed marriages, the underlying aesthetic of destruction, theatrical nostalgia, Buddhism-based Ibsen, the mix of old and new in the work of Mori, the literature of public v. private space, and the machine imagery of Yokomitsu.

Art Book News Annual 2008

NX587

2006-002245

978-0-292-71295-9

NX652

2006-299645

978-0-8020-8801-7

Amazigh arts in Morocco; women shaping Berber identity.

A vision of the Orient; texts, intertexts, and contexts of Madame Butterfly.

Becker, Cynthia J. U. of Texas Press, ©2006 225 p. $45.00 The wife of a Moroccan, Becker (art history, Boston U.) has spent several years living among the Ait Khabbash women of southeastern Morocco where she gained unique access to their artistic rituals. Her study focuses on the women’s role in the process of identity construction by examining the centrality of the textiles, jewelry, and other art forms they create to the social relations and ethnic identity of Moroccan Berbers. The text explores the complexity of women’s roles in the Islamic societies of Africa and demonstrates the part played by women’s agency in negotiating complex social and religious issues. The author argues that women’s control over the visual symbols of Berber ethnic identity grants them power and prestige while simultaneously restricting their societal roles.

Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Wisenthal et al. U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 262 p. $55.00 Madame Butterfly is best-known from Puccini’s 1904 opera. A team of professors of English, music, and theatre, film, and creative writing at the U. of British Columbia introduce this colonial Western construction of exotic Oriental femininity and submissiveness. Contributors to 13 essays explore this myth in various media and cultural contexts. E.g., in M. Butterfly, the 1988 play by David Henry Hwang, and its 1993 cinematic adaptation by David Cronenberg of The Fly fame, Madame Butterfly’s and Lieutenant Pinkerton’s roles are reversed. The book includes a chronology, excerpts from a workshop on Hwang’s play, musical score excerpts, and illustrations relating to Pierre Loti’s Madame Chrysanthème, an early version of this story.

NX634

LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, FILM, WRITING ON ART

2006-940746

978-1-84542-385-8

Recent development in cultural economics. Title main entry. Ed. by Ruth Towse. (The international library of critical writings in economics) Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2007 722+ p. $315.00 Towse (economics of creative industries, Erasmus U. Rotterdam, the Netherlands) presents 37 papers that provide examples of the past decade’s research in the applied area of cultural economics—the economics of the arts, the heritage and media industries, and other aspects of the cultural sector. A large number of selections are taken from the Journal of Cultural Economics, which is not that surprising considering that it is the only academic journal solely dedicated to this particular subfield of economics. The papers have been organized into sections dealing with general issues, theoretical developments, ticket pricing, the performing arts, museums, built heritage, the art market, artists’ labor markets, institutions and creativity, creative industries, and copyright. Examples of specific topics include the impact of MP3 downloading on the record industry, the relevance of transaction cost economics to interfirm relationships in the music industry, the role of organizations in determining artistic innovation, economic theory of avant-garde and popular art, art as investment and the underperformance of masterpieces, and politico-economic interactions of German public performing arts institutions. NX650

2006-010570

0-8018-8489-6

Framing attention; windows on modern German culture. Koepnick, Lutz. (Parallax, re-visions of culture and society) Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 299 p. $49.95 In this novel analysis of ways of seeing that have characterized and defined modernity, Koepnick (German, film and media studies, Washington U., St. Louis) examines the role and representation of window frames in painting, photography, architecture, literature, plays, film and public transportation systems in modern Germany. He discusses such frames as interfaces that negotiate competing visions of past and present, body and community, and attentiveness and distraction. NX650

2006-009663

978-0-415-34522-4

Self/image; technology, representation, and the contemporary subject. Jones, Amelia. Routledge, ©2006 258 p. $35.95 (pa) Jones (history of art, U. of Manchester, UK) explores the Euro-American cultural use of modern imaging technologies (film, video, etc.) in order to “render and/or confirm the self,” arguing that since the early 19th century artists have pushed imaging technologies to interrogate the limits of subjectivity, thus exposing the “inexorable failure of the self as a coherent knowable entity.” She makes this argument by reviewing examples of artistic productions using visual representation technologies, from Los Angeles activist art collaborative products to Australian body artist Stelarc’ implementation of robotics to render the body obsolete.

Art Book News Annual 2008

P85

2003-109008

0-7619-4952-6

Roland Barthes; 3v. Title main entry. Ed. by Mike Gane & Nicholas Gane. (Sage masters of modern social thought) Sage Publications, ©2004 380 p. $864.00 The work of French intellectual Roland Barthes (1915-1980) has been called “a veritable fever-chart of all the significant intellectual and critical tendencies since World War II” and consists of forays into literary criticism, social theory, philosophy, and semiotics, among other intellectual endeavors. This three-volume set collects 65 previously published scholarly essays on Barthes dating from the early 1980s through the turn of the century. The essays have been grouped into eight thematic sections, the first two of which constitute the first volume and provide discussion of Barthes’ relationship to other thinkers and exploration of issues of method, rhetoric, and writing. The next five sections are organized according to specific works, including the early writings, Mythologies, Empire of Signs and other writings on Japan, S/Z (a critical reading of Balzac’s Sarrasine), and Pleasure of the Text together with A Lover’s Discourse. The final section, taking up most of the third volume, is dedicated to some of the overarching themes of Barthes’ work, including the death of the author; art cinema and theater; photography; and gender, sexuality, and identity. PE1408

2006-023493

978-1-59147-743-3

How to write a lot; a practical guide to productive academic writing. Silvia, Paul J. American Psychological Assn., ©2007 149 p. $14.95 (pa) Never mind your inner writer; this guide focuses on bolstering your outer writer with a schedule, clear goals, and good work habits. Silvia, author of several books on psychology in the arts, shows struggling writers in psychology and other academic disciplines how to overcome roadblocks to writing in this lighthearted, practical, almost- pocket (5x8″) guide. Covering strategies for time management and motivation as well as basic style, he gives advice on how to write, submit, revise, and resubmit journal articles, how to improve writing quality, and how to write and publish academic books. B&w cartoons and a list of useful books on writing are included. PL726

978-90-04-15709-5

Haikai poet Yosa Buson and the Basho revival. Crowley, Cheryl A. (Brill’s Japanese studies library; v.27) BRILL, ©2007 308 p. $99.00 Crowley (Japanese literature, Emory U.) examines the work of poet and painter Buson (1716-83) as a window into the artistic practices in Japan during a period of economic, technological, and social change. She looks at his role in the revival of Matsuo Basho (1644-94), his endeavors with linked verse and haikai painting, and his reception in the modern world.

–90–

PN75

978-0-8264-9109-1

PN1993

2006-034883

978-0-8166-4942-6

Fredric Jameson; live theory.

Bombay cinema; an archive of the city.

Buchanan, Ian. Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 140 p. $19.95 (pa) Buchanan (critical and cultural theory, Cardiff U., UK) provides an introductory overview of the theoretical corpus of Marxist political and cultural theorist Fredric Jamison, whose best known works include Postmodernism: The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism (1991), The Political Unconscious (1981), and Marxism and Form (1971). In addition to addressing the above works, Buchanan discusses Jamison’s theory of dialectical criticism; his writings on Jean-Paul Sartre, Theodor Adorno, Bertoldt Brecht, and Roland Barthes; and his concepts of cognitive mapping and utopia. An interview conducted by Buchanan with Jamison is included following the exegetical discussion.

Mazumdar, Ranjani. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 257 p. $22.50 (pa) Mazumdar (cinema studies, Jawaharlal Nehru U., India) seeks to understand urban India as a set of related practices and discourses that have influenced the way cinema produced from Bombay (Mumbai) has represented and archived the urban experience. She pursues this goal in five chapters that examine the cinematic articulation of the urban “angry man” or “psychotic,” the relation of the cinematic representation of the tapori (vagabond) to historical debates on language and Hollywood images of rebel masculinity, the westernized “vamp” and the historical formation of a moral discourse on urban women, panoramic interiors and the production of the “virtual city,” and gangster films as mode of expression grappling with spatial anxiety and claustrophobia in the city.

PN81

978-90-420-2162-4 PN1993

The mourning after; attending the wake of postmodernism. Title main entry. Ed. by Neil Brooks and Josh Toth. (Postmodern studies; 40) Editions Rodopi, ©2007 306 p. $83.00 (pa) Postmodernism has become not only mainstream but in many disciplines dominant, thereby reducing some of its attraction, and making the cultural, literary and theoretical assumptions it despised fashionable again. But is postmodernism dead? The 13 articles in this collection take a stand somewhere between the death and life of postmodernism, noting the epistemological shift in production but also the postmodern inheritance in the ways we understand and change contemporary culture and society. They cover postmodernism in a fundamentalist arena and in the age of distracting discourses, suffering as it relates to the “wake” for postmodernism, Foucault’s vision of the self, aesthetics and ambient emergence, Rushdie and other urban toxins, Danielewski’s impossibilities, Franzen’s turncoat refusals, mathematics and mysticism, Derrida and the ethics of mourning, the crisis of belief in neo-realism v. the real, and the theology of the accusation that God is weak. PN1993

2006-047107

0-7734-5703-8

The Actors Studio and Hollywood in the 1950s; a history of theatrical realism. Beguiristain, Mario. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 367 p. $129.95 Beguiristain (film, Miami Dade College, Florida) presents a critical theory to account for a series of films that are generally ignored completely or mentioned only briefly in passing, partly because of their dubious artistic merit, but also because there was no way to discuss them academically. He discusses the interaction of a particular set of social, political, and economic conditions at the time, and how the common personal attitudes and stances found their way into the work of artists who moved in the same circles. The term Theatrical Realism is his own. The representative films he looks at are The Rose Tattoo, The Bachelor party, Edge of the City, A Face in the Crowd, and The Pawnbroker. The iconic stills, however, come from many others as well. PN1993

2006-021861

978-0-8135-4034-4

American cinema of the 1980s; themes and variations. Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Prince. (Screen decades) Rutgers U. Press, ©2007 260 p. $22.95 (pa) In this collection of essays edited by Prince (communication, Virginia Polytechnic Institute), ten film studies scholars discuss how 1980s American films across the genres responded to, remarked upon, and even influenced their social and political contexts. They examine topics such as the appearance during that decade of Vietnam war movies; Reaganite conservatism, resulting throwbacks to old Hollywood (e.g. Indiana Jones), and reactionary filmmaking (e.g. Stonewall); post-ERA film women (Coal Miner’s Daughter); and the explosion of the science fiction genre, its introduction of “cyberpunk” to the mainstream (Blade Runner), and its interpretations of reality—from paranoid and dystopic to upbeat fantasy.

–91–

2006-027739

978-0-7425-3915-0

Contemporary Latin American cinema; breaking into the global market. Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah Shaw. Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 201 p. $24.95 (pa) Ten essays by film scholars examine the production and reception of contemporary Latin American cinema. Each offers a textual analysis of a particular film and considers its social context and the conditions under which it was produced. Coverage includes such internationally- known films as City of God, The Motorcycle Diaries, and Y tu mamá tambien, as well as others that did not attract significant notice outside of Latin America. Shaw teaches film studies at Portsmouth U. PN1993

2007-020304

0-7734-5433-0

Contemporary Mexican cinema, 1989-1999; history, space, and identity. Haddu, Miriam. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 253 p. $109.95 Haddu (Latin American studies, U. of London, UK) presents a study of the Mexican “new cinema” of the 1990s. She first examines historical narratives in close analyses of such films as Rojo amanecer, El bulto, La ley de Herodes, Cabeza de Vaca, and La otra conquista. She then discusses the new visibility of women in Mexican cinema, as demonstrated by the works of directors María Novaro, Marya Sistach, Dana Rotberg, Geita Schyfter, and Busi Cortés. Finally, she explores representations of space and location in the border cinema of El jardín del edén, the urban cinema of Sólo con tu pareja, and the rural cinema of La mujer de Benjamin. PN1993

2006-033987

978-0-472-06966-8

The cosmopolitan screen; German cinema and the global imaginary, 1945 to the present. Title main entry. Ed. by Stephan K. Schindler and Lutz Koepnick. (Socal history, popular culture, and politics in Germany) U. of Michigan Press, ©2007 32 p. $39.95 (pa) German film culture has recently been the scene of budding global, transnational, and cosmopolitan sensibilities according to the editors (professors of German and media studies at Washington U. in St. Louis). They present 15 papers that not only explore these developments in the reunified Germany but also provide a reassessment of earlier German cinema from a more cosmopolitan perspective. Topics discussed include German-speaking exiles in Hollywood in the immediate wake of the Nazi period, the international stance of the New German Cinema of the 1960s and 1970s, the influence of transnational expectations on German depictions of the Holocaust, German cinematic cosmopolitanism as a challenge to capitalist globalization, and the use of digital technologies as a challenge to national cinemas. PN1993

2006-031230

978-0-8047-5368-5

Disintegration in frames; aesthetics and ideology in the Yugoslav and post-Yugoslav cinema. Levi, Pavle. Stanford U. Press, ©2007 203 p. $49.50 Levi (film studies, Stanford U.) examines the variety of ways in which national identity is approached, construed, promoted, or critically dissected in film, video, and television texts from the Socialist Federative Republic of Yugoslavia as far back as the 1960s and its successor states, especially Serbia, Croatia, and Bosnia.

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1993

2006-100458

978-1-84545-204-9

PN1993

2007-004289

978-0-8108-5557-1

Framing the fifties; cinema in a divided Germany.

Historical dictionary of Irish cinema.

Title main entry. Ed. by John E. Davidson and Sabine Hake. (Film Europa: German cinema in an international context; v.4) Berghahn Books, ©2007 250 p. $80.00 German and North American scholars of film and of German literature and culture examine German cinema during a period most scholars seem happy enough to dismiss as an aberration to be safely ignored. Their topics include ambivalences of national identity and masculinity in the star persona of Peter van Eyck, Cold War fantasies, representations of the Other Germany in documentaries, and re-territorializing enjoyment in the Adenaur era.

Flynn, Roderick and Patrick Brereton. (Historical dictionaries of literature and the arts; no.17) Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 393 p. $85.00 One would think that Ireland, a country full of breathtaking settings and people for whom talking is not only a sport but an art form, would be a center of cinematic activity. In its own quiet way it is, and its places and people have been influential from the beginning of the celluloid age to now. However, Ireland has made its films in and about itself more about quality than quantity, perhaps to counteract the wretched stereotypes presented in films about it made by those who live apart from the culture. Flynn and Brereton (both communications, Dublin City U.) provide all the essential information about Ireland’s rather impressive output, considering, while maintaining the commitment to quality in articles about directors, actors, films, themes, history, the place of cinema in Irish culture, considerations of politics and society and the promises of the future.

PN1993

2007-010757

978-1-4051-6372-9

The golden age of cinema; Hollywood, 1929-1945. Jewell, Richard B. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 348 p. $74.95 Those who sneer that Hollywood never had a golden age should peruse this to discover the innovations in scripting, cinematography, directing, acting, editing and visuals accomplished in a relatively low-tech age under working conditions that could only be described as gentrified slavery. Jewell (American film, U. of Southern California) gives good reasons for his enthusiasm, clearly describing the years when Hollywood did its best for a patronage beset with economic depression and war. Writing for the general reader, he describes Hollywood’s response to evermounting social and political crises, methods of producing and exhibiting movies, innovations such as sound and color film production along with special effects, censorship and how studios got around it, innovations in narrative and style, genres such as the western or gangster flick and, of course, the women’s film, and the star as business commodity. The photographs of productions in progress and publicity stills are fascinating. PN1993

978-0-88864-479-4

Great Canadian film directors. Title main entry. Ed. by George Melnyk. The U. of Alberta Press, ©2007 468 p. $34.95 (pa) Melnyk (Canadian studies and film studies, U. of Calgary, Canada) compiles 19 essays by Canadian scholars of film, Canadian studies, English, and other fields who consider the role of their country’s directors in the development of its cinematic tradition. They survey a sampling of past, contemporary, and young directors’ careers and works, with an aim to also detail elements of culture and society. Those discussed are Neil Shipman, Joyce Wieland, Claude Jutra, Jean-Claude Lauzon, Denys Arcand, David Cronenberg, Atom Egoyan, John Greyson, Norman Jewison, Robert Lepage, Bruce McDonald, Léa Pool, Patricia Rozema, Mina Shum, Gary Burns, Michael Dowse, Thom Fitzgerald, Zach Kunuk, Don McKellar, and Lynne Stopkewich. A filmography is included. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press. PN1993

2006-033688

978-0-8108-5491-8

Historical dictionary of French cinema. Oscherwitz, Dayna and MaryEllen Higgins. (Historical dictionaries of literature and the arts; no.15) Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 459 p. $95.00 Oscherwitz (French and francophone studies, Southern Methodist U.) and Higgins (comparative literature and film, Pennsylvania State U.) provide a dictionary of French film from the silent era to the present. The dictionary is meant to be an overview rather than comprehensive, and entries encompass actors, directors, films, movements, producers, studios, cinematographers, and screenwriters. Examples are Jean Cocteau, Diva, Catherine Deneuve, poetic realism, and Francois Truffaut. The introduction traces the history of French film as an industry and art form. The volume is aimed at academics, students, and general readers. PN1993

2006-019322

978-0-8108-5520-5

Historical dictionary of Hong Kong cinema. Stokes, Lisa Odham. (Historical dictionary of literature and the arts; no.2) Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 590 p. $99.00 Although some entries cover individual films, genres, character types, production companies, and the like, the vast majority of entries presented by Stokes (humanities and film, Seminole Community College) in this historical dictionary of the prolific world of Hong Kong cinema consist of biographical information on important actors, directors, and other persons who have contributed to the development of film in Hong Kong. In addition to the alphabetical, cross- referenced dictionary, Stokes also presents an introductory contextual essay, a chronology, and a bibliography.

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1993

978-0-7734-5498-9

How East Asian films are reshaping national identities; essays on the cinemas of China, Japan, South Korea, and Hong Kong. Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew David Jackson et al. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 275 p. $109.95 In presenting this collection of 13 essays exploring East Asian cinema, editors Jackson (a student of Korean history at London U., UK), Gibb (East Asian Cinema, City U. of Hong Kong, China), and White (Tokai Gakuen U., Japan) de-emphasize the recent focus on Western globalization and modernization as shapers of Asian identity and instead focus issues of national and regional identity and history and trans-regional cultural flows since 1945. Topics discussed include thematic concerns of natural culturalism in Shohei Imamura’s Narayamabushi-kô (The Ballad of Narayama); history and national myth in filmic portrayals of China’s Opium War; cinematic representations of the Chinese Cultural Revolution; responses to modernity in South Korean film; portrayals of the Mainland Chinese “Other” in Hong Kong commercial film; representations of Japanese minorities in recent Japanese film; cinematic cooperation between China and Hong Kong, and discourse of regionalism in Dong fang bu bai 2: zhi feng yun zai qi (The East is Red) and Wo hu cang long (Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon). PN1993

2006-432891

962-209-716-2

Island on the edge; Taiwan new cinema and after. Title main entry. Ed. by Chris Berry and Feii Lu. Hong Kong University Pr., ©2005 195 p. $24.95 (pa) Taiwanese film, once an acquired taste, is now approaching the mainstream of art house and even purely commercial cinema. Along with such famed directors as Ang Lee, Hou Hsiao Hsien and Edward Yang and such blockbusters as Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon are directors and projects that reflect Taiwan’s cultural development, its role in the Cold War and its aftermath, decolonization and modernity. Berry (film and television studies, U. of London) and Lu (communications, National Chengchi U.) pay close attention to a number of films that serve as indicators of the approach of Taiwan New Cinema in the 1980s and the waves that followed. They and their contributors work from film to film, tracing the social elements that make up the characters, narratives and visuals of such films as A Borrowed Life, City of Sadness and A Bright Summer Day, while also tracking the development of prominent Taiwanese directors. PN1993

978-1-905816-01-9

Picture perfect; landscape, place and travel in British cinema before 1930. Title main entry. Ed. by Laraine Porter and Bryony Dixon. (New research in British film and television studies) University of Exeter Press, ©2007 143 p. $27.95 (pa) This volume, based on the work of archivists, academics, and researchers at the British Silent Cinema Festival in Nottingham, considers how landscape was portrayed in British cinema prior to 1930. Porter (coordinator of the festival, Broadway and Media Centre, Nottingham, UK) and Dixon, a curator at the BFI National Archive, bring together 13 articles that discuss Edwardian cinema and realism, urban and natural locations and film marketing, pictorialism, foreign locations, and public spaces, in several films such as the Rogues of London, A Day in the Hayfields, The Lure of Crooning Water, and Mist in the Valley. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

–92–

PN1993

2006-102880

978-1-4051-5074-3

PN1993

2006-021950

978-0-7425-5450-4

Postwar Hollywood, 1946-1962.

Sinascape; contemporary Chinese cinema.

Casper, Drew. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 459 p. $89.95 Casper (American film, U. of Southern California) offers a substantial examination of Hollywood cinema in the two decades following WWII. He describes the changing characteristics of the business end of Hollywood as well as individual genres such as comedy and social satire as they were influenced by and responded to recent history; censorship; the McCarthy witch-hunts; racial struggles; and developments in visual and sound technology, style, and public interests (as embodied in films employing documentary and psychological-sociological realism).

Xu, Gary G. Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 175 p. $24.95 (pa) The author uses the term “sinascape” to encompass the transnational network of the Chinese film industry, the film industry’s representation of China, and films as they pertain to mediation, transnationalism, nationalism, and global politics. Xu (Chinese and cinema studies, U. of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign) probe six issues of contemporary global politics: proliferation of the copyright industry, representation of violence and violence of representation, manipulation of reality through mediation and simulacra, relentless demolition driven by modernization and urbanization, erasure of individual memories by linear and masculinist history, and domination of socioeconomic and political life by the cinematic mode of production. Each of these issues are taken up in separate chapters that explore how they are revealed through readings of such films as Hero, House of Flying Daggers, Devils on the Doorstep, Beijing Bicycle, Suzhou River, Kung Fu Hustle, and Millenium Mambo.

PN1993

2007-003043

978-0-275-99080-0

Post-pop cinema; the search for meaning in new American film. Mayshark, Jesse Fox. Praeger, ©2007 198 p. $44.95 While he considers the 10 American directors (and one screenwriter) discussed here all members of a “post-pop” or “post-post modernism” school, Mayshark (staff editor for New York Times News Service) is wary of bunching them together for the fact that their most uniting trait is actually their overt individualism. Nonetheless he finds ample similarities in the “chinstroking” and “anarchic” works of P.T. and Wes Anderson (not related), David O. Russell, Todd Haynes, and Charlie Kaufman with Spike Jonze and Michel Gondry, because they all tread the line between irony and sentiment and address questions of alienation and morality with a non- moralizing tone. The author offers analysis of this group’s major films and of its major critics, and in the final chapter introduces three less prolific but promising American post-pop visionaries— the directors of Fight Club, Lost in Translation, and Donnie Darko. PN1993

2007-005940

PN1993

2006-033998

978-0-8166-4708-8

Time frames; Japanese cinema and the unfolding of history. Nygren, Scott. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 297 p. $25.00 (pa) The turning point in Nygren’s (film and media studies, U. of Florida) account of Japan’s film history is the 1951 Venice Film Festival, where Kurosawa’s Rashomon won best film. At that point, Japanese film went from an insular and isolated phenomenon to an internationally appreciated, appropriated, and criticized art. Nygren tells the story of Japanese film before and after this event, as well as exploring the history presented in the films, considering major themes and how Western and Japanese audiences and schools of criticism approach them.

0-7734-5511-6

Representation of the cultural revolution in Chinese films by the Fifth Generation filmmakers; Zhang Yimou, Chen Kaige, and Tian Zhuangzhuang.

PN1994

Chen, Ming-May Jessie and Mazharul Haque. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 205 p. $109.95 Chen (mass communication, Providence U., Taiwan) and Haque (mass communication and journalism, U. of Southern Mississippi, US) examine filmic portrayals of the Chinese Cultural Revolution by “fifth generation” filmmakers Chen Kaige, Tian Zhuangzhuang, and Zhang Yimou in their respective films Farewell, My Concubine, The Blue Kite, and To Live. Close readings of these films are used to advance the argument that fictional narratives on the screen are able to accurately portray historic events, albeit in a different manner form documentary films. In advancing this argument, they also consider the differences between Chinese and Western depictions of the Cultural Revolution and put forth a theory about the connections between film and history.

Kashani, Tony. Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 224 p. $68.25 (pa) There is indeed a mystique in cinema that captivates viewers, says Kashani (film, College of San Mateo, California) and those who do not study it risk becoming lost in it. He explores cinematography, theories in cinema, American cinema as a system, the westerns, the war film, credits, documentaries, international cinema, and other topics. A study guide accompanies the text.

PN1993

2006-013419

2006-275224

978-0-7575-2314-4

Deconstructing the mystique; an introduction to cinema. (study guide included)

978-0-02-865791-2

Schirmer encyclopedia of film; 4v. Grant, Barry Keith. Thomson Gale, ©2007 2136 p. $425.00 This four-volume reference on film treats its subject as art, entertainment, and industry contains 200 alphabetical entries discussing film genres; studies; national cinemas; technological, commercial, and cultural issues; and critical theories of film. Entries are longer than in many other similar references, ranging from approximately 1,500 to 9,000 words each, and are intended to reflect both the most influential and the most recent scholarship from the different areas of film studies. Each entry includes a brief “further reading” bibliography. A representative sample of topics covered includes auteur theory and authorship, B movies, Chinese cinema, choreography, fantasy films, French film, feminism, Native Americans and cinema, reception theory, road movies, sexuality, structuralism and poststructuralism, United Artists, violence, Walt Disney Company, and Yiddish cinema. The encyclopedia includes a large, but not overwhelming, number of film stills and other illustrative materials. Chief editor Grant (film studies and popular culture, Brock U., Canada) also includes 230 sidebars profiling important film figures related to accompanying articles (for example, Shirley Temple is profiled as part of the entry on child stars).

–93–

PN1994

2006-017728

0-415-36567-8

Film studies; the essential resource. Bennett, Peter et al. Routledge, ©2007 428 p. $125.00 Over 100 reprinted article excerpts set out the fundamentals of film studies. They were selected to try to reconcile the apparent paradox that films are made specifically accessible enough to appeal to a popular audience, but at the same time comprise a complex cultural form that is open to a range of analytic approaches. The topics include production, canon, genre, star, themes of textual analysis, industry, Hollywood, national cinemas, and alternative takes. PN1994

1-84682-018-9

National cinemas and world cinema. Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin Rockett and John Hill. (Studies in Irish film; 3) Four Courts Press, ©2006 149 p. $55.00 Film scholars, most from Ireland, present a selection of 11 papers from the 2005 meeting of an annual conference, held in Dublin. They situate national—mostly but not only Irish—cinema in the context of world cinema. Among their topics are the cinematograph in provincial Ireland 1896-1906, American dreams and Irish myths in The Secret of Roan Inish, the films of Andrei Tarkovsky, and designing asynchronous sound for film. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1994

2006-279523

978-1-4051-5411-6

PN1995

Thinking through cinema; films as philosophy. Title main entry. Ed. by Murray Smith and Thomas E. Wartenberg. Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 222 p. $39.95 (pa) Including works by both film scholars and philosophers, Smith (film studies, U. of Kent, UK) and Wartenberg (philosophy, Mount Holyoke U., US) present seventeen papers take up the question of whether philosophy can take the form of, or be articulated through, film. In sections covering American, European, and avant-garde cinemas, the contributors display a wide range of approaches, topical concerns, and conclusions. Specific topics include transparency and twist in narrative fiction film, Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind and the morality of memory, Sartre’s philosophy of nothingness and the modern melodrama, cinema and subjectivity in Krzysztof Kieslowski, and directing desire and female auteurship in the cinema of Catherine Breillat. PN1995

2007-009401

978-0-8262-1749-3

Banned in Kansas; motion picture censorship, 1915-1966. Butters, Gerald R. U. of Missouri Press, ©2007 348 p. $44.95 Butters (history, Aurora U.) describes the history of film censorship in Kansas, a topic not explored in detail in other histories. The Kansas State Board of Review of Motion Pictures operated from 1915 to 1966, and Butters explores its censorship within the context of the larger nation. Questions he considers include the reasons for censorship legislation; political, economic, and cultural factors (such as the reform movement of Progressivism, the support of the press, the fight against modernity, the dedication of citizens to education and morality, and the prohibition of alcohol); whether the citizens approved of censorship; and why it lasted so long. He uses primary source materials such as the records of the Kansas State Board of Review of Motion Pictures, correspondence by governors, and periodicals, to detail the story. The audience for the book is cinema scholars and film aficionados. PN1995

2007-015420

978-0-7864-3063-5

The body in Hollywood slapstick. Clayton, Alex. McFarland & Co., ©2007 229 p. $35.00 (pa) In this text for film scholars and interested lay readers, Clayton (affiliation not cited) explores the Hollywood genre of physical comedy from the silent era onwards. Each of nine chapters uses examples from the work of greats such as Charlie Chaplin and Buster Keaton to illuminate the relationship between the body and something else (for example, the mind, the voice, or machines). Female slapstick performance is given its own chapter. The text is accompanied throughout by b&w movie stills. PN1995

2006-023867

978-0-8108-5878-7

Caligari’s heirs; the German cinema of fear after 1945. Title main entry. Ed. by Steffen Hantke. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 248 p. $35.00 (pa) A dozen contributions from international scholars critically examine various German horror films from the early postwar years to the present day. Themes addressed include (for example) the connections between the German Autorenfilm and horror cinema, and the influence of commercial American movies on the genre. Interviews with three directors— Jörg Buttgereit, Robert Sigl, and Nico Hoffmann—complete the volume. Hantke teaches English at Sogang U. in Seoul, South Korea. PN1995

2006-032950

978-0-8166-4357-8

Cartographic cinema. Conley, Tom. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 264 p. $25.00 (pa) Most movies contain maps, contends Conley (Romance languages and visual and environmental studies, Harvard U.), if not explicitly on screen, then in some unseen manner suggesting the locale or itinerary of the action, whether fiction or documentary. He suggests how cartography can be used as a way of viewing cinema. Among his chapters are Jean Renoir and cartographies in deep focus, desperate journeys from Casablanca to Indiana Jones, juvenile geographies in Les Mistons, and a roadmap for Thelma and Louise.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-047192

978-0-7734-5774-4

Categorizing twentieth-century film using Northrop Frye’s Anatomy of criticism; relating literature and film. Hamilton, Mark A. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 349 p. $119.95 It took a nineteenth-century critic Hamilton (English and modern languages, Liberty U.) explains Frye’s cyclical phases of comedy and irony, comedy and romance, romance and tragedy, romance and comedy, tragedy and romance, tragedy and irony, irony/satire and comedy and irony, satire and tragedy, using an elliptical schema invented by no less than Roger Ebert. As he works through dozens of films in all the phases and categories, Hamilton shows how each fits within the schema and relates to other examples located there, explaining the phase’s characteristics against the framework set up by Frye’s Anatomy of Criticism. The films, which range from military classics and Hollywood histories to classic and modern Westerns, film noir, romantic comedies, and even Revenge of the Nerds, serve to illustrate how Frye’s unique approach to the written also applies so well to the filmed. The result, despite the complicated nature of Frye’s work, is both agile and accessible. PN1995

2006-034249

978-1-4051-5982-1

Cinema and modernism. Trotter, David. (Critical quarterly book series) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 205 p. $34.95 (pa) Trotter (English literature, U. of Cambridge, UK) agrees with the late British novelist Elizabeth Bowen that there are affinities between cinema and modernist literature, but rather than reiterate previous arguments that those affinities are connected to transferable techniques, he proposes a model of parallelism. In other words modern literature and early cinema can be understood as constituting and constituted by parallel histories. He suggests that cinema, for at least the first ten years after its invention, was a neutral recording medium and not a representational art. It was this recording nature of cinema that fascinated modernist writers and modernism’s formula became “literature as (recording) medium before literature as (representational) art.” PN1995

978-0-7748-1378-5

Cinematic howling; women’s films, women’s film theories. Cheu, Hoi F. U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 206 p. $85.00 Cheu (film theory and applied media aesthetics, Laurentian U.) looks at women’s filmmaking and how women engage in the process of storytelling. He examines films written and directed by women and focuses on metafictional films—stories about storytelling and films about filmmaking—to understand their theoretical practice outside of conventional mass media. Those he discusses include Angela Carter’s The Company of Wolves, Marguerite Duras’ Hiroshima mon amour, Susan Streitfeld’s Female Perversions, Léa Pool’s Lost and Delirious, Barbara Sweete’s Perfect Pie, Clara Law’s Goddess of 1967, Agnès Varda’s Sans toit ni loi (Vagabond), and Marleen Gorris’ Antonia. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press. PN1995

2006-036019

978-0-8014-4492-0

The cinema of globalization; a guide to films about the new economic order. Zaniello, Tom. Cornell U. Press, ©2007 202 p. $49.95 They are set in Beijing, in New York, and in Berlin, or in tea fields, plastics factories, and sweatshops. Rarely do these feature-length documentaries, short films, television programs, or fare suitable for the neighborhood cineplex express the belief that globalization is a good idea, whether on a grand or small scale. As Zaniello (honors program, Northern Kentucky U. and labor studies, National Labor College) points out, these films tend to focus on just one or two aspects of globalization in hopes the aggregate effort will at least sensitize viewers. In 201 reviews Zaniello describes traditional documentaries such as The Corporation, commercial efforts such as Rollover, purely agit-prop work such as Uprooted, satirical and humorous work such as the Auf Wiedersehen, Pet series, cinema-verité (A Decent Factory) and mockumentaries such as EPIC 2014. The commentary is brisk and frequently illustrated with production stills.

–94–

PN1995

2006-021862

978-0-8135-4032-0

PN1995

2006-003504

1-932907-15-7

City that never sleeps; New York and the filmic imagination.

Fast, cheap, and under control; lessons from the greatest low-budget movies.

Title main entry. Ed. by Murray Pomerance. Rutgers U. Press, ©2007 289 p. $24.95 (pa) Sixteen essays are gathered together here, on the cinematic representation of New York City. Pomerance (sociology, Ryerson U.) notes that the essays resist the tradition that sees the films as an outgrowth of reality. Instead, they view New York as presented as a situation and an experience in films such as Breakfast at Tiffany’s, Gangs of New York, The Warriors, and Rosemary’s Baby. The film work of Woody Allen, Alfred Hitchcock, Sidney Lumet, and Spike Lee are discussed, in addition to ethnicity and urban space, specific characters, social and ethnic tensions, and New York as a city of danger and adjustment.

Gaspard, John. Michael Wiese Productions, ©2006 281 p. $26.95 In this guide, Gaspard relates the details of low-budget filmmaking and describes 33 movies and lessons learned from them, with emphasis on quotes from filmmakers—Roger Corman, Neil LaBute, Jon Favreau, Daniel Myrick, Steven Soderbergh, and Kevin Smith, to name a few. The final chapter indexes the lessons by problem, such as casting, digital technology, scripts, rehearsal, and using your own money. Gaspard, the author of other books on the topic, directed and produced six low-budget features, including Grown Men and Beyond Bob. PN1995

PN1995

2006-101480

978-0-8204-9545-3

Cowboy imperialism and Hollywood film. Anderson, Mark Cronlund. Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 231 p. $29.95 (pa) Popular movies teach history, argues Anderson (history, U. of Regina, Canada), often more effectively than the best high school or college teacher. Accuracy is not a value in the industry, however, but profit and ideology. He focuses here on how westerns have reinforced US imperialism, especially on the frontier and in relation to native peoples. PN1995

2006-036459

978-1-83290-723-0

Digital filmmaking 101; an essential guide to producing low-budget movies, 2d ed.

PN1995

2007-003771

978-1-4051-6370-5

Dying to belong; gangster movies in Hollywood and Hong Kong. Nochimson, Martha P. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 286 p. $74.95 Nochimson (film studies, NYU) sees similarities between gangster movies in America and Hong Kong not just because they are particularly prolific exporters of such films, but also because both are immigrant nations, whose lawless gangsters are nonetheless eerily similar to their “straight” citizens. Here she examines works from days before The Godfather (e.g. Little Caesar) to the present (Hong Kong’s Young and Dangerous series), illustrating themes including the anxiety of marginality, the Taoist code and Hong Kong’s gangsters, and illusions of material wealth and upward mobility of newcomers. In The Sopranos TV series, she finds a marriage of the characterization and filmmaking of both Hollywood and Hong Kong. An interview with the show’s creator, David Chase, composes the epilogue. PN1995

2007-003659

978-0-313-33306-4

Encyclopedia of film noir. Mayer, Geoff and Brian McDonnell. Greenwood Press, ©2007 477 p. $85.00 New Zealand-based film studies scholars Mayer and McDonnell list and describe approximately 130 films, actors, and directors of the film noir genre in alphabetically arranged entries. Along with classics such as Hitchcock’s works, Chinatown, and Sunset Boulevard, this highly crossreferential text discusses newer noir such as Shallow Grave and Memento. Five essays open the book and expound on themes including noir’s reflection on the McCarthy era and the influence of hard boiled detective fiction on the films of Bogart and his ilk.

–95–

978-0-415-32433-5

Chaudhuri, Shohini. (Routledge critical thinkers) Routledge, ©2006 148 p. $23.95 (pa) This pithy volume is part of a series of studies that supplement and enhance university courses with authoritative explanations of influential thinkers in the humanities. Chaudhuri (contemporary writing and film, U. of Essex, UK) describes the unifying theories that inform the four feminist filmmakers, with many examples from their work. Students will come away not only with a familiarity of what makes Mulvey and the rest tick, but also with knowledge of the essential trends in feminism. PN1995

Newton, Dale & John Gaspard. Michael Wiese Productions, ©2007 291 p. $26.95 (pa) Gaspard and Newton have created three award-winning and critically acclaimed low-budget feature films and here share what they learned from the experience. They discuss the script, business aspects, the cast and crew, production, and distribution. There is no index. No date is noted for the first edition.

2006-014097

Feminist film theorists; Laura Mulvey, Kaja Silverman, Teresa de Lauretis, Barbara Creed.

2007-923533

978-0-7618-3721-3

Film, art, and filmart; an introduction to aesthetics through film. Dahnke, Michael D. Univ. Press of America, ©2007 127 p. $22.95 (pa) Dahnke (health and society, Drexel U., and philosophy, St. Joseph’s U. and The College of New Jersey) considers the definition of art by examining film in terms of art as representation, form, expression, institution, knowledge, and freedom. These last three categories address George Dickie’s theory, aesthetic cognitivism and the theories of Nelson Goodman and Martha Nussbaum, and the perspectives of Hegel, Nietzsche, Foucault, and others, respectively. Other theorists discussed include Plato, Kant, Tolstoy, and Collingwood. For each of the categories, many film examples are used and examined in terms of aesthetics. The book is meant for those in film studies or instructors teaching introduction to philosophy courses who want to include aesthetics. PN1995

2006-015938

978-0-8166-4970-9

Film hieroglyphs. (reprint, 1991) Conley, Tom. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 252 p. $22.50 (pa) In examining the ways that writing bears on cinema, Conley (romance languages, and visual and environmental studies, Harvard) takes a different direction from most film theory, which privileges the visual. Conley focuses on the ruptures in film at which story, image and writing appear to be at odds with one another and finds in these moments hieroglyphs that mark a design attesting to a hidden rhetoric and to configurations of meaning that cinema cannot always control. This paperback is a reprint of the 1991 edition published by the U. of Minnesota. PN1995

978-0-8020-9508-4

Film histories; an introduction and reader. Grainge, Paul et al. U. of Toronto Press, ©2007 612 p. $39.95 (pa) Divided into approximately five-year segments, this textbook recounts both the aesthetic and technical development of feature films since 1895. An excerpt from a classic example of research in film history completes each of the 24 chapters. The authors teach at the University of Nottingham and the University of East Anglia.

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1995

2006-029485

978-0-313-32681-3

PN1995

2006-019070

978-0-8108-5545-8

Filmography of world history.

Historical dictionary of African American cinema.

Schultz, Deanne. Greenwood Press, ©2007 232 p. $59.95 Schultz (history, Malaspina University-College, British Colombia) believes that, despite their characteristic divergence from historical fact, historical feature films are valuable in classrooms as “curiosity builders” for understanding world history. Here, she offers instructors synopses and reviews of approximately 300 films treating subjects in world history. Alphabetically arranged entries discuss the plot as well as the teaching potential of each film, and include cross references to other entries. Also included is a discussion of major themes such as civil war, cross-cultural exchange, and historical narrative. Entries are indexed by title as well as by subject and time period. The author took care when possible to include films offering native and non-Hollywood perspectives.

Berry, S. Torriano and Venise T. Berry. (Historical dictionaries of literature and the arts, no.12) Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 396 p. $85.00 Hundreds of alphabetically arranged entries describe a wide variety of films portraying African Americans and offer brief biographies of the actors, actresses, producers, directors, and others who created them. Supplemental materials include an introduction, a chronology, and a list of winners of the NAACP Image Award. S. Torriano Berry (film, Howard U.) and Venise T. Berry (journalism and mass communications, U. of Iowa) are also the authors of The 50 Most Influential Black Films.

PN1995

2006-037773

0-275-99122-9

From box office to ballot box; the American political film. Booker, M. Keith. Praeger, ©2007 232 p. $49.95 This is a rather straightforward thematic review of the American political film, those that deal with the practice of politics or explicitly address political issues. Generally focusing on post-World War II productions, Booker (English, U. of Arkansas) reviews the way that mainstream American releases have dealt with politics in their storylines and themes, offering only the most basic of critical commentary. The thematic chapters are devoted to political campaigns, the process of government, communism and McCarthyism, nuclear fear and the Cold war, politics and the media, labor and class, the Vietnam War, and war in the postCold War era. PN1995

Gangster film reader.

2006-014907

978-0-8204-6345-2

Hip hop in American cinema. Donalson, Melvin. Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 191 p. $29.95 (pa) Filmmaker and academic Donalson (American civilization, Brown U.) is admittedly older than the hip hop generation, but became connected to the culture in the early 80s through his younger brother, and remains so through his son. In this monograph, he takes a historical and critical look at hip hop’s representation in American cinema, from breakout films like Beat Street, through the gangster drama heyday in the 90s, up to the unprecedented variety—and mainstream credit—of post-millennial hip hop films. Works examined come from independent and Hollywood studios; and in turns represent creative, socio-political, comedic, critical, stereotypical, and musical perspectives on the hip hop genre. The author also details the mainstream acting success of rappers Tupak Shakur and Queen Latifah, among others. Filmographies by title and by performer are included.

Art Book News Annual 2008

Pennington, Jody W. Praeger, ©2007 216 p. $49.95 This work by Pennington (media and culture studies, U. of Aarhus, Denmark) is a social and cultural history of the representation of sex and its regulation in American cinema. She takes a chronological approach to the film industry’s self-censorship regimes through the mid-1960s, nonmainstream film most affected by obscenity law, sexual themes in the films that helped put an end to the Production Code, changing American attitudes towards sex and their reflection in film through the 1980s, and the present-day conservative counterattack on liberal sexual realignment as it has played out in film. Remaining chapters adopt a more thematic approach and offer analysis of the revision of sexual representation of the past following the demise of the Production Code and representations of homosexuality, adultery, and pedophilia. PN1995

2006-017117

978-1-4051-3901-4

Worland, Rick. (New approaches to film genre) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 324 p. $79.95 This accessible text introduces students and movie-goers to the horror film genre. Worland (cinema-television, Southern Methodist U.) provides a broad overview of cinematic horror from the 1920s to the present day and discusses the genre’s place in American culture. He then takes a closer look at some significant films, including Frankenstein (1931), Invasion of the Body Snatchers (1956), The Texas Chainsaw Massacre (1974), and Bram Stoker’s Dracula (1992). Brief profiles of several prominent horror directors are found in the appendix. PN1995

Title main entry. Ed. by Julie F. Codell. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 474 p. $89.95 The 25 essays, first published during the past couple decades, are intended to ease students who have had at least one introductory film course into sophisticated film analysis using contemporary issues as a transport medium. Among the topics are Fight Club as a symptom of the network society, cowgirl tales, Pocahontas and The Indian in the Cupboard, and cultural identity and diaspora in contemporary Hong Kong cinema. Students are considered mature enough not to need illustrations or an index. 2006-035075

978-0-275-99226-2

978-1-4051-3232-9

Genre, gender, race, and world cinema.

PN1995

2007-016352

The history of sex in American film.

The horror film; an introduction.

978-0-87910-332-3

Title main entry. Ed. by Alain Silver and James Ursini. Limelight Editions, ©2007 410 p. $20.00 (pa) Containing a mix of previously published articles and new essays, this reader provides an overview of the gangster film genre, from its emergence in the early 1930s to the present day. Approximately 200 b&w movie stills and photos from the editors personal collections illustrate the volume. Silver and Ursini have collaborated on a number of books on film history. PN1995

PN1995

2006-039752

978-0-7864-2821-2

Horror films of the 1980s. Muir, John Kenneth. McFarland & Co., ©2007 829 p. $59.95 Muir surveys about 325 horror films from the 1980s, presented by year of their release and then alphabetically. He covers all horror films released between 1980 and 1989, including some that are seen as science fiction, such as The Terminator and Alien. Some films from Italy, Canada, New Zealand, Japan, and other countries are included. Each entry contains a sample of reviews, list of cast and crew, rating, running time, synopsis, and commentary by Muir. Some also contain a section on the film’s legacy and interviews, as well as b&w photos. Muir is the author of several books, including Horror Films of the 1970s and Terror Television. PN1995

92-56645

978-0-7864-2126-8

Japanese science fiction, fantasy, and horror films; a critical analysis and filmography of 103 features released in the United States, 1950-1992. (reprint, 1993) Galbraith, Stuart. McFarland & Co., ©2007 424 p. $35.00 (pa) In this volume, a reprint from 1993, Galbraith analyzes 103 Japanese science fiction, horror, and fantasy films released in the US from 1950 to 1992. Organized by decade and Japanese release date, each film is described with a plot synopsis, critique, background on the production, reviews, and comparisons between Japanese and US versions. American and Japanese titles are included in the extensive filmography, as well as release dates, credits, running time, and ratings. Much of the information in the book has not previously been published, and Galbraith emphasizes information for lesser-known films over well-known ones. Fully-animated features are excluded. Galbraith is the author of The Japanese Filmography.

–96–

PN1995

2006-024948

978-0-8118-5449-8

PN1995

978-0-85989-773-0

¡Mas! Cine mexicano more!; sensational Mexican movie posters, 1957-1990.

Multimedia histories; from the magic lantern to the internet.

Agrasánchez, Rogelio. Chronicle Books, ©2007 131 p. $19.95 (pa) Divided into categories, this reference reprints 250 color movie posters, primarily hand-drawn, featuring images of smuggling and betrayal, crime, youth rebellion, prostitutes, macho men, comedy, monsters, wrestlers, and hicks. The introduction and movie titles are provided in both English and Spanish.

Title main entry. Ed. by James Lyons and John Plunkett. (Exeter studies in film history) University of Exeter Press, ©2007 275 p. $80.00 (pa) Lyons (film studies, Exeter U., UK) and Plunkett (Victorian literature, Exeter U., UK) bring together 16 chapters of new media scholarship by contributors in the fields of communication, media studies, film, English, and others from the UK and US. In historical and theoretical case studies, these scholars discuss connections between digital culture and the history of screen and audio technologies in the nineteenth through twenty-first centuries in addition to the social, political, and aesthetic ramifications of multimedia history. They consider the multi-media character of devices ranging from the stereoscope to television, including automata, digital art, wireless radio, curiosity cabinets, and early film exhibition. Sections are organized around concepts: culture, aesthetics, and influence; remediation; consumption and interactivity, and convergence. Specifically, they address the impact of cinema, radio, and computing, the remaking of pre-existing artistic forms through new media, screen entertainments and interactive experiences, and processes of media convergence. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

PN1995

2006-017976

978-0-8047-5431-6

The material image; art and the real in film. Peucker, Brigitte. Stanford U. Press, ©2007 251 p. $24.95 (pa) Examining films by Scorsese, Greenaway, Wenders, Kubrick, Fassbinder, and other directors, Peucker (film studies, Yale U.) explores connections between film and the “real,” increasingly focusing on the “real” body of the film spectator as the book progresses. She draws on theories from across the scholarly literature of the visual arts in order to explore intermedia issues of art and the body—images and the real—such as the way reality is suggested by visual metaphors, its relation to illusion, the boundary between art and the real, and the spectator’s relationship to the visual. PN1995

2006-017027

978-1-56478-461-2

Mindscreen; Bergman, Godard, and first-person film. (reprint, 1978) Kawin, Bruce F. (Dalkey archive scholarly series) Dalkey Archive Press, ©2006 241 p. $24.95 (pa) This work of film criticism by Kawin (English and film, U. of Colorado at Boulder) was an attempt to work out previously unaddressed issues of narrative consciousness and reflexivity in film. The argument is that just as filmmakers have managed to signify the subjectivity of a what a character says through the voice over or what character sees through subjective focus and imitative angle of vision, so they have found means to signify the subjectivity of what a character thinks, a technique he calls “mindscreen” to distinguish it from presentation of the images in a character’s physical eye. A broad range of films, in particular those of Ingmar Bergman and Jean- Luc Godard, are examined in order to workout the implications of the technique of mindscreen. This is a paperbound edition of a work first published in 1978. PN1995

2006-018676

978-1-55849-575-3

Movie censorship and American culture, 2d ed. Title main entry. Ed. by Francis G. Couvares. U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2006 334 p. $24.95 (pa) Eleven essays presented by Couvares (history and American studies, Amherst College) draw connections between the evolution of censorship and self-censorship in American film and larger social processes of the 20th century, including the consolidation of culture industries and the spread of consumer markets; the evolution of government regulation of these markets; interethnic conflict at the local, national, and international levels; and the transformation of gender relations and the roles of women in American society. Specific topics include Mae West and the frontiers of sexuality and race relations, the impact of women progressive reformers on popular cinema, theater licensing and the origins of movie censorship in New York, representations of global ethnicity, the politics of the Hollywood Ten (writers and directors jailed for contempt of Congress for refusing to testify before the House Committee on UnAmerican Activities), and the Supreme Court and the decline of censorship in the 1950s and 60s.

Reference & Research Book News and SciTech Book News are published quarterly. Together they cover close to 20,000 books each year. Contact us for sample issues: (503) 281-9230 or [email protected].

PN1995

2007-023400

978-0-275-99900-1

Postmodern Hollywood; what’s new in film and why it makes us feel so strange. Booker, M. Keith. Praeger, ©2007 213 p. $49.95 Adopting much of the theoretical perspective of Fredric Jameson’s Postmodernism; or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism (1991), Booker (English, U. of Arkansas) seeks to introduce a general audience to an understanding of postmodernism through the window of popular films. He examines the prevalence of narrative, formal, and thematic fragmentation in such films as Run Lola Run and Memento; nostalgia as a mode of postmodern film; nostalgia towards earlier motion pictures; and television and other media as a source of style and content in American postmodern film. PN1995

2007-005422

978-0-415-38431-5

Queer screen; a screen reader. Title main entry. Ed. by Jackie Stacey and Sarah Street. (Screen readers) Routledge, ©2007 304 p. $33.95 (pa) Stacey (cultural and women’s studies, Lancaster U., UK) and Street (film, U. of Bristol) searched two decades of issues of the Screen film journal to compile these 17 articles on queer films—explorations of deviance from heterosexuality in both explicit and subtle modes, as influenced by either the screenwriting, direction, acting, and/or audience reception. Films such as Alien Resurrection, The Rocky Horror Picture Show and Pedro Almodóvar’s The Law of Desire are examined, along with less mainstream works by Richard Fung, Ulrike Ottinger, and others. Among the themes explored are: queerness and technology, racialization in Joanna d’Arc of Mongolia, and representations of the queer body. The final section comprises six critical discussions of Boys Don’t Cry debating its pitfalls and achievements in the frame of queer theory and transsexual identity. PN1995

2006-924103

978-0-8478-2890-6

Scenes from the city; filmmaking in New York, 1966-2006. Title main entry. Ed. by James Sanders. Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 287 p. $49.95 Eye candy for those who love New York and all film buffs, this big volume (10.25x10.25″) is filled with stills and shots of films as they’re being made, each accompanied by a caption telling its story. The stills are grouped by decade (the first group is “before 1966”), then arranged by themes, such as chases, New York landmarks, Harlem, Central Park, and New York moments. Sander, an architect and filmmaker, contributes an essay, and an interview is included with Martin Scorsese. PN1995

2006-102526

978-0-8135-4173-0

Science fiction cinema; between fantasy and reality. Cornea, Christine. Rutgers U. Press, ©2007 308 p. $23.95 (pa) Cornea (film and television studies, U. of East Anglia) situates selected films from the 1950s to the 1990s in order to place the thematic and formal concerns raised by science fiction films within wider cultural and historical contexts. She draws on reviews and previous scholarship, and also on pertinent academic theory to scrutinize the principles and aesthetic conventions of the films within the contexts from which they emerged.

–97–

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1995

2007-011064

978-0-7425-5584-6

PN1997

Screening difference; how Hollywood’s blockbuster films imagine race, ethnicity, and culture. Ginneken, Jaap van. Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 281 p. $29.95 (pa) Next time you must endure the latest buddy movie or action feature, while away the time attempting to understand why an actor of Italian descent is cast as a Native American, or why makeup is supposed to turn white actors Chinese. Independent scholar Ginneken has an explanation: Hollywood is so ethnocentric that its products are made entirely for “us,” mainstream white people as opposed to “them,” anyone else. As a result such gaffs as conflicting ethnicity, cultural insensitivity and a devoted misunderstanding of reality are standard operating procedure. To prove his point Ginneken works through dozens of adventures, Westerns, romantic encounters, spy movies, war movies, religious films and science fiction flicks, locating the anomalies and the reasons for them in each. Particularly telling are pictures subsidized by military organizations, who offer free props and sets but freely censor the product. PN1995

Dickinson, Peter. U. of Toronto Press, ©2007 280 p. $45.00 Dickinson (English, Simon Fraser U.) offers a field guide to reading the history and theory of films adapted from modern Canadian literature, through the lens of gender studies. Introducing this genre, in which adaptations are often an “open-ended process” such as Ondaatje’s The English Patient) (1992) and the Academy Award-winning 1997 film based on it, he explores issues of national identity, sexual identity, and gender in adaptations from Rachel, Rachel, Paul Newman’s 1968 adaptation of Margaret Laurence’s A Jest of God (1966), to Bruce McDonald’s 1996 adaptation of Hard Core Logo about a Vancouver punk band. Movie stills and a filmography complement the text. 2006-036001

Weaver, Tom et al. McFarland & Co., ©2007 608 p. $55.00 Organized chronologically, this reference for researchers and movie buffs examines 86 horror classics released by Universal Studios during the period 1931-1946. In addition to a plot summary and critical analysis, each entry includes a complete cast list, credits, and production history. Horror film scholar Weaver also shares behind-the-scenes information gleaned from interviews he conducted with the movie makers. The second edition features a new selection of b&w photographs and poster reproductions as well as an appendix listing additional films of interest. 2006-012714

0-8204-7852-0

Visual economies of/in motion; sport and film. Title main entry. Ed. by C. Richard King and David J. Leonard. (Cultural critique; v.6) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 274 p. $34.95 (pa) This volume takes a multidisciplinary approach to examining sports in American cinema of the past quarter century. Eleven scholarly essays consider sport films ranging from Hollywood blockbusters such as Seabiscuit to independent documentaries. A number of critical theories— feminist, poststructural, psychoanalytic, postcolonial, and critical race— are employed in the analysis of key themes of race, gender, class, (trans)nationalism, and collective memory. The editors are affiliated with Washington State University’s Department of Comparative Ethnic Studies. PN1995

2006-002413

978-0-8018-8436-8

Women filmmakers in early Hollywood. Mahar, Karen Ward. (Studies in industry and society) Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 291 p. $45.00 Alice Guy Blaché and Lois Weber were filmmakers in the silent film era, but such opportunities for women disappeared by the 1920s—with the notable exception of Dorothy Arzner. Based on her research for an oral history project sponsored by the Women in Film Foundation, Mahar (history, Siena College, New York) showcases early woman directors and analyzes trends in the Hollywood film industry. Blending feminist with historical scholarship, she attributes this shift from a more egalitarian theatrical model to the rise of big business. She concludes that: “A century after the integration of women as filmmakers, the promise held out by the early American cinema is still unfulfilled.” Illustrations include vintage movie stills.

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1997

2007-009828

978-0-8108-5949-4

Title main entry. Ed. by James M. Welsh and Peter Lev. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 361 p. $45.00 (pa) In this anthology for film studies students and cinema scholars, Welsh (English, emeritus, Salisbury University) and Lev (electronic media and film, Towson University) present essays on the hows and whys of adaptation studies, and offer discussions of films adapted from classic and popular literature, drama, biography, and memoir. Although many of the essays have appeared in Literature/Film Quarterly, more than half are original contributions. Chosen for their readability, they avoid theoretical jargon as much as possible. Several essays provide detailed analyses of films, in some cases discussing more than one adaptation of a literary or dramatic source. Works examined include The Manchurian Candidate, The Quiet American, Romeo and Juliet, Dracula, and Starship Troopers. PN1997

2006-022473

978-1-4051-3180-3

Spartacus; film and history.

978-0-7864-2974-5

Universal horrors; the studio’s classic films, 1931-1946, 2d ed.

PN1995

Title main entry. Ed. by Monique Tschofen and Jennifer Burwell. Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2007 417 p. $29.95 (pa) Tschofen and Burwell (English, Ryerson U.) present 18 essays aimed at scholars and fans of filmmaker Atom Egoyan’s work. They examine themes in his films, such as The Sweet Hereafter and Exotica, his theater and opera stagings, and his art installations and their political, philosophical, and aesthetic context, in addition to their intellectual and emotional aspects. Specifically, they look at his use of technology, themes relating to the Armenian diaspora, and the social elements of his work in terms of psychoanalytic discourse, feminism, and film theory. The final section consists of two interviews—one with filmmaker Gariné Torossian, who is influenced by Egoyan, and the other with Egoyan himself. Essay authors are scholars of film, English, women’s studies, and other disciplines and work in North America and Europe. A filmography is included.

The literature/film reader; issues of adaptation.

978-0-8020-4475-4

Screening gender, framing genre; Canadian literature into film.

PN1995

0-88920-487-X

Image and territory; essays on Atom Egoyan.

Title main entry. Ed. by Martin M. Winkler. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 267 p. $74.95 One of the costliest movies of its era, Stanley Kubrik’s Spartacus (1960) featured an all-star cast and won several Academy Awards. Written to be accessible to both academic and general readers, this volume examines the film from a variety of historical, political, and cinematic perspectives. Eleven essays from historians and film scholars are followed by English translations of the principal ancient Roman sources on the slave revolt led by Spartacus. Winkler teaches classics at George Mason U. PN1997

2006-021196

978-0-8166-4125-3

What have they built you to do?; The Manchurian candidate and Cold War America. Jacobson, Matthew Frye and Gaspar González. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 234 p. $19.95 (pa) Jacobson (American studies, Yale U.) and Miami scholar and journalist González show how various elements of the 1962 movie about brainwashed US soldiers expressed fears in the political culture of the Cold War. Among their perspectives are the rise of the security state, McCarthy, the Red Queen and the American family, Cold War courtship, and echoes from Kennedy to Reagan. PN1998

2006-011276

978-0-252-07411-0

Abel Ferrara. Brenez, Nicole. (Contemporary film directors) U. of Illinois Press, ©2007 210 p. $19.95 (pa) Brenez (cinema studies, U. Paris I/Pantheon-Sorbonne, France) explores the oeuvre of an American film director she finds unfairly neglected by film critics and predictably neglected by the film industry, Abel Ferrara (Fear City, Bad Lieutenant, King of New York, New Rose Hotel, etc.). She goes beyond exploring the aesthetics of Ferrara’s work in order to interrogate how misunderstandings of his aesthetic are actually a failure to understand his ethics. His work, at its heart, can be characterized as an effort to use popular genres to explore the nature of evil and other moral and social problems.

–98–

PN1998

2006-274601

978-0-8020-3807-4

The artist as monster; the cinema of David Cronenberg, rev. ed.

2006100168

978-0-8108-5850-3

The brothers grim; the films of Ethan and Joel Coen. Rowell, Erica. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 379 p. $35.00 (pa) Rowell (a journalist and film producer) titles each chapter examining a film from the prolific duo Joel and Ethan Coen (known as the Coen Brothers) after an object that figures so prominently in the movie that it is almost a character. In “Blood Simple: A Photo,” “The Big Lebowski: A Bowling Ball” and the other essays, she offers a synopsis, review, and dissection of the themes, technique, influences, and stark social commentary of the often violent and satirical and always stylized Coen films. The writing-directing brothers also created Raising Arizona, Miller’s Crossing, Oh, Brother, Where Art Thou? and Intolerable Cruelty. PN1998

2007-004095

978-0-7734-5428-6

The cinematic art of Eliseo Subiela, Argentine filmmaker. Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy J. Membrez. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 415+ p. $129.95 In this collection of articles on one of the stars of the art house circuit, contributors examine Subiela’s control of his themes, his innovations and unusual uses of characters, and his subtle but strong impact on Hispanic cinema. Subilea is himself a contributor with a modest piece on his life’s work, and a range of academics critique his transnational appeal, use of meta-narrative and ideas about masculinity, disappearance, the meaning of the fantastic, rhetoric, journeys and arrivals, technology, nostalgia, false memory, the postmodern, and the subconscious. PN1998

2007-015987

978-0-7391-2043-9

The cinema of Michael Mann. Rybin, Steven. (Genre film auteurs) Lexington Books, ©2007 233 p. $34.95 (pa) Rybin (interdisciplinary arts, Ohio U.) considers the work of filmmaker Michael Mann and how he is a “genre stylist” of crime films. Specific films are analyzed; these are The Jericho Mile, Thief, The Keep, Manhunter, The Last of the Mohicans, Heat, The Insider, Ali, Collateral, and Miami Vice, as well as his early work in television. Questions that Rybin asks relate to themes, use and innovations in genre frameworks, and how his style intersects with issues in genre, film criticism, historical context, and auteurism. A filmography is included. The book began as the author’s master’s thesis at Emory U. PN1998

2006-034476

2007-008888

978-0-8108-5885-5

The films of Robert Wise.

Beard, William. U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 568 p. $35.00 (pa) Beard (film and media studies, U. of Alberta) takes his critical eye to the films of David Cronenberg (including Videodrome, The Fly, Naked Lunch, and Crash), responding to existing literature and expounding on his perception of the themes and styles repeatedly explored by the writer/director. He identifies “body horror,” technology, subjectivity, and gender and sexuality as Cronenberg’s major topics of concern; and seeks to prove, through critical essays made up primarily of interpretation, the director’s status as a modernist responding to the conditions of a postmodern world. Two essays, on eXistenZ and Spider are new to the paperback edition, and some of the material was previously published in the book The Shape of Rage and in various film journals. PN1998

PN1998

978-0-8108-5884-8

The cinema of Victor Erice; an open window, rev.ed. Open window. Ed. by Linda C. Ehrlich. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 357 p. $40.00 (pa) This paperback update of the 2000 anthology titled An Open Window: The Cinema of Victor Erice, the first to appear in English on the awardwinning Spanish film director, coincides with the DVD release of The Spirit of the Beehive (El espiritu de la colmena, 1973), his first feature film. Ehrlich (Case Western Reserve U.) introduces critical essays, an Erice interview and commentaries, and reviews of his works since 2000. Known for quality rather than quantity, his poetic films focus on survivors: e.g., of Franco’s regime, time. The book features movie stills, a filmography, and reference list including essays by Erice and critical writings in several languages.

–99–

Keenan, Richard C. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 209 p. $29.95 (pa) Robert Wise (1914-2005) was an American film director and producer best known for such works as The Day the Earth Stood Still, West Side Story, The Sound of Music, and The Sand Pebbles. This book by Keenan (English and modern languages, U. of Maryland) is an appreciative discussion of the value and merit of Wise’s filmic craftsmanship that discusses the 40 movies Wise produced or directed. It draws on many interviews with Wise, as well as first-hand observation of Wise’s working methods on the set of Star Trek: the Movie. One of those interviews is include in an appendix, together with a bibliography and a filmography. PN1998

2006-015941

978-0-8166-4908-2

Forest of pressure; Ogawa Shinsuke and postwar Japanese documentary. Nornes, Abé Mark. (Visible evidence; v.18) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 317 p. $25.00 (pa) Nornes (screen arts and cultures and Asian languages and cultures, U. of Michigan) examines the work of Shinsuke and his collective Ogawa Productions, Ogawa Pro in Japanese, from 1957 to 2000. He details the many pressures that bore down on the collective; and the political, economic, aesthetic, institutional, and interpersonal conditions of their practice. His approach, inspired by the method of the collective, shifts between conventional narrative, close analysis, first-person narration, poetry, historical contextualization, and tall tales. PN1998

2001-055849

978-0-7864-2959-2

Ingmar Bergman; his life and films. (reprint, 2002) Vermilye, Jerry. McFarland & Co., ©2007 180 p. $35.00 (pa) This is a paperbound reprint of a 2002 book. Writer Jerry Vermilye explores noted film director Ingmar Bergman’s life and work starting with his youth in Uppsala, Sweden and covering formative years, development as an artist, and career as an innovative director who specialized in darkly psychological films and had a dedicated group of actors that appeared in many of his works. He discusses how Bergman knew the film business, the strengths and weaknesses of his actors and crews, the arrangement of the set, the framing of the camera, and all other particulars crucial to the art of directing. The second half of the volume contains a brief synopsis of each film with information such as producer, screenwriter, cinematographer, editor, art director, music sound credits, running time, casts, Bergman’s own comments, and critical comments. Many b&w photographs support the text. PN1998

2006-017736

0-415-28852-5

James Cameron. Keller, Alexandra. (Routledge film guidebooks) Routledge, ©2006 193 p. $17.95 (pa) Postmodernism pays. In the case of Titanic, it has paid out almost two billion dollars internationally, allowing director/producer James Cameron to be both powerful and potentially the subject of serious study. Here Keller (film studies, Smith College) provides the first critical study of Cameron as auteur, evaluating the aforesaid nautical movie as well as The Abyss, Aliens, Terminator 2, True Lies and other works. She describes in detail the role Cameron has taken in popular film, especially in the growth of the Hollywood high-concept blockbuster. She evaluates Cameron as a creator of apocalyptic spectacle; as an instigator of debate on gender, genre, technology and class; and as a perpetrator of cinema as a reflexive vision machine. She includes a chronology of Cameron’s life and work within their historical contexts and a filmography. PN1998

2006-029224

978-0-252-07443-1

Jim Jarmusch. Suárez, Juan A. (Contemporary film directors) U. of Illinois Press, ©2007 196 p. $19.95 (pa) This study provides an introduction to the work of independent filmmaker Jim Jarmusch. Suarez (American studies and English, U. of Murcia, Spain) considers his work within the historical context of modernism in the second half of the twentieth century and the concepts of plurality of forces, styles, and ideology in his work. Aesthetic influences such as minimalism, the New York pop vanguard of the late 1970s, punk, structural film, the postwar art cinemas, rock ‘n’ roll, Beat literature and art, classic street photography, Hollywood genre film, European surrealism, and hip-hop are all considered in the study. Other questions concern what makes his films unique and political aspects. The book includes a filmography and an interview conducted by Tod Lippy, reprinted from a 2000 issue of Projections.

Art Book News Annual 2008

PN1998

2006-049323

0-375-40400-7

PN1998

2007-003386

978-0-268-03104-6

Leni; the life and work of Leni Riefenstahl.

Woody Allen; an essay on the nature of the comical.

Bach, Steven. Alfred A. Knopf, ©2007 386 p. $30.00 German director Leni Riefenstahl is at once lauded as one of the great documentary filmmakers of all time and reviled as “Hitler’s filmmaker,” achieving both reputations for her work on the Nazi propaganda films Triumph of the Will and Olympia. Following World War II, Riefenstahl managed a not unsuccessful effort to reconstruct herself as an apolitical artist unaware of the crimes of the Nazi regime. In this biography of Riefenstahl, Bach (Bennington College and Columbia U.) offers a very different picture, portraying her as an ambitious woman, enamored with Hitler’s Mein Kampf and well aware of both her role as a Nazi propagandist and the crimes of the Nazi regime. The biography spends as much time on Leni’s early life as a dancer and actress as it does on her activities under the Nazis and her post-war attempts to refashion herself as a “primitivist” studying the Nuba tribe in Sudan and as an underwater photographer. In spite of Riefenstahl’s attempt at selfrehabilitation, Bach condemns her as nostalgic and unrepentant for the horrors of the Nazis while not failing to recognize the legacy of her aesthetic achievements.

Hösle, Vittorio. U. of Notre Dame Press, ©2007 96 p. $18.00 (pa) First published in English in a special 2000 issue of the journal Film and Philosophy dedicated to American filmmaker Woody Allen, this essay by Hösle (U. of Notre Dame) unpacks what is philosophically interesting about Allen’s comedy. It explores the philosophical issues that Allen’s comedy explicitly addresses, whether just as the subjects of puns and jokes or as the guiding themes of whole works, such as the identity problem in Zelig, the relation between reality and art in The Purple Rose of Cairo, and the objective value of morality in Crimes and Misdemeanors. It also aims to unpack the nature of Allen’s comedy, which arguably “recovers a fullness of the comic that had been lost by high art ... for more than two millennia.”

PN1998

2005-058055

0-7734-5857-3

Narrative voices in Russ Meyer’s films; a cacophony of carnality. Sevastakis, Michael. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 423 p. $129.95 Sevastakik (communication, College of Mount Saint Vincent, New York) looks at the narrative discourse—the place of expression as opposed to the plane of content—in Meyer’s signature soft-porn films. He argues that the audiences of the films have a sense of an all-pervasive presence, a determinate intelligence and moral sensibility that has selected, ordered, rendered, and expressed the cinematic materials in a particular way. PN1998

2006-012553

1-59403-146-0

Red star over Hollywood; the film colony’s long romance with the left. (reprint, 2005)

99-56062

978-0-8108-5900-5

Satyajit Ray; in search of the modern. (reprint, 2000) Ganguly, Suranjan. (Filmmakers series; no.73) Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 175 p. $24.95 (pa) Satyajit Ray (1921-1992) revolutionized Indian film and is widely considered to be one of the great filmmakers of all time. In this work, Ganguly (U. of Colorado) examines Ray’s negotiations with history and modernity in the six major films he made between 1955 and 1970: Pather Panchali, Aparajito, Apur Sansar, Charulata, Aranyer Din Ratri, and Pratidwandi. Overall, Ganguly sets himself the task of examining how Ray’s films convey the filmmaker’s belief that the modern is best understood as a total experience in relation to how people express themselves in a changing society, although more specific concerns such as Ray’s preoccupation with subjectivity in contexts such as education, urban culture, and the management of grief; the nature of action in a society suspended between apathy and revolution; and writing as a form of female discourse frequently intrude. This is a paperbound edition of a work first published in 2000. PN1998

2006-039109

978-0-313-33796-3

Steven Spielberg; a biography. Jackson, Kathi. (Greenwood biographies) Greenwood Press, ©2007 143 p. $35.00 Aimed at high school students and general readers, this accessible biography describes the life and career of movie director Steven Spielberg. The chronologically organized volume covers everything from Spielberg’s 1969 professional directing debut on TV’s Night Gallery through his many successes with such films as Jaws (1975) and Saving Private Ryan (1998). Jackson (a freelance writer) also supplies a timeline, filmography, and list of awards won by Spielberg.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-2-503-52469-6

Emblemata Sacra; the rhetoric and hermeneutics of illustrated sacred discourse. Title main entry. Ed. by Ralph Dekoninck and Agnés GuiderdoniBruslé. (Imago figurata studies; v.7) Brepols Publishers, ©2007 652 p. $137.00 Inspired by a conference that took place in January 2005 in Leuvan and Louvain-la-Neuve, these 38 papers focus on the relationship between Christian sacred discourse and images, exploring the problematic combination of text and image at spiritual, theological, didactic, moral and political levels. General topics include historical and methodological issues in the study of emblems and spiritual images, the exegesis of two central symbols systems in Christianity (the Scriptures and creation), the image in absentia (in which the iconoclastic image contains conflict), the rhetoric and poetics of the image, and the use of figures in determines contexts, such as those which are staged or incarnated, those in which figures support polemics, and those which are “efficient,” or most understandable from the nineteenth century onward. Distributed in North American by The David Brown Book Co. PQ305

Radosh, Ronald and Allis Radosh. Encounter Books, ©2006 309 p. $17.95 (pa) This is a paperbound edition of a 2005 book. In an attempt to set the record straight, according to their lights, regarding the McCarthy attacks in Hollywood half a century ago, Ronald Radosh (Hudson Institute) and writer Allis Radosh describe the influence of the Communist Party in the film industry over several decades. They trace Hollywood’s connection to radicalism from the 1930s, and describe later interpretations of the Red Scare as well as recent activism in Hollywood that is rooted in the period. PN1998

PN6348

978-90-420-2265-2

Queer sexualities; in French and Francophone literature and film. Title main entry. Ed. by James Day. (French literature series; v.34) Editions Rodopi, ©2007 209 p. $62.00 (pa) Drawn from papers presented at the March/April 2006 French Literature Conference in Columbia, South Carolina, these 14 papers examine queer theory and its application to works of expression, whether on film, in print or in performance. Topics include the binary opposition of medieval exegetical discourse, the genealogy the fable of Iphis and Ianthe and its reflection of the development of heteronormality, the role of comfort and discomfort in non-conformity, Rousseau’s take on sexual difference, Gautier’s questions on sexual identity, Sand’s questions on sexual convergence, odes on Socrates made to order for a lesbian audience, the coexistence of male and female in Proust, the symbolic sexual identity of Tiresias, the homoeroticism of Genet, the groundbreaking homosexual French films of the 1970s, the new spaces of Barthes and Ozon in the French southwest, Houellebecq’s disillusion, and the various fates of the modern gay novel in France. PQ6353

2006-299209

0-8020-9074-5

Quixotic frescoes; Cervantes and Italian Renaissance art. De Armas, Frederick A. U. of Toronto Press, ©2006 285 p. $80.00 The rich influence of Italy’s classical and Renaissance art and philosophy on the writing of Cervantes is the subject of this fasinating analysis. The first chapter summarizes part of De Armas’s earlier study, Cervantes, Raphael and the classics, which described Cervantes’ travels in Italy and his knowledge of Italian art and archaeology. In this volume, these themes are continued and focused more narrowly on the appearance throughout Don Quixote of ideas and images drawn from Italian Renaissance art that Cervantes saw during his travels as well as the image of the classical world he drew from his knowledge of classical and Renaissance thought. De Armas chairs the Department of Romance languages and literature at the U. of Chicago.

–100–

PR179

2006-034012

978-0-86698-364-8

PS153

2006-011342

978-0-8135-3977-5

Beatus vir; studies in early English and Norse manuscripts in memory of Phillip Pulsiano.

Portraits of the new Negro woman; visual and literary culture in the Harlem Renaissance.

Title main entry. Ed. by A. N. Doane and Kirsten Wolf. (Medieval and Renaissance texts and studies; v.319) ACMRS, ©2006 545 p. $65.00 Published by the Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies, this commemorative volume contains 14 essays mainly on Old Norse and Old English manuscripts, reflecting the life’s work of the late Pulsiano (formerly Villanova U., Philadelphia). Most of the essays present the contributor’s research on a specific manuscript or group of manuscripts. In addition, Andrew Prescott (former curator, British Library) offers a lengthy article on the British Library’s shelving system and Peter J. Lucas (emeritus, U. of Cambridge, the UK) describes the work of the 17th century Anglo-Saxon scholar Abraham Wheelock.

Sherrard-Johnson, Cherene. Rutgers U. Press, ©2007 210 p. $24.95 (pa) Examining the works of various Harlem Renaissance figures, including painters Archibald Motley and William H. Johnson and writers Nella Larsen and Jessie Fauset, Sherrard-Johnson (English, U. of Wisconsin) explores iconic representations of the mulatta as revelatory of contestations of race, class, gender, and modernity. In particular, she constructs an argument in which the mullata functioned as an ambiguous symbol of racial uplift that ironically served to constrain African-American womanhood.

PR1587

2006-037647

978-0-86698-368-6

Beowulf and Lejre. Niles, John D. (Medieval and renaissance texts and studies; v.323) ACMRS, ©2007 495 p. $89.00 In his latest adventure, the mighty Anglo-Saxon hero falls in love with a beautiful dark-eyed Hungarian princess, then must rescue her from The Golden Hoard. Not exactly, but the story is about a marriage of sorts, between a text and a place. Tradition places the main action of the Old English poem at Lejre, Zealand (Denmark), and excavations there 198688 and 2004-05 have revealed a succession of great halls dated from the middle sixth to the late tenth centuries, and very similar to the one described in eight-century poem. Archaeologists, historians, and literary scholars consider the implications. The publisher is the Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies. PR3698

2006-012914

978-0-8387-5637-9

Art and money in the writings of Tobias Smollett. Gibson, William. (Bucknell studies in eighteenth-century literature and culture) Bucknell University Pr., ©2007 227 p. $49.50 Scottish writer Smollett (1721-71) is known today for his picaresque novels full of scatological humor and a robust use of language, but his contemporaries also knew him as a historian, journalist, and social commentator. Gibson (literature, Nanyang Technical U., Singapore) looks at his commentary on painting as a window into his cultural and aesthetic sensibilities. Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses. PR9355

2006-432095

1-86914-069-9

Art talk, politics talk; a consideration of categories. Chapman, Michael. U. of KwaZulu-Natal Press, ©2006 187 p. $28.95 (pa) Chapman (English, U. of KwaZulu-Natal, Durban, South Africa) offers a variety of perspectives on talking about art in a politically demanding milieu, and locating ethical and aesthetic challenges in the postcolonial condition of the modern world. The text features discussion of creative writers, visual artists, journalists, and political figures, including Chinua Achebe, Andries Botha, Can Themba, Ruth Miller, Roy Campbell, Nadine Gordimer, J.M. Coetzee, and Nelson Mandela. Earlier versions of 12 of the 13 chapters were previously published in various literary journals between 1989 and 2004. Distributed in the US by ISBS. PS153

2006-033609

978-1-4022-0436-4

Harlem speaks; a living history of the Harlem Renaissance. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. Ed. by Cary D. Wintz. Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2007 502 p. $29.95 Wintz (history, Texas Southern U.) compiles 21 biographical essays that discuss the lives and contributions of key individuals in literature, music, visual and performing arts, social activism, and politics during the Harlem Renaissance. US scholars in these fields provide essays on Langston Hughes, Zora Neale Hurston, Bessie Smith, Louis Armstrong, Josephine Baker, W.E.B. Du Bois, Paul Robeson, Marcus Garvey, Alain Locke, and others. Wintz gives historical and social context in the introductory chapters. Many b&w photos are incorporated. A noteworthy addition to the book is the audio CD, which contains 32 musical and spoken recordings (poetry, lyrics, interview excerpts, speeches, and songs) mostly from The Schomburg Center for Research in Black Culture and the Smithsonian Institute’s Folkways collection.

PS310

2007-023360

978-0-7734-5427-9

Explaining imagism; the imagist movement in poetry and art. Wacior, Slawomir. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2007 299 p. $119.95 Wacior (English and Commonwealth literature, John Paul II Catholic U., Lublin) begins by exploring the modernist mutations and context that informed the imagist movement in both poetry and art. Then he looks at imagist poets in each year between 1914 and 1917. A final chapter looks at hybrids and intertext involving photography and cinema, painting, sculpture, and music. PS374

2006-100291

978-1-55753-440-8

Memory and myth; the Civil War in fiction and film from U n c l e T o m ’ s C a b i n to C o l d M o u n t a i n . Title main entry. Ed. by David B. Sachman et al. Purdue University Press, ©2007 307 p. $29.95 (pa) Historians and scholars of literature, film, and journalism explore not only the degree to which fiction shapes the modern experience of the Civil War in the US, but also the larger issue of storytellers creating the past in general. The 25 essays were selected from presentations at the last 12 meetings of the annual symposium The 19th Century Press, the Civil War, and Free Expression held in Chattanooga, Tennessee. PS374

2006-008094

0-8018-8435-7

Unless the threat of death is behind them; hard-boiled fiction and film noir. Irwin, John T. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 290 p. $45.00 Irwin (humanities, Johns Hopkins U.) still plans to finish that trilogy he promised, but has temporarily gotten side-tracked; after the first volume—on Poe, Borges, and detective stories—he thought he really ought to deal with the offshoot of the tradition of hard-boiled detective fiction. He looks at five writers of the 1930s and 1940s who established the themes and narrative structures of the genre, and at certain key films of the 1940s that translated it to the screen and established the narratives and cinematic techniques of film noir. PS3545

2006-014321

978-0-8173-1537-5

Edith Wharton and the visual arts. Orlando, Emily J. (Studies in American literary realism and naturalism) U. of Alabama Press, ©2006 250 p. $47.50 In a presentation of close readings of several of Edith Wharton’s short stories and sections of her longer works, Orlando (American literature, Tennessee State U.) develops an argument for the author’s often critical engagement with the representation of women by painters of her time, particularly the Pre-Raphaelites. Two chapters are devoted to Wharton’s critical response to the representation of women in the painting and the poetry of Dante Gabriel Rossetti as seen in characters in The age of innocence and The buccaneers. In its comparison with the trends in painting and poetry of her time, Orlando’s thought-provoking work provides a new context for understanding Wharton’s writings and thought. PT2605

2007-024035

978-3-11-019135-6

Sites of the uncanny; Paul Celan, specularity and the visual arts. Kligerman, Eric. (Interdisciplinary German cultural studies; v.3) Mouton de Gruyter, ©2007 330 p. $88.00 Kligerman (U. of Florida) explores four modes of representation in their relation to the trauma of the Holocaust, pivoting on the poetics of Celan and the ripple effect they have had on the visual artists who probe the Holocaust, specifically Alain Resnai, Anselm Kiefer, and Daniel Libeskind. He begins by discussing how Celan’s work can be read as a response to Heidegger’s virtual silence concerning the Holocaust, then tracks how it has become emblematic of German’s memory politics.

–101–

Art Book News Annual 2008

SCIENCE, MATH, COMPUTERS, NATURE

QA460

Q172

Maor, Eli. Princeton U. Press, ©2007 259 p. $24.95 Maor (mathematics, Loyola U., Chicago) traces the history of the most famous geometrical theorem ever, including some of the more interesting of the more than 400 proofs. He places it within the larger philosophical system attributed to Pythagoras, and samples its use down the centuries in science, art, and literature.

2006-038274

978-0-465-08236-0

Why beauty is truth; a history of symmetry. Stewart, Ian. Basic Books, ©2007 290 p. $26.95 Stewart (mathematics, U. of Warwick) has written many popular books as well as technical papers. In this one he traces the notion of symmetry from ancient Greece to current mathematics and physics. The route does not begin with geometry, he explains, but with algebra, and leads through group theory, the quantum world of the very small, the relativistic world of the very large. QA76.17

978-0-19-280578-2

Jacquard’s web; how a hand-loom led to the birth of the information age. (reprint, 2004) Essinger, James. Oxford U. Press, ©2007 302 p. $16.95 (pa) This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book. History enthusiast Essinger tracks the evolution of Jacquard’s machine, a set of punched cards that directed patterns produced on silk looms, finding that Jacquard adapted (but did not invent) the system primarily to corner the silk weaving market. Jacquard soon saw the concept sliding from salon to workshop floor to other factories. Essinger tracks it all the way, right up to the introduction of the commercial computer about 200 years later. QA76.57

978-0-415-30712-3

The new media handbook. Dewdney, Andrew and Peter Ride. (Media practice) Routledge, ©2006 329 p. $30.95 (pa) This book is part of a series for students of the arts, media, cultural studies, and social sciences. Dewdney (media education, London South Bank U.) and Ride (U. of Westminster) loosely define “new media” as the evolving relationships between technology, cultural contexts, and cultural concepts. Each of the 31 chapters contains an examination of a theoretical, practical, or historical/contextual topic of new media; 19 of these are case studies/interviews of practitioners who work in advertising, sound, game design, and in fine arts arenas, among other areas. Topics include: the language of new media, curating new media projects, new media histories, interactive design, human-computer interface, innovation and media institutions, and a framework for considering new media in contemporary culture. Black and white illustrations supplement the text. QA93

The life of numbers; from an idea by Antonio J. Durán.

2006-025221

978-1-56881-290-8

Numbers at work; a cultural history. Taschner, Rudolf. AK Peters Ltd., ©2007 209 p. $39.00 Sometimes it pays to rest one’s mind with numbers and abstractions, an activity long enjoyed by guys in togas all the way to the current chinoclad crop of mathematical thinkers. Taschner (mathematics, Technical U. of Vienna) is committed to bringing the beauty of the mathematical to the public, and this shows how many concepts are sanctuaries with all those shouting realities, even on a daily basis. Taschner focuses on a set of mathematicians whose work shows up in our thinking and daily lives consistently, including Pythagorus, Bach, Hofmannsthal, Descartes, Leibnitz, Laplace, Bohr and Pascal, exploring numbers and their relationship to symbol, music, time, space, logic, politics, matter and spirit. This is, quite simply, a very good read even for those who consider themselves mathematical Neanderthals.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-0-691-12526-8

QB16

2007-386740

978-1-905785-05-6

Island of the setting sun; in search of Ireland’s ancient astronomers. Murphy, Anthony and Richard Moore. Liffey Press, ©2006 326 p. $42.95 (pa) They saw the sky, and realized there was something to it, and they wanted it. Although they were capable of generating tales as tall as that sky they know they could not simply scale their words and bring it to earth without something to pin it, so they used what was at hand, namely stones. The result, according to journalist/photographer Murphy and painter Moore, is a systematic way of understanding vast quantities of time and space and humans’ place in it. Murphy and Moore find those who created such places as Newgrange and Dowth were doing much more than telling time; apparently these people, who began their work over 5,000 years ago, had a cosmic consciousness and also a great curiosity about what we were to make of their stones, myths and artifacts and found a way to speak to us through them. Distributed by Dufour. QB641

2006-016848

0-525-94985-2

Postcards from Mars; the first photographer on the red planet. Bell, Jim. Dutton Books, ©2006 196 p. $55.00 Bell led the team that built the “Pancam” cameras installed on the Mars rovers Spirit and Opportunity. The some 100 double-page (and some foldout) prints collected here depict the preparation of those missions as well as the stark Martian panoramas captured in images both single and composite, both real- and false-color. Bell applies his sensibilities as a lifetime landscape photographer to select artful and varied depictions of the texture of the Red Planet. The book is oversize: 11.75x11.75″. QC358

2006-023057

978-0-8194-6307-4

Optics made clear; the nature of light and how we use it.

84-86882-14-1

Durán, Antonio J. et al. T Ediciones, ©2006 — p. $38.00 This attractively-designed book was distributed at the International Congress of Mathematicians held in 2006 in Madrid. Durán (mathematical analysis, U. of Seville) and company trace the development of numbers as an aesthetic as well as intellectual tool. High-quality illustrations include medieval manuscripts and maps, and early printed arithmetic books. Translated from Spanish, the volume includes references and a number genesis timeline, but interestingly for a book on numbers, no pagination. An online review by a Penn State professor says that: “It will become a collectors’ item for its uniqueness.” Distributed by AK Peters Ltd. QA141

2006-050969

The Pythagorean theorem; a 4,000-year history.

Wolfe, William L. (Press monograph) SPIE, ©2007 263 p. $56.00 (pa) Writing for a general audience, although a familiarity with basic scientific writing on the level of Scientific American is probably recommended, Wolfe (formerly professor of optical science at the U. of Arizona) takes the reader on a wide-ranging tour of optics, its instruments, and its applications in field as diverse as art, communication, transportation, dentistry, and forensics. QC808

1-904768-60-1

Handbook of geophysics and archaeology. Witten, Alan J. (Equinox handbooks in anthropological archaeology) Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2006 329 p. $39.95 (pa) A pioneer in sub-surface imaging techniques, Witten (geophysics, U. of Oklahoma) died suddenly in February 2005 before the printing of this book, which he had developed from the course he long taught on geophysics for non-science majors. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. QE364

2006-012981

0-7643-2544-2

The world of fluorescent minerals. Schneider, Stuart. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2006 192 p. $29.95 (pa) This survey of different fluorescent minerals found around the world is meant for collectors and general readers. It includes many color photos showing what they look like in daylight and under an ultraviolet lamp. Schneider aims to incorporate worldwide minerals while still emphasizing the importance of New Jersey’s environment, which has more minerals than any other comparable place in the world. He provides information on specific types and how to find them, followed by a lengthy gallery of minerals in Franklin Mine, Sterling Mine, and the rest of New Jersey; different parts of the US; Canada; Mexico; and other countries. A value guide is included. Schneider is a writer, attorney, and fluorescent mineral collector, as well as a former professional photographer.

–102–

QH44

2007-008895

0-88135-393-0

Linnaeus in Italy; the spread of a revolution in science. Title main entry. Ed. by Marco Beretta and Alessandro Tosi. (Uppsala studies in history of science; 34) Science History Pubns., ©2007 340 p. $60.00 Carl von Linné, better known as Linnaeus, is the one to thank/ blame for the binomial Latin names of plants and animals. In time for the 300th anniversary of his birth, this volume represents the proceedings of a 2006 symposium organized by the Museum of the History of Science in Florence and U. of Pisa, with which Beretta (history of science) and Tosi (art history) are affiliated. Twenty studies trace how the Swedish Protestant botanist revolutionized the natural sciences, and the reactions of scientists—some shocked by his classification of plants by sexual characteristics—to his taxonomic system in the context of largely Catholic scientific circles of 18th century Europe. Art by and of Linnaeus is included. Science History Publications USA is a division of Watson Publishing International. QH75

2006-037146

978-1-56898-604-3

Grant Jones/Jones & Jones; ILARIS; the Puget Sound plan. Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Amidon. (Source books in landscape architecture; 4) Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2007 128 p. $29.95 (pa) As part of a series examining contemporary trends in designed landscapes, this volume features the views of Grant Jones, “poet laureate of landscape architecture.” Amidon (architecture, Ohio State U.) introduces the Geographical Information Systems (GIS)- based model developed by Jones’ Washington state firm for quantifying a landscape’s aesthetics as a resource. An essay by a contributor looks to animals for insights. GIS maps represent landscape features; a color photo gallery showcases Puget Sound. ILARIS stands for Intrinsic Landscape Aesthetic Resource Information System. QH91

2006-020309

978-1-55591-613-8

Ocean duets. Sleeper, Barbara. Photography by Michele Westmorland. Fulcrum Publishing, ©2006 96 p. $12.95 (pa) It took wildlife photographer Westmorland (who resides in Washington state) six years to get these images of pairs of ocean creatures from Florida to Papua New Guinea, who impress with their jewel-like diversity. Sleeper (a Washington zoologist/science writer) provides concise descriptions. The book includes a foreword by a scientist, remarks by Westmorland, and backcover praise by marine conservationists. Suggested further reading would have been welcome. QH181

2006-048321

978-0-393-06117-8

Across the Tibetan Plateau; ecosystems, wildlife & conservation. Fleming, Robert L. et al. W.W. Norton, ©2007 120 p. $49.95 The natural environment, birds, plants, and animals of the Tibetan Plateau are described in this well-illustrated, oversized volume (14.25x10.25″). The various regions and eco-systems are each described with attention given to past and current conservation policies and forecasts. Written for the popular reader, the volume contains superb color photos. QH324

2007-920268

0-87290-166-1

Drawing upon nature; studies for the Blaschkas’ glass models. Title main entry. Ed. by Susan M. Rossi-Wilcox and David Whitehouse. Corning Museum of Glass, ©2007 167 p. $24.95 The famous collection of glass flowers at the Botanical Museum at Harvard U. were part of a joint exhibition held at the Corning Glass Museum, in Ithaca, NY, in 2007. This volume commemorates the studies from nature on which the glass flowers, and marine invertebrates were based. Two essays describe the glass models and their makers’ travels in search of specimens. The studies are reproduced in full-page color plates, with each accompanied by a short essay describing the main properties of the specimen depicted. An unusually well-made book for the price, it’s distributed by Hudson Hills Press.

QK41

2007-010628

978-0-486-46005-5

Besler’s book of flowers and plants; 73 full-color plates from “Hortus Eystettensis,” (reprint) 1613. Besler, Basilius. (Dover pictorial archive series) Dover Pub. Co., ©2007 75 p. $14.95 (pa) This indexed selection of 73 full-page, full-color engravings of then-exotic plants from the garden at Eichstätt in Germany, said in the current publisher’s notes to be the first comprehensive botanical garden devoted to flowering plants, is drawn from a three-volume set published in 1613 by Besler (1561-1629). Plants featured one-three to a page originate from all over the world: e.g., English violet (Viola odorata), Agave americana, and African marigold. QK73

2007-930028

978-0-7618-3840-1

Knowledge, truth, and service; the New York Botanical Garden, 1891 to 1980. Dunkak, Harry M. Univ. Press of America, ©2007 122 p. $22.95 (pa) Dunkak (emeritus history, Iona College) has published mainly about American colonial and revolutionary periods, and the history of Westchester County, New York. Here he presents the general public and the scientific community with a comprehensive history of the venerable institution. He begins long before the 1891 founding, with the origins of the notion of a botanical garden and the evolution of New York City into a place where people would support one. QK98

978-3-7774-3425-4

Das Moller-Florilegium; Hans Simon Holtzbeckers Blumenalbum für den Bürgermeister Barthold Moller. Title main entry. Ed. by Dietrich Roth. Hirmer Verlag, ©2007 336 p. $150.00 Both of the sumptuous botanical albums produced by the 17th-century Hamburg artist are presented in a suitably grand oversized format (10x14.25″), with essays discussing the life, work, and influences of the artist; the garden and artistic patronage of the mayor who commissioned his work; and the paintings within the albums. The botanical paintings of fruit, exotic plants, and flowers are presented in full-page color plates, with catalog entries that cite at length earlier bibliography and descriptions. Typical for this publisher, this is a beautifully produced volume, well bound, with color plates of the best quality, and contained in a suitably heavy case. A glossary is provided, but there is no index. The text is in German. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co. QL15

2007-040547

978-90-04-13188-0

Early modern zoology; the construction of animals in science, literature and the visual arts; 2v. Title main entry. Ed. by Karl A.E. Enenkel and Paul J. Smith. (Intersections; v.7) BRILL, ©2007 648 p. $205.00 The sixteenth century saw the invention of the new science of zoology. This went hand in hand with the (re)discovery of anatomy, physiology, and, in the 17th century, the invention of the microscope. The discovery of the New World confronted intellectuals with new species, and artistic progress in painting and drawing brought about a new precision in animal illustrations. In this handsome two-volume set, Enenkel (neoLatin literature, Leiden University) and Smith (French literature, Leiden University) present work by specialists from various disciplines, including art history and the history of science, who explore early modern discourses on animals in science, literature, and the visual arts. They examine the construction of an early modern science, the construction of the animal in zoological illustrations, the construction of the animal in its early modern use and abuse, and the construction of the animal in literature and in the visual arts. There is one chapter in the first volume in German, and one chapter in the second volume in French. High-quality color plates and b&w illustrations give examples of art from the period. The publication is of interest to students of the history of science, literature, and art history in the early modern period. QL84

978-0-7748-1376-1

The archive of place; unearthing the pasts of the Chilcotin Plateau. Turkel, William J. (The nature/ history/ society series) U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 322 p. $85.00 Turkel (history, U. of Western Ontario) explores how people interpret material traces to reconstruct past events, using three case studies from the Chilcotin plateau in the west-central of what is now British Columbia. All three relate to issues that arose during the 1990s, concerning respectively mining rights, the route of a heritage trail, and reburial after an aboriginal graveyard was disturbed. Distributed in the US by University of Washington Press.

–103–

Art Book News Annual 2008

QL85

2007-016552

978-0-313-33487-0

QP255

Encyclopedia of human-animal relationships; a global exploration of our connections with animals; 4v. Title main entry. Ed. by Marc Bekoff. Greenwood Press, ©2007 1458 p. $499.95 Making a case for the critical importance of writing that faces difficult realities, exposes hidden practices, and considers foreign or outdated beliefs, the entries of this carefully prepared and authoritative work discuss relationships of animals and humans worldwide. The over 350 entries, in 4 volumes, consider major topics that include bonding; conservation and the environment; culture, religion, and belief systems; cruelty; animal assistance to humans; animals as food; and zoos and aquariums. The entries are international in scope, reflecting the geographic range of the contributors, and cover a wide range of fields, including biology, art, ecology, philosophy, and psychology. Entries about animals as companions for the blind or disabled alternate with sobering entries about animals as food and in medical research. A number of personal stories are included in short entries and sidebars. Appendices contain a timeline of events in animal rights and a lengthy list of selected resources. Bekoff is emeritus in the biology department at the U. of Colorado at Boulder and cofounder with Jane Goodall of Ethologists for the Ethical Treatment of Animals. QL85

2007-060853

978-90-04-15773-6

Knowing animals. Title main entry. Ed. by Laurence Simmons and Philip Armstrong. (Human animal studies; v.4) BRILL, ©2007 296 p. $99.00 (pa) Simmons (film, television, and media studies, U. of Auckland) and Armstrong (English and cultural studies, U. of Canterbury) present twelve essays by New Zealander and Australian scholars in philosophy, literary criticism, art history, and cultural studies on topics in the emerging “animal studies” discipline. The contributors view humans as animals among other animals, challenging the notion that the humanities are reserved for human nature only. Essays examine human-animal interactions and cultures through not exclusively or necessarily biological viewpoints. Concepts illuminated here include beast fables, anthropomorphs, humanimals, and l’animot. QL121

2006-287871

978-1-59228-967-7

Monsters of the sea. (reprint, 2004) Ellis, Richard. The Lyons Press, ©2006 429 p. $16.95 (pa) In this paperback edition of the 2004 book, a leading marine writer/artist sorts out scientifically-validated sea denizens from sailors’ and writers’ fantasies and hucksters’ creations. Illustrations include actual giant squids, mythical sea serpents, and P.T. Barnum’s mermaids. This contribution to cryptozoology and conservation debates includes the Linnaean Society’s questionnaire on sightings, and a chronology of giant squid sightings. QL637

2006-928693

0-8018-8610-4

Nagase, Boshu. Ed. by Mitsuo Fukuchi and Harvey J. Marchant. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 136 p. $45.00 Published in a horizontal format (14x10″) that embellishes the full-page color plates, this volume presents an unusually beautiful survey of 54 examples of Antarctic fishes. The portrait of each fish was captured using the gyotaku method of printing, in which the fish is daubed with colored ink then the image is transferred onto fine paper. A description of the family and species, including details of its ecology accompanies each image. An introduction describes the Southern Ocean, its biology, fishes, and commercial pressures of fishing. The authors are seasoned specialists in the marine biology and ecology of the Antarctic.

Aydemir, Murat. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 334 p. $24.95 (pa) Aydemir (comparative literature, U. of Amsterdam) reconsiders texts in history and art, psychoanalysis, pornography, philosophy, and literature that address such concepts as dissemination, expenditure, and bliss from perspectives that highlight ejaculation, semen, and masculinity. QP376

2006-012325

978-0-8018-8481-8

The soul in the brain; the cerebral basis of language, art, and belief. Trimble, Michael R. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 290 p. $35.00 Trimble (behavioral neurology, U. of London) shows how a study of disorders of the brain, especially neuropsychiatric disorders, can shed light on behaviors related to artistic expression and religion. Among his topics are the neuroanatomy of emotion, language and the human brain, music and the brain, and neurotheology. QP383

2006-033566

978-0-471-26239-8

The genius engine; where memory, reason, passion, violence and creativity intersect in the human brain. Stein, Kathleen. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 292 p. $27.95 Veteran popularizer of science and technology Stein reveals the secret bunker of humanness to be in the prefrontal cortex. She looks in turn at the five aspects, then considers silicon minds and the rise of the machine genius. In addition to describing scientific theories and findings in plain English, she explores the research processes that led to them, and provides scenarios demonstrating the different functions. QP447

2005-013750

978-0-19-516964-5

Perceptual coherence; hearing and seeing. Handel, Stephen. Oxford U. Press, ©2006 469 p. $89.95 Handel (emeritus, psychology, U. of Tennessee, Knoxville) has written a substantial text on the correlation between hearing and seeing in sensory perception that will be useful to the researcher as well as in the upper undergraduate- and graduate-level classroom. Maintaining a tight focus on the two senses’ shared aspects throughout the discussion, Handel presents chapters on transformation from information to perception, the characteristics of auditory and visual scenes, the perception of motion, and segmentation, among other topics. Visual color and auditory timbre are treated as complementary topics in two separate chapters.

MEDICINE, THERAPY, HEALTH R141

2005-033204

0-7546-5296-3

Title main entry. Ed. by Jean A. Givens et al. (AVISTA studies in the history of medieval technology, science and art; v.5) Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 278 p. $99.95 Historians mostly of art but also of medicine and science engage in conversation about how their fields overlap chronologically in about 12001550 and geographically from Byzantium to the British Isles. Among the topics they discuss are Latin crusaders and Byzantine herbals, the scientific illustrations in Pico della Mirandola’s manuscript of Pliny the Elder’s Natural History, and Leonardo da Vinci and botanical illustration. The nine essays are from a conference in 2003 in Kalamazoo. RA418

1-86134-937-8

Fracture; adventures of a broken body.

978-0-19-568747-7

The illustrated Sálim Ali; the fall of a sparrow. Ali, Sálim. Oxford U. Press, ©2007 128 p. $24.95 (pa) Indian ornithologist Ali (1896-1987) was among the first Indians to conduct systematic bird surveys in the country. This edition of his 1985 collection of essays recounting his activities and thoughts includes color drawings done for his 10-volume Handbook of the Birds of India and Pakistan by master nature artists. Black-and-white photographs, and other drawings are also included. There is no index.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-0-8166-4867-2

Visualizing medieval medicine and natural history, 12001550.

Antarctic fishes; illustrated in the gyotaku method.

QL691

2006-017450

Images of bliss; ejaculation, masculinity, meaning.

Oakley, Ann. Policy Press, ©2007 186 p. $25.00 (pa) Seven years ago, Oakley (sociology and social policy, U. of London) severely fractured her right arm, and decided to make the accident into a research project. She investigates why breaking an arm seems to fracture the psyche as well, why Western medicine treats function and ignores the patient’s experience of sensation, the relationship between the right and left hands, what the experience can reveal about being human and living in a body, and other issues. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

–104–

RA967

2006-506965

90-5662-464-4

RC489

2006-048173

0-398-07685-5

The architecture of hospitals.

Architects of art therapy; memoirs and life stories.

Title main entry. Ed. by Cor Wagenaar. NAi Publishers, ©2006 543 p. $75.00 (pa) This volume contains 62 essays that explore the relationship between the architecture of a hospital and the health of patients. It is the final publication, partly based on conferences held in Delft in April of 2004, of a project initiated by the U. Medical Center of Groningen in the Netherlands that was in response to the design of their new building. Subjects discussed are the culture of hospitals, the hospital as an urban institution, air quality, healing environments, healthcare models and concepts, and examples of architecture in several countries in Europe. Contributors work in architecture and other fields and are based in Europe and North America. Many color photos and illustrations are incorporated. There is no index.

Title main entry. Ed. by Maxine Borowsky Junge and Harriet Wadeson. C.C. Thomas, ©2006 409 p. $78.95 Pioneers of art therapy from before 1960 through the 1970s tell their personal stories of how they encountered the profession and how it has changed during their careers and lifetimes. The arrangement is chronological by when the therapist began their practice. Eight of the 28 have already died.

RC178

2007-029073

978-1-931112-73-4

Piety and plague; from Byzantium to the Baroque. Title main entry. Ed. by Franco Mormando and Thomas Worcester. (Sixteenth century essays & studies series; v.78) Truman State University Press, ©2007 329 p. $55.00 Epidemics of acute disease are now recognized as one of the most important influences shaping European history, but most studies of it have focused on political, economic, demographic, and medical aspects. Here scholars of the classics, art history, history, church history, literature, and theology explore the religious, cultural, and psychological aspects of plague and society’s responses to it. RC387

2006-048897

978-0-398-07732-7

Art, angst, and trauma; right brain interventions with developmental issues. Title main entry. Ed. by Doris Banowsky Arrington. C.C. Thomas, ©2007 254 p. $63.95 Arrington, a licensed clinical psychologist, brings together 15 essays on the use of art therapy with children who are seriously ill, in foster care, or physically and emotionally traumatized, in addition to deviant and addicted adolescents, young adults, adults dealing with a spouse’s suicide, and Alzheimer’s patients and their caretakers. Essays consider how brain functions are affected by trauma and how art therapy can be used in healing, as well as brain and identity development, the Instinctual Trauma Response Model, and therapy used over the life span in the aforementioned groups. Contributors are art therapists, psychologists, and social workers in the US. Both subject and author indexes are included. RC445

2007-003766

978-0-8166-4940-2

The architecture of madness; insane asylums in the United States. Yanni, Carla. (Architecture, landscape, and American culture) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 191 p. $27.50 (pa) Yanni (art history, Rutgers U.) examines the nineteenth century concept of therapeutic architecture meant to aid in the treatment of mentally ill people. She considers insane asylums such as the New Jersey State Lunatic Asylum in Trenton and the Buffalo State Hospital for the Insane and how doctors thought patients could be cured if they were treated in specially designed buildings. She aims to contribute to the history of psychiatry as well as the history of architecture. She first examines the architecture of asylums in the late eighteenth century, the concept of moral management of moral treatment, the Kirkbride linear plan of building asylums and alternatives to them such as the cottage plan, and later structures designed by Calvert Vaux, Clarke Withers, and H.H. Richardson. Some stories by patients in the asylums are related, and illustrations and designs are included. RC469

978-1-85775-778-1

Consciousness reconnected; missing links between self, neuroscience, psychology and the arts. Steinberg, Derek. Radcliffe Publishing, ©2006 214 p. $29.95 (pa) This ninth book continues Steinberg’s trajectory from clinical and scientific work in psychiatry towards the arts. Consciousness, he says, is an elusive quarry and hides from the naked eye, so he leads readers on an attempt to creep up on it from a number of directions. Closing the net around it, he says, reveals connections between the perspectives being used. Published by Radcliffe Publishing, UK; U.S. distribution is by BookMasters.

RC489

2006-048553

0-398-07689-8

Art in treatment; transatlantic dialogue. Title main entry. Ed. by Dee Spring. C.C. Thomas, ©2007 248 p. $55.95 In addition to comparing and contrasting the different ideologies and practices prevalent in art therapy across the globe, these essays examine the many venues in which art therapy is successfully applied. Each chapter reflects the expertise of the art therapist who wrote it. The topics covered include the methods and uses of group painting; using art therapy with caregivers, children, and people with cancer; and the influence of art therapy on a community. RC489

2006-014164

978-1-84310-798-9

Art therapy and social action. Title main entry. Ed. by Frances F. Kaplan. Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2007 272 p. $29.95 (pa) Kaplan (art therapy, Marylhurst U.) compiles 14 essays that describe the use of art therapy to address social problems. Contributors—art therapists and artists from the US, UK, Israel, and Canada—describe applications and their experiences with programs using art therapy for homelessness, conflict resolution, anger management and aggression, gun violence, trauma, terrorism, and building community. RC489

978-0-7619-4114-9

Art therapy, research and evidence-based practice. Gilroy, Andrea. Sage Publications, ©2006 177 p. $110.00 Gilroy (art psychotherapy, Goldsmiths College, U. of London) is known as a premier researcher in art therapy, and here she concentrates on issues related to evidence-based practice (EBP), focusing most closely on the philosophies, politics and practices that constitute research and EBP and how these interact with art therapy. She finds that although traditional research and EBP inform each other they comprise substantially different activities, and she argues that art therapy should develop a pluralistic evidence base appropriate to the discipline. She describes EBP and its attachments of anxiety, empowerment and strategy, the development of guidelines relating to art therapy, the audit, methodological debates, generating evidence, and applying the evidence to art therapy with adults, children and adolescents. She includes an initial appraisal checklist and a critical appraisal checklist for use by researchers and a comprehensive list of references. RC489

2007-008499

978-0-398-07752-5

The role of metaphor in art therapy; theory, method, and experience. Moon, Bruce L. C.C. Thomas, ©2007 137 p. $49.95 (pa) Rather than giving therapists a dictionary of images and their supposed meanings, Moon (art therapy, Mount Mary College) gives students and practitioners ways to listen to clients in a studio setting, and to use metaphors not only in evaluating work but in subtle ways as forms of response. Moon supplies a variety of vignettes, taken from his decades of practice, and shows how clients and therapists develop stories, poems and visual art as ways to approach therapy. He describes sessions in the studio where clients and therapists work side by side, exploring issues of transition and listening metaphorically. He also gives techniques for withholding personal judgment and developing empathy, particularly when clients are in the process of divulging inner thoughts and experiences. Moon includes illustrations and a short but interesting list of references.

–105–

Art Book News Annual 2008

RC489

2006-051120

0-398-07715-0

RJ505

Visually speaking; art therapy and the deaf. Title main entry. Ed. by Ellen G. Horovitz. C.C. Thomas, ©2007 225 p. $56.95 In introducing ten essays on art therapy with deaf children, adolescents, and adults, as well as hearing children of deaf adults, Horovitz (Nazareth College, Rochester, New York) shares how her childhood experience of becoming temporarily deaf influenced her career choice. She points out that contributors distinguish between the deaf as disabled, and those who consider themselves part of a unique Deaf culture. With case examples, they discuss treating patients who are deaf/multiply handicapped, and how computer software has expanded art therapy applications. Deafness is also examined in international, positive psychology, and program planning contexts. The volume includes artwork and rating scales. RC552

2006-009136

Drawing from within; using art to treat eating disorders. Hinz, Lisa D. Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2006 192 p. $24.95 (pa) Psychologist and registered art therapist Lisa Hinz describes an art-based approach that mental health professionals can use with clients who have eating disorders. Following the introductory material, each of seven main chapters focuses on a particular area of therapeutic work, such as reclaiming emotions or enhancing self-acceptance. Each of these chapters contains art experiences aimed at helping clients to express themselves. These are followed by response pieces, designed to counteract negativity and provide clients with practical actions they can take to promote recovery. RC569

2006-044669

978-0-398-07701-3

The use of the creative therapies with sexual abuse survivors. Title main entry. Ed. by Stephanie L. Brooke. C.C. Thomas, ©2007 330 p. $74.95 Practitioners in each explore the use of art, play, dance, music, and drama to treat trauma related to sexual abuse. They describe how the various creative therapies are used to treat male and female survivors of sexual abuse, as well as children, teens, and adults. RJ504

2006-009511

978-1-55620-257-5

Critical incidents in counseling children. Title main entry. Ed. by Suzanne M. (Hobson) Dugger and Laurie A. Carlson. American Counseling Assn., ©2007 410 p. $55.95 (pa) This text revolves around 36 “critical incidents”—moments in the counseling of a child (age 13 or younger) that presented particular challenges and learning opportunities—described by the in-school and out-of-school counselors involved. Each account illustrates common issues such as anxiety, family problems, grief, diversity issues, and self-harm, and concludes with questions posed by the counselor as to the effectiveness and appropriateness of his or her methods. These are followed by responses from other professional counselors, who point out the counselor’s strengths and shortfalls, and use the incident to teach treatments for problems common to young children. Contributors especially favor methods, like play and art therapy, that do not rely primarily on verbal communication for treatment. This book is intended for use in master’s degree training programs, specialized child counseling programs, and by counseling and social service professionals. RJ505

2007-007808

978-1-84310-789-7

Empowering children through art and expression; culturally sensitive ways of healing trauma and grief. St. Thomas, Bruce and Paul Johnson. Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2007 175 p. $29.95 (pa) St. Thomas, a practicing art therapist, and Johnson, a licensed clinical social worker, explore ways to use different expressive arts, including play, myth, drama, and visual arts, to help traumatized children express and resolve their feelings. Focus is on immigrant children who have experienced war, terrorism, and relocation, with detailed case studies of approaches used with children at three programs: the Multicultural Program at the Center for Grieving Children, America’s Camp, and Creating New Identities in the Work Place. Illustrated with b&w photos of children’s creations, the case studies demonstrate that traumatized children have the potential to lead the healing process, and that creative healing can be best accomplished in community.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-84310-824-5

Title main entry. Ed. by Vanessa A. Camilleri. Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2007 319 p. $39.95 (pa) Camilleri (music therapy, New York University) presents 21 chapters exploring creative arts therapy approaches to the challenges faced by inner city children, particularly African Americans and other minorities. Each contribution contains a case study of one or more intervention programs in cities around the U.S. that employ music, art, and play therapies as well as psychodrama and dance and movement approaches. Specific programs include “A Space of Her Own”—a project to improve young women’s potential by creating a beautiful bedroom; collaborative conflict resolution; and music therapy for adolescents in foster care. RJ506

978-1-84310-822-1

2007-002319

Healing the inner city child; creative arts therapies with at-risk youth.

2006-030776

978-1-932690-30-9

Children and traumatic incident reduction; creative and cognitive approaches. Title main entry. Ed. by Marian K. Volkman. (TIR applications series; no.2) Loving Healing Press, ©2007 201 p. $19.95 (pa) In Traumatic Incident Reduction (TIR), facilitators, who may be a therapist or other practitioner, help clients, called “viewers,” to address traumatic experiences and related stress, the goal being to bring a full resolution of the trauma in a person-centered context. Here the viewers are children, and the contributors of these 15 short essays offer tools and techniques, results and theory. Topics include critical issues, the use of the “head picture” for specific incidents, child survivors of domestic violence, TIR and art therapy, future TIR for anxious and traumatized children, empowering parents and caregivers, and TIR in post traumatic stress disorder. Examples of results include detailed case studies of TIR in treating learning disorders, grief, at-risk youth, early childhood trauma, stuttering, and in a mental health clinic setting, and appendices include memory lists for children, information on becoming a TIR facilitator and additional reading. RM324

2007-004054

978-1-59477-174-3

Drugs of the dreaming; oneirogens, Salvia divinorum and other dream-enhancing plants. Toro, Gianluca and Benjamin Thomas. Park Street Press, ©2007 149 p. $12.95 (pa) Italian environmental chemist Toro and Australian researcher Thomas, a specialist in the effects of drugs and plant extracts on humans, particularly in Papua New Guinea, explore a special class of psychoactive plants that are used to induce and enhance dreams. Besides profiling 26 specific plants, they discuss non-ordinary states of consciousness, a history of dream, sleep and dream chemistry, oneirogens in ancient and modern magic, from animal sources, from food sources, and endogenous and synthetic compounds. RM735

2006-029600

978-1-55642-756-5

Crafts and creative media in therapy, 3d ed. Tubbs, Carol and Margaret Drake. Slack Inc., ©2007 287 p. $41.95 (pa) This reference for students and practitioners of occupational therapy discusses the use of crafts in therapy and rehabilitation. Types of activities covered include beadwork, candle making, gardening, leatherwork, paper crafts, and more. Some vendors of craft materials are listed in the appendix. The authors (both occupational therapists) are affiliated with the U. of Mississippi Medical Center. Previous editions were published under the title Crafts in Therapy and Rehabilitation.

GARDEN HISTORY & DESIGN, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE S494

2006-014226

978-1-933392-07-3

Food not lawns; how to turn your yard into a garden and your neighborhood into a community. Flores, H. C. Chelsea Green Publ. Co., ©2006 334 p. $25.00 (pa) A permaculture designer based in Eugene, Oregon, Flores offers advice about home gardening, but emphasizes the context of a garden in the complex community ecosystem. For her, gardening is not a leisure activity, but the foundation of a movement to change the environment, economy, and culture.

–106–

SB435

2005-037518

0-8139-2533-9

City trees; a historical geography from the Renaissance through the nineteenth century.

T385

Lawrence, Henry W. U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 336 p. $75.00 The tree-lined streets that Americans take for granted are heirs to the late19th century model of the green city as a symbol of civilization in a rapidly changing urban environment. Lawrence (geosciences, Edinboro U. of Pennsylvania) traces this concept back to its Renaissance roots. Though landscape design initially lagged behind building design, the period’s cosmopolitan nature, class consciousness, and nationalistic competitiveness led to the innovation of less formal gardens extending into surrounding areas with greater use of trees and more public access. He treats these influences on urban green spaces in the US and today’s globalized world. The volume includes period illustrations, city plans and maps. SB472

2006-035923

978-0-88402-325-8

Contemporary garden aesthetics, creations and interpretations. Dumbarton Oaks Colloquium on the History of Landscape Architecture (29th: 2005) Ed. by Michel Conan. Dumbarton Oaks, ©2007 265 p. $33.00 (pa) Dumbarton Oaks in Washington, DC, is famous for its garden and research library. According to Conan, its director of garden and landscape studies, gardens deserve more attention from art critics. From a conference held at Dumbarton Oaks in May 2005, 13 papers propose a new garden aesthetic derived from John Dewey’s philosophy of art as an experience actively created by the viewer. International contributors examine contemporary landscape designs that reflect this theory, e.g., Benny Farm for elderly veterans in Montreal and the Garden of Stones at the Museum of Jewish Heritage in Manhattan (pictured among the volume’s many illustrations). Distributed by Harvard University Press. SB472

2006-009369

978-0-471-47755-6

Landscape architectural graphic standards. Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard J. Hopper. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 1074 p. $175.00 Large (9.5x11.75″) and weighty, this is a thorough and comprehensive reference to the standards and practices of landscape architecture and design necessary for producing professional drawings, based in format on Wiley’s classic Architectural graphic standards. The work is divided into four parts: practice; standards and guidelines; process, implementation, and application; and materials. The over 150 chapters were written by over 100 authors who bring their own experience and expertise to the subject. The chapters are organized in a clear outline format, and provide history and background to the topic, the design factors to be considered, the legal and building code requirements, and description of examples. Particularly notable is the wealth of detailed and annotated illustrations, often including measurements and notes on materials and use. A list of references concludes each chapter. Two sections of color plates are included. Appendices contain drawing methods and geometry, the metric system, and the ASLA declaration on the environment and sustainability. This work will be invaluable to landscape architects, architects, engineers, planners, urban designers and those in related fields. SB472

2005-028990

TECHNOLOGY (includes DIGITAL DESIGN)

0-471-76137-0

Landscape design documentation; a guide to plan checking and quality control. (CD-ROM included) Mcdonald, Brian Thomas. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 241 p. $75.00 Beginning with the definition of the profession by the American Society of Landscape Architects, an experienced practitioner examines a landscape architect’s roles and responsibilities. The text includes landscape plans; organizational diagrams; and most notably, 46 checklists (plus a master checklist) in the start-to-finish areas of data collection, consultant coordination, design documents, construction documents, specification, cost estimation, site observation, and project closeout. The CD-ROM includes the checklists in customizable form. McDonald is a licensed landscape architect in Texas. The subtitle on the cover and CD-ROM reads: “Strategies for Plan Checking and Quality Control.”

978-0-321-49200-5

Adobe Illustrator CS3. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. (Classroom in a book) Adobe Press, ©2007 458 p. $54.99 (pa) This workbook reflects the needs of both amateur and professional designers as it explains both graphics theories and software manipulation procedures from the “getting started” stage to the subtleties of producing work for publication in print or online. Loaded with accessible illustrations and projects, this covers everything from loading the product and the contents of the CD-ROM bound in the book to learning new features for this version, loading photo images, accessing the work area (including using the trace function), selecting, aligning, creating shapes, transforming objects, drawing, coloring and painting, working with type, blending shapes and colors and manipulating layers, brushing, applying effects, and using more advanced features such as appearance attributes, graphic styles, symbols, combining images from other software and dealing with printing like a professional. T385

978-0-321-49202-9

Adobe Photoshop CS3; classroom in a book, the official training workbook from Adobe Systems. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. (Classroom in a book series) Adobe Press, ©2007 478 p. $54.99 (pa) Developed with the support of Adobe Systems product experts, this workbook offers 14 self-paced lessons on fundamental and advanced features of this leading digital imaging software. New features of Adobe Photoshop CS3 covered include Smart Filters, Zoomify, a new Quick Selection tool, a new interface common to the Creative Suite 3 family of products, enhancements to Abode Bridge and the Camera Raw format, and the Abode Lightroom toolbox. Chapters include tips and review questions. The bundled CD-ROM for Windows and Mac OS includes lesson files and tutorial movies. T385

2007-013349

0-7897-3691-8

Adobe Photoshop CS3 on demand. Johnson, Steve. Que Publishing, ©2007 569 p. $39.99 (pa) Highlighting what is new in Photoshop CS3, Johnson, who is with a software training company and has many computer books to his credit, proceeds from getting started with this leading digital imaging software to more advanced tasks. Chapters include step- by-step instructions, real world examples, and a presentation of tasks on no more than two facing pages to allow focusing an a task without having to turn pages. Ten workshop projects apply the book’s lessons. Information is given for graphic designers on the Adobe Certified Expert Program. A trial subscription to an online resources is offered. T385

0-321-44120-6

Adobe Photoshop unmasked; the art and science of selections, layers, and paths. French, Nigel. Adobe Press, ©2007 254 p. $44.99 (pa) For those with some familiarity with Photoshop, a UK graphic designer/trainer explains selection features for digital image adjustments in newer Photoshop versions. He defines terms; specifies the criteria determining how to make selections and refine them with the Selection tools; and explains using the Pen tool to draw paths, the different types of layers (introduced in version 3), and channels, the basic element forming images. The guide offers downloadable files of many of the examples. T385

2007-012287

978-1-58450-531-0

Advanced PhotoShop CS3 trickery & FX. (CD-ROM included) Burns, Stephen. Charles River Media, ©2007 366 p. $49.99 (pa) Burns, a corporate instructor in digital art and design, takes readers beyond the basics in this book/CD-ROM package for both Mac and PC Photoshop users. He gives step-by-step directions for projects that use special effects to transform ordinary photos into digital creations, and also provides real-world projects to illustrate practical uses of Photoshop’s tools. Color-photos and screenshots illustrate techniques on every page. The companion CD-ROM contains all of the book’s images, files needed for the book’s projects, and software demos.

–107–

Art Book News Annual 2008

T385

2007-001652

978-1-59327-121-3

T385

0-321-48615-3

The artist’s guide to GIMP effects; creative techniques for photographers, artists, and designers.

How to wow with Photoshop Elements 5. (CD-ROM included)

Hammel, Michael J. No Starch Press, ©2007 348 p. $44.95 (pa) After walking through tasks commonly performed with the open source GNU image manipulation program (GIMP), 50 tutorials explain how to add effects to digital photographs, create simple graphics for web pages, design advertisements, transform text into eye-catching graphic messages, and build a user interface for a media player. Ample color screenshots illustrate the techniques.

Davis, Jack et al. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 190 p. $39.99 (pa) This book explains the features of Photoshop Elements 5 for use with digital photos or retouching and restoring old photos, including essential tools, and photo optimizing and enhancing. A chapter on creative projects demonstrates such techniques as creating instant watercolor, custom wrapping paper, a promotional card, and mapping photos and making stamps. Presentation projects involving greeting cards, scrapbook pages, galleries, and flipbooks are then described. The CD-ROM contains files and images, custom shape tools, styles, and custom frames. Davis is a designer, photographer, and author of The Photoshop Wow! Book. McHugh is a Photoshop trainer in Australia, and Rankin is a graphic designer in Australia.

T385

2007-006230

978-1-58450-522-8

The Cinema 4D R10 handbook. (CD-ROM included) Call, Anson. Charles River Media, ©2007 400 p. $49.99 (pa) Cinema 4D is a high end commercial 3D graphics application from MAXON. This guide for beginners uses a project based tutorial approach as it teaches them how to use C4D’s many tools and functions. Contained on the CD-ROM are full color images from the book as well as all of the files necessary for completing the tutorials plus demo versions of C4D for Macintosh and Windows. Call teaches 3D modeling, animation, and rendering at Iowa State U. T385

2007-016838

978-1-58450-536-5

Complete Photoshop CS3 for digital photographers. (CDROM included) Smith, Colin and Tim Cooper. Charles River Media, ©2007 442 p. $44.99 (pa) This guide explains the features of Photoshop CS3 for amateur and professional digital photographers. The authors cover file formats, resolution, USI, and other shooting considerations, then move on to Adobe Bridge and a discussion of photographic files. Subsequent chapters describe cropping, tonal and color correction and enhancement, selections and masks, sharpening and noise reduction, sizing and printing, retouching, frame and color effects, and combining images for collages and animations. The CD contains image files for the tutorials, nine video clips, and Nik, Alien Skin, and AutoFX software. Smith has written many books on Photoshop and is a regular columnist in Photoshop User magazine. Cooper is a photographer and teaches at the Rocky Mountain School of Photography. T385

T385

0-321-43454-4

How to wow with Illustrator. Chan, Ron and Barbara Obermeier. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 223 p. $39.99 (pa) In putting together this instructional manual on Adobe Illustrator, graphic designers Chan and Obermeir were primarily concerned with improving their audience’s productivity. Assuming prior familiarity with using the vector drawing program, they introduce shortcuts, workarounds, and methods that can fit into readers’ existing workflows. Chapters cover program foundations, freeform drawing and geometric shapes, masks and blend effects, brushes and patterns, designing with Illustrator, Illustrator and the Web, and integrating Illustrator and Photoshop. T385

2005-923192

Buchanan, Nancy. (Visual read less, learn more) John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 229 p. $19.99 (pa) The 100 tips in this tutorial illustrate how to add audio and video to a PowerPoint presentation, create impact with graphics and effects, use timesaving tools, collaborate on a presentation, publish to the web, and deliver a presentation. Each tip receives a two-page layout with an explanation, color screenshots, and step-by-step instructions. T385

1-933952-03-2

GIMP 2 for photographers; image editing with open source software. (CD-ROM included)

0-7645-9782-5

Microsoft PowerPoint 2003; top 100 simplified tips & tricks, 2d ed.

978-0-321-50325-1

The Painter X Wow! book. (CD-ROM included)

Goelker, Klaus. Rocky Nook, ©2006 186 p. $29.95 (pa) The GIMP 2 is an open-source digital image editing program that runs on Windows, Linux, or Macintosh operating systems. This guide for beginners uses a series of hands-on tutorials to teach the basics of digital image editing using GIMP. Many of the techniques and principles described may also be used when working with other applications. GIMP software and sample images are provided on the accompanying CD-ROM. Distributed in the U.S. by O’Reilly Media.

Threinen-Pendarvis, Cher. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 415 p. $59.99 (pa) Fine artist and digital designer Threinen-Pendarvis leads readers through the components of the Corel Painter X digital art software. Attractively illustrated, the twelve chapters cover techniques for using color, layers, special effects, selections, shapes, and masks; painting with and building brushes; applying type; enhancing photos, montage, and collage; using Painter with Photoshop; animating and filmmaking; and printing options. The accompanying CD-ROM contains more ideas for artfully employing Painter X.

T385

T385

0-7897-3612-8

2005-924607

978-0-7645-8972-0

Photoshop CS2 bible.

Hollywood special effects with Adobe Premiere Elements 3. (CD-ROM included) Plumer, Carl. Pearson Technology Group, ©2007 321 p. $39.99 (pa) This guide explains how to create 20 special effects in videos using Adobe Premiere Elements 3. Screen shots supplement the steps that illustrate effects such as see-through titles, a Star Wars opening sequence, the passing of time, reverse action, faded film, night vision, and bleeping. A DVD containing project files is included. Plumer is a writer, developer, and designer who works for a company that created the editing system most often used in Hollywood.

McClelland, Deke and Laurie Ulrich Fuller. John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 1052 p. $39.99 (pa) This thick guide explains the different options in Photoshop for painting on images, retouching pictures, selecting a portion of an image to edit, applying effects, working with layers, adjusting colors, and printing. Thirty-two pages of color images are provided along with black and white images throughout the book. The CS2 edition covers the new tools, file organization, and publishing workspace. T385

978-0-321-51429-5

Photoshop CS3; up to speed, the only book focused exclusively on the new features in Photoshop CS3. Willmore, Ben. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 153 p. $29.99 (pa) In a guide geared to fellow graphic designers and photographers, Willmore (Abode Photoshop Studio Techniques) covers the major image management bells and whistles of this Photoshop upgrade: e.g., the revamped Bridge interface and Camera Raw. Acknowledging that some new features make for a steep, but worthwhile, learning curve, he provides “where’s my stuff?” navigation tips in chapters mainly featuring his images.

Art Book News Annual 2008

–108–

T385

0-321-41096-3

TA654

2006-043071

978-0-7844-0857-5

Preventive Photoshop; take the best digital photographs now for better images later.

Snow loads; guide to the snow load provisions of ASCE 705.

Rea, Douglas Ford. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 160 p. $39.99 (pa) Rea (photojournalism, Rochester Institute of Technology) offers intermediate digital photographers advice for minimizing the amount of time spent editing and correcting in Photoshop by taking better pictures. The nine chapters, supplemented by color images, cover the following tasks: understanding digital capture, seeing pictures in advance, casting the right light, creating effects in-camera, processing raw images, managing color, working in Photoshop, and managing digital photographs.

O’Rourke, Michael J. Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2007 161 p. $59.00 (pa) Nine of the chapters in this handbook elucidate the corresponding sections 7.2 to 7.10 of ASCE 7-05, and provide several examples for each type of roof and snow load. Complete snow design examples of a gable roof metal building with a roof step, a pole barn with a hip roof, and a single-family residence round out the book. The author has taught civil engineering at Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute.

T385

TA658

0-321-44017-X

Professional Photoshop; the classic guide to color correction, 5th ed. (CD-ROM included) Margulis, Dan. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 512 p. $59.99 (pa) Featuring almost 90 percent new content, the fifth edition of this classic reference on digital prepress color correction has been updated to reflect current concerns in the age of digital photography. In addition to describing individual techniques, Margulis teaches readers how to think about color correction in general. Example images culled from a variety of professional sources accompany the text. A recognized expert on Photoshop color, Margulis is also the author of Photoshop LAB Color (2006). T385

2007-014393

978-0-672-32935-7

Sams teach yourself Adobe Photoshop CS3 in 24 hours, 4th ed. Rose, Carla and Kate Binder. Sams, ©2007 536 p. $29.99 (pa) Featuring 24 lessons of approximately one hour in length, this volume helps beginning users to quickly become proficient with Adobe Photoshop CS3. No previous image editing experience is required. Some of the skills covered include adjusting color, painting with brushes, using layers, applying filters, adding text, and repairing photos. The final section deals with printing, publishing, and uploading images to the Web. B&w illustrations accompany the text throughout. A section of color plates is found in the middle of the volume. T385

978-0-7734-5655-6

Using computers to create art; implications for artists and art educators. Bowen, Tracey. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 235 p. $109.95 As the century progresses and new technology becomes accessible to even the least technological, artists are learning to incorporate the digital into what had previous been their entirely hand-made work, either as elements within the composition as a theme or as the media itself. Writing for those who practice and teach visual arts, Bowen (communication, culture and information technology, U. of Toronto at Mississauga) thoughtfully describes the ways artists are creating art with computers. Drawing on case studies of visual artists, Bowen seeks connections between the work of art and the new media, the connections with culture and old and new modalities, the change of the studio space the pace of work, new attitudes of artists about uniqueness and communication, the emergence of the artist as cyborg hybrid, and new pedagogy among art educators.

ENGINEERING, ARCHITECTURE, BUILDING CONSTRUCTION See also p. 55 TA654

2005-021300

0-471-65743-3

Design of buildings and bridges for wind; a practical guide for ASCE-7 standard users and designers of special structures.

2007-013718

978-0-471-78904-8

Structural design; a practical guide for architects, 2d ed. Underwood, Rod and Michele Chiuini. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 792 p. $110.00 This text addresses structures both on a conceptual level and on a numerical level, aiming to give architects the language they need to communicate well with structural engineers (who, the authors advise, must be brought to any project early in the design process). Underwood and Chiumin (both affiliated with the architecture department at Ball State U., Indiana) indicate in their preface that this second edition was initiated because of the adoption or impending adoption of the International Building Code (IBC) as the standard for the United States, and the spreading use of load and resistance factor design (LRFD) for steel design. Other code changes are also incorporated. The text covers all primary structural materials (steel, wood, reinforced concrete, and masonry), as well as new materials or combinations, composites, and stressed-skin. A practical amount of math is included, along with examples and sample problems. The approximately 700 illustrations include photos, technical drawings, line diagrams, and freehand sketches. TA666

2007-273648

978-1-4051-4671-5

Timber designers’ manual, 3d ed. (reprint, 2002) Ozelton, E.C. and J.A. Baird. Ed. by E.C. Ozelton. Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 542 p. $79.95 (pa) This reference manual, a paperback reissue reprinted from the third edition published in 2002, covers the general and detailed design of structural timber, including shear deflection, creep, and dynamic and lateral stability considerations for flexural members. This edition is based on and updated to reflect the changes in British Standard BS 5268-2: 2002, “Code of Practice for permissible stress design, materials and workmanship,” which brought design concepts closer to European practice and Eurocode 5, “Design of Timber Structures.” The recent introduction of a range of composite solid timber sections and I-Beams from the US and Europe is reflected in chapters on thin web beams and structural composite lumber. Tables and coefficients are provided. The manual is meant for practicing engineers, civil engineering undergraduates, and timber manufacturers. Ozelton is a consulting engineer specializing in the design and detailing of all forms of timber engineering and timber frame construction in the UK. Baird is a Chartered Structural Engineer who has worked on BSI documents such as design code BS 5628. TA683

2006-027771

0-470-04414-4

Simplified design of concrete structures, 8th ed. Ambrose, James and Patrick Tripeny. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 428 p. $85.00 Updated to reflect current building codes, design practices, and industry standards, this accessible text for students of building design covers today’s most commonly used concrete structures. Concise descriptions of the design of various structural elements are accompanied by illustrative examples and problems to be solved by the reader. Supplementary materials found at the back of the volume include questions for review and a glossary of terms. Ambrose taught architecture at the U. of Southern California.

Simiu, Emil and Toshio Miyata. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 308 p. $110.00 Engineer and consultant Simiu and Mitata (emeritus, Yokohama National U.) explain to practicing engineers the Standard, which has incorporated much wind engineering knowledge accumulated over the past halfcentury, and how to apply its provisions with confidence. They begin by reviewing wind engineering fundamentals, then look at the provisions and at applications to rigid and flexible buildings and to bridges.

–109–

Reference & Research Book News covers high-level books in the humanities and social sciences. SciTech Book News covers technology, engineering, computers, medicine, and the physical and biological sciences. Contact Book News Inc. for sample copies: [email protected] or (503) 281-9230.

Art Book News Annual 2008

TA684

2007-002363

978-0-470-08631-5

TC375

2005-058965

978-0-393-73166-8

Simplified design of steel structures, 8th ed.

Lighthouses. (CD-ROM included)

Ambrose, James and Patrick Tripeny. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 468 p. $85.00 This handbook for students details commonly used systems, design practices, and research in steel structures, with examples of practical designs and general building structural systems. This edition has been updated to meet building codes, design practices, and industry standards. It focuses on widely used, simple, and ordinary methods of construction and keeps math work to a minimum. Specifications conform to the American Institute of Steel Construction Handbook. Ambrose is editor of the Parker/Ambrose Series of Simplified Design Guides and has practiced as an architect and structural engineer. Tripeny is a professor of architecture and planning at the U. of Utah.

Wermiel, Sara E. (Norton/Library of Congress visual sourcebooks in architecture, design, and engineering) W.W. Norton, ©2006 358 p. $75.00 This pictorial survey of the American lighthouse is part of the Norton/Library of Congress Visual Sourcebooks Series. It begins with the history and development of lighthouses in the US, followed by descriptions of lighthouses in mediums such as stone and brick, cast- iron plate, on marine foundations, and using twentieth century materials, as well as cottage style and skeleton towers. Wermiel discusses how the structures and materials have changed over time due to changes in the administration system and technology. She describes specific lighthouses throughout the US and includes b&w photos of them. The book will be of interest to scholars, students, researchers, historians, and general readers. The included CD-ROM contains files of all of the 476 illustrations and a link to the Library of Congress catalogs and image files. Wermiel is an independent scholar and historic preservation consultant who specializes in the history of nineteenth-century building technology.

TA712

2007-018953

978-0-8014-7304-3

Metropolis on the Styx; the underworlds of modern urban culture, 1800-2001. Pike, David L. Cornell U. Press, ©2007 377 p. $27.95 (pa) Pike (literature, American U.) explores the myriad ways that people in the 19th century used, conceived, and imagined basements and other underground spaces, and how their approaches continue to influence the very different spaces that characterize the 21st century. TA1637

2007-008641

978-0-8047-5624-2

Mediated memories in the digital age. Van Dijck, José. (Cultural memory in the present) Stanford U. Press, ©2007 232 p. $21.95 (pa) The acquisition of a digital camera having thrown her into a project of digitalizing old photographs, videotapes, commercial sound recordings, and written diaries, Dijck (media and culture, U. of Amsterdam) began to wonder whether digital objects change people’s inscription and remembrance of lived experiences, and affect the memory process in people’s brains. Here she explores those questions against the backdrop of cultural traditions of retaining memory and passing it on to future generations. TA1637

978-0-321-48999-9

Real world Nikon Capture NX. Long, Ben. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 230 p. $34.99 (pa) Thanks to new technologies, photographers can be disappointed in their shots instantly rather than waiting hours or days. Photographer and journalist Long shows how that disappointment can turn into fully justified pride with this software product that works with any digital camera as well as JPEG, TIFF and raw format photos. He provides nondestructive editing techniques that go far beyond removing awkward features in photos, such as your regional vice president, and include adjusting for color for better realism (or fantasy), touching up with a variety of tools, and preparing photos for output to print or Web. Long introduces basic theory about how cameras make images and how professionals manage their workflow to edit them, basic interfaces, using this basic information to prepare to edit, basic and advanced editing using traditional geometric tools and generally-accepted standards, version control and batch processing, and getting output that is not disappointing. TA1675

2006-044567

0-7503-0873-7

Lasers in the preservation of cultural heritage; principles and applications. Title main entry. Ed. by C. Fotakis et al. (Series in optics and optoelectronics; v.2) Taylor & Francis, ©2007 336 p. $149.95 Five Greek scientists affiliated with the Foundation for Research and Technology survey recent developments in using lasers to diagnose and restore objects and structures of cultural heritage. They set out the basic principles used in analyzing structures and laser cleaning, and present case studies. The information could be useful to conservation scientists, archaeologists, art historians, and researchers and advanced students in these fields.

Art Book News Annual 2008

TG25

978-0-252-07409-7

Rails across the Mississippi; a history of the St. Louis bridge. (reprint, 2001) Jackson, Robert W. U. of Illinois Press, ©2007 265 p. $19.95 (pa) This is a paperbound reprint of a 2001 work. Completed in 1874, the structure now known as the Eads Bridge crossed the Mississippi River at St. Louis. In this monograph, urban planner and historian Jackson tells the story of this monumental engineering project, which resulted in the longest steel arch bridge in the world at that time. B&w architectural drawings and archival photographs illustrate the bridge’s construction at various stages. TG300

2006-048203

978-0-393-73136-1

Bridges. (CD-ROM included) Cleary, Richard Louis. (Norton/Library of Congress visual sourcebooks in architecture, design, and engineering) W.W. Norton, ©2007 383 p. $75.00 Drawing his material from the collections of the Library of Congress, Cleary (architecture, U. of Texas at Austin) offers a broad survey of bridge construction in the United States. With the exception of a some brief essays discussing the role of bridges in American transportation, types of bridge design, and the need for bridge preservation programs, the vast bulk of the material consists of 919 captioned illustrations (primarily black and white photographs) depicting beam bridges, arch bridges, truss bridges, movable bridges, and suspension and cable- stayed bridges around the country. The CD-ROM reproduces all of the images found in the text. TH100

978-1-889892-72-6

Builder’s guide to stucco; lath & plaster. (CD-ROM included) Schwartz, Max. Builder’s Book, Inc., ©2007 284 p. $49.95 (pa) Starting with the basics about stucco (also known as Portland cement plaster) and a residential stucco application checklist, a consulting civil engineer/instructor offers definitions, how-to tips, and cautions on topics in outline form from masonry construction to refinishing. The guide includes diagrams, a troubleshooting summary table, glossary, resources, references, overview of cement manufacture, construction codes and specifications, and safety guidelines. The complete book is on the companion CD-ROM for quick searching. Distributed by Craftsman Book Company. TH140

2005-032124

1-57233-485-1

Two carpenters; architecture and building in early New England, 1799-1859. Garrison, J. Ritchie. U. of Tennessee Press, ©2006 197 p. $48.95 Calvin and George Stearns, whose wood and stone progeny have graced the New England Landscape since the late eighteenth century, understood the country was changing from agrarian barter to urban capitalism, and built houses, churches and schools of those who also understood. Garrison (history, U. of Delaware) goes deep into the motivations of behind the Stearns’s gracious and serene structures and landscapes, mining primary documents as well as the physical results to find what people wanted, what they feared, and what they thought of themselves as they and their world changed forever, in both text and well-chosen illustrations.

–110–

TH145

2006-028489

978-0-471-71405-7

TH455

978-0-86571-555-4

Olin’s construction; principles, materials, and methods, 8th ed.

Your green home; a guide to planning a healthy, environmentally friendly new home.

Simmons, H. Leslie. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 1213 p. $110.00 It’s been 50 years since Olin first prepared this cornerstone reference for the construction industry; the book now bears his name at the head of the title, but seasoned construction consultant and specifications writer H. Leslie Simmons is now the author. Some 1,200 illustrations (150 new to this edition) support the information on the practicalities from site preparation to building design and everything entailed in construction including concrete finishing, plastic fabrications, heat and air, waterproofing, sprinkler systems...; you name it, it’s covered. This edition reflects the expanded adoption of the ICC codes and includes new information on sustainability and construction management.

Wilson, Alex. New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2006 237 p. $17.95 (pa) Aimed at future homeowners as well as designers and builders, this accessible text explains how to plan a new home that is both environmentally friendly and a healthful place to live. Topics covered include (for example) energy efficiency, water conservation, renewable energy, landscaping, and cost considerations. Wilson is executive editor of Environmental Building News. Distributed in the U.S. by Consortium Books Sales and Distribution.

TH153

2006-030752

978-0-471-47943-7

Construction dewatering and groundwater control; new methods and applications, 3d ed. Title main entry. Ed. by J. Patrick Powers et al. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 638 p. $175.00 Having changed the title to reflect the growing use of methods for dealing with groundwater on construction projects besides straightforward dewatering, the authors present the third edition of a text originally titled Construction Dewatering—New Methods and Applications. Following an introduction to the origins and developments of dewatering technology, they offer chapters discussing, among other topics, the geology of soils; hydrology of the ideal aquifer; characteristics of natural aquifers; groundwater modeling, measurement, and monitoring; pumping tests; pump theory; groundwater chemistry, bacteriology; contaminated groundwater; and piping systems. They then turn to the practice of groundwater control and dewatering in chapters discussing method choice; sumps, drains, and open pumping; deep well systems; wellpoint systems; ejector systems and other methods; groundwater cutoff structures; grouting methods; dewatering and groundwater control for soft ground tunneling; ground freezing; artificial recharge; electrical design for dewatering systems; long-term dewatering systems; dewatering costs; and dewatering specifications, allocation of risk, dispute avoidance, and resolution of disputes. TH420

2007-009080

978-0-7844-0884-1

Seismic rehabilitation of existing buildings. Title main entry. Am. Society of Civil Engineers, ©2007 411 p. $160.00 (pa) The Structural Engineering Institute of the American Society of Civil Engineers presents their nationally applicable standards for the seismic rehabilitation of buildings, together with commentary explaining the presented technical requirements. Covering both the overall structure of a building and nonstructural components, the standards are arranged such that four analysis procedures can be used: linear static procedure, linear dynamic procedure, nonlinear static procedure, and nonlinear dynamic procedure. In presenting the standards, both the International System of Units and customary units have been employed. TH438

2006-011203

978-1-4051-3088-2

The design quality manual; improving building performance. Cook, Martin. Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 199 p. $110.00 British architect Cook sets out criteria for assessing the quality of a building, hopefully in a stage long before it is actually constructed, when the quality can be improved without having to evict tenants and tear stuff down. He covers building procurement, schools, hospitals, and housing. TH449

2006-029895

TH880

2006-026647

978-0-471-74917-2

Sustainable commercial interior design. Bonda, Penny and Katie Sosnowchik. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 305 p. $70.00 Bonda (Interior Design magazine) and Sosnowchik green@work magazine) offering designers and architects an introduction to the evolving discipline of sustainable design in commercial interior spaces. The book is organized around the LEED Green Building Rating System, with chapters on design processes for sustainable sites, water efficiency, energy issues, materials, and indoor environmental quality. There is also information on costs, and on green design tools such as standards and certification. A final chapter presents 12 case studies from around the US, and color photos give examples on almost every page. A glossary and a list of print and nonprint resources are also included. The book is for both novice and veteran green-minded practitioners. TH2031

2006-009368

0-471-76090-0

Planning and urban design standards, student ed. Steiner, Frederick and Kent Butler. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 436 p. $85.00 (pa) Steiner and Butler (architecture, research, and planning, U. of Texas at Austin) present a student edition of a text on planning and urban design standards, derived from the full edition published in 2006. It contains information aimed at planning students and presents widely- used and emerging standards relating to types of plans, environmental factors and hazards, building types, and transportation planning, and is meant to serve as a reference, not a main text, for planning courses in architecture, landscape architecture, geography, civil engineering, environmental studies, and public administration programs. Analysis and implementation techniques are also covered. Many b&w illustrations are incorporated throughout. TH2238

978-1-58603-709-3

EU COST C13 glass & interactive building envelopes; final report. Title main entry. Ed. by Michel Crisinel et al. (Research in architectural engineering series; v.1) IOS Press, ©2007 308 p. $82.00 (pa) Papers collected here originated at COST Action C13, a series of meetings and workshops held in Europe on the potential of glazing to increase the performance of building envelopes, to reduce energy consumption, and to improve quality of life with respect to interior space, impact on the environment, and human welfare. Papers reflect the concerns of working groups on architectural aspects and design integration, quality of interior space, and structural aspects of glass. Some specific topics addressed include acoustical performance of ventilated double glass façades, zappi structures and constructions in blob architecture, harmonization of optical and thermal behavior of buildings, and designing, engineering, and production of glass structures for free-form architectures. B&w photos are included. The book will be of interest to glass façade professionals. There is no subject index.

978-1-56158-825-1

Unbuilding; salvaging the architectural treasures of unwanted houses. Falk, Bob and Brad Guy. Taunton Press, ©2007 248 p. $30.00 Falk and Guy describe the process of salvaging unwanted houses and how to remove materials safely, for anyone interested in the salvage and reuse of buildings, including professional builders, architects, and homeowners. They cover planning and organizing a project, safety and health issues, and specific details of the processes of “soft-stripping” and full deconstruction. Incorporated throughout are profiles of unbuilding entrepreneurs and many photos. Falk is a research engineer at the US Forest Products Laboratory, and Guy is affiliated with the Penn State School of Architecture.

–111–

Please verify price and availability by contacting publishers or book vendors.

Art Book News Annual 2008

TH3411

TH9025

978-1-84564-085-9

Structural studies, repairs and maintenance of heritage architecture X; proceedings. Int’l Conference on Studies, Repairs and Maintenance of Heritage Architecture (10th: 2007: Prague) Ed. by C.A. Brebbia. (WIT transactions on the built environment; v.95) WIT Press, ©2007 710 p. $475.00 After hundreds of generations of tearing down the past or just building on top of it, many cultures are now devoting both money and effort into sustaining historical architecture and heritage spaces. But how can they make up for lost time? This collection reflects that relatively new interest with case studies and essays that range from the theoretical to the completely practical, giving architects, developers and policy makers the good news that their peers are serious about conservation. Topics include heritage architecture worldwide and the tourism and other activities it attracts, including reports from Mexico, Japan and Atlanta, regional architecture in Asia and elsewhere, non-destructive evaluation techniques of masonry structures including the sonic pulse velocity method, material characterization, repair and maintenance, including that on medieval beams, preservation and prevention, structural issues, simulation and modeling, and seismic vulnerability. The US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics. TH4311

978-0-393-73231-3

Building the Empire State. (reprint, 1998) Title main entry. Ed. by Carol Willis. W.W. Norton, ©2007 190 p. $19.95 (pa) This reprint from 1998 reproduces Notes on Construction of Empire State Building, which describes the building’s construction process and was compiled in 1930 or 1931 from daily records. Authorship of the notebook is unknown and it is reproduced in facsimile form. Photos from the notebook have been enlarged, and Friedman, a structural engineer, has written longer captions aimed at the general reader. In the accompanying essays, Friedman summarizes the building through the builders’ eyes, and Willis, founder and director of The Skyscraper Museum in New York City, discusses its construction and design. TH4860

978-0-9773343-1-5

Building with awareness; the construction of a hybrid home. (DVD included) Owens, Ted. Syncronos Design, Inc., ©2006 151 p. $42.00 (pa) This is a guide to building a straw bale solar home. The work is illustrated with photos of a single project as it develops from start to finish and contains advice on design, breaking ground, installing a rainwater cistern, using adobe, straw bale walls, the electrical system, windows and insulation, earth plaster, and finish work. The DVD is structured along identical lines and contains some five hours of videos and narrated slide shows revealing additional construction details. Distributed in the US by New Society Publishers. TH6012

2005-051670

0-471-68965-3

The building environment; active and passive control systems, 3d ed. Bradshaw, Vaughn. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 575 p. $105.00 Rather than designing whole HVAC, plumbing, and electrical systems in buildings, modern architects more often manage a team of engineers who specialize in these and other systems In this third edition text for architecture students, Bradshaw (architecture, Washington U.) offers new material on the environment and sustainability along with a broad survey on mechanical/electrical/plumbing systems in buildings. He favors principle concepts over technical detail, providing enough information so the architect may plan for space and access of each system, and have enough knowledge of terminology and function to coordinate effectively with specialists. Topics include thermal environment control (both passive and active); electrical, fire protection, and plumbing systems; noise control; and how to make simple comparisons of life-cycle costs. The appendices contain unit conversions and relevant data on sitespecific climatic conditions and building regulations.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-1-84564-086-6

The art of resisting extreme natural forces; proceedings. International conference on the Art of Resisting Extreme Natural Forces (2007: The New Forest, UK) Ed. by S. Hernández and C.A. Brebbia. (WIT Transactions on engineering sciences; v.58) WIT Press, ©2007 121 p. $90.00 This collection, representing papers offered at the July 2007 conference, provides current information on innovations and new techniques. International contributors cover building bridges that span the equivalent of fjords, improving the analysis of long-span bridge flutter, making the most of seismic analysis, taming wind storms, reducing the risk of snow load, reducing cross-winds for trains and cars, managing a notorious lake for sustainability, keeping fire in its place in historical areas, modifying stainless steel beams in case of fire, the storage of ammonia safe under extreme forces, and assessing the performance of early warning systems. The US office of WIT Press is Computational Mechanics. TJ825

2006-025550

978-0-8061-3802-2

American windmills; an album of historic photographs. Baker, T. Lindsay. U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2007 156 p. $34.95 Photographs and text document the manufacture, distribution, and use of windmills in America’s past, with emphasis on the Great Plains. Black and white images depict windmills homemade and professionally crafted, big and small, for energy and aesthetic purposes, and in rural and urban American settings. TJ840

2006-028810

978-0-86698-367-9

Wind & water in the Middle Ages; fluid technologies from antiquity to the Renaissance. Title main entry. Ed. by Steven A. Walton. (Medieval and Renaissance texts and studies; 322; Penn State Medieval studies; no.2) ACMRS, ©2006 300 p. $55.00 Published by the Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies, the 11 essays of this volume represent a portion of those presented, in an earlier format, in the eponymous conference held at Penn State in April 2004. The paper topics include legalities that sprang from the invention of the windmill, waterworks in Islamic gardens, mills in medieval Valencia, water management in London, the role of monasteries, and mills in Ireland. The contributors are based in the UK, Australia, Ireland, Spain and the U.S.

CYBERSPACE, DIGITAL CONTENT TK5105

978-1-59059-691-3

Clear blogging; how people blogging are changing the world and how you can join them. Walsh, Bob. Apress, ©2007 351 p. $24.99 (pa) This guide is aimed at beginners and experienced bloggers who want to expand their site. It discusses the basics, such as reasons to blog and how to start, and provides advice from experts. Personal, professional, business, and occupational types are covered, and different services, legal rights, technologies, how to find topics, and journalism are detailed. Other topics treated are podcasting, profiting from a blog, and building readership. Using blogging for marketing is not discussed, and very little code is included. Walsh is a contract software developer specializing in desktop information systems. TK5105

2006-018870

978-0-8166-4792-7

Cyberspaces of everyday life. Nunes, Mark. (Electronic mediations; v.19) U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 223 p. $22.50 (pa) Nunes (English, technical communications and media arts, Southern Polytechnic State U., Marietta, Georgia) examines the ways in which computer-mediated communication (CMC) takes part in spaces of everyday life. Coverage includes an overview of the emerging field of scholarship that has addressed the spatiality of CMC, presentation of a theoretical framework for considering the reality of cyberspace as lived space, and application of the framework to specific examples of social space in a network society. These include discussion of how web pages construct sites that enact spaces of control for their users; a comparison of the rise of the British postal system in the 17th century and the growth of e-mail today as a common medium of exchange; and how CMC is restructuring the university, through both distance education and computer-aided instruction.

–112–

TK5105

2005-938255

0-471-77618-1

Master visually Dreamweaver 8 and Flash 8. (CD-ROM included)

0-321-41097-1

Transcending CSS; the fine art of web design. Clarke, Andy. Ed. by Molly E. Holzschlag. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 371 p. $49.99 (pa) Featuring color illustrations throughout, this volume uses real world examples to teach Web designers about how visual design theory and CSS code can work together to help them reach their creative goals. Just a few of the topics explored: designing from the content out, using interactive prototypes, and finding inspiration in unexpected places. It is assumed that the reader already has a working knowledge of XHTML markup and CSS. Consultant Clarke specializes in training designers and developers in the creative applications of Web standards. TK5105

2006-923799

0-471-97177-4

Videoblogging for dummies. Bryant, Stephanie Cottrell. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 386 p. $24.99 (pa) Featuring jargon-free language and simple instructions, this volume helps users of both Macintosh and Windows computers produce their own video blogs (“vlogs”). Topics include (for example) planning vlog content, choosing camera equipment, creating an intro, composing shots, editing content, and adding a soundtrack. Tech writer Bryant also explains how to upload vlog files to the Internet and gather data on traffic statistics. TK5105

978-0-470-13794-9

The web’s awake; an introduction to the field of web science and the concept of web life. Tetlow, Philip. Wiley-Interscience, ©2007 239 p. $50.00 Tedow introduces the relatively new field of web science and supports the notion that the web is a new life form. Drawing from a variety of disciplines including life sciences, Tedow compares unprogrammed behaviors of the internet with the behaviors of life forms and finds marked similarities. He also finds that none of this is new, although it has been marred by web myth and folklore, but that the universe presents infinite possibilities for the definition of life. He also examines the spectrum of complexity, the importance of discreteness and symmetry, natural structures for man-made machines and he resulting curvature, positional information and scale-free networks, evolution through engineering, the boundless nature of organics, posthuman concepts, the physics of it all, counter arguments and objective opinions, and extra material on the semantic web. TK5105

2007-926394

978-0-470-14925-6

YouTube for dummies. Sahlin, Doug and Chris Botello. (For dummies) John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 386 p. $22.00 (pa) To help people join the growing YouTube online community, the author of Building Flash Web Sites for Dummies and a media artist present a primer on this video-sharing service for personal and business promotion purposes. Following an overview of YouTube’s features and technical tips, the guide concludes with advice on what not to include in home videos or videoblogs (e.g., “no nudes are good news.”) TK6637

2007-014283

0-321-43231-2

Encyclopedia of color correction. (DVD included)

Etheridge, Denise and Janet Valade. (Visual read less, learn more) John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 650 p. $34.99 (pa) Illustrated by hundreds of screenshots, this guide explains the organization and creation of web pages with the Dreamweaver development tool and the basic framework for adding graphics and animations with Flash movies. The CD-ROM contains files for some of the examples and trial versions of Dreamweaver, Flash, and Fireworks 8. TK5105

TK6680

978-0-313-33128-2

Television; the life story of a technology. Magoun, Alexander B. (Greenwood technographies) Greenwood Press, ©2007 209 p. $45.00 In this history of television, Magoun (executive director, David Sarnoff Library, David Sarnoff Research Center, Princeton) not only explains the development and basic workings of this technology, but also the processes, personalities, and business decisions involved, and TV’s impact on American values. In a “life cycle” framework, he traces TV from its protracted birth through the death of cathode tube TVs and resurrection in digital form. The author addresses issues relating to the paternity of inventions, government regulation, and changing broadcast standards. The book includes b&w illustrations.

Hurkman, Alexis Van. (Apple pro training) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 539 p. $54.99 (pa) A writer, film director, colorist, and effects artist, Hurkman presents an encyclopedia of practical techniques for color correction using Apple’s Final Cut Pro. He focuses on broadcast, but says the techniques are applicable to other programming such as standard and high-definition video post-production for independent digital features. There is no bibliography.

AIRCRAFT TL670

978-0-8109-9285-6

Aircraft; the jet as art. Milstein, Jeffrey. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 104 p. $29.95 Each plane is shown by itself on a white page, most from below; a few images occupy multiple pages afforded by foldouts, and a few are shown from the side. These color photos by Milstein, showcased in an oversize format (12.5x12.5″), are motivated by his love of their design. A two-page chart identifies each craft and some of its specifications. Walter J. Boyne, former director of the National Air and Space Museum, Washington, D.C. wrote the foreword, and that’s the only text.

GLASS, COLORS, PIGMENTS TP788

1-901992-44-6

John Baker’s late 17th-century glasshouse at Vauxhall. Tyler, Kieron and Hugh Willmott. (MoLAS monograph; 28) Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2005 85 p. $26.00 (pa) Baker’s glass house was not the sort to avoid throwing rock in, but the sort where glass items are manufactured. It opened sometime between 1663 and 1681 and had closed down by 1704 and demolished soon after. Excavations by the Museum of London in 1989 found the form of a furnace, a fritting oven, frit itself, crucibles, working waste, finished vessels, and other evidence for the manufacturing process of the period. The series is devoted to publishing the backlog of excavation reports in London. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. TP936

2006-935953

978-0-8109-9292-4

Colors; what they mean and how to make them. Varichon, Anne. Trans. by Toula Ballas. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 287 p. Archaeologist and ethnologist Varichon offers a origins, symbolism, and significance—since Biblical the historical information, the text describes natural and recipes from cultures around the world Illustrated throughout with color photographs Translated from French by Toula Ballas. TP936

$29.95 history of color—its times. In addition to sources of each color for creating colors. and reproductions. 0-8155-1532-4

Metallic effect pigments; fundamentals and applications. Wißling, Peter. Trans. by John Haim and David Hyatt. (European coatings literature) Vincentz, ©2006 234 p. $195.00 After giving an historical background of metallic effect pigments that goes back to the mummy days, Wißling describes the basics of standard pigments’ manufacture, properties and testing, describes special effects pigments such as those made of colored aluminum, gives applications such as coatings, print (including screen printing and gravure), plastics, technical applications, corrosion protection, cosmetics and personal care products. He describes the effects of these pigments on people and the environment and offers safety advice. Bound in are advertisements for manufacturers and samples. Distributed by William Andrew Pub.

–113–

Art Book News Annual 2008

PHOTOGRAPHY, VIDEOGRAPHY, FILMMAKING

TR185

TR6

Title main entry. Ed. by James Elkins. (The art seminar; 2) Routledge, ©2007 470 p. $18.95 (pa) Elkins (art history, theory, and criticism, Art Institute of Chicago) presents a uniquely organized reader on photography theory, the writings within which, though varied, all attempt to “conceptualize” the photograph. After a short history of photography theories, scholars including Diarmuid Costello and Rosalind Krauss offer essays on major questions in the field. This is followed by the edited transcript of a conversation between the editors and eight contributors. The final section comprises responses from other scholars to the preceding material in the form of “assessments,” offering to students ideas for understanding, writing about, and analyzing photography and its theory.

2006-024401

978-0-8156-0851-6

Real photo postcard guide; the people’s photography. Bogdan, Robert and Todd Weseloh. Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 274 p. $39.95 Widely popular during the early 20th century, “real photo” postcards differed from their printed counterparts in that they were produced chemically from a negative on photographic paper. Aimed at collectors, historians, curators, and interested general readers, this richly illustrated volume provides a broad overview of the genre. Seven chapters cover such topics as photographers and careers; categories for collectors; and photo postcard care and preservation. Bogdan (emeritus, Syracuse U.) is a columnist for The Postcard Collector magazine, and Weseloh maintains an extensive (5000-plus) collection of historically important postcards. TR140

2006-013460

Pedro E. Guerrero; a photographer’s journey.

2006-046934

The ultimate field guide to photography.

2006-035276

1-58115-469-0

Creative careers in photography; making a living with or without a camera. Heron, Michal. (Creative careers in photography) Allworth Press, ©2007 262 p. $19.95 (pa) Heron, a freelance photographer of three decades, offers details on the diverse paths available to aspiring career photographers. Jobs considered fall under one of stock categories: publication, consumer, service, digital, stock, or fine art photography, each of which is complemented by an interview with a practitioner. Also addressed are non-camera photography careers such as buying and dealing, representing, and writing or teaching. Advice mainly comprises job and equipment descriptions— the author forgoes speculations on employment and salary outlook. The book concludes with advice on career building and self-marketing and a list of institutions teaching photography and professional organizations for photographers. TR183

2006-019693

1-84545-219-4

Locating memory; photographic arts. Title main entry. Ed. by Annette Kuhn and Kirsten Cisco McAllister. (Remapping cultural history; 4) Berghahn Books, ©2006 285 p. $25.00 (pa) How do photographic images shape memory and identity in the postmodern world? Kuhn (film studies, Lancaster U., UK) and McAllister (communication, Simon Fraser U., Canada) introduce this theme in a collection of 11 essays. North American and UK contributors explore such issues as documenting disappearing indigenous traditions and historical evidence (e.g., of the Holocaust); re-framing normative narratives of gender, race, ethnicity, and nationality; and the role of photography in family memories, views about war, and in performance art. Not indexed.

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR263

2006-925872

0-470-03748-2

Busch, David D. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 262 p. $19.99 (pa) Professional photographer Busch explains the built-in controls and menus for taking advanced photographs with the D200 digital SLR camera and walks through techniques for adjusting exposure, focus, color, lenses, and light. Color images illustrate different options for photographing animals, architecture, events, holiday lights, portraits, landscapes, night scenes, sports, and street life. TR267

2006-925873

0-471-78264-5

Adobe Camera Raw studio skills.

978-0-7922-6209-1

Martin, Bob et al. Natl. Geographic Society, ©2006 397 p. $24.95 (pa) Nine professional photographers contribute personal perspectives to this National Geographic guide to digital, film, and camera phone photography techniques. Eleven chapters discuss basic and advanced techniques for all types of photography, as well as strategies for selecting a digital camera, using point and shoot and other film cameras, making better prints, scanning and archiving (for digital files as well as prints), digital editing, and conceiving projects. Also included are eight photographer profiles and nine portfolios displaying works and insights, mostly from National Geographic’s team. Abundant color photographs from the magazine demonstrate techniques in action. This guide is especially useful for beginning and intermediate photographers, though sidebars and historical materials will be of interest to those of any skill level. TR154

978-0-415-97783-8

Nikon D200 digital field guide.

978-1-56898-590-9

Guerrero, Pedro E. Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2007 223 p. $55.00 As a photographer of artists’ studios, Pedro Guerrero worked with Frank Lloyd Wright, Alexander Calder, and Louise Nevelson. This memoir tells the story of his career working with these artists, and includes about 190 of his photographs of them and their studios and houses, in addition to his family. He recounts other events in his life, such as enlisting in the army, and his family history. TR146

2007-271843

Photography theory.

Lowrie, Charlotte K. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 348 p. $34.99 (pa) A team of professional photographers introduce the Adobe Camera Raw plug-in for Photoshop CS3 as “the new frontier of photography.” For those with a digital SLR camera and well- exposed RAW images, they cover techniques of working with RAW files from automating file naming with the Bridge tool through RAW conversion strategies to printing. The colorcoded guide includes a glossary; appended overviews of Camera Raw, Adobe Bridge, plug-ins for Adobe updates; resources; and contributors’ contact information. Since the book’s publication, Adobe released Camera RAW version 4.1. TR267

978-0-321-50813-3

Adobe Photoshop CS3 Beta First Look with Adobe Bridge and Camera Raw. Long, Ben. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 114 p. $24.99 (pa) At the end of 2006, Adobe released a beta version of its leading Photoshop CS3 digital imaging software designed to smooth the transition to Apple’s new Intel-based systems. Well-known to readers of Mac magazines, the author of books including Getting Started with Camera Raw previews such new features of this major upgrade to Abode Bridge and Camera Raw as improved interfaces. Long’s Web site offers free downloadable software for working with Photoshop. TR267

978-0-321-50191-2

The Adobe Photoshop CS3 book for digital photographers. Kelby, Scott. New Riders Publishing, ©2008 473 p. $49.99 (pa) Kelby, editor-in-chief of Photoshop User magazine, sets out step- by-step techniques, illustrated with color photos and screenshots on every page, for beginning and advanced digital photographers. Self- contained chapters allow readers to jump in anywhere. This fourth edition focuses on CS3 features, including the new Bridge CS3, Camera Raw, the black and white conversion feature, and new printing features. In a new final chapter, Kelby reveals his own Photoshop workflow, describing exactly what he does and the order in which he does it. This edition also features coverage of additional techniques. The highly qualified Kelby is president of the National Association of Photoshop Professionals and has written 40 books on Photoshop.

–114–

TR267

2006-276055

0-321-37570-X

Adobe Photoshop elements 4; 50 ways to create cool pictures.

0-321-48020-1

Adobe Photoshop Elements 5.0 and Adobe Premiere Elements 3.0; classroom in a book. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. Adobe Press, ©2007 253 p. $60.00 (pa) Featuring 22 lessons in all, this volume contains complete training manuals for both Adobe Photoshop Elements 5.0 and Adobe Premiere Elements 3.0. Although both PC and Mac versions of these image and video editing tools are available, the lessons are designed for use only on Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems. Full-color screen shots illustrate each step of the tasks described. Lesson files and demonstration movies are found on the accompanying DVD-ROM. Software must be purchased separately. TR267

0-321-47674-3

Adobe Photoshop Elements 5.0. (CD-ROM included) Title main entry. (Classroom in a book) Adobe Press, ©2007 347 p. $39.99 (pa) This workbook demonstrates the features of Adobe Photoshop Elements 5.0 through 11 lessons, each including projects. Incorporating color examples, the lessons cover basic and advanced organizing; creating cards, galleries, and flipbooks; printing, sharing, and exporting; adjusting color; fixing exposure problems; repairing and retouching; working with text; combining multiple images; and advanced editing techniques. The CD contains lesson files and resources. The lessons are designed to be used with Windows 2000 or Windows XP only. They assume a basic knowledge of the computer and operating system. TR267

978-0-321-38543-7

The Adobe Photoshop Lightroom book; the complete guide for photographers. Evening, Martin. Adobe Press, ©2007 336 p. $40.00 (pa) Evening, a London-based professional photographer who contributed to the development of Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, focuses on this software from a digital photographer’s rather than geek’s perspective. Following an introduction to Lightroom’s features and relation to the Camera Raw plug-in, he treats the specifics of importing and managing files, processing and printing images, and presenting one’s work. The appendix contains further information on optimally using and customizing Lightroom and backup strategies. TR267

2007-270939

978-1-59059-612-8

Building Flickr applications with PHP.

Huss, Dave. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2006 329 p. $29.99 (pa) Photoshop Elements is the consumer version of Adobe’s powerful image editing software. In this accessible guide, professional photographer Huss details more than 50 Elements techniques for enhancing and retouching digital photos. He also explains how to create a photo gallery and upload it to the Web. Practice image files are available at a companion website. This revised edition has been updated for Photoshop Elements version 4. Huss is a contributing editor for Photoshop User magazine. TR267

TR267

978-0-321-49216-6

The Adobe Photoshop Lightroom book for digital photographers. Kelby, Scott. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 394 p. $39.99 (pa) Kelby (editor, Photoshop User magazine) demonstrates the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom workflow tool for importing photos, sorting them, processing them in the digital darkroom, viewing them in their final version, and printing them. Illustrated by color screenshots, the final two chapters walk through two live photo shoots of a wedding and a landscape.

Kunkle, Rob and Andrew Morton. (Expert’s voice in open source) Apress, ©2006 194 p. $34.99 Open-source software is often of very high quality, but sometimes users must search in vain for a strong reference to guide them to and through the more advanced features. This handbook fills that gap between anticipation and production by giving those who wish to make the best use of Flickr’s enormous photo cache (and of course their own favorite snaps). Practitioners and photography enthusiasts Kunkle and Morton keep the fact that readers may have had limited experience with opensource software, graphic design, photography and collaborative technology in mind as they describe the software and its attendants, discuss features, show how to install the works, including Apache, PHP and Phlickr, work with PHP and photos, organize photo sets, use semantic tags, get through Real Simple Syndication feeds and other syndication, and add collaborative features to websites with Flickr Groups. TR267

2007-018885

978-1-58450-520-4

Complete digital photography, 4th ed. (CD-ROM included) Long, Ben. (Digital photography series) Charles River Media, ©2007 566 p. $39.99 (pa) This update of the 2004 edition incorporates the latest trends in digital cameras, e.g., increasingly affordable digital SLRs. Long, a San Franciscobased freelance photographer/writer, offers photographers of all skill levels a primer on basic photography concepts and hardware selection; technical information (e.g., the difference between shooting JPEG and raw data images); and illustrated examples and tutorials focusing largely on post-shoot Adobe Photoshop applications. The bundled CD-ROM contains tutorial videos, articles, and sample images. The guide also includes a glossary. TR267

2006-277100

0-596-00849-X

Commercial Photoshop retouching; in the studio. Honiball, Glenn. O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2005 257 p. $44.95 (pa) For other commercial photo retouchers and anyone interested in adding a professional touch to their digital images, Honiball begins by explaining how he set up that crucial comfortable workspace and how he did retouching in the pre-Photoshop era. Acknowledging that he mostly still relies on Photoshop basics, despite the image editor’s latest bells and whistles, he explains hardware and software choices, the workflow of a typical retouching job in a production environment, and correction basics. There are ample color illustrative examples. TR267

2006-930069

978-1-58428-200-6

Digital capture and workflow; for professional photographers. Lee, Tom. Amherst Media, ©2007 125 p. $34.95 (pa) This practical guide helps professional photographers develop a custom workflow aimed at maximizing efficiency at all stages of image capture and editing. Lee (a wedding photographer and seminar presenter) begins by explaining how to refine camera settings when shooting to reduce the need for later adjustments. Other topics include processing RAW files, converting batches, correcting color, and adding special effects. Full color sample images and screenshot illustrations accompany the text throughout. TR267

2003-273654

978-0-7566-2601-3

Digital photography; an introduction, 2d ed. Ang, Tom. DK Publishing, Inc., ©2006 223 p. $15.00 (pa) In this update of the 2002 edition titled Digital Photographer’s Handbook, a leading digital photographer argues that digital photography builds on, rather than makes obsolete, conventional photo techniques. Ang includes tips on buying equipment, trouble- shooting and quick fixes, a note on how digital equipment makes photography more accessible to people with some disabilities, glossary, and Web resources.

–115–

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR267

978-0-596-52690-0

TR267

2007-001058

0-7897-3630-6

Digital photography; expert techniques, 2d ed.

How digital photography works, 2d ed.

Milburn, Ken. O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2007 387 p. $44.95 (pa) An award-winning photographer/digital artist/Photoshop expert begins this update of the 2004 edition for serious photographers by defining the buzzword “workflow” as “an integrated process of creating a finished photograph that starts with an idea and ends by being shown or passed on to other people.” Milburn’s core concept of nondestructive workflow refers to keeping retouching and special effects filters in separate layers within the same file. He emphasizes techniques to take the best possible shot to work with rather than focusing solely on Photoshop or the software alternatives described.

White, Ron. Que Publishing, ©2007 226 p. $29.99 (pa) A photojournalist for three decades, White has written a dozen books on digital photography, computers, and underground music. He offers digital camera owners a detailed, but accessible, explanation of the internal workings of the digital camera, arguing that a better understanding of the technical aspects of the equipment increases the users ability to use their cameras more effectively. Illustrated throughout with full-color photographs and diagrams. Revisions from the first to second edition are not stated.

TR267

How to photograph absolutely everything.

2006-037902

978-0-470-09583-6

Digital photography for 3D imaging and animation. (CDROM included) Ablan, Dan. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 314 p. $44.99 (pa) Digital photography plays a key role in 3D imaging and animation. In this accessible guide, Ablan (AGA Digital Studios) takes readers through each step of the 3D workflow. Coverage includes such topics as choosing the right camera, composing shots, mapping images, and creating panoramic environments. Color example images and screenshots accompany the text throughout. The companion DVD contains two hours of video training, royalty-free image files for practice, and demo versions of several software programs. TR267

0-321-49219-6

1-57990-973-6

Digital travel photography. Heller, Dan. Lark Books/Sterling, ©2007 128 p. $19.95 (pa) Professional travel photographer Heller offers general readers some basic tips on how to get better travel pictures with their digital cameras. A key tool used by the author throughout the text is associating an image with its attributes, and explaining those attributes in detail so that readers will know what to look for themselves when taking photos. Coverage includes an overview of digital travel photography, equipment basics and options, photographing people and places, and using extended exposures. Illustrated throughout with inspiring full-color photographs of scenes from around the world. TR267

2006-036645

978-0-470-09774-8

Flickr mashups. Wilkinson, David. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 419 p. $29.99 (pa) Launched in 2004, Flickr has become one of the top photo-sharing sites on the Internet. In this guide for programmers, Wilkinson describes a variety of ways to build Flickr “mashups”—software that interacts in some way with Flickr. Hands-on examples and exercises allow readers to test their skills. Full answers are provided in the appendix. All of the software used in the book is cross- platform. Wilkinson is a freelance technical consultant and programmer. TR267

2005-929038

2006-282114

0-596-52725-X

Pogue, David and Derrick Story. (The missing manual) O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2006 395 p. $29.99 (pa) To compensate for the lack of a manual accompanying version 6 of iPhoto image management software for the Macintosh, Pogue (the weekly New York Times tech columnist) and Story (a professional photographer) offer a crash course on digital photography and the features of this Apple software for editing, organizing, and sharing photos and QuickTime movie CDs. A neat new feature introduced is photocasting. The guide includes further online resources. TR267

2005-018013

1-57990-762-8

The Kodak’s most basic book of digital photography. Wignall, Jeff. (Kodak Books) Lark Books/Sterling, ©2006 95 p. $14.95 (pa) Who would ever have thought that a Kodak guide to photography would begin by listing never having to buy film again as a major advantage of digital cameras! After listing other advantages, the introductory-level guide cover the basics from camera types to taking, editing, and sharing images. Tables demystify the specifics of the resolution-megapixels relationship, and troubleshooting. TR267

0-321-31630-4

Nash editions; photography and the art of digital printing. Benson, Richard et al. Ed. by Garrett White. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 230 p. $50.00 Co-founded in 1990 by photographers Graham Nash (of rock music fame) and R. Mac Holbert, Nash Editions has provided fine art digital imaging and printmaking services to artists such as Horace Bristol, Eileen Cowin, David Hockney, and Maggie Taylor. Featuring around 180 color and b&w illustrations, this volume contains several essays tracing the history of the company and discussing its role in the development of digital fine art photography. In addition to the company’s founders, contributors include professor Richard Benson (Yale School of Art) and image preservation consultant Henry Wilhelm. TR267

2006-003354

978-0-471-77320-7

PC magazine digital SLR photography solutions.

0-672-32851-8

Fun with Photoshop Elements 4; foto-fakery for everyone. Grossman, Rhoda. Sams, ©2006 232 p. $24.99 Appropriate for the intermediate user, the 44 projects in this idea book illustrate Photoshop Elements techniques for transposing part of an image from one picture to another, manipulating faces, adding captions, applying artistic effects, and changing the contents of a sandwich. Color photos of the projects are provided, and the image files are available on the publisher’s web site.

Art Book News Annual 2008

978-0-7566-2644-0

iPhoto 6; the missing manual.

Canfield, Jon. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 206 p. $39.99 (pa) This guide to digital single-lens-reflex cameras and photography is for those just getting started. Canfield includes information on selecting a camera, but focuses on the common features in any brand and their advantages over a compact digital camera. He also discusses how to work with raw images in Photoshop, master controls, select and use lenses, and digital techniques, flash photography, filters and special effects, and editing. A resource list of websites, magazines, companies, and products is provided. Canfield is a teacher and author of photography books, and also writes for photography magazines. 2006-036753

2007-296625

Ang, Tom. DK Publishing, Inc., ©2007 384 p. $40.00 Ang presents a guide to photography that contains brief step-by-step instructions and tips on how to take pictures of anything, including people, landscapes and nature, animals, architecture, and events. He also discusses elements of photography in the introductory chapter (including how to choose a camera), and artistic expression and using photography for things such as scrapbooking, promoting a business, or selling items, as well as unique types like infrared imaging. Many color photos are shown, illustrating different techniques and versions of the same photo. Ang, the host of BBC TV’s A Digital Picture of Britain, has worked as a technical and picture editor on many magazines. He formerly lectured in photographic practice at the U. of Westminster, London, UK. TR267

The digital SLR guide; beyond point-and-shoot digital photography.

TR267

TR267

Grotta, Sally Wiener and Daniel Grotta. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 394 p. $29.99 (pa) After reviewing elements to consider when purchasing a digital single lens reflex camera and lenses, this guide explains the different digital file formats for photographs, the exposure of a photograph, lighting techniques, photo-editing tools, and color management. Hundreds of example color photos illustrate the results of changing settings on a camera.

–116–

TR267

2006-920620

0-471-74689-4

Photoshop CS2 for digital photographers only. Milburn, Ken and Doug Sahlin. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 327 p. $39.99 (pa) Written by and for professional digital photographers, this practical guide presents a streamlined, logical workflow for editing and enhancing images. Some of the tasks covered include getting initial client feedback, creating selections for localized editing, compensating for camera deficiencies, and preparing images for the Web or offset printing. Color photos and screenshots accompany the text throughout. Milburn teaches on-line courses, and Sahlin has co- authored two books on Photoshop. TR267

2006-280756

0-596-10158-9

Photoshop elements 4; the missing manual. Brundage, Barbara. O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2006 493 p. $39.95 (pa) Photoshop Elements may be a cool program, but the “manual” that comes with it is really a quick reference guide and its help files assume some familiarity with the software. With well-illustrated chapters focusing on each type of task involved in editing, organizing, and displaying digital photos, the author of Elements 3: The Missing Manual offers tips on the basics plus getting freebies from the Internet. Appendices cover the Organizer and Editor features menu-by-menu, installation and troubleshooting. Photoshop Elements 5 has come out since this guide’s publication. TR267

0-321-47673-5

The Photoshop Elements 5 book for digital photographers. Kelby, Scott. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 487 p. $39.99 (pa) Featuring full-color examples throughout, this resource for digital photographers explains how to use Adobe Photoshop Elements 5 to make photos look great. Coverage includes techniques and tricks for correcting color, repairing damage, removing unwanted objects, and more. The emphasis is on the practical side of image editing. Camera techniques and visual theory are not covered. A recognized Photoshop expert, Kelby is author of more than 37 books. TR267

978-0-321-47671-5

Photoshop Elements 5; for Windows. Carlson, Jeff and Craig Hoeschen. (Visual quickstart guide) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 401 p. $21.99 (pa) Seattle Times technology columnist Carlson and graphic designer Hoeschen present this accessible guide on the fundamentals of Photoshop Elements 5 for beginning and intermediate users. Fifteen chapters comprise concise step by step instructions for tasks that fall into categories such as creating a new image, working with layers and type, painting and drawing, printing, and employing creative techniques, among others. Black and white examples supplement the text. Useful keyboard shortcuts are provided in the index. TR267

0-321-48165-8

The Photoshop Elements 5 restoration & retouching book. Klowskowski, Matt. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 305 p. $34.99 (pa) Kloskowski (education and curriculum developer, National Association of Photoshop Professionals) provides step-by-step illustrated instruction on using Photoshop Elements (versions 3, 4, or 5) for restoring and retouching photographs. Chapters cove exposure and color issues; retouching eyes and mouths in portraits; enhancing the overall face; digital body shaping; fixing old photos that are too dark or too light; working with color, stains, and discolorations; and photograph rebuilding techniques. TR267

2006-102239

978-0-470-10086-8

Photoshop Elements 5 workflow; the digital photographer’s guide. Grey, Tim and Peter K. Burian. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 286 p. $34.99 (pa) Organized to follow a logical workflow, this practical guide for digital photographers of all skill levels explains how to optimize images using Photoshop Elements 5. All stages of image processing are covered, from the initial downloading and sorting through saving and preparing the edited versions for final output. Full-color examples accompany the text throughout. Grey is the author of a number of books on Photoshop, and Burian is a freelance photographer.

TR267

978-0-596-10099-5

Photoshop lightroom adventure; mastering Adobe’s nextgeneration tool for digital photographers. Aaland, Mikkel. O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2007 332 p. $39.99 (pa) Photo shoots on Iceland by a dozen photographers served as a field test for Lightroom 1.1, Adobe Photoshop software for streamlining the process of importing, processing, and sharing digital images. As an award-winning photographer/writer of guides including Shooting Digital: Pro Tips for Taking Great Pictures with Your Digital Camera (Sybex), Aaland provides a step-by-step tutorial for working with this latest version’s library, develop, slideshow, print, and Web modules and other non-traditional image management features. His co-adventurers discuss technical and aesthetic aspects of his original and altered images. TR267

978-0-596-52768-6

Practical color management. Tapp, Eddie. O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2007 150 p. $29.99 (pa) Aimed at digital imaging professionals and students, this text offers practical guidance for getting consistent color results from digital files. Sample topics include understanding key color management concepts, establishing a color management-friendly workflow, and calibrating and profiling devices. The material is based on Photoshop CS2, and is relevant to both Mac and Windows users. Full color illustrations accompany the text throughout. Tapp is Director of the Institute of Visual Arts in Maui. TR267

2006-029570

978-0-393-32914-8

Rick Sammon’s complete guide to digital photography 2.0. Sammon, Rick. W.W. Norton, ©2007 477 p. $39.95 (pa) This is a guide to using Adobe Photoshop Elements that is designed to meet the needs of those brand new to photography to those experienced with digital photography who simply need further guidance on the uses of the particular software. He discusses basic picture taking, digital editing, special digital effects and techniques, and other topics. The text is illustrated throughout with photographs from the authors own shooting assignments and screenshots showing how to use the Adobe Photoshop Elements. TR267

0-7357-1400-2

Welcome to Oz; a cinematic approach to digital still photography with Photoshop. (DVD included) Versace, Vincent. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 188 p. $44.99 (pa) Fine art photographer Versace seeks to impart his Photoshop skill-set to other photographers, tackling the material in relation to workflow and hoping to impart his own “cinematic approach” to digital still photography while covering light, gesture, shape, time, color, and the formula to mix color. The DVD contains 16-bit source files for editing practice (as well as 8-bit files for those with less powerful computers). TR465

2006-045061

1-931666-17-2

Photographs; archival care and management. Ritzenthaler, Mary Lynn and Diane Vogt-O’Connor. Society of American Archivists, ©2006 529 p. $84.95 Aimed at professional and volunteer staff at archives, libraries, museums, and other cultural heritage organizations, this manual explains how to best preserve and use photographs that have historical value. All aspects of photograph management are covered, from appraisal and accessioning through digital conversion and reference work. The focus is on the principle of provenance and the development of systems to organize, preserve, and access whole collections. The appendices cover supplies, workstations, funding sources, general help sources, and learning resources. TR575

2006-010244

978-0-8174-4227-9

Lighting and the dramatic portrait. Grecco, Michael. Watson-Guptill Pubns., ©2006 192 p. $29.95 (pa) In this collection of his work, photographer Michael Grecco also provides advice for portrait photographers, using his own as examples for specific techniques and lessons. He discusses equipment and format, lighting techniques, style issues, creativity and conceptualization, the subject/photographer relationship, and types of subject matter and includes diagrams of lighting setups and equipment that he used for a specific photo. He also explains the stories behind some of his shots, some involving celebrities and others of everyday people.

–117–

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR575

3-8327-9161-2

TR647

2006-921486

0-87070-390-0

Marc Hom portraits.

Douglas Gordon; timeline.

Hom, Marc. TeNeues Publishing Co., ©2006 —— p. $85.00 This big, beautiful volume (it’s 11x13.75″) presents full-page and some two-page b&w plates of very well-known people in the arts, dance, movies, and society taken by the gifted and creative portrait photographer Hom. The volume contains a brief preface by Hom, and a foreword by Lauren Bacall (both in English, French, Italian, and German). Not indexed.

Gordon, Douglas. Ed. by Klaus Biesenbach. Museum of Modern Art, NY, ©2006 296 p. $60.00 The exhibition at The Museum of Modern Art, New York (June-September 2006), featured film and video installations by Douglas Gordon (b.1966), as well as some of his key works in other media including text, photography, books, and his own body. In this catalog curator Biesebach provides a substantial essay describing and offering interpretation of the artist’s works, year by year. Full-page plates occupy most of the book, with video installations represented in multiple pages. A timeline, list of exhibitions, and bibliography round out the volume. The format is oversize: 10.5x10.5″.

TR590

2006-015421

978-1-57990-885-0

The complete guide to light and lighting in digital photography. Freeman, Michael. Lark Books/Sterling, ©2007 224 p. $29.95 (pa) The author of several titles on digital photography covers the major variables of the craft of lighting, from utilizing the various sources and types of lighting to showcase a subject to making in-camera adjustments to post-production manipulation techniques. The guide, aimed at both photography beginners and those switching from film to digital, includes ample illustrated examples, a glossary, and list o f resources. TR590

2006-930067

978-1-58428-198-6

Master lighting guide for commerical photographers. Morrissey, Robert. Amherst Media, ©2007 127 p. $34.95 (pa) Robert Morrisey is a commercial photographer who shoots for international advertising campaigns, catalogs, and television commercials. In this resource for professionals and motivated amateurs, he offers clear and detailed explanations of a number of lighting techniques used in commercial photography. The text is accompanied throughout by diagrams and example images in full color. Sample topics include creating inexpensive sets, using umbrellas outdoors, and lighting glass. TR590

978-1-58428-196-2

Professional filter techniques for digital photographers. Sholik, Stan. Amherst Media, ©2006 125 p. $34.95 (pa) In 11 chapters, professional commercial photographer Sholik discusses the best filters for digital photographers working in various conditions and seeking specific effects. The introduction and chapter one discuss digital filter basics and how to choose a camera filter system. The remaining chapters address the following types of filters: color-conversion, light-balancing, and color-compensating; polarizing; graduated; softening; neutral- density and contrast-control; enhancing; special-effects; black and white; infrared; and close-up. Each chapter explains choices of filter for both cameras and computer retouching. Color images and diagrams illustrate the effects of each filter. The appendix reviews concepts for understanding light and the relationship between f-stops and filter choice. TR620

2006-007735

978-0-8118-5641-6

Love hotels; the hidden fantasy rooms of Japan. Keasler, Misty. Chronicle Books, ©2007 71 p. $40.00 “Love” is a euphemism in this case for sex, as Keasler’s photos of fantasythemed rooms in the so-called love hotels show, and, to judge by the presence of shackles attached to beds, showers, and walls, S/M is popular fare for the rate-payers. Oversize format: 11.25x11.25″. Keasler is a photographer based in Texas. An essay on Japanese sexual mores is provided by Natsuo Kirino, a writer in Tokyo. Not indexed. TR645

3-8327-9159-0

Vertical New Yorkers. Hamann, Horst. TeNeues Publishing Co., ©2006 2006 p. $45.00 This collection contains b&w photographs of 100 strangers by photographer Horst Hamann who presents a cross-section of New Yorkers posing with their eyes closed. People from all walks of life were captured, such as firefighters, models, teachers, taxi drivers, actors, doctors, lawyers, and musicians, whom Hamann sees as possessing uniquely New Yorker qualities. The book measures 6.5x13.25″.

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR647

978-1-934536-00-1

Presence passing. Baldeck, Andrea. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2007 209 p. $75.00 Photographer/physician/musician Baldek offers the only text—a brief introduction—in this presentation of b&w photos selected from a body of work created over a 15-year period. Her work is in the collections of major museums and she has published nine other books. The unifying theme here is the visual evidence of impermanence, deterioration, and the passage of time as displayed in subjects that include buildings, towns, cars, and landscapes. About 190 images are presented full page in a 9.75x12″ format. TR647

978-0-8109-9316-7

Shawn Mortensen; out of mind. Mortensen, Shawn. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 220 p. $24.95 Among approximately 190 colorful portraits of celebrities— including Sophia Loren, Neil Young, Buzz Aldrin, and Ice Cube—Shawn Mortensen intersperses the occasional image of citizens of an entirely different world: Tibetan Monks, Zapatistas in Mexico, attendants of the 13th International HIV/AIDS Coalition, ghetto dwellers, Jamaican revelers, and an Apache Indian high school basketball team to name a few. The carefully juxtaposed images give equal respect to their subjects, while giving the viewer pause to explore the meaning of the volume’s subtitle, Out of Mind. Oversize: 9.5x11.25″. TR653

2006-921952

1-59711-025-6

Don’t kiss me; the art of Claude Cahun and Marcel Moore. Title main entry. Ed. by Louise Downie. Aperture Foundation Corp., ©2006 240 p. $45.00 Claude Cahun and Marcel Moore are the pseudonyms of French surrealist photographer Lucy Schwoob and her lover and collaborator Suzanne Malherbe. Downie (Jersey Heritage Trust, Great Britain) edits this collection of seven essays on the pair and approximately 500 of their b&w photographs, displayed about three to a page. The essays offer biographical and artistic analysis; discuss works such as Cahun’s `Héroïnes,’ fifteen monologues putting new voices to women from myth and literature; and describe their anti- fascist activities in German-Occupied Jersey, Great Britain during WWII. The photographs include many portraits of the two as well as fellow surrealists including André Breton and Jacqueline Lamba, as well as Cahun’s work in the theatre, still life, and other genres. The book concludes with art by Moore and lists of archives and manuscripts. This book is distributed by Distributed Art Publishers. TR653

2007-010231

978-0-393-06544-2

E.O. Hoppé’s Amerika; modernist photographs from the 1920s. Prodger, Phillip. W.W. Norton, ©2007 176 p. $49.95 After an introduction discussing the life and Modernist qualities of photographer E.O. Hoppé (a German native who emigrated to England), Prodger (history of photography, National Gallery of Canada) lets the artist’s photographs documenting all of America’s regions between 1919 and 1926 tell their own story. The b&w collection begins with close portraits of a Jew, a Black, and an immigrant in New York City, along with views from the Brooklyn Bridge and upper class Fifth Avenue. From there, Hoppé moves down the East Coast, into the Midwest, and finally to Hollywood, the Northwest, and the South, portraying industrial progress, pristine nature, farms, society, and architecture at each turn. The latest photographs depict the Acoma and Zuni Pueblos of New Mexico. Oversize: 9.5x11″.

–118–

TR655

2005-937185

0-7643-2409-8

TR660

2006-006275

978-0-8118-5098-8

1000 fences and gates.

Observations in an occupied wilderness; photographs.

Cryder, Jo. Schiffer Publishing Ltd., ©2006 152 p. $24.95 (pa) During her travels throughout the US, a California stock photographer added interesting gates and fences to her portfolio. Cyder’s photographs (some taken in pre-Hurricane Katrina areas), organized by material and places of special interest (e.g., the White House), illustrate diverse styles, functions, and ideas for homeowners and contractors. No resources or further readings are listed.

Falke, Terry. Chronicle Books, ©2006 120 p. $50.00 In each of Falke’s 71 photographs of the dramatic landscape of the American Southwest displayed here, at least one manmade object is part of the view. Construction at a Utah reservoir, an evaporating California pond, Texan tornado ruins, and a Nevada tree covered in shoes, are all used in full-size color plates to observe mankind’s engagement with nature and detachment from it. Two essays on the photographer and his subjects are included. No index is provided. Oversize: 12x10″.

TR655

2007-295934

1-931707-88-X TR660

Closely observed; photographs of the natural world. Baldeck, Andrea. U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2006 175 p. $49.95 Baldeck has traveled widely capturing the wonders of the natural world. Her stunning b&w close-ups of plants include flowers reminiscent of those painted by Georgia O’Keefe and common vegetation that appears as intriguing abstract patterns. Perhaps her detail orientation owes something to her also being a physician. The finely printed, landscape-formatted volume includes a visual index of thumbnail images of these 178 photographs. TR655

2005-013107

0-9747320-0-1

In search of peace. Khanfar, Yousef. Art Blanc, ©2006 137 p. $50.00 Khanfar, a Palestinian photographer based in London, has written an ode to peace composed of his superb landscape photos in juxtaposition to his short poems. The volume is oversize (11.25x11.75″); the photos are reproduced on full-page plates of excellent quality. Not indexed. TR655

2006-273892

978-0-321-26913-3

The real and the true; the digital photography of Pedro Meyer. Meyer, Pedro et al. New Riders Publishing, ©2006 272 p. $44.99 (pa) Pedro Meyer is a Mexico City-based photographer and creator/ curator of the ZoneZero website, a gallery-cum-online community for photographers. The book features portfolios of his photos of everyday and political life from South America to Africa and Asia, a Meyer family album, and critical essays by Meyer and other ZoneZero contributors. Photos bearing two dates indicate the date the photo was originally taken and when it was digitally altered. The title refers to the issue of whether a digital photograph represents an actual subject or brings together diverse elements that seek to convey a truth. TR659

2007-004345

978-1-56898-697-5

Architectural photography the digital way. Kopelow, Gerry. Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2007 142 p. $24.95 (pa) Intended for architects, this guide walks through the process of buying a digital SLR camera, taking photographs both inside and outside, selecting angles, lighting interiors, finding Photoshop Plug-ins for architectural photography, editing images, reproducing drawings and models, and submitting materials to magazines. Numerous color photographs are provided as examples. TR659

2007-274940

978-1-59228-313-2

L.L. Bean outdoor photography handbook, rev. ed. Rowinski, Jim and Kate Rowinski. The Lyons Press, ©2007 191 p. $22.95 (pa) For nature lovers who want to record their adventures on film, this guide offers practical advice on special concerns of outdoor photographers, such as changing lighting conditions, setting exposures and manipulating the image, handling equipment outdoors, selecting the right film for the subject, and dealing with distances. Techniques are illustrated with color photos on very page. This revised edition contains new material on digital photography, with chapters on digital technology and the digital camera, and capturing and sharing digital pictures. Jim Rowinski, a photography teacher, is the former director of fly fishing for L.L. Bean. Kate Rowinski is an author and catalog consultant.

2006-920616

0-471-78619-5

Outdoor photographer; landscape and nature photography with Photoshop CS2. Sheppard, Rob. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 379 p. $34.99 (pa) Aimed at serious landscape and nature photographers, this guide focuses on Photoshop CS2 as a set of tools for enhancing the artistic impact of images. Using the methods and workflow of Ansel Adams as a model, Sheppard explains how to make adjustments to overall tonalities and colors as well as look for local changes that need to be made and finish a photo by appropriately sizing and sharpening it. The text is accompanied throughout by color photographs and screenshots. Sheppard is editor of PCPhoto and Outdoor Photographer magazines. TR661

2006-009079

978-0-393-05160-5

America by the yard; Cirkut camera images from the early twentieth century. MacKay, Robert B. W.W. Norton, ©2006 216 p. $100.00 By augmenting his history of a particular type of camera with many examples, both momentous and quotidian, of its usage, MacKay has produced a fascinating piece of Americana. Cirkut cameras, which took panoramic photographs known as “yard-longs,” were used to record scenic vistas, epic events and group photos of conventioneers, workers, soldiers and students. The prints reproduced here, with many foldouts that show the photographs in their entirety, include such historic moments as the building of the Panama Canal, the crash of the dirigible Shenandoah, the 1908 Wellesley graduating class and a very early race at the Indianapolis speedway. MacKay, a collector of Cirkut camera panoramas, is the director of the Society for the Preservation of Long Island Antiquities. TR675

2007-006592

978-0-89236-903-4

Edward Weston’s book of nudes. Title main entry. Ed. by Brett Abbott. Getty Publications, ©2007 87 p. $39.95 The nudes, some of them juxtaposed with still lifes and landscapes, were originally part of a book the photographer and his biographer sought to have published in 1953, without success. This beautifully realized, oversized volume (10.75x11.5″) presents the complete project, including Newhall’s original essay. The b&w plates are full-page and of the best quality. Photos of the mock-up and short biographies of Weston and Newhall are included. Abbott is a curator of photography at the J. Paul Getty Museum in Los Angeles. TR680

2006-100748

978-0-8109-9290-0

Burning man; art in the desert. Nash, A. Leo. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 159 p. $29.95 Attendees at the yearly Burning Man festival in the Nevada desert erect a temporary city where partiers, performers, and artists mingle in numbers recently exceeding 40,000. The festival’s signature large artistic structures, burnable sculptures, and “art cars” are the subject of Nash’s 14 years worth of b&w Burning Man photographs. About 150 images are accompanied by text describing the inspiration for and experience of the art, as well as the feats of erecting, breaking down, and transporting each piece. Oversize: 11.75x8.5″.

–119–

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR681

2006-037850

978-0-06-115012-8

TR729

Artists in their studios; images from the Smithsonian’s Archives of American Art. Kirwin, Liza. HarperCollins, ©2007 191 p. $35.00 What an extraordinary, rich collection—a demonstration of how pictures can speak a thousand words. Like a privileged visit, the photos heighten our sense of each artist’s personality, work methods, and practical realities. Kirwin, curator of manuscripts at the Smithsonian’s Archives of American Art, and her assistant Joan Lord offer an intimate view of 75 important American artists from the late 19th century to the present. Each artist is presented in a two- page spread, the primary focus a photo of the artist in his or her studio, which is accompanied by brief text and other materials such as facsimiles of letters and sketches. Offering further enrichment is a section of transcriptions of letters and notes—personal, unfiltered writings, sparkling with feelings and ideas. TR681

0-295-98634-4

Milton Rogovin; the making of a social documentary photographer. Herzog, Melanie Anne. U. of Washington Press, ©2006 176 p. $30.00 (pa) Photographer Milton Rogovin (b. 1909) who dedicated his work to the goal of social justice by photographing, working people, the poor, the “forgotten ones.” Published in conjunction with the retrospective exhibition, Milton Rogovin: Photographer, at the Center for Creative Photography, this work biographically documents the work of Rogovin as it developed over the course of his career by reproducing 126 of his black and white photographs. The photographs are accompanied by a long essay by Herzog (art history, Edgewood College) on the life and work of Rogovin. TR681

0-939511-19-3

On land and on sea; a century of women in the Rosenfeld collection. Rosenfeld, Margaret L. Anderson. Mystic Seaport, ©2007 176 p. $50.00 Rosenfeld (women’s studies, U. of Delaware) searched through the close to one million b&w photographs of the yachting world by her father-inlaw Morris Rosenfeld and his sons (the collection is housed at Mystic Seaport Museum in Connecticut) to compile this collection of those depicting women. The subjects of the approximately 250 prints are not only female yachters but 1940s and 50s workers, nurses, caregivers, scientists, and patients on the Floating Hospital Emma Abbot. The book is oversize: 10.25x12.5″. TR683

978-1-933952-09-3

Closeup shooting; a guide to closeup, tabletop, and macro photography. Harnischmacher, Cyrill. Rocky Nook, ©2007 122 p. $24.95 In this attractive volume, Harnischmacher (German Booksellers Association Fotobuch-award winning photographer) discusses principles of close-up, tabletop, and macro photography. He advises photographers on choosing the right equipment, using natural and artificial lighting for different effects, employing strategies for sharper images (especially of live subjects), photographing in difficult weather and while traveling, taking product shots for advertisements, using close-up techniques under water, and building equipment. The abundant color images are used well to demonstrate the results of particular techniques and equipment. TR721

2007-020331

978-0-7603-2997-9

The art of the snowflake; a photographic album. Libbrecht, Kenneth. Voyageur Press, ©2007 156 p. $30.00 Libbrecht, a physicist at Caltech who has written on crystal growth, demonstrates his expertise in microphotography in this volume. Reproduced in color plates, some of them full-page, the photos depict individual snowflakes in all their exquisite beauty. Oversized: 11x12.25″. TR729

978-3-8327-9127-8

Africa. Poliza, Michael. TeNeues Publishing Co., ©2006 408 p. $125.00 This enormous picture book (it’s 11.75x14.75″) is filled with two-page color plates of Poliza’s photographs, many of them aerial, of the animals and landscapes of sub-Saharan Africa, forming a virtual safari for the reader at home. Poliza’s career, first in digital technology, then in travel and photography, is described in an introduction. The shutter speed, aperture, and focal length of each photo is noted. Not indexed.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-016968

978-0-8109-3084-1

America’s parks. Bourseiller, Philippe. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 379 p. $55.00 Published in an oversize format (11.5x14.75″) to lend even more grandeur to the scale of these sights, this volume contains full-page and two-page color photos by Bourseiller of national parks and monuments from the east to the west coasts of the United States. To maximize their impact, the photos fill the pages entirely; the names of the locations, with thumbnail images, are found in the back. There is a bibliography and two essays on the parks and their role in preserving the environment. Not indexed. TR755

2006-004390

978-1-57990-772-3

Complete guide to digital infrared photography. Farace, Joe. Lark Books/Sterling, ©2007 160 p. $24.95 (pa) Featuring hundreds of striking examples in both color and b&w, this guide introduces the principles and techniques of digital infrared (IR) photography. Coverage includes methods for capturing IR images directly using a digital camera as well as converting regular digital files into “virtual” IR images in b&w and color. The final section deals with the printing of IR images using ink jet printers. Farace is the author of about 20 books on photography and is a columnist for Shutterbug magazine. TR790

2006-922422

978-0-471-79834-7

Digital travel photography digital field guide. Busch, David D. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 236 p. $19.99 (pa) Photojournalist Busch (Scientific American, The Professional Photographer) presents this accessible guide offering tips to beginning and intermediate digital photographers on the best techniques for taking pictures while traveling. Introductory material helps readers choose and learn about their camera, plan what to bring, practice working with light, and understand other photography fundamentals. The remaining half of the book is devoted to 26 techniques ideal for specific effects and environments such as: animals and wildlife, portraits, landscape, water, street life, festivals, food, and light trail and infrared photography, among others. Each section includes practice exercises and examples in color. Concluding sections discuss photo storage and contain a glossary and suggested resources. TR790

2006-019100

978-0-393-06028-7

To the ends of the earth; adventures of an expedition photographer. Wiltsie, Gordon. W.W. Norton, ©2006 224 p. $35.00 Gordon Wiltsie has led and/or photographed more than 100 expeditions to the wildest places on earth, and his images have appeared in such magazines as National Geographic. In this richly illustrated volume, he offers a behind-the-scenes look at ten of his most memorable adventures. Vivid color photographs are accompanied by Wiltsie’s engaging descriptions of his experiences in settings as varied as Himalayan mountains, Antarctica, and the Amazon jungle. TR810

2006-050163

978-0-472-11549-5

Above the North; aerial photography of northern Michigan. Beaver, Marge. U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 126 p. $45.00 Aerial photographer Marge Beaver offers a birds-eye view of northern Michigan. Gorgeous color images depict the land and waters in all four seasons of the year. The only text is in brief captions, many of which give no indication as to location, and, regrettably, no map is supplied. Oversize: 11.75x10.25″. TR810

2006-100216

978-0-8109-9291-7

The new earth from above; 365 days. Arthus-Bertrand, Yann et al. Ed. by Nathalie Chahine et al. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 — p. $29.95 For each day of the year, Yann Arthus-Bertrand—with contributions from fellow photographers—depicts a different corner of the Earth in the stunning aerial photographs collected here. Capturing the often strange patterns formed from above by natural beauty as well as human architecture, society, industry, and waste, the color plates are complemented by a brief description or history of the site. In addition, twelve essays from conservation scholars consider the Earth’s present and future health in the face of poverty, globalization, and climate change, also addressing sustainability, biodiversity, energy, and the oceans.

–120–

TR819

2006-930066

978-1-58428-197-9

Master’s guide to wedding photography; capturing unforgettable moments and lasting impressions.

TR850

2007-920208

978-0-495-09572-9

Sight, sound, motion; applied media aesthetics, 5th ed.

Bell, Marcus. Amherst Media, ©2007 126 p. $34.95 (pa) A leading Australian wedding photographer shares his approach to creating emotive wedding images through building a relationship with the client, shooting from the heart, and producing master prints. Color photographs illustrate creative shots to take during the day, which moments to document, and how to capture shots without intruding on those moments.

Zettl, Herbert. Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2008 422 p. $113.95 Aimed at students considering a career in television or film, this textbook explains how the major aesthetic elements—light, color, space, time, motion and sound—are used in today’s electronic media. The fifth edition features new material on aspect ratios and inductive sequencing. Music examples are provided on a companion website. Zettl is former director of San Francisco State University’s Institute of International Media Communication.

TR820

TR858

2006-012013

0-8109-5497-4

0-321-30334-2

FSA; the American vision.

Encyclopedia of visual effects. (DVD included)

Mora, Gilles and Beverly W. Brannan. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 357 p. $85.00 In 1935 the US Farm Security Administration (FSA) sought to assemble a comprehensive pictorial record of America’s cultural and economic conditions during the Great Depression. The project, which continued into 1943, launched a group of young photographers, including Dorothea Lange, Walker Evans, Ben Shahn, Arthur Rothstein and Gordon Parks, who fanned out across the country to photograph ordinary people at work. This volume offers a new look at this collection of images, presenting 470 photographs, many of which have not been published before. Each photographer’s work is organized in a documentary series, followed by a gallery of his or her most notable images.

Allen, Damian and Brian Connor. (Apple pro training series) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 590 p. $59.99 (pa) Allen, a commercial artist and president of a visual effects and design and consultancy company, and Connor (Academy of Art U.), a senior compositor at Lucasfilm’s Industrial Light & Magic, are joined by visual effects experts from ILM and other companies to explain how to create visual effects using Shake, Motion, and Adobe After Effects. Preceding the encyclopedia section are three chapters on compositing fundamentals: keying, tracking, and 3D rendering. Presented alphabetically, the tips include exercises and discuss commercial techniques and effects used in blockbuster films, such as CG integration, modeling, animation, rotoscoping, lighting, and advanced blue screen keying techniques. Important and technically challenging techniques integrate procedures, tutorial footage, and parameters settings; other entries are described more generally. Color correction is not discussed in detail, and the book does not cover compositing theory. The DVD-ROM contains lesson files.

TR820

2006-031364

1-59714-057-0

Our people, our land, our images; international indigenous photographers. International Indigenous Photographers conference (2006: Davis, CA) Ed. by Hulleah J. Tsinhnahjinnie and Veronica Passalacqua. Heyday Books, ©2006 70 p. $27.95 (pa) This text is a product of a conference held in April 2006 at the U. of California, Davis, and the associated exhibit shown at the university’s C. N. Gorman Museum. The catalogue features 89 color and b&w photographs of Indigenous peoples by 26 international Indigenous photographers, accompanied by the artists statements about their work. Following an introductory essay by Passalacqua (curator, C.N. Gorman Museum), the photographs are grouped into sections focusing on the past, the present, and the future. TR820

2006-028597

978-0-8052-4243-0

Witness; one of the great foreign correspondents of the twentieth century tells her story; with 190 of her own photographs.

2007-014363

2006-103514

1-932907-26-2

Special effects; how to create a Hollywood film look on a home studio budget. Slone, Michael. Michael Wiese Productions, ©2007 228 p. $31.95 (pa) Aimed at amateur filmmakers, this practical guide explains how to create a variety of special effects on a tight budget. Experienced independent filmmaker Slone begins by describing the use of such physical tools as dry ice machines, fake glass, and stage blood. Digital techniques such as Blue Screen are covered in the second section. The volume concludes with some suggestions for setting up a home studio. Full color illustrations accompany the text throughout. TR860

2005-930223

0-672-32834-8

Create your own digital movies. (CD-ROM included)

Gruber, Ruth. Schocken Books, ©2007 255 p. $27.50 By the time she was assigned by Franklin Roosevelt’s Secretary of the Interior, Harold Ickes, to travel by ship with Jewish Holocaust survivors from Italy to the United States during World War II, Gruber had already been the youngest PhD in the world and an international correspondent for the New York Herald Tribune. In this memoir, she describes those experiences, especially focusing on the plight of the Jews during World War II and the sympathy it engendered in Gruber for the foundation of Israel. Some 190 photographs she took on her travels through Siberia, Alaska, Europe, Palestine, Israel, and North Africa complement the memoirs. TR850

TR858

978-0-452-28678-8

The filmmaker’s handbook; a comprehensive guide for the digital age, 3d rev. ed. Ascher, Steven and Edward Pincus. Plume, ©2007 817 p. $20.00 (pa) As the second edition of this book added coverage of video to the discussion of film, so this third edition now includes extensive discussion of digital technologies in order to provide video makers with guidance on the best tools and techniques for recording, editing, and displaying their work. The authors (who have both taught filmmaking at Harvard U.) provide advice for every stage and aspect of a video production, from understanding materials and equipment through the shoot itself and on to editing, production, and distribution. Distributed in the US by Viking Penguin.

Strayer, Pam. Sams, ©2006 167 p. $19.99 (pa) Intended for the home hobbyist, this tutorial provides practical advice on shooting home video and editing that video on Movie Maker, and walks through the best shots for crafting birthday, baby, vacation, sporting event, school play and family movies. The CD-ROM contains trial versions of Adobe’s Premiere Elements and SpiceFX packs for Movie Maker 2. TR860

2006-299020

978-0-596-10031-5

Digital video production cookbook; 100 professional techniques for independent and amateur filmmakers. Kenworthy, Chris. (O’Reilly digital studio) O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2006 191 p. $29.95 (pa) To help directors make their first short film or a low-budget feature film that lives up to their imaginative vision, the author borrows tricks of the trade from Hollywood. Following an introduction to the basics of equipment and editing software, he illustrates ways of creating such special effects as X-ray vision, time travel, faking night shots indoors, and aging. Kenworthy, who is associated with the Australian film industry, writes a special effects column for Computer Arts magazine.

–121–

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR860

2004-117992

TR897

0-7821-4403-9

Matchmoving; the invisible art of camera tracking. (CDROM included) Dobbert, Tim. Sybex, Inc., ©2005 273 p. $49.99 (pa) Dobbert, a matchmover who worked on Hellboy and Sin City, describes techniques in matchmoving, the process which aligns the perspectives of real images with computer generated additions. Coverage includes strategies for 2D tracking, 3D calibration, perspective matching, automatic tracking, set fitting, and troubleshooting, and offers tutorials for understanding matchmoving software and different types of cameras. The author intends this book for visual artists whose principle task is not matchmoving, as well as for 3D animation or compositing students whom he believes can gain a competitive advantage with knowledge of these techniques. The accompanying CD-ROM contains practice exercises, printable resources, and demos of boujou bullet, SynthEyes, and MatchMover Pro software. TR860

0-321-44576-7

Title design essentials; for film and video. (DVD-ROM included) Plummer, Mary. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 86 p. $39.99 (pa) In this illustrated instructional text, Plummer (an Apple Certified Trainer in Final Cut Pro, Motion, and Soundtrack Pro) gives aesthetic and technical advice on creating titles for video projects using computer editing and graphics design applications. She covers the use of drop shadows, outlines, and glows; enhancing text with color and gradients; working with basic animation; choreographing a title sequence; and creating project-based titles. The DVD-ROM contains QuickTime movies showing examples using video editing software. TR882

2006-023826

978-1-57886-506-2

Cameras in the classroom; educating the post-TV generation. Schoonmaker, Michael. Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 185 p. $19.95 (pa) For 13 years, Michael Schoonmaker (public communications, Syracuse U.) has been conducting video production workshops with children in grades K-12. In this accessible text for educators, parents, and researchers, he shares stories that illustrate the dynamics of videomaking in learning environments. Woven into these examples are content from children’s creative work, discussions with teachers, and excerpts from relevant literature. The volume is not indexed. TR886

2006-103305

1-931666-24-5

Film preservation; competing definitions of value, use, and practice. Gracy, Karen F. Society of American Archivists, ©2007 287 p. $56.00 (pa) Gracy discusses the field of film preservation in the US, including its theoretical, historical, and economic frameworks. She examines its history and connections to the motion picture industry, economics, and intellectual property issues, considers the impact of the separation between high and popular arts. Drawing from the work of Pierre Bourdieu, she then outlines a theoretical framework for her study and analyzes the process of preserving a film, how participants in the field define their work and institutions, and the concept of authority. Her methods are ethnographic, using fieldwork and interviews. Gracy edits The Moving Image, the journal of the Association of Moving Image Archivists. TR897

2006-284617

978-0-7821-4444-4

Flash 8. (CD-ROM included) Watrall, Ethan et al. (Savvy) Sybex, Inc., ©2006 530 p. $39.99 (pa) This covers the features and possibilities of the most popular design and elaboration tools on the market, serving as a reference to the art functions, interactivity, media options, and delivery modes, including pocket PCs. It covers basic illustration features and techniques, modifying visual assets, working with type and typography, developing movies and animation, creating interactive controls, working with objects and classes, audio basics, synchronizing audio with animations, video, publishing and exporting movies and creating Flash content for Windows mobile. This includes extensive coverage of the Timeline and ActionScript features, samples and code, illustrations, and a CD-ROM with trial versions of software, tutorials, graphics files and references.

Art Book News Annual 2008

2006-285246

0-596-10240-2

Flash 8 cookbook. Lott, Joey. O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2006 510 p. $44.99 (pa) Aimed at developers who already have a basic understanding of Flash, this text describes how to use the Flash IDE (authoring application) to build Flash animations and applications. Following O’Reilly’s Problem/Discussion/Solution Cookbook format, it contains 280 self- contained “recipes” for accomplishing various tasks. These include (for example) exporting animated GIF files, creating 3D objects, using slider controls, and building an image slideshow. Lott is co- author of Flash MX 2004 ActionScript Bible (Wiley). TR897

978-0-470-13113-8

Flash video for professionals; expert techniques for integrating video on the web. Larson, Lisa and Renée Costantini. Sybex, Inc., ©2007 362 p. $39.99 (pa) Intended for intermediate developers comfortable with ActionScript 2, this guide explains the details of encoding video into the Flash live video (FLV) format, planning a Flash video application for a client, and learning object-oriented programming for ActionScript 3. The authors review the basic code for playing a video in Flash, outline testing procedures, discuss playlist options and cue points, and explore video effects using filters and masks. TR897

978-0-321-42684-0

Inside LightWave v9. (DVD included) Ablan, Dan. New Riders Publishing, ©2007 722 p. $59.99 (pa) Animation software goes up yet another notch with this product, which has been updated to include new workflow processes and surfacing features along with improvements in rendering, lighting and camera angles. Practitioner and trainer Ablan works with a series of project tutorials and goes step by step to explain modeling and layout features, textures, lighting, three-dimensional cameras, motion, text and logos. He then concentrates on modeling still-life objects and gadgets, creating and developing characters, using node-based texturing, structuring bones and rigging, and putting particles and dynamic effects in motion. For the adept he includes compositing and post-processing features as well as advanced camera work and rendering. The accompanying DVD contains hours of video training tutorials that work with the text’s projects. TR897

2006-038459

978-0-470-10260-2

Introducing character animation with Blender. (CD-ROM included) Mullen, Tony. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 478 p. $39.99 (pa) No matter how much more complex animation characters become and no matter how much such characters become more, well, abundantly human (or whatever species you have in mind), somehow this opensource three-dimensional modeling and animation software seems to be keeping up. Mullen (Tsuda College, Tokyo) understands that the characters may be complex but the knowledge of the reader may be fairly simple, so he goes step-by-step through the complex process of building a character from scratch, including manipulating mesh modeling tools and mastering organic modeling, fashioning skin and hair, creating realistic clothing, creating lip movements that are synchronous with sound, and using interpolation curves and keyframes efficiently. He also evaluates other software and formats and includes a tasty list of resources for further reading and learning along with an array of samples and tips. The result is supportive without being obtrusive, creating a combination resource guide and tutorial. TR897

2006-006348

1-58450-485-4

Introduction to 3D graphics & animation using Maya. (CD-ROM included) Watkins, Adam. Charles River Media, ©2006 453 p. $49.95 (pa) Watkins (computer arts, U. of the Incarnate Word) explains the fundamentals of 3D using Maya, for students, designers, modelers, animators, texture artists, and those new to 3D graphics. He discusses modeling, UV mapping, texturing, rendering, and animation. Each chapter explains the theory behind the concept and walks through step-by-step tutorials and demonstrations. The CD-ROM contains full-color images of those in the book in addition to project files.

–122–

TR897

1-897177-33-X

Learning Autodesk Maya 8; foundation, a hands-on introduction to key tools and techniques. (DVD-ROM included)

2006-530878

0-672-32761-9

Macromedia Flash professional 8 unleashed. Vogeleer, David et al. Sams, ©2006 840 p. $49.99 (pa) The latest release in the Flash family of software, Macromedia Flash Professional 8 helps developers and designers to create rich Internet applications. This handbook for intermediate to advanced users covers everything from the basic core of the program to its newest and most powerful features. Previous experience working with Flash is not a requirement. An ActionScript Reference Guide is found at the back of the volume. Vogeleer (Ocean Systems Engineering) has been working in Flash since version 4. TR897

978-0-470-05657-8

Maya 8; at a glance. (CD-ROM included) Maestri, George. John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 217 p. $29.99 (pa) Intended for Maya beginners, this guide introduces the NURBS tools for modeling organic shapes, polygonal models for game animation, textures for the models, lighting and rendering features, and animation tools. Each chapter ends with illustrated tutorials. The CD-ROM contains Maya personal learning edition and source files for the tutorials. TR897

978-0-321-47675-3

Maya 8; for Windows and Macintosh. Robinson, Morgan and Nathaniel Stein. (Visual quickstart guide) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 532 p. $34.99 (pa) With a wealth of b&w screenshot illustrations accompanying clear instructions, this practical guide helps beginning- to intermediate-level users get up-and-running with Maya 8. Compatible with both Windows and Macintosh operating systems, this high-end 3D graphics program is widely used in the film, television, and game industries. Although prior 3D knowledge is not required, it is assumed that the reader is familiar with graphics software packages. The authors are animators at Anzovin Studio. TR897

2006-031539

2006-101053

978-0-470-10740-9

Maya; professional tips and techniques.

Title main entry. (Official Autodesk training guide) Sybex, Inc., ©2006 627 p. $69.99 (pa) Covering both Windows and Macintosh platforms, this official training guide for 3-D animators uses a series of tutorials to teach the basic tools and techniques of Autodesk Maya 8 software. Production images from the Sony Pictures Animation Inc. feature film Open Season are used throughout as illustrative examples. An accompanying DVD-ROM contains lesson support files for learning Maya as well as video interviews with animation artists who worked on the film and Sketchbook Pro 1.1.1 software. TR897

TR897

1-58450-440-4

Maya character modeling and animation; principles and practices. (CD-ROM included) Flaxman, Tereza. Charles River Media, ©2007 455 p. $49.95 (pa) Flaxman (Film and Animation School of the Rochester Institute of Technology) instructs beginning- to intermediate-level designers and 3D artists in the principles of 3D character modeling and animation using Maya software. The first part of each chapter discusses “software-independent” animation principles. This is followed by one or more Maya tutorials which lead the reader through the steps for a specific task, and a challenge assignment concludes each lesson. The nine chapters, supported by b&w images, cover topics including: understanding preproduction and the fundamentals of computer animation; modeling, texturing, rigging, and animating a simple character; NURBS modeling and path animation with dynamics; and working with facial expression, among others. The appendix challenges readers to create their first Maya scene, and the CD-ROM contains further tutorials.

Lanier, Lee. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 221 p. $39.99 (pa) Maya is a popular integrated 3-D software suite from Autodesk. Aimed at students, hobbyists, and professionals with a working knowledge of Maya, this handbook provides a wealth of practical tips and techniques that can help them streamline workflow and improve results. Full color illustrations accompany the text throughout. Sample scenes, shading networks, QuickTime movies, HDR files, and texture bitmaps are found on the CD-ROM. Lanier is a 3D animator and director who has worked on such films as Shrek and Mortal Kombat. TR897

2004-117988

0-7821-4345-8

Maya; secrets of the pros, 2d ed. (CD-ROM included) Kundert-Gibbs, John et al. Sybex, Inc., ©2005 279 p. $49.99 (pa) For advanced hobbyists and professionals, Kundert-Gibbs (digital production arts, Clemson U.) et al. provide a completely rewritten volume on Maya with all new chapters in this edition. The book covers workflow, technique, and creative problem solving, in addition to features, and is usable for all versions of the program. Chapters, by authors who work at film studios and universities, explain creating garments using Maya Cloth, rendering, creating camera motion, image- based lighting, fundamentals of 3D work, the Hair system, dynamics, the noise function, and advanced modeling. Strategies are applicable to other 3D packages besides Maya. The CD-ROM contains all the animations, scripts, source code, and support files for the tutorials. TR897

2006-101152

978-0-470-11133-8

Maya visual effects; the innovator’s guide. (CD-ROM included) Keller, Eric. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 350 p. $39.99 (pa) Aimed at busy design professionals who already possess a basic understanding of Maya, this practical guide explains how they can use that suite of tools in innovative ways to create a variety of special effects. The first seven chapters contain exercises that teach techniques for problemsolving using Maya Complete version 8. The final chapter explores additional features that come with Maya Unlimited. The CD-ROM contains Maya Personal Learning Edition as well as scene files and beginning and ending files for every project in the book. Keller is a professional animator working in film, television, and scientific visualization. TR897

2006-036520

1-58450-478-1

Practical Poser 7. (CD-ROM included) Tyler, Denise. Charles River Media, ©2007 488 p. $49.95 (pa) In this updated reference for intermediate and advanced Poser users, Tyler describes features such as creating and customizing clothing, characters, and textures; lights and cameras; preparing photographs; custom faces; adding hair; and deciphering and building materials. Added to this edition are topics such as joint parameters, animation, new morphing features, and enhanced texture creation. The book assumes that users have read the Poser 7 Reference Manual and Tutorial Manual. The CDROM contains images and files for the tutorials, and some of the beginning material from the previous edition is also present. Tyler is the author of several books on computer graphics and web development, including Practical Poser 6. TR899

0-321-47381-7

Adobe digital video how-tos; 100 essential techniques with Adobe Production Studio. Ozer, Jan. Adobe Press, ©2007 244 p. $29.99 (pa) One hundred short lessons on Adobe Production Studio are presented here for videographers and filmmakers who want to improve their video’s quality by using the suite’s integration features, or simplify workflow and use video-related tools. The book assumes a basic working knowledge of all the programs in the suite, edits using Adobe Audition, and outputs using Adobe Encore DVD. It covers choosing a preset in Premiere Pro, customization, Adobe Bridge for going through content, and integration options. Other topics include perfecting video quality, multi-camera production, special effects, transitions and titles, slide shows, and working with audio. Ozer works with digital video and has written several books on the topic.

–123–

Art Book News Annual 2008

TR899

978-1-933952-02-4

TR899

Color management in digital photography; ten easy steps to true colors in Photoshop. Hinkel, Brad. Rocky Nook, ©2007 105 p. $29.95 (pa) An experimental photographer/software designer presents a step-by-step approach to the frequent stumbling block of color management. Based on his experience teaching digital photography at the Rocky Mountain School of Photography and elsewhere, Hinkel offers tips on getting a good monitor and printer, understanding color spaces (beyond selecting the default setting), and adjusting colors for basic and advanced levels of printing. Distributed by O’Reilly Media. The ISBN is 978-1-933952-02-06 per the CiP, but ends in -04 on the backcover. TR899

0-321-50265-5

Final Cut Pro 6. (DVD-ROM included) Weynand, Diana. (Apple pro training series) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 631 p. $54.99 (pa) Part of the official curriculum of the Apple Pro Training and Certification Program, this text teaches the fundamental techniques of video editing using Final Cut Pro 6. Each of 14 chapters is a self-contained lesson aimed at beginning to intermediate users. Tasks covered include finishing the rough cut, refining clip duration, capturing footage, mixing audio tracks, and applying filters. Project files needed to complete the lessons are found on the accompanying DVD-ROM. TR899

978-0-321-50912-3

Final Cut Pro 6; beyond the basics. (DVD-ROM included) Wohl, Michael. (Apple Pro training series) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2008 678 p. $54.99 (pa) Color graphics complement this reference on Apple’s Final Cut Pro 6, which adheres to the curriculum for the Apple Certified Pro exam. Each section teaches a specific task designed to give users versed in basic procedures the ability to fine tune their video editing projects. The accompanying DVD-ROM provides the teaching software to complete tutorials described in the book. TR899

TS171

2006-035070

978-4-7700-3040-5

Origins; the creative spark behind Japan’s best product designs. Hagiwara, Shu. Photography by Masashi Kuma. Trans. by Philip Price. Kodansha International, ©2006 111 p. $34.95 This translated volume showcases 40 modern Japanese-designed everyday products in line with traditional Japanese aesthetics. Based on interviews with the designers about their inspirations, a Tokyo freelance design director supplies commentary to the full-page color photos by a noted Japanese photographer of such well-designed products as Toyota’s Prius, Sori Yanagi’s Butterfly Stool (in New York’s Museum of Modern Art), Isamu Noguchi’s “lighting sculptures” fashioned after traditional lanterns, and Sweet (dessert, not “desert”-colored cell phones for teenage girls). The book concludes with profiles of the designers. 2007-923000

978-0-89689-543-0

Cassidy, Kyle. Krause Publications, ©2007 208 p. $30.00 (pa) In the summer of 2006, photographer Cassidy traveled the US photographing gun owners in their homes. The subjects of the 100 full-page portraits are as varied in age and lifestyle as they are in their reasons for owning one or many guns—among them fun, competition, professional necessity, protection against criminals, protection against the government, nostalgia, investment, and “they make a nice lamp.” Oversize:12x9.25″. TS729

0-321-50940-4

2006-049645

978-0-929975-38-2

Jewelry handbook; how to select, wear & care for jewelry.

Motion graphics and effects in Final Cut Studio 2. (DVDROM included) Spencer, Mark and Jem Schofield. Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 612 p. $54.99 (pa) This guide for editors and designers details the features of Final Cut Studio, LiveType, and Motion for use in creating motion graphics. Sixteen lessons cover practical techniques for adding professional- quality titling, motion graphics, and other effects to projects. These include creating a DVD menu, and compositing, with tips on animation, 3D, manipulating video, keying, paint, and audio. A basic familiarity with Mac OS X operating system and Final Cut Pro is assumed. The DVD-ROM contains lesson and media files. Spencer, an Apple Certified Trainer, is a producer, editor, teacher, and writer. Schofield, an Apple Certified Master Trainer, is a producer and creative director who teaches and consults on production and post- production.

Art Book News Annual 2008

MANUFACTURES & HANDICRAFTS (includes JEWELRY, TEXTILES)

Armed America; portraits of gun owners in their homes.

Torelli, Joe. (Apple Pro training series) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 188 p. $29.99 (pa) After reviewing Apple’s Final Cut Pro user interface, this slim guide presents one method of editing simple voiceovers for a news broadcast and a fast method for putting a news package together. Color screenshots illustrate how to log tapeless media, capture videotape, view media with Final Cut Server, add effects, and deliver the finished story from a remote location.

We're always delighted to hear from our readers. Contact us at (503) 2819230 or [email protected].

Gary, Brian et al. (Apple pro training series) Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 138 p. $29.99 (pa) Built expressly for those who use video cameras, build media into websites or convert media for use in other devices such as cell phones and wide-screen high definition TV, this software is also popular because it is a relatively inexpensive way to manipulate media. However, many users do not have the time or skill to study the software thoroughly and discern all its features. Endorsed by the manufacturer for use in its training centers, this works as a first reference for those who need to get the job done at the time and then do more research, so it centers on stepby-step directions for specific needs, including getting started and locating features, exporting and editing movies, creating interactive movies, and delivering movies. It also includes appendices on Codec Central, Internet resources, the quick start process and preferences so you can set up your workflow for the next movie.

TS534

978-0-321-51423-3

Final Cut Pro 6 for news and sports quick-reference guide.

TR899

0-321-44248-2

QuickTime Pro quick-reference guide.

Newman, Renée. International Jewelry Pub., ©2007 156 p. $19.95 (pa) Newman is a respected gemologist and author of eight guides on gems and jewelry. She presents a practical, visual guide for general readers and professionals on selecting jewelry that enhances an individual’s appearance while suiting his/her lifestyle and budget. Topics addressed include the benefits and drawbacks of various setting styles, mountings, chains and metals such as gold, silver, platinum, palladium, titanium, tungsten and stainless steel. Illustrated throughout with b&w and fullcolor photographs and diagrams. TS1767

2006-100802

978-0-393-73224-5

Textiles in America, 1650-1870; Montgomery, Florence M. W.W. Norton, ©2007 412 p. $55.00 The subtitle reads as follows: A dictionary based on original documents, prints and paintings, commercial records, American merchant’s papers, shopkeepers’ advertisements, and pattern books with original swatches of cloth. This volume surveys textiles in American homes from colonial times to 1870, drawing from diverse primary sources to show real samples when possible, as well as numerous illustrations of the furnishings in entire rooms. Text illuminates the importance of imported textiles in early America, also discussing textiles for period rooms and furnishing practices in both England and America. Montgomery was consultant for textiles at the Metropolitan Museum of Art. The book is oversize: 9x10″.

–124–

TT9

2007-003658

978-0-313-33507-5

Jewelrymaking through history; an encyclopedia. Hesse, Rayner W. (Handicrafts through world history) Greenwood Press, ©2007 220 p. $55.00 Featuring photographic illustrations throughout (mostly in b&w), this volume provides a general overview of jewelry and jewelry-making around the world from ancient times to the present day. It touches on a diverse assortment of topics and does not attempt to be comprehensive in coverage. A sampling of the 63 entries: Celtic jewelry, diamond cuts, hair combs, Mexican silver jewelry, rhodium, and watches. Hesse is an appraiser, auctioneer, and owner of an antiques and collectibles store in Hartsdale, New York. TT25

2003-023184

978-0-8018-8752-9

The artisan of Ipswich; craftsmanship and community in colonial New England. (reprint, 2004) Tarule, Robert. Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2004 155 p. $25.00 (pa) Historian and woodworker Tarule describes the work and world of Thomas Dennis, who emigrated to America from England in 1663, settled in the Massachusetts village of Ipswitch, and set up shop as a joiner making furniture. The account pivots on the making of a single chest, which, along with much of Dennis’ work, is considered among the best of the period. This is a paperback reprint of the 2004 cloth edition. TT750

2006-100691

978-0-313-33548-8

Needlework through history; an encyclopedia. Leslie, Catherine Amoroso. (Handicrafts through world history) Greenwood Press, ©2007 236 p. $55.00 Leslie (history of costume, history of textiles, fashion merchandising, and needle arts, Kent State U.) presents an encyclopedia of the history of needlework. It covers a variety of techniques from around the world, such as running stitch and mirrorwork, general topics such as knitting and cross-stitch, traditions, and countries, from those in Africa to North America. Some b&w photos are included, and some topics have been excluded, such as weaving and plain sewing. The book is aimed at general readers and practitioners. TT819

2007-000071

978-0-275-99246-0

The close-knit circle; American knitters today. Wills, Kerry. (American subcultures) Praeger, ©2007 141 p. $39.95 Journalist Wills, who is a member of the unlikely subculture of avid knitters, expands the consciousness of those of us not similarly gifted and explains how punks, executives, college students and others who wish to change the world for the better have discovered this time-honored art to be a logical way to do so. She finds that a yearning for the simpler domesticity of the past links up with activism (tree cozies knitted to deter developers), altruism (shawls for cancer patients and layettes for the poor) and creativity within context (laptop covers and nifty little bags for cell phones). She explores the new feminism, the ever-present baby boomers seeking their spirits and the emotive impact of the hand-made, along with the benefits of Internet communities and blogs.

FOOD SCIENCE TX553

WAR, THE MILITARY U37

978-87-7934-162-3

Krigskunst og kanoner/Kriegskunst und Kanonen; 2v. Bengedans, Johannes. Ed. by Hans Blosen and Rikke Agnete Olsen. Aarhus University Press, ©2006 436 p. $83.95 Published in an oversized format (9.75x13.75″), this two-volume work presents a full facsimile, transcription, and Danish and German translations of an unusual manuscript, written c.1450 on the art of war and the use of cannons by an engineer affiliated with the Danish court (the manuscript is AM 374 fol. in the Arnamagnaean Collection at the U. of Copenhagen). A description of the manuscript, discussion of the contents, and full glossary of terms is included. All materials are in both Danish and German (only). Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Company. U850

978-0-906094-52-5

Medieval Islamic swords and swordmaking; Kindi’s treatise on On Swords and their Kinds . Hoyland, Robert G. and Brian Gilmour. E.J.W. Gibb Memorial Trust, ©2006 216 p. $27.50 Known as the philosopher of the Arabs, Yaqub ibn Ishaq al-Kindi first appears in Baghdad about 820 AD, where he served the caliph. He is thought to have died about 860. Among his many treatises on philosophical and practical matters, especially ideas from foreign lands, was one on the different kinds of swords and how they are made. Hoyland (Middle East studies, U. of St. Andrews) and Gilmour (archaeology and the history of art, U. of Oxford) present the text in Arabic with facing pages of English, comment on it, discuss descriptions of swords in contemporary poetry, and append two similar texts and photographs of the manuscripts. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company. UA26

2007-012423

978-0-8166-4953-2

America town; building the outposts of empire. Gillem, Mark L. U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 350 p. $24.95 (pa) Gillem (architecture and landscape architecture, U. of Oregon) examines the imperial architectural landscapes that result from the spatial requirements of garrisoning America’s soldiers around the world, looking at the design practices, institutional policies, and actual projects that have contributed to the creation of “America Towns,” spatial recreations of American suburbs in far flung places around the globe. In addition to discussing issues familiar to critics of American empire—land pollution, “Hooker Hills,” and other sociocultural problems associated with global American bases—he discusses how “auto-focused, abundantly paved, widely spaced, extensively lawned, increasingly franchised, clearly segregated, and haphazardly ordered” planning is often exported, clashing with local planning and design practices and ironically leading to compounds that are increasingly difficult to defend. He also offers more focused case studies of US Air Force bases in Italy, South Korea, and Japan.

PUBLISHING, BOOK ARTS & COLLECTING Z4

2006-102104

978-1-4051-2765-3

A companion to the history of the book. 2006-030013

978-1-59463-018-7

Twinkie, deconstructed; my journey to discover how the ingredients found in processed foods are grown, mined (yes, mined), and manipulated into what America eats. Ettlinger, Steve. Hudson Street Press, ©2007 282 p. $23.95 For consumers who have wondered about multisyllabic ingredients in processed foods, a New York author who has appeared on the Food Network and worked as a chef demystifies them. Drawing on interviews with industry professionals, Ettlinger reveals that these snack cakes and other popular products are concocted from byproducts of chlorine bleaching, gypsum mining, petroleum processing, and other chemicals also used in non-food products—which explains the Department of Homeland Security’s role in food supply protection.

Title main entry. Ed. by Simon Eliot and Jonathan Rose. (Blackwell companions to literature and culture; 48) Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 599 p. $149.95 The history of the book is a relatively new discipline that looks at books as historical artifacts as well as carriers of literary texts. It considers not just printed volumes, but any texts that have been reproduced and distributed by any means—clay tablets as well as manuscripts. Here scholars from various humanities set out the fundamentals of the field: methods and approaches, periodicals and other book-like entities, and issues. A long section also surveys the history of the material text, from the world before the codex, the book beyond the West, and the codex in the West since 400.

–125–

Art Book News Annual 2008

Z43

2004-116540

0-7641-5820-1

Z675

The bible of illuminated letters; a treasury of decorative calligraphy. Morgan, Margaret. Barron’s Educational Ser., ©2006 256 p. $24.99 This generously illustrated, small format (6.5x8″) guidebook presents step-by-step instructions for recreating illuminated alphabets from six historical periods, including the Celtic, Gothic and Romanesque. Diagrams for upper- and lower-case letters are accompanied by ideas for borders and decorations. The guide also includes full instructions for gilding. Morgan, a professional calligrapher and associate of the Calligraphy and Lettering Arts Society, gives advice about adapting illuminated letters to create a personal style. Z49

2007-002217

978-0-8014-4586-6

The iron whim; a fragmented history of typewriting. (reprint, 2005) Wershler-Henry, Darren. Cornell U. Press, ©2007 331 p. $29.95 Now that the age of the typewriter has come and gone, Wershler-Henry (communications, Wilfrid Laurier U.) argues not only that its ghost still haunts us, but that it has always haunted. Like reporting fleeting sightings of that ghost, he looks at the archaeology of typewriting, first impressions, dictation, typewriting as discipline, speed, and typewriting after the typewriter. Z106

978-1-85182-985-9

The medieval manuscripts of Christ Church Cathedral, Dublin. Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond Gillespie and Raymond Refaussé. Four Courts Press, ©2006 192 p. $65.00 Beginning in the 1170s, the Augustinian cathedral priory at Christ Church in Dublin commissioned, collected, and used manuscript materials in its everyday life, thus creating a series of codices and deeds ranging from the 12th-century Martyrology to the 16th-century Books of Obits. Seven Irish historians, archivists, and scholars of literature place a selection of these manuscripts in their cultural and social context. Distributed in the US by ISBS. Z116

2005-035900

Book design.

2007-017038

978-0-8108-5921-0

Title main entry. Ed. by Joan M. Benedetti. Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 312 p. $45.00 (pa) This attractive volume contains a wealth of thought-provoking material on the many sides and changing circumstances of art museum libraries. The 16 sections define topics such as reader services, access and security, institutional archives, working with volunteers, and solo librarianship, with numerous individual articles on each topic, often based on the author’s personal experience. A separate section contains a survey of 15 art museum libraries, each with a small photo, a description, and statistics on such facts as the number of workers, the number of visitors, who the librarian reports to, special collections, the collections management system, and cataloging utilities, creating a handy resource for current trends for this specialized library type. Appendices provide lists of professional associations and sample documents. Benedetti served as a librarian at the Los Angeles County Museum of Art Research Library and the Craft and Folk Art Museum Library, Los Angeles. Z733

2006-042208

978-1-893663-19-0

Exploring the Bancroft Library; the centennial guide to its extraordinary history, spectacular special collections, research pleasures, its amazing future & how it all works. Title main entry. Ed. by Charles B. Faulhaber and Stephen Vincent. Signature Books, Inc., ©2006 190 p. $39.95 Celebrating the centennial of the acquisition of the Bancroft collection by the U. of California, Faulhaber (Spanish and Bancroft Library, U. of California, Berkeley) and Vincent, a writer and editor, compile an overview of the collection. Curators describe the holdings, including the Western Americana, Latin Americana, and Pictorial Collections; rare books and literary manuscripts; History of Science and Technology Program; University Archives; Tebtunis Papyri; Mark Twain Papers and Project; and Regional Oral History Office. Scholars, students, and artists discuss their work at the library, and its research and publication programs are detailed. Photos and facsimiles of some of the manuscripts are included. Highlights of the holdings are also listed. No index is provided. Z1033

2006-019887

978-0-8109-9299-3

Miniature books; 4,000 years of tiny treasures.

978-0-8109-9220-7

Haslam, Andrew. Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 256 p. $29.95 Haslam (communication design, Central Saint Martins College of Art and Design, London) presents a reference text for design students and professionals examining the art of book design. Coverage includes the origins and definitions of the book; how a book is created; the roles of the publishing industry; basic approaches to book design; aspects of the typographic palette, including format, defining the text area and constructing a grid, typographic arrangement, and type size and typeface; how type and image are used in a variety of ways to communicate a message to the reader within books and on covers and jackets; and aspects of the manufacture process, including preproduction, paper and paper engineering, printing, and binding. Illustrated throughout with b&w and color diagrams and photographs. Z246

2006-100603

Art museum libraries and librarianship.

Bromer, Anne C. and Julian I. Edison. Harry N. Abrams, ©2007 215 p. $40.00 Published in tandem with an exhibition at The Grolier Club, New York, being held from May 15 to July 28, 2007, this large volume features miniature books produced throughout history. Bromer (bookdealer/publisher of miniature and related books) and Edison (editor, Miniature Book News) trace the history of this genre from medieval illuminated manuscripts to quirky modern versions including tiny nested books and propaganda tracts. Notable features include an introduction by the late Stanley Marcus (of Nieman-Marcus) who published and collected minibooks, some 260 full-color illustrations, resources for finding these tiny treasures, and gilt-edged pages.

978-0-470-00839-3

Meggs; making graphic design history. Title main entry. Ed. by Rob Carter et al. John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 258 p. $65.00 Selected writings, lectures, and of course graphics document the life and work of graphic designer, educator, and author Philip Meggs (1942-2002). His A History of Graphic Design was the first such study of the field. Colleagues, friends, family members, and admirers introduce the collection with personal accounts. There is no index. Z246

2006-031370

978-1-56898-687-6

Typographic systems. Elam, Kimberly. Princeton Architectural Pr., ©2007 159 p. $19.95 (pa) Elam (graphic and interactive communication, Ringling School of Art and Design) explores in detail eight major structural frameworks used in typography systems—axial, radial, dilatational, random, grid, transitional, modular, and bilateral. Student work and professional examples are included throughout the text to illustrate the concepts. For practicing graphic designers, educators, and students.

Art Book News Annual 2008

Art Book News Annual is a publication of Book News Inc., Portland, Oregon. We’re always delighted to hear from readers. Contact us at [email protected] or (503) 281-9230.

–126–